《Nurarihyon in DxD》 Chapter 1 – The Beginning of the Night RaizarP This is DxD fic with MC reincarnated as a Youkai. This will be R18 fanfic with Male Main Character! Well, expect lots of sex scenes and harems because this is DxD. My other series update will be the same as always, so don''t worry about it and enjoy the new fanfiction! I''ve always made a yuri novel, but this time I want to write a male MC with this fanfic~ Expect a daily update, but expect a sudden 1 chapter in 2 days. As you know, my main series is updated daily~ Well, enjoy the chapter! Now, I will tell you about the beginning of a reincarnation story. Usually, it was because the main character of a novel got hit by a truck. Or there is a story where the main character had drowned in the river and woke up in a world of cultivation as a bullied young master of a sect to kick the other young master ass. Well, my story was different from those guys. I started my carrier as a street magician and got a bit of fame. Then I die because I tried to imitate a certain magician act to stop a bullet with my mouth. I thought that I had something like a superpower to take a bullet into my mouth. I miscalculated something, I didn''t use a metal plate that the magician use in his act. What a moron, right? But that was something fortunate. Why, you ask? Because I am now sitting, or floating inside a dark space with nothing but darkness around me. This trope is so clich¨¦ that I know what will happen next. "Indeed, as expected of you." A booming voice came from behind me and made me startled. I tried to look behind but to no avail, I can''t move. Or rather, I don''t know if I moved because I have no sight and sense. "Oho, let me fix it for you." Said the voice. Unlike earlier, she now had a soothing voice like a voice actor that I often heard in anime or er- forget that. In an instant, I can see a figure in front of me. The figure has a voluptuous figure that can turn every man crazy. Her wavy silver hair flow down until it reached her butt and more importantly. She didn''t wear anything!! That made her well-curved body and F-Cup breast shown to me. That amazing breast, can I tou- "No! Bad thought!" I shouted out loud to cleanse my mind from a bad thought that plagued me but I never expected that I could make a noise. "I can speak!" I shouted again to make sure that I indeed can speak. Although it was strange because I have no mouth or body to speak, but well, a beggar can''t be a chooser. I looked at the figure of a girl in front of me again and asked her. "Now what should I do?" I won''t ask where am I like any other main character in the novel, well that was because I know that I had died! So this dark space is either Limbo or some kind of space created by a figure in front of me. Well, if I guessed correctly, then she could also read my thought. "Exactly~ You are correct!" The figure in front of me smiled sweetly. It''s dangerous, she''s too beautiful. Can I marry her right now? "No can do~ Maybe if you beat some godly beast then I can consider it~" She talked in a sultry voice. Damn, she''s a perfect girl that I had always dreamed of. "Thank you for your compliment~ But can we talk about you right now?" Asked the figure in front of me. "Sure! I am single right now and had 2 ex-girlfriends so I had some experience. You can leave everything to me!" I shouted in a voice full of excitement and hope. Right after I shouted, I realized my mistake and corrected myself with a cough. *Cough* "Well, I am sorry for that. You are too beautiful that I lost my mind. Well then, let''s talk about why I am here. I guess that I will be reincarnated?" I said with certainty in my tone as if I had expected this to happen. Although I said that, I am really happy that I will be reincarnated. No matter the world, as long as it''s not a world full of war like Akame Ga Kill or Berserk, then I will gladly welcome it. But if my guess is right, then I will be reincarnated in that world or the other one. I can guess the world where I will be reincarnating because of the figure in front of me. ''Well, I will let fate decide my course, or rather, the girl in front of me to decide my course. But can I at least get a wish? Like superpower that make me OP!'' "Umu, fortunately for you, your guess is mostly correct. But you will get no wish, instead, I will decide your power for you~" ''Umu, huh. I see she''s a follower of that emperor. She''s a woman of culture.'' I nodded my imaginary head in approval of her choice of word. I began to like her in more ways than one. I am a simple man, if a beautiful girl said Umu, I will like her immediately. That''s if her personality is acceptable. ''I have one question though. Why did you make me able to speak if you could read my thought?'' "Fufufu, of course, I did that to enjoy your reaction." The girl in front of me put her hand on her cheeks as she closed her eyes. "So you are a sadist too!!" I unconsciously spoke my thought out loud, again. "That was a joke. Now back to the topic." The girl clapped her hand and continued. "I will reincarnate you to the world of DxD as you''ve guessed~ Are you happy?" ''Oooh! I am happy, I am happy but¡­ isn''t that world dangerous?'' "As I said, I will give you power or some sort. Well, I hope you give me an entertainment though. I am bored in this space so when I saw you do that trick, I was amused and decided to reincarnate you on a whim~" The girl in front of me chuckled while covering her mouth with her left hand. ''Well, that is enough I guess. Say, what will I reincarnate into? Is it devil, or human? That''s the clich¨¦ right?'' If I reincarnated as a human, then I need to work hard to be able to defend myself. When I say hard, I mean really hard. Human is a bit underrated in DxD, but they hold high potential. An example would be Cao Cao and Griselda Quarta. "Fufufufu, you are a magician, right?" Asked the girl. ''Street magician to be exact.'' "Then you will love an illusion that will make your enemy confused~ Well then, have a nice trip!" As soon as she said that, I feel like being sucked by a vacuum cleaner. I said vacuum cleaner because I have never experienced being sucked by something other than it! "At least tell me my race!!!" My shout was getting sucked by the force too and faded to the darkness leaving the girl floating around the dark space alone. "Fufufufu, you will be surprised~ Well then, I need to prepare for his training regime so he won''t be defeated as soon as he faced his enemy. I bet he will be surprised because I reincarnated him as his favorite anime character~ I hope you can entertain me, street magician. That was wrong, I guess right now he''s the young master of the east Youkai clan, Nura Riku. Fufufufu~" Leaving an amused laugh, the girl disappeared from the dark space. RaizarP Author here~ I would never forget this, but you could visit my Patreon for Advanced chapters for All of my Series!! Chapter 2 – Nurarihyon Youkai RaizarP Nurarihyon that appears here is the Young Nurarihyon from Nurarihyon no Mago. Not the same Nurarihyon that appears in DxD You''ve been warned! In a certain Japanese Mansion¡¯s yard when the sun has longing in the horizon, about to hide its body and call the night to replace the day. A kid around eight years old with long black hair tied with a rubber band could be seen swinging his wooden sword while sweating rigorously. He swung his wooden sword as if his life was depended on it. ¡°Six hundred sixty-nine, Six hundred seventy, six hundred seventy-one¡­¡± He kept counting every time he swung his sword, without realizing that a handsome man wearing a dark green kimono with a strange hairstyle kept his long blonde with black accent hair straightened back without even falling into his shoulder coming to his location. ¡°Six hundred ninety-eight, six hundred ninety-nine, seven hundred¡­¡± After he reached his seven hundred swings, he eased his position and wiped the sweat that was dripping from his forehead to his chin. At that time, he realized the presence of the man and turned towards him and asked. ¡°What do you want, Old man!¡± His tone is not polite at all although he¡¯s talking with someone older than him. But instead of getting angry, the man laughed out loud and said. ¡°Aren¡¯t you becoming a splendid heir as the day passed, Riku?¡± The kid grumbled as he thought. ¡®Tch, I never expected that girl to reincarnate me as the son of Nurarihyon. Well, I must be grateful for her but I never knew that Nurarihyon is this annoying when he¡¯s at home.¡¯ Right, the kid with black hair is the street magician that was reincarnated into this world. Now he was known as Nura Riku, the heir of Nurarihyon, the young master of East Youkai Faction. He was born because of an affair between Nurarihyon with a certain human. When Riku asked him what happened to his mother to his old man, his answer is that Riku¡¯s mother died while giving birth to him because she can¡¯t handle giving birth to half-youkai. Riku himself has no attachment towards his mother because he never met her, but he is grateful towards her for giving birth to him safely at cost of her life. ¡°Whatever you say, old man. If you are here just to disturb me, then you can go away to prank some people or eat in some restaurant.¡± ¡®It seems like my personality is getting further and further from my past life. Is it caused by my youkai blood or just the influence of my old man?¡¯ Riku grumbled as he was preparing himself to continue his training. But when he was about to start again, his old man, Nurarihyon¡¯s voice interrupted him. ¡°Ah, wait. I wanted to bring you to the meeting between the east and west youkai faction.¡± Nurarihyon managed to get Riku¡¯s attention with that. Riku turned towards his old man and asked him. ¡°West youkai faction, do you mean you wanted to meet Yasaka?¡± ¡®That means I can meet the cast of DxD this early?! I never expected this to happen this early. It¡¯s been 8 years since I was reincarnated, and come to think of it, I don¡¯t know where the canon starts! I could use this chance to find out about it.¡¯ ¡°Ou! Do you want to come?¡± Nurarihyon has a sly smirk on his face, knowing that his son will be interested in the gathering between two factions. Well, of course, he¡¯s interested, he is his son after all. ¡°Of course, old man. Where is the location of the meeting?¡± Riku asked Nurarihyon with a joyful tone. He was preparing himself for everything that was thrown to him before the canon. He was able to find out how to use his youkai blood to him into his youkai form and how to use Youjutsu although he¡¯s not skilled enough to keep using it repeatedly. ¡°Kyoto, it will be conducted in a year, so I think I will train you in that meantime to help you get stronger.¡± Riku has a big feral smile on his face. 1 year until the gathering huh, who will refuse the opportunity to be trained by Nurarihyon, one of the strongest youkai that he knows. ¡°How about we start training now, old man? I¡¯ve had some difficulty using Youjutsu, so I would like you to teach me that.¡± Nurarihyon youkai Youjutsu is a bit different from the other youkai. That¡¯s why he had some difficulty training it as the only one who knows all the technique is Nurarihyon. ¡®If my ability is the same as Nurarihyon Youkai from the Nurarihyon No Mago manga, then it¡¯s enough for me. But the problem here is, the youkai in that manga is using fear instead of Youjutsu, that¡¯s why I got a problem as I have no fucking reference on how to use my ability.¡¯ ¡°Youjutsu? Ah, those techniques. I almost forgot that every youkai was using Youjutsu instead of the other one. Sorry for that~ I never told you that our race, or rather I am special aren¡¯t I? But you can use a Youjutsu, huh, that means you are able to use more techniques other than our original ones. I can¡¯t use Youjutsu after all.¡± Riku was surprised when he heard his old man forgetting about Youjutsu. He shouted at him because of his surprise. ¡°Wait old man, what do you mean that you can¡¯t use Youjutsu? You are a fucking youkai right?¡± ¡°Well, it¡¯s better to show you directly.¡± As Nurarihyon said that, his body began emitting a cloud of black smoke that was familiar to Riku. ¡®He was using fear! That means?!!¡¯ Riku was full of anticipation when he saw Nurarihyon''s body blurred in the smoke and he was snapped back when he heard the voice behind him. ¡°Moon is always in the sky, even in a broad daylight. That is us, Nurarihyon Youkai.¡± Nurarihyon''s blurred figure in front of Riku was gone and Nurarihyon suddenly appeared from thin air behind Riku alongside his voice. Riku turned back at a fast speed and saw Nurarihyon standing behind him with a smile on his face as he kept his right hand inside his kimono and held a black and golden pipe to smoke in his right hand. ¡°Kyoka Suigetsu, that is the name of this technique. We, Nurarihyon Youkai, always walked between reality and illusion. As such, my presence could not be felt when I blurred it myself. If the enemy felt fear towards me, they won¡¯t be able to touch me. That¡¯s the essence of my, no, our technique¡± Explained Nurarihyon. ¡°Also¡­¡± As Nurarihyon said that, he kicked Riku on his stomach using the so-called roundhouse kick making him roll over the ground a few times. ¡°That¡¯s our clan tradition family technique, Flying Youkai Yakuza kick. So, you want to learn it? Hahahahaha.¡± Riku gritted his teeth in anger as his youkai¡¯s blood boil and he turned into his youkai form. His hair raised and imitated Nurarihyon¡¯s hairstyle. But Riku¡¯s tied hair still kept itself sticking out under his bundle of long hair that stood straight in the air. He picked himself up as he glared at Nurarihyon as he gripped his wooden sword tighter and said. ¡°Bring it on, you old man!¡± ¡°Don¡¯t die on me, you brat!¡± Answered Nurarihyon. RaizarP Author here~ You could visit my Patreon for Advanced chapters for All of my Series!! There are 50 Advanced Chapters in total available on my Patreon~ Chapter 3 – First time using Fear 1st POV It¡¯s been a week since I trained with my old man. As I had expected, he¡¯s using Fear instead of the usual Youjutsu that was used by Youkai in DxD. What made him different from the other youkai? Is it because he¡¯s a Nurarihyon Youkai? Or is it because of the girl that reincarnated me? Well, I don¡¯t really care because I could use a variety of techniques that I know from watching Nurarihyon no Mago. Also, because I am half-human, it seems that I also have sacred gear sealed inside my body. It was known by my old man when I used a Youjutsu to create a fireball in the thin air. He said that he felt foreign energy inside my body every time I used Youjutsu so he checked it and found out that I had sacred gear sealed inside me. I was happy for a moment before he kicked me using his usual roundhouse kick again. That fucker!! Just because I can¡¯t use Fear yet that doesn¡¯t mean I can¡¯t hit him! Well, I cannot hit him because he used his technique to avoid my strike, DAMNIT! I will forget about that for now because I am in heaven right now. Not the literal heaven, but I am in the dining room with a servant that served me my meal. The servant is a beautiful girl with black straight hair adorned with a bluish-white stripe on top of her head. She appears to be around twenty years old, but because she¡¯s a youkai, I don¡¯t know her exact age. She¡¯s similar to Setsura in Nurarihyon no Mago with her pretty face, big breast and she wears a white kimono with a blue stripe on the collar and sleeves. Well, overall she¡¯s in my strike zone~ ¡°Young Master, please enjoy your meal.¡± After she was done with setting my dish on the table in front of me, she excused herself with a bow. ¡°Thanks, by the way, what¡¯s your name?¡± I stopped her and asked for her name. It was not because I want to woo her, totally not. It was because she was serving me for a week now since my training with my old man but I had no chance to ask for her name all this time. ¡°My humble name is Setsuna, young master.¡± She answered my question while bowing her head. This young master''s treatment was because of my old man''s position as the leader of the east youkai. I don¡¯t hate it a little bit, rather I enjoyed it. But sometimes I also wanted some friend of the same age as me instead of those old youkai that stayed in our mansion. For some reason, my old man only kept his trusted old youkai subordinates in the mansion and told the other youkai to spread out in Kanto. His reason was to cover all Kanto areas and stop every intruder that wanted to enter our territory. Well, I know my old man just wanted his freedom to act and not be bothered by the young youkai though. Oh, I kept Setsuna waiting, it¡¯s my bad. ¡°Setsuna is it, what a beautiful name. You may leave.¡± I said and she raised her head. I see her smiling wide when I praised her name, is she that happy that I praised her? Maybe I will praise her more later. She bowed once more and left after she closed the sliding door, leaving me with my dish in the dining room. I quickly ate my meal that was served on the table. The meal itself was the usual Japanese breakfast. Miso soup, rice, and fried salmon, I had this kind of breakfast almost every day since I was reincarnated. After I was done with my breakfast, I changed my clothes in a striped black and green kimono and wore dark blue Haori, and grabbed my wooden sword that I let rest near the door of my room. I stepped out of my room and changed into my youkai form. For some reason, I can change into my youkai form no matter if it was a day or night. Maybe the natural energy that filled the air was the reason. But it works in my favor so I won¡¯t say anything about it. I walked towards the training area and readied my sword as I got into a stance. ¡°Let¡¯s try the technique to create fear. I think it was like this.¡± I concentrate and imagine an enemy in front of me. I imagined my old man smirking towards me while resting his sword on his shoulder. I try to intimidate him with my stare and I tried to make a scary atmosphere around me to let him feel the fear. I did this almost for 5 minutes straight until I can feel something move in my body as I began to create a black smoke similar to my old man and understood that I was using one of Nurarihyon''s techniques, Meikyo Shisui. The technique itself is simple, it makes the enemy aware of our presence at the same time they are unable to sense my presence. Unlike Kyoka Suigetsu that shifted the enemy''s awareness, this technique is making the enemy confused with my awareness. ¡°That technique makes the enemy feel your location, but not your real location. You¡¯ve done well, brat!¡± My old man¡¯s voice came from the direction of the house and I turned to look at him sitting with crossed legs on top of the roof. He jumped in my direction and landed right in front of me and swung his right hand. ¡°But your fear is too weak! I can cut your fear with just my hand. You still have a long way to go, you brat!¡± I was irked by his playful tone and swung my sword to him. Unexpectedly, I hit him but I didn¡¯t feel like I hit him. At that moment I know that he was using his technique and I had a bad feeling. I instantly ducked without waiting for anything and a moment after I ducked, a roundhouse kick passed my previous location. ¡°Oh, you¡¯ve gotten better!¡± Said my old man with a smirk on his face as he stood beside me after sending a roundhouse kick. I snapped back at him and shouted. ¡°You fucker! I don¡¯t fucking care anymore, old man. Let¡¯s have a fight, you bastard!!¡± ¡°Hahahahaha, what a spirit. Alright! Come at me, brat!¡± Answered my old man. He picked a sakura tree¡¯s branch and use it as a wooden sword. I glared hard at him and launched a full swing that he easily parried with the branch. When our wooden sword interlocked, he sent a kick towards my stomach that sent me flying for a good three meters before I stopped after rolling on the ground a few times. ¡°Fucking old man¡­¡± I tried to shout but only managed to let out a mutter before I lost my consciousness. RaizarP Author Here~ More than 50 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks to the new Executive!! - Anton Kozlov Big Thanks to the new Squad Leader!! - omar amurrio - Orion Chung - Victor Gonzalez Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 4 – A sword and A girl The sound of sword clashes with each other rang out loudly in the training yard of the mansion. The figure of 2 similar people, with one of them with black hair, appears to be shorter than the platinum blonde one was exchanging slash after slash followed by an after images that were created by their ability. I surprisingly managed to master using my Fear in just a year after my old man trained me. The promised meeting with the west youkai faction will be held tomorrow in Kyoto. Right now I am able to stand toe to toe with my old man even when I was 9 years old. It was surprising for both of us because my old man is considered one of the strongest youkai in the world. He was said to be able to stand toe in toe with Sirzechs in his full power. Maybe it was because of a hidden bonus from the girl that reincarnated me. Until now I still didn''t know anything about her, but I am sending my gratitude towards her each time something good happened to me. Well, the reason why I was able to fight my old man is because of Youjutsu. My old man, with his unique body, can''t use Youjutsu which every youkai can use, even with that limitation, he''s still one of the strongest to my surprise. I was able to use Youjutsu to enhance my body and combined with my Fear, I was able to create fake presences more than my old man. My Fear got stronger in this one year and I managed to learn how to imbue my weapon with my Fear to further increase the destructive power from my attack. I wanted to learn a technique that was available for half-youkai in Nurarihyon no Mago, Matoi. But I didn''t find anyone trustworthy yet for me to be able to leave my back to them. "Let''s stop here, Riku. The meeting is tomorrow so I think you will need some rest, right?" My old man suddenly stopped and rested his sword on his shoulder in a calm manner. "And I think it''s time for me to hand my sword to you." I had some ragged breath after the sparring session with my old man. Although I said that I was able to match him in a fight, my stamina as 9 years old is still far from him who had lived for more than hundreds of years. But something else managed to catch my attention. "Sword?" "Yeah, the sword that was specially tampered by a human around 300 years ago to give them a chance to fight with the supernatural. This sword was convenient, you can make it disappear and appear from thin air when you wished for it. Follow me, I will show you the sword." My old man walked to the house and I followed her from behind. ''The sword that cut supernatural. Could it be, Nenekirimaru?!'' My face instantly brightened when I thought of the possibility. Nenekirimaru is a good sword, but it was almost useless when used to fight a human. I just hoped that this sword that my old man showed me will be able to be used to hurt a human. Because the threat in this world does not only come from the supernatural but also humans. In fact, the Hero Faction of Chaos Brigade was formed by humans, although they claimed themselves as the descendant of ancient heroes. I followed my old man while having those thoughts and I was unaware of my surrounding. When I snapped back, I was already in a storage room and saw my old man digging through the junk and finally grabbed a sword with the length of the blade around 110cm with a black handle and sheath made from plain wood without any sword guard handle. My old man dusted it off the dust and turned to look at me with a smile on his face while he extended his hand that held the sword to give it to me. "Here take this. This sword is designed to cut the supernatural and hurt them more than it hurt humans. Although when you faced a human, this sword is no different than a regular katana although it was still better than the regular one." I took the katana and unsheathed it. I raised the sword above my head and marveled at the beauty of its blade. I nodded in satisfaction and said to my old man. "You gave this katana to me? Thank you, old man." "Don''t be happy for now, try to make it disappear. If you are able to do that, then you are recognized as its owner." Explained my old man as he took a blowpipe from his kimono and put it on his mouth. I nodded at him and try to make it disappear. I sheathed it back to its scabbard and wished for it to disappear and it was gone from my hand almost instantly. "Oh! As expected of my son!" He picked his blowpipe with his right hand and blows a cloud of smoke into the air. "Now try to make it appeared again and then I will have you to follow me. I think you might like this one." I saw the smirk that was plastered on his face and I have a bad feeling about it. What is this? Is he going to prank me? Or will he suddenly said that he will disappear and left the east youkai to me? Whatever it is, I think his smirk contained a bad plan. But I still followed his word and make the sword appear in my hand. After I looked at the sword and saw that nothing was wrong I make it disappear again and asked my old man. "So, before I follow you. What is this sword''s name?" "I don''t know, you can give it one if you want to." Said my old man nonchalantly as he walked past me and exited the storage room and stopped in front of the door before he looked over his shoulder and gestured me to follow him using his hand. "Tch. Then I will name him Nenekirimaru." I clicked my tongue and followed him. This time, he brought me to a big room where we usually welcome a guest and make me sit in seiza beside him. Well, I didn''t follow his instruction and sat with my legs crossed. What I didn''t expect was when I saw him, he sat on crossed legs too and smirked at me. ''Oh, this old man of mine. He really loves jokes around didn''t he?'' After we waited silently for a few minutes, I heard Setsuna''s voice from beyond the sliding door. "Commander, young master. Your guest has arrived." My old man smiled as he answered Setsuna. "Have them enter the room." As soon as he said that, the sliding door was opened and a girl with long black hair that reached her waist entered the room. She was around my age wearing a white kimono with a blue flower pattern. She was graceful in her movement, and her blue eyes sucked my breath away. If someone said the usual child actress is cute, then the girl that entered the room is beautiful. The girl walked and stopped in front of us and sat in a seiza position. She bowed her head and introduced herself to us. "It is my pleasure to meet you, Commander, Young Master. My name is Tsura, Yuki Tsura. I hope we can get along in the future, Young Master." RaizarP Author Here~ More than 50 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks to the new Executive!! - Anton Kozlov Big Thanks to the new Squad Leader!! - Chase Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 5 – Attendant ¡°Yuki Tsura?¡± I asked with confusion visible on my face. Why did my old man introduce me to this girl? I can¡¯t read my old man¡¯s mind at all. ¡°Yes, young master. I was assigned to be your attendant from today onward.¡± Said the girl, Tsura, that sat in front of me. I looked at my old man and saw him grinning happily. He then put his elbow on his thigh and rest his head on his hand. ¡°Yuki Tsura... you are like your mother. I bet you will turn into a beautiful woman in the future.¡± After he said that, he turned to me and asked. ¡°How about it, Riku. She¡¯s beautiful, isn¡¯t she?¡± With his word, I immediately understood what my old man thought. He wanted this girl to be my attendant and tend to my need, didn¡¯t he? ¡°Yeah, she¡¯s beautiful. But isn¡¯t she a bit too young to be my attendant, old man?¡± I asked my old man and got an answer in a form of laughter. ¡°Bah, hahahahahaha. What do you think that you can get to that conclusion, you brat? She¡¯s your attendant, meaning that she will tend to your meal and be your friend. By chance, are you imagining something lewd, aren¡¯t you perverted little youkai? Hahahahaha¡± ¡®This old man! He definitely did it on purpose!¡¯ I turned to look at Tsura and saw her face turn red as she held her cheeks using both of her hands and said. ¡°I-I don¡¯t mind if it¡¯s young master.¡± Hearing that, I honestly was happy. But I won¡¯t touch her at least until she¡¯s old enough to be able to do it with no problem. ¡°I¡¯m happy with your thought, but I won¡¯t do anything yet.¡± I turned towards my old man and said. ¡°I will take her, old man. I am taking a liking towards her.¡± I put on the same girl as my old man and he laughed out loud again. ¡°Bahahahahahaha, I bet that nine-tailed fox will roll in frustration when she met you tomorrow. As expected of my son, you definitely had the same charm as me!¡± He stood up in a happy mood and walked towards the door and opened it. I saw Setsuna still sitting in a seiza outside the door and bowed when my old man opened the door. ¡°I will leave you young¡¯uns to talk together. I will be in my room if you need me. Just don¡¯t forget, we will go to Kyoto at 3 A.M. tomorrow! Setsuna, bring me a sake in my room!¡± He walked out and closed the door behind her, leaving me with Tsura in the room. ¡°So, um. Young master, please ask me anything!¡± Tsura¡¯s voice brings me back from my trance. I looked at her closely this time and once again admired her beauty. What a good fortune to be the young master of the east youkai faction. But, the atmosphere slowly becomes awkward as I stayed silent in her question. ¡°Ah, yes. Tsura was it? Can I call you that?¡± I decided to ask her about how I call her, although I already decided to call her Tsura in my mind. ¡°Yes! You can call me Tsura if you wanted to, young master!¡± She answered happily with her cheeks still dyed in red. She put her hands down on her thighs and sat gracefully in seiza. Earlier, I heard my old man say that she will turn into a beauty like her mother. But, who¡¯s her mother? ¡°My old man said that you are similar to your mother. Can I ask who your mother is?¡± Well, isn¡¯t it awkward? I just asked her about her mother the first time we met! I¡¯m such a moron! ¡°It¡¯s no problem, young master. In fact, my mother was the one that was waiting outside this room earlier. She¡¯s called Setsuna.¡± Answered Tsura with a big smile on her face as she tilted her head a little, making her hair move alongside it. Cute¡­ no. Wait, her mother is Setsuna? So that young lady is a mother?! ¡°Setsuna?! That means you are¡­¡± I don¡¯t know what kind of youkai Setsuna is. But, if my guess is correct, then she¡¯s definitely a Yuki-Onna. ¡°I¡¯m a YukiOnna, young master. Am I bothering you with being one?¡± Asked Tsura cutely. I can feel my body flinched a little bit when she mentioned that she¡¯s a Yuki-Onna. Thank god I decided to not lay my hand on her yet! With my strength right now, I would definitely freeze to death if I try to do anything to her! ¡°No, there is no problem at all.¡± I tried to appear as calm as possible in front of her. She put her right hand on her chest and sighed in relief. ¡°Ah~ I was relieved. I was really afraid that the young master will be bothered by me being Yuki-Onna. When we can¡¯t control our power, our power tended to leak out and freeze anything. So I am really happy when young master said that!¡± ¡®Good job me, you just avoided a bullet there. But, if she can control her power, she won¡¯t be a threat huh? Then she just needed some training to control it.¡¯ ¡°Then Tsura, I expected you to be able to control it as soon as possible.¡± I stood up and approached Tsura. When I reached her side, I put my hand on her shoulder and looked at her right in her eyes as I said. ¡°I am counting on you in the future, Tsura.¡± She blushes really hard and her face turned redder than before. Although she was embarrassed, she can¡¯t hide her happy smile as she answered. ¡°Yes, young master! I will definitely live up to fulfill your expectation!¡± We just stared into each other eyes for like 5 minutes before Tsura can¡¯t hold her gaze again and turned away from me. She put her hands to cover her embarrassed face. I tried to peek at her cute action but I stopped because she peeked through the gap between her finger and said. ¡°But young master, please wait for me to be an adult before we did a lewd thing. Please?¡± I gave her a smile and said. ¡°Yeah, don¡¯t worry about it. I will wait until you are ready.¡± Hearing my word, she put her hands down and smiled at me. I managed to get an attendant for me, and on top of that, she¡¯s a cute girl that has good prospects in the future. In all, today is a happy day for me. *** (Nurarihyon¡¯s Room) 3rd POV Nurarihyon was sitting with his legs crossed while holding a sake cup in his left hand. On his right, Setsuna was pouring sake from the bottle to the sake cup that was held by Nurarihyon. ¡°It seems like he like her, Setsuna.¡± Said Nurarihyon as he bring the sake cup to his mouth. ¡°Indeed, Commander.¡± Said Setsuna with a smile on her face. ¡°But, commander. Why did that scene never happen between us?¡± Setsuna put the sake bottle on the ground then she put her arms around Nurarihyon''s shoulder and bring her face closer to his. She tried to kiss him but she was stopped with his left hand, blocking her mouth and shoving her away from his face. ¡°You do know how I act. I still can¡¯t forget about her.¡± Said Nurarihyon as he has a sad expression on his face. Setsuna pouted her face in a cute manner, unbefitting of a woman with one child. ¡°But I¡¯ve followed you for hundreds of years, yet you didn¡¯t even lay your hand on me.¡± Nurarihyon has a nostalgic smile on his face as he said. ¡°Well, at least our children took a liking towards each other, no?¡± That managed to appease Setsuna as she answered. ¡°Indeed, well I guess I could let it pass with that.¡± Both of them laughed together in Nurarihyon¡¯s room. Each of them are happy with that day, and time passed quickly until it was time for them to go to Kyoto. RaizarP Author Here~ More than 50 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks to the new Executive!! - Anton Kozlov Big Thanks to the new Squad Leader!! - Zaqxsw694 - Frederick - Zod - Dez Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 6 – Trip to Kyoto Today is the day that we, the east youkai faction will go to Kyoto and have a meeting with the west youkai faction led by Yasaka. Right now I am standing in front of the mansion with Tsura, waiting for my old man and his follower to get out of the mansion. Come to think of it, I only met with Setsuna and didn¡¯t meet with any other youkai yet. Maybe this is the chance for me to meet them? I personally wanted to meet with Magari and ask her to teach me about Senjutsu. Although it was a bit dangerous to learn Senjutsu, when I master it then I will have no problem using it. That¡¯s why I wanted to train my Senjutsu now so I will have time to master it before the canon start, or when the danger strikes us. ¡°Young master, are you nervous?¡± Tsura asked me from my right. I turned towards her and answered. ¡°No, I was excited to meet with the other youkai under my old man. All this time I was always training alone or training with my old man so I hadn¡¯t got a chance to meet with any of them.¡± Tsura nodded her head in understanding and said. ¡°That¡¯s true. But don¡¯t worry young master, they are all kind youkai! Also, they are strong!¡± ¡°I see, then maybe they can train me in Senjutsu?¡± I muttered while looking in the mansion¡¯s direction. ¡°Yes, Magari-sama should be willing to teach you in Senjutsu. I was trained in Senjutsu by my Mother since I was young, so I can use some Senjutsu technique like Touki for example.¡± Explained Tsura. I was a bit surprised that Tsura was trained in Senjutsu already. I guess it was not that hard to learn Senjutsu? All this time I trained my body and my Fear because that is my biggest advantage against the other race. I had proudly said that I can match my old man too but come to think of it he never used Senjutsu when we sparred. I gritted my teeth in frustration because my old man was still holding back his strength more than I thought and muttered. ¡°I need to get stronger¡­¡± As I muttered that, the door of the mansion was opened and my old man came out of the mansion with two persons behind him. One of them is Setsuna, while the other one is a Nekomata with 7 tails. I guess the Nekomata is Magari if I remember her description right. ¡°Have you waited for long, Riku?¡± My old man raised his right hand and asked me. ¡°Hoo, so he¡¯s your son? He¡¯s quite strong for his age.¡± The Nekomata behind my old man raised her voice in amazement. ¡°And I see that he has a talent for Senjutsu too, unlike you, Commander.¡± Added her as he turned to look at my old man. ¡®Wait, my old man can¡¯t use Senjutsu too?¡¯ I was surprised that my old man can¡¯t use Senjutsu. So he became one of the strongest with only his Fear?! ¡°Hahahaha, it¡¯s natural for a son to be stronger than his parents. After all, he¡¯s my successor if something happened to me.¡± My old man laughed hard when he said that. ¡°Fufufufu, young master is not only strong, but he also has Commander¡¯s charm too.¡± Added Setsuna. ¡°Look at my little daughter that got seduced in only one night.¡± Setsuna looked at Tsura while hiding her smug smile behind her kimono¡¯s sleeve. ¡°That¡¯s not right¡­¡± I heard Tsura mutter beside me and I decided to lend a hand to her. ¡°Old man, can you introduce me to the Nekomata beside you? I believe I didn¡¯t meet her yet.¡± I said, trying to change the topic of the conversation. I could hear Tsura mutter her thanks beside me in a shy tone after I changed the topic of the conversation. ¡°Oh, come to think of it, you¡¯re right. This here is Magari, she¡¯s a master of Senjutsu also one of my trusted friends.¡± My old man looked back over his shoulder to look at Magari. Did she smile? Or kind of smiled at me and said. ¡°Nice to meet you, young master.¡± ¡°Nice to meet you too. My old man said you are a master of Senjutsu? In that case, could you teach me about Senjutsu? I am interested in that.¡± I said while smiling and looking at my old man. If I by chance mastered Senjutsu, then I could always kick my old man instead of being kicked by him. It seems my old man felt my gaze as he looked at me with a knowing smirk. ¡®Tch, he knows my intention immediately.¡¯ ¡°Oh? Young Master wanted to learn Senjutsu? Very well, I will train you after we came back from Kyoto, alright?¡± Answered Magari. I smirked back at my old man when she said that. He didn¡¯t change his expression and turned to Magari to say something. ¡°I think it¡¯s time, I am counting on you to teleport us there. Oi Riku! Come here!¡± I followed my old man''s word and approached them with Tsura walking beside me. We stopped in front of my old man and Magari suddenly said. ¡°Alright, I will teleport now.¡± A purple magic circle appeared under our feet and float to engulf us. I instinctively covered my eyes with my left hand and when I lowered my hand, the scenery around us has changed. I looked around and saw that we are standing in a big shrine. In the distance, there are 3 people walking towards us. 2 of them are adults and one of them is a child younger than me. The adult that walks towards us in the middle is beautiful, she has the biggest boobs that I have ever seen in my life. With her loose yellow kimono and blond hair, I bet that she¡¯s Yasaka, the leader of west faction youkai. The kid beside her also has blonde hair and wearing Miko''s outfit. While the other adult has black hair tied in a bun. ¡®So Yasaka with her daughter, Kunou, and her subordinate? But, when I look at her directly like this, she¡¯s really beautiful. Also, Kunou appears to be younger than me around 4 or 5 years, which means I am the same age as Rias or Issei? This is rather bad¡­ I don¡¯t have much time to train myself.¡¯ Realizing my situation, I decided to train harder in the future. The canon will start in 6 years, I don¡¯t have much time to laze around again. RaizarP Author Here~ More than 50 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks to the new Squad Leader!! - IamUgoH - vergard larsson Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 7 – First Meeting The west youkai walked to us and Yasaka greeted my old man. ¡°Nurarihyon-yo, it¡¯s good that you arrive here in time.¡± Said Yasaka. My old man put his left arm inside his kimono and picked his pipe from his pocket and put it on his mouth to inhale some smoke. He exhaled it in the air and answered Yasaka. ¡°Of course, well who do we have here? Is she your daughter?¡± My old man, biting the pipe in his mouth touched his chin as he leaned his head towards Kunou. Kunou got surprised by my old man and hid behind Yasaka in fear. But she peeked her head sometimes because of his curiosity. ¡°Yes, she is. Her name is Kunou. I thought that I want to introduce her to you, but it seems that she¡¯s scared of you.¡± I approached my old man and use this chance to pay him back. ¡°Look at her scared of you, old man. I guess your charms mean nothing in front of a little girl.¡± He grumbled in displeasure and stood straight before he said. ¡°It was because Yasaka¡¯s daughter is shy!¡± Yasaka, finally noticed my existence asked my old man. ¡°Nurarihyon, is he your son? He certainly didn¡¯t look like you, especially his hair.¡± Oh, right. Because I was in my human form right now, my hair didn¡¯t stand straight like my old man. Instead, it dropped down until it reached my back and I tied it using a rubber band to keep it tidy. ¡°Oi, Riku. Come to think of it, change into your youkai form!¡± Although it was annoying to follow my old man¡¯s word, I decided to follow his whim for now and changed into my youkai form. White smoke with a mythical aura appeared around me as I changed into my youkai form. Still in my stripped green and black kimono, my hair straightened and stood like my old man and my height increased a little. My bang also got longer and messier. It¡¯s strange, I am only 120cm in my human form, but whenever I changed into youkai form, my height increased by 10cm. I guess it will stay like that until I hit the adult phase. If I remember correctly, Nura Rikuo in Nurarihyon no Mago is also likes that. After my transformation was done, I said to my old man. ¡°Satisfied?¡± Like my old man, I crossed my arms inside my kimono, letting my kimono¡¯s sleeves wave around because of the wind. ¡°He¡¯s really similar to you, isn¡¯t he, Nurarihyon? Well, let¡¯s proceed to our meeting because this time we faced something rather disturbing for our race.¡± Yasaka said in a serious tone as she put her hand above Kunou¡¯s head. ¡°Kunou, can you play with the big brother over there? Mother has something important to do right now.¡± She said as she looked in my direction. ¡®Wait a minute, lady. You wanted me to babysit Kunou when you have a meeting? We just meet though, how can you trust me that easily?¡¯ I thought inside my mind. Kunou peeked at me from behind Yasaka¡¯s clothes as she gripped on Yasaka¡¯s kimono. She looked up to her mother and said. ¡°Un! Kunou will play with big brother!¡± Oh, I see she took a liking to me immediately. ¡°It seems she¡¯s not scared of me, old man. Are you sure you have the charm that you speak of?¡± I looked up to my old man and give him my biggest smile. ¡°Tch, you are popular with a little kid. Look at Yasaka, she heads over heel towards me!¡± Following what he said, I looked over at Yasaka who looked at my old man in disgust. I looked back to my old man and tilted my head. ¡°Really?¡± My question hit him hard that he smacked my head with his fist. I shouted at him because of that. ¡°Damn you, old man!!¡± I called my katana and unsheathed it and was about to slash my old man before I stopped because I heard a giggle from Yasaka¡¯s direction. I saw Kunou giggling from behind Yasaka and we stopped immediately to look at her. ¡°Mother, he¡¯s funny!¡± I looked at my old man for a second before looking at Kunou again. I approached them slowly and I crouched in front of her to match her gaze as I extended my right hand. ¡°Let¡¯s play together, Kunou.¡± Kunou shyly extended her left hand and grabbed my hand after stepping out from behind her mother. I walked in hand with Kunou and approached Tsura then I said to my old man. ¡°Old man, I will play with Tsura and Kunou. You do your meeting without me.¡± I saw him nodded and we walked away from their location. Because it was still dark, I asked Kunou where she wanted to play and she said that she wanted to play in her room. I asked her to bring us to her room and she happily nodded before running while holding my hand. The three of us were playing in Kunou¡¯s room for hours until the sun has risen. We changed our play location into the back of the shrine. We play tag with Tsura as Oni and chased Kunou and me. Unfortunately for her, I used my Fear to hide from her. I know it¡¯s childish of me, but I don¡¯t want to lose while playing tag with a child. Tsura managed to tag Kunou and she purposely run towards me. ¡®Did she use her Senjutsu to feel my location? This is bad!¡¯ Realizing that Tsura somehow managed to know my location, I run away from them and went into a mountain near the shrine. After entering the mountain deep enough, I stopped on my track and looked back only to see no one behind me. It seems that I run faster than I thought and left Tsura and Kunou alone in the shrine. I run back to go down the mountain, but I can¡¯t seem to remember the location of the shrine. ¡°Could it be, I am lost?¡± This is a situation, all right. For now, let¡¯s go down the mountain and ask someone the location of the shrine. I hope I can find a kind youkai below the mountain that knew the location of Yasaka¡¯s shrine. When I was about to run down the mountain, I heard a weak voice calling out from the bushes in my left. ¡°¡­help.¡± I turned around instantly when I heard the voice and rushed towards it. I parted the bushes that were in the way and found a girl with black hair and a pair of cat ears laid on the ground weakly. I observed the girl carefully and saw 2 black cat tails from above her butt. At that moment, I realize who was laying in front of me. ¡®Kuroka!¡¯ RaizarP Author Here~ More than 50 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks to the new Squad Leader!! - Andreas J?rgensen - M C - Tomas Nordendorf - victor diaz Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 8 – First blood ¡°Hey, are you okay?!¡± I asked, a little bit panicked because Kuroka didn¡¯t move at all. My question was answered by a weak groan. I clicked my tongue, and slowly, I picked Kuroka and put her on my back. After she rested on my back, I run as fast as I can to reach the base of the mountain to ask the location of Yasaka¡¯s shrine. ¡®Damnit, if Kuroka was injured like this, then she just killed her master and run away from the underworld?! I need to get to my old man fast!¡¯ I used my Fear to hide my presence from the others, fearing that there will be a pursuer of Kuroka that roam around the mountain. I was confident to take on a middle-class or high-class devil if they are alone, but a group fight is still outside my capability. I had yet to learn Senjutsu and my Youjutsu is not as good as my Fear. On top of that, I need to protect Kuroka from them too. I run faster and muttered every strength that I had until I heard a yell that was full of hatred from behind me. ¡°There she is!¡± I looked back, following the source of the voice, and saw 2 devils around the middle class from the energy that I sensed, pursuing me while flying with their wings. ¡®Tch.¡¯ I quickly activated Kyoka Suigetsu to shift their awareness towards me and Kuroka and called Nenekirimaru to my right hand. I bite the sheath and unsheathed it using my right hand while my left hand supported Kuroka that was on my back. The devils were fooled by their awareness and chased my fake presence to the left. I used this chance to sneak behind them and behead one of them using my Nenekirimaru. The blood was gushing out alongside some kind of energy from the demon, which I guessed was his demonic energy that was cut by Nenekirimaru. The other devil was confused for a second before he realize me holding my sword and biting the sheath appeared behind the now corpses and shouted. ¡°You!!¡± Once again I used Kyoka Suigetsu and shift his awareness to make him think that I went around him, while in fact I crouched and waited for a chance for him to rotate his body and stabbed him from the back. As I had planned, he shifted his gaze to follow my fake presence and I use this chance to leap towards him and pierced his heart using Nenekirimaru. Blood and demonic energy gushed out from the wound after I pulled my Nenekirimaru and swung it to clean the stain. Although I killed 2 devils today, I felt nothing unusual. Is it because I am in my youkai form, or my mind has changed over the years? Whatever it is, I am thankful for that for now because I had no time to puke or waste any time anymore. I sheathed Nenekirimaru and made it disappear before using Meikyo Shisui to hide my awareness again and proceed down the mountain again. Thankfully, I only met with 2 devils and arrived at the back of the shrine. Without waiting for long, I entered the shrine and ran towards the meeting place of my old man and Yasaka, and deactivated my Fear. It¡¯s been hours since the meeting started, so I thought that the meeting must have been adjourned and they just talked to each other to deepen their relationship. ¡°Young Master!! Are you okay?!¡± On my way to the meeting¡¯s location, I saw Tsura run frantically towards me while shouting. Because I am right now focused on Kuroka¡¯s condition and in no time to stop myself, I shouted back to tell her that I am okay. ¡°I¡¯m okay, meet me in the place of my old man!¡± Soon, after running for a minute, I had arrived at the meeting place between my old man and Yasaka. I meet with Magari as soon as I¡¯ve reached the place and thank my good luck for that. I approached her and said. ¡°Magari!! Could you heal the girl in my back? She¡¯s injured!¡± Magari saw me with blood all over my body and spoke back. ¡°You have blood all over your body!! I need to check you first!¡± I laid Kuroka on her back slowly in the ground in front of me while answering her. ¡°This is not my blood. I¡¯ve been attacked by 2 devils while trying to get help for her. It seems that they are targeting her.¡± Magari nodded in understanding and now focused on Kuroka. She has a bit of frown on her cat face and began healing Kuroka using what I guessed as Senjutsu. While healing Kuroka, Magari said. ¡°Young Master, this girl is a reincarnated devil. Where¡¯d you find her? No, more importantly, she¡¯s a Nekoshou and she¡¯s capable of Senjutsu.¡± I just nodded my head and answered her. ¡°Yeah, I realized that she¡¯s a youkai so I help her. It¡¯s not important if she¡¯s a reincarnated devil, right? Who knows, maybe she was forced to be reincarnated by some devil.¡± Magari just groaned in answer and nodded her head. After a while, she stopped using Senjutsu and said to me. ¡°Her condition has stabilized. I will call Commander to tell him about the news.¡± ¡°Yeah, don¡¯t forget to tell him that I killed 2 devils too. I did it in self-defense in case you¡¯re wondering about it.¡± ¡°Fufufufu, young master has the same temperament as Commander. Very well, I will tell him that.¡± With that Magari entered the meeting room, leaving Kuroka on the ground and me who stood dumbfounded because of her word. ¡®The same temperament as my old man, huh. Maybe that¡¯s why I didn¡¯t feel anything when I killed those devils.¡¯ I carry Kuroka up in a so-called Princess carry and leaned against the wall near the door of the meeting room to wait for my old man and Magari. Just after I leaned against the wall, I feel Kuroka move in my hand and I looked at her face while my face was still full of blood. I realized that and quickly wiped my face using my kimono¡¯s sleeves and looked at Kuroka again. I saw her eyelids move a little and finally, she opened her eyes. The first thing that she did was to look at me straight in my eyes. ¡°Ya~ Good morning.¡± RaizarP Author Here~ More than 50 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks to the new Executive!! - Alexis Pipoz Big Thanks to the new Squad Leader!! - Exactingspoon - §±§Ñ§ê§Ñ §¢§Ñ§â§Ñ§ß§à§Ó§ã§Ü§Ú§Û - Surge1301 - Xerias - Rusted - mark74497 - Anonymous Patron! Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 9 – Back to Home RaizarP I forgot to say but Kuroka and Tsura are older than Riku. In the canon, Kuroka is at least the same age as Rias or maybe even older than her. Tsura on the other hand, with her being Yuki-Onna which has slow growth at the start, Riku misunderstands her as the same age as him, but she''s technically 1 or 2 years older than him, the same age as Kuroka. Just in case when the NSFW comes so you won''t get shocked!! Not only that, I read in the setting that Youkai matured at the age of 14, so that''s it. But I won''t make NSFW when they are 14, don''t worry... Kuroka blinked her eyes several times while looking at me. She tilted her head and tried to process what happened to her, and finally, her eyes bulged and struggled in my embrace. She must have remembered what happened to her. ¡°Hey, calm down! This is youkai territory, you are safe!¡± I tried to calm Kuroka down and that works wonderfully as she stopped struggling in my hand and asked me. ¡°Really? Are you the one that saved me nya?¡± She tilted her head and asked me in a cute manner. Is she really Kuroka? Did I mistake her with Koneko? No, she has black hair so she must be Kuroka. ¡°Yeah, I killed the devils that chased after you too. Can you tell me what happened? Why are you chased by the devils?¡± I asked her as I put her down slowly. I know the reason why she was chased by the devil because I watched the anime until season 3, but I thought that I should ask her in this case. It would be suspicious of me to know her circumstances in our first meeting. When I put her down, it seems that she has no strength to stand by herself. As a gentleman, I carried her up again in a princess carry. ¡°I-I¡¯m sorry, but can I have some time before I tell you everything nya? I promise that I have no evil intention by doing that." Well, I understand that she didn¡¯t want to tell me right away. I nodded my head and console her. ¡°No problem. I know you had a hard time. Well, I just concluded that because of your injured state when I found you.¡± I said with a small smile on my face. I have a rather handsome face because of my lineage as Nurarihyon Youkai, so my smile has a big destructive power on girls. Tsura served as my test subject on that matter and I can proudly say that my smile is lethal to girls. Kuroka blushes because she saw my smile at a close range and averted her gaze to the right, avoiding my face. When we are talking, the meeting door was opened and my old man together with Yasaka and Magari came out from beyond the door. ¡°Yo, Riku. You got into trouble as soon as you stepped out from our territory? Hahahahaa, as expected from my son.¡± I looked over and my old man and give him a smirk. ¡°Yeah, thanks to you. At least I managed to save a girl in peril.¡± I turned around and approached my old man. When she saw Kuroka, I saw his eyes bulged a little and approached us. ¡°She¡¯s a Nekoshou? Girl, who is your mother?¡± Asked my old man to Kuroka. I saw Kuroka was a bit afraid of him, but I console her and tell her that there is no problem at all. Kuroka nodded her head and asked me to put her down, which I comply with a bit of disappointment. Well, if she wanted to, then I will put her down. It¡¯s not like I wanted to carry her forever! Kuroka looked at my old man and finally answered his question. ¡°My mother is called Fujimai.¡± This has gotten a reaction from my old man and Magari. Especially my old man, his eyes bulged and his brows furrowed. ¡°Fujimai, huh. Can you tell me where is she right now?¡± Asked my old man with a kind smile on his face. I guess he wanted to appear to be as friendly as possible, but that shattered in an instant. ¡°¡­ she¡¯s dead nya.¡± Answered Kuroka with a crestfallen expression. ¡°¡­¡± Everyone present gritted their teeth. I looked at my old man and saw him have a rather nostalgic look in his eyes. He put his hand on top of Kuroka¡¯s head and said. ¡°Well then, do you want to come with me? I will provide you a shelter and protection. By the way, what¡¯s your name, little nekoshou?¡± Kuroka, hearing my old man''s word has tears welled up in the corner of her eyes and she answered. ¡°Yes¡­ my name is Kuroka nya.¡± My old man nodded her head as he turned to Magari. ¡°Magari, I will leave her in your care. You didn¡¯t mind, right?¡± ¡°Certainly.¡± After that, he turned to Yasaka and said in a serious tone. ¡°We will leave, for now, Yasaka. I think that you will be busy restructuring your defensive line here so I won¡¯t bother you any longer. And about the meeting earlier, when they have arrived here, I will send my son to look after them. Also, I will take her.¡± ¡®Wait a minute, look after who, old man!! Don¡¯t decide things by yourself!¡¯ Yasaka nodded her head and answered. ¡°Yeah, thank you for coming, Nurarihyon.¡± ¡°Send my regards to Lady Amaterasu, will ya! Let¡¯s go Riku, let¡¯s call Tsura and Setsuna before we leave. She is with Tsura to look for you when you suddenly disappear earlier.¡± Right, Setsuna was not here. So she¡¯s with Tsura? I bothered more people than I thought. My old man walked away to the back of the shrine with Magari. Soon, I looked at Kuroka and ask her to follow them with me which she replied with a nod. We met with Setsuna and Tsura in the back of the shrine and introduced Kuroka to them. Never in my wildest dream that the lustful and playful cat in DxD was this proper in her childhood. She didn¡¯t tell us about her sister yet, so I guess she¡¯s still wary about us, huh. Well, that will be fixed as time passed. We teleported back to our territory after that and my old man asked me and Kuroka to follow him to his room. Now, sitting in his room beside Kuroka with my old man in front of me, I asked him why did he call us here. ¡°What happened, old man? Why did you bring us here?¡± My old man, sitting with crossed legs as his elbow rested on his thighs and he smoked from his pipe suddenly said. ¡°Well, I thought that I need to ask something to that girl, Kuroka.¡± He looked at Kuroka with his sharp golden iris as if he¡¯s able to see the deepest part of a person. Kuroka¡¯s body tensed under my old man''s gaze before he turned to me. ¡°She¡¯s a reincarnated devil, right? If she¡¯s pursued by other devils, that means she has become stray. Am I wrong?¡± I looked at Kuroka and saw that her body shakes uncontrollably and she lowered her gaze to look at the floor. Looking at her states right now, I wanted to protect her. ¡°What¡¯s wrong with that, old man? We didn¡¯t know her story yet, so we can¡¯t decide for ourselves.¡± ¡°Nah, you¡¯re wrong Riku. What I wanted to say is, can you tell us our story, Kuroka?¡± My old man said in a lower tone than usual. ¡°As I said earlier, I will provide you shelter and protection. After all, your mother was a former member of our faction. It¡¯s our responsibility to take care of you.¡± Kuroka raised her head and looked at my old man with disbelief. ¡°You can believe me in this one. Magari, the Nekomata earlier is Fujimai''s friend. So you can believe her too.¡± She gulped her saliva and opened her mouth. ¡°¡­Alright¡± RaizarP Author Here~ More than 50 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks to the new Executive!! - Alexis Pipoz Big Thanks to the new Squad Leader!! - James31292 Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 10 – School ¡°Young Master~ Wake up~¡± I think I heard a girl''s voice along with some movement in my blanket. Well, maybe it¡¯s a dream. ¡°Young Master~ If you don¡¯t wake up soon, then Tsura will freeze you, you know?¡± The voice whispered with a sultry tone right in my left ear. This time I noticed that I wasn¡¯t dreaming and the girl''s voice was real. I opened my eyes instantly and was about to stand up only to notice a weight on top of me. ¡°Hya~¡± I looked down at the voice and saw a black-haired girl with big boobs wearing a loose black kimono laying down on top of my chest. The girl has a pair of black cat ears and 2 tails that moved to the left and right. ¡°Kuroka¡­¡± I called the name of the girl that was laying on top of me and she answered. ¡°Yes~ Young Master~ Kuroka is here. Do you want to have breakfast? Or Morning Kiss? Or¡­ Morning sex?¡± Kuroka get herself up and sat on top of me while saying that. She put her index finger in front of her mouth and that managed to increase her charm. I almost answered her with ''morning sex'', but another girl burst into my room with an icy atmosphere around her. The girl that just burst into my room has the same breast size as Kuroka. She wore a neat white Kimono with a blue flower pattern as her black hair fell straight until it reaches her waist. She has a frown on her face while looking at me and Kuroka. ¡°What are you doing in the morning, Young Master, Kuroka?¡± Her tone is cold and it sent a chill over my spine. ¡°As I said to young master, I asked him if she wanted morning sex with me nya~ Do you want to join, Tsura?¡± With Kuroka¡¯s offer, Tsura lost her composure and blushes. She peeked at me with her eyes as her icy atmosphere was gone. I calmly looked over Tsura and then said. ¡°Come here~¡± If Tsura previously blushes, now her face was as red as a tomato. She avert her gaze and turned away to face the other direction as she said. ¡°Young master, it¡¯s not the time to crack a joke! Commander has called you to his room!¡± She looked over her shoulder and looked at Kuroka. ¡°Kuroka, you come with me!¡± ¡°Eee~ But we didn¡¯t have sex yet nya~¡± ¡°As if you ever had sex with him! You are still a virgin!¡± Shouted Tsura at Kuroka. ¡°Well, I just thought that maybe today I could lose my virginity nya. It¡¯s a shame, young master. But shall we do it another time nya?¡± Kuroka stood up and walked over to Tsura as she waved her hand towards me. I stood up and nodded my head. ¡°Maybe next time, we could lose ours together~ 3 of us~¡± ¡°Let¡¯s go Kuroka! My mother also called us!¡± Tsura walked away at a fast pace while leaving Kuroka after she said that. I know that she tried to hide it but I think I saw her smile when I said that we could lose our virginity together. Well, she said that she was okay with it seven years ago when we first met. ¡°Well then, young master. It seems that Setsuna-san has called me too nya. See you in the noon~¡± Kuroka waved her hand to me as she walked away to chase after Tsura. ¡°Yeah, see you in the noon!¡± After everyone left me alone in my room, I tidied my futon and changed the yukata that I use to sleep into my striped black and green kimono. I also tied my hair into a low ponytail like usual and went to my old man''s room. I opened the room without knocking and greet my old man that was sitting behind his table. ¡°Yo, old man. Is there anything you need from me?¡± I say table but it was just a piece of wood around 30cm in height that he use to put his paperwork. ¡°You have gotten big huh, Riku? You¡¯re 16 years old right?¡± ¡°Yeah, and now I¡¯m stronger than you.¡± I said with a smirk on my face. It¡¯s been 7 years since I rescued Kuroka from the devils. In these 7 years, I trained my Youjutsu and Senjutsu under Magari and managed to master both of them in just 6 years. In the last year, I wanted to do my skill in a group fight. But unexpectedly, I awakened my sacred gear and it was the second best thing ever that happened in my life. ¡°Hahahaha, of course you are, Riku. Who would thought that you, a half-youkai to get that sacred gear? One of the thirteen Longinus, Telos Karma.¡± Yes, my sacred gear is one of the Longinus that is considered broken in its ability terms. It could force a change that the user wanted. If I use Telos Karma with my Fear, then I could force my enemy to believe that the presence that I created using my Fear is real and they wouldn¡¯t even think twice to attack it. Not only that, it was said that Telos Karma could change the history of the world. ¡°Tch, stop with the compliment, old man. If you called me here alone, then you have something important to talk about, right?¡± I closed the door behind me and sat in front of my old man. I eyed him and send a signal with my eyes to make him spit out anything that he wanted to talk about right now. ¡°Well, well. Don¡¯t be so hasty, Riku. Indeed, there is something that I request you to take care of. But before that, have you interested in attending a school?¡± With my old man''s word, I somehow have a bad feeling. I am right now 16 years old, bordering 17, at this age, I should¡¯ve been attending a high school as 2nd year. With my old man suddenly bringing up a school as a subject, I can¡¯t think of any other school other than Kuoh in his mind. ¡°You don¡¯t say that you wanted me to attend a school, right?¡± ¡°That¡¯s what I wanted to say. It¡¯s such a nice feeling having a smart son such as yourself.¡± My old man inhaled smoke from his pipe and laughed. My forehead twitched in annoyance because of his word. But when I thought about it calmly, there are lots of other schools other than Kuoh. The probability that he wanted me to attend Kuoh is high, but I need to make sure of it. ¡°So, what¡¯s the name of the school that you wanted me to attend?¡± My old man has a sly smile on his face and said. ¡°Kuoh academy.¡± Well, there goes my beautiful peace. Well, if I can¡¯t avoid it then I should enjoy it. As the saying goes, ¡®Life is such a bitch. If you don¡¯t want to fight, then just enjoy it.¡¯ RaizarP Author Here~ More than 50 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks to the new Executive!! - Alexis Pipoz Big Thanks to the new Squad Leader!! - Moltas ?kerstr?m - Ahhhhhhhhhhhhhh Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 11 – Introduction A grin was plastered on my face as I leaned a little towards my old man. ¡°Seems interesting, so what¡¯s the catch? I guess this has something to do with your word to Yasaka 7 years ago right, old man?¡± His smile turned into a feral grin that matched mine. ¡°Kuhahaha, you still remember my word 7 years ago, huh? Right, at that meeting we were talking about the annihilation of the Nekoshou clan in the underworld. When Kuroka told us her past, you realize that she was branded as SS-Class stray devil in the underworld, right?¡± I nodded my head while hearing his story. ¡°That¡¯s why the devil asked us, youkai, or rather Japan territory to give them one town. I and Yasaka decided to give them a town called Kuoh town, and it seems that last year 2 heiress of Satan came to take over the Kuoh Town from the previous governor.¡± I know that matters already but I still nodded my head on his word and give him my guess. ¡°So they attended that Kuoh Academy, but you don¡¯t trust them to be able to manage the Kuoh Town and send me to monitor them?¡± My old man grin became wider as he said. ¡°Correct! I was thinking to send Tsura and Kuroka with you to that town. You can also use this chance to do something to them, aren¡¯t you~¡± ¡°Bah, I could always do it if I wanted to. Only, I don¡¯t have fucking time to fuck because of all those training! After I finished my Senjutsu and Youjutsu training, my sacred gear was awakened and I need to train to control it too! You do know how Magari teaches us, old man.¡± ¡°Well, my condolences! Hahahahaha.¡± I was used to his antic so I didn¡¯t get angry anymore towards him. Well, you get used to weird things after being together with Nurarihyon for more than 15 years. But I still have some worries, especially Kuroka. ¡°But what about Kuroka, old man? She¡¯s still being pursued by devils right?¡± ¡°Oh, don¡¯t worry about that. The truth is that matter was finished 7 years ago. Lady Amaterasu visited the underworld and demanded that Kuroka''s status as SS-Class stray devil be revoked in exchange for one town.¡± ¡°Understandable. After all, Kuroka did kill her former master because she wanted to protect her sister.¡± ¡°Exactly! Also, her sister is attending that school too. So I thought that we could use this chance to forge their relationship again. But, Riku¡­¡± My old man''s tone become serious and I leaned a little closer to hear it clearly. ¡°As much as you can, bring some girls home, got it?¡± Without delay, I leaped to my old man and kicked him to his face while shouting. ¡°What do you say, old man!!¡± Unfortunately, he had used his Fear without me realizing it and what I kick was his fake self. I clicked my tongue and looked back to see my old man open the door and walk away while laughing. I exited the room too and heard my old man shouting from a far. ¡°OH Right!! Today is your first day of school, so go to Setsuna to get your uniform!!¡± ¡°Fucking old man!! Tell me that earlier!!¡± *** Inside a certain classroom in the 2nd year at Kuoh Academy, lots of the students chattered with each other. ¡°Hey, did you hear that we got 3 new students today, Aika?¡± a girl with no particular feature asked a glasses girl that has braided brown hair. The glasses girl, Kiryuu Aika fixed her glass and answered. ¡°Indeed, according to my information, the transfer student is 1 boy and 2 girls. From the rumor that I heard, the boy is more handsome than the Kuoh Prince, Kiba.¡± ¡°Really?! Then with him being here, we could balance the ratio of the man here! I hope he¡¯s not the same type as those trio perverts though.¡± The girl that said that eyed a group of 3 students that sat near the window while reading a porn book in the class. Those 3 students noticed her gaze and heard her. They stood up from their seat and the brown-haired boy shouted at the girl. ¡°What are you saying!! We are the true men, we believe that boobs reign supreme in this world!!¡± He shouted while pointing his finger towards the girls. While the other two, the boy with glasses and a bald boy with big ears nodded their head in agreement. ¡°Also, I heard from Buchou that the 2 girls that transferred here are a true beauty! A high-class one!¡± Continued the spiked brown-haired boy. ¡°Issei, nice info man!¡± Said the boy with the glass, Motohama. ¡°Nice info, Issei! How about their boobs?!¡± Asked the bald boy, Matsuda. At that time, the teacher entered the class and told the students to sit in their seats. ¡°All right class. Maybe lots of you already heard about the news, but we got 3 new transfer students from Kyoto. You can come in!¡± The door of the classroom was opened and 3 students wearing Kuoh Academy uniforms entered the classroom. Walked in the front is a boy around 180cm in height with black hair tied in a low ponytail and his bang was covering his face, partly hiding his golden iris. He has a mysterious aura around him and the girls in the class shrieked when they saw him. The boy was Nura Riku. ¡°Kyaaaa! He¡¯s so handsome!¡± ¡°Yes!! He¡¯s more handsome than Kiba-kun!¡± Followed behind him were 2 female students, each has long black hair. The ones that differentiate them were the colors of their eyes and their atmosphere. One of them has a friendly aura around her and has the same golden eyes as the man. While the other one has an icy aura and has a bright blue iris. They stood in front of the class with Riku in the middle. ¡°Well, you can introduce yourself. Let¡¯s see, let¡¯s start with Kuroka-san.¡± ¡°Alright!¡± The girl with golden iris stepped forwards and introduced herself. ¡°I think it¡¯s nice to meet you~ My name is Toujou Kuroka! Let¡¯s get along~¡± Kuroka winked after she introduced herself, she stepped back and the other girl stepped forward to introduce herself. ¡°WOOOOOOOOHH!!¡± The perverted trio shouted in excitement with Kuroka¡¯s introduction. ¡°Nice to meet you, My name is Yuki Tsura. I hope we can get along.¡± Tsura stepped back after she introduced herself with an icy expression. Lastly, Riku stepped forward with a smile that bewitched all girls in the class. ¡°Yo~¡± He raised his right hand and introduce himself. ¡°My name is Nura Riku, nice to meet you.¡± ¡°Kyaaaa!!!!!!¡± ¡°Oh no! I will faint!!¡± As usual, Riku''s smile has big destructive power against girls. RaizarP Author Here~ More than 50 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks to the new Squad Leader!! - Quellec - James Smith - Haricharan Raghunathan Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 12 – Plan to meet ¡°So, what do you think about this school?¡± I asked Kuroka and Tsura that sat in front of me to eat their lunch. It was time to eat lunch so we were in the cafeteria together to get one. To my surprise, Kuroka has hidden her cat feature and acted like a normal human in this school. Also, why did she use Toujou as her family name?! Koneko would instantly know about you! Well, not that I tried to hide the fact that we are youkai though. I just wanted to observe the situation for a while. When we were introduced to our class, I sensed a devil inside the class that turned out to be Issei. Well, Asia was not in the class yet, so Issei must have just been killed yesterday or 2 days ago. I forgot the detail though. ¡°Well~ This school reeks of devils nya~¡± Answered Kuroka. Damn, that nya, in the end, was so cute. She got that habit after she lived with Magari for a year. At first, I was surprised and thought that it was strange, but now I accepted it as cute~ ¡°Kuroka, this is devil''s school. That¡¯s why it reeks of the devil and that¡¯s also why we hide our aura using Senjutsu.¡± Added Tsura. ¡°But~ Young master didn¡¯t use any Senjutsu to hide his aura nya~ What can you say about that!¡± ¡°Young master is half-human! Right now he¡¯s in his human form so he didn¡¯t emit any kind of aura!¡± Seeing their exchange, I chuckled a little and mediate them. ¡°Tsura was not wrong, Kuroka. But I did use a Senjutsu to hide my sacred gear you know?¡± ¡°Is that so? I don¡¯t notice it nya~¡± We chatted while eating our lunch that was served on the table by Tsura. We just talked about a random thing before finally, I heard a commotion that came from behind me. Kuroka and Tsura turned towards the source of the commotion before they quickly lost their interest and focused on their meal again. I, who loved fun things, turned around to look at what was causing such commotion. There, I saw 4 people enter the cafeteria. Walked in the front were 2 girls, one with bright red hair while the other has short hair and wearing glasses. I recognize them as Rias Gremory and Sona Sitri, the heiress of satans. They were beautiful, that I admit. But, somehow, or for other reasons, I like eastern beauty like Kuroka and Tsura more than them. Walking behind them were their respective queens, Himejima Akeno and Shinra Tsubaki. Both are eastern beauty and my type, well they are everyone''s type I guess. I too quickly lost interest in them and continue my meal while chatting with Kuroka and Tsura again. While chatting, I suddenly thought about Asia. If she was not in Issei¡¯s class yet, that means she¡¯s still alive right? If I remember correctly, she would be killed around 2 or 3 days after Issei was reincarnated as a devil. I forgot the exact time but I thought that timeframe is correct. I did note all important events that will be happening in the DxD world when I was a child, but right now I mostly forgot about the small event that was not written in my note. I just brushed those small events as not important at all. ¡°Excuse me, you are the new transfer student, Nura Riku, Toujou Kuroka, and Yuki Tsura, right?¡± I noticed a new voice that came from my right and looked over the source of the voice. Standing there is the student council president and Sitri clan next head, Sona Sitri alongside her queen. Hmm, could it be that she realized our identity? Well, that doesn¡¯t matter. ¡°Yes, do you need something from us?¡± I asked while giving my best smile to her. I saw her expression change for a second but she quickly recover and put on a stoic expression again. ¡®Hoo~ A tough nut to crack huh?¡¯ I thought in my mind. ¡°Yes, I hope to talk with the three of you. Can you visit the student council room after school?¡± Asked Sona while she fixed her glasses with her right hand. Tsura was about to refuse but I stopped her and answered Sona. ¡°Sure~ It¡¯s such an honor to be invited by a beautiful girl like you~¡± I tried to jest with her but she just nodded her head and answered. ¡°Alright. I will wait for you in the student council room. Should I ask Tsubaki to pick you up after school? You are just transferred here so I guess you don¡¯t know the layout of this school yet.¡± ¡°Please do so.¡± ¡°Well then, please excuse me.¡± After Sona finished with what she wanted, she excused herself with a small bow and walked away. My gaze followed Sona''s track until finally, Kuroka said. ¡°So, what are you going to do, Young Master~ I guess you wanted to pull a prank on her, nya~?¡± I looked at Kuroka who has a sly smile on her face and answered her. ¡°Oh, of course. What should we do, I wonder~¡± a sly grin crept on my face as I heard Tsura let out a sigh beside me. *** Inside the student council room, Sona Sitri sat on the chair behind the table and her peerage stood neatly in front of her. She turned to look at her queen and asked ¡°Tsubaki, do you find anything about them? To have 3 transferred students in this school at once is suspicious. And all of them are in the same class as Rias¡¯s new pawn, Hyoudou Issei.¡± ¡°Yes.¡± Tsubaki picked a stack of paper that was laid on the table and reported her finding. ¡°I managed to find out that Toujou Kuroka is indeed what we suspected her to be. She¡¯s the former SS-Class Stray from seven years ago. She was supposed to be under Youkai protection but now she¡¯s here without us knowing what her reason is.¡± Sona furrowed her brows as she said. ¡°Continue.¡± Tsubaki nodded her head and flipped the paper and continued her explanation. ¡°I suspected Nura Riku as a youkai, but his aura and energy are that of a human. Yuki Tsura on another hand, is a youkai. We only managed to find that in our limited time, so I suggested being careful when dealing with them later, Kaichou.¡± Sona nodded her head and looked over the window in the student council''s room as she muttered. ¡°Who are you? What¡¯s your reason for being in this school?¡± RaizarP Author Here~ More than 50 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks to the new Executive!! - Fate Hydrax Big Thanks to the new Squad Leader!! - Andrew Lagasse - Aaron Royal - Tempest1618 - Bj?rn Mortensen - Eduardo Tolentino - Lumn Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 13 – Devils and Youkai Ding Dong The bell that ended the school has been rung and every student stood up from their seats to continue their daily activities. Some of them were participating in a club activity that was held after school. Some of them were planning to hang out with their friends. Meanwhile, I, Tsura, and Kuroka were waiting for Shinra Tsubaki to pick us in our class. I sat on my seat that was located in the back of the class while Tsura and Kuroka sat on their own seat that was located beside me. With Tsura on my left and Kuroka on my right. I watched our classmates leave the classroom and that was including Issei that was picked up by Kiba Yuuto. I guess the devil has noticed that our group was not normal. Well, I blame Kuroka for using her real name in this case. ¡°So young master, are you going to reveal yourself to the devils this early nya~? I think they have realized my identity nya~¡± Asked Kuroka. ¡°Nah~ I think they just treat me as a human who knows the supernatural. I bet they noticed that Tsura is a youkai though, thanks to a certain Nekoshou.¡± I put a smug smile on my face and faced Kuroka directly. My hands were behind my head as I leaned back to my chair backrest, putting myself in a comfortable position. ¡°I see.¡± Kuroka has a solemn expression on her face as she continued. ¡°It was Shirone, right?¡± Tsura who was watching us in silence approached Kuroka and hugged her from behind. As a result, Kuroka''s smile was back on her face and I has a big smile on my face too. ¡®Watching two beautiful girls hugging each other is such a blessing~¡¯ I silently thought to myself. ¡°So, Kuroka. When will you talk to her? I know that you wanted to meet her all this time and I know it was because of me that you can¡¯t meet her yet. But, I think she will present at the student council later you know?¡± I said to Kuroka while having a serious tone. ¡°That¡¯s right, Kuroka. If you delay it any longer, you will have more difficulty facing her.¡± Added Tsura as she released her hug and approached me before standing beside me. As much as I wanted to tease her, I will put her feeling bare and help her to fix her problem as fast as she can. That way, I can enjoy teasing her more. That¡¯s a win-win for us! ¡°I will talk to her if she is there, young master nya~¡± As Kuroka said that, the classroom door was opened and Shinra Tsubaki entered the classroom. After looking around for a while, she found us and approached us. ¡°Nura Riku, Toujou Kuroka, and Yuki Tsura right? Please follow me, I will take you to the student council room.¡± Said Shinra Tsubaki with a serious face. ¡°Alright!¡± I stood up and smiled. ¡°So, how should we call you? Is Shinra-senpai okay with you?¡± Shinra Tsubaki, or Shinra-senpai nodded her head. ¡°Yes, that¡¯s fine. Now please follow me, Kaichou was waiting for your arrival.¡± We followed Shinra-senpai through the corridor and we¡¯ve arrived in front of our destination, the student council room after walking for a minute or so. We stopped in front of the door and Shinra-Senpai knocked on the door three times. ¡°It¡¯s me, Kaichou. I bring Nura Riku and the other transfer students as you instructed.¡± ¡°Enter.¡± Said the voice beyond the door. Shinra-senpai opened the door and we were let to go inside the room. As I¡¯ve expected, Sona Sitri with all her peerage present was waiting for us. Not only that, but Rias Gremory is also present in the room along with her peerage too. I scanned the room before my gaze stopped at Shirone, or rather Koneko who has a shocked face when she saw us. I traced her gaze and saw that Kuroka also looked at her with a longing expression on her face. I raised my left and blocked their line of sight as I whispered. ¡°Not now. I will give you the chance later.¡± Kuroka give me a small nod as she put a small smile on her face to act as if nothing happened. I peeked at Tsura and saw she has put on her usual icy expression and was relieved that she act like natural. ¡°Welcome, Nura Riku, Yuki Tsura, and Toujou Kuroka. Or should I call you the former SS-Class stray devil, Kuroka?¡± ¡°Well well, what a welcome.¡± I said in a calm manner while having a big smile on my face. ¡°Will you let me sit before you say your greeting? I am tired of walking from my classroom to this room~¡± I put on a playful smile similar to that that was always and will always be plastered on my old man''s face. What can I say, son will always imitate his dad. ¡°I¡¯m sorry for that, you can sit on that couch over there.¡± Said Sona as she pointed at the couch in my right. ¡°Thank you~¡± I said and I walked to the couch and sat in the middle. Tsura silently sat on my right while Kuroka sat on my left with a smooth movement. I see that she¡¯s back to her usual self, that¡¯s good. She was always good at acting so I am just glad that she was able to put it on in time and left her personal matter for later. When we sat on the couch, Sona stood up and approached the couch across us and sat on the right side of the couch. As if it was natural, Rias flicked her hair and sat beside Sona. Their respective queen was stood on guard behind them, seemingly ready to act if something were to happen. Once again, I scanned the room to understand the situation better. Rias¡¯s peerage was standing behind her while Sona¡¯s peerage was standing behind her too. ¡®Well well, aren¡¯t we outnumbered by lots? It doesn¡¯t matter though, I could always beat them right now.¡¯ ¡°Now, the re-¡° Sona was about to speak to tell me the reason for us being here but I cut her off with a shout. ¡°Wait!¡± I extended my open palm towards Sona and Rias that were surprised by my sudden shout. ¡°Pfft!¡± I heard a noise from my right and peeked a little and saw Tsura was holding her laughter. Tsura, I bet you¡¯ve been corrupted by Setsuna right? There is no way my Tsura was laughing with just this much. Ignoring Tsura that was holding her laughter, I crossed my hand and leaned to the couch while putting a grin on my face. ¡°Shouldn¡¯t we introduce ourselves first?¡± Sona nodded her head and introduce herself. ¡°I see, that¡¯s true. Forgive me, I forgot about it because all students in this school already know my name. My name is Souna Shitori, the student council president of this school. Or maybe you will be more comfortable with Sona Sitri?¡± ¡°Umu, then the red-haired beauty over there? What¡¯s your name?¡± I asked with a flirtatious tone to shake her off. But contrary to my expectation, she just smiled with pride and put her hand above her breast. ¡°My name is Rias Gremory! The next head of the Gremory clan.¡± She introduced herself without even hiding her supernatural nature. I wonder how could this girl was able to survive in this world. But when considering that she is Lucifer''s little sister, I guess no one with the right mind will try to mess with her. Well except that maniac exorcist or Kokabiel. ¡°I see, I see. So both of you are from rich families? And from your introduction, the student council president hid her identity from the other students that she was in fact a rich person? That¡¯s understandable.¡± I nodded my head repeatedly to show that I has understood what they mean. I looked at Sona and saw her forehead twitched a little, showing her annoyance and miscalculation. ¡®Kuhahahaha, let¡¯s play, devil. I will show you how we, Nurarihyon Youkai do our thing!¡¯ RaizarP Author Here~ More than 50 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks to the new Executive!! - Fate Hydrax Big Thanks to the new Squad Leader!! - Brandon Wilson - Tarlock - Mohanned Alosaimi - Yuharo Wutong - Tyler Ray Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 14 – Controversy ¡°You¡¯re correct, but not entirely, Riku-kun.¡± Said Rias while crossing her legs. Hmm, it¡¯s such a strange feeling to be called Riku-kun. All this time I¡¯ve been called young master or just Riku by my old man, so it¡¯s such a strange feeling to be called Riku-kun. Somehow, after Rias call me Riku-kun, I felt cold air from my right and looked at Tsura. I saw her have displeased look and emit cold air from her body. I put my hand on top of her hand and she stopped emitting cold air as she looked at her hand. The devils realize that and frowned, well there goes my plan to act like an idiot. Rias has a smug smile on her face while I saw Sona has a small smile on her face. ¡®Tch!¡¯ I clicked my tongue in my mind that my plan to play with them had been for nothing and failed at my first move. Well, I am not angry toward Tsura that made my plan fail, but I was a bit disappointed because I can¡¯t play anymore in this meeting. I think she needs a bit of punishment? Right, she definitely needs to be punished for that~ ¡°It seems that I don¡¯t need to explain any further don¡¯t I? After all you are sitting beside a supernatural entity like myself.¡± Said Rias in a haughty tone. Yes, I don¡¯t need you to explain it to me. I am half-youkai after all. ¡°I¡¯m sorry, young master.¡± Whispered Tsura in a low voice that only I could hear her. I just held her hand tighter to show her that it¡¯s okay before I pulled my hand and put them behind my head. ¡°You¡¯re no fun~ I just wanted to play for a while. Well then, you can tell me your reason for calling us here, Kaichou.¡± Still smiling, I said to Sona in a calm manner. They were confused when they are seeing my calmness. Maybe they thought that when they show me that they know my group, they could take the conversation in their favor. Unfortunately for them, they don¡¯t know me that well. I¡¯ve always played around and didn¡¯t care for anything unless it has some ties with me. And they don¡¯t know, that I don¡¯t take them seriously at this stage. They are still weak, too weak for me to take them seriously. Maybe when Issei got his balance breaker I will take them a bit more seriously, just a bit more though. ¡°Well then, Nura Riku. I assume that you know about the Supernatural world, right?¡± I am thinking about how to answer Sona¡¯s question for a while. Whether I should jest around and make my way out or should I tell her flatly that I knew about the Supernatural world. Both were a good option for me. If I jest around, I could enjoy watching their antics in this school but there is a chance they will force or ask Kuroka and Tsura to join one of their peerages. If I answered her flatly that I knew about the Supernatural world, my guess is Rias would ask me to join her peerage, or rather that¡¯s a certainty if I remember her personality correctly. ¡®What should I choose~ I could always play if I jest around but Kuroka and Tsura will be monitored by them and that will be annoying. Maybe I should tell her flatly that I knew about the Supernatural world but hide my identity? That works too~¡¯ I crossed my arms and looked at the ceiling with my eyes closed. If someone saw me, they would see me as someone who hesitated to answer Sona''s question, and that works wonder because when I opened my eyes to look at them, Sona and Rias have a big smile as if their plan were a success. I lowered my head and look at Sona''s eyes with a smug smile on my face and said. ¡°What? Supernatural world? Do you still believe that something like that existed? Ghost is not real you know?¡± When I said that, suddenly Rias and her peerage¡¯s bat wings emerged from their back followed by Sona and her peerage. I looked at Kuroka and saw her still kept her composure and looked back at me while tilting her head. Well, that¡¯s cute but it¡¯s not the time to admire it. ¡®Now I was checkmated, is it the time to pull that?¡¯ I looked at Tsura and winked my right eyes towards her. She was confused for a moment before putting out bad surprised acting. ¡°W-woah, w-what¡¯s t-that?!¡± Said Tsura in monotone. As expected, her acting is bad. Well, that¡¯s my intention though, I could always act for Kuroka to act if I wanted a good actress. Rias smirked in a haughty manner and said. ¡°Cease your bad action, I know that the three of you are related or at least know about Supernatural.¡± ¡®Nice! She bit the bait~¡¯ ¡°Heeh~ Is that so?¡± I put the same haughty act like her and put my legs on top of the table in front of me. Sona and the rest of her peerage frown upon my act while I was waiting for a reaction that I hoped to come from Rias¡¯s peerage. ¡°Hey! You handsome bastard! I won¡¯t allow your attitude in front of Buchou! Put your legs down right now!!¡± Shouted Issei as he pointed her hand towards me. I lowered my head a little to hide my amused smile and gestured to Tsura with my finger. Tsura saw my sign and let out a chilly pressure to intimidate Issei. I peeked through my hair that hide my eyes and saw that everyone flinched and hug their body because of the cold that was emitted by Tsura. But their chill was only the beginning, they shuddered even further when they heard Tsura''s cold tone. ¡°Will you shut up? My young master is talking with your King, know your place! I''ve been holding my anger towards your friend''s attitude, but shouting at young master is unforgivable!" With the devils shuddered under Tsura¡¯s pressure, I raised my head and looked down on them with my eyes. ¡°Now, it¡¯s my third time asking this but, what¡¯s your purpose in calling us here?¡± Now that the table of superiority has turned against them, the devils gritted their teeth in frustration as they keep silent from the question that I asked. ¡°If there is nothing that you wanted, we will take our leave.¡± I put my legs back to the ground and stood up. Tsura and Kuroka silently follow me from behind. I opened the door of the student council room by myself and stopped to look at the devils for the last time. I saw them looking down in horror while hugging their body. ¡®It seems Tsura has gone too far to them. At least I have to let them know that we will not make any move towards them if they did nothing to us.¡¯ ¡°Don¡¯t worry though, we are not your enemy.¡± I left that word to the devil and exited the student council room with Kuroka and Tsura. ¡®Ah~ That was fun. The best way to answer is to not answer, what a genius move! I must thank my old man for this chance, it was rare for me to have this much fun in a day.¡¯ RaizarP Author Here~ More than 50 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks to the new Executive!! - Fate Hydrax - Noob Gamer - Linus Name Big Thanks to the new Squad Leader!! - drefly13 - FadedWaffle - Aeden Emrys - Diabet0s - Leinhart31 - Bert Torres - Julias Rocamora - shaei-phet - r3d3v3 - Talsen - Keldarr - Suicidal Fox - Sedeho Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 15 – The Reason and New Home I walked out of the school with Kuroka and Tsura beside me. After playing with the devils, I thought that maybe I will have to stretch myself and give a little punishment for Tsura because of her mistake that lead the devils to be certain of our origins. "What should we do nya~ young master? I think the devils were suspicious of your origin and starting to investigate it because of earlier nya~" Kuroka asked me as she took my right arm and bury it in her breast. Tsura who saw what Kuroka did just frowned in displeasure but she didn''t say anything. Strange, she usually told Kuroka to back away from me. Was it because she felt guilty because of her blunder earlier? "We will do nothing. I don''t even care if they know my identity, just feeling a little bit disappointed because they didn''t realize my real identity when both of you are calling me young master. Did they do their job properly?" I answered Kuroka with a smile on my face. "Is that so nya~? You heard him, Tsura. So don''t feel so down because of that nya!" Kuroka release my arms and walked normally beside me. ''She wanted to console Tsura with her question, she anticipated my answer and use that to make Tsura go back to her feet again. Good job, Kuroka'' "Don''t worry too much about it, Tsura. We all make a mistake. What''s important is to not repeat the same mistake twice." I added Kuroka''s word to make Tsura feel better. "Yes, but I still make you disappointed with that, young master. I''ve promised to live to your expectation and control my power but I failed. My power leaked out just because of that woman calling you with prefix kun, I failed you, young master!" I smacked Tsura''s head with my fist and made her yelp in surprise. "Ouch!" with my hand still in her head, I patted her head and console her. "Don''t be stupid, your control over your power is good enough." Because of my flirtatious tone, Tsura blushes and lowered her head while muttering. "¡­yes." "Now that''s settled~ Young master, should we check our new apartment room nya? I heard from Setsuna-san that they bought us an apartment near here nya!" "Let''s check it then." We walked for a while and arrived at the apartment that Setsuna prepared for us. How could I say it, the apartment that she prepared was. "It''s big." Said Tsura who managed to calm herself again after walking for a while. "Indeed nya." "How about we enter it? I have the key to our room with me." I said as I entered the apartment. The apartment was around 18 floors high with around 20 rooms on each floor. Our room was on the 15th floor, the first room on the right of the elevator. I didn''t say this to both of them, but Setsuna just bought us a room. We''ve arrived in front of our room and I opened it with the key that Setsuna gave me. We were surprised because the room was big enough for three of us to live in, so that''s the reason why Setsuna only bought us one room? "Yosh, let''s look around this room!" I said to the two girls which they answered with a really high spirit. "Yes!!" "Yes nya!!" I entered the room and looked around the room. I saw that the kitchen alongside the guest and living room were in the same room right after we walked the hallway. The dining room was also in front of the kitchen so it''s convenient. I named the room an all-purpose room in my mind and looked around the room. There were 2 doors on the right side and 1 door on the left side of the room. There is also a veranda that was separated from the room with a window panel. "Young master, we will check this room nya!" Said Kuroka while she went to the door on the left. "I will follow Kuroka, young master." Added Tsura as she followed Kuroka. They opened the door and went inside the room, leaving me alone. "Well, I guess I will check the right side of the door." I muttered and walked towards the first door on the right. I opened the room and looked around to see the details of the room. Unsurprisingly, the room beyond the door that I opened was a dressing room and shower room with a big bathtub inside. The bathtub was so big that it could fit three of us going inside together. I closed the door behind me and try to turn to make sure that the water could flow. Well, they are all fine and I exited the room to see the second one. I opened the second door and was greeted by a room with a big mirror and sink. Under the sink was a washing machine and right across the mirror was a stack of baskets to keep the dirty clothes. Like earlier, I turned on the sink to make sure that the water flow with no problem. There is one more door that leads into the toilet inside the second room with a standard japan toilet installed. I exited the room and went to the veranda by opening the glass panel which turned out to be a sliding door. The veranda was not too big, but enough to put some flower cases and hang laundry. Satisfied with the room, I nodded my head and realize something. ''If 2 doors on the right were shower room and the other is washing room and toilet, doesn''t that mean there is only 1 bedroom on the left?'' I went back to the all-purpose room and closed the sliding door behind me. I looked at the only door on the left side of the room and gulped my saliva. ''They didn''t come out from the room since they entered it. Did something happen? Or are they waiting for me to enter the room?'' I walked to the door and put my hand on the handle, hesitating a little whether I open the door or wait for them to open it themselves. ''Ah, screw it! 7 years ago Tsura said that I need to wait until we are adult to do it, and now that I''ve turned into a splendid adult I don''t need to wait anymore right?'' I opened the door with no hesitation and entered it. As I''ve guessed, the door leads into a bedroom that was painted white. In the middle of the bathroom was a king-sized bed that could be used by three of us together with some space left. But, right now I can''t really appreciate the bedroom, because my gaze was locked by two beauty that lay on top of the bed. "Young master, you finally entered the room nya~" Said Kuroka in a sultry voice. "We''ve been waiting, young master." Added Tsura. The reason why my gaze was focused on them was that they only wear their underwear while laying on the bed! I see, so they are waiting for me to make my move, huh. Youkai matured at age of 14. My Youkai form also stopped growing when I hit 14 so it''s fine, right? Tsura was 18 this year and Kuroka was ... let''s not talk about her but she''s older than Tsura for sure. It''s my fault huh, I said that I will hold Tsura when she''s an adult but I make her wait for 4 years. I need to make sure to love her enough to return those 4 years. I approached them, climbing on the bed between them, and said with a smile. "Both of you are beautiful." RaizarP Author Here~ More than 50 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks to the new Executive!! - Noob Gamer - Linus Name Big Thanks to the new Squad Leader!! - Primordi - Zero_Requiem Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 16 – One is Good, Two are Perfect (18+) Content Warning: NSFW The NSFW will be continued in the next chapter. You can wait for tomorrow if you don''t want to be left in the middle of *ehem* failing NNN. ***** ¡°Young master¡­¡± said Tsura with an expression of longing. Her face has turned red because of embarrassment, but her heart beating fast because of excitement. She had waited for this day when her young master finally embraced her with a loving expression. ¡°Shh, don¡¯t call me young master for now. Just call me Riku.¡± Riku said with a soft tone as her face approached Tsura¡¯s. Their lips met with each other as Tsura closed her eyes, trying to feel her first kiss with her young master, Riku with every sense that she has. ¡°Riku-sama~ I want a kiss too nya~¡± Their kiss didn¡¯t last long because of another voice that urged Riku for a kiss. Riku separated his lip from Tsura¡¯s and unconsciously Tsura let out a voice of disappointment. ¡°Ah¡­¡± ¡°Don¡¯t worry, I will love both of you equally.¡± Riku fixed his position and sat with crossed legs on top of the bed. He patted his thighs with both of her hands, gesturing for Kuroka and Tsura to sit on top of his thighs. ¡°Come here.¡± Kuroka, with her ears and tails coming out because of her excitement, crawled in seductive manned towards Riku¡¯s left thigh and planted a deep kiss right after she sat on top of his thigh. ¡°Mmh, mh¡­ mmmh.¡± She let out a seductive voice as she tried to pry into Riku¡¯s lip using her tongue. Without resisting, Riku attacked her back using his tongue and squeezed Kuroka¡¯s breast using her left hand, and surprised Kuroka. ¡°Mhh~!¡± Tsura looked at both of them that was kissing deeply becomes jealous. She crawled over Riku and put his hand on her breast. Feeling a soft sensation on his right hand, Riku squeezed it and Tsura let out a soft moan of pleasure. ¡°Ahn~ Riku-sama~¡± Riku, hearing Tsura¡¯s moan finally separated his lips from Kuroka, creating strands of saliva that connected their tongue. ¡°Haa¡­ haaa¡­¡± Kuroka was out of breath because of the continuous kiss with Riku. She was laid weakly and leaned against Riku¡¯s shoulder, pressed her breast against Riku¡¯s arm. Riku turned towards Tsura as he felt his blood burning. He wanted to ravage them, make them his forever. He took off Tsura¡¯s bra using his right hand as he leaned his face towards her. He kissed Tsura and inserted his tongue into Tsura¡¯s mouth, surprising Tsura but she just accepted his advance while enjoying his kiss. ¡°Hmnn~ Ahn~¡± She let out an occasional muffled moan and after a while Riku was finally able to take Tsura¡¯s bra off from her, revealing a beautiful two pink peaks of Tsura''s. He ended his kiss with Tsura and looked at her in the eyes before resuming the kiss. His right hand kept playing with Tsura¡¯s breast, sending her pleasure through her entire being. Kuroka recovered from the kiss, took off her underwear too, and approached Riku¡¯s crotch which formed a tent because of a boner. ¡°Nya~ look at this.¡± Said Kuroka in a seductive voice as she loosened Riku¡¯s pants and took out his cock. Because of his boner, his cock has stood straight in front of Kuroka¡¯s face, surprising her with his 7-inch dick. Feeling liberating on his crotch, Riku ended his kiss with Tsura and his breath was ragged. ¡°Haa¡­haa¡­¡± Tsura was in no different fate from Riku, strength has left her body because of the lack of air and she leaned to Riku¡¯s shoulder. Riku managed to catch her before she collapsed fully and lay her head on his thigh, near his cock before turning his attention to Kuroka. ¡°Kuroka, you don¡¯t need to force yourself you know?¡± Snapping back from her surprise, she looked at Riku on his face. The way she looked at Riku was different from earlier. Right now her gaze was filled with lust, seemingly turning her pupil into a heart shape. ¡°I was surprised nya~ To think Riku-sama hide such amazing weapon~¡± As she said that, Kuroka touched Riku¡¯s dick gently with her right hand as she leaned her face closer to Riku¡¯s ear. ¡°I want it inside me nya,¡± She said in a seductive tone as she pulled back her head and leaned towards Riku¡¯s cock, and licked the tip of his cock using her tongue. ¡°Ugh¡­¡± Riku unintentionally let out a sound because of the pleasure from when Kuroka licked the tip of his cock. Kuroka kept stroking his cock with her right hand and licked all over his dick using her tongue, sending pleasure to Riku. She repeated the movement for how many times until Tsura recovered from her exhaustion state and joined too. ¡°Riku-sama~¡± Her voice has turned soft and sultry, making Riku want to eat immediately. She leaned towards Riku¡¯s cock and licked it together with Kuroka, sending more pleasure to Riku. Riku didn¡¯t stay idle as the two girls licked his cock, his hand slowly extended towards the girls¡¯ ass and grabbed them, making the girl yelp in surprise. ¡°Nya!¡± ¡°Ahn~¡± They stopped licking Riku¡¯s cock and looked at him with red faces as Riku played with their ass. ¡°Why did you stop?¡± ¡°It¡¯s good nya~ please play with my pussy Riku-sama~¡± Without answering Kuroka, Riku¡¯s hands proceeded to their pussy and caressed it. ¡°Ahn~ R-Riku-sama more~¡± ¡°Nyaa~ I-nya~¡± Moans of pleasure were filling the room as Riku continue to caress their pussy. Kuroka and Tsura continue licking Riku¡¯s cock as they moaned in pleasure that Riku¡¯s hands send them. Riku¡¯s cock was wet because it was covered by the two girls¡¯ saliva. They licked his cock¡¯s from the tip to the base. As if Kuroka enjoyed it, she put Riku¡¯s cock to her mouth, giving him a blowjob. Tsura who lost the cock decided to lean on Riku¡¯s chest, pressing her breast to his chest while Riku¡¯s hand played with her pussy. She kissed Riku vigorously as her tongue entered his mouth and her arm circled behind Riku¡¯s neck. ¡°Ahn, mn¡­ ahnn.¡± Kuroka and Tsura¡¯s pussy were drenched in their love juices now, making Riku¡¯s finger wet. He retracts his hand from Kuroka¡¯s pussy and focused on Tsura¡¯s pussy. Feeling lonely on her crotch, Kuroka started playing with her pussy using her own hand while still giving him a blowjob. The pleasure was sent to Riku until he finally can¡¯t hold it anymore and sprayed his semen inside Kuroka¡¯s mouth. ¡°Mhhnn!¡± Surprised by the sudden stream of semen that filled her mouth, Kuroka separated from Riku¡¯s cock while looking at it twitched after separating from her mouth. Not only Riku, Tsura whose pussy was played by Riku can¡¯t hold herself back and get her first orgasm as she separated from Riku. ¡°Ahn aaahhh~ Cumming~¡± A gush of love juices was squirted from Tsura¡¯s pussy, drenching Riku¡¯s hand and the bed. She collapsed to the bed because of the pleasure that she can¡¯t handle and passed out because of exhaustion. Gulp A sound of gulping was heard from Kuroka as she swallowed Riku¡¯s semen that was in her mouth. She opened her mouth wide for Riku to see as she said. ¡°Riku-sama~ I am not cumming yet, nya. Will you help me?¡± Kuroka lays on her bed as she spread his pussy open, revealing a pink shade that made Riku swallow his saliva. Throwing his reasoning away, Riku approached Kuroka as he whispered to her ear lovingly. ¡°I love you, Kuroka.¡± ¡°I love you too nya~ Riku-sama~ Hurry up~ I can¡¯t hold back anymore nya~¡± RaizarP Author Here~ More than 50 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks to the new Executive!! - Noob Gamer - Linus Name Big Thanks to the new Squad Leader!! - Not a Shrimp - Zelx - Boklau - Kaiseth Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 17 – One is Good, Two are Perfect 2 (18+) Riku kissed Kuroka with his tongue inserted while playing with her breast using his right hand. ¡°Ahn¡­hnm~¡± Another muffled moan was heard from Kuroka. Their kiss lasted as long as the previous one as they enjoyed it together. Riku slowly bring her cock to Kuroka¡¯s wet pussy and slide it in one go, causing Kuroka¡¯s back to arch as she moaned and separated her lips from their kiss. ¡°Ahn! Nyaaaa!¡± Riku¡¯s cock penetrated Kuroka¡¯s wet pussy with no problem, causing pleasure to be sent to both of them as they stay still for a second. ¡°Haa- haa- are you okay?¡± ¡°Ahn, more~ you can move, Riku-sama~ give me more!¡± Begged Kuroka as she circled her hands around Riku¡¯s neck and bring his face closer to kiss him. Riku began to move his hip while giving Kuroka a kiss. His hands also didn¡¯t stand idly as he played with Kuroka¡¯s breast and his left hand was pinching her nipple, playing with them. Both of them were indulged in the new sensations as their body came together with each other. Riku ended his kiss as he straightened his back and moved his hip faster, causing pleasure moans escaping Kuroka¡¯s mouth without stopping. ¡°Ahn~ More! Give me more nya!¡± moan of pleasure sounded without stopping as Kuroka¡¯s breasts were swaying, matching her body movement. Her hands gripped the bed sheet as her expression twisted in pleasure. Droll was dripping from her mouth, but she didn¡¯t care and stuck her tongue out to invite Riku to kiss her. Accepting her offer, Riku bent his body and suck on Kuroka¡¯s tongue while swinging his hips at a faster pace, pleasuring Kuroka¡¯s pussy. Their lips separated once more as Riku said. ¡°Kuroka, I¡¯m close!¡± ¡°Ahn~ Aaah~ nyaa, me too~ give it to me, Riku-sama!¡± Riku quickened his pace as Kuroka moaned in pleasure until finally, he can¡¯t hold it back anymore. ¡°I¡¯m cumming!¡± Riku pulled his cock as his semen sprayed all over Kuroka¡¯s body. Kuroka was also at her wit''s end as her love juices squirted out from her pussy at the same time. ¡°Ahhn cumming~¡± Exhausted, Kuroka laid on the bed with a blissful expression, contrary to Riku who was still vigorous down there. He turned to look at Tsura but he saw her still sleeping beside Kuroka. He was a bit disappointed but just shrugged it off because he can always do it another day. He got off the bed he grabbed his clothes on the ground and walked out of the room. When he reached the door handle, he looked back to see 2 girls sleeping soundly with blissful faces while covered with his semen. He smiled a little and exited the room, still naked while holding his clothes, and took a shower to cleanse himself from the smell. *** NSFW END *** After cleansing myself, I sat on the couch in the all-purpose room. I looked outside the window and let out a long sigh. The sky has turned orange as the sun has almost hidden from the world and invited the night. ¡°What should I do now¡­ We just have sex as soon as we entered the apartment, but it¡¯s not even night yet!¡± I just accepted them on impulse and now I don¡¯t know what to do now. As a half-youkai, I was more active at night like the devils. That¡¯s why I am in a bind right now because if I wanted to sleep in the bedroom, there are still Kuroka and Tsura laying naked while being covered in my semen. Somehow, I felt like spraying my semen over Kuroka¡¯s body was a bad choice of mine. I let out a long sigh again before I stood up and entered the bedroom again to get my usual striped green kimono. I found a closet in the bedroom when I picked my clothes earlier, and as I thought, my kimono was hung inside the closet. I changed my clothes there, without minding the 2 girls behind me, and transformed myself into my youkai form. Power began to fill my body as I feel energized with my youkai blood coming to an active state. When I was a kid, I never realized that I was a bit stronger in my youkai form, but now that I reached puberty, the change was significant. I felt stronger and faster as my youkai blood moved through the veins on my body. Not only that, my senses were expanding. My Senjutsu becomes stronger and I could feel almost every energy from supernatural beings that resided in this city. That¡¯s why I could feel the fallen angel gathered in the church and one foreign energy that feels warm moved slowly inside the church. With a smile forming on my face, I exited the bedroom and walked out of my apartment room. How can I forget, tonight is when Asia died and reincarnated as a devil. Issei also managed to unlock his Boosted Gear and fought with the exorcist and fallen angels inside the church. I walked out of the apartment without anyone noticing me. I¡¯ve always donned in my Fear because of my old man''s suggestion. He said that it¡¯s better if we- Nurarihyon youkai, hide our presence from the public or supernaturals. Not only that, with Fear covering my body all the time, it doubled as training and protection from ambush. Back to the topic, with such a fight from the devils and fallen angels, how could I miss it? I love playing around and pranking people. I love grabbing attention for myself because of my previous life job as a street magician. But more importantly, I love shows. That¡¯s the reason why I agree with my old man''s order to go to Kuoh, to watch over the devils. I will stay out of trouble, and watch the devils struggle. If by chance anyone from the devils'' side or their enemy side mess with me or the innocent, that time I will end them. This show could also help me to calm down from my excitement, so it¡¯s a win-win. I am confident that none of them would realize my presence, if there is someone who will notice me, then that someone is Koneko who used her Senjutsu to the limit. I doubt she trained her Senjutsu when she was in the underworld. Not only the Senjutsu master is rare, but the malice in the underworld is also thicker than earth. She would pass out for sure if she trained her Senjutsu in the underworld. Maybe her fear towards Senjutsu lessened or even gone when she knew that Kuroka¡¯s status as a stray devil was revoked, but I think she was still traumatized and afraid of touching any kind of Senjutsu for now. As proof, she didn¡¯t immediately realize that I was a youkai when she saw her in the student council room, although that''s a little bit impossible even for experienced Senjutsu users. Unless their siblings told them about me, the probability of the devils realizing my real identity is zero, as my Sacred Gear will always change the outcome of anything to my advantage. When I was walking around in the direction of the church, I saw Issei running towards the direction of Kuoh Academy. I guess he know that Asia was in danger and asked for help from Rias and his friends. My smile deepened as I know that the show will begin in an hour or so. ¡°Well then, let¡¯s watch the fight.¡± I muttered as I used Meikyo Shisui to erase my presence. RaizarP Author Here~ More than 52 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks to the new Executive!! - Toriam Big Thanks to the new Squad Leader!! - ToXic Koala000 - Judd Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 18 – The opening of the Theater I changed my direction and followed Issei back to Kuoh Academy. As I¡¯ve guessed, he runs frantically to the old school building to meet with Rias and her peerage to ask for her help to rescue Asia. Normally, people who know would feel bad to watch Issei trying to rescue Asia without helping. The decision that normal people- who hate to see others in problem- would be extending their hand to help Issei rescue Asia. Well, who am I to intrude in their little rescue mission? I am just Nura Rikuo, son of Nurarihyon. I love a show, more importantly, I can''t intrude on the devils'' dispute with fallen angels, that¡¯s why I won¡¯t help them this time. I will just watch the show while Kuroka and Tsura are still sleeping. That¡¯s my only reason for following Issei to the old school building. For the matter of making the devils turn into humans again, I can''t do it right now. I have yet to unlock my Balance Breaker, so it''s still impossible for me to turn devils back into humans. I must say, the decoration of the old school building and the Occult Research Club (OCR) room was extravagant. Everything that was used as decoration was antique or ancient wood furniture. Inside the room of Occult Research Club, Koneko and Kiba sat on the couch with a table that separate them. On top of the table was an antique candle holder with 3 candles lit up as the light source of the room. The source of the light was not only that, there are several candle holders with the candle that was lit by fire to illuminate the room. As expected of the devil¡¯s base, they are able to see well in the dark so they don¡¯t need that much light. Maybe that¡¯s the reason why Rias decided to use candles as the source of light. Not only that, but candles also give a vibe of the supernatural. So it fits well with being like devils. ¡°Buchou, please help me to rescue Asia!¡± Issei stood in front of Rias with a serious expression on his face, pleading for her help. The sight was really amusing, the usual pervert trying his best to help his friend is really a sight to behold. If you wonder from where I was watching the show, I sat on an extravagant chair beside Rias and Issei. Truly the best spot to watch them. None of the devils inside the room noticed my presence as I covered myself with my Fear, erasing my presence. That includes Koneko who has a rather high sense to feel the Supernatural entity. ¡°Forget her. You are a member of my peerage!¡± Rias refused Issei coldly by telling him to forget her. I almost whistle at her act. She wanted to look like a fine leader in front of her subordinates, that I could respect. But she¡¯s wrong if she wanted her peerage to look at her as a family member. If it¡¯s me, I will grab Issei and go to the church right at this moment to see what¡¯s going on there and decide my next action after understanding the situation. Especially when the devils know the existence of the fallen and the exorcist that invaded their territory that Youkai lent to them. She¡¯s an idiot if she wanted to use this act of transgression from the fallen towards the devils as a way to train Issei or something. ¡®Watching her makes me remember something. Isn¡¯t it time for me to build my own Hyakki Yakkou? In the future, East Youkai Clan would be attacked by Khaos Brigade, or more specifically the Hero Faction. I need to find my trusted comrades in the arm if I wanted to minimalize the damage caused by the attack.¡¯ ¡°Then I will go alone¡­¡± Said Issei as he turned away from Rias. ¡°Wait Issei! That church is the enemy line, there is also a fallen angel over there!¡± Shouted Rias. Hearing his leader¡¯s word, Issei stopped and looked over his shoulder. ¡°Why? I am just a pawn, right? There is nothing changed if you lose a pawn like me, isn¡¯t that right?¡± ¡°Shut it! The pawn has a special power called ¡®Promotion¡¯. Pawn could be promoted to other chess pieces other than King if they can infiltrate to the enemy line.¡± Rias explained all details about Issei''s power to him. About the power of Promotion, sacred gear, and also how to activate the sacred gear. *Yawn* ¡®This is getting boring¡­¡¯ As I¡¯ve thought that, I feel another presence that feels like a devil but at the same time, the presence has the same energy as a fallen angel. The presence approached the door of the ORC room and opened it. I looked at the door and saw Akeno appear from beyond the door. ¡®Akeno?¡¯ She approached Rias and whispered something to her ear. Rias''s expression changed when Akeno whispered something to her ear and now she has a serious expression. She nodded her head at Akeno and walked away from Issei. Now that the devils know about the fallen angels and their rituals to extract sacred gear from Asia, the situation has gotten interesting. I stood up from the chair and loosened my hands slightly before I followed Rias and Akeno. If my guess is right, then they will teleport to the church using a magic circle. As I didn¡¯t want them to notice my presence, I need to arrive at the church before the fight started. That¡¯s why I exited the ORC room with Rias and Akeno to avoid opening the door myself. Unfortunately, my memory fail me as Rias and Akeno stopped just across Issei and teleported away from the room. ¡®Well, it seems that I need to wait for a little longer.¡¯ I leaned against the wall near the door with my arm crossed and watched Issei instead. He walked towards the exit with a serious expression on his face. But when he was about to open the door, he was stopped by Kiba Yuuto. ¡°You want to go alone?¡± Asked Kiba. ¡°Yeah, I must save Asia no matter what.¡± Answered Issei without looking back at Kiba. Because Issei stood near me, I could feel the presence of Ddraig clearly inside his sacred gear. His presence is big and heavy, it was the biggest presence that I felt since I was reincarnated. Even Yasaka¡¯s- the leader of the west youkai faction- presence didn¡¯t feel this big. I never met with gods so I don¡¯t know what kind of presence that they hold, but most certainly it will not be as big as Ddraig. Maybe some gods are stronger than Ddraig, but the majority of minor gods would lose to him. ¡®As expected of Oppai Dragon. Even when he¡¯s sealed inside a sacred gear, his presence still radiated out from Issei. I¡¯m not a battle maniac, but I think I wanted to fight him when he¡¯s at full strength.¡¯ ¡°You will get killed you know?¡± Kiba said as I saw him pick up his sword. Koneko also stood up from the couch and approached Issei slowly. Issei still didn¡¯t notice that his comrades were preparing to go with him and snapped back at them. ¡°I know! But I will save Asia no matter what!¡± He said and turned around to glare at Kiba. But when he turned around, he was surprised by Kiba and Koneko that were ready to go with him to attack the church. ¡°We will go with you.¡± Said Kiba with a smile. The dumbfounded Issei just nodded his head and opened the door to exit the room. I use this chance to go out and run towards a nearby convenience store and pick a bag of potato chips from the shelf. Unlike my old man, I put money on the cashier table before excusing myself from the store. I run towards the church while my Meikyo Shisui is active and jumped on the tree near the church entrance. I sat on the tree trunks and looked at Issei''s group who just arrived at the church. I opened the bag of potato chips and put one of the chips into my mouth as I smiled. ¡®Good! I need to catch Freed if he fled, but for now, I will watch them from here. Now, let the battle begin!¡¯ RaizarP Author Here~ More than 52 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks to the new Executive!! - Toriam - fffory Big Thanks to the new Squad Leader!! - Zod - Logan - robert wiseman - Misterschman - Moltas ?kerstr?m Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 19 – Prelude of the Dance of Devil and Exorcist I saw Issei, Kiba and Koneko hide in the bush below me and looked over the church. Issei and Kiba were hiding behind the trees while Koneko was crouching behind the bush. Well, honestly I don¡¯t know how to call her. ¡®Should I call her Koneko because she went with that name now or should I call her Shirone like Kuroka? Hmm, I should ask her about that when Kuroka meets with her.¡¯ More importantly, now I need to focus on the fight. Something like this didn¡¯t happen all day, especially this is a prelude to the fight with a cadre from Grigori. I munched on my potato chips while looking at them planning on something. ¡°What should we do? That murderous air is too thick here.¡± Asked Issei while looking at Kiba. ¡°It seems that there were lots of priests gathered in the church. But Issei, don¡¯t you feel a pressure thicker than this a few hours ago?¡± Kiba said to Issei as he was peeked her head to look at the church. ¡®Oh? Are they talking about me? I know that I am amazing, but don''t praise me that openly!¡¯ I nodded my head in satisfaction as I stood up and prepare myself to jump towards the church¡¯s roof but stopped after I heard Issei''s word. ¡°A-ah, yeah. Those 3 transfer students, huh? The girl that sat on the guy¡¯s left is scary! She chills the air just by sitting there. But they were beauties, huehehehe.¡± When Issei said that, I could see that Koneko¡¯s body tensed for a while before she spoke. ¡®Although you will seal Trihexa in the future with the help of the leaders of 3 factions and other gods, for now, you should die! Don¡¯t you dare eyed my girls like that!¡¯ ¡°Pervert. Die.¡± Koneko punched Issei on the stomach and walked towards the church. Issei slumped on the ground because of the pain from Koneko''s punch. He held his stomach with both of his hand as his eyes rolled backward. I was almost kick Issei on the back of his head but I was able to stop myself when I saw Koneko punch him in my stead. ¡°They must¡¯ve noticed our existence here, so it¡¯s useless to hide.¡± As Koneko reached the church¡¯s door, Kiba and Issei also walked to her and stopped beside her. For some reason Issei was recovered from the pain, how did he do it? Is it Ddraig job? Surely not. After they are ready, Koneko kicked the door open. What can I say, why did they just walk towards the entrance of the church if Koneko could always destroy the wall of the church? Well, it¡¯s their decision so as a watcher, I could only make a comment in my mind. After all, this church is far from the civilians and no one realizes what happened because of the barrier that was set around here. ¡®Now that they entered the church, I need to watch their fight in a VIP seat.¡¯ I jumped from the tree and landed behind Koneko. Her skirt was lifted a little bit because of the wind that I create when I landed on my feet, but it seems that she didn¡¯t realize that, or rather she ignore it. Issei¡¯s group entered the church as I looked around while following them from behind. The church as the name says was abandoned and the statues were destroyed. Even the cross that was in the middle of the church was half destroyed. The seat appears in a good condition but they were dusty. ¡°This is hideous.¡± Commented Issei as he looked around the church. When he was looking around, I found the best spot to watch their fight and that is near the ceiling of a church. I saw there is some space near the ceiling that could be used to sit and watch the entire church¡¯s room from that. I jumped and sat in a comfortable position while still holding my bag of chips that only has half of the content left. As soon as I sat in the space near the ceiling, a clap was sounded and a man with silver hair wearing white priest clothes and dark blue priest robe walked to the front of the church from the side. He smiled as he looked at Issei¡¯s group and spoke in a joyful tone. ¡°Hey hey hey! We meet again!¡± He stopped right across Issei¡¯s group as he raised his left hand. ¡°I never thought I will meet with the same devils two times!¡± He lowered his hand after he said that and looked at Issei¡¯s group with a mocking smile. ¡°FREED!!¡± Shouted Issei in an angry tone. ¡®Oh? So he¡¯s Freed Sellzen? That rogue exorcist was also a psychopath, and battle maniac. He will cooperate with Valper Galilei and was given a shard of Excalibur to kill the devils. It¡¯s a good chance to see the battle between them and rate their strength. I was only trained with my old man and Magari so I don¡¯t really know how strong I am compared to the average of the Supernatural world.¡¯ ¡°You know? I am really strong. When I met with one devil before, they will get this treatment~¡± Said Freed as he used his left hand to make a slashing motion across his neck, telling Issei¡¯s group that he killed every devil that he met before. ¡°That¡¯s why I¡¯m angry that you are still alive and meet me 2 times!¡± As he said that, he pulled out a light sword with his right hand and a gun from his left hand. Without saying anything more, he pointed the gun at Issei and fired at him. Fortunately, Kiba was in a ready position and shoved Issei away from the bullet¡¯s trajectory. ¡°Are you okay, Issei?¡± ¡°Yeah! You saved me, thanks.¡± They got up on their feet again, but Freed had close his distance and slashed at Kiba from above his head. With skilled movement, Kiba unsheathed his sword and blocked Freed¡¯s slash, and their sword interlocked for a while as they looked at each other with a smile. Issei used this chance to punch Freed, but he dodged Issei¡¯s punch and jumped away from his location. ¡°Where is Asia!¡± Shouted Issei at Freed. ¡°Oh? The sister that fell to the devil¡¯s temptation?! She¡¯s in the underground with a fallen angel doing a certain ritual~ You can go to the underground from that altar.¡± ¡®Well, they exchanged a slash and stopped before finishing their fight only to talk again? Idiot.¡¯ I thought while I put a potato chip into my mouth. ¡®Should I just kill the exorcist and walk away from here? It¡¯s useless to watch them for now, only Freed was branded as stray here so- oh?¡¯ As I thought that, I saw Koneko raise a seat and throw it at Freed, knocking him unprepared. He was blown away by the force and crashed to the ground, causing the seat to be destroyed and creating a cloud of dust. ¡°Shut up, you talk too much.¡± She said while raising another seat and throwing it at Freed that was trying to stand up, knocking him once again. ¡®Good job, Koneko! As expected, a fight shouldn''t have a long talk! Let¡¯s watch them a little longer. I need to chase after Freed when he fled after all¡¯ RaizarP Author Here~ More than 52 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks to the new Executive!! - Toriam - fffory Big Thanks to the new Squad Leader!! - Adam Dalsaev - Victor Gonzalez - Amit Efraim Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 20 – Dance of Devil and Exorcist ¡°It hurts!¡± a voice of Freed was sounded as the cloud of dust dissipated. His dusted figure while holding a light sword and a gun has a scowl on his face. ¡°For a devil to go this far! I will kill you!!¡± Freed was rushing towards the one nearest to his position, Issei. But, before he could reach him, Koneko threw one seat again from the back and blocked his way. Freed jumped back before rushing again only to meet a slash from Kiba. He hurriedly blocked Kiba¡¯s slash with his own light sword as his expression twisted in a crazy smile. ¡°Hahaha, you are strong for a low-ranked devil! Now, Die!¡± As he said that, he pointed his gun towards Kiba¡¯s temple and shot it. With a reflex worthy of a Devil with Knight piece, Kiba dodges the bullet with a backflip. Taking the chance, Koneko rushed towards Freed and throw a punch that was connected to his face, he was blown away from the force as he shouted. ¡°It hurt!¡± His figure was flying towards the wall below me, making the wall shakes uncontrollably from his collision. A cloud of dust was created from that and hid Freed¡¯s figure once again. ¡®Whoa! That was dangerous. I almost fell because of the shake!¡¯ I looked down and saw Freed rushed towards the side of the church by exploiting the dust to hide his figure. He sent a barrage of bullets to Issei from the side but was blocked by Koneko¡¯s body. The fight continues with Kiba exchanging a barrage of slashes with Freed with Issei and Koneko supporting him from behind. It was getting boring. Freed was blown away for the third time and pulled out something from his back pocket. ¡°I was at a disadvantage so bye-bye, I will kill you next time!¡± He slammed that something to the ground and created a bright flash of light. The devils can¡¯t look directly at the flash of light and missed Freed¡¯s figure that jumped away from the location. On the contrary, I could see him clearly as he run away from the church. ¡®Well, the fight was boring. If that¡¯s their level, then I could win without sweating. I should test my ability against exorcists, I get a free target after all.¡¯ I jumped down from my sitting location and run in the direction of Freed. This is a nice chance, Youkai is a dark creature and weak to light like a devil. So I wanted to try how much the light sword could injure me and how much the light affected me. ¡®Thankfully Kiba didn¡¯t use his Sacred Gear to destroy Freed¡¯s sword like in the canon. Well, there are lots of light swords in the underground but that place is nasty and I would like to avoid nasty places if possible. Kuroka is sensitive to smell and would avoid me if I smelled bad after all.¡¯ As I thought about that, I finally catch up to Freed. He run towards the woods near the church and started to walk when he entered it. I followed him into the woods and I saw Freed stop moving and sit under one of the trees and let out a sigh. With him stopping on his track and sitting down, I jumped on top of the tree in front of him and watched his next move. I bet he was thinking that he was safe after running this far from the devils, well he is though. I had no attachment to the devils so I don¡¯t care about his enemy or something like that. I would kill them if they mess with me or my girls, but other than that I prefer neutral stances with them. My duty is to watch over them, not antagonize them or help them. The story would be different if Kokabiel or other Devils entered this territory with ill intentions. I will kill them in that case. Kokabiel was betraying Grigori and announcing it, unlike Raynare. So that would brand him as strays and I will be able to kill him without endangering the Youkai''s stance in the supernatural. The Nekomata incident was also resolved by Lady Amaterasu without me knowing anything about the profit. For the dead of the head of the Naberius clan, Kuroka was branded as SS-Class Stray devil and Shirone or Koneko was almost executed. They negotiated their terms and Lady Amaterasu managed to get territory in the Underworld for Youkai and Shinto Faction while the Devils asked to lend this Kuoh Town to be part of their territory on Earth. . ¡®I was given permission to hurt the devils if they do anything suspicious in this territory after all. I must do something to Kokabiel too. I am interested in Excalibur though, how strong is Excalibur shard compared to my Nenekirimaru. Well, lots of things that I wanted to test.¡¯ ¡°Aah~ I want to kill those devils!¡± He grumbled to himself as he leaned his back against the tree and put his arm in his knees as he looked up at the sky. ¡®Umu, this is my chance to appear with cool lines.¡¯ I reduced the fear that surround my body and made my presence known. ¡°Oya, there is an exorcist sitting in the dirt. Are you lost by chance?¡± I jumped off the tree as I said that and crossed my arms inside my kimono. He immediately stood up and pulled his sword from his back as he glared at me cautiously. I approached him slowly while I looked at him with one eye and a smug smile on my face. ¡°Do you want me to escort you back to the church? Oh, I forgot that devils have attacked the church. How about I take you to my apartment instead?¡± He finally took out his gun and shot at me while aiming at my head. The shot was connected, and it hit right in the middle of my head, between my eyes. Unfortunately for him, he only hit my fake images. My figures melted in a black cloud and I re-appeared beside my melted figure and said. ¡°That¡¯s not good. You can¡¯t interrupt me while I am talking, Stray Exorcist-san.¡± ¡°Who are you, your smell is different from those devils!¡± ¡°Ah, I forgot to introduce myself. Nice to meet you then, I am a youkai, the watcher of those devils.¡± I called my Nenekirimaru, held the scabbard with my left hand as I unsheathed the sword with my right hand, making a slashing motion in front of me. I smiled at him while holding my Nenekirimaru with its tip pointed at the ground and said. ¡°And I hope we won¡¯t get along.¡± RaizarP Author Here~ More than 52 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks to the new Executive!! - fffory Big Thanks to the new Squad Leader!! - Lefi - Sinxere - Todd Barlow Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 21 – The Dance of Youkai A sound of gunshots ringed in the woods in the middle of the night accompanied by the occasional sound of the wind being slashed by sharp objects. In the deep of the woods near the church, I was being shot by Freed, the stray exorcist. Surprisingly the bullet that came from his gun was near infinity, he just need to reload his gun with some kind of ammo and he can shoot around 20 shots with no problem. Well, the problem is for him though. As he never hit me even once as he pursued me deeper into the woods. ¡°Hahahaha, is this the extent of your skill, stray exorcist?¡± I mocked him as I kept my left hand inside my Kimono and dodged his bullet with Kyoka Suigetsu. I¡¯ve been using Kyoka Suigetsu since I decided to show myself and never revealed my real location to him. His fear of me amplified as time passed. It was getting stronger and stronger until finally, he can¡¯t even graze me with his bullet. ¡°Stop using that weird technique, you youkai bastard!!¡± Freed shouted loudly as he plunged his swords towards the body that I faked with Kyoka Suigetsu. The fake body melted in a cloud of black smoke and make me re-appeared near the melted body. ¡°Hahahaha, once again you struck the fake me. How about you use a light technique or something to find my real location?¡± ¡°Damned youkai! Stop and face me directly!!¡± Shouted Freed as he kept swinging his sword around to find my real location. I smirked at him and said. ¡°Sure¡± As he swung his sword horizontally, I countered with a one-handed swing using Nenekirimaru and blocked his sword and we are interlocked for a while. ¡°Hahahaha, found you, cursed Youkai!!¡± He shouted like a madman as he pointed his gun towards my temple and fired it at a close range. Freed smiled as he saw the bullet dig through my head and pierce through it, or so he thought until he saw that the one that he shot was just a fake image of me. The sword that clashed a few seconds ago was also gone and Freed stumbles because of my sudden disappearance. ¡°Over here!¡± I use this chance to kick his head using a roundhouse kick and he was blown away before crashing into a tree and snapping it into two. *Crash!* The tree crashed into the other tree and sent a cloud of dirt and dust flying around. I approached Freed¡¯s body and saw that he was unconscious because of my kick. So weak! Is this the level of strength of an exorcist? He was unconscious just because of a flying Yakuza Kick? I received that kind of kick since I was a kid and never did I fall unconscious because of that. Well, just one time but that¡¯s because of my old man using all his strength to kick me. I picked his light sword and gun and I try to use them. Surprisingly the light sword was so light, no pun intended, as if I swing a feather around. Now into the gun, the gun itself is big and certainly felt heavy, unlike the sword. I tried to shoot it once but I was unsatisfied with the result. ¡®My Youjutsu is stronger than this gun.¡¯ I thought before I slashed the gun with the light sword, cutting it cleanly in the half. Now that I held the light sword, I try to cut the back of my left hand a little with it. ¡°Ouch, it hurt as expected.¡± The light sword burned me as if it was made by fire, leaving a cut on the back of my left hand. I used Senjutsu to make the wound heal faster and try to cut my left hand again with the light sword. But, this time I try to make use of my Sacred Gear. I called the power of Telos Karma and enforced a change into the light sword. ¡°The light sword would never be able to hurt me.¡± As I said that, I tried to cut my left hand again. This time, I didn¡¯t feel any pain and rejoiced that my guess was proved to be correct. Now back into Freed, should I kill him? Or watch his fight with the devils? I am weighing down the two options and ultimately my option leaned towards the latter. ¡®I was interested in Excalibur too. If this guy who could use Excalibur died, then the chance of Excalibur getting sneaked into this town will be around zero. I wanted to test if Telos Karma would allow me to wield Excalibur too. Especially the Excalibur Nightmare.¡¯ I decided to leave Freed alone for now. But, I wouldn¡¯t leave him without a parting gift, right? I take his light sword and cut his hair. With him being unconscious, he didn¡¯t realize that he lost his hair and was left with shiny skin that was becoming his new hairstyle for now. I looked over at him for the last time and let out a chuckle while imagining a scene in my head. ¡®Bald exorcist, Freed Sellzen! I am here to kill the devils!¡¯ That would be hilarious. I also didn''t forget to use Telos Karma to change the probability of Freed attacking innocent people to zero. Instead, I make the probability that he will meet me every time he wanted to kill someone After all, I just need him for bait and I won''t need to find him if he will be the one to find me. I use my Meikyo Shisui again and left the woods to go back to my apartment. I was out for an hour or so, so I guess the girls have cleaned themselves and woke up by now. I walked through the woods and was finally able to get out after a few seconds. I tried to sense the energy that was coming from the church only to find that the devils were back to the school already with a new demonic energy that came from it. I ran back to my apartment while thinking about the future. ¡®So Asia was turned to the devils. That means a few days from now, that fianc¨¦ of Rias will come to visit the school and has a rating game. Well, I will have the girls away from school if he visited. I don¡¯t want to make another problem between our factions by killing the flaming turkey if he tried to hit my girls after all. I just need to beat him to a pulp because he didn''t say anything to me when he visited Rias.¡¯ As I¡¯ve thought about that, I¡¯ve arrived at my apartment and go to my room immediately. I turned off my technique and turn to my human form again. As I¡¯ve guessed, the girls had awake and waiting for me in the all-purpose room. What I didn¡¯t expect was Tsura was wearing sexy lingerie while Kuroka was wearing her usual Kimono while smiling at me when I entered the room. ¡°Yo?¡± I tried to greet them but Tsura just quietly approached me. ¡°Unfair¡­¡± She said to me while tears welled up in the corner of her eyes. ¡°Unfair?¡± Confused, I repeated what Tsura said. She looked at me while she was biting her lips and said. ¡°It¡¯s unfair that you only did Kuroka! I wanted to graduate from my virginity today too!¡± She took my arms and dragged me into the bedroom. I didn¡¯t resist and just walked to the bedroom while saying. ¡°Oi, Tsura!! Calm down, calm down for a second!!¡± I pleaded at her but she didn¡¯t head to me and drag me inside the bedroom. With a last resort, I looked at Kuroka and shouted. ¡°Kuroka!! Help me!!!¡± In response, Kuroka waved her hand and say. ¡°Enjoy your time nya~¡± She¡¯s an accomplice!! That night I didn¡¯t sleep until the morning came. In the middle of my act with Tsura, Kuroka entered the fray and it becomes a threesome. It was a wild night Well, it¡¯s my problem because I am too popular so I just enjoy it with them. *** The reason why Riku didn''t kill freed was because Riku wanted to use him as bait to get Excalibur. Freed, as you know was an artificial human that was made to hold a holy sword. Without Freed, Valper Galilei has no other reason to take the Excalibur to Kuoh. Freed has Light Container, that''s the reason why he was able to wield Excalibur. So, Freed is bait for Excalibur, that''s all. Also, no NSFW for now... RaizarP Author Here~ More than 52 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks to the new Executive!! - fffory Big Thanks to the new Squad Leader!! - Mattmajor18 - High Priest of Torga Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 22 – Call me Onii-chan *yawn* I let out a long yawn as I brushed my teeth in the sink in front of the bathroom. Those girls were merciless, they kept me awake until morning before they get satisfied and slept soundly. Or rather, Tsura was still sleeping while Kuroka was ready on her uniforms to go to school. After I was brushed my teeth and washed my face, I changed into my school uniform and exited my apartment. Outside of the apartment, Kuroka was standing near the entrance with her youkai features hidden from the public and waved her hand when she saw me. ¡°Riku-sama~ Let¡¯s go nya~¡± ¡°Yeah.¡± I answered Kuroka and we started walking towards the school. Our apartment was considered close to the school and we just need around 5 to 10 minutes of walk to reach it. As we walked towards the school, I decided to ask Kuroka about how she will meet her sister. ¡°How about we meet Shirone today, Kuroka? It¡¯s better if you meet her today before it becomes awkward for the two of you. Or rather, it has become awkward because of yesterday¡¯s incident with Tsura.¡± Kuroka looked at me after I asked that and smiled a little. ¡°You¡¯re right nya. I was thinking about that earlier. I will meet her today nya~ Can you accompany me, Riku-sama? You can hide from her if you don¡¯t want her to see you, but please accompany me nya~ I was a bit afraid to meet her by myself¡­¡± The usual playful Kuroka was gone with that word. She has a sad expression on her face and looked like about to burst into tears anytime. I put my left hand on top of her head and patted her. ¡°Don¡¯t worry, I will be there. I will also stop the bats if they wanted to interrupt you.¡± I give her my widest smile and she responded with a big smile too as her right hand slowly intertwined with my left hand. She looked at me with a toothy grin as we continue our walk to the school. At that moment, I realized something important. ¡®I-is this holding hand?! How lewd! I was experienced with Kuroka burying my arm on her boobs, but this is the first time we are holding hands!! Damn it, this is too lewd compared to our activity last night.¡¯ We arrived at the school and unfortunately for me, Kuroka released my hand and skipping joyfully beside me while we were entering the school area. Well, that¡¯s fine. Next time I will aim for holding Tsura¡¯s hand on my right and Kuroka¡¯s hand on my left. That will be overkill for those perverts in this school. They said that boobs are supreme? Nonsenses. Holding hands was the peak of the relationship. You maybe could have sex with a random girl, but you only held the hand of your lovers. That¡¯s the law of the universe. As my thought was filled with a useless thing, I sense Koneko¡¯s energy from the roof of the school. I stopped Kuroka by holding her shoulder and leaning closer to her ears. ¡°Shirone is on the roof. If you wanted to meet her, this is your chance.¡± I whispered to Kuroka and she nodded her head. ¡°Yes nya. I felt her energy too.¡± She looked at the roof and said. ¡°Please accompany me nya~¡± I nodded my head at her, and suddenly the students around us screamed. ¡°Kyaaa~~ So romantic! He leaned towards her ears and whispered some love words!¡± Yelled one of a girl that stood near our location. ¡°And she answered with ¡®Please accompany me!¡¯ Kyaa~ I wanted the King of Kuoh to whisper to my ears too~!¡± Shouted another girl that stood beside the first girl. I looked at them because I heard something disturbing. ¡®King of Kuoh?! I got a nickname on my second day of school?!!¡¯ They looked at each other and put their hands on their cheeks before shouting once again. ¡°Kyaaa~! He looked at us!¡± ¡°Kukukuku.¡± I heard muffled laughter from my side and turned to see Kuroka covered her hand and holding her laughter. This girl, she enjoyed my reaction when they called me King of Kuoh, huh. Well, whatever. It¡¯s better than the perverted trio. ¡°Let¡¯s go, Kuroka.¡± I started walking again towards the school building as I ignored the crowd of girls that were screaming behind me. Kuroka followed me shortly and walked on my side. ¡°King of Kuoh¡­ that¡¯s a nice title nya~ Do you like it, Riku-sama? Pfft!¡± Kuroka said with her right hand in front of her mouth and held her laughter again. ¡°Whatever. I was called young master since I was a kid, so it didn¡¯t matter if they call me King of Kuoh or something. At least now you called me by my name.¡± I looked at Kuroka and smirked before going upstairs. We arrived at the roof and I looked around to find Koneko. Just after I looked at my left, I saw her leaning against the rails with her hands and rested her head on top of it. I immediately covered my body in Fear and use Meikyo Shisui to erase my presence. Even Kuroka wouldn¡¯t able to see me right now, that¡¯s why I patted her back and said. ¡°I will be behind you, just go and talk to her.¡± She silently walked towards Koneko with a small smile on her face as I followed behind her. As a Nekoshou, Koneko¡¯s sense was sharp. Especially when Kuroka didn¡¯t even try to hide her presence from her. Koneko turned around and looked at Kuroka and said. ¡°Kuroka onee-sama¡­¡± ¡°Shirone¡­¡± They just looked at each other before they suddenly bowed at the same time. ¡°¡±I¡¯m sorry!!¡±¡± They raised their head at the same time while having a surprised expression on their face. Kuroka was able to recover from her surprise faster than Koneko and asked her. ¡°Why did you apologize to me nya! I was the one in the wrong for leaving you in the underworld!¡± Shouted Kuroka at Koneko. ¡°No, I was wrong for thinking that you go crazy and kill your master! I was wrong! I never realized that you were doing that to keep me safe. So I¡¯m sorry!¡± Shouted Koneko back at Kuroka. Silence descent with the two of them shouting at each other and trying to blame themselves. Kuroka was wrong by leaving Koneko in the underworld, but at that time she has no choice because she was pursued. Koneko also thinks that she was in the wrong for misunderstanding the situation and hating her sister that save her from the worst fate of being reincarnated as a devil. In other words, both of them was a fool. ¡®It can¡¯t be helped, I will lend a hand to her.¡¯ ¡°Don¡¯t be too hard with your little sister, Kuroka.¡± I said as I canceled my Meikyo Shisui and appear behind Kuroka. Koneko was surprised by my sudden appearance and took a step back unconsciously. ¡°Riku-sama. It was my fault for leaving her alone, she doesn¡¯t need to feel sorry for hating me for that nya!¡± Kuroka looked back at me and shouted again. As a result of her shout, I chopped her head with my hand. ¡°Ouch! Why nya!¡± Kuroka held her head with her hands and looked at me with teary eyes. ¡°Let me explain it to your sister. You can leave it to me~¡± I said to Kuroka before turning my gaze to Koneko. ¡°So, Shirone was it? Or do you prefer to be called Koneko? I think Shirone suits you better though.¡± Koneko was still wary of my sudden appearance. But seeing Kuroka¡¯s behavior toward me has lessened her guards against me and she answered me. ¡°Koneko¡­ Shirone was special for Kuroka onee-sama.¡± I crossed my arms and nodded my head. ¡°I see, then Koneko. You can call me Riku onii-chan.¡± RaizarP Author Here~ More than 52 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks to the New Executive!! - Deadpool2695 Big Thanks to the New Squad Leader!! - Nao - Dylan LaFlam Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 23 – A mend of Relationship Koneko was silent for a second before blinking her eyes repeatedly and looking at Kuroka. Kuroka also blinked her eyes as she looked at me. ¡°Riku-sama¡­ you still have time to joke in this serious atmosphere nya?¡± Kuroka said in a tone full of disbelief. Umu, did I say something wrong? ¡°What are you saying Kuroka. If she¡¯s your little sister, then technically she¡¯s my little sister too right?¡± I said to Kuroka with a serious face. Kuroka blinked her eyes once again and was about to retort me, but she was interrupted by a laugh that was coming from Koneko. This time, it was my turn to blink my eyes in surprise. Koneko, the kuudere of Kuoh Academy just laughed? I looked at her in disbelief as she covered her mouth with her right hand and laughed uncontrollably. I looked over at Kuroka only to see her looking at me too. We joined her laugh and the three of us laughed without minding anything as if the awkward atmosphere earlier was a dream. ¡°hahaha-¡­ -R-Riku-sama. Thank you nya~¡± said Kuroka as she stopped laughing. She walked towards Koneko with a big smile on her face and hugged her. Because of the height difference, Koneko¡¯s head was practically buried in Kuroka¡¯s breast. ¡°I miss you, Shirone.¡± But as if that didn¡¯t matter at all, Koneko hugged Kuroka back and said. ¡°Me too, Kuroka one-sama.¡± ¡®This scene is too precious!¡¯ I am giving my applause as I watched the Nekoshou sister hugging each other lovingly and wipes my imaginary tears from the corner of my eyes. Finally, they were separated and looking at each other for a while before turning in my direction. I tilted my head in wonder why they are looking in my direction before I realized something. I slammed my right hand on my palm before spreading my hand. ¡°Come! Give your onii-chan a hug!¡± Unfortunately, Koneko only looked at me with a look that says ¡®what is this guy doing?¡¯ before turning to Kuroka. ¡°Onee-sama.¡± Koneko was calling out to Kuroka but she was cut off by her. ¡°Just call me nee-chan, Shirone. Onee-sama is too formal between us nya~.¡± Koneko nodded and said. ¡°Onee-chan, the class was about to start for now. Let¡¯s meet again at lunch, okay?¡± ¡°Yeah, see you again nya~¡± We watched Koneko waving her hand and go downstairs to go to her class in silence. We looked at each other again and Kuroka suddenly give me a kiss. The kiss didn¡¯t last for too long as Kuroka separated herself from me and run towards downstairs. ¡°Let¡¯s go, Riku-sama! We will be late nya~¡± A smile crept up on my face as I followed Kuroka. *** *Ding dong* The bell that was a sign of lunch break was sounded and ended the first period of the class. Most of our classmates exited the class to grab their lunch in the cafeteria. As I didn¡¯t bring any lunch box, I stood up from my seat and invited Kuroka to go to the cafeteria together. She agreed to my invitation and we exited the classroom and go to the cafeteria to grab our lunch. We entered the cafeteria and go to the ticket machine to get our menu. There is a wide variety of the menu. From Udon to curry rice. There is even ramen on the menu. Without hesitation, I choose ramen and asked Kuroka what she prefers. ¡°Kuroka, what do you choose?¡± I stepped to the side a little and let Kuroka looks at the menu. ¡°Hmm~¡± She put her index finger on top of her mouth as she looked at the menu, unable to decide which one that she wanted to get. ¡°How about a curry? There are 3 optional side dishes for it.¡± ¡°Then I will choose curry nya!¡± I inserted money in the machine pressed the button under the curry menu and a ticked came out from the ticket machine. I also pressed the button under ramen and picked both tickets before going to the line of students that wanted to get their meals and lined up to wait for our turn. ¡°By the way where is Shirone? She said that she wanted to meet us at lunch?¡± ¡°That¡¯s true nya¡­¡± Kuroka closed her eyes as she said that and opened it after a while. ¡°It seems that she¡¯s on her way here nya! I think she couldn¡¯t find my energy so she tried to find us in the class. We passed each other nya~¡± Said Kuroka as she smiled at me. She was humming happily in front of me as we exchanged our tickets for lunch. It seems that she was happy to be able to talk to her sister again. It¡¯s a good thing for her. Not only that, it was also a good thing for me. Because technically, Kuroka''s sister is my sister too! Well, it makes me sad when I thought about this morning. Why did she refuse to call me Onii-chan? Should I give her a sweet to make her call me onii-chan? Umu, I think I should. I will buy some sweets after school and give them to her tomorrow. ¡°It seems that this spot is empty nya, Riku-sama!¡± I looked at Kuroka and saw her standing in front of a table that seems to fit 4 people. She sat on the long chair and put her curry on the table. I nodded my head and sat in front of Kuroka. I spread my sense and feel that Koneko has finally arrived at the cafeteria. I looked in her direction and saw her looking around for us while carrying a blue wrapped lunch box in her hand. ¡°Shirone! Over here nya!¡± Kuroka stood up, shouted, and waved her hands to get Koneko¡¯s attention. The entire students in the cafeteria were looking in this way, curious who was Shirone that the transfer student called. When Koneko approached us, they instantly burst out in uproar and the guys were yelling something. ¡°No way! That transfer student got his hand on our mascot?!¡± ¡°Kuh! Why do the handsome guys always get the beautiful girl!¡± Ignoring all the shouts, Koneko made her way here and sat beside Kuroka as she put her lunch box on the table. ¡°Onee-chan, please don¡¯t shout my name in the public.¡± ¡°Why nya~?¡± Kuroka tilted her head at Koneko¡¯s word. ¡°They know me as Koneko, so it¡¯s strange if you suddenly shouted my name in public.¡± Kuroka has a look of realization as she said. ¡°Is that so! Then I will call you quietly!¡± Koneko nodded her head and opened her lunch box. Her lunch was colorful. With rice, vegetables, and wiener as a side dishes, it was overall a healthy lunch. Unlike my ramen¡­ ¡°Koneko-chan~ Are you making your own lunch?¡± I asked Koneko with the gentlest smile that I could mutter in order for her to drop her guard around me. She looked at me and just nodded without saying anything before clapping her hands and saying. ¡°Itadakimasu.¡± She ignored me and started eating her lunch at a fast speed. Crestfallen, I snapped my chopstick that came with the ramen and said ¡°Itadakimasu.¡± Followed by Kuroka and we ate quietly. ¡®What¡¯s wrong¡­ What did I do wrong?!¡¯ I slurped my ramen while holding back my tears because I was ignored by Koneko. As we ate in silence, suddenly I heard a shout of a pervert from the entrance of the cafeteria. ¡°AAHH!!! Why did Koneko eat with that guy!!¡± I looked over at the voice and saw a pervert, Issei pointed his index finger at me. RaizarP Author Here~ More than 52 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks to the New Executive!! - Deadpool2695 Big Thanks to the New Squad Leader!! - Silvermoonlite Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 24 – Giving Advice ¡®Ah, something troublesome just entered the cafeteria.¡¯ I was already in a foul mood because Koneko refused to call me onii-chan, and now a pervert has come inside the cafeteria. Just because I saw him exit the class with his friends, I thought that he would peep at some girls in the courtyard, but it seems he also need some lunch so he came here. It¡¯s not like I hate him. Perverted behavior is normal for boys, he put it on a different level. Well, if he spied on my girls, I will beat him up regardless of his excuse though. I looked at Koneko and Kuroka and saw them ignoring their shout and kept enjoying their meal. Following their example, I ignored the perverted trio and continue eating my ramen too. I could feel him walking towards our table with his friends, the bald one and the glasses one. I forgot their name¡­ but if they made a fuss on our table, don¡¯t blame me if I showed off a little. I kept ignoring them until they finally arrived at the side of our table. Issei looked at Koneko before he noticed Kuroka that sat beside her. I readied myself in case Issei looked at her with his lecherous gaze, but to my surprise, he looked at Koneko and asked her. ¡°Hey, Koneko-chan. Why are you eating with him?¡± As he said that, he looked at me warily. Oh, right. The incident yesterday must¡¯ve left him wary of me. Well, the serious atmosphere was broken almost immediately by his friends though. ¡°That¡¯s right!! Why is the school mascot eating together with the new King of Kuoh on the same table!¡± The bald friend of Issei- Matsuda, if I remember correctly shouted while pointing his finger at me. ¡°Not to mention the new beauty of Kuoh! How did this happen?!!¡± The boy wearing glasses- Motohama, added while pointing his finger at Kuroka. ¡°Hey, that¡¯s right! What are you doing here!!¡± This time, Issei shouted at me while crossing his arms. Both of his friends also crossed their arms as they are looking at me, waiting for my answer. I slurped my ramen and drink a mouthful of broth before looking at them and saying. ¡°What¡¯s wrong with eating together with my lover and her sister?¡± ¡°¡±¡±WH-WHAAATT???!!¡±¡±¡± the perverted trio shouted the same time as they backed away a little. Kuroka¡¯s ear perked up when she heard me, she smiled and leaned towards Koneko. ¡°Nya~ Shirone, he said that I am his lover!¡± Koneko stopped eating her lunch as she looked at me in surprise. She turned to her sister and saw Kuroka have a big smile as she put both of her hands on her cheeks. Is she that happy to be called my lover? ¡°Calm down Issei, Matsuda.¡± I looked at the one who said that, and it turned out to be the glasses boy, Motohama. He fixed his glasses as he said seriously. ¡°There is one more transfer student! If this girl here is his lover then the other one must be his friend! We still have a chance!!¡± ¡°I see!! You are a genius!¡± Shouted Issei excitedly. ¡°As expected from our scouter. Nothing escaped your eyes!!¡± Added Matsuda as he put his hand on Motohama¡¯s shoulder. I let out a long sigh because of their antic and I decided to break their fantasy for real. ¡°Tsura is also my girl, don¡¯t even try to do anything to her. I will beat you up if you ever think about her.¡± ¡°Guh! It¡¯s unfair!!¡± ¡°As always, it¡¯s the handsome guy that got the beautiful one!¡± Motohama and Matsuda cried out in frustration, but Issei just looked at me with his eyes open wide. He suddenly bowed at me and shouted. ¡°Please teach me how to get a harem!!!¡± I was surprised by his sudden outburst and looked at him in wonder. Why did he think that I know how to teach him to get a harem?! He¡¯s the fucking harem king in the future! But when I think about it, he was not afraid of me anymore in just a few minutes. I won¡¯t give Koneko to him though, I am protective of Koneko after I meet her earlier. Gotta do what a good older brother does, and that¡¯s filtering a boy that gets close to his little sister! But, this too has become interesting. I could teach him the way to achieve harem (lol) while watching him woo other devils from the close range. I put my hand on my chin and said. ¡°Hmm, in the first place, do you know why Kuroka and Tsura accepted me as their lover?¡± Issei raised his head and said. ¡°Is it because you¡¯re handsome?¡± He scratched his cheek as he peeked over Kuroka to see her reaction. Unfortunately for Issei, Kuroka was focusing on Koneko right now and they were still chatting together, ignoring us, I am included. ¡°That¡¯s right! That¡¯s because I¡¯m handsome. But not only that, didn¡¯t you have someone close to you even if you are a pervert? Try to get close to them! Be sincere, help them if they need something! You will get a harem if you do that.¡± I gave Issei a piece of advice or rather a way to get a harem. That strategy was used by many famous figures and they were all managed to get a harem. Yes, I was talking about the shounen protagonist. Issei¡¯s eyes bulged in realization and he bowed to me again. ¡°Thank you very much!! I will apply your strategy from now on!!¡± He raised his head again after he said that. I looked over Issei and saw Motohama take a note out of nowhere and begin to write something at a fast speed while Matsuda just nodded his head repeatedly with his eyes closed. ¡®What¡¯s wrong with those guys? But at least Issei¡¯s perverted behavior will be lessened with this. I hope.¡¯ I can¡¯t seem to comprehend them. When I thought that Issei will finally be able to control, or at least rend his perverted behavior, his next statements really flip me off. ¡°So I need to be sincere to them that I wanted to see their boobs! I must help them when they need help to put on a bra! Really, thank you very much! I will go to Buchou right now!!¡± With that, he run away from the cafeteria, followed by his friends that yelled ¡®Wait for us!!¡¯. I feel gaze directed to me from Koneko and saw her glaring at me as if she wanted to kill me. ¡°Pervert.¡± She just said one word to me and tidied up her empty lunch box before she turned to Kuroka. ¡®That¡¯s my fault?!¡¯ I was honestly felt bad for Rias and her peerage after what Issei said earlier. That¡¯s not my fault though! ¡°I need to go now, Onee-chan. Please call me anytime if you wanted to meet again. But, don¡¯t bring him please.¡± ¡°Nya~ I will. Riku-sama is a good man, don¡¯t be too hard on him nya, Shirone! Also, he¡¯s not a pervert like that boy earlier!¡± Kuroka tried to defend me, but I think Koneko¡¯s opinion had hit rock''s bottom and it will be hard for me to get close to her again. ¡°Well, I admit that he¡¯s better than Issei-senpai.¡± Hearing her words, I smiled and nodded my head repeatedly. ¡®Right, I am not a pervert like Issei! I just loved pranks like my old man!¡¯ ¡°But he¡¯s still a pervert.¡± ¡®Damn it!! Just wait in the future, Koneko. I will make you call me Onii-chan!¡¯ With that, our lunch ended and we were going back to our class for the second period of class. RaizarP Author Here~ More than 52 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks to the New Executive!! - Deadpool2695 Big Thanks to the New Squad Leader!! - Roberto - Luka Kapanadze Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 25 – A Rather Normal Day This is the last slow pace chapter. The next one and the future will be rather fast-paced because the plot in DxD has started moving. Well, Enjoy the Chapter. ***** Now the school has ended. Kuroka said to me that she wanted to spend time with Koneko and I gave her permission to do so. I''m not a possessive man that wanted my girls to do anything that I ordered them after all. I respected their own privacy and let them do what they wanted to do. Now that I was alone, I decided to go back to my apartment without taking a detour because Tsura was in the apartment alone, and I feel bad for leaving her for too long. Because I spend some time with Kuroka in school without Tsura, it would be fair if I spend my time with Tsura just the two of us going around. Entering the apartment, I said my greetings. "I''m home." "Welcome home, Riku-sama." Tsura answered my greeting from beyond the hallway and I heard her footstep approaching me. She shows up in the hallway while wearing a white Kimono with a blue flower pattern and smiled at me. Seeing her like that, I too smiled and put my shoes on the shoe rack that was on the left side of the hallway. I approached Tsura and give her a quick kiss, and said. "Do you want to go out after this?" Tsura looked at me with excitement in her eyes as she said. "Yes! Please wait for me to change my clothes!" As she said that, she jogged away and entered the bedroom before slamming the door behind her. I just smiled seeing her antic and seeing that she didn''t even ask where Kuroka is, I guess her excitement was over the roof. I put my school bag down and sat on the couch to wait for Tsura to get changed. I was still in my school uniform and didn''t bother to change my clothes as this was good enough to go out. I just un-buttoned the blazer and we are ready to go on a date. After a while, Tsura exited the room while wearing blue jeans and a white turtle neck sweater with a blue snowflake pattern on its sleeves. She also wore a white sling bag over her shoulder and wore some makeup on her face. When I saw her, my first reaction was to compliment her. "Those clothes suits you, you are beautiful, Tsura." Tsura blushes and fidgetted before she said. "Thank you." She looked around the room and noticed that Kuroka was not with me. When she was about to ask, I cut her off by saying. "Kuroka is spending her time with her sister. So I thought that now is the best chance for us to spend the time together with just the two of us. Don''t you think so?" Tsura nodded her head and I stood up from the couch. "Shall we go? I called out to Tsura and we exited the apartment together. As I don''t have any exact destination, I walked to the park with Tsura. On our way, I saw her fidgeting for some reason while looking at my hand. She moved her hand and pulled it back a few times and did the movement repeatedly. Realizing what she wanted to do, I hold her left hand with my right hand and smiled at her. "If you wanted to hold my hand, just say so." "Yes, Riku-sama. I am just nervous as this is our first date with the two of us." Said Tsura with a strained smile. "When we were in the Kanto, you were always training with Magari or Commander. Also when we were there, Kuroka was always present, so when I walked with you right now, somehow I turned nervous." That''s true¡­ I''ve always trained myself in fear that I will get killed when our home was attacked. When we were first played together, just the two of us, I ran away and brought Kuroka back as a result. I''m glad that I can spend time with Tsura like this. We just walked around the park and chatted with each other, enjoying the time with the two of us. With my Telos Karma, I could always change the probability of my encounter with someone. Today, I just wanted to go around with Tsura and cheated with my Sacred Gear to make our date become smooth, until we come back home in the night. Kuroka was waiting for us at home and greeted us as she watched the TV in the all-purpose¡­ that''s too long, I will shorten it to AP room. When Tsura saw Kuroka, she boasted about our date and disturbed Kuroka all night. I just entered the bedroom quietly and changed into my sleeping yukata and dived on the bed. *** When I woke up, I felt 2 weights on top of my body. I opened my eyes and looked down at my body. I saw Tsura and Kuroka were sleeping with their arms linked around my body while naked. Wait, what? I still wore my Yukata and sighed in relief although it was become a mess because of the girls. So they just sleep while hugging me and didn''t do anything at all. I will be disappointed if they did something to me while I was sleeping. At least they can do something while I am awake. I tried to raise my body but their arms stopped me from doing that. I could always use a little bit of force to escape from them, but I didn''t do it because there is a chance that I will hurt them. So I decided to wake them up by poking their cheeks with my arms. For some reason, while they are hugging me, they let my arms roam free. I bet this is Kuroka''s idea to sleep like this. "Hey, wake up. Put on your clothes or you will catch a cold!" I raised my voice a bit to make sure that they will wake up from it. "Uhn~" I heard a cute voice that was coming from Tsura and saw her slowly raise her body and rub her eyes. "Goof moning~ Rikuu syamaa~ Yaawn~" Tsura greeted me while not fully awake and let out a long yawn. She loosened up her arms and stretched it back, puffing her bare chest as a result. I appreciate them for a while before returning Tsura''s greeting. "Good morning too, Tsura. I think you should wash your face after wearing your clothes." As I said that, Tsura was fully awake and quickly covered her chest while looking at me with a red face. After looking at me for a while, she turned at Kuroka and smacked her butt. "Nya!!" Kuroka raised her body suddenly and looked around in a daze before stopping her gaze at me and blinking a few times. She slowly closed her eyes again and leaned against my chest. Umu, good. Or not. "Wake up, Kuroka!" Once again, Tsura smacked Kuroka''s butt, this time was the different side of the butt that she smacked earlier. "Nyaa!! What are you doing!!" Kuroka shouted angrily and pounced at Tsura. I don''t know what''s going on with them¡­ Why do they act like this suddenly? Silently, I jumped off my bed and exited the room, closing the door behind me. ''Well, girls are girls. I will let them settle whatever it is.'' And I went to the bathroom to wash my face and brush my teeth after deciding to ignore them, for now. RaizarP Author Here~ More than 54 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 26 – Warning towards the Devils After some time, both of them were exiting the room and got ready to go to school. Right now, we were walking to the school with me in the middle while Kuroka on my left and Tsura on my right. ¡°So, what happened earlier?¡± I asked Tsura and Kuroka while having a curious expression. ¡°W-well, it was sort of my fault nya¡­¡± Said Kuroka while averting her gaze to the left. ¡®Hoo? Kuroka¡¯s fault, was it?¡¯ I become more curious about what happened earlier. When I slept last night, they were just fine and this morning for some reason Tsura was a bit angry? towards Kuroka. ¡°That¡¯s definitely her fault. There was no way I would sleep while naked like that!¡± On my right, Tsura raised her voice while her face turned red in embarrassment. ¡®So that¡¯s what¡¯s going on! Kuroka removed Tsura¡¯s clothes while she was sleeping. I see, in that case, I can¡¯t blame her for being angry at Kuroka.¡¯ I turned at Kuroka and said. ¡°Is there any explanation for that, Kuroka?¡± Kuroka looked at me with a serious face and said. ¡°None nya! What¡¯s wrong with sleeping naked in the same bed as our lover nya! Tsura was just being shy, that¡¯s all, Riku-sama!¡± I nodded my head at her explanation and turned to Tsura this time. ¡°Anything you wanted to add, Tsura?¡± Tsura lowered her head and muttered. ¡°¡­ it was embarrassing¡­¡± With a smile on my face, I turned to Kuroka and gave her a thumb up. Seeing my smile, Kuroka smiled and give me a thumb up back. After that we laughed together, ignoring Tsura that was grunted in embarrassment. *** We have arrived at school, and to my surprise, Sona and Rias were waiting for us in front of the gate. When they saw us, Sona approached us first, followed by Rias that walk behind her with a complicated expression. She looked guilty, or rather, scared? I was confused and tilted my head a little as Sona stopped in front of us and suddenly bowed at me. ¡°Please forgive our behavior the other day, it was our fault that our peerage¡¯s member offended you.¡± Rias also followed Sona and bowed to me albeit rather unwilling. This is¡­ rather bad, isn¡¯t it? We are in public and almost all students saw the Student council president and Rias bowed to me. I poked Kuroka with my shoulder and she immediately put a barrier to make the public see an illusion when they saw us. After the barrier was set, I looked at Sona and Rias. ¡°So you do know who am I? That¡¯s good. You can raise your head you know?¡± Sona and Rias raised their head as Sona said. ¡°Yes, we do. Nura Riku, the son of Nurarihyon. But we know too late, and it was thanks to our meeting 2 days ago.¡± I slowly transformed into my youkai form and looked down at Sona and Rias as I was taller than them in my youkai form. With a lower tone and serious face, I stared at them and says. ¡°Then you do know, that I will watch over the devils. I will do what I think is best for my faction, I don¡¯t care about your problem with the church, or even reincarnating a girl from the church as your follower. But, I won¡¯t allow any forced reincarnation to humans in Kuoh Town. I was sent to prevent that, are you clear? This town was only lent to you, not given. This is still my faction¡¯s territory, a youkai territory.¡± I called on my fear and a black cloud of smoke surround my body, amplifying my intimidation at them. Sona nodded her head and said. ¡°Yes, we are informed by Lucifer-sama regarding that.¡± Rias on the other hand nodded in fear. It seems that she understood that my words were directed at her. Two days ago, I just show them a hint that I was a young master from a youkai faction, now I will clearly state to them who I really am. ¡°Good, if you understand my warning. What happened to Issei was something that I usually loathe. No matter how I act, no matter how much I love pranks, and how much I love playing around. I will tell you something. If I know, or heard something regarding devils or concerning devils happening in this town, I will surely take compensation from your faction. That¡¯s the agreement between Lady Amaterasu and your leader.¡± ¡°I am clear. A letter was sent from the Underworld regarding that. Unfortunately, it was late.¡± Said Sona to me. I erased my fear, turned back to my human form, and smiled. ¡°Then that¡¯s fine. Oh, 2 more things that I wanted to say.¡± As I said that, I raised my index finger near my face. ¡°First, rein Hyoudou Issei away from my girls, if I saw him peeping on Kuroka or Tsura, I will beat him without any second thought. Maybe in anger, I would beat him too far that he would die from it, so I hope you can stop him. Also, expel his perverted friends.¡± ¡®Well, even if I didn¡¯t beat him, Tsura would freeze him to death.¡¯ I thought as I imagined the scene where Tsura froze Issei to death in my head. Sona has a bitter expression as she nodded her head, but Rias has an outburst after I said that I would beat Issei to death. She looked at me in anger and shouted. ¡°Hey! Even if you are a son of East Youkai Faction¡¯s leader, who gave you permission to beat my cute pawn to dead?!¡± ¡°Rias!¡± Shouted Sona as she tried to stop Rias. Fortunately, Rias stopped at that and gritted her teeth as she looked at me. I let out a sigh because of Rias¡¯s behavior. ¡°Look, I don¡¯t hate him or something. I am a youkai that loves pranks, but I am also a youkai that was easy to anger. I am protective of my friend and family. You would also do the same thing if your family was in danger, no?¡± Because I know that Rias was protective (lol) towards her peerage, I choose to tell her something that would make her shut up for good. And it worked as Rias stopped gritting her teeth and answered me with a low ¡°Yeah¡­¡± ¡°The second matter though, if anyone ever wanted to leave your peerage, you would allow it. Do you understand?¡± Sona immediately nodded her head as she says. "That''s natural." As Rias knows she has no way to refute me because I said that ¡®If anyone wanted¡¯, she just nodded her head weakly. If by chance she won¡¯t allow it, I could always force my way to help. As long as that someone pays me with something equivalent. ¡°I will, but they would die if the evil piece was removed from their body. You do know that right?¡± I just waved my hand and smiled. ¡°Ah, that thing? I have my way so don¡¯t worry about it.¡± ¡®Telos Karma would definitely allow me to remove the evil pieces without harming the host.¡¯ ¡°Then our matter is done?¡± I asked Sona which she answered with ¡°Yes.¡± I nodded at her and asked Kuroka to remove the barrier. The students around us were watching us and maybe they are wondering what happened here. I quickly put my act and said. ¡°Well then, Kaichou. We will go to our class.¡± As a girl that was confident with her intelligence, Sona quickly followed my act by saying. ¡°Very well, Nura. I hope you enjoy attending our school.¡± ¡°Yes, well then, goodbye~¡± We started walking towards our class as Sona and Rias followed us with their gaze. ¡®Now that I clearly stated my position, I could do anything I want. The devils would also be careful on their move as they know that I am watching them. Well, I just let Asia die 2 days ago just because I was ordered to not intrude on their war though. After the peace conference, I could go wild as much as I want.¡¯ RaizarP Author Here~ More than 54 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks to the New Squad Leader!! - Mike Guin - Rusted Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 27 – I Awakened something, but it’s not Hidden Power We are now in the class, about to take a lesson as usual. But today something was different from the previous days. It was because the teacher brought along a girl with long blonde hair and green eyes with her. The girl in question was wearing girl¡¯s Kuoh uniform, but what she was wearing was a bit different from the other students. It was because of her shirts. Instead of wearing some kind of corset-looking blazer like the other female student, she was wearing a black vest. Both of her hands were placed in front of her, appearing to be polite as she introduced herself. ¡°My name is Asia Argento, nice to meet you.¡± The girl, Asia smiled as she closed her eyes, instantly charmed the boys in the class. Well, excluding me. I just leaned against my seat while looking at her. It seems that Asia noticed my gaze and looked at me. She was surprised when she saw me and almost let out a yelp before the teacher saved her. ¡°Well then, Argento-san. You can sit next to Yuki-san over there.¡± The teacher pointed at the seat right next to Tsura. ¡°Y-yes!¡± She answered with a rather loud voice because of the surprise. The teacher just brushed it off as she think maybe Asia was too nervous to attend a new school with a new environment. Asia walked towards her seat and sat silently while looking at me warily then at Issei before looking at the teacher in the front of the class. ¡°Alright, let¡¯s start the lesson.¡± *** After school ended, I saw Asia walking over to Issei and saying something to him before they exited the classroom together. Well, maybe Asia wanted Issei to show her around the school, but that¡¯s not too important for me. While I was watching them, Kuroka approached me and said. ¡°Riku-sama, I will meet with Shirone today. She asked me to teach her in Senjutsu nya!¡± ¡®She wanted to learn Senjutsu, huh? That¡¯s a good idea.¡¯ I thought as I touched my chin and looked at Kuroka. ¡°Then I will go with you, Kuroka. We can use this chance to introduce Tsura to her too.¡± Tsura heard me calling her name approached me from behind. ¡°Shirone-chan? Can I meet her too, Kuroka?¡± Kuroka face beamed into a smile before saying. ¡°Of course nya! I think she will be happy to meet you too.¡± ¡°Then it¡¯s decided, let¡¯s go to meet Koneko-chan.¡± I said as I stood up from my chair. *** ¡°Why is he here, onee-chan?¡± Asked Koneko as she looked at me. Right now, Kuroka, Tsura, Koneko and I are in a clearing behind the Kuoh Academy. The reason was to train Koneko in Senjutsu. But, what I didn¡¯t expect was her reaction when she saw me. Why? Was it because I didn¡¯t bring any sweet with me right now? ¡°Shirone, as I said yesterday, Riku-sama is a good man, unlike that perverted boy under Rias nya. Why did you always act like this towards Riku-sama nya?¡± Kuroka defending me by comparing me with issei. ¡®Kuroka¡­ if you compared me with Issei, then she will think of me as a pervert like him! At least compare me with my old man!¡¯ I thought while trying my best to not sigh. ¡°I know, onee-chan. But, I can¡¯t smell him, that¡¯s why I¡¯m scared of him.¡± Said Koneko as she looked at Kuroka. When I think about it, I always layered my body with my Fear, although it¡¯s not visible to other people. That masked my presence to make the other supernatural feel that I am human, but at the same time, it also erases my energy and the others thing. That¡¯s the reason why I said that Koneko wouldn¡¯t be able to find me. But to think that she acts like that to me because she can¡¯t smell my origin and is wary of me. Well, maybe my act when we meet the first time in the student council room was too much for her. ¡°I see, so that¡¯s the reason? Why you didn¡¯t tell me about it yesterday? If that¡¯s the case, then it¡¯s easy.¡± I said to Koneko as I erased my Fear for her. I also turned to my Youkai form in front of her to make my claim believable. Her eyes were bulging when she saw me change into my youkai form and I smiled in victory. Now the question, did Rias didn¡¯t tell her peerage that I am the son of Nurarihyon? Why did Koneko look surprised when she saw me changing form? ¡°You¡¯re a youkai?¡± Asked Koneko while looking at me. She slowly approached me and smelled me from a close range. ¡°Sakura¡­ it¡¯s good.¡± I smiled at Koneko and said. ¡°How is it? You¡¯re not afraid anymore?¡± Koneko raised her head to look at me and give me a nod. ¡°You smell like Sakura, there is a bit of sake smell but that¡¯s okay. You¡¯re a good person.¡± ¡°Nyaa!! You¡¯re too close to Riku-sama nya!¡± Kuroka approached Koneko, putting her hands below Koneko¡¯s armpit, and pulled her away from me. ¡°Hahahaha.¡± I heard a giggle from my side and saw that Tsura was giggling while covering her mouth with her hand. Now that it¡¯s settled, then I think I need to ask her for once more time. ¡°So, can I call you Shirone? I am clear right?¡± Koneko released herself from Kuroka and looked at me. ¡°I will think about it¡­¡± That¡¯s an improvement, I guess. But now, I think I need to settle something before we begin with Kone- Shirone training. I looked at Kuroka and approached her. But, as I stepped forward one step, she took one step back, as if running away from me. Because she kept stepping back from me, her back eventually hit a tree and she can¡¯t run away from me anymore. She looked at me and tilted her head while saying. ¡°Nya?¡± ¡°You didn¡¯t tell Kon- Shirone-chan that I am a youkai?¡± I leaned my face closer to Kuroka and she sweated before averting her gaze. ¡°I-I thought that Shirone knows about it nya! Riku-sama made such a show in the student council room, and those devils from Gremory and Sitri house knew about your identity nya! I don¡¯t know that they didn¡¯t tell anyone about it, so I¡¯m innocent, nya?¡± After saying all of that, Kuroka looked at me while putting her hands together as if she¡¯s praying. I leaned my mouth closer to her right ear and said. ¡°You will get punished tonight.¡± Kuroka¡¯s cat ears suddenly appeared as I said that and perked up in surprise. I pulled my face away from her and I really didn¡¯t expect her reaction towards what I am saying. She put both of her hands on her cheeks while having a big smile on her face. She jumped around on her ground while saying Nya! Repeatedly. I think I awaken something within her¡­ I decided to ignore her and walked over to Tsura and Shirone. RaizarP Author Here~ More than 54 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks to the New Executive!! - Ole Martin Johnsen Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 28 – Senjutsu Training When I reached Tsura and Shirone, Tsura looked at Kuroka that was jumping around in the distance before turning at me. ¡°I hope I can join too.¡± Tsura said quietly with her face changing into a red shade. ¡°H-hahaha, tomorrow?¡± I said evasively but fortunately, I got a nod of approval from Tsura. If both of them attacked me at the same time, even I will get exhausted. With this, my activities for two nights are settled. I looked at Koneko with a smile but before I said something, I was answered with something that I didn¡¯t expect. ¡°I won¡¯t join.¡± She said as she looked at me with judging eyes. So she did understand what Tsura mean? ¡°Ah, no. I wanted to say why did you just start your Senjutsu training today?¡± I said as I scratched my cheek with my left hand as I looked at Shirone. ¡°The underworlds held lots of malice¡­ I can¡¯t train my Senjutsu there and when I come to earth, I was not able to train it because there is no one to teach me.¡± Said Shirone while looking down on the ground as she said it. I narrowed my eyes and asked. ¡°Did you not ask Rias to hire a tutor for you? When you come to earth, you could always visit Youkai base to ask for training, you know? If you tell them that you are Kuroka¡¯s sister, then they will be happy to take you to us.¡± At my words, Shirone raised her head and shook it. ¡°No, at that time I was a bit scared to meet with onee-chan.¡± I see, she did think that she was at fault for believing that Kuroka went crazy when she left her so I understand if she¡¯s scared to meet Kuroka. Even Kuroka was like that, she blame herself for the incident and left Shirone alone in the underworld. Both of them blamed themselves and were scared to meet each other. I must praise myself to take Kuroka to meet Shirone yesterday. Good job me. ¡°I see, then I will watch your training with Kuroka. As she¡¯s a better teacher, I will leave you in her care.¡± ¡°Yes.¡± She nodded her head and walked over to Kuroka that was recovering from my words earlier. I looked around the area to find a good spot to sit. I saw a big tree trunk that was laying on the ground not far from Kuroka and Shirone and smiled. ¡°Tsura, let¡¯s watch them in that place.¡± I pointed at the trunk as I looked at Tsura. ¡°I will go there later, Riku-sama. I planned to go back to the apartment for a while to get a meal for them. I bet Shirone-chan will be hungry when the training is over. You can also introduce me to her at that time, seeing that earlier you didn¡¯t introduce me yet.¡± ¡°My bad. Be careful, Tsura.¡± ¡°I will.¡± Answered Tsura as she walked away from the clearing. I went to the tree trunk and sat on top of it as I watched Shirone ask Kuroka all things about Senjutsu. ¡°First, you must know what Senjutsu is.¡± Kuroka started teaching Shirone while raising her index finger. Shirone listened to Kuroka with full attention as she sat on the ground without minding the dirt that stuck on her skirt. ¡°Senjutsu is basically life energy, or often called as Ki inside our body.¡± Kuroka explained to Shirone as she summoned a purplish-black aura that formed a shape of fire from her hand. ¡°We can use this Aura to strengthen ourselves or attack the opponent by sending this aura to their direction.¡± Kuroka threw the purplish-black aura in her hand towards a tree on her right. Kuroka and Shirone¡¯s gaze was following the aura until it hit the tree and left a mark on it. After the aura was gone, they looked at each other again and Kuroka continued her explanation. ¡°That was the example of a weak aura. If you condensed it, it can reach a level that could kill supernatural beings in one hit.¡± This time Kuroka summoned a ball with a purple aura around it and sent it flying towards the same tree. The speed of the flying ball was different from the previous one, it was faster and deadlier. When the ball hit the tree, it burst the place where it hit and destroyed the tree. The tree was falling not too long after its trunk was destroyed and crashed into the other trees. Both of the girls didn¡¯t even look at the tree. Kuroka looked at Shirone with a serious face and said. ¡°Do you want to learn it nya?¡± Koneko nodded her head and stood up, facing Kuroka with a serious face. ¡°I will. Please teach me, onee-chan.¡± I smirked while watching them. Unknown to Kuroka or Shirone, I gathered Ki in my right hand and shot it towards Shirone. The Ki aura that I gathered secretly hit Shirone and made her yelp in surprise. ¡°Hya!¡± As she yelped in surprise, because of contact with my Ki, her ears and tails have appeared in an instant. Shirone glared at me with a look that could kill someone as she asked in a lower tone. ¡°Why did you do that?¡± Hearing her question, I shut my right eyes and smiled as I said. ¡°You must not hide your youkai nature when you learn Senjutsu. It will get harder to learn it, trust me.¡± My real reason was to see Shirone¡¯s cat ears though. Well, my word itself wasn¡¯t wrong as her ears will appear when she was using Senjutsu, I just make the process faster and tease her a little with that. Shirone looked at Kuroka for confirmation. Kuroka looked at me for a second and understood my intention, she nodded her head and said. ¡°That¡¯s true nya.¡± ¡°I see. Then I trust you.¡± Said Shirone while looking at me. Although she said that I was okay, it seems that I still need to gain her trust, huh. Trust will come with time, so I need to be patient. ¡°What¡¯s the first step of the training, onee-chan?¡± Asked Shirone. ¡°The first step is¡­¡± Kuroka began to explain the first step of the training to Shirone. Each time Kuroka explained things, Shirone''s face become paler and paler. She looked at me in disbelief but I just averted my gaze after I heard Kuroka¡¯s explanation. Kuroka¡¯s training method was similar to Magari¡¯s which make me shudder when she mentioned it, I hope Shirone could handle it. After the explanation ended, they finally proceed to the real training with me praying for her survival. ¡®You must survive, Shirone!¡¯ RaizarP Author Here~ More than 54 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks to the New Executive!! - Ole Martin Johnsen Big Thanks to the New Squad Leader!! - RyleyssjGod Huett Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 29 – Senjutsu Training 2 ¡°Haa¡­ Haa¡­ Ha¡­ Onee-chan¡­¡± Shirone has a ragged breath as she sprawls over the dirt with her clothes battered in someplace. ¡°Haa...haa¡­ you never said¡­ that you will hit me with Senjutsu aura¡­ onee-chan¡­ I thought ¡­ that I will do meditation or something¡­¡± Kuroka¡¯s ear perked in response and said. ¡°Nya? I said that you will need to get used to the aura first. The best way to do that is getting hit by my aura nya! That¡¯s what Magari said.¡± Looking at their training, I remembered my training day. As Kuroka said, when I asked Magari to train me for the first time, she hit me with a lot, I mean lots of times with Aura bullet before I go to meditation to feel the Ki and energy around me. That method certainly worked, it worked but it¡¯s painful. Even I asked for Magari to end the training at some time and directly attempted a meditation. Fortunately, or rather unfortunately because I go through torture for a few days already, I could feel the life energy within my body and my surrounding rather easily. That¡¯s why I will support Kuroka in Shirone training for now. Because that is the fastest way for Shirone to learn Senjutsu. I stood up from the tree trunks and approached Shirone. I stopped beside Kuroka that looked on Shirone on her left and peered towards her bruised face. ¡°Yo!¡± I raised my right hand beside my face. ¡°How are you?¡± Shirone looked at me and with a ragged breath said. ¡°Haa¡­ bad. Is this¡­ the correct way to learn Senjutsu?¡± I shook my head at her question and answered. ¡°It¡¯s not the correct way. It¡¯s the fastest way. Do you want to learn Senjutsu slowly? I can teach you the correct method.¡± ¡°What are you saying Riku-sama!¡± Kuroka shouted at me from my left. I turned to look at her and tilted my head. ¡°What?¡± Kuroka pointed at Shirone with her index finger. ¡°Shirone told me her situation! She at least wanted to learn Senjutsu in a few days because Rias has some trouble that needs her help. After that, she promised me that she will exit Rias¡¯s peerage to go with us nya!¡± I touched my chin and thinking about her reason and said. ¡°So it¡¯s like that. Fine, I will allow you to use Magari''s method to train her.¡± So that¡¯s the reason why Kuroka train Shirone like that. But, why did Shirone want to help Rias? Is it because Shirone was about to get executed and saved by Rias¡¯s brother when Kuroka killed her master? But, Shirone wanted to exit her peerage after helping her. I wanted that to happen, but to think that she will decide about it this soon. I predicted that Shirone would exit Rias¡¯s peerage on her own afford after Kokabiel¡¯s attack. Or at least I will force her to exit Rias¡¯s peerage after Kokabiel¡¯s attack. This is truly a good thing that she wanted to exit Rias¡¯s peerage after paying her life debt. Although Kuroka was not at fault, the Devils would still execute Shirone if not for Sirzechs¡¯s help. So I understand that Shirone at least wanted to help Rias once. I looked at Shirone and faced a smirk on her. Kuroka who saw my face also faced Shirone and smiled. ¡°Both of you are crueler than devils.¡± Muttered Shirone. ¡°Well well, you wanted to help Rias, but how? If some devil entered Kuoh Town without telling me beforehand, I would be forced to move, you know? At best, the devil would suffer a wound, and at worst I will kill him.¡± I said to Shirone while hinting something at her. If some devils other than the Gremory or Sitri family entered the town without telling me, I would make sure that they didn¡¯t leave with full health. I couldn¡¯t do anything to the fallen angel as Raynare was not declared as stray yet by Azazel, but devils are different. We have contracts with each other. And it was stated that only the Gremory and Sitri family with some of their guests were allowed to visit without telling the watcher. If some devils entered the territory without the permission of the watcher, or in this case me, I would be allowed to hurt them. Also, if the devil in the question is doing something to a family member of the watcher, or in this case Shirone, I would be allowed to retaliate with all my strength. Yes, I considered Shirone as my family member because she¡¯s Kuroka¡¯s sister. All the youkai that followed me are my family, my friend, as well as my comrade. So I will not allow anyone to touch them, not in my watch. ¡°Even so¡­¡± Shirone raised her body and stood up unstable. She looked at me straight in my eyes and declared. ¡°¡­I will get stronger. I wanted to help Onee-chan if she need me. I don¡¯t want to become her burden again.¡± ¡°Shirone¡­¡± Muttered Kuroka. ¡°Hahahaha, fine! I expect no less from you, Shirone-chan! How about we change the training a little? Try to hit me one time.¡± I said to Shirone as I raised my index finger. ¡°Hit you one time? Isn¡¯t that too easy?¡± Asked Shirone as she dusted her tattered clothes. ¡°Shirone, even I can¡¯t hit him if Riku-sama is serious nya.¡± Kuroka''s words have made Shirone surprised. If Kuroka, who in Shirone''s eyes was strong, admitted that she can¡¯t hit me even once, then what¡¯s her chance of hitting me? ¡°I will hold myself back, of course. If I didn¡¯t hold back, then it¡¯s not training for Shirone, it would be me bullying her.¡± I said while smiling at Shirone. I did this to provoke her and make her do her best in the training. ¡®As the future third member of my Hyakki Yakkou, I will make you stronger, Shirone.¡¯ I thought as I smirked at Shirone. My plan worked wonders. Shirone¡¯s cat ear perked up as her tail stiffened in anger. She glared at me and said. ¡°I will hit you, I will definitely hit you until I am satisfied.¡± ¡°Then try it, try to hit me! You can sta ¨C¡° As I was about to say start, Shirone launched her body at me. In an instant, she reached me and punched my face. She smiled as she saw that her punch connected to my face and she definitely felt that she had hit me. Unfortunately for her though, that¡¯s only a fake that I created using Kyouka Suigetsu. I spread my fear as soon as I proposed to train her, so I was prepared for all kinds of surprise attacks. I appeared again behind Shirone and give her my family''s signature move, Flying Yakuza Kick, on her back. She stumbles and collapsed on the ground because of my kick. Without delay, she jumped back up with her hands and glared at me. ¡°How?¡± I just smiled at her question and said. ¡°Try to hit me if you want to know.¡± RaizarP Author Here~ More than 54 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks to the New Executive!! - Ole Martin Johnsen - L1 Mainy Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 30 – Playing with Shirone Shirone rushed towards me while brandishing her fist. She glared at me with an intensity that could kill a normal person, and throw a punch in my direction. I side-stepped to the left and dodge her punch. At her speed, I don¡¯t need to use my fear to dodge her attack. The first attack was different though, as it was a surprise attack so I use Kyouka Suigetsu to make her see my fake presence. Because her punch was dodged, Shirone immediately send a kick using her left leg towards me. This time I ducked under her kick and send a low kick, hitting the right leg that she use as a pivot and making her fall to the ground. As she fell, I jumped back and landed while crossing my arm and looking at Shirone. ¡°Who said that it was easy to hit me? I held myself back from using my technique and yet you can¡¯t hit me.¡± I said to Shirone with a smug smile on my face. I¡¯ve been sparring, no, bullied by my old man in our spar when I was a child. That made me so mad that a curse came out of my mouth every time I faced my old man. But, I think I understand his feeling at that time. Having spar with someone weaker than you has different enjoyment than fighting with someone strong. I could play with them, mocking them, and more importantly, I could make a quip to provoke them. ¡°Shut up.¡± Shirone raised her body and then leaped towards me. Her speed was faster than earlier, if I compare it with using a number, then the previous one had reached 20mph and this one she managed to reach 25mph. She¡¯s faster, but that¡¯s it. I could see her attack clearly as she didn¡¯t use any technique right now. She reached my position in a second and sent me an uppercut with her right hand. Because of her short stature, she has a disadvantage from fighting me on equal ground. I smiled as I saw her uppercut approaching my chin. She uses her small stature to her advantage, if it''s a normal person or at least normal devils, they wouldn¡¯t able to dodge this uppercut. Mainly because of a surprise, and they wouldn¡¯t be able to see Shirone under their sight. While this uppercut works for other devils or at least the devils at Kiba or Issei¡¯s level, this will not work for me. I easily dodged her attack by tilting my head to the left, but as if she predicted it, she quickly sent a jab to my stomach using her free left hand as she pulled her right hand at the same time. Naturally, I dodged her jab, but she then sent a barrage of punches that made me a little bit troubled. She kept pushing me as I kept dodging her punch until finally, she changed her punch into a roundhouse kick. She almost hit my face with that kick, but as I kept getting kicked by my old man, my body moved by instinct and dodged her kick. I jumped backward to make a distance between us and said. ¡°Woah, that was close, maybe if you kept punching me a little bit faster, then you will hit me with that kick. Nice try though.¡± Shirone looked pissed as I commented on her attack. No, she didn¡¯t look pissed. She¡¯s pissed off by my comment. Her tails were moving back and forth as she gritted her teeth and glared at me with her sharp eyes. As she glared at me with such intensity, a white-bluish aura appeared around her body. Honestly, I was surprised, but I had a big smile on my face. Shirone was able to use a Senjutsu just because of this spar. She¡¯s talented, that¡¯s for sure. But, to be able to emit an aura with just one-day training is just cheating. It seems that she herself didn¡¯t realize the aura that she emitted while Kuroka was having a surprised face as I¡¯ve thought. ¡°This is interesting, then allow me to use one of my techniques.¡± As I said that, black smoke surrounded my body and erases my presence. Shirone looked surprised as she looked around to try to find me. She was confused, she tried to sniff the air to find my smell but she slumps her shoulder after a few seconds. I almost laughed at her but I held it. I walked to Shirone, stopped behind her, and give her a chop on her head with my hand. ¡°Ouch!¡± Shouted Shirone, surprised by my chop. She turned back almost instantly, but she only saw an empty space instead of me. Now she¡¯s confused again and punches the space around her in anger. I dispelled my fear and appeared behind Shirone as I tackled her legs, making her fall on the ground again. She rolled and stood on her feet again as she pounced at me and throw a punch. This time, I didn¡¯t dodge her punch because I had achieved the goal of this training, and that¡¯s to make Shirone learn Senjutsu. I took her punch with my left hand and laughed. ¡°Hahahahaha, it seems that even with Senjutsu you can¡¯t feel my presence, huh. You still have a long way to go.¡± Shirone blinked her eyes several times as her aura disappeared from her body. She pulled her hand and looked at both of them with disbelief. ¡°Am I really using Senjutsu?¡± Asked Shirone. Kuroka approached us from the distance and hugged Shirone from behind. ¡°You did it nya! As expected from my sister!¡± Kuroka was beamed into a smile as she nudged her cheeks against Shirone¡¯s. She can¡¯t contain her happiness as she hugged Shirone tighter. ¡°Onee-chan, Riku-senpai is watching¡­¡± Said Shirone while peeking at Kuroka as she can¡¯t move her head because of Kuroka. But, I was focused on the way she calls me. Did she say Riku-senpai? I leaned against Shirone and said. ¡°Can you repeat it again?¡± I have my kindest smile on my face, trying to coax her into saying it again. But for some reason, Shirone¡¯s stoic expression is back and she said. ¡°Nura-senpai.¡± ¡°Don¡¯t be shy~¡± ¡°Nura-senpai.¡± Repeated Shirone. I sighed and turned away from her. ¡°Well, that¡¯s an improvement. Kuroka, I will leave the rest to you, I have something to do.¡± ¡°Certainly nya!¡± Shouted Kuroka as she released Shirone. ¡°Now, Shirone. Let¡¯s continue our training nya!¡± ¡°Wa-wait, Riku-senpai!! Please, just let me train with you!! Riku-senpai!!¡± shouted Shirone. I could guess that Shirone¡¯s face was pale right now because I swear I could hear her calling me Riku-senpai. Well, that¡¯s just my imagination. I think it¡¯s better if I ignore it. I used Meikyo Shisui and disappeared from the clearing. What I said to Kuroka was not a lie, I had something to do right now. ¡®Freed has got his first Excalibur. It¡¯s time to harvest it!¡¯ RaizarP Author Here~ More than 54 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks to the New Executive!! - L1 Mainy Big Thanks to the New Squad Leader!! - Jeffrey Forsgren - Ash Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 31 – New Errand Boy Leaving Kuroka and Shirone in the clearing to continue their training, I changed into my human form as I stepped into the road. Freed has seen me in my youkai form, and I think he wanted to test his new blade in a human opponent first. That¡¯s why I used my Telos Karma to make the possibility of Freed attacking human to zero, or at least I will be his only target if he decided to attack human. I don¡¯t really know if the effect of Telos Karma will be enough to stop him, that¡¯s why when I feel an unknown energy entering the town earlier, I decided to go to him directly. The energy was pure, and now that energy was in the same place as Freed. My guess is that freed has gotten his first Excalibur and now he¡¯s on the move to test his blade. This is faster than I thought. Previously I thought that Freed would get his Excalibur after Riser visited Rias, but it seems that¡¯s not the case in this real world. I walked down the road and went to the direction where I felt the energy. I had tested with the light sword that I could make myself immune, or rather delete the probability of me getting hurt from light sword to zero. And that works. I must be careful with Excalibur though, as it was the stronger light than the usual light sword that was given to the exorcist. The energy that I felt is a little bit smaller than I had expected. Is it because the Excalibur was just a shard instead of the whole sword? But its energy certainly can¡¯t be compared to Ddraig. Even if he¡¯s sealed inside the Boosted Gear, his energy was so big that I could clearly felt it after Issei awakened the Boosted Gear a few days ago. But, it was enough. My sword, Nenekirimaru could cut every Supernatural entity with ease, but this Excalibur is different. It was made to hurt a dark creature, and it has a special ability, unlike my sword. I wanted to get the Excalibur Nightmare. It could further enhance my Fear to confuse my opponent. I am confident that no one could touch me if I utilize my Fear to the maximum and combine it with the probability changer, Telos Karma. But, I wanted to have more cards on my sleeves. In case someone that could cut my Fear appeared. As I thought about that, Freed appeared from the bush while holding a sword with a golden aura in his right hand. ¡®So he did appear in front of me, huh. That proved that Telos Karma could affect people too. But, his sword is not Excalibur Nightmare, right? Excalibur Nightmare has some ring circling the sword handle and blade if I remembered it correctly.¡¯ ¡°Jackpot~ I found a human walking around in this place as soon as I got my new Sword! Not only that, you¡­¡± Freed pointed his sword tip towards me as he smiled. ¡°¡­You reeks of devils. You are one of devil''s worshipper right?!¡± He said as his smile turned into a twisted one. Unfortunately for him, his threat and speech mean nothing to me. As he lacked the feel of intimidation with his bald head. ¡°What are you talking about, baldie?¡± I said as I smirked. However, I never expected Freed¡¯s reaction towards my quip. He just shrugged his shoulder and shook his head. ¡°This is why people always judged other people from their appearance. Don¡¯t you know?¡± Freed said and looked at me. ¡°This baldie has some amazing weapon in his hand!¡± As he said that, Freed disappeared from his location, no, he moved in a fast speed to my right and slashed his sword horizontally. Because of his fast speed, I was surprised a little, but I managed to evade his slash by ducking low to the ground and jumping backward after his slash passed my previous location. His speed is fast, but I think that¡¯s because of the sword. ¡°Excalbiur Rapidly, huh?¡± I said as I closed my right eyes and looked down at him. ¡®It¡¯s a miss, but that sword is useful. Because my theory was proved, I will make Freed become my errand boy to bring the rest of Excalibur to me. It didn¡¯t hurt me to collect the Excalibur as I could make the church owe the Youkai a favor with this.¡¯ ¡°Hohou, you know this sword? Exactly! This baby is Excalibur Rapidly, now die!¡± Shouted Freed as he disappeared from his location again. I could follow his movement with my eyes though, so the Excalibur Rapidly just enhanced the speed of its wielder. Freed reached me at a fast speed and make three slashes at the same time. This is rather bad, I quickly called my Nenekirimaru, blocked his slash, and send a thrust that pierced his shoulder. Freed was shouting ¡°It hurts!!¡± as he moved back using the ability of the Excalibur Rapidly and eyed the sword in my right hand. I rested my sword on my shoulder as I give him a look with one of my eye closed. ¡°Surprised?¡± ¡°Y-You!! You were that youkai that shaved my head!! I will kill you, you bastard!! How dare you act as a human when you were a fucking youkai!!¡± Freed brandished his sword high and rushed to me with a speed faster than before, he sent a vertical slash, aiming at my torso as he yelled. ¡°Surprise!!!¡± He swung his sword with both of his hands. I dodged to the left and sent a slash towards his hand with Nenekirimaru, but it was blocked by him using the handle of his sword. He then stepped back one step, and send a barrage of slashes towards me. He aimed for my shoulder, torso, heart, even my neck. With each slash, I either blocked them or redirect his slash to the other direction using my sword. ¡°Is this it? The extent of the Excalibur wielder?!¡± I shouted at Freed and kicked his stomach, making him fly and crash to the wall that separates the living area from the mountain area. I rushed at him and stepped on his right hand with my left leg, breaking it in the process. ¡°Aaahh!! It fucking hurts!!¡± Freed screamed as he tried to move my leg with his left hand, but my leg stayed firm and didn¡¯t move even a little. I eyed him from above as I bend my body. ¡°Don¡¯t you fucking kill the innocent human in this city, you bastard! Did you seriously think that the devils are the real owner of this town so you could do as you please? Think a little bit with that brain of yours.¡± I said as I stabbed Freed¡¯s left hand with my Nenekirimaru. His grip of Excalibur Rapidly was lessened and it dropped from his hand. I pulled my left leg from his hand and give him last kick on his stomach and he fell unconscious. I make my Nenekirimaru disappear and look at the Excalibur Rapidly that was dropped on the ground. Not only that, I used my Telos Karma to change the probability. This time, I ordered it to change the probability of me being a compatible holy sword user. After I felt my Telos Karma did its job, I picked the Excalibur Rapidly and eyed it. ¡°Good, I could lift it.¡± I looked at the Freed and said. ¡°The next time Freed got an Excalibur, he will find Nura Riku no matter what happened to his body.¡± My Telos Karma was working as soon as I said those words. With this, he will bring another Excalibur to me. I walked back to the clearing where Kuroka and Shirone were training with a big smile on my face. ¡®Do your best, my errand boy.¡¯ RaizarP Author Here~ More than 54 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks to the New Executive!! - L1 Mainy - Pancakes 4 days Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 32 – First Training, Done I went back to the clearing to see Kuroka and Shirone again as I bring the Excalibur Rapidly with me. I didn¡¯t forget to use Meikyo Shisui to hide my figure in order to surprise them. For some reason, the sword¡¯s golden aura was gone after I held it. Maybe it was gone because I didn¡¯t use its ability or something? I need to test it out later. When I reached the clearing, I saw Tsura sitting on the trunk where I sat before while holding a woven basket that I guessed was full of food for us. I looked at the clearing and saw Shirone sitting in front of Kuroka while closing her eyes. She meditated as a white-bluish aura came out from her body. Kuroka was in the same state as Shirone, but her aura was purplish-black and her aura was bigger than Shirone. Now I can¡¯t surprise them anymore. If I try to surprise them when they were in that state, there is a chance that they will get a backlash from Nature Energy which contains malice, and fall unconscious. Thankfully I got a replacement for them. I sneaked behind Tsura and leaned my face over her shoulder as I canceled Meikyo Shisui and my figure becomes visible again. ¡°Yo!¡± I said as I raised my right hand in front of her face. Tsura was surprised when my face appeared right in front of her, she yelped a little before frozen in place. I use this chance to give her a quick kiss before leaning back and resting the Excalibur on my shoulder. I walked in front of the tree trunk and motioned Tsura to give me a space to sit. ¡°Riku-sama¡­ I was surprised. Also, what is that sword, Riku-sama? That sword has some weird light energy around it.¡± Said Tsura as she shifted a little to the left, leaving enough space for me to sit down. She looked at me while eyeing the Excalibur that I held in my right hand. ¡°Sorry, I can¡¯t help myself.¡± I stabbed the Excalibur to the ground, right beside the tree trunk. ¡°I got a nice souvenir from my new errand boy.¡± Tsura looked at the Excalibur, then to me and said. ¡°Is that a holy sword, Riku-sama? Where¡¯d you find it?¡± ¡°My errand boy brought it for me. It¡¯s quite a nice sword if I have to say. It¡¯s better than Nenekirimaru in some aspect, but it¡¯s not as sharp as Nenekirimaru in terms of cutting.¡± I explained to Tsura how I managed to get this sword and tell her what is this sword. Starting from the night where I watched the devils attack the church in order to rescue Asia (lol), then to the part where Freed fled when he saw no chance to beat the devils until I used Telos Karma to change the probability of him coming to me. I deliberately lied to Tsura and add more explanation of my fight with Freed that night. I said to Tsura that Freed was boasting about him being able to wield Excalibur and will kill me using it when he got his hand on the sword. Then I continued to explain to Tsura about the fight earlier. I told her that I feel unusual energy and decided to check it. It seems that Tsura was also able to feel the Excalibur albeit just a little, as her Senjutsu mastery was still far from Kuroka or me. Although I said that, Tsura was proficient in using Youjutsu, especially the ice element because she¡¯s a YukiOnna. Then I conclude the story recap by getting my hand on this Excalibur. ¡°That¡¯s the gist of it. Any question, Tsura?¡± ¡°Why did you let him live, Riku-sama? I mean, you could kill him without any problem.¡± Asked Tsura as she tilted her head. ¡°That¡¯s a good question, I wanted to get this sword.¡± I said as I pulled the Excalibur that I stabbed on the ground and raise it in front of me with my right hand. ¡°This is Excalibur Rapidly, one of Excaliburs¡¯ shards. I wanted to get my hand on this sword in order to get the church to owe us something. That way, when we are in trouble, we could ask the Angel faction to help us out.¡± I stabbed back the sword to my right as I faced Tsura. ¡°That¡¯s the reason why I did this. Maybe they knew that I didn¡¯t kill Freed and just took the sword, but I saved them of trouble with devil if I took the sword before it was used to hurt the devil and caused a war again.¡± Tsura nodded her head at my explanation and said. ¡°That¡¯s a good reason, Riku-sama. But, what made you thought that the sword this Freed brought will be the original Excaliburs¡¯ shard?¡± I smiled at her question and said. ¡°My Sacred Gear.¡± With just that, Tsura understood what I mean and smiled back at me. ¡°You are truly an outrageous person, Riku-sama. When we first met, I just thought of you as somone who loves playing around and made some trouble. But, now that you are tasked to watch over this town, you did your job splendidly. I am truly honored to be by your side at this time.¡± When Tsura said it openly like that, I can¡¯t refute her. It was indeed true that I loves playing around. But I will be serious when it was the time to be serious. I just laugh at her words and looked at Shirone and Kuroka that were still sitting in the middle of the clearing. The sun has almost set, but they are still continuing their training. When did Riser come to the Kuoh Town? I can¡¯t help but feeling a bit anxious about it. I am worried that I wouldn¡¯t be able to control myself if he looked at Shirone that I look as my little sister with lustful gaze. He indeed changed when he was beaten up by Issei, but right now he¡¯s still a douchebag that looked at Rias and the girl in her peerage as some kind of toys or trophies. Let¡¯s just hope that nothing happen. Must I use my Telos Karma to make the probability of him looking at Shirone to zero? No, I will use it when I felt his energy entering Kuoh Town. When I looked at Shirone and Kuroka again, I saw them slowly opening their eyes and stood up together as they dusted their skirt from the dust. Kuroka said something to Shirone which I can¡¯t here from my position and looked at us. They approached us and Kuroka waved at us. Tsura smiled as she stood from the trunk and approached Kuroka. She gave Kuroka the woven basket which was full of food that she made, Sandwhichs and Onigiri. I also stood up and went to the three of them after pulling the Excalibur from my side. I can¡¯t make it disappear like my Nenekirimaru so I held it myself which is suck. We enjoyed the food while sitting on the ground without minding the dirt and talked with each other, deepening my relationship with Shirone although she was still reluctant to call me with Riku-Senpai again. But well, that will happen someday. And with that, Shirone first training was finished and I need to find a way to hide this Excalibur Rapidly. RaizarP Author Here~ More than 54 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks to the New Executive!! - Pancakes 4 Days - David Murnane Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 33 – Sudden Visit After we are done eating, we go back to our apartment and I asked Kuroka and Tsura to wait for me on the couch as I hide the Excalibur in my bedroom. It seems that they are also talking about something as I entered the bedroom, so I just trying to find the best spot to hide it. Under the bed? Or in the closet? Usually, people hide their porn under the bed, so I thought that place was the perfect place to hide the Excalibur Rapidly. But when I think about it again, I choose to hide the Excalibur inside my closet, right under my clothes. I just leaned the Excalibur against the closet¡¯s wall and shroud it with my fear. Now that is perfect, I smiled and remembered that I had promised Kuroka to punish her tonight. So I exited the room and saw that Kuroka and Tsura were having serious faces as they nodded their head while sitting on the same couch. Now I had a bad feeling about it, could it be that they planned to attack me together? But Kuroka had awakened something, right? Why did she suddenly have a serious face? It was just around 5 minutes or so after I entered the bedroom. ¡°Riku-sama, I¡¯ve decided on something nya.¡± Said Kuroka as she looked at me. I was a bit nervous when she said it with a serious face. Kuroka has always had a smile and joke around, so right now the situation must be very important that she has a serious face. I sat on a couch in front of them and ask. ¡°What happened?¡± ¡°We have been contacted by Commander, he said that there is something that he wanted about at home. Commander asked Riku-sama to visit him tonight nya. It¡¯s unfortunate, but I think I will take my punishment tomorrow together with Tsura.¡± Kuroka said the last part as she smiled and blushed. I nodded my head and said. ¡°Well, it can¡¯t be helped. I will kick my old man if he called me over if he wanted to say nonsense though. But, knowing his personality, I think this time he has something serious to talk about with me.¡± I stood up from the couch and looked at Kuroka. ¡°I will leave this town in your hand, Kuroka, Tsura. I will be back immediately after my old man is done with me.¡± I walked a bit away from Kuroka and Tsura, then I use Youjutsu to teleport back to Kanto. A black magic circle appeared and teleport me away as I activated my Youjutsu. Right after the magic circle engulf me, I stood in front of a traditional Japanese house, my house. I walked into the house and directly went to find my old man. I passed some young youkai that appear to be new to the house and they greeted me with a surprised face. So they didn¡¯t expect me to show up at my house tonight? I waved at them and told them to relax as I kept walking towards my old man¡¯s room. I reached his room after a while and opened it without knocking. ¡°Old man, is something matters?¡± I said as I slide the door. Inside the room, my old man was sitting while having a smile on his face. ¡°Riku, you¡¯ve come.¡± He stood up and approached me. ¡°Take your youkai form, I need you in someplace.¡± I was confused by his sudden behavior and asked. ¡°Where?¡± My old man smirked to me while looking at the west. ¡°Kyoto.¡± *** For some reason, I am back in Kyoto with my old man, just the two of us. I asked him about the reason why we go to Kyoto, but he just said that there will be a surprise waiting for me. I was wearing my usual green kimono with black stripes, but I was also wearing blue Haori with Fear kanji written on the back in white ink on top of my kimono. My old man just give me this Haori for no reason, but because I like it, I am wearing it. As to what that surprise is, he said that he will be looking forward to it. Damn him, he¡¯s really a bad example, I can¡¯t blame him though as I like to do it too. I thought that the East and West Faction has some kind of strained relationship from what I remembered from the anime, but it seems that they have a rather¡­ neutral relationship here. Maybe that was caused by my old man. My old man is considered strong in Supernatural. From his story, he was able to fight with Sirzechs without suffering any injuries. I bet Sirzechs was still not using his true form, but being able to fight Sirzechs without any injuries is absurd. That was what I think a few years ago. But, as I mastered using my Fear, I know the reason why Sirzechs was not able to injure my old man. He was just fighting my old man¡¯s fake presence. My old man must¡¯ve used his Fear that was unknown to the other supernatural as a weapon to fight Sirzechs. He never tells me about his reason for fighting Sirzechs, but from his story, I never heard about his victory over Sirzechs. Fear was truly a deadly power. My old man said that we are the only ones that use Fear, but I didn¡¯t believe it. With the history of this world changed by that girl who reincarnated me, I think some hidden village of Youkai was using fear as their source of power too. Youkai is a dark creature, but Youkai was also a creature born from Nature. There are lots of Youkai that have no weakness towards light or Holy Energy. But there were also Youkai that was afraid of the light or Holy Energy. Youkai as a race was very diverse, unlike the race from three factions. So, I was looking forward to the surprise that my old man spoke off. A surprise from my old man is always surprising as he said, most of them was a prank though. After I stood in my youkai form with my old man behind a temple in Kyoto that I visited a few years ago for a while, a young Kitsune Youkai with blond hair wearing a white Miko¡¯s cloth and red Miko''s skirt was walking towards us. She was walking towards us with a smile and stopped right in front of us. ¡°Nurarihyon-sama, it¡¯s nice to meet you again. And, Riku Onii-chan too, welcome to Kyoto.¡± I¡¯ve recognized the Kitsune since she was walking towards us. I wanted to greet her but It¡¯s a bit awkward to greet an acquaintance that you had not seen for a few years. Not only that, I was running away from playing with her a few years ago. So I was glad the she greeted us first, and I am certainly glad that she¡¯s still calling me Onii-chan. At least one girl with a fox ear was calling me Onii-chan when the ones with cat ears was still shy and called me with Senpai. I smiled and answered Kunou. ¡°Yeah, I¡¯ve arrived. You¡¯ve grown bigger since a few years ago, huh.¡± ¡°Kunou-chan! You¡¯ve grown bigger! I know that you will become a beauty like your mother in a few years!¡± Said my old man to Kunou. ¡°Yes, thank you for your compliment, Nurarihyon-sama. I¡¯m afraid that we need to go right now, Lady Amaterasu is waiting for us.¡± Said Kunou. ¡®Wait a minute, Lady Amaterasu?¡¯ I was surprised, so this is my old man¡¯s surprise? Did he hide something like this just to surprise me? My old man nodded his head and said. ¡°Show us the way.¡± RaizarP Author Here~ More than 54 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks to the new Executive!! - Endo Big Thanks to the New Squad LeadER!! - Skoll - Quicksilverlord Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 34 – Amaterasu Kunou takes us to a meeting room located in the middle of the temple. She knocked on the door three times and said. ¡°Mother, I bring Nurarihyon-sama with Riku-sama here.¡± ¡°Please enter.¡± Answered a voice beyond the door. Kunou entered the door and entered the meeting room. The room has a tatami floor and 5 Zabuton that was arranged into facing each other. Right after the door was opened, I saw Yasaka sitting on the Zabuton on the left while a girl with black hair and purple eyes was sitting in her left, between the Zabuton. So that left the room with 3 empty Zabuton that I guessed was provided for us. She was wearing a standard Miko outfit with her hair tied in a ponytail with a red ribbon. She was also wearing some kind of forehead protector with red color and golden edge. On the middle of the forehead protector was a green gem and a golden crescent moon that was looking up at the gem. There is also a sword resting on her left, ready to be picked up anytime. ¡®So she¡¯s Amaterasu?¡¯ Kunou and my old man entered the room immediately with me following him from behind. Kunou sat beside Yasaka while my old man sat across Yasaka with crossed legs. I took a seat beside my old man and sat with my legs crossed too. I was not used to sitting in Seiza, so I just sat however I wanted. I looked at Amaterasu and saw her giggling while looking at us while Yasaka has a bit of frown on her face as she shook her head. ¡°Shall we begin then?¡± Asked Amaterasu while having a straight face as she looked at Yasaka and my old man. ¡°Sure, I called my son as you requested. Is this something related to bats?¡± Asked my old man as he looked at Amaterasu. Amaterasu nodded her head and confirmed my old man''s question. ¡°Not only them but it was also related to three factions. I was informed by Michael that the church¡¯s holy swords were stolen.¡± When Amaterasu said that, I could guess where is this going. I smiled under the shadow of my bang, closed my right eyes, and looked at Amaterasu. ¡°Excalibur¡¯s Shards, right?¡± Amaterasu was a bit surprised that I know about the swords. She nodded her head with her mouth opened a little and said. ¡°That¡¯s right. That¡¯s why I asked Nurarihyon to call you here as you are the watcher of Kuoh Town.¡± It¡¯s a shame that I didn¡¯t bring the Excalibur that I got from Freed here. I looked at my old man and saw him smirking at me. He knows, huh. Well, I was planning to give the Excalibur back to the church though. I just wanted the Excalibur Nightmare, nothing else. ¡°Well, the thing is. Your guess was correct. The stolen Excalibur¡¯s Shards were in Kuoh Town, I found one a few hours ago and managed to recover it. Maybe you could use this sword to make Heaven owe something to us?¡± I said to Amaterasu with a smirk on my face. She catches what I was implying and smiled. ¡°Yes, absolutely. I must inform you that they had stolen 3 Excalibur¡¯s Shards. So please don¡¯t lower your guard against them.¡± I nodded my head and said. ¡°Don¡¯t worry about it, I¡¯m strong. I must inform you something that Heaven hides though and I need permission from the leaders here to do something.¡± Yasaka and Amaterasu looked at me curiously while my old man was laughing. ¡°Hahaha, tell us, Riku. What permission did you need?¡± asked my old man, representing the Youkai and Shinto leader. ¡°First, there are fallen angels near the Kuoh Town. I need permission to deal with them if they entered the town without telling me. Second, the Excalibur¡¯s thief. I think they are the same fallen angels that entered Kuoh Town. There are 3 of them entering the Kuoh Town, but they are dealt by the devils.¡± With my information, Amaterasu was descending into deep thought. My old man too has frowned on his face and asked me. ¡°Any information about the fallen angels? Is it Azazel?¡± I shook my head at his question. It is Kokabiel, but I don¡¯t think informing them this early will make them. Maybe my old man will, but I don¡¯t know about Yasaka and Amaterasu. Amaterasu has finished thinking and looking at me. ¡°I permit it. How about the two of you?¡± Yasaka nodded her head and said. ¡°I will give you my permission too. If you need help from my faction, feel free to contact me.¡± My old man who I thought will just nod his head and laughing has said. ¡°Are you sure that you don¡¯t need any help?¡± I nodded my head full of confidence and said. ¡°I am. There are also Tsura and Kuroka with me, don¡¯t worry about it.¡± My old man scratched the side of his head and said. ¡°I mean, I think that I remembered pissing off some of the fallen angels a few hundred years ago. So¡­ you know the rest of it.¡± He laughed out loud that made Yasaka hold her head and Amaterasu look at him in amazement. Kunou was silent like usual, closing her eyes and listening to the conversation. I, on the other hand, was a bit pissed by my old man. He had pissed some fallen angels a few hundred years ago? This foreshadow was too coincidental with the timing. ¡°Damn it, old man. Don¡¯t you give me such foreshadow! Usually, those kinds of opponents will get stronger when they realized my identity!¡± ¡°Hahahahaha, but you are confident that you can run away if the situation is disadvantageous, am I right?¡± With him saying that I can¡¯t say anything more besides smiling and closed my right eyes as I said. ¡°Of course, I am. I am stronger than you and faster at running away because of you too, old man.¡± ¡°Now they have increased¡­¡± Muttered Yasaka. ¡°Yes, they are¡­¡± added Amaterasu. I, no, we ignored them and laughed ourselves out while Kunou was looking at us with a small smile on her face. RaizarP Author Here~ More than 54 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks to the new Executive!! - Endo Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 35 – The time has come The meeting ended at dawn, I came back from my mansion with my old man. This is the first time I attended a meeting between the leader, but to think it was like a meeting between a friend. My old man just laughed while playing with me all the time. That made me go along with him and we just laughed at each other while in the meeting. Yasaka and Amaterasu were looking at us with tired eyes and they just talked with each other about the compensation that they asked from the church side for the Excalibur. Amaterasu, yes I did call her that now because she didn¡¯t mind it. Or rather, she was not offended when I call her that so I stick with it for now until she asked me to change how I call her. Well long story short, Kunou fell asleep in the middle of the meeting and sleep on Yasaka¡¯s lap. The real meeting has ended after I told them that I will handle the Excalibur Shard, so the rest of it was just for formality and deepening the bond between the leader. Or so it was supposed to deepen the bond between the leaders. Well, back to me. I arrived at Kuoh Town again by teleporting myself into my bedroom. The time I had arrived at Kuoh, was the time when the school had started. I showered in my mansion The girls were nowhere to be seen as they are going to school at this time. I changed into my uniform and picked my bag before walking to the school. When I arrived at the school, the situation was a bit weird. I could feel something amiss and spread my Senjutsu to feel what¡¯s going on. I could feel 2 foreign energy within the old school building, the base of Rias and her peerage. Shirone was also in that building while I felt Kuroka and Tsura were on the roof. Maybe they are seeing the situation first or waiting for my arrival, but they were just standing on the roof near the old school building. I shroud myself in Fear and run towards Kuroka and Tsura. I jumped around the wall and arrived at the roof within ten seconds. I erased my Fear and approached them from behind. ¡°Tsura, Kuroka, what happened?¡± I asked them as I stood behind them, looking down at the old school building. ¡°Riku-sama!¡± Exclaimed Tsura, surprised by my sudden call. ¡°Nya! There is a devil that entered the territory nya! We are watching them right now because we don¡¯t know what to do except for watching them.¡± Explained Kuroka. I saw that Kuroka has worry written over her face while looking back at the old school building. She must be worried about Shirone. I put my hand on top of her head and said. ¡°Leave it to me. For now, go back to the mansion with Tsura. I have obtained permission from the leader of our faction to move as I please if I deemed it as necessary.¡± ¡°But, Riku-sama! Isn¡¯t it dangerous? Going there alone without us? Especially when one of the devils has that much energy.¡± That¡¯s true. There is one person in that building that has energy a few times bigger than the other combined. I do need to worry about it. I didn¡¯t know how strong am I compared to the ultimate devil or Satan just from my old man story alone. But, I was confident to run from them without any injuries. That¡¯s why I assured Tsura. ¡°Don¡¯t worry, I¡¯ll be fine. I am worried about the two of you instead. I am confident that I can run, but how about the two of you? That¡¯s why, wait for me in the class or the apartment, okay?¡± Both of them nods their head and walked away from me. My real reason was to keep them away from Riser though. I really can¡¯t stop myself in case of Riser do anything to them. They stopped right before going down the stairs and said. ¡°Good luck Riku-sama!¡± ¡°Good luck Riku-sama nya!¡± I smiled at them and said. ¡°Ou!¡± I jumped down the building, still in my human form and used Meikyo Shisui to erase my presence as I walked inside the old school building. The inside of the old school building was quiet, but when I almost reached the ORC¡¯s room, I heard a shout from Issei. ¡°How dare you act like that!!¡± The next moment after the shout was the door in front of me opened forcefully from behind and Issei was blown away. I sidestepped and dodge the flying Issei and entered the room with a smile on my face as I closed my right eye. There, I saw a blond-haired man wearing an unbuttoned white shirt with red suit on top of it sitting on the couch with Rias beside him while Rias¡¯s peerage members were standing in front of Riser with spiteful expressions. On the side, stood a maid with braided white hair looking at Riser with a tired expression. Because the couch across Rias was not occupied, I let myself sit there and watch Riser right in front of him. ¡°You should have taught him clearly, Rias. Did you not tell your peerage about Riser, your fianc¨¦?¡± He said as he crossed his legs and put his arm on Rias¡¯s shoulder. However, Rias slapped his arm and throw an angry yell towards him. ¡°I never agreed to it! Not only that, the agreement was when I graduated from this school, why are you here right now?!¡± I used this chance to reveal myself and said. ¡°And, why did an uninvited devil enter this territory without telling me first?¡± Everyone in the room has a shocked expression, especially the maid- Grayfia, that stood on the side of the room. I didn¡¯t wait for long after I said that, I looked at Grayfia with my one eye open. With a confident smile on my face, I asked her. ¡°Can you explain this to me, Lucifer¡¯s queen?¡± Grayfia was opening her mouth, about to answer me when a voice interrupted her. ¡°Who are you? How dare you interrupt Riser time with his fianc¨¦e?¡± As he said that, he threw a fireball towards me. The fireball was hot, I could feel the heat from where I sat. Unfortunately, it was too slow. I called my Nenekirimaru and slashed the fireball, making it disappear into thin air, and stabbed Riser¡¯s leg with my sword. I pulled my sword as soon as I stabbed him, and demonic energy was gushing out from his wound, making him scream in pain. But his scream didn¡¯t last long as his regeneration as phoenix finally kicked in when the demonic energy stopped gushing out from his wound and closed it. He was glaring at me and was about to send another attack. I also smiled as I stood up and brandished my sword, almost cutting him in half. It was almost because suddenly an ice wall was formed between us. I looked at Grayfia and saw her extending her left hand and creating the ice wall to separate us from each other, saving Riser in the process. Rias and her peerage were only looking at me in confusion mixed with fear. Shirone however, was looking at me with a relieved face and sighed. I make my sword disappear and sat on the couch again with my arm crossed as I looked at Grayfia. ¡°You saved him.¡± ¡°Yes I did.¡± Answered Grayfia. RaizarP Author Here~ More than 54 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks to the new Executive!! - Endo Big Thanks to the new Squad Leader!! - Quellec - Exxator - Ototsu_Yume - Adam Skibicki Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 36 – Haughtiness Brought Doom ¡°I can¡¯t allow a pure-blooded devil to die here because of a small mistake.¡± Continue Grayfia as she walked to me. She stopped in front of me and erased her ice wall, making her stand between me and Riser. Rias had used the moment where Riser attack me to walk to her peerage and look at us from that place. ¡°Why are you defending that human! This Riser will kill that human because he offended Riser!¡± Grayfia without saying anything encased him in ice and looked at me. ¡°I¡¯m sorry for entering this territory without permission. I will ask for it next time, I hope you can forgive us.¡± She said as she bowed at me, surprising Rias again. ¡°No, I need some compensation for it. Let me think about it.¡± I said while putting my right hand on my chin. ¡°Fire, and a pure-blooded devil, huh. Give me 3 phoenix tears and I will forget this incident.¡± I said while presenting 3 fingers at Grayfia. She was glaring at me when I said that. But then, she looked like she remembered something and her expression was back to normal. She looked at me and said. ¡°1 Phoenix Tear. I think that¡¯s the extent of this offense, no?¡± I grinned at her words and said. ¡°That¡¯s for entering this territory without telling me. But, what about the case when he attacked me without asking anything?¡± ¡°Fine, two. That¡¯s the limit that we can give because Phoenix Tear is a rare commodity even in the underworld.¡± ¡°That¡¯s more like it.¡± I stood up and walked towards the exit door. Rias¡¯s peerage makes way for me without me telling them, maybe they are afraid of my display earlier? A little display and I got 2 Phoenix Tears, a good haul if I say so myself. I exited the room without even looking back to look at them. Outside of the room, Issei was still lying unconscious on her back. I just ignore him and walked back to my class. *** Inside the ORC room Rias was looking at the figure of Riku that exited the door. She was terrified, Riser was strong in her eyes and he could hurt him without much effort. Not to mention he was not using any technique and just used his sword to stab Riser without her being able to see his movement. ¡°Well then, Rias-sama. I will bring Riser back to the underworld. We will send the Phoenix Tears and come back here in a week or two after we are done with the formalities. Please prepare yourself in that day.¡± Said Grayfia before she teleported away with encased Riser. Rias¡¯s body turned weak after Grayfia left and she was about to collapse. ¡°Buchou!¡± Akeno shouted and support Rias over her shoulder. She slowly walked towards the couch and flopped Rias down, letting her rest on the couch. ¡°Thank you Akeno.¡± Said Rias weakly. ¡°Are we going to fight with him in a Rating Game, Buchou?¡± Asked Kiba from behind Rias. ¡°We don¡¯t have a choice if we only get a strong ally like that guy¡­¡± Said Akeno while she was looking outside the door. ¡°That¡¯s true, will he agree to it though? If we ask him for help, will he become a devil and help us?¡± Asked Rias to no one in particular. She was looking at the ceiling while hoping that someone will support her word. ¡°I can¡¯t imagine it.¡± Said Shirone as she looked at the blood of Riser on the floor. The attention of everyone in the room was focused on Shirone as she continued. ¡°I can¡¯t imagine he would be turned into a devil. He¡¯s strong.¡± Shirone¡¯s word managed to gain the attention of Rias. Rias remembered something and looked at Shirone before she asked. ¡°How about your sister, Koneko? Was she able to help us?¡± Rias was full of hope when she asked that. How did she forget that a former stray devil was in this school, lingering without any King? Rias has a smile on her face, but it was quickly shot down by Shirone. She shook her head and advice Rias. ¡°It¡¯s better if you didn¡¯t ask her. Riku-senpai will hate you for that. I don¡¯t know what will happen in that case.¡± Rias was looking down while biting her lips. ¡°Should we unseal Gasper in this case?¡± muttered Rias. At that time, a voice came from the door. ¡°B-Buchou, I-I will do my best. S-so y-you can count on me.¡± A figure of Issei holding his stomach while smiling entered the room and walked towards Rias. Asia was approaching Issei in panic and started healing him. ¡°Thank you.¡± Said Issei to Asia which she answered with a small nod. ¡°I- I won¡¯t allow anything to happen, so please trust me!¡± Seeing Issei¡¯s figure, Rias nodded her head and said. ¡°Then, I think it¡¯s time to go to the underworld and train ourselves. Everyone agrees right?¡± ¡°Of course, Buchou.¡± Answered Akeno. ¡°Certainly, I agree as well.¡± Added Kiba. ¡°L-let¡¯s train ourselves to be stronger!!¡± Shouted Issei. ¡°I-I will do my best!¡± added Asia. Everyone was looking at the last figure that didn¡¯t say anything yet. Shirone was looking at them with apologizing gaze and said. ¡°I¡¯m sorry, but I can¡¯t join the training. I-I have something to do. Also Buchou, can we talk alone?¡± Rias was having a bad feeling about that, but she nodded her head and said. ¡°Sure. Everyone, could you leave me with Koneko for a moment?¡± Everyone except Akeno nodded their head at Rias¡¯s word. ¡°Can I stay here, Buchou? I am worried about you.¡± Rias looked at Koneko to get her confirmation and she answered. ¡°I don¡¯t mind.¡± With that, everyone left the room, leaving Shirone with Akeno and Rias. Rias sat on her chair in the room with Akeno standing behind her with her hand rested in front of her. Shirone was standing in front of the table and looking at Rias straight in her eyes. ¡°So, what do you want to talk about, Koneko?¡± Asked Rias. ¡°I, wanted to leave the peerage after the Rating Game.¡± Rias was speechless because of Shirone¡¯s request while Akeno was surprised. Akeno was covering her mouth with her hand before asking. ¡°Can you tell us your reason?¡± Shirone nodded her head and said. ¡°I wanted to stay with my sister. I¡¯ve met her, this time I wanted to be with her. I can¡¯t leave her alone again.¡± ¡°No, I won¡¯t allow you.¡± Said Rias with a clear tone as she glared at Shirone. ¡°Why? You promised him that you will allow anyone to leave your peerage if that person wanted to.¡± Asked Shirone with confusion. ¡°You will die if you leave the peerage. You know that, right?¡± ¡°I won¡¯t. He won¡¯t let me.¡± Answered Shirone. ¡°No means no. Akeno, we are leaving.¡± Rias stood from her seat and walked out of the room with Akeno following her from behind, looking at Shirone before exiting the room. Shirone was standing motionlessly with a bitter expression on her face. After standing for a minute or so, she decided something. She looked in the direction where she felt her sister''s energy and resolute herself. ¡®I need to ask his help.¡¯ RaizarP Author Here~ More than 54 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks to the new Executive!! - Adam Skibicki Big Thanks to the new Squad Leader!! - Angelo Me?mer - Dex - Daniel O''Brien - dae14 - Krellash Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 37 – Solving the Problem 1 The first session of the class had ended, and It¡¯s now lunchtime. For some reason, Issei was peeking at me a few times before sighing as if he is in trouble. Well, he¡¯s in trouble because of Riser, so I don¡¯t blame him. He left the classroom as soon as lunchtime arrived and go to the ORC. I know about that because I spread my sense since Grayfia left and didn¡¯t turn my sense off since then. I know that Shirone was talking about something to Rias and Akeno in the ORC room before she was left alone. That¡¯s also how I know that Shirone was walking towards this class in a hurry. I stood up from my seat and looked at Kuroka. ¡°Shirone is walking towards us in a hurry. She talked with Rias and Akeno earlier, maybe it¡¯s related to that.¡± ¡°Maybe nya! Shall we meet her?¡± Asked Kuroka. ¡°Let¡¯s go.¡± After I said that, I looked at Tsura. ¡°Tsura, I know that this is a trouble, but can you inform my old man about the devil that entered the territory earlier? I have asked for 2 Phoenix Tears as compensation for his trespassing, but we still need to inform my old man about that.¡± I said in a low voice so only Tsura could hear it. Tsura nodded her head in understanding. ¡°Certainly, Riku-sama.¡± Then I and Kuroka walked out towards the classroom to meet Shirone while Tsura was walking out of the school and teleporting back to Kanto to inform my old man. We could always inform him through a phone, but we don¡¯t know who will listen to our conversation if we contacted my old man with a phone, so we decided to just tell him directly instead of using a long-range communication. Long-range communication is convenient, but it also has a lot of risks. Enough of that, we meet Shirone in the hallway and when we meet her, Shirone¡¯s expression is not good. She has a sad expression. Anger began to boil inside my body, almost forcing me to take my youkai form. But fortunately, Kuroka managed to calm me down by putting her hand that was coated in Senjutsu on my shoulder. I sighed and looked at Shirone. ¡°Let¡¯s talk on the roof.¡± She nodded her head and we went upstairs. *** ¡°Tell me what¡¯s going on.¡± I asked with a serious face to Shirone who is standing in front of me. Kuroka also stood beside me with a serious face. Seeing her sister''s sad expression must¡¯ve hit her feeling, but she was able to keep her emotion in check which is admirable for her. Shirone took a deep breath and calm herself down before saying. ¡°Buchou didn¡¯t allow me to leave her peerage¡­¡± At Shirone¡¯s word, I was almost going to find Rias and ask for an explanation. . But as I said earlier, I had spread my senses since Grayfia left. But, I can¡¯t feel Rias¡¯s presence in the school. I tried to feel her peerage¡¯s presence, and I can¡¯t find any of them too. I clicked my tongue in frustration and took a few seconds to compose myself. After calming myself down, I asked Shirone. ¡°What¡¯s her reason?¡± At least if Rias gave me a reasonable reason why she didn¡¯t allow Shirone to leave her peerage I will just ask her nicely. But if her reason for now allowing Shirone to leave her peerage is ridiculous, I will even visit the underworld to ask her using our family method. ¡°She said that I will die if I leave her peerage. She also wanted to make Riku-senpai join her peerage to help her fight in the rating game.¡± It seems I was wrong. She¡¯s not thinking about it a little bit. I sighed in exasperation and muttered. ¡°Was she over-confident in her ability? Oh right, she is. She didn¡¯t trust me, huh.¡± I looked over at Shirone with a tired expression on my face. ¡°Do you want to remove the evil pieces now? I can help you with it. There is no need to wait for Rias to take it out. There are other devils in the school.¡± I said the last sentence with a smirk on my face. ¡°A reasonable devil.¡± Shirone and Kuroka know who I mean by the reasonable devil. Shirone nodded her head and said. ¡°Please. I can¡¯t trust her after she betrayed her promise. She did help me, but she betrayed the promise between you and her. If only Onee-chan didn¡¯t tell me about the promise, maybe I can still trust her. But right now, I can¡¯t.¡± I nodded my head and walked passing Shirone before looking back. ¡°Then let¡¯s go, let¡¯s meet the devil.¡± *** We have arrived in front of the student council room. I opened the door immediately without knocking, startling Shirone. I ignore her reaction and put on a serious expression as I walked inside the room. Sona and Tsubaki were the only ones in the room. They were playing chest and turning to look at us when I opened the door. Sona has a frown on her face while Tsubaki just stood up quietly and walked to the table which have a kettle. So she will prepare a drink for us, at least Sona and her peerage has some manner. Unlike Rias and I. ¡°Yo, I¡¯m interrupting for a second.¡± I said to Sona as I walked towards the couch and sat on it without waiting for her permission. Shirone and Kuroka just walked silently and sat on my right, with Shirone taking the rightmost side of the couch. Sona was looking at us with a judging gaze before sighing. She stood from her chair and approached the couch across from us and sat down in a rather polite manner. It seems that she somehow knows our reason for being here when she saw Shirone. We were just looking at each other until Tsubaki brought a tea for us and placed it on the table before she stood behind Sona. Sona sipped her tea and placed it back on the table before saying. ¡°What can I help this time?¡± It¡¯s good to have someone who catches on quickly. Because she was straight to the point, I will say what I wanted to say too. ¡°It seems that your friend broke her promise.¡± I said to Sona as I eyed Shirone. Sona was holding her head and sighed. ¡°As expected, huh.¡± I smiled at her word and she is looking at me with a rather surprised expression. ¡°And you had guessed it. That¡¯s why you say that thing in front of the entrance.¡± I nodded my head and closed my eyes. ¡°So, can you remove her piece?¡± RaizarP Author Here~ More than 54 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks to the new Executive!! - Adam Skibicki - IceDemon Big Thanks to the new Squad Leader!! - SpinRift Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 38 – Solving the Problem 2 Sona seems to think about the consequence of removing the evil piece from the reincarnated devil. Before she was saying anything, I added. ¡°I can do the rest to keep her alive. As you know, I¡¯m not a devil and I won¡¯t risk Shirone by removing the piece myself without any experience.¡± Now Sona has a difficult expression before shooks her head. ¡°Unfortunately, I can¡¯t. That piece could only be removed by their King.¡± Somehow, I had guessed that. So that means, I must visit Rias to get her to remove the piece from Shirone? Damn it, I don¡¯t know where they are right now. My best guess is that they have gone to the Underworld to train themselves. Ridiculous, what¡¯s the use of training in the underworld? Every place is the same, they only need to find a good teacher or try their best to get the best result. I clicked my tongue and think of the other alternative. Can Magari remove the piece from Shirone? She¡¯s a better Senjutsu user than me and Kuroka, so I put my bet on her. Or should I ask Amaterasu to help me? I looked at Sona with an annoyed expression. ¡°Is there another way?¡± Sona shook her head again and said. ¡°No, if it¡¯s a devil that is stronger from the King, maybe they can do something. But, my strength is roughly almost equal to Rias, so I can¡¯t do anything.¡± A devil that is stronger from the King? I looked at Kuroka and she also looked at me. Wasn¡¯t Kuroka still have the pieces inside her body? Then¡­ ¡°Kuroka, I am counting on you.¡± I said as I stood up from the couch. I turned to look at Sona and give her a warning. ¡°She had betrayed her promise, so expect me to do the same.¡± Sona is a smart girl, she instantly understood what I mean and she paled. ¡°Could it be?¡± She stood up from her chair and extended her hand to stop me. But I walked towards the exit while being followed by Kuroka who was smiling and Shirone who looked confused. We exited the room without looking back even a little, leaving Sona gritting her teeth in frustration. *** 3rd POV Sona was watching Riku and his group walked out of the room while gritting her teeth. She had never expected that her rival would break her promise this quickly. The other party is clearly stating what he would do and what he could do when we confront him in front of the school. He clearly said that if anyone wanted to leave the peerage with their own will, then we, the devils, would allow it without saying anything. He also said that he has a way to prevent the reincarnated devil from dying after their piece is removed. But, Rias. Sona understood that her rival needed a strong ally to help her. But not this way. From Riku¡¯s expression when he entered the room, Sona guessed that Rias was talking to her peerage about getting Riku into her peerage. Koneko, or rather Shirone who heard that and was betrayed by Rias must¡¯ve told Riku about it. ¡°This is a mess.¡± Muttered Sona as she flopped down on the couch with a tired expression. ¡°Kaichou, do you want another cup of tea?¡± Asked Tsubaki as she sat beside Sona. Sona looked at her cup on top of the table and saw that it was empty. She must¡¯ve drunk all of it unconsciously when talking with Riku earlier. ¡°I would like one.¡± Tsubaki nodded her head and make the tea for Sona. Sona fixed her glasses and sat in a straight posture while muttering. ¡°What should we do¡­¡± *** ¡°So are we going back to Kanto nya, Riku-sama?¡± As we are exiting the school, Kuroka asked me. I nodded my head and looked at Shirone. ¡°We will ask Magari to look at Shirone¡¯s condition before we are removing the piece. Your cooperation would be essential here, Kuroka.¡± ¡°I know nya. So we need Magari in case of something right?¡± ¡°Yes, but we need to do one more thing.¡± I said to Kuroka. We are now a little bit away from the school and there is no other person here. I transformed into my Youkai form and smiled. ¡°We will hunt a stray devil.¡± Kuroka immediately understood my word, while Shirone asked. ¡°Why?¡± I looked at her with a smile and patted her head. ¡°So we can experiment on them. I can¡¯t allow any mistake when extracting the evil piece within your body.¡± I pulled my hand and spread my senses. This town has no stray devil, that¡¯s why I spread my senses until it reached outside of the tone. I could feel big energy right outside of the town that feel like a fallen angel. I instantly know that it must be Kokabiel. So he had arrived near Kuoh? I think he realized that he was scanned, as his energy moved away from the town. I ignore him for now and concentrate to feel the energy that I wanted to find. I closed my eyes to feel the energy better and after a few seconds, I managed to find muddy energy that was located around 2 Kilometers outside the town. I smiled and opened my eyes as I looked in the direction where I found the energy. ¡°There. 2 Kilometers outside the town.¡± ¡°Roger nya!¡± I pointed in the direction of the energy and Kuroka made a magic circle to teleport us. The purplish-black magic circle engulfed us and we are teleported in woods, right in front of an ugly creature that has eight legs covered in brown fur. He has a human body and head though, but he¡¯s still ugly. So this is a stray devil that was not strong enough to keep its human form? I almost puked when I saw him. The stray devil in front of us didn¡¯t seem to notice our presence yet as he kept munching on an animal that was covered in blood. I can¡¯t guess what animal that is because it has no intact shape, but it''s gross. Kuroka and Shirone were pinching their nose because they can¡¯t handle the putrid smell that came from the creature. I could handle it because I have no sensitive nose like them, but I need to finish this fast. I summoned my Nenekirimaru, rested it on my right shoulder after I unsheathed it, and shouted towards the stray devil to get his attention. ¡°Hey, ugly bastard!¡± The stray devil looked at us and said. ¡°Hohoho, what is this? More prey for me?¡± I smirked at his word and pointed my Nenekirimaru towards him. ¡°You will come with me. I won¡¯t take no for an answer.¡± RaizarP Author Here~ More than 55 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks to the new Executive!! - Adam Skibicki - IceDemon - Evan Cloud Big Thanks to the new Squad Leader!! - urik aaby - Omni - Jack Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 39 – Experiment 1 The stray devil¡¯s expression turned ugly and let out a loud shriek. I looked at Kuroka and shouted. ¡°Let me handle this alone!¡± I grinned and run towards the stray devil who throw a punch towards me. I sidestepped to dodge his punch and jumped on his back. Because of his big size, I could stand with extra space around me. ¡°How dare you!! Get off from my back!!¡± The stray devil shouted and began to trample around, trying to throw me. I must admit, that his effort is not really useless. I have a rather hard time staying on my feet on top of his back, so I stabbed him using my Nenekirimaru, causing him to scream in pain. ¡°AAAAHHH! You bastard!!¡± I jumped off his back and landed in front of a tree not far from him. The stray devil¡¯s face contorted into an ugly shape as his mouth opened wide in four directions. ¡°Yikes, you are ugly.¡± I said with a disgusted expression while shaking my hand in front of my nose. The stray devil swung his arm at my provocation and a red magic circle appeared in front of his chest. Right after the magic circle appeared, an acid was shot at a high speed. The acid seems dangerous, and I don¡¯t want to get my blade dirty because of it so I dodge it to the left. As soon as I dodged the first acid, he sent the next acid shoot, then twice and thrice without stopping. ¡°Oi oi oi, can you stop that!¡± I complained to him as I kept dodging the incoming acid shoot and closing my distance to him slowly. ¡°Can¡¯t hit me? Try harder!¡± I kept provoking him so he will get angry with me. The angrier he is, I will have an easier chance to beat him without killing him. Our goal here is to get him back to the Kanto with us and experiment with the evil piece using him. I am no Ajuka Belzeebub, the original creator of the evil pieces¡¯ system. So I need to experiment with how to extract it before actually doing it. The stray devil is the best subject to experiment on. Although their evil piece is not the perfect one because they had changed form, but it is an evil piece nonetheless. I managed to close my distance and stood in front of him, or rather below him as his head is around 2 meters above me. ¡°Yo.¡± I said shortly before swinging my sword vertically with one hand, slashing his leg cleanly. Once again the stray devil screamed in pain as his demonic energy gushed out from his wound. His body turned smaller as his demonic energy left his body. I was watching his change with interest, his abnormal body slowly turned small and human-like as his demonic energy depleted. ¡°This is interesting. So the stray devil is the devil that was drunk by his demonic energy? Or did my Telos Karma do something to the probability since I need him alive and well? But well, him having a human-shaped body is good. The success of the experiment would be higher than leaving him in that ugly form.¡± Riku picked up the legless body of the stray devil and walked towards Kuroka and Shirone. The body of the stray devil was that of a man with black hair. Kuroka and Shirone were still pinching their nose in disgust as Riku approached them. ¡°Let¡¯s go to Kanto, the faster the better.¡± Kuroka nodded her head repeatedly and made a magic circle to teleport us back to Kanto. Once again, the magic circle engulfed us and we are standing in front of my mansion in the Kanto region, Tokyo. I spread my senses to find my old man and walked inside the house once I found him. He was with Tsura and Tsetsuna behind the mansion, more specifically in the backyard that he made. There is a Sakura Tree planted there with a pond underneath it, so I guess Tsura just informed him about the devil and they are relaxing while waiting for us, huh. Well, it¡¯s good. I walked towards the backyard while carrying the stray devil over my shoulder. Kuroka followed me from behind with Shirone who was looking around the mansion. Maybe because it is her first time in this place, she¡¯s curious about the new thing that she saw. We¡¯ve arrived at the backyard and I saw my old man sitting on the wooden terrace while sipping a cup of green tea with Setsuna on his right serving him. Tsura was sitting a little bit away from them while peeking occasionally. That¡¯s also why she saw us coming from a distance away and shouted. ¡°Riku-sama!¡± My old man and Setsuna looked at us and I greeted them. ¡°I have come to visit, old man. Setsuna.¡± ¡°Yo, Riku. What brings you here after only leaving this morning?¡± Asked my old man as she saw a stray devil on my shoulder. But after a while, he saw Shirone who was walking behind me, and said. ¡°Fujimai?¡± I raised my eyebrow at his question and looked back at Shirone. Ah, I see, Shirone¡¯s appearance is similar to Fujimai, the mother of Kuroka and Shirone. I turned back to my old man and said. ¡°She¡¯s Shirone, Kuroka¡¯s little sister.¡± ¡°O-oh, I see. Her appearance is like Fujimai, so I was a bit surprised.¡± Said my old man as he put the cup of tea beside him. He smiled at me and asked. ¡°So, what¡¯s bring you here, with that corpse?¡± He pointed at the stray devil on my shoulder as he said that. I walked in front of him, stepped on the sand of the backyard, and throw the stray devil to the ground. ¡°Well, first of all, Tsura? Can you call Magari for me? I need her help for something.¡± Tsura stood up and said. ¡°Certainly, Riku-sama. Please wait for a while.¡± Tsura ran off through the hallway with a smile on her face and I turned to look at my old man again. Kuroka and Shirone were still standing on the terrace, besides my old man as they looked at me. ¡°Shirone over there wanted to leave a devil¡¯s peerage but unfortunately her king didn¡¯t allow her to even after her king promised me to allow anyone to leave her peerage if that someone wanted to leave with their own will.¡± I said while pointing at Shirone. My old man''s smile dropped from his face as he heard me. Well, I¡¯m sure he¡¯s dissatisfied with how easy the devil broke their promise, but that didn¡¯t matter now. ¡°So I wanted to destroy the evil piece inside her with my own way.¡± I smiled at my old man when I said that. ¡°Oho, interesting.¡± Said my old man as he stroked his chin. His smile is back on his face and he jumped in front of me. ¡°Destroy, huh. I will lend you my strength too.¡± We smiled at each other before bursting out into laughter. Magari arrived with Tsura not too long after we are laughing and asked. ¡°What do you need from me?¡± Because all necessary members are here, let¡¯s begin the experiment. RaizarP Author Here~ More than 54 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks to the new Executive!! - IceDemon - Evan Cloud Big Thanks to the new Squad Leader!! - stephen hodge Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 40 – Experiment 2 I and Magari were looking at each other with the stray devil that I knocked out lying between us. Unexpectedly, Magari took a human form and hide her tail. She usually has the appearance of a white cat with black spots all over her body, but when she took a human form, she was unexpectedly cute. I say cute because she¡¯s only higher than Shirone by five centimeters or so, but she¡¯s certainly older than all of us, my old man excluded. She was wearing a black kimono that matched with her white hair which turned black on the tip. I have no time to appreciate her human form though, I put on a serious face and called my Nenekirimaru. ¡°Do you understand, Magari? As soon as I stabbed his chest, use Senjutsu coated hand and pull the evil piece from his body.¡± ¡°I know.¡± A white aura began forming on Magari¡¯s hand and it condensed until her right hand was glowing out a pale glow. ¡°I¡¯m ready.¡± I nodded my head and concentrated. I pulled out the power of Telos Karma and made a little change in the rule of my sword. ¡°Nenekirimaru will cut his chest and separate the evil piece from his body.¡± I gripped Nenekirimaru with my right hand and touched the blade with my left palm. As soon as I am ready, I coated the blade with Senjutsu and stabbed his chest right in the middle. As soon as I stabbed him, I quickly pulled out my blade and let Magari do her job. If it¡¯s Ajuka Belzeebub, he just needs to touch the chest of the devil to extract their evil piece. But I am not him, so I need to do this approach. Magari does her job quickly. She plunged her hand into the stray devil¡¯s chest and pulled a black pawn from him. She also heal his wound immediately, closed the wound at a high speed. After that, I worked my Telos Karma again and made a probability change on his body. ¡°This stray devil won¡¯t die or decay after the evil piece pulled out from his body.¡± After everything is done, Magari crushed the evil piece and we jumped back towards the terrace, joining my old man and the other to see what happened to the stray devil. I waited for a few seconds and I saw that his chest moving up and down like normal. I smiled at the body¡¯s reaction of the stray devil and looked at Magari. ¡°It¡¯s a success.¡± She nodded her head and looked back at me. ¡°Indeed, but it took a lot of me. I need to rest for five minutes before we do it again.¡± That¡¯s reasonable. She just coated her hand with a huge amount of Senjutsu aura and use it to heal the wound in one go. Naturally, her fuel was almost depleted after doing all of that. Magari walked towards the sakura tree that was in front of us and changed back to her cat form before sitting under it with closed eyes. She began replenishing the Natural energy that she spent earlier. I turned to Shirone with a smile and asked her. ¡°Are you really sure about doing this?¡± She nodded her head and answered me. ¡°Yes.¡± ¡°Hahahaha, I will let you young people do your thing. Setsuna, bring me a sake to my room!¡± My old man walked away from us with Setsuna following him from behind. So he¡¯s satisfied with watching us successfully extracting the stray devil pieces and left? That¡¯s so like him. I sat on the terrace with crossed leg and looked closely at the stray devil. I try to feel his energy and making sure that nothing has changed from before. He¡¯s still a devil, but he¡¯s not bound with the evil pieces. It¡¯s a success if we are talking about leaving a peerage, but it¡¯s not a success if I wanted to change someone back to their original race. ¡°As expected, I can¡¯t change him back with my power now. I need to achieve the Balance Breaker to change their race.¡± I muttered to no one in particular, but Kuroka and Shirone still heard me. I bet Tsura heard me too, but she just smiled at me as if she know what I thought. I had this plan to make Kuroka back into a full Nekoshou, but I realize that I have yet to achieve the power to do so. Telos Karma is indeed strong, but I can¡¯t use it to change Kuroka back to her original race yet. It¡¯s only a year since I awakened Telos Karma so I had not achieved the Balance Breaker yet. I wanted to fight strong people to awaken my Balance Breaker. My old man is strong, but I can defeat him with no problem because we have the same technique. I can also cut his fear to make him reveal his real location, rendering his best technique useless. He would do fine with another opponent, but with me as his opponent, he can¡¯t do anything. We have the same technique, but I have an additional card, Telos Karma. Well, enough of my fight with my old man, I could see no problem with the stray devil and I was satisfied. Shirone won¡¯t be able to get the bonus of the evil piece after we crushed it, which maybe will take an effect on her overall strength. But I do not worry about that. She just needs to train with Magari. I shuddered remembering it, but it was worth it. Kuroka has 2 evil pieces inside her, but she has no King so I don¡¯t need to worry about it now. It also boosts her strength a little bit so it¡¯s a plus I think. After thinking for a few minutes, I saw Magari open her eyes again and walk towards us. ¡°I am ready.¡± I looked at Shirone and saw her nodded her head. She was shivering and nervous. Kuroka approached Shirone and hugged her from behind. ¡°It¡¯s okay¡­¡± She patted Shirone¡¯s head. ¡°It¡¯s okay nya.¡± Shirone stopped shivering and walked towards me, releasing herself from Kuroka¡¯s hug. When she reached me, she looked back at Kuroka and said. ¡°Please watch from there, onee-chan.¡± Kuroka nodded her head and sat on the terrace. Tsura approached her and sat beside her. I looked at Shirone and said with a serious tone. ¡°Are you ready?¡± ¡°Yes, please take care of me.¡± Nodded Shirone. RaizarP Author Here~ More than 55 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks to the new Executive!! - Evan Cloud Big Thanks to the new Squad Leader!! - Tyler A Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 41 – The White Dragon RaizarP Author note: Hello, I found something rather disturbing for me and it made me mad, really. This fanfiction was translated without even asking me and they dare to lock the chapter even when I let the reader to read this fanfiction for free. I also research that they made a lot of money from the locked chapters. For the one who wanted to translate this fanfiction, feel free to contact me on my discord, we could talk there. Don''t just translate it in your language without asking first and then made a ton of money from that translation. I am open for discussion, don''t just steal it. We moved the stray devil to a different place and Shirone stood between me and Magari. We asked her to lie on the ground, but she refused and said that she could stand. While it¡¯s easier if we do it when she was standing, it could become a disaster if she flinched when I stabbed her. She said that it will be okay so I can only trust her. ¡°Are you ready?¡± This time I coated my blade with Senjutsu thicker than before. I can¡¯t take any risk after all. Magari also coated her hand with Senjutsu, ready to pull the evil piece anytime from Shirone¡¯s body. Shirone nodded her head swiftly and I called out the power of Telos Karma. ¡°Nenekirimaru would only cut the way to the evil piece and won¡¯t harm Shirone.¡± When I feel that my Telos Karma is working, I quickly stabbed her chest right in the middle like what I did to the stray devil before and pulled it instantly. ¡°Ugh!¡± Shirone grunted in pain, but her feet was still planted on the ground. I still concentrate on Shirone, ready for any unexpected thing that can happen to her. Magari was also swift with her work, as soon as I pulled Nenekirimaru, she plunged her hand into Shirone¡¯s chest and pulled a red Rook from her before healing her wound. Shirone fainted after her evil piece pulled from her and landed on my left arm. I also dismissed my Nenekirimaru when I caught Shirone. All of that was done in under 5 seconds. Magari has a rather rough breath as she held a red Rook in her right hand. She handed me the Rook piece and left after changing into her cat form. She looked tired after all of that, I guess I owe her something. Holding the Rook Piece in my right hand, I looked at Kuroka and Tsura who were watching from the Terrace. ¡°Kuroka, take your sister to the guest room. I need to do something for now.¡± Kuroka and Tsura walked toward us and Kuroka carried Shirone in her arms. ¡°Leave it to me nya!¡± I nodded my head and walked a bit away and teleported away. *** I teleported to Kuoh town and appeared right behind the Kuoh Academy. I changed back into my human form and pocketed the Red Rook on my chest pocket. At first, I planned to visit Sona to negotiate about exchanging Rias¡¯s Rook Piece with something else, but I changed my mind. I walked inside the school and navigate myself to the roof. The reason why I was going to the roof was that I feel someone, a supernatural entity was standing on the roof. Its energy is different from that of the devil or fallen angel, it¡¯s a bit clearer than a devil, but not as clear as a fallen angel. I also didn¡¯t think that the energy that I felt is from an angel because it¡¯s not as pure as the holy energy from Excalibur. I bet an angel¡¯s energy is purer than Excalibur''s, so I guess that someone is not an angel. The energy is more like something that I felt from Ddraig, a dragon. And it''s huge, even bigger than Ddraig. I smiled as I reached the roof. I opened the door that lead to the outside and saw a silver-haired man standing over the fence. He was wearing a dark gray t-shirt and a black high-collared shirt on top of it. I made my way to him while closing my right eye and greeted him. ¡°So, what is your purpose of visiting this academy, Hakuryuukou?¡± I stood beside him and looked down, following his gaze. I saw a track team of the Kuoh Academy running around the field, doing their club activities. I see, the school was over when I was away, huh. The man, that I identified as Hakuryuukou, Vali Lucifer turned his head and looked at me. ¡°Nothing, I just thought that I can greet the son of Nurarihyon while I was in this town.¡± I smirked at his word and raised my chin slightly. ¡°Don¡¯t lie to me, you are here for a fallen angel that I felt this afternoon. You moved fast, huh? Was it your superior¡¯s order?¡± ¡°Well, as expected of a Youkai Yakuza, you do like to look down on the others, aren¡¯t you? And yes, you know how my superior acted. He moved on his whim.¡± Vali shrugged his shoulder as he faced me. Azazel ordered Vali to come to Kuoh Town, huh. So he was in the Kuoh Town since this day? Or it was because I felt Kokabiel¡¯s energy this afternoon? I bet it¡¯s the latter. Kokabiel must¡¯ve made a lot of preparation for his hiding place from Azazel, but he didn¡¯t expect that I could still sense him. So he moved from his safe hiding place, which made Azazel realize his movement. What a fool. I turned towards Vali and crossed my arms. ¡°It¡¯s an upbringing. So, what¡¯s his order? Stopping a stray fallen or something?¡± Vali shook his head and raised his arms. ¡°Unfortunately, no. I would like to do that, but his order is simple. It¡¯s to inform you that the Fallen Angel named Kokabiel had betrayed Grigori and he was sighted near this town.¡± I narrowed my eyes at his words. With Azazel declaring that Kokabiel had betrayed Grigori, that would also mean Kokabiel is not a part of 3 factions. That way, I could move freely, even killing him. He wanted to make use of me to dispose of Kokabiel, huh? I eyed Vali with my left eye and saw him smiling with composure. No, his smile is full of eagerness. He also wanted to see me in action, huh. That¡¯s why he¡¯s not complaining when he was ordered by Azazel to inform me. Not that I would miss a chance to fight with a cadre. I also need a good fight to unlock my Balance Breaker faster. ¡°Interesting, I would like something from Azazel from this though. He can¡¯t control his subordinate and let him make a nest in a youkai territory, he must give me something for taking care of his crow right?¡± Vali''s smile deepened at my word and said. ¡°I will ask him that, but I wanted to ask something small from you too if you don¡¯t mind it.¡± ¡°Do tell me.¡± I said shortly. ¡°Let¡¯s have a spar.¡± I smiled and transformed into my youkai form, shrouding my body with Fear. I become a bit taller than Vali and looked down on him with one eye closed. ¡°Sure, I also wanted to try the famous Hakuryuukou¡¯s strength.¡± RaizarP Author Here~ More than 55 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks to the new Executive!! - Evan Cloud - Ruben Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 42 – a Lord of Pandemonium vs Hakuryuukou After I agreed to Vali''s request to spar, we teleported to a deserted island somewhere in the sea. Vali said that he found this island and claimed it as his which I think is too arrogant of him. I don''t know if we are still in Japan, but the island is small with no trees whatsoever. There is only sand and grass on this island, which is perfect for sparring. I stepped forward to feel the grass, and I found it quite lush. Even if we stumble and fell to the ground, I bet the grass would be enough to serve as a cushion. Vali arrived after me and he looked around the island while saying. "Nice, isn''t it? I found it when I flew around the world." I just crossed my arm and looked at him. "Quite nice, now I am thinking of holding myself back to not destroy this island." "Don''t joke with me, if you hold back, then you will die you know? I want to test you in full strength." Answered Vali as a translucent blue wing appeared from his back. So that''s one of the Longinus, divine dividing? That certainly will make the fight a little bit harder. If I hit him, then my strength will be halved. Although I mastered Youjutsu under Magari, to be honest, it was the weakest one of my techniques. I don''t know if my Nenekirimaru could cut his dividing, but it''s not hurt to try it. I summoned my Nenekirimaru and held it in my right hand as I rested the blade on my shoulder. With my left hand opened, I gestured for him to come to me while smirking. My fear has shrouded my body since I met Vali, now I used Kyoka Suigetsu and am ready to handle Vali''s attack anytime. I saw Vali grinning and rushing towards me while gliding. My real body has moved first while I keep the fake stay in the place while taking a stance to defend against Vali''s attack. Vali punched my fake, and in an instant, his grin disappeared from his face as my Fake disappeared in a cloud of black smoke that appeared again to reveal another fake a distance away from Vali. I watched him as I keep walking to avoid a stray attack of his. Without delay, Vali glid towards my second fake and punched it on the face, only to disappear with a black smoke again. That exchange lasted a few times until Vali finally just stood in one place while spreading his hand. I could feel a demonic energy gathering on his open palm, and it was shot as a ball towards my Fake which keep appearing and disappearing. Vali was smiling and laughing as he shot the demonic ball towards my Fake. "Come on! Is this the extent of your strength? If that''s true then I am disappointed!" He was provoking me to come out of my hiding place. Well, I think that this is enough warm-up so I sneaked behind his back and try to cut his wing with Nenekirimaru. My Nenekirimaru meet Divine Dividing and to my surprise it could withstand my slash although I could feel Vali''s energy pouring out from his body because of the slash. Vali quickly reacted to my attack and pointed his hand towards me. I jumped backward and disappeared from his sight as I shrouded myself in Fear again. But Vali shot a demonic energy bullet towards my location and one of them was coming straight in my way. With no other choice, I slashed the bullet with Nenekirimaru and revealed my location to him. "Found you!" With a fast speed, Vali rushed towards my location and throw a punch towards me. He is the fastest one that I fought so far, so I was a bit late to defend against his attack and could only dodge it by jumping backward. As I jumped backward, I extended my left hand and created a fireball using Youjutsu, and threw it at him. He was surprised by the sudden fireball and sidestepped to dodge it. That gave me enough time to disappear from his sight again and coated my sword in Senjutsu. This time Vali was still rushing at my previous location as I came from his side and slashed him. The slash connected to his right arm and wounded him slightly. Without waiting for even a second, I sent a second slash aiming for his stomach. Vali quickly turned in my direction and used his wing to parry my second attack. I kept the slash going as I had a big smile on my face. This is the first time that someone close to my age could fight this well. Kuroka is strong too, but Vali with his Divine Dividing is stronger than her. Because of my excitement, that''s where I make my first mistake. While defending using his wing, Vali throw a punch towards me which I instinctively blocked using my left hand. As his fist connected with my hand, I saw him smiling and I heard a sound. [Divide!] At that moment, I could feel my strength leaving my body instantly. I quickly kicked Vali away from me and jumped backward and looked at him. "Amazing! With just one divide one of my wings was almost full. You are the first person of my generation who managed to fill my wing this much, maybe the Sekiryuutei will give me as much, but you are amazing!" Vali shouted while smiling and looked at me with eyes full of spirit. I opened my right eye and looked at him with the same look too while having a big grin on my face. I rested the blade of Nenekirimaru on my right shoulder and said. "Naturally, I am the next lord of pandemonium, the young master of East Youkai Faction. It''s natural if I am strong." We grinned towards each other before Vali suggested. "Shall we fight seriously now?" I swung my Nenekirimaru to the side and answered. "I thought you will never ask me." With a smile on his face, Vali floated to the sky before stopping around 5 meters above the ground. I feel a big energy gathering around him until finally it merged with his body and a white armor donned his body with his blue wing behind his back. ["Balance Breaker. Divine Dividing: Scale Mail!"] I heard two voices emerge from him and I could feel his gaze behind his helmet. "Your turn." Said Vali. Well, I could not refuse him if he show me his Balance Breaker. I gathered the Natural energy that presents in the atmosphere and used it to coat my body, enhancing my strength and speed as well as my Fear. Not only that, I also shrouded my body in Fear, a cloud of black smoke appeared around my body and made my presence blend into the environment. Not only that, I called upon Telos Karma''s power and make the probability of Vali hitting me to zero. For some reason, when I pulled all of my power, a blue Haori always appeared behind my back. The Haori had a Fear Kanji written in white ink. With that, my preparation was finished and I smiled at Vali as I announced the name of my technique. "Shin Kyouka Suigetsu." RaizarP Author Here~ More than 55 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks to the new Executive!! - Ruben Big Thanks to the new Squad Leader!! - Natthakorn Niramarn - Faisal al Hendi - srikar akurathi - Yuharo Wutong Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 43 – End of Fight and Fee ¡°Interesting! How will you fare against my Balance Breaker? Let¡¯s test it out!¡± Shouted Vali as he launched himself towards me. I just stood motionlessly with a smirk on my face. Vali reached me and punched me right in the face, only to miss his punch. He was surprised for a second before throwing a roundhouse kick towards me, but it missed too. My body that was kicked turned into a cloud of black smoke and his kick passed me without even touching my real body. Vali fly away from me and looked at me from the sky. I tapped the back of my sword against my shoulder a few times as I said. ¡°What¡¯s wrong? Can¡¯t hit me?¡± ¡°Strange. Is that your ability? I¡¯m sure that your body is real unlike the fake earlier. But, why I can¡¯t hit you?¡± ¡°Why don¡¯t you find out?¡± As I said that, I send dozens of fireballs towards Vali. This time the fire was blue, I used Senjutsu to add a destructive nature to my fireball. Vali didn¡¯t move from his place and a magic circle began forming in front of his body that was hit by the fireballs. After he defended against my fireball, Vali once again launched his body towards me. I kept sending fireball towards his direction with my left hand and preparing myself to slash him as soon as he entered my range. As I¡¯d expected, he closed in to me and punched my stomach. My body melted into a cloud of black smoke and I appeared beside him. I used this chance to send a vertical slash towards his back and managed to chip his armor with my Nenekirimaru. He shot out into the sky and sent an energy ball towards me. ¡°It¡¯s useless, you won¡¯t be able to hit me unless you fight me directly!¡± I shouted towards Vali as I run towards him. I created a solid air using my Youjutsu and leaped towards Vali, slashing him a few times when I reached him. He defended against my attack using the gauntlet part of his scale mail. Unfortunately for him, the scale mail was a dragon arm, a supernatural entity. That¡¯s why I managed to chip his armor and injured his arm with my Nenekirimaru. I kicked the air to go back to the ground and looked at Vali. ¡°Hey, are we going to continue this? I¡¯ve yet to use my strongest technique and yet you are bleeding from your arm and your back!¡± ¡°No problem! I can continue!¡± shouted Vali back as he dived at a great speed, leaving a blue trail behind him. The energy that was on his wing earlier now focused on his right arm. It seems he wanted to end this right now. This is rather serious, I enhanced my body using Senjutsu and used Touki to further enhance it. After readying myself, I raised my Nenekirimaru above my head and shrouded it in Fear. The black smoke on my body was not gathering on the blade of Nenekirimaru, hiding the blade completely. My body was surrounded by a pale light from using Touki, but my Kyouka Suigetsu was canceled after focusing my fear on my blade. To further enhance the destructive effect of my blade, I used Youjutsu and created a blue flame to surround my blade. I can¡¯t see Vali¡¯s face, but I know that he¡¯s smiling right now because I have the same smile on my face. The wind created from my focused energy blow my Haori to the sky, now I just need to swing my sword after Vali entered my range. In less than two seconds, Vali had entered my range and throw a punch towards me. At that moment, I swung my sword down and created black and blue energy that flew from my slash. Vali with a fast movement used Divide a few times in a row to block my attack, but it¡¯s futile. He was only dividing the Fear, and my Fear can¡¯t be divided unless he divide his fear itself. My fear was created from my opponent¡¯s fear, that¡¯s why it can¡¯t be touched or divided. Vali who realized that turned to the side in an instant, avoiding my slash. The energy that was created by my slash still flew, because it lost its target. It slashed the island and leave a deep mark on its way, inviting the seawater to enter the new ravine made by the slash. Vali¡¯s gaze was following the slash until it was gone to the atmosphere. He then looked at me and made his armor disappear. ¡°You¡­ I will get seriously injured or even died instantly if I took that blow. I hate to admit it, but it¡¯s your win.¡± Vali approached me and extended his hand as he smiled with a satisfied smile. I make my sword disappear too and canceled all my techniques, I took Vali¡¯s hand and shake it. ¡°You¡¯re not half-bad too.¡± We were smiling at each other for a while before releasing the handshake. Vali teleported me back to the school before following me from behind. We appeared on the roof again and he asked me. ¡°So, about the fee for taking care of Kokabiel. What do you need?¡± I touched my chin with my right hand and think about what I needed. I will get two healing items from the devils, so I think I will ask that from him. I smiled at Vali and said. ¡°I wanted a copy of the Sacred Gear¡¯s research. Especially on how to achieve a Balance Breaker.¡± Vali was surprised for a second but he was still able to keep his straight face. ¡°You have sacred gear? So that¡¯s why¡­ This is valuable information, I guess Azazel will be happy to give you the copy of his research.¡± Damn, so they don¡¯t know about it? I screwed up. My old man was able to feel the sacred gear inside me, why did Vali wasn¡¯t able to feel it too? Was it because my Fear hides the sacred gear aura? It doesn''t matter, this is a good thing to know it before the big baddies arrived. Azazel though, now that he knows I think he will ask me to allow him to research my Sacred Gear. That will be my worry in the future. ¡°Well, I wanted the full copy then.¡± I said to Vali. He nodded his head and his blue wing appeared again behind him. ¡°I will say it to him. Let¡¯s meet again someday.¡± After leaving those words, Vali shoots to the distance, leaving me alone on the roof. RaizarP Author Here~ More than 55 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks to the new Executive!! - Ruben - SaitamaBlast Big Thanks to the new Squad Leader!! - TOLUWANIMI D AKINBINU - FadedWaffle Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 44 – Talking with Sona After Vali left me on the roof, I walked back inside the school and focused on my original goal of coming to the school. I walked towards the student council room to meet Sona and talked about the Rook evil piece that I have in my possession. Arrived in front of the student council room, I knocked on the door three times. Earlier, I was a bit angry because of Shirone¡¯s situation, but right now I am calm. That¡¯s why I at least will knock on the door before entering the room. ¡°Enter.¡± I heard Sona¡¯s voice coming beyond the door and I entered the room. I saw her sitting on her chair while surrounded by her peerage. They are glaring at me when I entered the room. There is also an addition to their number, a boy with short blond hair stood on the leftmost of the peerage. ¡°What do you want, Nura Riku? I believe our matter was over this afternoon?¡± Asked Sona to me while fixing her glasses. I walked toward the couch and flopped myself down. I closed my right eye and looked at Sona with a smile on my face. ¡°Why? Another devil is entering the territory and yet you asked why?¡± Vali is a half-devil, but he¡¯s a devil nonetheless. I let him go because he brought me information and I am not hostile towards him. Not only that, we made a deal with each other, although I am a bit inconvenient because I messed up by giving Azazel new information about me. But the devils, did they not feel Vali¡¯s energy from this room? Sona has a surprised expression on her face before she said. ¡°Another devil? I don¡¯t feel anything.¡± She looked back at her peerage and asked. ¡°How about you, Tsubaki?¡± ¡°No, Kaichou. I don¡¯t feel anything.¡± Answered Tsubaki. ¡°Neither are we, Kaichou.¡± One by one Sona¡¯s peerage answered her question. It¡¯s strange if they can¡¯t feel Vali¡¯s energy. He didn¡¯t try to hide it¡­ oh. It was at this moment I realized my mistake. ¡®I see, it¡¯s the normal thing.¡¯ I¡¯ve always used my Senjutsu to feel the energy all around the town so I could feel Vali¡¯s energy faster than anyone else. And in this room, the only one who I guess could feel Vali¡¯s energy is Saji, but that is when he acquired all of Vitra¡¯s set. ¡°Just as you¡¯ve heard, there is no one who feels suspicious energy around here. Are you sure that you feel devil energy, Nura?¡± ¡°I¡¯m disappointed.¡± I shrugged my shoulder and shook my head. ¡°I never expected that this is the extent of the devil that they sent to Kuoh Town. You can¡¯t even feel Hakuryuukou when he¡¯s in this school.¡± ¡°Oi! Who permits you to talk like that to Kaichou?!¡± Saji shouted and pointed his hand towards me. Usually, Sona would stop her peerage member from being reckless towards the other person. But, right now she and Tsubaki were surprised. Their mouths were wide open and their eyes bulged. ¡°Hakuryuukou?¡± Muttered Sona. ¡°He¡¯s in this town?¡± Saji who realized the surprise of his superior was looking at her and asked. ¡°Who is that Kaichou? Are you going to ignore him because of that name?!¡± ¡°Saji, shut up for a second.¡± Said Sona coldly. She fixed her eyeglasses and stood from her chair. She walked towards the couch in front of me and sat down across from me. After she sat down, she looked at her peerage member and said. ¡°Please leave us alone for now. Only Tsubaki is permitted to remain here.¡± ¡°But, Kaichou!¡± Shouted Saji. ¡°Saji, shut up. I will punish you later.¡± Said Sona shortly. Saji immediately paled and nodded his head obediently. He and the other peerages member were leaving the room after that. ¡°I¡¯m sorry for my peerage member. He¡¯s a new one.¡± Said Sona to me. I guess she does have manners, that¡¯s why I like talking to her at a time like this. ¡°Don¡¯t worry about it. More importantly to my matters.¡± ¡°Please wait a second. Didn¡¯t you say that Hakuryuukou is in this town?¡± Asked Sona as she looked at me seriously. ¡°Ah, him? Don¡¯t worry about him, he¡¯s leaving this town after I met him. I just say that I was disappointed with you and your peerage. No one could feel him when he¡¯s just standing on the roof of this school without hiding his energy.¡± I said as I shrugged my shoulder. Sona bit her lips after I ridiculed their ability for not being able to feel Vali. ¡°I admit that it was our miss. It won¡¯t happen again.¡± Answered Sona. ¡°So, can you tell me your reason for visiting us this time except for informing about the Hakuryuukou?¡± ¡°I am getting there.¡± I said. I pulled the red Rook from my pocket and put it on the table. When Sona saw the Rook, her eyes were widened in surprise, so is Tsubaki. They were surprised to see an Evil Piece that I pulled from my pocket. ¡°That¡¯s Koneko¡¯s evil pieces? How? No, did Koneko die?¡± Asked Sona in disbelief. ¡°Kaichou, if that¡¯s the case, then Nura would not be here with us in a calm manner. Koneko must be safe in that case.¡± Tsubaki who approached Sona and stood behind her reassured Sona. Did she understand my personality that fast? Am I that easy to guess? ¡°That¡¯s right, Shirone is safe. Now, into my matters. What do you think I should do with this evil piece? I plan to destroy it. But, that would provoke a Satan so I come to you to negotiate. How about it, what do you think I should do with this piece? No, how much can I get if I exchange this piece with Rias?¡± Sona understand what I mean and nodded her head. She put her hand on her chin, thinking about an idea to exchange this evil piece with Rias. After a while, she raised her head and looked at me straight in my eyes. ¡°I believe that will be difficult. Rias, I have no doubt she will get angry and attack you when she feels this evil piece in your possession. I think the best way is for Koneko to have this evil piece again, but that¡¯s impossible, right?¡± Suggested Sona. I nodded my head and erased my smile from my face. ¡°Don¡¯t ever think about it. Shirone was betrayed by her, there is no way I would put this evil piece inside Shirone¡¯s body again.¡± I said with a serious tone. Sona was visibly shocked and scared when I said that. She stuttered and said. ¡°T-that¡¯s why.¡± She took a deep breath to calm herself. After calming herself down, she looked at me again with a serious expression. ¡°That¡¯s why I suggested leaving this evil piece to me. I will ask for an equal exchange from Rias. I believe that¡¯s a bit a stretch, but I hope you can trust me in this.¡± I put my hand on my chin and thought. ¡®Hmm, maybe that¡¯s the best way? I do know that Rias would definitely attack me without question if she feel the evil piece. Well, let¡¯s leave it to Sona.¡¯ I stood up from the couch and looked at Sona. ¡°I will leave it to you. I hope you won¡¯t disappoint me.¡± After saying that, I used Meikyo Shisui and disappeared from their sight. RaizarP Author Here~ More than 55 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks to the new Executive!! - SaitamaBlast - Terry Luo Big Thanks to the new Squad Leader!! - ShonenZero Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 45 – Declaration Because the sun has not set yet, I walked around Kuoh Town to find something interesting. At first, I walked towards the park. I too have some plans with walking around Kuoh Town. Mainly searching for a hidden spot that could be used as a hiding place. After walking through the park for a few minutes, I didn¡¯t find a hiding place. I only found a couple of lovers flirting while sitting on a bench. I thought with the main character of the story dying here, there would be a lot of supernatural activities in this place. But I was wrong, it¡¯s just a coincidence. I found an empty bench in the park and sat there. After sitting on the bench, I covered myself in Fear and disappeared from the other¡¯s sight. I turned into my human form and spread my senses to cover Kuoh Town entirely. And, to my surprise. I could feel the energy that I felt earlier in the day close to me. More specifically, he¡¯s behind me. I called back my fear and showed myself before saying. ¡°So you approached me? Instead of running away, you come to me?¡± I could hear a sneer from the man behind me. ¡°I wouldn¡¯t run away from some youkai if that¡¯s what you mean. Even though that youkai is that man¡¯s son.¡± The man approached me and sat beside me with a slow movement. He is wearing black clothes and a robe that has golden shoulder accessories and a high collar around his neck. His hair is colored black, reaching his back while his eyes were red. He also has long ears like elves in the fantasy world, but he¡¯s clearly a fallen angel. He¡¯s Kokabiel, the former cadre of Grigory, also known as Star of God. His energy is immense, I could feel that he has bigger energy than Vali that I fought earlier. More importantly, it seems he knows about my old man. ¡°Hahahaha, it seems that you know about my old man, huh? What¡¯s your story with him?¡± I laughed and looked at him with my right eye closed. My golden iris on my left eye flashed because of the sunlight and looked at Kokabiel straight on his red eyes. Because I sat beside the cadre of a fallen angel, I didn¡¯t forget to surround myself with Fear to escape anytime Kokabiel decided to attack me. I¡¯ve spent a lot of energy fighting with Vali earlier. Not to mention, he halved my strength in that fight and I have yet to recover completely from that. Even with a fast regeneration from my youkai blood and Senjutsu, having to recover half of my strength in less than an hour is impossible even for me. Even so, I am confident that I could run away if Kokabiel decided to attack me. If we did fight here, I could maybe only able to use the same attack that I used on Vali one more time then I would run out of energy. I better stalled for time for now and recover my lost energy. ¡°I met him in a certain war between the fallen angel and the devil. The war was located in Japan, near the Edo area if I remember correctly.¡± Said Kokabiel as he looked back at me. He put his arm on the backrest of the bench and raised his chin. ¡°You know, that war was incredible. I commanded five thousand armies of fallen angels fighting the armies of six thousand devils. The war lasted for a week, we throw the light spears and the devils throw a dozen of magics back at us. It was exhilarating, even Diehauser Belial entered the fray and fought me by himself.¡± Kokabiel started telling me a story with a nostalgic smile on his face. He was happy reminiscing about the past, but that past was a war story. If the past that he told me was his love life, then I would tell him to fuck off from here. Now, I am intrigued by his story though. Because he said that he met my old man in that war. ¡°At the height of our fight, we suddenly heard music. Who in their right mind playing music in the war? Because of the music, our attention was shifted. We looked at the source of the music and I shouted at them. I shouted ¡®Show yourself! Whosoever playing the music in the battlefield is searching for death!¡¯ at them.¡± Kokabiel¡¯s face was contorted to rage as he said that. His hand was gripping on the backrest of the bench tightly, snapped the wooden backrest because it can¡¯t handle Kokabiel¡¯s strength anymore. He raised his hands in front of him. ¡°When I shouted that, what I got back is a burst of laughter. Laughter from a lot of people. I looked at the source of the laughter closely and a white mist that contains a slot of spiritual energy appeared from the distance. And¡­ he was there. In front of a parade of hundreds of supernatural entities with his smug smile while holding a big red sake cup on his left hand laughing at our war.¡± I could imagine what happened. I think that my old man was on his parade at that time and heard the sound of war, so he got interested and check it with his Hyakki Yakkou. I laughed at his story and that made Kokabiel angrier. He looked at me as if he would kill me at this moment, but I saw him tighten his fist and hold himself. ¡°I see, I see!¡± I said while still laughing. ¡°I bet he came to your war and said something like ¡®Yo! Is this some kind of play? Why don¡¯t you invite us?¡¯ while sipping his sake from his cup.¡± I pointed my finger at Kokabiel. He looked up at the sky and said. ¡°That¡¯s right. That¡¯s what made me mad. He said something in those lines while walking towards me without anyone accompanying him.¡± Kokabiel paused his story for a while and looked at me. ¡°But, what made me truly mad was because I can¡¯t feel him anymore. A black smoke surrounded his body and I can¡¯t feel his presence anymore! Diehauser Beliel also looked a bit scared when he saw him and decided to retreat with his army. His presence, or rather, his figure itself has ended the war with a laugh.¡± That was unexpected coming from my old man. But, that¡¯s expected from him too. His territory become a warzone, of course, he would go and end the war. I bet Kokabiel was mad, really mad at that time towards my old man. Now that he¡¯s here, I could guess his intention. ¡°But, even though I am angry with him to end the war and interrupted my fight. I can¡¯t hate him for some reason. He has that aura of leadership. But, I still wanted a war. That¡¯s why I come here.¡± Said Kokabiel. He stood from the bench and walked away before turning towards me and spreading his arms. His 10 black wings sprouted from his back and I immediately jumped from the bench and called my Nenekirimaru. But, he just stood there and shouted. ¡°You, the son of Nurarihyon. With you being here my plan has changed. I won¡¯t attack by myself, I will bring all my soldiers with me. My target is Satan¡¯s siblings. I come here to meet you because I wanted to declare it. Stop me. Stop me like what Nurarihyon did hundred years ago. If you can stop me, then I will declare it to the world. I will declare that youkai is not a weak race. I will declare that youkai has stopped the great war between the 3 factions. And so, I will declare that you, the son of Nurarihyon is a strong one. I vowed under my name, Kokabiel, the Star of God, that I will declare all of that before my last breath.¡± After saying all of that he flapped his wing and flew away. I made my sword disappear and let out a long sigh. I never expected that I would meet Kokabiel here. Also, I made the situation worsened. ¡°I need to build my own Hyakki Yakkou now, and I need to do it quickly.¡± Author Note: Kokabiel will be buffed a little because the history of the world changed (Caused by MC''s father). In the canon, Kokabiel strength was divided 3 times by Vali and still had the same strength of middle class Fallen. Kokabiel is far stronger in this fic compared to the canon because of the changed history, so the MC with only half of his power will had a hard time to defeat him. The MC could defeat him with half of his power, but its hard and the risk is high. That was why MC took a safe measure and engaged him again in the future. He didn''t expect that Kokabiel would be stronger than the Canon counterpart. RaizarP Author Here~ More than 55 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks to the new Executive!! - SaitamaBlast - Terry Luo Big Thanks to the new Squad Leader!! - Joshua Smith Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 46 – First Member of Hyakki Yakkou I immediately teleport back to Kanto after I felt Kokabiel¡¯s energy leave the town. I have no intention to sit idling after I heard Kokabiel¡¯s declaration. If he really brought his soldiers to attack Kuoh Town, then I am in a problem. Vali better brings me the full research and a method to obtain a balance breaker, or I will ask for more things from him. The only way to stop an army is with another army. My time limit would be around 2 weeks, or at least 1 week with extra days. Rias and her peerage will be back from the training around those times, I bet Kokabiel won¡¯t be able to wait to attack when Rias came back from the underworld. There is an if scenario in this case. If Sirzechs came to the earth after Rias¡¯s rating game, which she will lose because Shirone isn¡¯t in her peerage anymore, then Kokabiel will hold off his attack for a few more days. I have yet to obtain the rest of Excalibur from Freed too, his energy was still staying in one place, maybe because I injured him too badly when I took the Excalibur Rapidly. I could only make use of the sword for now, it¡¯s too useful to be laid in my closet without using it when Kokabiel attacked. I should¡¯ve not fought Vali if I know that Kokabiel was waiting for it. It was my mistake. With only half of my strength, I could only give Kokabiel a light injury at best. He¡¯s stronger than I thought. Now, I will work my Sacred Gear to the fullest. After I came back to Kanto, I immediately used my Telos Karma and make the probability of me finding a member for my Hyakki Yakkou as high as possible. I will use this time to find them, to make my own army of youkai. For the town, Tsura and Kuroka would be enough to defend it from any normal invaders. I think they should be okay too even if Kokabiel attacked them, they could hold him for a while until I arrived. I sensed that almost everyone that present to watch the experiment earlier was in the dining room. I could also feel the stray devil energy in that room, which made me a little bit confused by it. I go to the dining room to see what¡¯s going on and I heard my old man was laughing from the dining room. ¡°Hahahaha, you know what? You¡¯re fucking funny! How is it, want to join my Parade?¡± ¡°Hahaha, you realized that I had no legs right now. How can I join the Parade of Nurarihyon with no legs?¡± ¡°The technology is improved now, you can just ask for fake legs from the hospital!¡± ¡°Is that so? It¡¯s been ten year since I lost my mind, so I don¡¯t know. But I still refuse your invitation though hahahaha.¡± I saw my old man was talking with a man with long black hair as they held a red sake cup in their hand. The man was in his middle age, I don¡¯t know him but he¡¯s the stray devil that I brought back to this mansion. Strange, why is he here? His appearance also changed, he¡¯s better right now. I entered the dining room and asked. ¡°Old man, why is he here?¡± Everyone in the room turned to look at me, including the long-haired man. ¡°Oh! You are the one who brought me here, huh? I should say thank you to you for helping me regain control of my body back to me!¡± The long-haired man bowed towards me. ¡°Really, thank you.¡± I was confused for a second, but Kuroka nudged my shelves from my side and whispered. ¡°That man regained his consciousness a few minutes after you left for Kuoh Town. He was laughing as soon as he woke up, so we called Commander and they become a friend as soon as they talk to each other.¡± Explained Kuroka. This is messed up, I looked at the man and said. ¡°Don¡¯t mind it, I cut your legs so I think I¡¯m sorry? But that¡¯s the safest way to bring you here without really harming you. Also, I used you to experiment with something, so I don¡¯t need your thanks.¡± The man raised his head and smiled. ¡°Even so, you helped me. That itself deserves my gratitude.¡± Damn, he¡¯s a cool man. I smiled at him and said. ¡°I see, then I will accept your gratitude¡­¡± He realized that he didn¡¯t introduced himself to me yet. ¡°My name is Masaomi Yaegaki, nice to meet you.¡± I was surprised when he introduced himself. Masaomi Yaegaki, I know that name. He was revived by Rizevim and given the holy sword, Ame no Murakumo no Tsurugi. He wanted to take revenge against the devil for the death of his lover, Cleria Belial. He¡¯s a human, but he¡¯s considered strong. At least he could fight with middle-rank devils and angels with no problem if he used a holy sword. But now, he is a devil. So, he must be stronger compared to when he¡¯s still a human, right? A smile crept up my face as I looked at Masaomi. ¡°I like it, Masaomi. I saved you, so I deserve a reward, right?¡± Everyone in the room looked at me with confusion on their face, except my old man. He was just smiling and drinking a sake silently beside Setsuna. Masaomi looked at me with a surprised expression too before he nodded his head. ¡°Yes, I will repay you as long as it¡¯s within my ability.¡± A good answer. I walked towards my old man and snatched his sake cup from his hand. Because Masaomi already has his sake cup, I extended my hand while holding the sake cup that I snatched from my old man. ¡°Hey, Riku! I was still drinking that!¡± I ignore my old man''s shout and said. ¡°Join my Hyakki Yakkou. I will give you back your legs.¡± Everyone was surprised by my words. Even Kuroka and Tsura were surprised. I thought about it carefully. But, Kuroka and Tsura were not members of my Hyakki Yakkou, they are my girls. I planned to invite Shirone as the first member earlier, but I think she needed some rest first. Masaomi Yaegaki was a former exorcist. He knew about the inside work of the church, and he also fell in love with a devil. More importantly, my old man also invited him to join his Parade. Not only that, he¡¯s experienced. He¡¯s strong enough to fight mid-rank devil as a human. Now, he¡¯s a devil and become stronger than before. For a sword, I could find a sword for him slowly. Xenovia was still a wielder of Durandal even when she became a devil, so I think I could make Masaomi use one of Excalibur Fragment. I don¡¯t care with the church now, Kokabiel¡¯s attack is close, I will get as much ally as I can get. Masaomi seems surprised by my offer, but he eventually picked his Sake cup and extended his hand. ¡°If you don¡¯t mind with me, then I will accept your offer.¡± We smiled at each other and crossed our arms with each other. ¡°I won¡¯t disappoint you, so follow me from behind.¡± I said to Masaomi with my right eye closed. ¡°Hahahaha, I think I will walk beside you instead of following you. That¡¯s if I got my legs back.¡± After we exchange short words, we drink our sake at the same time. ¡°I will give you your legs, that is a promise.¡± RaizarP Author Here~ More than 55 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks to the new Executive!! - Terry Luo - Ryu Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 47 – Let’s Party! (18+) We partied for a few hours after that. We drink sake and Setsuna and Tsura went to the kitchen to cook some delicious dishes. My old man also called Magari and his Hyakki Yakkou to the main house to celebrate my first follower. It¡¯s strange, I never meet with my old man¡¯s followers and they were strangely familiar. There is a Tengu with Crow¡¯s body, and there is also a giant wearing a white mask. I know them, they were from that world, but how can they be here? Was that girl who changed the East Youkai Faction entirely before she reincarnated me here? But, it¡¯s good. Then I can find them, the original follower of the Second Lord of Pandemonium in Kanto. Those powerful Youkai who followed the Second Generation in that series, I will find them. My old man said that he used Fear, but he never said that the other Youkai can¡¯t use them. So, the other Youkai should be able to use Fear too, they just don¡¯t know how to use them because they are more focused on Youjutsu and Senjutsu. This is good, I can develop that technique then. The technique that was able to bring the Nura Clan to the top in Nurarihyon no Mago, Matoi. A smile crept on my face as I imagined the reaction of my old man and the other youkai when I finished the technique. But, I need to teach the other youkai how to use Fear. I could use it because I know it, and I bet my old man never spread how to use Fear to his follower because he wanted to appear unique and mysterious. Teaching the other Youkai about Fear was also disadvantageous for my old man. Because only Fear can cut another Fear. My old man won¡¯t be able to use his advantage in that case, although I bet no one can do it better than him or me. The party lasted until night, and I decided that it¡¯s time for me to go back to Kuoh town with Tsura and Kuroka. Today is the promised day after all, so I am looking forward to it. *** Content Warning NSFW *** I went back to Kuoh Town and entered my apartment alone. Strange, why am I alone? Wasn¡¯t I teleported back to Kuoh with Kuroka and Tsura? But, well, I go to the bedroom and was surprised once again. They are waiting for me on the bed like the first time we are doing it. But, instead of wearing underwear, they are naked. Kuroka has a smile on her reddened face while Tsura was a bit shy and tried to hide her red face with a blanket. ¡°Riku-sama~ Please punish me tonight nya.¡± Said Kuroka as she get off the bed and approached me. Her tail was swinging to left and right matching her hip movement. I must admit, I can¡¯t hold myself when I saw my girls doing this. Without saying anything more, I take my clothes off, hugged Kuroka, and kissed her. I groped her butt and that made Kuroka squeal for a bit. I inserted my tongue inside her mouth and she accepted it. We intertwined our tongues with each other as we made a wet sound. I raised my right knee between Kuroka¡¯s crotch and ground it against her pussy. Kuroka was moaning in pleasure and I release her from the kiss. I could feel something wet on my knee and found out that Kuroka¡¯s pussy was drenched in her love juices. ¡°What a naughty cat.¡± I whispered in Kuroka¡¯s ear as I keep grounding my knee against her pussy. ¡°ahn, nyaa~ Aanm¡­ Riku-sama.¡± Kuroka kept moaning in pleasure. I stopped grinding my knee against her pussy and release her from the hug. Kuroka was confused and blinked her eyes as she lost the pleasure from my foreplay. I ignore her and walked towards Tsura before turning to Kuroka. ¡°For now you are not allowed to touch yourself. I will have you watch me and Tsura.¡± ¡°Nya! Riku-sama! I can¡¯t hold it!¡± Shouted Kuroka as she walked towards me. I ignore her and crawl on top of the bed towards Tsura. Tsura was playing with her pussy with her hand. So she¡¯s turned on watching me and Kuroka? She¡¯s unexpectedly cute. I leaned my face against her ear and whispered. ¡°I will make you feel more pleasure.¡± I used my hand to brush Tsura¡¯s hair from her face and kissed her. She didn¡¯t stop playing with her pussy as we were interlocked with a kiss. I push her against the bed and ravage her mouth with my tongue. My right hand slowly found Tsura¡¯s breast and played with it. Tsura was moaning in pleasure while Kuroka was crawling towards us and saw us with envy. We ignored Kuroka and make love in our world. Tsura stopped playing with her pussy and hugged me, holding my head, and inserted her tongue into my mouth. The wet sound of us kissing was filling the room, further increasing Kuroka¡¯s lust. I peeked at her and saw that she inserted her fingers into her mouth and licked it all over. She also grinds her pussy against the blanket, trying to feel even a little pleasure. Although she didn¡¯t touch herself, her love juices were flowing from her crotch, wetting the bed. Now I focused on Tsura¡¯s again and inserted my finger into her pussy, making her body arch and squirt love juices all over the place. She was cumming from the pleasure that I gave her after she touched herself earlier. We ended our kiss and I looked at Tsura¡¯s face. She¡¯s so sexy, and I can¡¯t hold it again. I was still in my youkai form, and I am a bit bigger compared to my human form. I took off my pants and revealed my fully erect dick and put it near Tsura¡¯s face. She was surprised because it was bigger than our first time, but she know what she should do and wet it with her saliva. Kuroka was looking at my cock with a droll spilling over from her mouth. After getting my cock wet from her saliva, Tsura spread her pussy and said. ¡°Please Riku-sama¡­ I can¡¯t hold it anymore. Give me your cock, I want it!¡± RaizarP Author Here~ More than 55 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks to the new Executive!! - Ryu Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 48 – After Party Once again, I kissed Tsura to seal her mouth and positioned my cock right in front of her pussy. I teased her by poking my cock against his pussy wall. Tsura squirmed in my hug until she finally shove my face away and a trail of saliva was created when we stopped Kissing. ¡°D-don¡¯t tease me Riku-sama¡­ Ahn¡­ I, I want it!¡± I smiled as she begged for my cock. I turned to Kuroka who was touching herself while watching and said. ¡°I didn¡¯t allow you to touch yourself yet, you know? Didn¡¯t I say that I will punish you?¡± ¡°Nya.. ahn, but¡­ I can¡¯t¡­¡± Said Kuroka as she moaned in pleasure. ¡°Well, go on top of Tsura, I will play with both of you directly.¡± With a wide smile on her face, Kuroka leaped on top of Tsura. She pressed her breast against Tsura and spread her pussy with her hand. ¡°Please nya! Give it to me, your cock nya!¡± Tsura was also spreading her pussy with her and begged. ¡°I am first¡­ Riku-sama¡­¡± Without saying anything, I thrust my cock into Tsura¡¯s pussy, surprised her as she moaned. ¡°Ahnn~? Riku-sama!¡± I moved my hips and keep thrusting my cock inside Tsura¡¯s pussy, making her moan in pleasure. Kuroka was playing with her pussy on top of Tsura and moaned too. But, I can¡¯t allow her to touch herself right now. Her pussy juices were dripping on top of my cock and making it easier to move inside Tsura¡¯s pussy. I grabbed Kuroka¡¯s hand with my left hand and entered 2 fingers inside her pussy. ¡°Nya? Your fingers are going inside me!! It- it¡¯s good~¡± Kuroka shouted as she stuck her tongue out. ¡°Ahn¡­ ah¡­ ann.¡± Tsura was kept moaning as her tongue was stuck out too. They were looking at each other then Kuroka kissed Tsura, silencing her. I kept moving my hip until I feel like I am about to cum. ¡°Tsura, I am close.¡± I said. Tsura shoved Kuroka away from her face. ¡°Ahn.. I-I am about to cum too. Give it inside me, Riku-sama?!¡± I had lost my reasoning because of the pleasure, and I wanted to let it out inside her too. So I sped up my movement. ¡°Ah! Ahnn hnn¡­ I am about to cum!¡± As I feel the pressure in my cock, I thrust it deep inside Tsura and spurted my semen inside her. ¡°I-I¡¯m cumming, cumming?!¡± Tsura¡¯s body trembled as she climaxed. I slowly pulled my still erect cock from her pussy. The semen that I sprayed inside her pussy was pulled together with my cook and dripped from her pussy. Tsura was exhausted and fell asleep immediately. She really has a low stamina, but I can¡¯t blame her for that. Now it was Kuroka''s turn, and thrusting my cock from behind her made me a little bit excited than usual. Kuroka understood that and stuck out her butt towards me and spread her pussy using her hands. ¡°Riku-sama~ Look, my pussy is wet and ready nya?!¡± It was inviting. Her wet pussy was still covered with her love juices and her tails were swinging wildly. Because this is a punishment for her, I grabbed her tail and thrust my cock without saying anything more. ¡°Nya!!¡± Kuroka squealed in delight as her tongue was sticking out from her mouth. Using my free hand, I plunged my finger inside Kuroka¡¯s mouth and played with her tongue. ¡°Ahn, Rwiku-swama~¡± Her words become unrecognizable because I was playing with her tongue. I moved my hip faster and ¡°I- I wam abwout twu cum nya?¡± I moved my hip at high speed, making a wet sound and we cum together.. ¡°Cumming nya?!¡± I pulled my cock from her pussy and love juice was squirted from her pussy. It was her second cum but she was definitely still seeking more pleasure. As proof, her hand was moved towards her pussy and spread it wide, making my semen drip from her pussy. ¡°I am not satisfied yet nya! Please ravage me more!¡± Kuroka rolled beside Tsura and lay on her back as she spread her legs and pussy. As a real man, I won¡¯t refuse her offer. So I approached her and thrust my cock inside her pussy again as I kissed her wildly. Our sex lasted for a few rounds, I cummed inside Kuroka for a few times before I was exhausted and fell asleep. *** NFSW End *** Somehow, when I opened my eyes, I was on the couch outside the bedroom. Did Kuroka or Tsura move me when I was sleeping? I raised my body and walked towards the bathroom. At that time, I realized that I was still in my youkai form. I can¡¯t feel the presence of the girls inside the apartment, so I spread my senses and finally I found them in the school. I could also feel Shirone in the school. So she¡¯s already fine enough to attend the school? That¡¯s good. I washed my face and brushed my teeth before entering the shower to clean myself. I still reek of bodily fluids because of last night''s activities, so I washed my body to be as clean as possible. Today I had no plan to attend the school, I will focus more on finding the next candidate to join my Hyakki Yakkou. So, I changed my clothes into my striped green and black kimono and teleported to Kanto. I teleported in front of my mansion. My destination today is a hidden village of youkai that I heard from the old youkai at the party yesterday. He said that village was located somewhere near the mountain of the Gunma region. Not only that, it was a mysterious village that was only found around 2 years ago. It was suspicious, but that was my best bet. I was about to go to the Himejima clan to find some youkai near their residence, but I scratched the idea because they are part of Five Principal Clans and we have an agreement with them to not interfere with each other and protect our own territories. So, the mountain near the Gunma is my best bet to find some youkai to join my Hyakki Yakkou. I preferred a flying youkai to help me travel around though, but I will welcome the strong one too. With a clear goal, I began to coat myself with Fear and used Meikyo Shisui before running in Gunma''s direction. I¡¯ve never been there, so I must run to reach Gunma. Or I can hop on top of a train to reach it faster. Now, it¡¯s time to hunt the new member of my Hyakki Yakkou. RaizarP Author Here~ More than 55 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks to the new Executive!! - Ryu - Mike Guin Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 49 – Hidden Youkai Village I¡¯ve arrived at the mountain after running for an hour. Well, not exactly running because I jumped on top of a train in the middle of my way here. Well, back to the mountain, this is very mysterious. I tried to spread my senses, but I can¡¯t feel anything in this mountain. A smile crept up my face as I began to walk while looking around the area around me. Well, there was nothing unusual near me, only trees and bushes. I followed the mountain trail and climbed higher. I kept spreading my senses to feel what¡¯s wrong with this mountain. Why I couldn¡¯t feel anything in this mountain? After walking for five minutes, I began to notice something unusual. ¡°I am walking in a loop?¡± The trees around me were the same as five minutes ago. This is bad, I was trapped in some kind of barrier without me noticing it. I shrouded my body with fear and called my Nenekirimaru. If my guess is right, then there is a youkai that can use Fear in this mountain. I remembered something from Nurarihyon no Mago, a hidden village that was hidden by the village¡¯s fear, the home of elite youkai. It seems that I spotted a jackpot this time. I gathered the Fear in my sword and I swung it down. I didn¡¯t use as much power as when I tried to cut Vali, cutting a Fear at this level was rather easy. After I swung my sword, the air in front of me was cut, and the scenery from inside the cut was different from that around me. I stepped into the cut and I arrived at high ground, with a village spanned below it. I spread my senses again and smiled. ¡°Jackpot, this is the place.¡± I looked at the scenery below me. The village was beautiful, with simple wood as a roof and stone as a wall. There is a maintained road that connected each house that was built with a flat stone. On the right side of the village, a river flows from the high ground that I was currently at to a lake that was located behind the biggest house in the village. I could also feel the biggest energy of youkai came from that house. No youkai stayed in the house, maybe they realized about my entrance to their village and decided to stay in the village chief¡¯s house together? Well, that made it easier for me to recruit them. I made Nenekirimaru disappear and used Kyouka Suigetsu as I walked towards the biggest house in the village. As I got closer to the house, the more it appeared as something amazing. I just noticed it after I got close to the house, but the house was more like a mansion. The wall was painted white, and the door was huge. Maybe they made the door that huge because of the variety of youkai in this village. But, I had this strange feeling since I arrived in this village. Like, something inside me wanted to go inside this house as soon as possible. I trust my feeling. I will always trust my feeling because I know that it was the best course of action. Because of Telos Karma, I will always be guided to the best possible outcome, so I entered the house with a big smile on my face. ¡°Excuse me!¡± I shouted as I put my right hand beside my mouth. The first thing that I saw as soon as I entered the house is the big stairs that lead to the second floor. I could feel a lot of youkai were gathered on the second floor. The big energy that I felt when I entered this village was also on the second floor, right in the middle of it. After a few seconds, two youkai appeared from my left and right respectively. They have a big face colored blue and red respectively. Not only that, they held a big cleaver in their right hand. ¡°What is the lone youkai doing in this village huh?¡± ¡°Are you trying to fill our stomach? Bad children will be eaten by Namahage!¡± The two youkai, that was known as Namahage approached me and talked alternatively. This, that girl really did change everything in the east youkai faction, huh. There was no other explanation except that, how could Namahage from Nurarihyon no Mago appear in this world if that was not the case? I smiled at them and said. ¡°I wanted to invite the villager to join me, follow me in my Hyakki Yakkou.¡± The Namahage looked at each other for a while before they burst into laughter. ¡°Bahahaha, a puny youkai like you wanted to invite the Tono as your Hyakki Yakkou?¡± ¡°Bahahaha, dream on! Pas¡± I don¡¯t hate it. It was youkai nature to not bow down to those weaker than them, I am also like that. But, they choose the wrong opponent. I used Kyouka Suigetsu since I walked to this house, and I had passed them a long time ago. They just talked with my fake, but I will play with them. I smiled, which then imitated by my fake and said. ¡°Look behind you.¡± As I said that, I erased my fake and appeared behind them along with a cloud of black smoke. They first saw my head, my body, and then my leg as the black smoke slowly show my real body. ¡°You! That technique! We recognized it!¡± Shouted the blue Namahage. ¡°How could you use that technique?! Wait, that idiotic hairstyle!¡± added the red Namahage. ¡°Well, it seems you recognized me. It¡¯s my time to go.¡± I said as I disappeared from their sight using Meikyo Shisui. I went upstairs as I keep gazing at the way in front of me. The Namahage shouted something behind me, but I was too focused on the big energy that was on the second floor. I can¡¯t contain my smell and I finally stepped my foot on the second floor, which to my surprise was a tatami floor. A lot of youkai were lining up on the left and right sides. They sat on the tatami floor with a low table in front of them. The numerous youkai was looking at me, no, the stairs. It seems they were waiting for my arrival. I can¡¯t see them clearly, because my sight was obscured by the bamboo curtain that they used to hide their figures. I don¡¯t want to look like a coward, so I walked to the youkai that sat in the middle of the row. The youkai looked like a woman from her shadow, she has no visible feature that shows that she is a youkai. Because every youkai has a table in front of them, I guessed that they have a sake too on top of that table. Good thing then, I stole a red mini sake cup and a bottle of sake to exchange for a Sakazuki. When I arrived in front of the youkai in the middle, I canceled my technique and sat down while pouring sake on my cup. I could visibly feel that the youkai in the room were surprised by my appearance, but the youkai in front of me was more surprised than them. I raised the sake cup on my right hand and smiled. ¡°Yo! A good day for a sake, huh?¡± RaizarP Author Here~ More than 55 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks to the new Executive!! - Mike Guin Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 50 – Unexpected Addition As I said that, I saw a visible reaction from the shadow in front of me. I was satisfied, but that feeling changed as the shadow opened her mouth. ¡°You¡­ How come you are here?¡± The girl behind the shadow asked me such a question. ¡°No, how come you are alive?¡± Added the girl. I was confused by what she meant, that was until she uncovered the curtain and I saw her figure. I almost dropped my cup and bottle because of my surprise, but I managed to hold them. My mouth was opened wide when I saw her black hair and black eyes. I know that girl. But, she was not supposed to be here, not in this world. How? ¡°How?¡± I asked her. At the same time, the curtains on my sides were opened too. On the left side were a bunch of youkai that was familiar to me. Familiar as in I remembered them from somewhere, not exactly the real world. Some of them were crying while some of them were shouting in delight as they saw me. On the right side were another bunch of familiar youkai, but they were looking at me as if I am their enemy. But, I focused my gaze on the girl in front of me and waited for her answer. ¡°I wonder. I was sent to this world after a naked girl appeared in front of me. Those guys beside you were in the same state as me. Now, I have 2 memories. One of my memories was as the leader of Kyoto Ayakashi, Hagoromo Gitsune. while the other was the memory of my time as the wife of the second lord of pandemonium, Yamabuki Otome. Now, how are you alive, and why are you here, Rihan-sama?¡± Asked the girl in front of me. ¡®That girl again? Why? Why did she do all of this?¡¯ I can¡¯t say anything. I am not Rihan, I am Nura Riku. I did have the appearance of Nura Rihan, but I am not him. The shout from the youkai on my life was that of delight. They are happy that they met their former leader again, Nura Rihan. I turned to the left and saw a big youkai with dark skin and white hair shouting ¡®Rihan!!¡¯ with tears running down his face, he was Aotabo, one of the Nura Clan¡¯s youkai. The long-haired youkai with monk outfit beside him tilted his hat and smiled, he was known as Kurotabou, also one of the Nura Clan¡¯s youkai. But I am not him. That¡¯s why I answered the girl, Hagorome Gitsune in front of me. Although she has the appearance of Yamabuki Otome, she introduced herself as Hagoromo Gitsune first. I turned to look at her and introduced myself. ¡°I am not Rihan. My name is Nura Riku, the son of the East Youkai Faction¡¯s leader, Nurarihyon.¡± I drank the sake on the cup in my right hand as I slammed down the bottle in my left hand to the ground. ¡°Don¡¯t mistake me with someone else, Miss.¡± I smiled at her and closed my right eye. It became my habit since I did this repeatedly. The youkai that was shouting happily on my left suddenly went quiet. I thought that they understood that I am not Rihan, but they shouted louder after I introduced myself. ¡°¡±¡±WOAAAHHH!!!¡±¡±¡± ¡°Nura clan existed here too!!¡± Shouted Aotabo as he wiped his tears from his face. ¡°It was a good sign. We could finally move away from this village.¡± Said Kurotabou. As they shouted in joy, a blonde-haired guy wearing a green Kimono stood up. ¡°Wait!¡± He shouted to the other youkai. I looked at him and saw that he has no neck. Kubinashi, huh. He was a youkai that was invited by Rehan in Edo, his loyalty and respect towards Rihan is the top amongst the other youkai. I was interested in him. He approached me and stopped by my side. ¡°Are you sure that you are not Rihan-sama?¡± Asked Kubinashi. ¡°I am not. My name is Nura Riku, I told you twice now.¡± As I answered Kubinashi, he suddenly took out strings and controlled them to bind me. I was ready for an attack since I make my appearance known, I have changed Meikyo Shisui into Kyouka Suigetsu and let my fake do the talking. Kubinashi was skilled, in no less than a second, he controlled his strings to tie my fake body. As he tightened his strings, I smiled at him and made my fake disappear. I appeared again beside Hagoromo Gitsune and rested my left hand on her shoulder. ¡°Don¡¯t get that aggressive, I am here just to invite a strong youkai to join my Hyakki Yakkou.¡± Seemingly disturbed by my hand, Hagoromo Gitsune slapped it away from her shoulder and looked at me. ¡°You are truly the same species. Even Nurarihyon''s offspring in another world has the same personality as the old one.¡± I looked at Hagoromo Gitsune and smiled. ¡°Well, thank you for your compliment. So you came from another world? That''s interesting.¡± I disappeared again and reappeared beside Kubinashi and tapped his shoulder. ¡°Don¡¯t be so down, you are good. You even imbued your Fear in your strings, I never saw any youkai do that before. Well, only me and my old man can use Fear so I am surprised that you can use Fear too.¡± Kubinashi looked at me with a smile and said. ¡°Truly. Even if you have a different name, you acted like him.¡± As he said that, he turned to the rest of the Nura Clan¡¯s Youkai who have a smile on their face. They nodded their head together before Kubinashi turned to me. ¡°Allow me to join your Hyakki Yakkou, Riku-sama.¡± Kubinashi bowed his head. Following him, the rest of the Nura Clan¡¯s youkai also bowed their head and shouted. ¡°Allow us to follow you! Riku-sama!¡± Those guys, I didn¡¯t invite them yet and they wanted to follow me with their own accord? Was it because I have the same appearance as Rihan? Or was it because of their loyalty towards Nura Clan? But, I am grateful to them. I now know the goal of the girl that reincarnated me here. She wanted entertainment, and to change the course of this world, huh. Fine, after all this is the world that I lived in now, so I will not complain if she transported the whole Nura Clan¡¯s Youkai to this world. Now, the problem remains. I turned to Hagorome Gitsune, extended my right hand towards her, and smiled. ¡°How about you join my Hyakki Yakkou too?¡± RaizarP Author Here~ More than 55 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks to the new Executive!! - Mike Guin Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 51 – Back to Kanto ¡°I had wondered what you would ask me, but that? Boy, are you underestimating this Hagoromo Gitsune?¡± Hagoromo Gitsune asked as nine tails came from her back. The youkai on the right side of me also stood up and readied their weapon. Not only that, suddenly the roof was destroyed and a big skeleton head with red eyes peeked from the roof. ¡°Who dares to bother Hagoromo Gitsune-sama! This Gashadokuro will crush you!¡± I looked at the skeleton and smiled. The youkai from Nura Clan also turned serious and readied their weapon. Aotabo bumped his fist to each other, Kurotabo gripped his staff tightly, Kubinashi took out his string and a youkai with long hair that I know as Kejorou has stood behind Kubinashi. ¡°Stop it, Gashadokuro. Onee-sama did not order you yet!¡± Shouted a youkai that was holding a skeleton with a snake crawling out of its eyes socket. I turned to look at Hagoromo Gitsune and said. ¡°Well, I just asked. Who knows that you will agree to my invitation, right?¡± I still used Kyouka Suigetsu, I can¡¯t let my guard down when facing Hagoromo Gitsune. Although I am superior to her right now because of Senjutsu and Youjutsu, her experience is vast. I also can¡¯t let any of the youkai under my watch injured, because I need them to deal with Kokabiel¡¯s army. ¡°Hmm, I see.¡± Said Hagoromo Gitsune. ¡°I wanted to refuse you at first, but it seems my other memories prevent me from doing that. Yamabuki Otome¡¯s memories, she was still longing for Nura Rihan, even though you are not him.¡± Hagoromo Gitsune rise from her as she said that. She hid her tails and walked towards me with a smile. ¡°I won¡¯t join your Hyakki Yakkou, but I think coming with you is the best decision. We¡¯ve arrived in this world for two years now, but we have yet to see the world. Isn¡¯t that right, Kyokotsu?¡± ¡°Yes, Onee-sama!¡± Hagoromo Gitsune stopped in front of me and crossed her arms. ¡°So, deal? I will go with you, as a leader of my own Hyakki Yakkou.¡± This girl, as expected. Hagoromo Gitsune is a leader, there is no way she will accept my invitation. I know that from the start, but I wanted to invite her. The outcome of this discussion has been determined since I invited her, so I said. ¡°Sure, but I will try to make you join my Hyakki Yakkou even in the future.¡± I leaned my head towards her and looked at her straight in her eyes. Hagoromo Gitsune smiled and stepped back before her body was surrounded by her tails. A few seconds later, she retracted her tail and for some reason, she changed her clothes into a black sailor suit. Honestly, it suits her. So stepped forwards and leaned her head to match my gaze and said. ¡°Try your worst, Nura. Just remember, that I am Hagoromo Gitsune.¡± After she said that, she walked away from me towards the stairs. She stopped right before she went downstairs and turned to me. ¡°What are you waiting for? Let¡¯s go to your clan. I wanted to see the Nura Clan in this world.¡± I blinked my eyes a few times at her words, but after that, I laughed and said. ¡°Hahaha, sure. I¡¯m sure that you will get surprised.¡± I approached her and walked beside her while muttering. ¡°I¡¯m sure you will.¡± *** We walked back to Kanto as the Kyoto Youkai and Nura Clan¡¯s youkai hide their presence from the normal human. I almost forgot about it because the youkai in this world always blended themselves with humans, but the youkai from Nurarihyon no Mago was able to hide from normal humans. So, there were only me and Hagoromo Gitsune walking side by side by the time we reached Kanto. There were a few young youkai that were surprised by the parade behind us, but they quickly stepped away when they saw my face. They just looked in my direction with awe on their face, while some of them ran towards my mansion to inform my old man or so they said. ¡°It¡¯s lively, this place.¡± Said Hagoromo Gitsune as she looked around the surrounding. We were near Tokyo, of course, this will be lively. ¡°Right? But, haven¡¯t you realized something different in this place?¡± I asked her with my right eye closed. Hagoromo Gitsune looked back at me before she asked. ¡°What do you mean?¡± I smiled at her and said. ¡°Look around you, the youkai. They are different from the youkai in that village, no? I was a bit surprised when I found the village you are in because the youkai in that place is somehow different from the youkai that I am familiar with.¡± Hagoromo Gitsune looked at the young youkai on the street and narrowed her eyes. ¡°They¡­ they are alive? No, more like. They lacked Fear?¡± ¡°Indeed, but they have a different ability.¡± As I said that, I covered my body with Senjutsu Aura and showed a ball that I made from Senjutsu to Hagoromo Gitsune. She was surprised by what I did and her surprise was apparent on her face. I smiled at her and said. ¡°This is Senjutsu. There is another technique called Youjutsu too. But, I will explain that for later because we¡¯ve had arrived.¡± I dissipated the Senjutsu aura around my body and looked at the mansion in front of me. The youkai from Nura Clan and the Kyoto Youkai began to show themselves. The Kyoto Youkai¡¯s reaction was bland, but the ones that originated from Nura Clan were surprised. ¡°This is? This is Nura Clan in this world?¡± Asked Kubinashi as his head fell to his hand. ¡°Ao¡­ it seems that Nura Clan is successful in this world.¡± Said Kurotabou as he tilted his hat up to have a better look. ¡°I don¡¯t need you to tell me that, Kuro.¡± Said Aotabo as his body trembled in excitement. ¡°Ara, it seems that I will become busier than in the original mansion. I am not confident to be able to look after the mansion this big¡­ It is two times bigger than our Nura Mansion.¡± Said Kejorou as she put her hand on her cheek. ¡°Truly a surprise¡­ this is the Nura Clan in this world?¡± Asked Hagoromo Gitsune as she looked towards me. ¡°We are called East Youkai Faction, but if you are comfortable with Nura Clan then you may call us so. Whatever, let¡¯s come in. My old man has been waiting for us. I could feel his excitement even from here.¡± I said to Hagoromo Gitsune and entered my mansion. But, as expected from a yakuza youkai, the youkai that was originated from the Nura Clan just entered the mansion with me and shouted. ¡°We coming in!¡± They began to spread all over the mansion and made a mess of it, but the more important youkai such as Kubinashi, Aotabo, and Kurotabo still followed me with Hagoromo Gitsune. I walked towards the meeting room where I feel my old man¡¯s presence with Masaomi and Setsuna. I opened the door and entered the room with Hagoromo Gitsune by my side. She looked at my old man and was surprised. ¡°He¡¯s¡­ Truly a familiar face. Nurarihyon.¡± Said Hagoromo Gitsune as she smirked at my old man. My old man with his leg crossed rested his head on his hand and smiled. ¡°Yo, Riku. You¡¯ve brought another beauty with you, huh. Tell me about it in detail.¡± RaizarP Author Here~ More than 55 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks to the new Squad Leader!! - Ali - Bryan Kennedy Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 52 – Story time Kubinashi, with Kurotabo and Aotabo, entered the meeting room too after they heard my old man¡¯s voice. They were having a surprised expression and can¡¯t say anything. My old man looked at them and said. ¡°Oh, other ones. Riku you better tell me all about it. I could also feel a lot of youkai entered the mansion.¡± I sat in front of my old man while Hagoromo Gitsune sat on my left. The three youkai from Nura Clan snapped from their surprise and muttered. ¡°Hey¡­ that¡¯s Commander, right?¡± Asked Aotabo as he whispered to Kurotabo. ¡°Yeah, no doubt about it. He¡¯s Commander, but¡­ he¡¯s young.¡± Muttered Kurotabo. ¡°You two, we can ask that later. Now we must take a seat.¡± Said Kubinashi as he took a seat behind me in a seiza. Aotabo and Kurotabo nodded their head and sat beside Kubinashi in a seiza, and then Hagoromo Gitsune said. ¡°This is truly a different world, for you do not recognize me.¡± My old man narrowed his eyes at Hagoromo Gitsune. He touched his chin with his right hand and pondered a little. ¡°Hmm¡­ I don¡¯t recognize you, indeed. You said something about a different world?¡± asked my old man. ¡°Indeed, and I was surprised a youkai in this world is a bit different from our world. You were more tolerable than the Nurarihyon from my world too, maybe because you didn¡¯t bother me.¡± Said Hagoromo Gitsune as she smirked. My old man became intrigued by the different world talk. He smiled and leaned his head closed as he stroked his chin with his hand. ¡°Hou, so there is Nurarihyon in that world too. I bet he¡¯s as handsome as me.¡± Scratch that, he wanted to know about himself in that world. Aotabo and Kurotabo nodded their head at my old man¡¯s word. I wanted to let out a sigh, but now there was a more important matter than that. ¡°You know, old man. How can you believe the existence of a different world that easily?¡± ¡°Why not? There were lots of strange things in this world. The existence of a hidden world or a different world could be easily explained as some unexplainable thing. Such as Takamagahara, or the realm where gods reside, I can only accept and believe it.¡± Said my old man. Somehow, his word makes sense. We can¡¯t explain how the realm where gods reside, so we just need to accept it. Well, it was better to shrug it off rather than have a headache by thinking about it. ¡°Truly, a Yakuza way of doing a thing.¡± Muttered Hagoromo Gitsune. ¡°Then old man, the three youkai behind me. They said that they came from Nura Clan from that world.¡± As I said that, Kubinashi and the other two bowed their head. Maybe because he was the most rational of the three, Kurotabo was the one who spoke. ¡°Commander, we are the Youkai from Nura Clan. We have joined Nura Clan around three hundred years under the leadership of the second generation, Nura Rihan-sama, the son of Commander in our homeworld.¡± ¡°Hou, so the Nurarihyon in that world also had a son. Let¡¯s see, his appearance is similar to us?¡± Asked my Old man as he pulled out a smoke pipe from his pocket. ¡°Yes, that¡¯s correct. Our Commander¡¯s appearance in his youth looked like you, but now he¡¯s just a retired old man and let his grandson lead the Nura Clan.¡± My old man became interested in his story and said. ¡°Raise your head, so you can tell your story better. I¡¯m interested. A grandson, huh. You better work hard, Riku. I wanted a grandson or two.¡± He said to me as he laughed. The three youkai behind me raised their head and smiled wryly. Kurotabo then continued, ¡°We were transported to this world as soon as we back to our mansion, celebrating our victory against Abe no Seimei. We¡¯ve been in this world for two years with Hagoromo Gitsune that sat beside Riku-sama, and we wanted to make a request.¡± As Kurotabo said that, he put his head on the floor and shouted. ¡°Please allow us to stay in this mansion, Nurarihyon-sama. We wanted to follow Riku-sama, as he reminded us of our benefactor, Rihan-sama. We agreed to follow him, and we will stay with him as his Hyakki Yakkou!¡± Aotabo and Kubinashi followed Kurotabo and shouted. ¡°Please!¡± My old man looked and me and asked. ¡°Are you going to invite them as part of your Hyakki Yakkou, Riku?¡± He had a serious expression on his face, and so I looked back at him with a serious expression too. ¡°Yeah, old man. They are very useful, not only that.¡± I paused my sentence a little. I smiled at my old man and closed my right eye. ¡°They can use Fear.¡± That managed to surprise my old man. He looked at Hagorome Gitsune before turning to the three behind me. ¡°Is that so? Then they will be able to hold themselves against mid to high-ranked supernatural then. But, some of them maybe able to hold themselves against Ultimate-Rank, for example, the lady beside you.¡± So my old man can feel Hagoromo Gitsune¡¯s power? That was not a surprise though, as he was experienced in a war and could judge the person¡¯s strength at a glance. ¡°Ultimate-rank? Maybe you could give me an example? Remember, we are not from this world.¡± Said Hagoromo Gitsune as she spread her fan in front of her mouth. When did she pull that fan? I know that the fan was one of her weapons from her tail, but I didn¡¯t notice it until she spread it. Maybe I was too focused on my old man, but she was indeed amazing. As expected of the ruler of Kyoto, and the mother of Abe no Seimei I guess. ¡°Let¡¯s see¡­ If you can injure me then you can fight with Ultimate-rank. Is that example enough?¡± Said my old man. Hagoromo Gitsune closed her fan and revealed a predatory grin. ¡°That¡¯s enough. Then I am indeed at that level. Four hundred years ago, I managed to gouge Nurarihyon¡¯s heart of his body.¡± ¡°What an ominous thing to say¡­¡± Said my old man as he looked at Hagoromo Gitsune. He looked at me and asked, ¡°¡­Is that true?¡± ¡°I don¡¯t know. The one with his heart gouged was not you, so why do you care?¡± I answered my old man. But, Hagoromo Gitsune looked at me and smiled. ¡°I was also the one who killed his son, with this hand.¡± I could hear the three youkai behind me grunting in anger, but I don¡¯t care. She was defeated by the protagonist from Nurarihyon no Mago exactly because of that. Her memories as Yamabuki Otome was triggered, and she was in a breakdown state. ¡°Don¡¯t care, I am not him.¡± I said to her and leaned my face closer. ¡°More importantly, how about it. My offer still stands. For some reason I am attracted to you, so join my Hyakki Yakkou.¡± Hagoromo Gitsune was surprised by my answer, but she still put the same smile on her face and said. ¡°And I said I refuse your invitation.¡± ¡®Tch, maybe next time.¡¯ I thought as I looked at my old man, remembering the matter with Kokabiel. ¡°Oh, right. Old man.¡± I called out to him. ¡°What?¡± Answered him. ¡°Kokabiel will attack Kuoh Town with his army, so¡­ can I hit you in your face?¡± I said to him as I cracked my fist and stood from my seat. My old man smiled at me and said, ¡°Try again in a hundred year.¡± He disappeared from his spot and reappeared again near the door. ¡°Oh, right. If they were part of your Hyakki Yakkou, I will allow them to stay in this mansion.¡± Leaving those words, my old man exited the living room. ¡°What a carefree man.¡± Said Hagoromo Gitsune as he looked at the door that was opened by my old man. RaizarP Author Here~ More than 55 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks to the new Squad Executive!! - William Ngo Big Thanks to the new Squad Leader!! - Angel Diaz - TheRavenbrand - Kaiseth Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 53 – Sakazuki ¡°So, how long were you going to dogeza like that?¡± I said to Kurotabo and the other. They raised their head and looked at me. Because my old man allowed them to stay in this mansion, then I can rest easy. But, I seem to be forgetting something. ¡°Riku-sama, so they are the new Hyakki Yakkou member?¡± A voice called out to me from the edge of the room. I looked at him and saw Masaomi sitting there with a smile on his face. That¡¯s right! I forgot about his presence! How? Was this the skill of an experienced former exorcist? Setsuna who sat beside my old man earlier also stood up and excused herself after a while. We were the only ones left in the room with Hagoromo Gitsune. Kurotabo and the others were also surprised when they saw Masaomi and asked. ¡°Who is that? He¡¯s not youkai, right?¡± Asked Kurotabo as he narrowed his eyes. Masaomi just laughed at Kurotabo and said. ¡°I am not, I am a reincarnated devil but I was invited by Riku-sama to join his Hyakki Yakkou. He saved me when I lost my mind, so I am really grateful for him.¡± ¡°Devil? Do you mean you are an oni?¡± asked Hagoromo Gitsune. ¡°No, lady. Devil as in devil from Bible. I am not an Oni, I was previously a human.¡± Answered Masaomi as he stood up. He was wearing prosthetic legs that were made from woods. Who made that? But I¡¯m glad that he can move around now. He approached us and stopped in front of me. ¡°Riku-sama, I will go right now. If they were really from a different world, I could explain how things work in this world.¡± Said Masaomi. I nodded my head to him and turned back to look at Kurotabo and the others. ¡°You three can follow him for now, ask him anything. I still need something that I wanted to talk about with Hagoromo Gitsune.¡± ¡°Oya, are you still trying to win over me? Your effort is futile.¡± Said Hagoromo Gitsune. ¡°Nah, I just wanted to talk about something private and asked something.¡± I answered Hagoromo Gitsune with a shrug of my shoulder. ¡°I wanted to propose something too.¡± ¡°But, Riku-sama. She¡¯s...¡± Kubinashi spoke up, but I cut him off. ¡°Don¡¯t worry, there will be nothing happen. We will just talk.¡± I said to him as I raised my chin slightly. ¡°Kubinashi, let¡¯s follow Riku-sama instruction for now. We don¡¯t know anything yet so it¡¯s better if we ask¡­¡± Kurotabo paused his sentence and looked at Masaomi who stood by my side. ¡°Now that I think about it, I don¡¯t know your name yet.¡± ¡°Oh, excuse me for that. My name is Masaomi Yaegaki, nice to meet you.¡± Said Masaomi as he extended his hand for a handshake. Kurotabo and the other stood up and introduced themselves as they shakes Masaomi¡¯s hand. ¡°Well then, shall we go?¡± Asked Masaomi as he walked out of the room followed by Kurotabo and the other. They closed the door and there was only me and Hagoromo Gitsune left in the room. ¡°What do you want to talk about, I wonder.¡± Asked Hagoromo Gitsune as she turned towards me. I also turned towards her and crossed my arms. ¡°Reincarnation, I wanted to ask you about that. As you¡¯re a youkai that got stronger each time you reincarnated, I am curious about the reincarnation part.¡± Hagoromo Gitsune had a surprised expression before she turned serious. ¡°As expected, you are Nura Rihan, right.¡± I shook my head and answered. ¡°No, I am not. But I do know about Nura Clan and Nura Rihan. And how he died, I know all of it.¡± ¡®Because I watch the series.¡¯ I added in my mind. ¡°How¡­ wait.¡± Hagoromo Gitsune understood what I meant and she smiled. ¡°You were reincarnated to this world. So that was why you asked me about reincarnation.¡± ¡°Right, I can¡¯t talk about it with other people. Although I just met you earlier, I know that you understand reincarnation more than the other youkai.¡± I said to Hagoromo Gitsune with a serious face. ¡°Then shall be it, I will explain it to you. You are more interesting than I thought.¡± Hagoromo Gitsune explained all that I wanted to know about reincarnation. Surprisingly, my reincarnation to this world was the same as the way she tried to reincarnate her son, Abe no Seimei in Nurarihyon no Mago. I understood most of it, and she also asked how did I reincarnated to this world if I have no ability to reincarnate endlessly like her. I just answered that I got reincarnated by the same girl that transported them here, that was why I believed them when they said that they were transported by a naked girl to this world. After I was satisfied with her explanation, I went to the dining room to take lunch. Hagoromo Gitsune said that she will join her subordinates and asked for a room for herself to sleep in. I directed her to Setsuna and have a hefty lunch after that. The mansion of Kanto now was filled with Youkai from my Hyakki Yakkou. Masaomi also got along well with Kurotabo, maybe because they had the same hairstyle? But that was good. The pond under the Sakura Tree was inhabited by Kappa, which looked like a normal human but he had a shell on top of his head and his hands looked like a frog''s hands. Tonight, there will be a party to exchange the Sakazuki with me. My old man throw a big party and informed Kyoto too. When Hagoromo Gitsune found out that the ruler of Kyoto was a fox youkai like her, she was honestly surprised. I laughed at her and I went back to Kuoh Town for now to get Tsura and Kuroka. I purposely didn¡¯t inform Sona about Kokabiel¡¯s attack. Well, I wanted to inform her, but I decided to use her and Rias as bait. There was a chance that Kokabiel would attack another city if Rias or Sona weren¡¯t present in the town. They were the perfect bait for Kokabiel, so I will just inform them of the day when Kokabiel attacked the city. I took Tsura and Kuroka back to Kanto and introduced them to the Nura Clan youkai. They cheered so hard that they found out I had two lovers my age. Well, long story short, the party that night was really big. I drank too much sake because each youkai wanted to pour me a drink and I ended up sleeping until the morning after the party. RaizarP Author Here~ More than 55 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks to the new Squad Executive!! - William Ngo Big Thanks to the new Squad Leader!! - Victor Gonzales - Mitchell Miyashiro Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 54 – Another trouble Kurotabo¡¯s POV After the party ended, I called Kubinashi, Aotabo, and Kejoro to my room. We have been given a private room by a Yuki-Onna called Setsuna. She reminds me of Setsura, but she was not as cold as her. Right now the four of us were the strongest amongst Rihan-sama Hyakki Yakkou when we were in Edo, that was why I called them here to talk about something. ¡°What do you think?¡± I asked the three of them as we sat in a circle. In front of us were cups of sake that we brought from the party earlier. Kubinashi took his cup and drank it before he looked at me. ¡°He¡¯s really similar. Not only his look, but his behavior was also similar to Rihan-sama.¡± Aotabo crossed his arms and closed his eyes. Kejorou just drank the sake with a smile on her face. She put the cup down before she said. ¡°Does it really matter? Hagoromo Gitsune was also here, she had helped us in slaying Abe no Seimei because she regained her memories as Otome-sama. If there is someone who knows Rihan-sama better than us, then it is her.¡± I nodded my head. Even though Hagoromo Gitsune was our former enemy, Yamabuki Otome-sama was Rihan-sama''s wife. If she had her memories, then she was the one who could understand him. I hate to admit it, but Riku-sama was indeed not Rihan-sama. He said it himself, but Nurarihyon-sama really looked like our original Commander when he was young. This world is different from ours, we need to get used to this world fast. Aotabo opened his eyes and said, ¡°It doesn¡¯t matter. Whatever he Riku-sama or Rihan-sama, he¡¯s a Nura. This world is different, that Masaomi is a devil, a race that didn¡¯t exist in our world. What we need to do wasn¡¯t any different than what we did previously, we are part of Nura Clan.¡± Kubinashi crossed his arms and said, ¡°More importantly, we had exchanged Sakazuki with him. I still believe that he was Rihan-sama though.¡± ¡°Me too.¡± I said to Kubinashi as a drank the sake. ¡°Well, let¡¯s drink tonight! It¡¯s a celebration after all!¡± We decided to not think too hard about it and continue drinking until morning. *** Riku¡¯s POV It¡¯s been a week since the party. I was in the middle of the lesson in the classroom right now. It was the same day, as usual, free without any sign of Kokabiel or Rias¡¯s peerage in the town. The Youkai under my Hyakki Yakkou and Hagoromo Gitsune¡¯s subordinates had gotten used to living in this world. Setsuna and Tsura taught them about the world here. From the fundamental thing such as races and the factions in this world. At first, they were surprised by the existence of actual gods, but they were more surprised by the existence of angels. In Nurarihyon no Mago, the Totsugami or earth god was often called an Ayakashi too. Maybe that was why they were not that surprised when they learned that gods existed in this world. No, that¡¯s not important. I am worried right now, I could feel familiar energy in this school for some reason. Why did she come here? This is a school! Shit, I am really worried right now. She ate a lot of human heart in Nurarihyon no Mago, and now she¡¯s here? As I thought that, the door of the classroom was opened and the teacher entered the classroom. I tried to sense where she was right now, and I sighed in relief because she was in the other class. I sighed in relief, but that only lasted until I felt her energy go upstairs and stop in front of a certain 3rd-year class. Now, if that was a normal class then it was fine. But that class, that was Sona and Rias''s class. I hope nothing happened, Sona was fine, she could think and will move carefully. Rias was not in school right now, as she was preparing for her rating game in three days. ¡®Well, I trust her. She won¡¯t do anything reckless, right?¡¯ *** ¡°So, can you please explain this to me, Nura?¡± The school was done, and right now I am seated in the student council room with Hagoromo Gitsune. Sona sat in front of me with her full peerage stood behind her. Hagoromo Gitsune smiled as she sat with a grace befitting a rich lady beside me. How did we end up here? Mainly it was Hagoromo Gitsune¡¯s fault. ¡°Why did you call me here?¡± I asked Sona as I leaned my back against the backrest. ¡°You know, the one who sat beside you was the reason why I called you. Yamabuki-san has caused trouble for the normal student in this school.¡± Said Sona as she fixed her glasses. I was surprised by how Sona called Hagoromo Gitsune. I looked at Hagoromo Gitsune and saw her smile at me. She is¡­ truly. Why did she come to this school in the first place? I looked back at Sona with a smile to hide my worry and asked her, ¡°So, what did she do?¡± Sona paused a little and can¡¯t seem to tell me. Her queen, Tsubaki realized that and said, ¡°Yamabuki-san kissed her classmate at lunch. Not only that, the one who was kissed by her was a girl.¡± I turned to look at Hagoromo Gitsune instantly. Don¡¯t tell me that the girl died because of her? Was it wrong that I allowed her to be here? I shrouded my body in fear as I asked Hagoromo Gitsune. ¡°Did you kill the girl?¡± My tone was filled with hostility, and I am ready to fight Hagoromo Gitsune if she did kill the girl. Hagorome Gitsune looked at me with the same smile on her face as she put her right hand on her cheek, ¡°Now, what are you talking about?¡± Sona and the others were surprised by what I asked, and Tsubaki frantically said. ¡°No, the girl that she kissed was fine and alive.¡± Sona nodded her head and asked me, ¡°Why did you think the girl was dead, Nura?¡± I calmed down immediately and turned to Sona with a smile, ¡°Nothing. Just a normal question. The girl that she kissed were died. But, the one that died was their feeling towards the other person. That was because they became obsessed with her,¡± I said as I pointed my index finger towards Hagoromo Gitsune. I tried to make an excuse, but as expected it didn¡¯t work. ¡°Liar.¡± Said Sona shortly. RaizarP Author Here More than 55 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks to the new Squad Executive!! - William Ngo Big Thanks to the new Squad Leader!! - Sean Robbins - Jaamoon Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 55 – The Predator I looked at Sona and asked, ¡°Why did you call me a liar?¡± Sona shrugged her shoulder and pointed at Tsubaki who stood behind her. I looked at Tsubaki and saw her averting her gaze to the other side and I instantly understood what happened. ¡°Hahahaha, she¡¯s the one?¡± I laughed at Sona when I understood what happened before turning to Hagoromo Gitsune. I saw her licking her lips seductively and said, ¡°She didn¡¯t taste good.¡± I almost shuddered when she said that. I knew that I am stronger than her, but the way she acted asserted dominance towards the other. I peeked at the devils too and saw them looking at Hagoromo Gitsune with wary on their eyes. Even Saji the newest member of Sona¡¯s peerage was looking terrified when he saw her licking her lips. I never saw her acting like this in our mansion, but I guess this was her true nature. The youkai that reincarnated every Four hundred years, the ruler of Kyoto, the reincarnated Youkai, Hagoromo Gitsune. She was not called the leader of Kyoto Ayakashi for nothing. She killed lots of humans and ate their hearts to gain the power to give birth to her child Nue, or better known as Abe no Seimei. The way she took the power of young girls by eating them through kissing them really made me almost jump off my couch earlier. Thankfully, she just kissed the girl, which I guessed as Tsubaki, and taste her? Wait, that was a bit weird. But, it was a good thing that Tsubaki was fine. I looked at Sona which focused her gaze on Hagoromo Gitsune. I coughed a little to gain her attention before I smiled and said, ¡°Well, I will handle this matter because it was the fault of my friend over here.¡± At that moment, Sona smiled at me mischievously and somehow I knew what she will say even when she didn¡¯t say anything yet. ¡°Isn¡¯t this situation familiar, Nura?¡± I shrugged my shoulder as I said, ¡°Indeed it is. That¡¯s why I won¡¯t give you anything and you owe me nothing. Ah, I mean your debt for letting Hakuryuukou enter this town a few days ago.¡± ¡°Oh, what a generous offer. But, didn¡¯t you forget about something? Such as evil piece?¡± Asked Sona as she smiled and fixed her glasses. For some reason, Tsubaki also fixed her glasses at the same time as Sona and looked at me with a serious face. ¡°Oh, yeah I forgot about that...¡± I said as I touched my chin. ¡°If I remember correctly, I gave you that piece to exchange it with something else from Rias, and to prevent me from accidentally breaking it before the exchange process right? You were the one who suggested it.¡± I smiled at her and closed my right eye. I knew what she wanted to say since she brought this subject. That was why I had prepared an answer for her. She wanted to nullify my exchange for the evil piece, but I won¡¯t back down that easily. Who does she think I am? I was prepared since I gave her that evil piece. Sona¡¯s expression became muddled and her smile dropped from her face. She remembered what happened back then and sighed. ¡°Fine. It was my fault after all.¡± I smiled at Sona to show my victory over our discussion. But at that time I could feel Rias¡¯s presence alongside her peerage appeared in the school. Sona seemed to realize it too and she looked at me. ¡°It seems that you have to stay here longer than you thought.¡± Sona said to me with a serious expression. I just smilled back at her and disappeared from the couch. I reappeared in the door that lead to outside the Student Council Room and looked over my shoulder, ¡°No thanks. We are leaving.¡± As I said that, Hagoromo Gitsune also stood from the couch and walked towards me. She eyed Tsubaki with a predatory gaze before turning back to me. I just ignore her gaze towards Tsubaki and we exited the Student Council Room. Tsura, Kuroka, and Shirone had gone home without us, and because I was still worried about Kokabiel¡¯s attack, I had them teleported back to Kanto as soon as the school was over. So, right now it was just me and Hagoromo Gitsune who walked around in the school while I tried to avoid Rias as much as possible. It was not like I was afraid of Rias, but I prefer to walk around with Hagoromo Gitsune to ask her something. I turned left to look at Hagoromo Gitsune. She wore Kuoh school uniform, that was unexpectedly fit her. But, I turned serious when she turned to look at me. ¡°Why did you kiss that girl?¡± Hagoromo Gitsune smiled and touched her lips. ¡°I wonder why. I smelt something sweet came from her, and I somehow can¡¯t resist it. It was like the special girl that I had gathered in Kyoto four hundred years ago.¡± The special girl in Kyoto four hundred years ago? Was she talking about Yo-hime? The princess that eloped with Nurarihyon in Nurarihyon no Mago and the mother of Nura Rihan? I need to confirm it with her, ¡°Was the special girl that you mentioned Yo-hime?¡± Hagoromo Gitsune seems to be delighted that I asked her that name. Her lips curved up higher and she asked me back, ¡°Oya, you know her? Could it be, your mother in this world called Yo-hime too?¡± I shook my head at her question, ¡°No, I don¡¯t know who my mother is. That damned old man hid it from me.¡± We were talking as we walked out of the school building. Because I was concentrated on our conversation, I had become careless with the presence in our surroundings. Well, luckily it was nothing serious, just a destruction ball that was launched towards me and Hagoromo Gitsune. On my left, Hagoromo Gitsune showed an irritated expression and pulled a fan from her bag before swinging it towards the black and red ball that was coming towards us. The reason why I didn¡¯t move was that the ball came from my left, so I guess that I could leave it to Hagoromo Gitsune. Well, I wanted to see her power with my own eyes too, because I was curious! When she swung her fan, I thought that the ball of destruction would be stopped or disappear, but that was not it. The ball was sent back to the caster and a red-haired girl from afar blocked it with a shield that was made from the same energy as the ball. After the two energy collided with each other, it disappeared into thin air. The red-haired girl, Rias, looked at me with an expression full of anger as her peerage began to arrive one after another. Hagoromo Gitsune spread her fan and sidestepped to the left so I could see Rias and her peerage clearly. She was so considerate, but it was not the time for that. I could see Rias glaring at me from the distance. ¡°How dare you¡­¡± Shouted Rias from afar. ¡°What?¡± I asked Rias shortly as I crossed my arms. She walked towards me while shouting. ¡°How dare you kill Koneko!!¡± RaizarP Author Here~ More than 55 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks to the new Squad Leader!! - Michael - Neo Saber Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 56 – Red vs Black ''That idiot!'' I shouted inside my mind as I looked at angry Rias. Her peerage''s members were also looked at me as if I am their worst enemy. Did Rias can''t feel Shirone''s Rook in Sona''s hand ¡­ no, she can feel it that was why she got angry! She thought that I killed Shirone and that was why her evil piece was now in Sona''s hand. She had never expected me to successfully extracted the evil piece without harming Shirone. She just got back to this school a few minutes ago, and she had yet to ask around the school. So Rias choose to attack me before she collected information¡­ Damn fool! I should''ve brought Sona with me so she can explain the situation. But looking at this situation, I had two options. Defending myself and asking for compensation, or beating her up and made the enemy of Sirzechs. I could fight Sirzechs. I am confident to fight him, but winning against him is another matter. I only had one way to injure him, and that attack need me to sacrifice my defense like what I did to Vali a week ago. I have not achieved my balance breaker, so right now I could only evade the attack from Sirzechs if we fought. Not only that, I had not mastered Matoi yet, I can''t bring my full potential. In this case, the former option would be better. I stood in front of Hagoromo Gitsune and shouted back at Rias, "What are you saying?! You said I killed Shirone? Are you insane?!" Unfortunately, Rias didn''t believe what I said and launched another ball of destruction to me. Akeno who stood behind her also somehow was in her Miko outfit and send lightning towards me. No other choice huh, I need to do that after all. First, beat them up. Second, talk to them. I knew Sirzechs was a siscon, but he will certainly understand what happened. I called my Nenekirimaru and slashed both the ball of destruction and the lighting at the same time. When I looked over my shoulder to Hagoromo Gitsune to make sure that she was okay, I saw her frowned and readied her fan to attack. I didn''t stop her and she swung her fan, creating a whirlwind that cut the clothes of Rias and her peerage''s members. A small cut also appeared in their body. As the whirlwind passed them, Issei jumped in front of Rias and rushed towards me. "You!!!!" He shouted as his boosted gear appeared in his left hand. [Boost!] He threw a punch at me with his left hand which I blocked with my Nenekirimaru. When we were interlocked with each other, I kicked him away from me. His punch was stronger than a few days ago, but it was still weaker than Vali. I was still in my human form, well I don''t need to transform to my youkai form to defeat them now. Issei was getting ready to rush at me again after he managed to stop himself. But, he did something unexpected. A white ball with a red glow appeared in front of Issei''s left hand and he shouted as he punched the right ball. "This is for Koneko!! Dragon Shot!!" As he punched the ball, a red beam was shot in my direction. The beam contained the dragon''s power, so that was his Dragon Shot! I prepared myself to slash the beam, but Hagoromo Gitsune stepped in front of me first. "Let me. Those imbeciles were attacking this Hagoromo Gitsune. I will be a laughing stock of my subordinates if I hide behind Nura." Nine white tails appeared from her rear and she pulled a sword from one of her tails. She swung her sword at the incoming beam and slashed it into two. The beam disappeared into thin air and Rias''s group was surprised. I bet they never expected that the girl who was walking with me was a nine-tailed fox youkai. Rias looked at us with a surprised expression before she called out to Issei. "Issei, come back here." Issei looked back at Rias and shouted, "Why, Buchou?! I really wanted to punch him for killing Koneko!" "Just come back here, Issei!" Shouted Rias with more intensity. Issei grunted and walked back to Rias while looking at us. No, she was glaring at Hagoromo Gitsune and wary about her. "You¡­ how can a nine-tailed youkai with him? No, who are you? Are you Yasaka from west youkai faction?" Asked Rias as she looked at me. I was spreading my senses earlier, and I could feel Sona rushing from her office towards us. This was a perfect scene, I really wanted to get her once, but since the one who was attacked first was Hagoromo Gitsune, well let''s leave it at her until Sona arrived. Hagoromo Gitsune put her sword back and her tail retracted again, leaving her holding only her bag in her left hand. She looked at Rias with intrigued expression instead of anger for being attacked and said with a sweet voice. "Who am I is not that important, and why am I with him is not that important either. I shall ask you, why did you attack me?" Rias was getting frustrated and she was frowning. Her peerage members were still ready to attack us at any time, but they were also wary of Hagoromo Gitsune. Nine-tailed fox youkai that was known were Yasaka and Kunou. No one knew about Hagoromo Gitsune aside from East Youkai Faction. We hadn''t informed the West Youkai Clan about Hagoromo Gitsune yet, my old man said it was a surprise for Yasaka. I agreed with him and I decided to hide Hagoromo Gitsune''s existence from them. That was why Rias was shocked right now. I bet that was why she thought Hagoromo Gitsuna was Yasaka. Rias bit her lips and shouted, "That man, he killed one of my peerage members named Koneko. What''s wrong with me attacking him?!" Hagoromo Gitsune looked at me for a second. But, seeing my calm expression she smiled and looked at Rias. I had a bad feeling about this¡­ "This man killed one of your slaves, huh? Why do you care that much? This man was a yakuza, one additional headcount is nothing." That''s not wrong but she made the matter worsened. Well, not that Rias could beat Hagoromo Gitsune though. So I made my sword disappear and stood silently watching them. "As expected, so he really kill Koneko! I will kill both of you!" Said Rias as she gathered the power of destruction on both of her hands. Hagoromo Gitsune''s response towards Rias was she just took out her fan. She covered her mouth with her fand and stood silently while saying to me. "This world is interesting, I shall ask you about more things later. I wanted to test the strength of the so-called devil in this world." I crossed my arms and smiled, "Do whatever you want, just don''t kill her. She was the one who attacked first, so you can at least leave her in an injured state. Her brother is troublesome you know? I need to gather my strength first if I wanted to defeat his brother in his full strength." "I am good at it, don''t worry about it." Answered Hagoromo Gitsune as she licked her lips. RaizarP Author Here~ More than 55 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks to the new Squad Leader!! - LK123 - Gilles Hanson - Rafael Souza Santos - Bert Torres Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 57 – Hagoromo Gitsune Display After Hagoromo Gitsune decided to take things by herself, I retreated a few steps to give her the space needed to confront Rias and her peerage. She held her fan in her right hand and her bag in her left hand. If I remember correctly, she could also pull the weapon that was in her tail from her bag, such is her mysterious power. Hagoromo Gitsune stepped forward towards Rias and her peerage. When she stepped forward, a chain appeared on her bag and entangled it in her left hand. This is interesting, did Hagoromo Gitsune create a new technique? I wanted to know the extent of her power right now. Hagoromo Gitsune walked toward Rias and her peerage with a smile and said, ¡°Are you afraid of me? How funny.¡± Right now Rias only had Akeno, Kiba, and Issei as her ally. There was Gasper too, but he was still locked in the old school building. I looked at Rias and saw her gritting her teeth. She looked at Hagoromo Gitsune with a frown while talking with Akeno about something. From her lip¡¯s movement, I guess she was talking about how to take Hagoromo Gitsune down. When they stopped talking, I could hear a loud voice from Issei¡¯s boosted gear. [Boost!] At that moment, I knew exactly what they planned. Using Issei¡¯s boost, Rias wanted to take Hagoromo Gitsune down with her power of destruction or abbreviated as POD. Without minding their plan, Hagoromo Gitsune still walked relaxedly towards them. When Hagoromo Gitsune was about to take her 10th step, Kiba suddenly leaped towards her and slashed his sword vertically. Hagoromo Gitsune was looking at Kiba with a rather impressed expression. Maybe she was impressed with Kiba¡¯s speed, or she was impressed with Kiba¡¯s skill at his age. But, that only lasted for a second. She smiled again as if nothing happened and took Kiba¡¯s slash with her fan. Seeing his slash blocked by a fan, Kiba was surprised for a moment before he sent a barrage of slashes towards Hagoromo Gitsune. Kiba stepped left, right and even tried to slash her from behind. All of that was for nothing though. Hagoromo Gitsune intercepted Kiba¡¯s slashes with one hand only without even following his movement. ¡°What a boorish man, you followed a certain pattern of attack. That was too easy to block compared to some idiot without proper sword training.¡± Ridiculed Hagoromo Gitsune. ¡°What do you know about me?!¡± After he said that, Kiba jumped back to gain a distance while Issei kept boosting himself. [Boost!] That was Issei¡¯s third boost, I guessed that he will send that energy to Rias and Akeno after 5th boost. Kiba was serving as an obstruction and he will stall Hagoromo Gitsune¡¯s time as much as possible. Unfortunately, Hagoromo Gitsune was an experienced fighter and schemer. ¡°Boring, I tell you.¡± Hagoromo Gitsune raised her right hand while holding the fan and brought it down in a fast swing. Her swing created a fury blade of wind that was shot towards Kiba at a fast speed. I could see his feet were about to move, but then he remembered that behind him was Rias and the other. Kiba gritted his teeth and stabbed his sword to the ground and shouted, ¡°Sword Birth!¡± Dozens of swords appeared from the ground in front of him and blocked the wind blade that was created from Hagoromo Gitsune¡¯s attack. When the blade of wind collided with Kiba¡¯s Sword Birth, it destroyed a lot of swords instantly before it stopped by the last sword that stood in front of Kiba. But, Kiba still received damage from the rest of the wind blade that can¡¯t be blocked. His upper left arm was slashed slightly and blood flows from the wound. He grunted in pain but he ultimately still raised his sword to protect his friend behind him. [Boost!] With that sound, Issei shouted, ¡°I can¡¯t anymore!¡± ¡°You did a good job Issei, leave the rest to me!¡± Said Rias as she smiled confidently. Hagoromo Gitsune was looking at them with a curious gaze. She must be thinking about the foolishness of the enemy in front of her. Why did the red-haired girl had smiled confidently all of a sudden? That must be flashed in her mind. I was about to warn Hagoromo Gitsune, but then I remembered something. The MC in Nurarihyon no Mago can¡¯t even defeat Hagoromo Gitsune without Matoi, that was why I didn¡¯t warn her and just watched them with a smile on my face. At that moment, I could feel Sona exiting the building and making her way towards us. This will be the last attack from Rias I guess. When Sona arrived, the fight would be over, with Rias on the ground if I guessed correctly. Hagoromo Gitsune nine tails appeared from her back, a sign that she was wary about the attack. She could block it with her fan if she enlarges it, but I guess she took safety measures because she didn¡¯t know what their plan is. With a swift movement, Hagoromo Gitsune rushed towards Kiba and stabbed his stomach with one of her tails. Kiba was shouting in pain and Rias shouted from behind. ¡°Kiba!!! Issei, now!¡± [Transfer!] Issei transferred the energy from his boosted gear towards Rias and Akeno. At that moment, Rias made a big power of destruction ball and Akeno flew with her wings as lightning appeared around her body. ¡°I will make you pay!¡± As Rias shouted that, she sent the POD ball towards Hagoromo Gitsune. At the same time, Akeno laughed and she made a gesture with her right hand. Suddenly, a big lightning bolt hit Hagoromo Gitsune in her track. Hagoromo Gitsune didn¡¯t expect it, so she didn¡¯t dodge the lightning. She instead surrounded her body with her tail to block the lightning. Rias and Akeno had a big smile on their face as they watched the POD ball almost hit Hagoromo Gitsune. But, at that moment a cross spear appeared from the gap of Hagoromo Gitsune¡¯s tail and stabbed the POD ball. The ball instantly stopped and slowly disappeared into thin air. When the ball disappeared, Hagoromo Gitsune retracted the spear and so did her tails. She stood in the spot without any bruise as she opened her fan in front of her face. ¡°Was that your best attack? Then allow me to show my attack.¡± As Hagoromo Gitsune said that, she enlarged her fan and swung it from the left to the right. As her fan moved from left to right, the ground that was in the fan¡¯s path was gouged and destroyed because of the swing. Rias, Akeno, and Issei were blown away from the blast too. I bet they had a few broken bones here and there. But, the destruction of Hagoromo Gitsune''s attack was less than what I remembered from her fight with Nura Rikuo. I remembered that she destroy the top side of the castle she was in at that time. So she did hold back as she said. I looked at Kiba and saw him bleeding from the wound in his stomach, but Hagoromo Gitsune missed his vital so he would be fine after Asia healed him. Come to think of it, Asia was not here. Where was she? As I thought that, Hagoromo Gitsune walked back towards me and said, ¡°It¡¯s done, I will go back first.¡± I nodded at her and said, ¡°Leave the rest to me. I will give them a stern talk. Also, good job.¡± ¡°It was natural.¡± Leaving those words, Hagoromo Gitsune walked away and went back to my apartment. She was in her normal state now, the chain and her fan disappeared and she just looked like a normal human. RaizarP Author Here~ More than 55 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks to the new Squad Leader!! - Edwin - ace casseus - Chase Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 58 – Realizing a Fact After waiting for a few seconds, I saw Sona rushing towards my direction with Tsubaki. As she saw what happened in the school ground in front of me, she shouted. ¡°What happened here?!¡± She approached me and stopped in front of me as she glared at me with a serious face. ¡°Why don¡¯t we ask the one who started all of this?¡± I said as I walked towards Rias that was blown away by Hagoromo Gitsune¡¯s attack. As I had expected, they were injured but they were still conscious. Sona followed me from behind while looking around at the disastrous scene that happened because of Hagoromo Gitsune¡¯s attack. ¡°How can it escalate to this point? I¡¯ve asked one of my peerage members to call Asia from the underworld to prepare for an emergency, she will arrive in a minute or so.¡± ¡°That¡¯s good then, but I still need to ask your friend why did she attack me and my friend without asking us anything. You do understand how bad the situation is if her attack towards me was known to the Sirzechs, right?¡± I approached Rias that was lying unconscious on the ground and checked her condition. A few broken ribs and bruises all over her body. With her healing factor, then she would be fine after a few days or so. Akeno and Issei were also just had some broken bones here and there, nothing serious. Kiba had the most serious injuries though, his stomach was pierced by Hagoromo Gitsune¡¯s tail after all. I looked at Sona and said. ¡°Maybe your Queen could administer first aid to Kiba? His injuries were the most serious amongst them.¡± Sona nodded her head and instructed Tsubaki to care for Kiba. She had a smile on her face as she run towards Kiba without any second thought. Now, let¡¯s take care of them and tell them to leave the town. Her misunderstanding almost caused a war, thankfully Hagoromo Gitsune was here. ¡°What will you do now, Nura?¡± Sona asked me with a worried tone. She must¡¯ve had understood the situation and she was worried about the future course of youkai. ¡°The one that was attacked first was my friend, Hagoromo Gitsune. Her position in youkai is a bit tricky, you know? She is my friend, my guest, and a leader of her own army. A strong army that rivaled mine.¡± I didn¡¯t lie. Hagoromo Gitsune¡¯s Hyakki Yakkou was strong, ¡°So, after this girl regained her consciousness, contact me. For now, I will go back to my house.¡± Sona had a relieved face, but I quickly added, ¡°Don¡¯t misunderstand. I won¡¯t let this matter end like this. No matter what her reason was, she attacked me and my friend with her power of destruction. If I was weaker than her, I would die from it. Thankfully I am strong. So, just contact me when she regained her consciousness.¡± After I said that, I walked away from Sona and the unconscious Rias while waving my hand without looking at Sona. After I was at a distance away from her, I shouted. ¡°You better scold her or punch her one time, you know? It was her fault for attacking me, not yours!¡± I left the school ground with a smile on my face. I bet Rias would be scolded by Sona and she would be called back to her house. Also, because Rias had made a lot of mess by attacking me and Hagoromo Gitsune without asking anything, Sirzechs will make a move. With his personality and position as Satan, he will do his best to avoid a war with Youkai. If by chance a war broke out between Youkai and Devils, the Shinto faction will certainly make a move to help Youkai and that will put the Devils at a disadvantage. But, because the ones who were attacked were me and Hagoromo Gitsune, I was not that angry. Maybe¡­ just maybe I will ask for something that will help my subordinate and myself at the same time. In other words, I will wring his pocket dry. ¡°Took you long enough.¡± I heard Hagoromo Gitsune¡¯s voice from my right. I turned to the voice and saw her leaning against the wall with her arms crossed. ¡°Have you been waiting for me? How thoughtful of you.¡± I said as I walked the street towards my apartment. Hagoromo Gitsune walked by my side with a smile on her face, ¡°My, I was waiting for you and that was what you said?¡± ¡°Hahaha, you left the aftermath to me, so it should be you thanking me, no?¡± ¡°What are you saying, I was the one who defeat them-¡± When Hagoromo Gitsune was about to brag, I cut her off. ¡°When I was about to defeat them myself. Well, it turns out alright so I think I owe you praise.¡± ¡°I don¡¯t need it, but well. They were weak.¡± Hagoromo Gitsune said as she raised her right hand. ¡°Way too weak.¡± I shrugged my shoulder as I let out a little sigh, ¡°What can I say, she was not a fighter. No, more accurately, she was hiding behind her brother¡¯s position.¡± ¡°Now that you mention it, you said that her brother is bothersome, why?¡± Hagoromo Gitsune looked at me with a serious face as she said that. ¡°The Nurarihyon and his descendants that I knew would never said that. They were stupid, reckless, but they are brave. Even the old bastard came to my castle by himself just to meet me.¡± My smile fell from my face as Hagoromo Gitsune said that. That was right. Why did I ever think of someone to be bothersome? Somehow, something changed since I had arrived in this town. Was it because I had understood about the war? Was it since my old man told me about going to this town? But, before long I smiled again as I realized it. That¡¯s right, I am strong. Why did I act like a coward and always tread the path carefully? That was not Nurarihyon Youkai style. I closed my right eye and looked at Hagoromo Gitsune. ¡°Thanks, you opened my eyes. That was right, why did I ever think of backing down before a fight?¡± ¡°Then you know the rest of it.¡± Said Hagoromo Gitsune as she walked faster. I laughed at her with how she tried acting as if she didn¡¯t care about me. But I knew it, she wouldn¡¯t say that if she was really indifferent about me. It seems I owe her one. Hesitation really didn''t suit Nurarihyon Youkai, huh. I guess that was true. Let''s just do as I please. RaizarP Author Here~ More than 55 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 59 – Tsuchigumo 3rd POV Inside a luxurious room with a king-sized bed, Rias grunted in pain as she tried to open her eyes. She looked around the room and saw Sona sitting on the chair on her left while reading a book. ¡°Have you woken up?¡± Sona said as she raised her head and closed the book in her hands. ¡°Sona¡­ ugh¡­ what happened? Where are we?¡± Sona looked at Rias with a serious expression, ¡°We are in my mansion. You have made a grave mistake, Rias. Why did you attack that man?¡± Rias then remembered what happened and she bit her lips in frustration, ¡°Koneko¡­ That man killed her.¡± ¡°No, she¡¯s alive. You didn¡¯t even try to ask him like what he said, huh. This was entirely your fault, Rias.¡± ¡°What do you mean she¡¯s alive! I could feel Koneko¡¯s evil piece taken out of her!¡± Sona just silently looked at Rias before she took a red Rook from her pocket, ¡°Here.¡± Sona placed the Rook on Rias¡¯s hand and continued. ¡°That Man, Nura, said that he had a way to separate the evil piece safely. We don¡¯t know anything about him, but why did you doubt him? It was your fault for not allowing Koneko to leave your peerage after your Rating Game. Koneko was angry towards you, that was why she went to that man and asked for help.¡± Rias gripped the Rook that Sona gave her with her left hand and covered her face with her right hand, ¡°What did I do wrong? I just wanted to protect her.¡± Sona sighed as she stood from her chair and walked towards the table that had a teapot and 2 cups on top of it. She poured the tea into one of the cups and sipped the tea from the cup. She looked at Rias, her friend and rival before saying. ¡°First, you told her that you won¡¯t allow her to leave your peerage without explaining your reason. Two, you didn¡¯t believe Nura who was tasked to watch over the city WHERE two of Satan¡¯s siblings oversee it. Don¡¯t you ever think that it was strange? Why did the boy of our age was given a task to watch over two of us? That was because he had the ability to do the task, and you broke your promise with him.¡± ¡°But no one could remove the evil piece safely except for the King and Ajuka Beelzebub-sama! There is no way I could trust him!¡± Shouted Rias at Sona. ¡°That¡¯s why I asked Lucifer-sama and unfortunately I must ask my Sister too to withdraw you from Kuoh Town. You were ordered to go back to the underworld, Rias. At least until you could calm yourself. Lucifer-sama will make a visit towards the Youkai to apologize for your behavior. You attacked not only the son of the East Youkai Faction¡¯s leader, but also a leader of a strong Youkai group according to Nura. And if Nura said that someone is strong, that meant they are strong, at least Ultimate Class.¡± Rias was surprised but she then bit her lips. The girl that she attacked with Nura Riku, she could defeat her peerage without much issue with just a single fan! ¡°What should I do¡­ Sona?¡± ¡°Calm yourself. You just made your biggest mistake in your life, and that will cost you greatly.¡± ¡°I know!¡± Rias raised her voice as she got off her bed. She walked towards Sona and slammed both of her hands on the table. ¡°I know it! But, with this, I can¡¯t escape it¡­ The Rating game, I will definitely lose.¡± After that, Rias slumped on the ground and yelled in anger. Sona watched over her friend''s pitiful appearance as she kept consoling her. *** 1st POV After getting back in my apartment with Hagoromo Gitsune, I asked her something that made me wondering since I first met with the Youkai from another world. ¡°Did Tsuchigumo transported here too?¡± ¡°That, I don¡¯t know. But, I think he was transported here too.¡± Answered Hagoromo Gitsune as she frowned. ¡°That would be a problem, right?¡± ¡°If he didn¡¯t do anything, then it¡¯s no problem. Or maybe he was killed by a strong god or something when he wrecked around their home?¡± ¡°If you are so interested in him, why don¡¯t you try to find him? ¡°Hmm, I will. How about you, would you come with me or go back to Kanto?¡± Hagoromo Gitsune stood from the couch and said, ¡°I will sleep. Go do your own thing.¡± She went to the bedroom and closed the door behind her. Well, let¡¯s look at Tsuchigumo. I transformed into my Youkai form and teleported to Kyoto this time to try to find a big tree in the mountain area. If I remember correctly, Tsuchigumo youkai had made their base under a big tree because of their size and behavior. I shrouded myself in fear and used Meikyo Shisui. I had not told Yasaka about coming here to Kyoto, so I will move silently and quietly to find Tsuchigumo. But, I had prepared myself for a fight with Tsuchigumo if the need arise. The sky had turned orange, it was the best time to find him. I was not confident with this one. I remembered his fear and his name. The Destroyer of Hyakki Yakkou, a youkai that his Fear itself embroidered his title. I was excited, and I can¡¯t wait anymore. Even if the fight resulted in me depleting my energy, it would be worth it if Tsuchigumo joined me. I tried to find Tsuchigumo in the mountain, but after an hour of searching, it was no use. I couldn¡¯t find him, and I had found no trail about him. Maybe he was in the other city, but Kyoto was my best bet. With no other option, I risk myself to be found and spread my senses, covering Kyoto entirely. I could feel Yasaka¡¯s body twitching when my senses passed her, I guess she had found me, but she kept doing her thing without even moving from her position. I kept searching after that, and finally, I managed to find a big energy bulb that came from the opposite direction of the mountain. The energy came from Nijo Castle and I hurried to make my way over there. After a few minutes of running, I finally arrived at Nijo castle and entered it. As I had expected, a big youkai with 6 arms was sitting in the middle of Nijo castle while blowing a big smoke pipe. His face was like a Hanya mask, and his red long hair made him look terrifying. The reason why humans and the other youkai didn¡¯t find Tsuchigumo maybe because he had hidden his presence. I will not be able to find him too without spreading my senses to the limit, but now I found him. Tsuchigumo realized me and looked down at me, ¡°Look who we have here. I had never expected a youkai with your hairstyle to exist in this place.¡± I walked towards him with my arms crossed as I smiled and closed my right eye, ¡°Well, a certain fox told me about you. You are strong, how about joining my Hyakki Yakkou?¡± Tsuchigumo looked at me blankly for a second before he burst out in laughter, ¡°Hahahahaha, Interesting! A certain fox, huh. Must be Hagoromo Gitsune!¡± Tsuchigumo stood up and jumped a little, creating a tremor all over the place. I could feel Yasaka running frantically in her castle, maybe because she had realized Tsuchigumo¡¯s presence in this place and the small earthquake that was created from Tsuchigumo¡¯s jump. But for now, I shrunk my senses to only feel the area around this Nijo Castle and focused on Tsuchigumo. He smirked at me while his three left arms gesturing me to come at him, ¡°If you wanted me to join your Hyakki Yakkou, you must earn my respect. And I only respect a strong person!¡± I called out my Nenekirimaru and held it with both of my hands while pointing its tip towards Tsuchigumo. ¡°Well, why don¡¯t we try it?¡± RaizarP Author Here~ More than 55 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks to the new Squad Leader!! - Brandon Wilson - Kimaris Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 60 – Bond with Fight ¡°I am Tsuchigumo, I hope you give me a good fight, or I will be disappointed!¡± ¡°Introducing ourselves first, okay. I am Nura Riku, the next Lord of Pandemonium.¡± After I introduced myself, Tsuchigumo stopped moving for a second before his mask-like mouth curved upward into a smile. He then spewed a white thread from his mouth, making a makeshift ring around us. This meant he wanted to have one on one fight, good enough. ¡°Nura, huh. Don¡¯t disappoint me! Where is your Hyakki Yakkou? I remembered Nura¡¯s strongest technique, he need his Hyakki Yakkou to do it!¡± I relaxed my stance and tapped my sword against my shoulder as I said, ¡°He¡¯s too weak then. Against you, me alone is enough.¡± ¡°Hahahahaha, let¡¯s prove it!¡± Tsuchigumo rushed towards me and swung his pipe down at me. I dodged his attack by stepping sideways to the left, but he sent a punch with his second right hand as soon as I stepped to the left. A grin was plastered on my face and I jumped upward to dodge his punch. As I jumped, I swung my sword at the incoming punch and managed to slash Tsuchigumo¡¯s second hand. That slash was deep enough as the spiritual energy of Tsuchigumo gushing out from the wound. But, he didn¡¯t care about that and sent a barrage of punches towards me. Because I was in the middle of the air, I was not able to move freely. I created a foothold using my youjutsu and jumped around the air to dodge his punches. Tsuchigumo¡¯s punch was packed with a lot of strength, each time he punched, a part of the castle was destroyed. The ring that was made from his thread wasn¡¯t affected though. While I was dodging his attack, I occasionally send a slash aimed at his hand. Now, his hands were full of slashes wound that was gushing out a little spiritual energy from his body. ¡°Hahahahaha, don¡¯t keep dodging like that!¡± As Tsuchigumo shouted that, he jumped back to gain a distance before leaping towards me with his left hands positioned in front of his body. He was tackling me with his enormous body, but unfortunately for him, I had used Meikyo Shisui all this time. I changed my technique and used Kyouka Suigetsu. Because I was in the air, I instantly jumped down while leaving a fake body in the air to fool Tsuchigumo. But, he was not fooled that easily, when he was near my fake, he realized it and increased his speed. Tsuchigumo¡¯s body made contact with my Fake, it was bursting into a black cloud. When Tsuchigumo¡¯s body crashed into his thread, and suddenly he changed his direction as he bounced back. His physical ability was truly amazing! Maybe he was at the level of an evil dragon, or maybe even Crom Cruach if it was a physical ability alone. I used Touki and increased my physical ability to the maximum. I stood in my place as I looked at Tsuchigumo that approached me at a high speed. I called Nenekirimaru sheath and held it with my left hand as I sheathed Nenekirimaru back. I lowered my stance as my right hand was positioned on top of Nenekirimaru¡¯s handle and my left hand still holding its sheath tightly. When I saw Tsuchigumo was almost reaching me, I dashed forward as I draw Nenekirimaru instantly from its sheath. I could feel Nenekirimaru made contact with Tsuchigumo¡¯s hand and it went through easily. As we passed each other, loud thuds were heard three-time. As soon as I heard the thuds sound, I turned to look towards Tsuchigumo and I finally realized something. My left hand was injured too. Tsuchigumo¡¯s attack managed to graze my left hand and left a bad bruise and destroyed the left sleeves of my clothes. I saw Tsuchigumo was looking down at his three arms that were on the ground before he laughed, ¡°Haahahahaha, This is great!¡± Tsuchigumo picked his arm and attached it back to his body one by one. As he attached one arm, he spitted on the wound and it instantly attached back like normal. He did it three times as I just looked at him while healing my left arm with Senjutsu. As he finished attaching his arms back, I also finished healing myself with Senjutsu. Tsuchigumo turned at me while picking his pipe that was thrown because of his punches at the beginning of our fight. He put the pipe into his mouth and sat down. ¡°You are good, but it seems you were holding back. I must say that you were the first, no, the third strongest youkai that I knew. First being Seimei, second being Hagoromo Gitsune, and you were third! Assuming the strength that you used earlier was your full strength that is!¡± Because he was relaxed, I approached him and sat in front of him as I put Nenekirimaru back to its sheath and held it with my left hand. ¡°You said it yourself, I was holding back. I am stronger than Hagoromo Gitsune because I had seen her strength myself. I don¡¯t know about Seimei though.¡± ¡°Is that so? It seems interesting. Tell me, the reason why you wanted me in your Hyakki Yakkou. I have never joined a Hyakki Yakkou before because I am strong. And I must admit, you are strong! You gained my respect.¡± ¡°The thing is like this, Tsuchigumo. I heard from Hagoromo Gitsune about something that you like.¡± Tsuchigumo was surprised when I said that. He put one of his right hands on his chin and leaned a little towards me to hear my word clearer. ¡°I¡¯m listening. A Nura was talking with Hagoromo Gitsune, you are the first.¡± ¡°I heard you love to fight. Especially with a strong opponent, or against an army. This is the deal. I have a big fight coming to me. I estimated the enemy would bring around 3000 fallen angels. I will explain about fallen angels to you later if you don¡¯t know about it.¡± ¡°Kukuku¡­ Hahahahaha, interesting. So your enemy is an army of 3000? I¡¯m in. But, that doesn¡¯t mean I will join your Hyakki Yakkou.¡± That¡¯s enough. With Tsuchigumo joining the fight against Kokabiel, then it¡¯s enough. I can win this. I smiled at Tsuchigumo and extended my right fist. ¡°Nice to have you.¡± Tsuchigumo extended one of his right fists too and bumped it against my fist. ¡°As long as there is a good fight, you can call me anytime. I will stay in this place, just give me a head up when the army came.¡± RaizarP Author Here~ More than 55 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 61 – Aftermath of the Fight I was chatting with Tsuchigumo after our fight. Unexpectedly, he was a fun company until West Youkai Faction arrived in Nijo castle. The one who arrived was unexpectedly Kunou and a woman with black hair which I assumed was Kunou¡¯s bodyguard. She entered the Nijo Castle without worrying about anything and when Kunou saw me, she called out. ¡°Riku Onii-chan. Can you explain what happened to me?¡± She looked at Tsuchigumo with wary in her eyes, but she looked calm when she asked that. On the contrary, her bodyguard can¡¯t keep her calm and keep her guard high all the time. Especially when she saw Tsuchigumo, she immediately got into a fighting stance. Tsuchigumo just looked at her without much interest and blew his pipe without even disregarding her. I stood up and approached Kunou with a smile on my face. I put my hand on top of her head and patted her. ¡°Nothing happened, I was just talking with that big guy over there.¡± Kunou looked flustered because I suddenly patted her, but she didn¡¯t seem to mind it. She looked up at me and put her hands on top of mine that were on her head. She moved my hand away and gazed at me straight into my eyes. ¡°To be honest, Mother was surprised when you suddenly appeared in Kyoto without telling us. But knowing ¡­ your Father''s behavior she just shrugged your presence as normal and didn¡¯t mind it. It changed when she felt your energy spiked up and new energy that was close to Ultimate Class appeared in Kyoto. She was about to go herself, but I stopped her and voluntarily checked this place myself.¡± I looked at Kunou with a surprised expression. But I hide it immediately and smiled at her. Did she change because of my presence? I don¡¯t remember her being this brave in the series, but it was a good thing. I crouched to match her gaze and closed my right eye as I said, ¡°Nothing to worry about. I was trying to find a Hyakki Yakkou, and I noticed him from a friend of mine. That was why I came here.¡± Kunou smiled when I said that and said, ¡°What is your plan for later, Riku Onii-chan? If you don¡¯t mind, can you visit Mother for a while? Mother said she wanted to see you.¡± ¡°I don¡¯t mind, but why did she want to see me?¡± Kunou shooks her head at my question, ¡°I don¡¯t know, she said that someone contacted her and it related to you.¡± When Kunou said that, I immediately understood what she meant. Sirzechs had contacted me through Yasaka. Sona had reported the incident to Sirzechs and her sister, and they misunderstood Hagoromo Gitsune as Yasaka in disguise. This is a bit troublesome. Although I had no intention of keeping Hagoromo Gitsune¡¯s existence a secret, the way Yasaka knew her existence is a bit troublesome. She must¡¯ve thought that I, no, the east youkai trying to keep the existence of nine-tailed fox youkai a secret. Tsuchigumo seems to be done with smoking his pipe and he stood up. He approached me and finally stopped his gaze at Kunou. He leaned forward and looked at Kunou in close range as if he was observing prey. ¡°Hou, nine-tailed fox. Interesting, you were the second one that I knew aside from Hagoromo Gitsune. Truly interesting.¡± And as expected, Tsuchiguma didn¡¯t make my situation any better. Kunou was a bit afraid when Tsuchigumo gazed at her from a close range, and that was visible from her expression. The woman that I guessed as Kunou¡¯s bodyguard also leaped towards Kunou immediately, but she was stopped by Kunou. ¡°Hagoromo Gitsune?¡± Asked Kunou, curious about the nine-tailed fox that Tsuchigumo talked about. Tsuchigumo pulled his head away from Kunou as he said, ¡°Indeed.¡± He then sat beside me who was crouching and continued. ¡°A Youkai who reincarnated, a Fox youkai that was born with one tail, and then gave birth to the most powerful Human that I knew, Hagoromo Gitsune.¡± Kunou was interested in the story and her eyes were gleaming with curiosity. She looked up at Tsuchigumo and asked. ¡°How could a youkai give birth to a Human?¡± An innocent question, but a question that had a mysterious answer. ¡°I don¡¯t know.¡± Answered Tsuchigumo. ¡°But now, her child was killed and she was living with Nura if I guessed correctly.¡± ¡°Riku Onii-chan?!¡± Shouted Kunou, surprised by the information that Tsuchigumo gave her. Well, I didn¡¯t stop Tsuchigumo from leaking the information, as I had no intention to hide Hagoromo Gitsune from Yasaka or West Youkai Clan. Hagoromo Gitsune was also interested in Yasaka when we told her about a nine-tailed fox youkai other than her, so this is a good opportunity to introduce both of them to each other. ¡°Yes, she is in my apartment right now. We had some small scuffle with the devil earlier, she said she was tired and decided to sleep. By the way, Kunou. You said that your Mother wanted to see me? Let¡¯s go to your house.¡± ¡°Oh, that¡¯s right. Is he going to come too?¡± Asked Kunou as she looked at Tsuchigumo. ¡°Kunou-sama, I think that will be dangerous! We don¡¯t know what sort of youkai he is, I suggested that he stay here without doing anything strange!¡± Shouted Kunou¡¯s bodyguard at her. ¡°Tengu! I never allowed you to say anything!¡± Shouted Kunou back at her bodyguard. ¡°More importantly, he is part of Riku Onii-chan''s Hyakki Yakkou, right?¡± Tsuchigumo put his smoking pipe in his mouth and blew smoke from it, ¡°It seems you have misunderstood something, girl. I am not part of his Hyakki Yakkou, or be part of any Hyakki Yakkou. I am his ally, but that was because he has earned my respect!¡± Kunou looked at Tsuchigumo with a smile and said, ¡°That¡¯s enough. Though, I hope if you don¡¯t do anything strange in this place.¡± ¡°I won¡¯t, girl. But, if there is any strong fighter asking me for a fight, I won¡¯t say no.¡± ¡°I will say that to Mother. Maybe one or two Youkai will come here to challenge you.¡± Answered Kunou. Tsuchigumo smiled when she heard Kunou and laughed, ¡°Sure, that¡¯s fine. I will wait for it.¡± Kunou nodded her head and looked at me, ¡°Shall we go now, Riku Onii-chan?¡± I crossed my arms and looked at Kunou with a smile, ¡°Sure, let¡¯s meet Yasaka.¡± RaizarP Author Here~ More than 55 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks for the new Squad Leader!! - BenitoZ Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 62 – Letter from Satan I was escorted by Kunou and her bodyguard to Yasaka¡¯s residence. Tsuchigumo choose to stay at Nijo Castle after he was promised by Kunou that she will tell some youkai about his existence and they could visit him if they wanted a fight. I thought I knew the reason why Yasaka wanted to meet me though, and that was why I agreed to meet her. Because Kyoto was beautiful and we had a lot of time to meet Yasaka as Kunou said that Yasaka just wanted to meet me and it was not an urgent matter. That was why we decided to walk around Kyoto before I met Yasaka. I turned back to my human form and Kunou hid her tails. We just looked like normal humans from the other perspectives. Well, I got a chance to walk around with Kunou. I told her about me trying to assemble my Hyakki Yakkou and managed to invite a lot of strong Youkai. Then she was curious about Hagoromo Gitsune that Tsuchigumo talked about earlier. Regarding that topic, I said that I will tell Yasaka first, as this matter was a bit problematic to their faction. If another nine-tailed fox youkai was found, I bet the West Youkai Faction which had problematic internal affairs would be divided into 2 factions. Not only that, I guessed Hagoromo Gitsune would be interested in taking over Kyoto and jumped ship to the other faction. Well, I didn¡¯t know about the latter, but the former most likely happened if Hagoromo Gitsune¡¯s existence was widely known. It would be great if she declared something alongside the line of being a member of my Hyakki Yakkou. But, her pride surely won¡¯t allow that. After walking for a few minutes, we have arrived at the temple where Yasaka resides. Yasaka was waiting for us in front of the temple gate with an elephant youkai standing behind her¡­ wait, what? When Yasaka saw me and Kunou, she smiled and approached us. ¡°Kunou, good job my dear.¡± Getting a compliment from her mother, Kunou smiled as she closed her eyes, ¡°It was no problem, Mother. I have brought Riku Onii-chan as you requested!¡± ¡°I know.¡± Said Yasaka as she petted Kunou¡¯s head. I took back my word, Kunou was still acting like 14 years old. She was just trying to appear mature in front of other people, but she instantly reverted back to her true self in front of her Mother. Well, at least she tried to act mature to not embarrass her Mother. That itself was good enough, instead of being childish all the time. After petting Kunou¡¯s head for a while, Yasaka turned to me, ¡°Riku, should we go inside now? There was a letter sent to me from the Underworld, I have yet to read it, but it was addressed to you. For some reason, it was sent here instead of your mansion.¡± I raised my eyebrows at her words and asked, ¡°Why?¡± Yasaka crossed her arms under her boobs and made them jiggle and looked at me with a smile on her face. ¡°The messenger said that he was stopped before he entered East Faction territory by a youkai with a big body with tanned skin and grey hair that said ¡®This is the territory of Nura Clan! As the head of the attacker squad from Nura Clan, I order you to leave!¡¯ or so the messenger said.¡± I understood what happened. I must talk to them later, or they will repeat it in the future. I laughed wryly at Yasaka¡¯s word and said. ¡°They were new, I will tell them about the courtesy to get a messenger later.¡± ¡°New, huh. Well, let¡¯s have a talk inside.¡± As she said that, Yasaka turned around and entered the Temple. Kunou and her bodyguard followed her from behind and I also followed her. She entered the meeting room where I met Amaterasu last time and took a seat in the farthest one. Kunou sat beside her while the bodyguard was waiting outside of the room. She was not allowed to enter because of her position and the fact that Kunou didn¡¯t need any further protection. When I took a seat in front of her, Yasaka immediately said, ¡°Now, here is the letter that was addressed to you.¡± She pulled a brown envelope from her cleavage and gave it to me. I gained some immunity towards breasts because of Kuroka and Tsura, but as a man, my gaze was still glued to Yasaka¡¯s movement. It was not something that I could control, it was an instinct. But, because this was a rather serious situation, I tried my best to look only at the letter. I took the letter from Yasaka¡¯s hand and as I had expected, the sender was Devil Faction. I frowned as I looked at the letter, was this a declaration of war? ¡°I have heard what happened this afternoon. And I know you just acted in self-defense¡­ or your friend just acted in self-defense.¡± Said Yasaka in a joking tone. It seems that she had realized Hagoromo Gitsune¡¯s existence. Well, she was connected to the leyline and acted as the center of the leyline, there was nothing I could do. Especially after Hagoromo Gitsune beat Rias and her peerage. Of course, a rumor would go out from the Devil Faction and then to the other Factions. I ignored Yasaka for now and tore the brown envelope that I held. Inside the envelope was a piece of paper, I took it out and read it. I was expecting something alongside haughty writing from the Devil¡¯s elder, but unexpectedly the sender was Sirzechs himself. Yasaka and Kunou were curious about the letter as they looked at me without saying anything, that was why I read the letter loud enough for them to hear. ¡°Hello, Nura Riku. My name is Sirzechs Lucifer. The reason why I sent this letter was I wanted to apologize for my Sister¡¯s behavior. Sona Sitri had explained the details to me, and it was purely my Sister¡¯s fault for attacking you without hearing your explanation. But, I hope you can understand her situation for now and forgive her. I will add one more Phoenix Tears to your house later as a gift for my Sister¡¯s behavior. I hope we can meet in a later day, Lucifer.¡± That was¡­ unexpected. He asked for forgiveness for his sister and didn¡¯t blame me even a little bit. I didn¡¯t mind, or rather, I didn¡¯t care if Rias attacked me as she can¡¯t do anything to me. But, getting a gift from Sirzechs was enough to compensate for her attack. But, as he didn¡¯t put compensation in his letter, that meant he was expecting me to ask for something from him. This is a big plus for me, as I had something that I wanted to ask from him. ¡°So the matter was settled?¡± Asked Yasaka. I nodded my head at Yasaka and smiled at her, ¡°I was never expecting an apology from the Devils.¡± ¡°To be honest, me too. But, this could be a sign, that the Devils tried to gain peace.¡± Answered Yasaka. ¡°Well, it¡¯s good, right?¡± I said as I closed my right eye. ¡°It was good, indeed. Now, let¡¯s talk about your friend, shall we?¡± Yasaka closed her eyes and gave me her biggest smile. For some reason, when I saw her smile, I could see that she was mad at me. But! That didn¡¯t affect me even one bit. ¡°Hahahaha, sure. About my friend, Hagoromo Gitsune, the nine-tailed fox youkai.¡± RaizarP Author Here~ More than 55 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks for the new Squad Leader!! - Noctis 117 Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 63 – Talk with Yasaka ¡°That was what I am asking. How can there be a nine-tailed fox youkai in your territory? No, how can there be another one besides me and Kunou?¡± Asked Yasaka as she looked at me seriously. ¡°About that, it seems she came from beyond the dimensional gap. The so-called alternative universe, or another world. She was sent here by a powerful existence, and she hid herself since 2 years ago until I found her village a week ago.¡± Yasaka was flabbergasted by my explanation. I didn¡¯t tell a lie, I just twisted the fact a little bit to make her believe my story. Dimensional Gap was a mysterious place where Great Red roamed around freely, and no creatures were able to stay in Dimensional Gap for so long. It was not called Dimensional Gap for nothing, so the story concerning another world beyond the Gap was something that could be believed by the Supernaturals in this world. Yasaka¡¯s reaction was natural, as she never heard about another world too. ¡°I am curious about her strength. Tell me, Riku-han. How strong is she compared to me?¡± This is a rather tough question. To be honest, I only knew her rough strength when comparing her to me or my old man. Not only that, I don¡¯t know how strong Yasaka is. I put my right hand on my chin and stroked it, ¡°Hmm, it¡¯s hard to tell. If she fought my old man, then I think my old man will win. But, he will suffer serious injury from what I heard from Hagoromo Gitsune. When she saw my old man for the first time, she was surprised. Then she said something alongside gouging Nurarihyon¡¯s heart in another world.¡± Yasaka''s eyes were widened in surprise, and so was Kunou. Maybe she never expected something like that. My old man in this world is indeed strong because of his Fear, but Hagoromo Gitsune had Fear too and could cut my old man¡¯s Fear with her¡¯s. That was the weakness that didn¡¯t present in this world as most Youkai used Youjutsu and Senjutsu instead of Fear. That also served as my old man¡¯s signature ability, until I was born and found the youkai in the hidden village. ¡°That¡¯s frightening. So she killed Nurarihyon in another world?¡± Oh! So that was the reason she was surprised. I thought she was surprised by the fact she could injure my old man, but she thought that Hagoromo Gitsune killed my old man. ¡°Ah, no. Even if his heart was gouged out, he¡¯s still alive and defeat her. But, he need help from an exorcist, that was according to Hagoromo Gitsune¡¯s story.¡± Yasaka sighed in relief after she heard my explanation. Hmm, her reaction was not normal. Was she really that concerned about my old man? Ah¡­ I understand. So she likes him? What a shame for her then. I had no idea about my mother, but it seems my old man refused to look at another woman since she died. I had a knowing smile on my face as I looked at Yasaka. She realized my smile and gave me a small smile as she closed her eyes. So as expected, huh. That old man sure was popular among widows¡­ ¡°Let¡¯s put that matter aside for now, Riku. I heard that you also tried to complete your Hyakki Yakkou. What made you do that now of all times?¡± I saw her gaze contained curious nature, so this was just a normal question for me and not concerning even political issues. I looked at Kunou and saw her looking at me with a curious gaze too. Nothing wrong with answering that question I guess. West and East Youkai Faction were an ally after all. ¡°First, I thought it was the time for me to build my own Hyakki Yakkou. Second, the matter that we talked about with Amaterasu and my old man has begun. Kokabiel met me by himself and declared that he will bring his army and attack Kuoh Town to target the devils.¡± ¡°What! Why you didn¡¯t report it until now!¡± Yasaka shouted in surprise. She frowned and looked at me in disbelief. ¡°Because I see nothing to report to. It was something that I could handle, I just need my own Hyakki Yakou to stop him.¡± I said confidently while closing my right eye. Yasaka calmed down a little after she heard me, but she keep looking at me with a frown on her face. ¡°Did the devil know about this?¡± ¡°No, I had no intention to tell them. I bet Sirzechs called Rias back to the underworld after what she did, so only Sona was left in Kuoh Town. I plan to keep it like that and use her as bait.¡± ¡°But why? Can¡¯t you just search Kokabiel in his hiding spot? With your ability, that would be easy.¡± That was true if Kokabiel wasn¡¯t with his army. I tried to play safe, but it backfired at me. Kokabiel was also stronger than I thought, he met me when I was still recovering my energy that was spent in a fight with Vali. ¡°To be honest, I just wanted to keep the damage in Kuoh Town. Not only that, Devils had made its move towards peace, Fallen Angels had contacted me through Hakuryuukou with a friendly attempt and asked for my help to deal with Kokabiel. They promised to give me all their research result of Sacred Gears. This will help our Factions too.¡± Yasaka pondered about what I said while touching her chin with her right hand as she looked at the floor. Kunou was Kunou, she looked at her mother and waited for her decision. Well, what I told her was a lie though. I tried to find Kokabiel and his army right after I found Nura Clan¡¯s youkai and wanted to settle my score immediately. But, I can¡¯t find him in Japan. I guessed that he must have hidden himself and his army in the Underworld or fled to another country. The other thing was the peace between the 3 Factions. I don¡¯t really care about that, but that peace conference was necessary for baiting Khaos Brigade. I will destroy that organization no matter what, especially that old cot Rizevim Lucifer. That man must not be allowed to roam this world any longer. He was a Super Devil, one of the strongest fighters in the world. Although he was not included in the Top 10 like Sirzechs, he was cunning. Earth or rather Japan would be in danger. Yasaka was in constant danger too, but I believe my old man can protect her with no problem in Japan. The peace conference must be held in the future. Or, I will lose additional allies to fight the Khaos Brigade. ¡°Are you confident that you can stop Kokabiel if he attacked Kuoh Town? I will send a few youkai there to put a barrier in case he attacked.¡± ¡°That would help me a lot. I am confident that I and my Hyakki Yakkou could beat him and his army. Did you feel the energy earlier?¡± Yasaka raised her eyebrows slightly and asked, ¡°You meant the other energy that I felt when your energy suddenly spiked up?¡± I nodded my head at her question and put a smug smile on my face. ¡°He will join the fight on my side. Hagoromo Gitsune and her own Hyakki Yakkou would also help me.¡± Finally, Yasaka had a relaxed expression on her face. ¡°In that case, I can rest easy. I will be counting on you.¡± ¡°Leave it to me.¡± RaizarP Author Here~ More than 55 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks for the new Squad Leader!! - Gruden Marcel - kevin yommer - Jo Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 64 – A Visit from a Pervert Fallen I went back to my mansion and sleep after the talk with Yasaka. Hagoromo Gitsune had used my apartment¡¯s bedroom, that was why I slept in my own room in my mansion. The next day, I met with Kuroka and Tsura before going to Kuoh Town like usual. We teleported to my apartment and met with Hagoromo Gitsune. When we teleported into the room, Hagoromo Gitsune sat on the couch while wearing Kuoh Uniform. She looked at me with a smile and said. ¡°You¡¯re in a better shape than I thought. It seems you are stronger than the one in my world.¡± I closed my right eye and smiled at her, ¡°Of course, I am. Don¡¯t underestimate me.¡± As I answered Hagoromo Gitsune, I spread my senses as usual to cover the whole city. I can¡¯t be more careful as each day passed. But, I caught something that I didn¡¯t expect. My smile dropped from my face and I turned serious. I looked at Tsura and said. ¡°Tsura, call Kurotabo and Kubinashi here. We have a guest.¡± Tsura was confused by my sudden order, but she just nodded her head and teleported back to Kanto. Kuroka was also confused by my sudden order, she looked at me and asked. ¡°What happened, Riku-sama?¡± I turned to look at her and said. ¡°Try to feel the energy outside our apartment. We have a pervert standing right in front of the entrance of our apartment.¡± Kuroka did what I told and then she had a surprised expression, ¡°Fallen Angel?¡± Hagoromo Gitsune was intrigued by our conversation and approached us, ¡°What¡¯s wrong with you? Suddenly turned serious.¡± Hmm, that was right. The one who stood outside the apartment was clearly Azazel. He must be here to give me what I wanted. But that was a different matter. I turned serious because I knew that Kokabiel¡¯s attack was near. A few seconds later, a magic circle appeared in front of me. Tsura appeared from the magic circle with Kurotabo and Kubinashi who looked around with a surprised expression on their face. ¡°We truly teleported.¡± Muttered Kurotabo. He held a golden staff with his right hand and tilted his hat up with his left hand. Meanwhile, Kubinashi¡¯s head was spinning around to look around the room before he stopped his gaze at me. ¡°Riku-sama, was there something that you need from us?¡± Asked Kubinashi. I nodded my head at him and said. ¡°Outside this apartment, there is a black-haired man with blonde bangs. Can you get him? He¡¯s a guest.¡± Kurotabo tilted his head in confusion. He looked at me and asked. ¡°Getting a guest for you, Riku-sama?¡± ¡°Yes, just treat him like the usual guest. I will wait here.¡± Kurotabo nodded his head and then answered. ¡°Certainly, Riku-sama.¡± He then looked at Kubinashi and said, ¡°Let¡¯s go. It was our first order.¡± Kubinashi nodded his head and they walked out of the mansion. I sat on the couch and gestured for Hagoromo Gitsune to sit beside me. Kuroka and Tsura stood behind me and we were waiting for Kurotabo and Kubinashi to get Azazel to come here. As we waited for him, Hagoromo Gitsune asked, ¡°Why did you call these guys to get your guest? Aren¡¯t these girls enough to get him?¡± Kuroka and Tsura nodded their head in Hagoromo Gitsune¡¯s question. Well, at first I wanted Tsura or Kuroka to get him, but there was a problem. Azazel was a pervert, a big one. I can¡¯t let my girls get him, even so Hagoromo Gitsune. I can¡¯t imagine Hagoromo Gitsune¡¯s reaction if Azazel did something to her. At worst, a fight will break out and I will be troubled by that. That¡¯s why the safest choice would be Kurotabo and Kubinashi who had enough experience to greet a guest, even if they were hostile. ¡°To put it bluntly, the guest is a pervert.¡± Hagoromo Gitsune looked at me with a confused expression and asked, ¡°Why does it matter if the guest is a pervert?¡± I just looked at the ceiling and said, ¡°I don¡¯t want this apartment to get destroyed by that. If Kuroka or Tsura were harassed by that guy, I will definitely hit him¡­ with all my strength.¡± Kuroka and Tsura smiled at my words, while Hagoromo Gitsune just hummed and said, ¡°Is that so?¡± As she said that word, the door of our room was opened and Kurotabo entered the room with Kubinashi and Azazel behind him. ¡°Hoo, this is a small room for an heir of East Youkai Faction.¡± Said Azazel as he looked around the room. He was wearing a brown coat with a black shirt underneath it, he wore brown pant that was strapped with a black belt. He smiled and stopped his gaze at him. ¡°How about I built you a mansion on top of my research for taking care of Kokabiel?¡± Kurotabo and Kubinashi walked towards the side of the room and stood there while focusing their gaze on Azazel. I looked at Azazel as I closed my right eye and smiled, ¡°No need to do that. I love this room, with a room this small, I could see my lovers without walking an entire hallway. By the way, please sit on that couch, it is not high-grade like the couch in Devil¡¯s mansion though.¡± ¡°Hahahaha, don¡¯t mind it!¡± Azazel walked to the couch across from me and sat on it. He then looked at Kuroka and Tsura with a smile on his face before turning to Hagoromo Gitsune. ¡°So this is the lady that trashed Sirzechs little sister?¡± Hagoromo Gitsune put her usual smile on her face as Azazel looked at her. For a few seconds, he just looked at Hagoromo Gitsune before turning his gaze towards me with a rather stiff smile. Hah! So he was terrified with her, serves him right. This guy, his information gathering was really fast. How did he know something that happened yesterday? ¡°I have my source.¡± Said Azazel as he smirked at me. ¡°Is that so? You are terrifying. So, what is the purpose of your visit?¡± ¡°Hahahaha, not as much as you and the lady beside you. Hmm, I just wanted to give this to you.¡± As he said that, Azazel took out a USB Drive from his pocket and put it on the table in front of us. ¡°Use it as wisely as possible, the file inside the Drive was filled with my research of Sacred Gears. I give this to you as a sign of friendship. I will give you something else when you stop Kokabiel, who for some reason targeted you now instead of the Devil.¡± This guy is so irritating! No one except Yasaka and Kunou knew about my meeting with Kokabiel. How did he find out about that? But, if he said he gave his research as a sign of friendship, then it¡¯s as I had expected. ¡°You wanted peace, isn¡¯t that it, Azazel?¡± Azazel''s smile turned from his cocky smile into a small smile of melancholy. ¡°Was it apparent? I guess so. I am tired of war, our numbers had decreased each time and we will cease to exist at this rate.¡± I took the USB Drive that was on the table and looked at Azazel with a smile on my face. ¡°Then, I guess I will help you with Kokabiel this time. But you were wrong about one thing. He was targeting Satan¡¯s sibling, not me.¡± ¡°Then I am in good hands, I am counting on you.¡± RaizarP Author Here~ More than 55 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 65 – My Preparation Azazel stood up from the couch after he gave me the USB Drive and left our apartment. He didn¡¯t even bother to stay and talk to me any longer because he said that he had to do something. Kubinashi escorted him out while Kurotabo still stood silently on his spot. That¡¯s natural, I thought. Maybe that was the reason he left Kokabiel to me, I could use this chance to get a fighting experience further and rip bigger awards from Azazel. Talking about Khaos Brigade, I wonder if Vali will join them. He joined the Khaos Brigade because he wanted to fight, right? Should I just take him under my wing and give him the fight that he wanted? Let¡¯s do that when I met him again. ¡°Shall we go to the school, Riku-sama?¡± Asked Tsura from behind. I stood up from my couch and looked at Tsura and Kuroka, ¡°Well, we had nothing to do except for now. So, let¡¯s go to the school.¡± ¡°I guess I will go too. I had nothing to do except playing around and lazing around.¡± Said Hagoromo Gitsune as she stood up from the couch. I looked at Kurotabo and Kubinashi who just entered the apartment again and said, ¡°I hope both of you could standby in this apartment. With that guy visit, I guess the attack from Kokabiel would happen in the near future.¡± Kurotabo nodded his head, ¡°Alright, Riku-sama. We will standby in this apartment.¡± ¡°Well then, I am going to school.¡± *** When we arrived at school, Sona and Tsubaki were waiting for us in front of the entrance gate. Well, the truth was I knew about them waiting for us. But because of Azazel, we were late for school. When they saw us, Sona sighed and walked towards us. She had a tired expression and there were black circle under her eyes. ¡°You finally arrived, Nura. I have been waiting for you since this morning.¡± I smiled at her and gestured to Tsura and Kuroka to go without me to the class. They nodded their head and went to the class first after greeting Sona and Tsubaki. Hagoromo Gitsune never cared about Sona and Tsubaki in the first place and ignored them as she kept walking and entered the school. Sona just focused her gaze on me while Tsubaki stood behind Sona with closed eyes. She also had a black circle under her eyes like Sona. ¡°An old crow was visiting my apartment, so we need to chase him away and that took my time.¡± Sona narrowed her eyes at my words before letting out a sigh, ¡°Hah- that was so like you. More importantly, did you read the letter from Lucifer-sama?¡± ¡°Ah, the letter of apology? I read it, but I need to say that I never expected that.¡± ¡°Lucifer-sama is a good leader. It was entirely Rias¡¯s fault that time, so if he offered you an apology, then just accept it if you forgave Rias.¡± I shrugged my shoulder and closed my eyes as I said, ¡°It¡¯s not like she did anything to me in the first place, not like she can do something in the first place. Hence, I forgave her. But, I must say that Rias was so childish. She didn¡¯t even hear my explanation before attacking me.¡± Sona held her head with her right hand as she shook it, ¡°I know. She was burdened with a Rating game, but she attacked you of all people in this school. She was too reckless!¡± Sona¡¯s outburst surprised me for a second. I had always thought of Sona as a cool girl who never lost control of herself, so this was new. Tsubaki also shooks her head behind Sona. ¡°Not only that, she risked a war! Even I was not that stupid to attack you, what did she think in her head! I told her, I had told her that the Evil Piece was removed safely after you gave me the Rook. But, she didn¡¯t believe me, what did she think of me?!¡± This became awkward. I just listened to Sona¡¯s outburst while nodding my head a few times. In the middle of her outburst, I looked at Tsubaki and she put on a barrier to let us isolated from the outside world. After a while, she stopped and had a ragged breath because she was shouting loudly. ¡°That was refreshing, sorry for getting an outburst like that.¡± Sona looked at me while fixing her glasses. ¡°Well, I never expected that either. Are we done here?¡± ¡°Ah, I¡¯m sorry. Because of my ¡­ outburst earlier I forgot to tell you something important. Lucifer-sama wanted to meet you in Rias¡¯s Rating Game. He invited you as his guest. He said that the Phenex family wanted to meet you too.¡± I see, so he wanted me to show up and crash the Rating Game. In that case, my answer was clear. ¡°Sorry, no can do.¡± Sona lost her word and stood there with a surprised expression. I had listened to her outburst, so that was enough. I walked past her and exited the barrier while leaving the words. ¡°If he wanted to meet me, then ask him to come to my Mansion in Kanto. Also, don¡¯t forget the promised Phoenix Tears.¡± *** I went to the classroom and sat on my seat. When I entered my classroom, it was in the second period of the class. Kuroka and Tsura asked me what happened earlier, and I just answered them that Sona had an outburst. They chuckled and said ¡°Poor her.¡± The day passed just like that, with nothing happening except my meeting with Sona. We came back to my apartment. Kuroka and Tsura teleported back to the Mansion because they helped Kejoro and Setsuna to care for the mansion now. With a lot of new youkai in the mansion, Setsuna can¡¯t handle them herself. That was why Kuroka and Tsura were helping her. As usual, Hagoromo Gitsune went into the bedroom immediately, leaving me with Kubinashi and Kurotabo in the room. This is perfect though, I wanted to train Matoi from now on in preparation for a big fight. Kurotabo and Kubinashi sat in front of me and I said. ¡°Kurotabo, I heard from Hagoromo Gitsune that Nurarihyon¡¯s grandson, Rikuo was it? He used a technique called Matoi when he fought her. Do you think I could use it too?¡± Kurotabo nodded his head without a second thought and answered, ¡°I believe you can. From what I see, your technique was really similar to Rihan-sama. And, Rihan-sama was the one who made Matoi. Do you want to learn it, Riku-sama? I believe I know that technique better than anyone in your Hyakki Yakkou now.¡± I smiled at his words and stood from my couch. I turned into my youkai form and looked at Kurotabo. ¡°What are we waiting for? Let¡¯s go.¡± RaizarP Author Here~ More than 55 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks for the new Squad Leader!! - James31292 Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 66 – Matoi I went to the usual forest near Kuoh Academy with Kurotabo and Kubinashi to train Matoi. With Kurotabo here, I believe I could learn it faster compared to learning it by myself. We were in the clearing where I trained Shirone the way to use Senjutsu. Talking about Shirone, I didn¡¯t see her in a few days already. Kuroka said that she was in the Mansion in Kanto, and it was like that since Rias attacked us. I thought that she needed time to be alone, that was why I need to focus on my own training right now. I looked at Kurotabo who stood in front of me, ¡°So, can you explain this Matoi technique first?¡± ¡°First, Matoi was a technique that was created by our leader, Nura Rihan-sama, the second head of Nura Clan.¡± I nodded my head in understanding and listened to Kurotabo''s explanation with a serious face. Kubinashi was also looking at Kurotabo and heard his explanation. Maybe he wanted to know more about Matoi too. ¡°This technique was only possible because our leader was only a part of youkai. In other words¡­¡± ¡°Only part youkai could use this technique. A full youkai couldn''t use this technique.¡± I finished Kurotabo¡¯s word and he nodded his head. ¡°Correct, Matoi is a technique that was created because our leader understands his short-coming. His human form limits his power greatly. While he was still able to use fear in his human form, his strength was only half of his youkai form, no, it was even less than that.¡± I touched my chin with my right hand when I heard Kurotabo¡¯s explanation. I was weaker in my Human Form too, but it was not that bad. I still had around three-quarters of my strength or at least around that much. It was true that I can¡¯t fully utilize my Fear in Human Form though. I can¡¯t use Shin Kyouka Suigetsu or Shin Meikyo Shisui while I was in my Human Form. ¡°Let me continue my explanation. This technique needed trust between individuals. The one who used this technique, let''s say that you used this technique, Riku-sama. You need to trust your back to the other party, or in this case your subordinate. While your subordinate need to trust their Fear to you.¡± I know that part. I remembered it because I love the technique, and I was also trying to re-create the technique myself when I hadn¡¯t met with Nura Clan youkai yet. Because I showed no reaction, Kurotabo continued, ¡°This technique wasn¡¯t called Matoi for nothing. It literally meant the name, Demon Clad. The subordinates will entrust their Fear to their Leader. In turn, the Leader would be able to use the subordinate¡¯s special ability. In my case, you will be able to use my Anki Kuroenbu (Dance of the black weapon).¡± My serious face turned into a big smile as I looked at Kurotabo with my right eye closed, ¡°That was interesting. Is there anything that I need to know?¡± Kurotabo nodded his head and raised his hand with his index and middle finger pointed to the sky. ¡°This technique had 2 methods. The first one is Izutsu, this method includes taking the subordinates Fear entirely and unleashing it in one attack. This method had a destructive attack, but it lacked defense. When you are using this method, you can¡¯t use your Fear.¡± ¡°So I can¡¯t use Meikyo Shisui or Kyouka Suigetsu. But I was able to use the Fear of the one who does Matoi with me.¡± ¡°That¡¯s correct. That was why this method was used when you are sure with your victory, or you wanted to end the fight quickly.¡± I crossed my arms and nodded in understanding. That was true, this method had a strong destructive power, but my defense was technically only depending on my ability to dodge or block the attack. I can¡¯t use my Fear ability, but I was still able to use Youjutsu and Senjutsu. While this method had disadvantages, this was the best method to end a fight. Especially big fights because of the destructive power created by this technique. This is perfect for a short fight against weaker opponents, but it only served as a trump card against stronger opponents. ¡°The second method was called Kasane. This method was a defensive one, but this method was also effective to attack the opponent. The leader and his subordinate¡¯s fear merged together, thus you can use both techniques. This method could be sustained longer than the Izutsu method, and it granted you with the freedom of the movement.¡± ¡°So the difference of both methods located in their use? Nothing changed besides that?¡± I asked Kurotabo. He was a bit hesitant for a while before he said, ¡°If you used the Izutsu method, a tattoo-like marking will appear on your back each time you use this method with a different youkai. For the Kasane method, nothing changed in particular. But, when you used this method, your subordinate¡¯s fear will turn into a kimono and your heart will technically be aligned with the youkai that used Matoi with you.¡± I nodded my head in understanding. Izutsu method will change my weapon and my attack, while the Kasane method will change my defend, or in this case my Kimono and was able to use both techniques. This was a truly amazing technique. Being able to use both techniques at the same time was unfair. Matoi basically allowed me to get a power-up instantly, without any training. In the fight, this technique will surprise my opponent. Not only that, because there were a lot of different youkai with different techniques or Fear, this is truly a broken technique. ¡°So, how to use it, Kurotabo?¡± ¡°I will spread my Fear as I stood near you. Please accept my Fear and more importantly¡­ trust me, Riku-sama.¡± ¡°Do it, I trust you.¡± As I said that, Kurotabo approached me and stood beside me. Kubinashi knew that the technique was a bad idea, that was why he jumped away from us and leaned his back against a tree a distance away from me. ¡°Are you ready, Riku-sama?¡± I called my Nenekirimaru and held it in my right hand as I looked at Kurotabo, ¡°I am.¡± Kurotabo spread his Fear and I certainly could feel it. Following his instruction earlier, I accepted the Fear and it began to surround me. Black smoke appeared around us and slowly but surely, Kurotabo¡¯s body melted into the smoke. A second after Kurotabo¡¯s body disappeared, my school uniform turned into my usual Kimono and black sleeves appeared on my right hand. Nenekirimaru¡¯s blade was surrounded by a cloud of black smoke that defied gravity as the smoke was floating to the sky and disappeared around one meter from my Nenekirimaru. Somehow or another, I could feel another source of power within me and I could control it freely. I flexed my right arm and tens of weapons appeared from the black sleeves. The weapons were varied from Sword, Katana, Spear, Naginata, and Staff. I smiled as I looked at the weapon that appeared from the black sleeves on my right arm. I called back the weapon and it retreated into the black sleeves again. After a few tries, I decided to raise my Nenekirimaru and injected all Fear that I gained into my weapon. ¡°Are you sure, Riku-sama? The destruction would be no joke and the Humans would realize this.¡± Kurotabo''s voice came from behind me as if he whispered right beside my ears. It was strange, but I need to get used to this. I snapped my left hand and an invisible barrier was created around the forest, ¡°Don¡¯t worry, I put a barrier.¡± ¡°Is that so? Then please feel free to attack.¡± As Kurotabo agreed, I injected more fear into my Nenekirimaru. A second later, I felt that this much Fear was enough and swung my sword to the ground. As soon as I swung my sword, hundreds of weapons that were surrounded by black smoke appeared from my back and flew in the direction of my swing. It cut everything on its path until it finally disappeared after it reached 300 hundred meters. I looked at the aftermath of the attack and was surprised by it. The forest was destroyed, creating a new path without any trees. The Matoi was also canceled after I launched the attack and Kurotabo breathed roughly beside me. I could feel my back burning. So this is the moment where the tattoo appeared. I rested my Nenekirimaru on my shoulder and looked at Kurotabo, ¡°This technique is good. I will be counting on you in the future.¡± Kurotabo looked at me with a smile and said, ¡°P-Please leave it to me.¡± RaizarP Author Here~ More than 55 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 67 – Satan’s visit The next day, as soon as I arrived at Kuoh Town with Kuroka and Tsura, I spread my senses as usual. Nothing was unusual today and it made me happy. I really hate the unexpected thing happening without my knowledge. So, we went to school as usual, with nothing usual happening until school was over. Shirone was still in my mansion without even trying to go to school. I was curious about what happened to her, but it seems that she was training her Senjutsu under Magari to get stronger. I trained my technique further with Kurotabo and Kubinashi. On the third day of my training, Hagoromo Gitsune showed up and watched my training with an amused smile on her face. Days passed with no attack from Kokabiel or the disturbance from the devils. And suddenly, a week after Sona¡¯s outburst, when we were on the way to the Kuoh Academy, I felt immense energy appear in Kuoh Academy. Three energies suddenly appeared in Kuoh Academy with Rias¡¯s energy among them. I didn¡¯t need someone to inform me about the energies, as I knew who they were. ¡°Riku-sama, do you feel the energy nya?¡± Kuroka asked me with a concerned expression. ¡°Yeah, that¡¯s Sirzechs and his queen, Grayfia. It seems Rias is in Kuoh Academy with them too.¡± I nodded my head as I looked at Kuroka. Tsura had a worried expression when I told them about Sirzechs. Well, who won¡¯t be nervous when one of the top 10 power in the world is in this city? I turned to look at Hagoromo Gitsune and saw her smiling at me without caring. Oh, there were two of us here. ¡°Sirzechs, if I remember correctly then he is the brother of the girl that I trashed around, right?¡± Asked Hagoromo Gitsune. ¡°Yes, he is. Well, with both of us here then there is nothing to worry about I think. He¡¯s not stupid, he¡¯s quite smart in dealing with things. I bet he¡¯s here because he wanted to meet me.¡± ¡°And he¡¯s curious about me, isn¡¯t that so?¡± Added Hagoromo Gitsune. ¡°Riku-sama? Will you meet him?¡± Tsura approached me and asked me with a worried tone. Hmm, what should I do? He¡¯s clearly here and didn¡¯t attempt to hide his energy. That meant he was inviting me to meet him, or he purposely let his presence be known so I will approach him. It was rude to not visit him when he¡¯s clearly here too as he¡¯s one of the devil¡¯s faction leaders. Especially after I refused his offer to watch the rating game, the least I could do is to meet him. Who knows, maybe he really wanted to visit me and brought me the promised Phoenix Tears. But, why did the leader of each faction really love a sudden visit? I was wondering about that, although I thought I know their reason. They lacked entertainment, and they were busy so they can¡¯t made a promise to visit. ¡°I will meet him with Kuroka.¡± I turned to look at Tsura and said, ¡°Do you mind looking after Hagoromo Gitsune, Tsura?¡± ¡°How rude, what do you think am I?¡± Rebuted Hagoromo Gitsune. ¡°A troublemaker who made 2 troubles in one day.¡± I said with a smirk on my face. Hagoromo Gitsune¡¯s smile dropped from her face and looked away from me, ¡°Well, I can take care of myself.¡± She walked away in the direction of the school after she said that. I looked at Tsura and she nodded her head a little before following Hagoromo Gitsune. After they left us, I looked at Kuroka and said, ¡°Sorry Kuroka, for asking you to accompany me.¡± ¡°What are you saying, Riku-sama. I love being with you, so it¡¯s no problem nya!¡± I smiled at her answer, ¡°I see, can you teleport us in front of the old school building?¡± ¡°No problem nya.¡± After Kuroka said that, a magic circle appeared under us and we teleported in front of the old school building. I felt Sona and her queen, Tsubaki, were inside the building with Sirzechs and the other. I turned into my youkai form in case something happened and entered the building with Kuroka who walked on my right. We went to the ORC room, or rather, the former ORC room, and Kuroka knocked on the door three times when we arrived in front of the room. ¡°Who is it?¡± Grayfia voice could be heard beyond the door asking for our identities. ¡°I am Kuroka, and I am accompanied with Nura Riku-sama.¡± The voice went silent for a while before an unfamiliar man¡¯s voice sounded beyond the door. ¡°You may enter.¡± The door was opened from inside and I saw Grayfia step sideways after she opened the door. On the couch, a red-haired man wearing a black suit sat beside Rias who wore a white dress. Sona and Tsubaki stood up from the couch and stood beside the red-haired man while looking at me. I entered the room with a smile as I closed my right eye and crossed my arms. I looked at the red-haired man, Sirzechs, and said. ¡°I never expected a Satan to visit this place. It¡¯s nice to meet you.¡± Sirzechs stood from the couch with a smile on his face, followed by Rias who was looking down, refused to look at me. ¡°It¡¯s nice to meet you too. I was always wanted to meet you in person since I heard about you, but it¡¯s such a shame that I was too busy to meet you. But that was achieved today.¡± I laughed at his words, ¡°You must be wanted to see me? For what reason?¡± I shrugged my shoulder and continued, ¡°I am nothing but a youkai in this territory.¡± ¡°A Youkai that was stronger than even his Father who managed to fight me. You should be proud of being yourself, don¡¯t put yourself lower than what it must be.¡± Refuted Sirzechs as he looked at me with the same smile as Hagoromo Gitsune, the smile that was full of confidence. I relaxed my arms and looked at Sirzechs while tilting my chin up a little, ¡°I never said that I am weak. But let¡¯s end this here. What do you want, Sirzechs Lucifer?¡± ¡°As I said earlier, I just wanted to meet you. Not only that, I brought something that I promised.¡± He gestured to Grayfia to approach him with his hand. I glanced at Grayfia and saw her approaching Sirzechs while holding a wooden box in her hands. She stopped beside Sirzechs and opened the box, showing 3 flasks made from the glass inside the box. ¡°3 Phoenix Tears, as I had promised.¡± Said Sirzechs with a smile as he took the box from Grayfia¡¯s hand. RaizarP Author Here~ More than 55 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 68 – Talking with Sirzechs ¡°Here, please accept it.¡± Sirzechs gave the box to me and I took it with my right hand. I looked at the content of the box before closing it and handed it to Kuroka. I turned to look at Sirzechs and smiled. ¡°Thank you. I knew that you were not here just to give me that Phoenix Tears, shall we sit down and talk? Talking while standing is not comfortable at all.¡± Sirzechs give me a sincere smile this time and gestured with his hand, ¡°Let¡¯s sit then.¡± We sat on the couch across from each other and Rias sat silently beside Sirzechs. It was really strange, she was looking down all this time and didn¡¯t utter a single word. Also, the reason why she attacked me, did she attack me because she didn¡¯t trust Sona¡¯s words? ¡°To tell you the truth, I wanted to ask for your permission to hold the Rating Game between Rias and Riser in Kuoh Town. The reason for that was, we had a hard time setting the Rating Game in the underworld as Rias was still a young devil, you can call her an underage one.¡± So it was his true reason for visiting me. That was reasonable, no, it was exaggerated. He could ask Grayfia to tell me about it as she held a position to represent Sirzechs because of her position as his wife and Queen. I need to decide this carefully, Kokabiel¡¯s attack was near, I said near because I didn¡¯t really know the exact date of his attack. I touched my chin with my right hand and thought about Sirzechs¡¯s proposal. ¡°Of course, I will owe you one if you allowed me to set the Rating Game in this town.¡± My eyes widened as I looked at Sirzechs. That only lasted a second before I grinned, ¡°Sure, but there is a condition.¡± Sirzechs leaned his head closer and asked, ¡°What it is?¡± ¡°Send someone to keep Riser in the bay. If he attacked me for some reason, which happened when we first met, I can¡¯t guarantee his safety.¡± Sirzechs pulled his face away and leaned against the couch''s backrest and nodded his head. ¡°Of course. I was thinking of assigning Grayfia in case something happened.¡± He looked at Grayfia and she nodded her head in answer. ¡°That¡¯s good then. Is there something else?¡± I asked as I relaxed my arms and put them on top of my lap. Kuroka was still standing behind me while holding the box in her hands. But, I could feel her gaze from behind and I glanced over her. She looked at me and glanced at Rias repeatedly. Oh, right. I had yet to hear her reason for attacking me so suddenly. I wanted to hear her reason directly, why did she attack me while yelling ¡®How dare you kill Koneko!¡¯. At first, I thought that Sona had told her. But, after thinking about it calmly, Rias was not that dumb. ¡°There is something more.¡± Said Sirzechs. I snapped off from my thought and looked at him, ¡°Please do tell me.¡± ¡°The incident a week ago, where my sister attacked you. I think I need to apologize directly for that. But, I am apologizing as an older brother.¡± Sirzechs bowed his head a little and said, ¡°I¡¯m sorry for my sister.¡± When Sirzechs said that, almost everyone in the room was surprised. Only me and Grayfia weren¡¯t surprised by his apology. Mainly because I received his letter, but this was still surprising. A Satan bowed his head at me, even though he said that he was apologizing as an older brother, this would become huge news if someone knew. Rias was also surprised. She raised her head and looked at Sirzechs and shouted. ¡°Onii-sama! You don¡¯t need to apologize! I was the one in the wrong.¡± Sirzechs raised his head and looked at Rias seriously, ¡°As an older brother, I need to at least do at least this much.¡± ¡°But!¡± Rias looked like she was about to crumble as she shouted. Sirzehcs looked at her with calm eyes and a little smile on his face, ¡°Rias, stop okay? This much is fine.¡± ¡°Onii-sama¡­¡± Muttered Rias. Umm, the situation had become awkward now. I glanced at Sona who stood beside Sirzechs and saw her averting her eyes away. That girl¡­ I turned back to Sirzechs and said, ¡°Sorry for breaking your moment, but I forgave her since you sent the letter, no, since the day she attacked me. I am not the type to hold a grudge over something like that. But I was still curious so I wanted to ask something to Rias.¡± Sirzechs and Rias looked at me and nodded their heads. Getting their confirmation, I asked, ¡°Why did you think Shirone was dead? I believe that Sona had told you about me getting rid of the Evil Piece safely right? I even told you that I had my way to remove the Evil Piece.¡± When I said that, Rias¡¯s eyes widened and I could see Sona¡¯s body flinched on the edge of my sight. I glared at Sona and said. ¡°You told her, right?¡± Instantly, the attention of everyone in the room was focused on Sona. ¡°I- I had no time to tell her when she was training in the underworld¡­¡± Answered Sona. ¡°That meant¡­¡± I said and paused for a while before continuing, ¡°You just told her about me removing Shirone¡¯s Evil Piece and didn¡¯t tell her about Shirone¡¯s condition?¡± Sona looked at me while biting her lips, ¡°I planned to tell her when I asked you to stay longer. But you walked away without waiting for me to tell Rias!¡± I sighed and looked at Sirzechs, ¡°That meant the incident was caused by a misunderstanding from Rias and the carelessness of Sona. You don¡¯t need to apologize for that. But! I will need an apology from Rias to my friend, she attacked us without even hearing me after all.¡± Rias looked at her best friend with a surprised face. Sona averted her gaze from her in embarrassment. Surprisingly though, Rias didn¡¯t get angry immediately. I guessed that getting trashed by Hagoromo Gitsune made her thought carefully before deciding something, huh? ¡°I see, I appreciated it.¡± Said Sirzechs. Rias turned to look at me with a serious face and bowed her head, ¡°I¡¯m sorry. I was wrong for not listening to your story and suddenly attacked you.¡± Somehow it turned into a safe discussion. Truthfully, I was a little bit afraid that Rias¡¯s attack will escalate into something big, a war for example. But, I got compensation and favor from Sirzechs. Not only that, Rias had matured a little? Well, the last part doesn¡¯t matter though, as she will go back to the Underworld again. I nodded my head at her apology, ¡°Don¡¯t worry about it. But, tell that to my friend too.¡± Rias raised her head and nodded, ¡°I will.¡± RaizarP Author Here~ More than 55 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks for the new Squad Leader!! - Kaydo Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 69 – Sirzechs’s Goal ¡°Then Riku ¡­ I can call you that, right? You can call me Sirzechs.¡± Said Sirzechs as he looked at me. ¡°Yeah, no problem. I hate formalities too, so it¡¯s better if you just call me Riku.¡± ¡°That¡¯s good. I have something to say to you privately. If you don¡¯t mind, care to accompany me for a while?¡± Sirzechs stood from the couch as he said that. Private talk? I wonder what he¡¯s up to. I stood from my chair and smiled, ¡°Sure, no problem.¡± I looked over my shoulder at Kuroka and closed my eyes, ¡°You¡¯ve heard him, Kuroka. Can you take the box home for now? You can go to the class like usual afterward.¡± ¡°Leave it to me nya!¡± I nodded my head in satisfaction, turned to look at Sirzechs, and open my left eye, ¡°Shall we?¡± Sirzechs nodded his head and walked towards the exit. When he walked past Grayfia, he said. ¡°I will go back later. You can go back first with Rias.¡± ¡°Certainly.¡± *** ¡°This school is wonderful, right? I¡¯ve always wanted to come here again, but I never expected that I will come here in this way.¡± Sirzechs walked beside me as we walked around the school. I¡¯ve also turned back into my human form to avoid any prying eyes from the other students. ¡°Well, you didn¡¯t need to apologize in person though, seeing your position as a Satan it must be a hassle right?¡± I said as I looked at Sirzechs on my left. ¡°I can¡¯t do that. If the one who attacked you was someone other than my little sister, maybe I will only send Rias and Sona to apologize to you. Your position is a bit tricky in this supernatural world after all. Not to mention, the presence of your friend that made known when Rias attacked you, I never expected that the Youkai Faction hide someone like her.¡± Said Sirzechs seriously. My position was a bit tricky, huh. My old man was a youkai that was able to match Sirzechs in a fight, although he can¡¯t beat him, at least in a fight, both of them were at a settlement without being able to hurt each other. Meanwhile, I was another story. Unlike my old man, I had a new technique that maybe able to hurt Sirzechs or even give him grave injuries. There was also Hagoromo Gitsune, which had strength equal to Ultimate Class devil, although I guess she will have a hard time fighting against one of the Satan thought. ¡°Somehow, the movement from your faction was weird. Are you trying to achieve something?¡± I asked Sirzechs as my smile dropped from my face. ¡°Hahaha, there is nothing that I planned. It was just ¡­ I thought that the war needed to end right now.¡± Said Sirzechs as he looked up at the sky. ¡°The war had lasted for too long, and 3 Factions had suffered enough. After my little sister was born, I was trying to achieve peace, but what we got was just a ceasefire from now.¡± I walked silently while hearing Sirzechs¡¯s story. As I had expected, he was trying to sign the peace treaty between the 3 Factions. From what I knew about Azazel, he was trying to achieve peace too. He wanted to make use of Kokabiel¡¯s attack to achieve it, he was too cunning. ¡°I understood your goal. So, how do you plan to achieve it? The Devils have always been hostile towards the fallen and someone from church. Your Sister¡¯s behavior when Issei wanted to save Asia was proof of that.¡± Sirzechs went silent for a while before he smiled at me, ¡°But she save Asia in the end, right?¡± ¡°Only because Issei begged him and Asia had useful Sacred Gear.¡± ¡°I can¡¯t deny that, after all, I was the one who put my little sister in this situation.¡± Sirzechs admitted it rather easily as he looked at the students inside the building that started to exit their classroom to have lunch. ¡°Exorcist had targeted Devils too. In a few days, the church will send exorcists to this territory to get their stolen weapons back. How about we see how they behave towards Sona.¡± I smirked at Sirzechs and provoked him intentionally to see his reaction. Depending on his reaction, I planned to tell him about Khaos Brigade. At that point, the 3 Factions would achieve peace, and I will start destroying Khaos Brigade, starting from the Hero Faction. The Dragon God, Ophis, would be a problem. She¡¯s too strong, but she was na?ve. That was why, I will deal with her in another way. ¡°I doubt they will be friendly with Sona. They will stay out of trouble and will not attack Sona, but that¡¯s it. It will be impossible without the leader¡¯s order as the hate from the war had accumulated and each Faction hate the others. But we need to achieve peace.¡± Sirzechs looked at me as he gave me his best smile. It was strange for him to apologize to me in person and try to get me to understand the importance of peace. So that was why. ¡°Hmm, I see. So this was why you wanted to talk to me privately. You wanted me to help achieving the peace between the 3 Factions?¡± This man was a Satan, I almost forgot about that because of how chill he was. But, he will not need my help to you achieve the peace that he wanted. Sirzechs just nodded his head and said, ¡°Right. I hope you can help us, of course, there will be a reward from me privately.¡± I was interested in the reward because my goal was to get their help in eradicating Khaos Brigade too, it will not hurt to have cooperation at this point. ¡°I will help the way I can, don¡¯t expect too much. But, help me when I needed help, that was what I wanted from you.¡± Sirzechs¡¯s smile widened when he heard me. ¡°Of course. That was what allies do. Thank you, Riku.¡± Sirzechs stopped on his track and extended his right hand to me. I also stopped and shakes his right hand with mine, ¡°No problem, I am counting on you in the future.¡± I smiled at him and pulled my hand afterward. ¡°I am counting on you too.¡± With this, I am officially, or verbally allied myself with Sirzechs. He didn¡¯t need to know about Khaos Brigade for now, but I bet he had heard about their existence from his subordinates. With Sirzechs as an ally, I could focus in my training. Now, I think it was time to visit my errand boy. RaizarP Author Here~ More than 55 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 70 – Exorcists I talked with Sirzechs for a while after that. While we were talking, I saw Rias who was led by Sona went to the third floor from the window. So she did keep her promise and was about to apologize to Hagoromo Gitsune. ¡°It seems that I can¡¯t stay here any longer. Let¡¯s meet again in the future, Riku.¡± I looked at Sirzechs, crossed my arms, and smiled, ¡°Give me a head-up next time. Don¡¯t just teleport here without saying anything.¡± ¡°Sure, then I will go now. Goodbye.¡± Sirzechs said that and he turned to walk towards the old school building. I stood in the schoolyard alone while looking at Sirzechs¡¯s figure that walked away slowly. Now, my errand boy had recovered from his injuries, but ¡­ he didn¡¯t bring any Excalibur Shard. In fact, there were no Excalibur Shards in this town. I guess Kokabiel took a measure of that and moved the Excalibur Shards outside of this town. But, what¡¯s the reason for that? Didn¡¯t he want to have a war? Shouldn¡¯t he just throw the Excalibur in this town and ¡­ oh right. I am here, the Excaliburs would only arrive in my hand instead of the Devils or Exorcists. So basically, it will be useless. I guessed that he will bring the Excalibur when he attacked this town. This will be troublesome. I frowned and looked in the direction where I felt Freed¡¯s energy. He was slowly moving to the edge of this city. So I guessed right, he wanted to regroup with the main Kokabiel¡¯s army. I can¡¯t do that. A Purplish-black magic circle appeared under my feet and I teleported to the location near Freed¡¯s. I am in an alley between two houses, more specifically, I appeared right in front of Freed who dragged his feet to walk. When he saw me, he glared at me with a lot of killing intent and shouted. ¡°Youuu!! Why did you always appear?! I will kill you, I will kill you now!¡± Freed pointed his left index finger towards me. He took a light blade that was made for an exorcist from his pocket with his right hand and dashed at me. He¡¯s slow, slower than the first time I met him. I looked at him with a tired expression and disappeared from my spot. I appeared again under his body and punched his stomach. He was blown by the forces of my punch and crashed into a wall. The wall cracked and Freed was laying while grunting in pain and trying to get up. ¡°Useless, you know that you can¡¯t beat me. Now, I wanted to ask a question, you better answer this truthfully or I will kill you now as you had turned useless.¡± ¡°Grrr. Fine! A-ask anything!¡± Freed leaned his back against the wall and looked up at me. His head bleed because of a cut from debris. He looked really annoyed, but his eyes were wandering to the left and right searching for an opportunity to run from me. ¡°I told you it was useless.¡± I crouched down to match his gaze and summoned Nenekirimaru. I raised Nenekirimaru and used its blade to touch Freed¡¯s neck and said, ¡°Now, where are Kokabiel and his army?¡± Freed had sweat forming on his shiny head and he had a terrified expression on his face. But he kept smiling. ¡°T-I don¡¯t know.¡± I moved my blade a little and cut Freed¡¯s skin. Blood dripped from the new cut that was made by Nenekirimaru. ¡°Lie, you were trying to get out of this town. Tell me the truth.¡± ¡°I¡¯m not lying!¡± Shouted Freed. ¡°I just wanted to get out of this damn town and fucking run away from this mess!¡± This is a mess. I can¡¯t tell whether he was lying to me or not. I had two choices, but I won¡¯t risk it anymore. As Hagoromo Gitsune said to me that day, I was acting out of my character because I was too cautious. I moved Nenekirimaru to the left and swung it to the right, separating Freed¡¯s head from his body. ¡°Useless errand boy, sleep well in hell.¡± I extended my right hand towards Freed¡¯s body and used Youjutsu to call for a blue flame. The flame engulfed Freed¡¯s body and head and burn them to ash. After making sure nothing was left, I teleported back to my Mansion in Kanto and decided to continue my training with Kubinashi and Kurotabo. *** A few days had passed since I killed Freed. Days passed at a fast pace. I sat on the couch in my apartment with Tsura and Kuroka sat beside me while Hagoromo Gitsune was still sleeping in the bedroom as the sun had yet to rise. The reason why I sat in my apartment this early was that there was something different today. The exorcists had entered the town, and both of them had Excalibur Shards. So they had arrived, but the Rating Game had yet to commence. Tomorrow the Rating Game between Rias and Riser will be held in this town, the place was the clearing behind the Kuoh Academy which was enlarged because of my training. The clearing had become a natural arena for fighting, so I recommend that place to Sirzechs when we were talking a few days ago. For the exorcists, the church had contacted us since the Excalibur was stolen, so I allowed them to move around the area. But they had manners though, I could feel their energy move towards me, to my apartment. ¡°Riku-sama, they were walking toward this place nya.¡± Said Kuroka as she leaned her head on my left shoulder. Tsura was looking at Kuroka jealously before she decided to lean her head on my shoulder too. ¡°Yeah, they must be here to take the Excalibur Shard. Unfortunately, Kokabiel had moved them to somewhere else, so¡­ They were here to talk to me. I had one shard in my bedroom, but I bet they will not be able to feel it. I won¡¯t hand the shard to them ¡­ not yet.¡± Smile formed on my face as I said that. That Excalibur Shard was for Masaomi, there was no way I would give it to them right now. I don¡¯t care about their opinion, but I had that shard before they asked for help. Talking about Masaomi, I forgot to give him a Phoenix Tear to grow his leg again¡­ let¡¯s do it later. I was too immersed in my training that I forgot about him. That guy was too easy to be forgotten, he should talk to me more so I didn¡¯t forget him again. I could feel that the exorcists'' energy had arrived in front of my apartment, so I looked at Tsura and said. ¡°Tsura, can you take them here?¡± Tsura raised her head and nodded at me, ¡°Certainly, Riku-sama.¡± Kuroka also raised her head from my shoulder and stood from the couch. She went to my back and stood behind the couch. I raised my head to look at Kuroka and asked, ¡°Why are you standing there?¡± ¡°I just felt like that this is my spot nya! Also, I could look at Riku-sama nape when you were in youkai form from this angle nya!¡± I blinked my eyes a few times and said, ¡°Is that so? Then that¡¯s fine.¡± After a while, Tsura brought two female Exorcists which wore a white robe over their clothes inside the room. They were looking around the room until finally Tsura pointed at the couch across from me and said. ¡°Please take a seat.¡± ¡°Thank you!¡± Said one of the Exorcists with an energetic tone. I looked at them with a smile on my face as I crossed my arms. The Exorcists sat on the couch in front of me and I asked, ¡°So, why did the Church send the two of you here?¡± RaizarP Author Here~ More than 55 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks for the Squad Leader!! - Kuba 15 - Siddhartha Steakley Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 71 – Chasing the Exorcist Away The two Exorcists in front of me took off their robes at the same time. They were both girls, the left one had short blue hair with green strands in her bangs. While the other girls had light brown hair that was tied in twin-tail. Strange, the energy that I felt earlier was bigger than them. I tried to spread my senses again and I caught one energy that stayed outside of this apartment. I glanced at Tsura who stood beside Kuroka and she just tilted her head in confusion. ¡®So there were 3 energies? Also, the last one managed to fool even Tsura. Interesting.¡¯ ¡°Hmm, why don¡¯t you introduce yourself first?¡± I asked them while leaning my back against the couch. ¡°My name is Xenovia Quarta, an Exorcist from the Catholic Church.¡± Xenovia introduced herself as she put her right hand over her chest. ¡°My name is Irina Shido! Also an Exorcist, but I came from Protestant Church.¡± Introduced Irina while raising her hand. ¡°I see, I guessed that you knew me already, so I don¡¯t need to introduce myself, right?¡± I said as I relaxed my arms and looked at them with a smile on my face with my right eye closed. ¡°Indeed we are. We know that you are Nurarihyon¡¯s son, Nura Riku.¡± Answered Xenovia as she nodded her head. ¡°Good, if you know. Then you will tell me your reason for being here.¡± As I said that, I let out my Fear and black smoke appeared from my body, floating to the thin air. Irina and Xenovia immediately went alert with the sudden pressure that they felt. Xenovia narrowed her eyes as she moved her right hand, ready to call her weapon anytime. Irina was also put her guard up and held her left wrist with her right hand, touching the Excalibur Mimic that was turned into a bracelet in her left hand. Now that I realized it, the second Excalibur Shard was brought by the third person that stood outside of my apartment. ¡°Don¡¯t be afraid, I¡¯m just taking a precaution because I was attacked by an Exorcist a few times. His name was Freed Sellzen, maybe you know that man?¡± Seemed to expect my question, Irina nodded her head while relaxing her hand, ¡°That man was a stray Exorcist. He discarded his title as Exorcist and went rogue. He had no ties with us! Oh god, please grant that man mercy and let him back to the good side!¡± Irina put his hands together and looked up at the ceiling with closed eyes as she prayed. Xenovia imitated her gesture and said, ¡°Amen.¡± Although they were praying so that Freed would realize his mistake and pay for it, that can¡¯t happen. ¡°Sorry to break it to you, but I killed him.¡± Irina and Xenovia looked at me while blinking their eyes before Irina said, ¡°Oh God! Please make him pay for his mistake in that place! Amen!¡± Strange¡­ that was too strange. Exorcists were a strange bunch of people, I think I won¡¯t be able to get along with them. I preferred someone like my old man or Azazel over Exorcists if all Exorcists were like these girls. I let out a sigh and said, ¡°Just tell me your goal in this town, I am busy.¡± Xenovia nodded her head a little and said, ¡°We wanted to take back the stolen blade. I hope you won¡¯t interfere with us or we will take a rather unpleasant measure.¡± Oh? Are they threatening me? At that moment, I felt the air on my right had turned cold all of a sudden. ¡°Nya! Tsura, calm yourself nya!¡± Kuroka was shouting from behind me and I glanced over to them. I saw Tsura was looking at Xenovia with her cold gaze and then she said, ¡°Don¡¯t ever think of that.¡± The cold air had stopped and the atmosphere turned normal again. Tsura closed her eyes and let out a sigh. I turned my attention to the two Exorcists in front of me and saw them standing up and holding their swords in their hands. Xenovia was holding a blue great sword with golden edges. While Irina was holding a sword that looked like a katana. ¡°Sit down, and hide these swords.¡± I said in a rather relaxing manner, but they didn¡¯t show any sign of sheathing their sword. That was why I amplified my Fear and lifted my chin a little. ¡°Now.¡± Both of the Exorcists'' bodies trembled in Fear. The first one to sheath their swords was Irina. She changed her sword back into the bracelet and looked at Xenovia. ¡°X-Xenovia ¡­ calm down.¡± Xenovia was still glaring at me, but she eventually backed down and made her big sword disappear. I also called back my Fear and they flopped down on the couch again. ¡°Let this be clear to you. This town is under my watch, if you threatened me like that once more time, then I won¡¯t be lenient. Also, make sure the person who was waiting outside of this apartment understand what I said. So, leave this town at once, because what you seek had left this town.¡± They were a pain in my ass, more than the Devils and Azazel combined. I really hope that the Church would send someone with the right mind to visit me instead of these two girls who had flowers in their heads. Even if they were holy swords wielders, the person outside this apartment could have been the one who met me. ¡°The blades were not in this town? But that was different from the report that we got!¡± Xenovia shouted at me as she slammed her hands on the table. I looked at her with my chin raised and said, ¡°Believe it or not, it¡¯s up to you. But, if you made a mess in this town, or any other part of the East Side of Japan, believe it that you will face consequences.¡± I closed my eyes and smiled smugly at them. With this, our discussion was over. I looked back at Tsura and said. ¡°Tsura, can you please escort them out?¡± Tsura bowed her head to me and walked towards the two Exorcists. She stood in the hallway that lead towards the exit and gestured to Irina and Xenovia. ¡°Please this way.¡± Irina and Xenovia glared at me for a second before they stood up and leave the room by following Tsura. After they were gone, Kuroka asked me, ¡°What are you going to do nya, Riku-sama?¡± I crossed my arms and smiled, ¡°I need to visit someplace. I will be counting on you to inform me if anything happened, Kuroka.¡± ¡°Leave it to me nya!¡± I stood up from the couch and teleported away from my apartment. RaizarP Author Here~ More than 55 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks for the New Executive! - Kuba 15 Big Thanks for the New Squad Leader! - Issa Fade Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 72 – Visiting Vatican Two Exorcists had visited me without an appointment, it would be fair if I visit their place too, right? I had never been overseas before, so I didn¡¯t know how to get there. So, I went back to my mansion to pick someone. This was a good time for me to get him what I promised. I teleported back into my room in my mansion and took one of the Phoenix Tears that I got from Sirzechs. I got 2 for myself, while I gave one Phoenix Tear to my old man for him to use in case of emergency. After I got the Phoenix Tear, I went to the courtyard of my mansion while being greeted by the youkai that was running around the mansion. ¡°Good morning, Riku-sama!¡± Shouted a chibi youkai that had smooth white skin. ¡°Morning, Riku-sama!¡± Greeted another youkai that was hanging on the ceiling. ¡°Ou! Do you guys know where Masaomi is?¡± ¡°Masaomi? Ah, he¡¯s in the dojo!¡± The white chibi youkai answered as it raised its hand. ¡°Yeah, he¡¯s training!¡± Added the other. ¡°Thank you, I will bring you something good later.¡± ¡°Something good? Ohagi!¡± ¡°Yay! Ohagi!¡± They began to dance with each other while shouting Ohagi repeatedly. I laughed seeing their dance and finally I headed towards the Dojo to meet Masaomi. Entering the dojo, I saw Masaomi was struggling to swing a wooden sword with his fake legs. He wore a white hakama which suited him for some reason. Seeing that, I really felt bad because I didn¡¯t give him the Phoenix Tears faster. ¡°Masaomi!¡± I shouted at him from the entrance of the dojo while crossing my arms to get his attention. He stopped swinging his sword and turned to me while wiping the sweat that was formed on his face with his sleeves. ¡°Oh, Riku-sama? What are you doing here?¡± Asked Masaomi as he smiled. I smiled at him while approaching him. I took the Phoenix Tear from my pocket and handed it to him, ¡°Drink this and you will get your legs back.¡± Masaomi took the Phoenix Tear with a surprised face. He held it with both of his hands after he discarded the wooden sword to the floor. ¡°This is¡­ Could it be?!¡± ¡°Phoenix Tear, as promised, I will give your legs back.¡± ¡°Thank you¡­ really, thank you very much.¡± Said Masaomi as he sat down on the floor. He began to take off the fake legs that he used all this time and opened the Phoenix Tear bottle cap. But, when he was about to drink the Phoenix Tear, I stopped him. ¡°Wait.¡± Masaomi stopped and looked at me with a confused face. I ignored him and extended my right hand towards the Phoenix Tear and touched it. ¡°Phoenix Tear will have its healing effect enhanced, it will be able to cure anything, even growing a new limb.¡± I used my Sacred Gear to change the probability and it drained more energy than I thought. It drained more energy compared to my fight with Vali, which meant I will not be able to change something inevitable. Phoenix Tear was able to heal any wound, but I don¡¯t really know if it will be able to grow a limb. Even Azazel in the canon was using a fake arm instead of healing it with Phoenix Tear, so I need to do this much to make sure. ¡°You may drink it now.¡± Masaomi nodded his head and gulped the Phoenix Tear. The sight that happened next was a bit disgusting. His flesh around his legs began to move and it grow into new legs slowly. Masaomi was screaming in pain and he threw away the empty flask from his hand. I looked away as I scratched the back of my head with my right hand. Somehow, I felt bad again giving him the Phoenix Tear. The sight was too gruesome even for me who cut Freed¡¯s head and Masaomi stray devil form¡¯s legs¡­ right, I was the one who cut his legs. Masaomi¡¯s scream stopped after a minute and then he called out to me. ¡°Riku-sama¡­ thank you¡± I turned to look at him who was now standing with his own legs with a smile on his face. He pulled up his Hakama and showed me his new legs. ¡°I can now serve again to the fullest.¡± He bowed his head to me as he said that. ¡°Don¡¯t worry about it. More importantly, do you know the way to the Church Headquarters?¡± Masaomi raised his head and blinked a few times, ¡°Church Headquarters? I believe they were based in the Vatican.¡± ¡°Can you teleport to the Vatican?¡± I asked Masaomi as I smiled. ¡°I tried teleporting a few times and it was a success. I believe I can teleport to Vatican.¡± Hearing Masaomi¡¯s answer, I transformed into my youkai form and closed my right eye. ¡°Then let¡¯s go to Vatican. We have a Church to visit.¡± Masaomi looked at me with his eyes widened in surprise, ¡°What happened this time, Riku-sama?¡± He let out a sigh as if he expected something big happened. Well, I just want to visit the Church and meet one of their higher-ups to talk about something. ¡°Two Exorcists named Xenovia Quarta and Shido Irina had visited me earlier. They didn¡¯t believe what I said, so I wanted to talk to their higher-up, it''s that simple.¡± Masaomi¡¯s body stiffened when he heard Irina¡¯s name. Well, that was to be expected, after all, Irina was the daughter of his friend. ¡°Shido, was it? Was he there too?¡± ¡°Who?¡± I asked Masaomi while tilting my head a little. ¡°Please don¡¯t act dumb, Riku-sama. You definitely investigate me and my origin, there was no way you would accept someone like me in your Hyakki Yakkou without even investigating me.¡± Masaomi laughed as he said that. I didn¡¯t do it though. I just knew from my fragmented memories from my previous life. I had forgotten most of my previous life because I thought it was unnecessary in this life, but I still remember some big events in the canon. ¡°Hahahaha, that¡¯s why let¡¯s visit Vatican. There was a third person that came with the Exorcists, but I don¡¯t know who that person was. Find it by yourself in Vatican.¡± ¡°Well, that¡¯s fair. Then let¡¯s go, Riku-sama.¡± Masaomi approached me and then a blue magic circle appeared under our feet. The next thing that my eyes saw was a European building and a marvelous Church in front of me. ¡°We¡¯ve arrived, this is the Church that was used as Headquarters in Vatican City.¡± Said Masaomi. I smiled as I took a step forward, ¡°Let¡¯s intrude them.¡± RaizarP Author Here~ More than 55 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks for the New Executive! - Kuba 15 Big Thanks for the New Squad Leader! - Patrick kaspar - ItsDragonKing Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 73 – Vasco Strada I walked towards the Church in my youkai from with Masaomi walking behind me. He was still wearing his Hakama, so he became the center of attention immediately. Well, there were only a few people here as it was still dark and the sun has yet to rise. As this was Vatican Church, and it was located in Rome, it was still 3 A.M here. Some priests were walking here and there, but they just ignored us after glancing at us for a second. As we were walking towards the entrance of the church, Masaomi asked, ¡°Riku-sama, what is your reason for visiting Vatican¡¯s church?¡± I looked at Masaomi over my shoulder and said, ¡°I just wanted to visit their place, any problem?¡± ¡°Haa- nothing. But, why did you invite me to go with you?¡± Asked Masaomi as he put his arms inside his Hakama¡¯s sleeves. He looked at me with a serious face, ¡°Is it because I¡¯m a former exorcist?¡± I turned to look at the church entrance that was right in front of me and stopped on my track, ¡°Who knows?¡± I looked up and see the massive door that stood 2,5 meters tall. It was really big for a door, as expected of the headquarters of the church. I tried to open it with my right hand, but it won¡¯t budge even a little, ¡°It¡¯s locked.¡± I turned to look at Masaomi and saw him sweating from his forehead. His face was a bit pale and he gritted his teeth as if he was holding something. Oh right, I forgot about it. He¡¯s a devil right now. I put my arm on his shoulder and called the power of my Sacred Gear. ¡°The probability of holy energy affecting Masaomi would be reduced greatly.¡± I pulled my hand away and crossed my arms, ¡°How is it?¡± ¡°It¡¯s better, thank you.¡± I looked back at the church and looked around to see another entrance, ¡°Do you know any other entrance? A window is fine.¡± Masaomi touched his chin and rubbed it with his right hand, ¡°Hmm, it¡¯s been a long time since I visited the church. But, I believe there is an open window on the highest floor of this church. But¡­¡± ¡°But what?¡± I turned to look at Masaomi and asked him with a curious tone. ¡°The window leads to the room of Cardinal-Priest, Vasco Strada.¡± When I heard the name, I grinned and looked up at the highest window. ¡°Could it be¡­ you wanted to enter from there?¡± Asked Masaomi with a surprised tone. ¡°Well, either you follow me or be left behind in this place, it¡¯s your choice.¡± I jumped towards the roof of the church after I said that. I could jump to the highest window in one jump, but that will destroy the ground so I restrained myself from doing that. The roof was made like stairs, so it took me three jumps to arrive at the highest window that was opened. All this time, I didn¡¯t spread my Senjutsu to avoid getting my presence known. So, I just relied on my natural sense to find someone. In the room where the window was opened, I could feel someone strong. I knew it even without my senjutsu. I landed on the railing of the window while holding the top side of the railing with my right hand. I stood while leaning my back against the window frame and looked inside the room. Inside the room were varieties of types of furniture. White closet with gold decoration, white chair, and white table. There was a simple bed on the edge of the room, right beside the window. The bed was big, around 3 meters long and 2 meters wide. On top of the bed was a person, an old person wearing a priest grab while looking at me. He had white hair and there was an X scar on his face. But, the most surprising thing was his body. He was big and muscular, his priest grab can¡¯t hide the lining of his body. ¡°Look who we have here, the hairstyle that defied the gravity. Wearing Kimono that came from Japan, and that confident look. Isn¡¯t it Nurarihyon? No, his son?¡± The man smiled at me while slapping his thighs a few times. Another big shot that knew my old man, somehow it was not surprising. Masaomi arrived after the man said those words. He stood on the roof of the church and said. ¡°Riku-sama, please don¡¯t jump so suddenly. You had no idea¡­¡± Masaomi stopped talking as he saw the man inside the room. ¡°Vasco Strada-sama.¡± He bowed his head a little before he raised his head again. The buffed man, Vasco Strada had a surprised look on his face that lasted for a few seconds. ¡°You are¡­ So you are alive?¡± Asked Vasco Strada as a small smile formed on his face. ¡°Yes, I am. But¡­ it came with a cost.¡± Answered Masaomi. ¡°I saw that, but it¡¯s good that you were alive. I¡¯m sorry that I can¡¯t save you at that time. The majority voted that decision to maintain the status quo.¡± ¡°I knew about it, but it was still ¡­ I¡¯m sorry.¡± Masaomi looked away from Vasco Strada and stopped himself from talking any further. ¡°Don¡¯t apologize, that was our fault.¡± Said Vasco Strada as he released a sigh. He then looked at me and asked, ¡°Is this your goal of coming here? Then I am grateful for that.¡± ¡°Hmm, no? I just visited this place because three exorcists were entering Kuoh Town.¡± I entered the room and walked to the nearby chair in front of Vasco Strada as I said that. Masaomi also entered the room through the window, but he just stood near the window while looking at us. ¡°Ah, those three. So they arrived at Kuoh Town? What about them?¡± Asked Vasco Strada with a curious tone. I leaned my back against the chair¡¯s backrest and looked up at the ceiling, ¡°The thing is, I have a feeling that the two of them, the girls, will cause a lot of trouble. Not only that, the blade that they need to find had left Kuoh Town.¡± I turned to look at Vasco Strada and said, ¡°So, can you tell them to go back to the Vatican? The two girls and the third person who loves hiding his/her identity.¡± ¡°The blade was not in Kuoh Town? I see, our information was outdated. We need to find those blades as soon as possible, but that will be hard, huh.¡± Vasco said as he put his hands together and looked at me. ¡°So, the real reason why you visit this place is?¡± He smiled and asked with a serious tone. ¡°Here is the thing, Church had asked youkai to help them to find Excalibur Shards, right?¡± Vasco nodded his head to confirm my question. ¡°I found one, but I don¡¯t want to give it back to the Church. I wanted that guy who stood there silently to use it. It was Excalibur Rapidly by the way.¡± Vasco¡¯s eyes widened in surprise before he smiled. Masaomi was also got surprised by my words, but he didn¡¯t say anything because he knew that it will be useless. ¡°Interesting, fine. But, the rest of the Excalibur Shards will be back to the Church. I¡¯m sorry but, I need to make sure that sword ended in the right hand after¡­ something.¡± When he said the last part, his word was a bit forced. ¡°That¡¯s fine, so we have a deal?¡± I asked Vasco as I extended my right hand. He took my right hand with his big hand and shook it, ¡°We have a deal. I will ask Griselda to move out of Kuoh Town immediately.¡± RaizarP Author Here~ More than 55 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks for the New Executive! - Kuba 15 - Cameron Kilzer Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 74 – Preparation Complete ¡°Griselda? As in Griselda Quarta? She was the one who accompany those two girls?¡± I asked Vasco while leaning my head closer. I was interested in Griselda. She was the top 5 female Exorcists and she had 6 wings after she reincarnated as an Angel. A lot of people who read the series underestimate the power of 6 winged Angel, more so because they were defeated by the Main Cast rather easily. But, the Angel or Fallen who had 6 Wings or more was strong, maybe they could fight Kubinashi evenly. And that was an understatement, Kubinashi was one of my strongest subordinates if he didn¡¯t hold himself back. ¡°Oho, you did say that you could feel the hidden one, but you don¡¯t know about her.¡± Vasco looked at me with an amused look on his face. I shrugged my shoulder and shook my head, ¡°What can I say, I supervised the whole town because that is my job in that town. Not only the town, but I also need to look at the Devils to make sure they didn¡¯t do anything that endangers the civilians.¡± Vasco had a surprised expression, but then he smiled, ¡°I see¡­¡± We were talking for a rather long time after that. Masaomi also joined in our conversation as he took a seat on my right. Talking with that old man was somehow fun, maybe because he was the rather rational member of this Church. The sun had risen in the distance, and it was our time to leave. ¡°Well, we have to leave. I will leave the matters of those girls to you, Vasco. If you need any help, you can contact me in my mansion located in Kanto or my apartment in Kuoh Town.¡± I said as I walked to the window and put my right foot on the window frame as I looked at Vasco over my shoulder. ¡°Yeah, if you need my help you can contact me too. I can¡¯t do much, but I will try to help.¡± I flashed a smile at him and jumped down the window. Masaomi followed me shortly from behind and we landed rather safely on the ground. Rather safely, I mean we were surrounded by Priests that began to wake up and did their activities. They were looking at us with wary on their eyes, but at that moment someone was shouting. ¡°They are fine! Let them walk and continue your activities!¡± I looked up at the shout and saw Vasco standing in front of the window while crossing his arms. The Priests began to move away from us, but there was still someone curious about us. I nodded my head a little at Vasco and then I make a magic circle and teleported us back to my apartment. We were inside the living room, which I previously called an all-purpose room. There was no one in my apartment, they were already at school. ¡°Now, Masaomi. Because we had permission, no, because Vasco had given us the sword, I think it¡¯s time for you to wield it.¡± I looked at Masaomi with a smile on my face as I walked toward the bedroom. When I entered the bedroom, the bed was in a mess. Clothes littering everywhere, there was even underwear on the ground. ¡®Hagoromo Gitsune! She didn¡¯t even tidy the bedroom!¡¯ I quickly closed the door and said, ¡°I think it¡¯s better if you wait outside, Masaomi.¡± I ignored the clothes and underwear on the ground and walked towards the closet. I opened the closet and saw that the thing inside the closet was not touched even once. I took the Excalibur Rapidly that I hid using my Fear. I canceled the Fear that I used to wrap the sword and went out of the room. Masaomi stood in front of the bedroom with eyes full of expectation. He was a former Exorcist, maybe he was excited to get his hand on Excalibur. But, he can¡¯t wield it yet, mainly because of his devil body. I raised my right hand that held the Excalibur Rapidly¡¯s hilt and extended it toward Masaomi. ¡°This is Excalibur Rapidly. I will use my Sacred Gear to make it possible for you to wield it, but maybe you will be in pain when you wield this sword because of its holy aura. I can¡¯t cancel that, not yet. Do you want to wield this sword?¡± Masaomi looked at the sword for a while before nodding his head, ¡°Yes, please let me. I am ready for the pain, but I just need this sword as my Trump Card, don¡¯t I?¡± While that was true, I knew that he will use this sword sooner or later. Holy Sword was not compatible with Devil, but I hope he will be able to hold it until the Peace Conference. That way, I could ask Michael to tweak the system a little to give Masaomi the ability to wield the holy sword without harming himself. I handed the sword to Masaomi and called my Sacred Gear¡¯s power. I made it that Masaomi could wield Excalibur Rapidly with no problem. Masaomi took the hilt of the sword and his face grimaced in pain a little before turning normal again. ¡°I thought I will be burned or something, but it was just like holding my hand near a burning candle. It¡¯s a bit distracting, but it¡¯s fine for me.¡± Masaomi took a step back and swung the Excalibur a few times. He nodded in satisfaction and bowed his head at me. ¡°Thank you, Riku-sama. I will live up to your expectation.¡± I nodded at him and told him to go back to the mansion. He teleported back to the mansion and I changed my Kimono into my school uniform. I went out to the city, walking around while spreading my Senjutsu to make sure that nothing was wrong. Shirone was attending the school again, so I guessed that her training with Magari was done. This was good. Tomorrow was the Rating Game that will be held in the arena that I accidentally made behind the school building. I had no plan of watching the Rating Game, but I will at least get myself prepared for trouble. After the Rating Game ended, it will be the time. I guessed it, no, I was expecting it. Kokabiel¡¯s attack, I know when he will launch his attack. The day when Rias lost the match and the marriage between two houses was held, will be the signal for Kokabiel¡¯s attack. I smiled as I looked up at the bright sky, imagining it to be filled with flying people with black wings. The thought of it made me a bit angry, but I can¡¯t deny that I was excited by Kokabiel¡¯s attack. That will be my first time to fight a war, although it was on a small scale. RaizarP Author Here~ More than 55 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks for the New Executive! - Cameron Kilzer Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 75 – The Rating Game The day of the Rating Game had come. Hagoromo Gitsune and I were standing on the roof of Kuoh Academy while watching the devils that were talking inside the old school building. The devils were Sona¡¯s group, Rias¡¯s group, and then Riser¡¯s group. Grayfia was also inside the building to act as Riser¡¯s deterrent in case he wanted to do something to me or the civilians of this town. Kuroka and Tsura were standing by at my mansion, ready to teleport my Hyakki Yakkou at any moment. Shirone refused to come, saying that she didn¡¯t want to meet with Rias yet. ¡°So what is this Rating Game?¡± Asked Hagoromo Gitsune as she looked at me. I turned to her and smiled, ¡°As the name said, it was a game. Mainly for the Devils to show off their power as well as their peerage¡¯s power in a simulation of war between 2 Kings. But, at the end of the day, it¡¯s a game, not a real war.¡± ¡°In other words, they were just playing around.¡± Said Hagoromo Gitsune as she looked back at the devils who just went out of the old school building. Grayfia noticed our presence and looked at us from the distance. She nodded her head a little before following the other devils towards the venue of the Rating Game. Sona and her peerage walked towards the school though. Maybe they wanted to watch the Rating Game from her office. As expected, the devils were fast workers. They made a whole arena in the clearing that I made in a night. The arena was simple, with a wall around the clearing and the smooth ground. It was shaped like a rectangle, with two sides to start for each peerage. This Rating Game would be a direct brawl between two peerages. This will be interesting as Rias seems to get Gasper out of his room. The time stop ability would be convenient for Rias¡¯s peerage as Issei seems to be able to move when the Forbidden Balor View was activated. ¡°That woman who noticed us, she seems to be strong.¡± Hagoromo Gitsune said as her gaze followed Grayfia. I also looked at Grayfia and answered Hagoromo Gitsune. ¡°She is the Queen of Satan, Sirzechs Lucifer. She is called the strongest Queen. You know what Queen is in Devils¡¯ term, right? I know that Tsura taught you about this world.¡± ¡°Of course. That girl taught me everything, and I know about the Queen. So she¡¯s the strongest Queen, huh? When I was attacked by that red-haired girl, I was disappointed because, for an existence known as the devil, they were too weak. But the existence of that gray-haired girl makes me think twice.¡± ¡°Long living species was like that. A hundred years of training will not be able to make them strong. But, some of them were special. They will achieve unimaginable strength through unimaginable means in just a year.¡± As I said that, I looked at Issei. The Main Character of DxD, who can match the strong one in this world in just a few years. Not only that, he achieved that strength through his desire to be a harem king, such nonsense. Even I need a few years before I reached this point. Years of training to be exact. I didn¡¯t train as of late until I wanted to master Matoi a few days ago. Since then, I trained myself more, to be able to achieve my Balance Breaker. ¡°Is that so, then this world is really fucked up.¡± Said Hagoromo Gitsune. I turned to her and laughed out loud, ¡°You¡¯re right, this world is fucked up. Now, shall we watch the Rating Game, or do you want to go home and sleep?¡± ¡°I am bored right now, maybe I will watch the Rating Game. I wanted to know the game of the devils.¡± Hagoromo Gitsune smiled and turned away as she said that. ¡°Really? I thought you won¡¯t be interested in something like this.¡± I also turned around and followed Hagoromo Gitsune. We went downstairs and went to the student council room. On the way to the student council room, Hagoromo Gitsune stopped her track and looked at me. ¡°Say, I had this feeling. But, there is this person in that group earlier that held a grudge against you, right?¡± She began to walk again after she said that. I just crossed my arms and smiled at her, causing Hagoromo Gitsune to sigh. We reached the student council room and I could feel Sona and her peerage presence inside. I opened the door with my left hand and entered the room without minding their gaze. Hagoromo Gitsune also entered the room behind me. The room had changed, the couches were lined up and the table was placed in the middle of the couch. In front of the couch was a big screen that showed the arena that was built in the clearing. Sona sat on the right couch and her peerage stood behind her while looking at us. Unexpectedly, Sona didn¡¯t even blink her eyes when she saw me and just said. ¡°I prepared your seat.¡± Man, she was just too prepared and used to my behavior. She even prepared my seat without me telling her to. I walked to the couch on the left and sat on the right side of the couch. Hagoromo Gitsune sat on my left then Tsubaki approached us. ¡°Do you want a tea?¡± I looked at Tsubaki and smiled, ¡°I will take a green tea.¡± Tsubaki nodded her head and looked at Hagoromo Gitsune next. When she looked at Hagoromo Gitsune, she was a bit wary of her, ¡°Green tea. Do you have a snack too?¡± ¡°Yes, I will bring some cookies with the tea.¡± Answered Tsubaki as she fixed her glasses. ¡°Then I will take that.¡± Tsubaki went to the corner of the room that was filled with equipment to make a tea after she bowed her head at us. ¡°Nura, this is your first time watching Rating Game, right? Do you want me to explain it to you?¡± Sona asked me while holding a teacup in her hand and looking at me. I looked straight at her eyes before closing my eyes and said, ¡°No thanks. I know the basic.¡± ¡°Is that so?¡± Sona said with a disappointed tone and turned her gaze towards the screen. I also turned my gaze to the screen and saw that the two peerages had prepared themselves on each side. Rias had a confident smile on her face while Riser had a rather unruly smile on his face. I was confused. Rias was looking down all the time when she was here a few days ago, but right now she had a confident smile. Where did she get her confidence back? ¡°That man with yellow hair, he was rather sick, didn¡¯t he? Why does his group consist of women? Where is the man?¡± Asked Hagoromo Gitsune as she crossed her legs. She frowned when she saw Riser¡¯s peerage that was full of women. ¡°You said so, but you are a woman, right?¡± I looked at Hagoromo Gitsune with a smile and tease her. ¡°Don¡¯t make a fool of yourself, I am strong. Those girls in his group, they are weak.¡± Sona who silently listened to our conversation suddenly said, ¡°It began.¡± I turned to look at the screen and smiled. ¡®Now, how it will turn out?¡¯ RaizarP Author Here~ More than 55 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks for the New Executive! - Cameron Kilzer - Dragonking 1581 Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 76 – Boring Game and my Turn ¡°Now, the Rating Game between Rias Gremory-sama and Riser Phenex-sama will start.¡± Two women appeared on the screen and announced the start of the Rating Game. They explained the rules of the Rating Game to Rias and Riser and they acknowledged the rules without much thought. It was the basic rule as no killing, and about surrendering the game. After the rules were read, both sides were given 5 minutes to talk with their group about their plan. Rias¡¯s group discussed intensely while Riser¡¯s group just looked at Rias¡¯s group on the other side while sneering. ¡°Hmm, If I guessed correctly, then Riser would win.¡± I said as I leaned my back against the couch and touched my chin with my right hand. ¡°Isn¡¯t that obvious?¡± Hagoromo Gitsune sneered at me while looking at the screen. ¡°That girl had nothing that it takes to be a leader like me or you.¡± Sona was intrigued by our conversation looked at us and asked, ¡°What do you mean?¡± ¡°The Rating game had started, but Rias was still discussing their plan. That meant, she had no confidence or trust in her subordinates.¡± I said while snapping my finger then pointed my index finger to the screen. ¡°Riser, on the other hand, had prepared for everything and analyzed Rias¡¯s group. The Rating Game 5 minutes preparation before the start of the game must¡¯ve been used to analyze the opponent¡¯s condition, not discussing a plan. If it¡¯s me who stood in Rias¡¯s place, I will provoke my opponent with a quip or threaten them.¡± As soon as I said that, a voice sounded from the speaker of the screen. ¡°Oi Rias! Just surrender. You must¡¯ve known that you can¡¯t beat Riser!¡± Riser shouted to Rias with a wild smile on his face. I smiled at his provocation and looked at Sona, ¡°See?¡± Sona was surprised, but then she nodded her head. ¡°I see, so that¡¯s why Riser didn¡¯t discuss anything with his peerage? I learned something.¡± Well, I thought the reason why Riser didn¡¯t discuss anything with his peerage was because of his arrogance and confidence. He came here with the thought of winning, unlike Rias who wanted to escape from her marriage. I glued my eyes back to the screen to see Rias¡¯s reaction. Rias was frowning after she heard Riser¡¯s provocation, and her valiant knight who was also a pervert stepped in front of her and pointed his finger towards Riser. ¡°Just wait and I will kick your ass up!¡± Issei put on a serious expression on his face as he shouted that. After he got satisfied, he looked at Rias and whispered something. Unfortunately, the microphone was not able to get his voice so we can¡¯t hear what he said. But Rias smiled at Issei and then he started having his pervert expression on his face. ¡°Riku, you better make him stay away from me or I will accidentally kill him.¡± Said Hagoromo Gitsune. I looked at her and saw her having a disgusted expression as she looked at Issei. Somehow, without looking at her I knew that Sona was looking at us with a horrified expression. I nodded at Hagoromo Gitsune¡¯s word and said, ¡°Don¡¯t worry. I had warned him.¡± ¡°Good, I really hate perverts.¡± She looked at the screen again after she said that. Both sides had finished their preparation and now they were looking at each other intensively. After a few seconds, Kiba ran towards the middle of the arena at a fast speed, followed by Issei. Akeno¡¯s clothes had changed into a Miko outfit and she spread her wing to fly. She flew above Rias and then extended her hand towards Riser¡¯s peerage. Riser¡¯s queen also spread her wings and fly. She held her staff in her right hand and pointed it towards Akeno. The next moment, both of them had aura covering their body. Akeno was surrounded by a yellow aura while Riser¡¯s queen, Yubelluna, was surrounded by a purple aura. They were talking in the sky before they sent an attack towards each other. Akeno was attacking using her thunder while Yubelluna was creating a bomb with her magic that managed to destroy Akeno¡¯s clothes. On the ground, Kiba was fighting against the twins that wield chainsaws and twins nekomata. He was fighting against four people, but Kiba was able to hold his ground. He was a bit stronger compared to a few days ago when Hagoromo Gitsune trashed him. Issei was fighting against Riser¡¯s knight, he was helped by Gasper that stopped time. I was not affected at all as we were a distance away from them. But, Issei¡¯s movement on the screen was a bit weird. He sometimes disappeared before appearing behind his enemy and punching them. This happened a few times and then Issei managed to reach the last guard of Riser, Ravel. The girl who wore a pink dress and had drill hair, Ravel Phenex. Issei was shouting ¡°Promotion!¡± and gained the strength of Queen¡¯s piece before he gathered energy in front of his left hand and shot his killer technique, Dragon Shot. Ravel managed to dodge the attack and Riser asked Ravel to go back as he will destroy Issei himself. Akeno who faced Yubelluna was defeated and Yubelluna drank a Phoenix Tear to recover herself. She then flew towards Rias and Asia who stood behind the line watching the fight. Asia cowered in fear, but Rias spread her wing and met Yubelluna in the sky. They were talking about something before she fight Yubelluna by shooting her POD ball toward her. As they fought in the sky, Kiba managed to defeat Riser¡¯s pawn and made his way towards Issei and Riser who duked it out. Their fight was intense, Issei managed to boost himself 5 times while Riser flew around the sky with his flame wings. Gasper was laying on the floor before he melted into a light, teleported away from the arena because he can¡¯t continue the fight. Kiba was blocked by Ravel and they fought with each other. Kiba sent slashes after slashes which Ravel dodged by flying to the sky. She threw fireballs at Kiba from the sky and kept her distance away. Issei who fought with Riser had a hard time. He was frowning while Riser was laughing hard. Finally, Issei was burned by Riser¡¯s flame, causing him to get teleported away from the arena. Rias who saw that finally surrendered and her knees gave up. She kneeled on the ground while looking down. Looking at the display, I could see that they were doing better and stronger from the canon, but Shirone was not there to help her. They could win, but they were too confident and didn¡¯t account for the possibility of losing. I stood up from the couch and walked away because the game was done. Sona just had her gaze glued on the screen and muttered. ¡°Rias¡­¡± Hagoromo Gitsune followed me quietly and we exited the room together. After we exited the room, Hagoromo Gitsune flicked her hair to the back and said. ¡°That was game, indeed. They even teleport the injured away when they clearly could fight.¡± She smiled at me as she said that. ¡°Right, they didn¡¯t account for the desire of the player and just let them go away after they got injured at some degree. It¡¯s clear that the cornered rat was more dangerous than a cat.¡± ¡°And I experienced that two times.¡± Added Hagoromo Gitsune. ¡°Well, let¡¯s prepare for our war. I had spread my senses since the start of the game, and they had arrived earlier than I had expected.¡± ¡°Oh? Finally, it¡¯s our turn? Shall I call for my Hyakki Yakkou too?¡± I looked at Hagoromo Gitsune and smiled smugly, ¡°That¡¯s why Kuroka and Tsura are in my mansion. They could teleport both of our Hyakki Yakkou with no problem.¡± We exited the school and I transformed myself into my youkai form. Kanto was not too far from Kuoh¡¯s Town. I spread my senjutsu bigger than usual and I managed to cover even Kanto with it. Then I sent Kuroka a signal that it was the time for war. She sent a signal back to me and then I smiled, ¡°Let¡¯s begin.¡± RaizarP Author Here~ More than 55 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks for the New Executive! - Dragonking 1581 Big Thanks for the New Squad Leader! - maxime przybyl Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 77 – The beginning of the War The first one to arrive was Tsuchigumo and Shirone. They were teleported by Shirone who stand by in Kyoto after I told Kuroka that I got a bad feeling about Kokabiel. ¡°Yo! It¡¯s the time?¡± Tsuchigumo was crouching while smoking from his pipe. He looked at me with a smile on his face and blew the smoke up to the sky. ¡°Yeah, they are coming.¡± I answered Tsuchigumo as I crossed my arms. The devils that were in the arena became restless after Tsuchigumo arrived without concealing his presence. I could feel Grayfia made her way here by herself and Sona was peeking through the window from the student council room. Shirone approached me and Hagoromo Gitsune then pulled my sleeves. ¡°Riku-senpai, do you need me here?¡± I looked down at Shirone who was looking at me with hopeful eyes and smiled, ¡°If you wanted to help, then I am counting on you.¡± Shirone nodded her head and released my sleeves, ¡°I will help.¡± A moment later, Grayfia arrived at our location and was surprised when she see Tsuchigumo. Tsuchigumo looked at Grayfia and stroked his chin, ¡°Hmm, is this the enemy that you are talking about?¡± He leaned closer to look at Grayfia with an interested gaze. Grayfia stepped back and looked at me, trying to find an explanation. ¡°No, she¡¯s not. Our enemy have wings that looked like Tengu wings. You will recognize them at a first glance.¡± ¡°Is that so? I don¡¯t mind fighting with this lady though.¡± Tsuchigumo pulled his head away from Grayfia and sat on the ground with crossed legs. Grayfia was dumbfounded after Tsuchigumo said that. But she was able to recover quickly and approached me. ¡°Nura Riku, what is the meaning of this?¡± Asked Grayfia. From the distance, I could feel Sona running towards us in hurry with Tsubaki. She exited the school building rather quickly and then she shouted when she saw me. ¡°Nura! What are you doing?!¡± She arrived right in front of me while trying to catch her breath. Perfect, both of them were here and I just need to explain it one time. ¡°Hmm, where should I start? Well, I will explain it to you in a simple manner.¡± I stroked my chin and looked at Grayfia and Sona with a smile. ¡°In simple terms¡­¡± As I said that, Kuroka and Tsura appeared behind me and Hagoromo Gitsune alongside our Hyakki Yakkou. ¡°There will be a war in this place, so I suggest you run away to the underworld.¡± The thick fog began forming in the school area, it shrouded the area around us. The youkai behind us had a wide smile on their face. They were excited to be able to get an action for the first time in this world. ¡°War?¡± Asked Sona as her eyes widened. ¡°Who is your enemy, Nura Riku? Why did you bring your army in this Kuoh Town even though you didn¡¯t want to destroy this town?¡± Grayfia glared at me as she asked that. Good question, I wanted them to know their place in this, so I answered her. ¡°Truthfully, this was caused by you guys. Kokabiel wanted to resume the Great War between 3 Factions. This town had become collateral damage in that. In another word, I will expect you guys to help me build this town from the scratch again in case it got destroyed.¡± Grayfia was frowning, but she nodded her head in agreement. ¡°Fine, I will take Rias-sama and Phenex-sama to the underworld now. I bid you luck.¡± Grayfia turned around and ran towards the arena after leaving those words. Sona and Tsubaki on the other hand hadn¡¯t recovered yet from their surprise. I approached Sona and chopped her head to make her snap out of her surprise. ¡°Ouch! That hurt!¡± ¡°Have you recovered? Then go away and teleport back to the underworld with your peerage.¡± I said to Sona, and she finally nodded her head and turned around. She ran towards the building to meet her peerage. ¡°They are a funny bunch. How can they leave us and run like that after you told them?¡± Tsuchigumo blew smoke to the sky as he asked. ¡°They are devils, what did you expect? I gained their leader¡¯s favor for forgiving his sister, now he will owe me again after saving his sister.¡± I smiled at Tsuchigumo as I said that. ¡°You are a shrewd individual. Now, when will they arrive?¡± ¡°Soon, a few minutes.¡± I answered Tsuchigumo and turned to look at Kuroka. ¡°Kuroka, I am counting on you to make the barrier.¡± ¡°Of course nya!¡± Answered Kuroka energetically. She extended her hands towards the sky and a purple spherical barrier was formed and engulfed the whole city. The barrier had the effect to make the human who never got involved with Supernatural fell asleep and forbid the entry of the other humans. Not only that, it was a different dimension. So the damage that was done inside the barrier will get repaired as soon as the barrier was brought down. As soon as the barrier was put up, I saw Tsura approach me while holding a blue Haori. She handed the blue Haori to me and I wore it over my shoulder. On the back of the Haori, there is a Fear kanji that represented Nura Clan. I smiled and walked in front of my Hyakki Yakkou. Hagoromo Gitsune jumped on top of a giant skeleton with red eyes, Gasadokuro, and sat on his skull. I was still wearing my school uniform, but it didn¡¯t matter. I spread my senjutsu and covered the whole town. I was waiting for Kokabiel and his army to arrive, and it seems I didn¡¯t need to wait for too long. A few seconds after I spread my senjutsu, Kokabiel and his army start entering the town one by one. They were massive, but they are less than what I had expected. I was expecting 3000 fallen angels, but they were just around 1200 fallen angels. But that was still a massive army. ¡°Are you lot ready?!¡± I shouted at the youkai in front of me and all of them raised their hand or their body for those who doesn¡¯t have a hand. ¡°¡±OUUUUU!!!¡±¡± ¡°Our enemy was approaching. They have a total of 1200 people! But, they are weak! Let¡¯s show them our power!¡± ¡°I will smash them!¡± Shouted Aotabo as he punched his right hand on his left palm. ¡°Number doesn¡¯t matter. My weapon will slay all of them.¡± Said Kurotabo as he smiled under his hat. ¡°Nobody mess with us.¡± Said Kubinashi as he bit his string. On my side, I saw Hagoromo Gitsune smile and surround her body with her tails. After she re-appeared from her tails, she wore her usual sailor costume and a black bag in her hand. She flicked her hair to the back and crossed her legs. ¡°Let¡¯s show this world the real horror of Kyoto Youkai.¡± At once, the Kyoto Youkai shouted their warcry. ¡°¡±¡±OUUUUU!!! Hagoromo Gitsune-sama!!!¡±¡±¡± ¡°Onee-sama!¡± The youkai who held a skull in her hands looked at Hagoromo Gitsune with a smile on her face. From the distance, a flock of people with black wings appeared in the sky. The Youkai that had wings on our side began to fly to the sky and when they clashed, it will be our signal to start. ¡°Now, we have a war to attend. Follow me!¡± I shrouded myself with my Fear and walked towards the fallen angels in the distance. RaizarP Author Here~ More than 55 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks for the New Executive! - Dragonking 1581 Big Thanks for the New Squad Leader! - Aubrey Powell Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 78 – Youkai vs Fallen Angels Because the real town had been placed in the real dimension and not the one within the barrier, I didn¡¯t need to hold myself back. I marched towards the Fallen Angels in the distance and my Hyakki Yakkou followed me from behind. Masaomi was walking with Kurotabo, Aotabo, and Kubinashi while Hagoromo Gitsune was still sitting on top of Gasadokuro. Gasadokuro was crawling slowly instead of walking, but he was able to match our pace. Kuroka and Tsura were walking right behind me with Shirone. As the Fallen Angels approached us closer, I could see Kokabiel in front of them leading the fallen angels with his 10 wings. There were 3 fallen angels with 6 wings behind him, I guess they were the commander of his army. ¡°Hahahaha, allow me to take that guy in the front.¡± Tsuchigumo laughed as he put his pipe back in his pocket and began to warm his body up. He began to swing his arms around as he walked towards the fallen angels. He crouched and then jumped high towards Kokabiel without waiting for my answer. ¡°That guy never learned.¡± Said Hagoromo Gitsune from my left. Gasadokuro leaned his head near the floor so Hagoromo Gitsune could talk to me. I summoned my Nenekirimaru, held it with my left hand alongside its sheath, and leaned it against my shoulder. I tilted my head backward and looked at Hagoromo Gitsune. ¡°Well, let¡¯s look at him.¡± In the sky, Tsuchigumo had reached Kokabiel and he threw a punch with his right hand. Without missing a beat, 3 fallen angels behind Kokabiel which had 6 wings moved in front of Kokabiel and extended their hands. A big magic circle with purple color was created in front of them and blocked Tsuchigumo¡¯s punch with only a crack on the edge of the magic circle. The fallen angels, especially Kokabiel, were surprised. But the three fallen angels that put on the barrier hardened their expression as they repair the barrier. Tsuchigumo can¡¯t fly, so he sent a barrage of punches and kicked the barrier, and went back to the ground using the force from his kick. The barrier was cracked further with Tsuchigumo¡¯s kick and it broke to pieces. The fallen who witnessed that were beyond surprised and they were about to attack Tsuchigumo only to find him on the ground. Tsuchigumo landed in front of me as dust covered the area from the ground and houses that were destroyed by Tsuchigumo¡¯s landing. He scratched his head and said, ¡°That thing is stronger than I thought.¡± We were now in the residency area, and the fallen angels were flying right on top of us. Kokabiel lowered his altitude, guarded by the three 6 winged fallen, and greeted me. ¡°That was quite a greeting, don¡¯t you think so?¡± ¡°You think so?¡± I looked up at Kokabiel and smirked. I glanced at Kurotabo and he immediately know what I wanted to do. We have been practicing Matoi for a few days, and I did it the most with Kurotabo. He spread his fear and shrouded me with it before he melted into black smoke and became one with my back. For dealing with Kokabiel and his army, we had decided to use Kasane Method. That was why my outfits had changed into checkered sleeves and my school outfit had become black kimono. A tribal black tattoo appeared under my left eye, but I didn¡¯t mind it. I held my Nenekirimaru in my right hand as it was shrouded by black smoke. A lot of weapons protruded from my back and the weapons moved as if they had their own conscious. ¡°Why don¡¯t we start right now?¡± As I said that, I used Touki and jumped towards Kokabiel. The three fallen tried to block me, but my subordinates had blocked them first. The first fallen was bound by Kubinashi¡¯s string and was forced to descend to the ground. ¡°I won¡¯t allow you.¡± Said Kubinashi as he held his string with both his hands and his teeth. The second fallen was punched by Aotabo that jumped faster than me. The fallen hit the ground and faced Aotabo head-on. ¡°Yo, it¡¯s been a long time since I punched someone in the sky.¡± Said Aotabu as he cracked his fist. The third fallen had become prey for Gasadokuro. He was not my subordinates, but the third fallen flew near Gasadokuro so Hagoromo Gitsune instructed him to catch the fallen. The fallen struggled in Gasadokuro¡¯s hand while shouting incomprehensible words. Hagoromo Gitsune spread her fan in front of her mouth and said. ¡°You can crush him.¡± Meanwhile, I used Youjutsu to create a foothold in the sky and stood in front of Kokabiel. ¡°Your army just watching from the sky? Weak.¡± I provoked him with a smirk and he was certainly pissed by it. Kokabiel raised his right hand and swung it forward as he shouted, ¡°Attack!¡± The fallen in the sky began to move together and launched their attack towards the youkai in the sky. But, my subordinates were not that weak. They held their ground in the sky and cut some of those fallen angels¡¯ wings. Tsuchigumo also jumped once again and wroke havoc in the middle of the fallen angels¡¯ formation. In front of me, Kokabiel had his eyes widened in surprise and his other four eyes have appeared on his face. Now with six red eyes of his, he glared at me with a gaze full of hatred. ¡°You, if you had this much strength, why did you let me off that time?!¡± Good question, because I was too wary of him at that time. He was indeed stronger than I thought, but after seeing Sirzechs and Azazel, his power was still way under them. I let out a sigh and looked at Kokabiel with a tired gaze and said, ¡°You ask that? I thought you were running in fear at that time.¡± Kokabiel face had turned ugly as soon as he heard that. He created a big light spear on his right hand and pointed the tip at me. ¡°You!! I thought you were different, but you are the same as those peace lovers!¡± He fired the light spear that was 2 meters in size towards me at a high speed. We were just separated around 10 meters from each other, so the spear had arrived in front of my eyes in less than a second. But, I had used Matoi before I jumped here. Not only that, Kurotabo was the master of weapons, the thousand weapons. Even Sword Birth would not be able to store weapons like what Kurotabo did as Sword Birth was limited to swords. When the light spear almost hit me, weapons began to protrude from my Kimono and blocked the light spear without me doing anything. ¡°You can leave defense to me, Riku-sama.¡± Said Kurotabo. I smiled without answering him and kicked my foothold to rush towards Kokabiel. I reached him under a second which surprised him. Without wasting even a moment, I swung my Nenekirimaru from the left to the right and was about to cut Kokabiel in the stomach. But, contrary to my expectation, Kokabiel managed to put a barrier with his right hand which deflected my swing a little bit. The barrier had a lot of layers, that was why it managed to shift my sword trajectory a little. Instead of cutting his stomach and spilling his guts over, my sword cut his left hand clean. But my attack didn¡¯t end there. Kasane''s method of Matoi wasn¡¯t that weak to be only used as a defense. As my sword cut Kokabiel¡¯s hand, weapons protrudes from my back and stabbed Kokabiel¡¯s body. Once again, Kokabiel managed to put on a barrier in time and was blasted off instead of stabbed by the weapons from my back. The weapon that Kurotabo had was a normal one, they didn¡¯t have any effect like Nenekirimaru. Kokabiel who was blasted off by the force of the weapons tried to gain altitude and looked at me from above. ¡°I see, I need to do this from the start. I underestimate you, Nura Riku. Now, witness my real power.¡± The big magic circle began to form in the sky, big enough to cover the battlefields. The Youkai and Fallen Angels paused their battle and looked at the magic circle in the sky at the same time. They had a bad feeling about the magic circle, and so do I. I need to destroy that magic circle no matter what. So I landed on the ground beside Hagoromo Gitsune and said, ¡°Kurotabo, Izutsu method.¡± RaizarP Author Here~ More than 55 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 79 – The Small War As soon told Kurotabo to change the Method, he separated himself and then melted once again. My clothes didn¡¯t change into Kimono this time, only black overgrown sleeves appeared on my right hand. The fallen angels in the sky began retreating and some of them were feeding magic to the magic circle. Hagoromo Gitsune approached me and jumped from the top of Gasadokuro. She landed right beside me and asked. ¡°What is that? A ritual?¡± She looked at Kokabiel in the sky that reaching his hands out to the magic circle. Tsuchigumo also made his way towards me with Kuroka and Shirone, while Tsura was making an ice barrier on top of the injured youkai and healing the youkai that was injured with Senjutsu in the backline. ¡°Riku-sama! That thing is bad nya!¡± Shouted Kuroka as she pointed to the sky. ¡°Riku-senpai¡­¡± Koneko said worriedly while looking at me. However, I didn¡¯t answer any of their questions. I was concentrating to bring my Sacred Gear¡¯s power to the fullest, and then I was ready. Shrouding myself with Fear and Senjutsu aura, the youkai around me took a step back from me, that youkai was including Hagoromo Gitsune and Tsuchigumo. They were surprised by the amount of Fear that I used this time and were looking at me without saying anything. I relaxed my hand that held Nenekirimaru to my side and touched Nenekirimaru¡¯s blade with my left hand. ¡°Any attack launched from this blade will sever anything.¡± My energy was suddenly drained after I said those words while drawing the power from my Sacred Gear. It was a simple probability change, but the effect is immense. Will sever anything, that means the dimension could be severed with my blade. But, I felt like that would be impossible for now, I need to achieve a Balance Breaker to sever the dimension. For now, my blade would be able to sever anything but a dimension. I was confident that my blade could also sever gods in half. Now, for the most effective attack, I took out Nenekirimaru¡¯s sheath and sheathed my sword. I held the sheathed sword with my left hand, close to my waist, and lowered my stance. I used Touki to enhance my physical ability, and then I shrouded my sword with Fear and Youjutsu. I choose to use wind this time because I need to sever Kokabiel with his army and the magic circle in the sky. ¡°Yo, dodge this.¡± After a few seconds of accumulating my power, I sent a slash upward in Iai''s stance and the effect was big. Because I had used the Izutsu method which accumulated all Kurotabo¡¯s Fear in one attack, the wind that was created from my slash turned into a giant blade that flew towards Kokabiel and his army. I could clearly see his surprised face from the ground, but my attack didn¡¯t end there. When the giant blade reached midway to the sky, it was suddenly accelerated and letting out a cloud of black smoke from the sharp edge. The black smoke immediately turned into thousands of weaponry, ranged from spears to swords, and flew towards Kokabiel and his army, while severing the wind on its way. Without the wind resistance, the weapons reached where Kokabiel and his army were and began to kill each of them. Some of them tried to create a barrier, but it was destroyed, no, it was pierced as soon as the weapons in the sky touched the barrier. The fallen angels began to fall one by one, only leaving a good amount of them in the sky. The only fallen angels left were those who joined Kokabiel feeding the magic circle up in the sky. They were able to live because their comrade sacrificed themselves to defend them. Because of its size, the giant blade was late for a second, but ultimately it reached Kokabiel. ¡°Youu!!!!!¡± Kokabiel shouted and extended his right hand towards the blade. He created a lot of spear of light and fired them at the blade. However, that was useless! The blade in the sky was Nenekirimaru, no, part of Nenekirimaru. This mean, the blade had Nenekirimaru¡¯s properties, which was severing all Supernatural thing. The spear of light disappeared as soon as it touched the blade, which infuriated Kokabiel further. The blade was finally only around 5 meters from Kokabiel, but then he shouted. ¡°This or nothing!¡± Kokabiel shouted and brought down his severed left hand. His subordinates Magic was drained quickly and they all fell to the ground lifelessly. ¡®That guy, he feeds the magic circle with his subordinates life?!¡¯ I was surprised and glared at Kokabiel. What did that guy think his subordinates were?! Were they tools? No, they were not! Kurotabo was separated from me at this moment and he had a rough breath. Matoi did make a youkai tired too easily, it even cost me a lot. ¡°It¡¯s coming.¡± Said Hagoromo Gitsune as she looked at the sky. From the Magic circle, a giant light spear that easily covered the whole city appeared. All the youkai looked at the Giant light spear and were afraid. They didn¡¯t need to though, the blade finally reached Kokabiel, and then he was severed in half because he didn¡¯t even move to dodge the blade. ¡°Hahahahaha, you are all going to get killed!¡± With his blood and supernatural energy gushing out from his severed body, he maniacally laughed, and then he looked at the light spear behind him for the last time. Surely, he will die in under a minute if he didn¡¯t receive an amazing treatment, but he was willing to look at the spear instead of me at his last moment. That was his mistake though. If only he died right there, he won¡¯t experience the despair that come a second later. The blade was still flying and it met the Giant light spear that began to fall to the town. As soon as the blade touched the light spear, the spear disappeared into a burst of light particles. The blade disappeared soon after because it had lost its energy after canceling the light spear. I could feel Kokabiel¡¯s energy disappear as soon as the light spear disappeared. His body fell to the ground and landed right in front of me. His face had the expression of utter disbelief, but he was smiling. Strange man, could it be that he was satisfied because he was defeated by me? Now, the only enemies left were the six-winged fallen angels that fought Aotabo and Kubinashi. Because Gasadokuro and Hagoromo Gitsune were here, they must¡¯ve finished the fallen angels that fell to Gasadokuro¡¯s hand. In the distance, it seems the fight had reached its climax. ¡°Oh, they are still at it.¡± I said while watching Kubinashi and Aotabo in the distance that was fighting with the fallen angels. The fallen that fought Aotabo had a hard time, while Aotabo was smiling all the time. From behind, Tsura approached me and asked, ¡°Riku-sama, are you going to help them?¡± The other youkai were also looking at me, asking the same question with their eyes. I then closed my right eye and smiled, ¡°Well, the fight earlier was a bit boring. How about we watch them? I will help them if they were in trouble.¡± The youkai began laughing at my words and then some of them were shouting, ¡°Sake!! Bring the sake here!!¡± ¡°Yoo where is the snack! We need a snack!¡± Kyoto Youkai also joined the shout and then Tsura and Kuroka teleported back to my mansion to get a drink and snack. I was really exaggerating Kokabiel¡¯s power, but he was indeed the strongest opponent that I fought beside Vali. My old man? He was strong, but he wasn¡¯t able to do anything to me as of late because I can cut his Fear with no problem. If he fought Kokabiel, my old man will certainly win though. And then, the war was ended with a burst of laughter. And we were watching the fight of Aotabo and Kubinashi against the fallen angels. RaizarP Author Here~ More than 55 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 80 – Future Plan Kubinashi and Aotabo kept fighting the remaining two fallen angels while we were drinking sake and eating snacks on the street. I¡¯ve been spreading my senjutsu since the battle ended, and I realized that Grayfia and Sona didn¡¯t actually come back to the Underworld and they made their way here. I couldn¡¯t feel Sona¡¯s peerage or the others, so those two were the only ones who stayed on Earth after they sent back the others. Back to the fight, Aotabo had a rather hard time because he only used his physical power to fight the fallen angels. Kubinashi used his fear because his string was cut when he didn¡¯t use it, so now he had a better standing compared to Aotabo. Kubinashi¡¯s opponent had his wings cut with string, and so he can¡¯t fly away from Kubinashi. ¡°How can a youkai be this strong! It¡¯s impossible!¡± Shouted Kubinashi¡¯s opponent as he made a light spear above his head and fired it at Kubinashi¡¯s head. Kubinashi¡¯s head flew away and tied his opponent¡¯s body with his string. A second later, the string had a black aura surrounding it and the fallen¡¯s body was cut apart. ¡°Idiot.¡± I said as I drank sake from the cup in my hand. Tsura and Kuroka sat on my sides, Tsura on my left and Kuroka on my right. Hagoromo Gitsune was also partying with her Hyakki Yakkou not far from us. Because we were in the residency area, there were a lot of houses to loot and they took cups from those houses to drink their sake. They were also having a drink while pouring sake on my cup occasionally. ¡°Indeed nya, he¡¯s an idiot!¡± Exclaimed Kuroka as she raised the cup in her hand. Her face had reddened, it was the sign that she was drunk. Fortunately, she was wearing Kuoh Uniform, if she wore her Kimono, I bet her clothes were now in disarray, and her breast will be visible. Tsura who drank silently on my left just nodded her head and then she looked at Aotabo¡¯s fight. Tsura had a higher tolerance of alcohol compared to Kuroka, so she was not drunk from the Youkai Sake. As we were drinking and watching Aotabo punching the fallen angel, Kubinashi made his way over to us while cleaning the blood that was sticking on his face. ¡°Riku-sama, I¡¯m done. He¡¯s stronger than I thought, but not as strong as Youkai that mastered Fear.¡± Kejoro approached Kubinashi from the crowd and brought him a towel that she got from the mansion. Kubinashi thanked Kejoro and they sat right behind me. I looked over my shoulder and said, ¡°He¡¯s just 6 winged fallen angels, wait until you meet someone with strong power.¡± Kubinashi nodded his flying head and smiled, ¡°I see, so I shouldn¡¯t be cocky, I understand.¡± Kejoro served him with a cup of sake and poured the sake from the bottle on his side. I smiled in understanding looking at them like that, having my subordinates having their time made me smile too. ¡®I have been blessed with two lovers myself, and I am happy with that. Well, it would be better if she agreed to join though.¡¯ I looked at Hagoromo Gitsune as I thought that. The fight between Aotabo and the fallen had reached its climax. At the same time, Grayfia and Sona arrived and they were looking around in surprise. I didn¡¯t blame them. They were expecting a war going on, but what they see was a youkai having a party while shouting loudly. Not only that, one youkai was fighting a six-winged fallen angel with a feral smile on his face. ¡°What¡¯s going on here? What about the war?!¡± Asked Grayfia. She was half-shouting because she was still surprised, but she was able to hide it well under her stoic expression. They approached me and I looked at them with my chin raised, ¡°Oh, it¡¯s over. Look at there.¡± I turned my gaze towards Kokabiel¡¯s body. Grayfia and Sona followed my gaze and Grayfia''s eyes narrowed while Sona was surprised to the point her glasses slide down her face. She was able to catch it with her hand, but her mouth was opened wide. ¡°Kokabiel? The cadre of Grigori?!¡± Exclaimed Sona as she put her glasses back on her face. I was a little bit offended when she recognized Kokabiel immediately. She didn¡¯t recognize me on our first meeting, but why did she recognize a guy like Kokabiel at first glance? His wings were severed, so he had no obvious feature besides his ears to be known as Kokabiel. ¡°You killed him?¡± Asked Grayfia. ¡°This could lead to the war between the fallen angels and the devils!¡± I looked at Grayfia with a look that told her ¡®Are you stupid?¡¯ as I shrugged my shoulder and shook my head. Grayfia understood it. Her stoic expression almost crumbled from her face, but she took a deep sigh and asked. ¡°Can you explain this to me?¡± I didn¡¯t answer, but I only looked at Sona. Grayfia then looked at Sona too. At first, she didn¡¯t understand what I meant, but then her eyes widened. ¡°Old crow visited your apartment ¡­ I thought you were talking about a youkai, so it was Kokabiel?¡± My smile fell from my face as I facepalmed. How could she think that Kokabiel visited my apartment? Indeed, he¡¯s an old crow, but there was no way Kokabiel was brave enough to visit my apartment. ¡°Azazel?¡± Asked Grayfia as she looked at me. Finally, someone who understood it. I thought Sona was pretty smart, but it seems her intelligence was still below those with a lot of experience. I snapped my finger and then smiled at Grayfia, ¡°Indeed, Azazel. It was before Sirzechs visited me. However, I must say that both of them were pretty stubborn. They are aiming at the same thing, but they never met with each other to discuss it directly. I know that the politics are shit, but at least they could meet in secret, right?¡± I purposely threw a clue. If they didn¡¯t get it, then that was it. Not only that, the things that I was looking for were not here. It seems I need to have a trip again to the Vatican to borrow one of the shards to find it myself. Or, I could make a trip across the country with Masaomi to find the other shards. That would serve as time killer too until the peace conference if there is any. Fortunately, Grayfia understood what I meant and she nodded her head. ¡°I see, thank you for your information. I will excuse myself now.¡± She bowed her head at me and then turned away. Sona was confused, but then she choose to follow Grayfia. The fight between Aotabo and the fallen angel had yet to end. Aotabo was enjoying himself, but it took too long. ¡°Aotabo, stop playing around and end this.¡± Kurotabo who sat beside Kubinashi shouted at Aotabo. ¡°I know!¡± Aotabo replied the shout with a shout and then he grabbed the skull necklace on his neck. ¡°I don¡¯t want to do this, but you are strong.¡± The skull necklace began to separate itself and then it was shrouded with the black smoke of Fear. The necklace flew around Aotabo, and then he kicked the ground to rush toward the fallen angels. His speed was faster than earlier, and he punched the fallen angel in the face. The fallen angel¡¯s head was separated from his head because of Aotabo¡¯s punch. That was natural, his punch was imbued with his Fear, further enhancing his sturdy body. Aotabo made his way towards us with a smile on his face as his necklace turned back to a normal skull necklace. We then continued our party until the sunset. The war or rather a small war was settled with our victory. I got Grayfia understood that Azazel wanted peace, and it went well than I had expected. Now, I will make a trip around the country and the world to find the shards. I had promised Vasco after all. And I hate someone who broke a promise. RaizarP Author Here~ More than 55 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks for the Squad Leader! - Kvaak - TheRagFromTheCrag Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 81 – Meeting, Future or Problem? After partying until we were satisfied, we left Kuoh Town and went back to our mansion. The youkai under me wanted to walk back to Kanto instead of teleporting ourselves. I agreed with the suggestion as it was our first-time celebrating our victory. Kuroka undoes the barrier and she went back to the mansion by teleporting with Tsura and Shirone first. The sky had become normal again, the normal night sky, and the citizens of Kuoh Town regained their consciousness. I felt bad for those who had an emergency for today, but it can¡¯t be helped. ¡°Alright, you folks!¡± I stood up and my Haori was blown to the wind on my back. I held the collar part of my Haori with my right hand and then started walking. ¡°Let¡¯s go!¡± The youkai started to hide their presence from normal humans and followed me. Surprisingly, Hagoromo Gitsune jumped down from Gasadokuro and started walking beside me. Her Hyakki Yakkou also hid their presence and followed behind her. ¡°It¡¯s been a long time since I had a walk with my Hyakki Yakkou, allow me to walk back to the mansion too.¡± Said Hagoromo Gitsune as she tilted her head to look at me. I smirked at her and said, ¡°Do as you please. I plan to kill some time by walking around as I try to find the other shards of a holy weapon.¡± I then looked at Masaomi that walk right behind me, more specifically he walked behind me on my right side and said. ¡°Tell me when the Excalibur Shards responded, Masaomi.¡± He was a devil, so he can¡¯t hide his presence like the other youkai behind me. But that was okay, he looked like a normal businessman wearing a suit. He chose a suit as his outfit because it reminded him of his days as an exorcist. He didn¡¯t get an action earlier, so I thought that he will be sulking like other youkai, but he was just fine and smiling all the time. ¡°Of course, Riku-sama.¡± Masaomi lowered his head a little as he answered me. Then I and my Hyakki Yakkou walked back to Kanto, scaring the other supernatural entities on our way back. Some of the strays were attacking us in fear, but they were killed with no problem by the Karasu Tengu in my Hyakki Yakkou. That night, the corpses of strays devils or the leftover of Kokabiel¡¯s army could be found across our way back to Kanto. *** The next day, I can¡¯t rest easy in the morning because I was still excited, so I went to the courtyard and swung a wooden sword while wearing my usual striped black and green kimono in my human form. I was planning to go around Japan because right now the devils were not in Kuoh Academy as they were having a party in the underworld. Today was Rias¡¯s wedding, so Sona was attending the ceremony with her peerage. I didn¡¯t want to get involved, so I wanted to roam around Japan with Masaomi or go to the Vatican to meet Vasco and talk about the Excalibur Shards with him. Kokabiel was shrewder than I thought. To think that he hid Vasper, or maybe he even killed him outside Kuoh Town. Excalibur Shards that were supposed to enter Kuoh Town went missing because of him. I was planning to get Excalibur Nightmare before the peace ceremony. No, I wanted to get the Excalibur Nightmare before the Khaos Brigade bunches show themselves. I was strong enough to kill Kokabiel easily, it was because my fighting experience had increased before he attacked. Vali, Tsuchigumo, were two of my opponents that managed to give me a fight. Vali was interested in my strength, I bet he will reach out to me when he reveals himself as part of the Khaos Brigade. Joining Khaos Brigade didn¡¯t seem a bad choice, but that was also a bad idea. They wanted to use Yasaka, which I cannot allow. Yasaka was a good woman, he was a kind one even though she was harsh sometimes. After living for more than 16 years in this world, I grew attached to Youkai and Humans. I cherished them, and I won¡¯t forgive anyone trying to harm them. Even if they were the Super Devil or even God himself if he was still alive. Ophis, should I try to get her to join me? She was na?ve, but she was strong. If she wanted to, she could take a rather mature appearance and get a mature personality. If I remember correctly, she took an old man appearance a long time ago, but she changed into a rather cute girl this time around. No matter, if she posed as a danger to me, I will fight her. If she wanted to talk in peace, I will invite her to join me. As I was thinking about such a thing, my old man approached me from behind and send a flying kick towards me, aiming at my head. I immediately tilted my head to the left to dodge the kick and struck his leg with the wooden sword that I held. He then somersaulted and landed right in front of me while crossing his arms, ¡°You have become good, Riku.¡± I rested the wooden sword on my shoulder as I relaxed my posture, ¡°You have become weak, old man.¡± ¡°Hahahaha, of course, that is the case. You brought a lot of youkai that were able to use Fear. Now that power was not reserved to me alone.¡± He approached me with his wooden sandals tapping the ground, creating a loud sound, and put his hand on my shoulder. ¡°You have now become a fine man. How is it, want to inherit my position right now? Tonight, there is a meeting in this mansion. I invited all leaders of their own clan in this East Territory. I will announce the next leader of the East Youkai Faction in that meeting, the second Lord of Pandemonium, how is that? Make sure to come with that friend of yours, Hagoromo Gitsune.¡± My old man walked away after he told me that. He wanted me to come with Hagoromo Gitsune? I looked over my shoulder and looked at the back of my old man that made his way to the mansion. ¡°A meeting at a time like this. That old man, what is he planning?¡± The meeting is tonight, I need to prepare myself for it. RaizarP Author Here~ More than 55 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 82 – Guest and Nurarihyon’s Plan In the afternoon, a lot of youkai arrived at our mansion while riding some kind of youkai-drawn carriage. Not all of them though, because some of them arrived in their human form while riding a car or motorbike. The youkai was too free for their own amusement, but that was what made a youkai. A free creature, full of freedom, not chained with anything. Even our position in the supernatural world, we are free from the other influence. Our relationship with Shinto Gods was like an alliance that relied upon each other rather than what the other thought. The other supernatural faction believe that we were Shinto¡¯s subordinate, but that was wrong. At least Amaterasu saw us as a collaborator, an alliance that defend Japan together, not as subordinate, but more like a friend. The youkai that arrived at our mansion was a leader of their own clan. Nekomata leader was Magari, there was also a Yuki-Onna that was typical for this world, in other words, a Yeti. There was a youkai that looked like a carriage with a big face and fire wheel, a youkai that looked like a goblin, and more. Race, youkai can¡¯t be called a race because of our different appearances to each other. There was something that could define us, a creature. Right now I sat on the roof of our mansion looking at the traffic at the front gate of our mansion. The members of my Hyakki Yakkou were helping in the mansion and welcoming the guest at the entrance of our mansion. I had informed Hagoromo Gitsune about the meeting tonight, and she was interested in it. Right now she was in Kuoh Town like usual, enjoying school. I can¡¯t understand why a youkai like her enjoys the school that much. The school was evil, they force the students to do their homework. In my time at Kuoh Academy, I proudly declare that I never did my homework even once. ¡°Riku-sama, do you have a plan for your outfits for the meeting later?¡± While I have useless thoughts as usual, Tsura called me from below. She was holding two Kimonos, on her left hand was a white kimono without any motive while on her right hand was a black kimono with Fear kanji on the left side. I jumped down the roof and landed in front of Tsura. I looked at the Kimono closely and then shook my head. ¡°Nah, I will wear my usual Kimono with the Haori that you gave me yesterday.¡± I crossed my arms inside my kimono and let the sleeves blow by the wind as I looked at Tsura with a smile. ¡°Is that so?¡± Asked Tsura with a smile on her face. She then hugged the two kimonos in her arms and closed her eyes. ¡°If that¡¯s the case, then I will help Kejoro and my mom to prepare for the meeting tonight. There are a lot of things to prepare as the leader of each clan will attend the meeting tonight.¡± ¡°Do your best, Tsura. Sorry I can¡¯t help with the kitchen.¡± I said to Tsura as I put my right hand on her head. She looked up at me and tilted her head a little as she smiled, ¡°It¡¯s my job, Riku-sama. Thank you for your encouragement.¡± I pulled my hand away from Tsura¡¯s head. ¡°Well, I must not keep you here or Setsuna will get angry.¡± Tsura nodded her head and then bowed to me a little. ¡°Well then, Riku-sama. Good luck with the meeting later!¡± She then turned away and walked towards the kitchen. As Tsura walked away, this time Kuroka and Shirone were walking towards me. Kuroka was wearing black kimono, but the way she wore it was half-assed. Her shoulder was shown, and her cleavage was clear. On the other side, Shirone was wearing white kimono with a blue obi and blue lining. Both of them were showing their ears and tails. Shirone was no longer embarrassed to show her youkai part after living in the mansion for a while. Kuroka and Tsura walked past each other and they talked for a while before Kuroka looked at me and waved her hand. ¡°Riku-sama! What are you doing nya!¡± Kuroka made her way to me, followed by Shirone who walked behind her. ¡°Oh, Kuroka. I am just looking at the guest that arrived. How about you?¡± ¡°I was supposed to welcome the guest, but Kubinashi and Kurotabo said that I don¡¯t need to do that nya.¡± Kuroka pouted her cheeks and put her hands on her waist as she looked at the Kubinashi and Kurotabo that welcomed the guest at the entrance. I chuckled at her behavior and said, ¡°That¡¯s natural. They put you above themselves as you are my lover.¡± Kuroka¡¯s face reddened a little as I said that and she looked at me with a smile on her face. ¡°Onee-chan, don¡¯t you have something to do in Kuoh Town? That¡¯s the reason why you asked me to come with you, right?¡± Shirone with a displeased expression on her face called out to Kuroka from behind. ¡°Oh, right! Riku-sama, I wanted to ask you for something.¡± Said Kuroka as she leaned her face closer to mine. I didn¡¯t try to evade and gazed straight at her eyes. ¡°What is it?¡± ¡°Can I stay at Kuoh Town for a few days? I wanted to talk something with Hagoromo Gitsune nya! Shirone also wanted to attend the school again, so it¡¯s a perfect time!¡± I looked at Shirone and saw her nodded her head. ¡°It¡¯s been a long time since I go to school. Now that Rias-senpai is not there, I am thinking of going to the school again.¡± ¡°Sure, that¡¯s not a problem.¡± Kuroka then pulled herself away from me and hugged Shirone. I just looked at them with a smile on my face. Shirone tried to push Kuroka away from her, but it was to no avail. Kuroka was too strong, and Shirone¡¯s face was now buried between Kuroka¡¯s breasts. Finally, after a few seconds, Kuroka released her hug and Shirone took a deep breath to get the oxygen that she was not able to get earlier. ¡°Then, Riku-sama. I will go to the kitchen and help Tsura nya!¡± Kuroka turned away and was about to walk, but I stopped her. ¡°Wait, Kuroka. Can you go to Kuoh Town instead? I want you to bring Hagoromo Gitsune here before the meeting.¡± Kuroka turned back at me and smiled, ¡°Sura, Riku-sama!¡± Then she turned to Shirone and asked, ¡°Do you want to come with me, Shirone nya?¡± Shirone nodded her head in response and then they teleported away to Kuoh Town. This time, I could feel my old man walking towards me while hiding his presence. ¡°What do you want from me, old man.¡± He showed himself in front of me and laughed. ¡°Hahahaha, nothing. I am here to fetch you. Follow me.¡± With only those words, my old man turned away and began walking. I tilted my head in wonder, but eventually, I began to walk and followed my old man. I had expected him to get me before the meeting, that was why I just standby in the mansion instead of running around outside. Now, I will ask him what he was planning. RaizarP Author Here~ More than 55 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks to the new Squad Leader!! - quiler - Darren latiker - ToksikRaven Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 83 – Nurarihyon’s Secret My old man brought me to a small pathway with a polished stone on top of the ground behind our mansion. I never ventured here because there was nothing here but a yellow flower that was planted on each side of the pathway. I didn¡¯t even know something that was located on the end of the pathway. My old man was walking in front of me with his hand crossed inside his kimono. ¡°So, why did you bring me here, old man?¡± I asked him as I followed from behind while looking around. The flowers that bloom on the back of our mansion were surprisingly Japanese Kerria. The flower was often called Japanese Rose, and it was the flower that had a close relation with Yamabuki Otome, now known as Hagoromo Gitsune. ¡°There is something that I hid from you since a long time ago. Surely you realized it, right?¡± My old man answered my question without looking back at me. ¡°What are you talking about? Don¡¯t try to be so mysterious.¡± There was a lot of mystery surrounding my old man. If he suddenly said that, I was confused about how to answer him. That was why I chose to ask him directly. My old man looked at me over his shoulder and snickered, ¡°Hah! I am not trying to be mysterious, I am mysterious since the day I was born.¡± This old man! I was asking seriously but he answered with a joke. He turned back to look at the pathway, and then he said. ¡°Well, we¡¯ve arrived.¡± The pathway ended and in front of me was a red tori that was usually built in the entrance of a shrine. I was looking beyond the Tori and realized that the place in front of me was surrounded by my old man¡¯s Fear. ¡°What is this place?¡± I asked him with a serious tone. ¡°Why did you layer the place in front of us with such a thick Fear, old man.¡± He looked up at the top of the Tori and let out a long sigh. ¡°You know how I run around the world and do as I please when I was young? That day there was only one person that I looked forward to meeting with. I brought a lot of things from my young days, some of them were filling the storage, while I hid the most important item on this place.¡± I listened to my old man while having a serious look. I knew what he meant, I somehow knew what he wanted to do. But I won¡¯t interrupt him for now, because this was the first time my old man told me the story of his young day with a serious tone without even a single laugh. ¡°Yeah, and you never told me the important part of your life, as always.¡± ¡°That¡¯s true, well I thought that you were not ready at that time knowing that I made a lot of enemies in my younger days. But now, I can rest assured and announce you to the world as my heir.¡± My old man turned to me and grinned. ¡°I know that you defeated Kokabiel without any problem. That lass, Hagoromo Gitsune was it? The way she acted around you was different from the people in our mansion. Do you really not take fancy of that girl?¡± ¡°Don¡¯t try to change the subject, old man. Tell me the reason you brought me here.¡± My old man smiled a little and then turned toward the Tori again. He began walking while saying, ¡°Follow me.¡± I followed him quietly. When he passed the Tori, he was gone from my sight and it surprised me a little bit. ¡®Not only surrounded by his Fear but it was also hidden by a barrier?¡¯ I walked through the Tori and the environment around me had changed. From yellow flowers that bloom on the side of the road, in front of me was a path with blooms Sakura Tree. On the end of the road was a house, a simple one but it was a bit similar to my mansion. I looked around, amazed by the new sight and it made my old man chuckle. ¡°How is it, a good place right?¡± ¡°Yeah, but you did a very good job hiding this place from me, old man.¡± He shrugged his shoulder and shook his head. ¡°What can I say? I am experienced, and I used most of my power to hide this place from the outsider. This place held a lot of memories of my wife, so I won¡¯t allow anyone to step in carelessly.¡± After he said that, my old man had a vicious grin on his face. That was not surprising, seeing how well this place was cleaned and how often my old man disappeared from the mansion without telling anyone. ¡°My mom, huh?¡± My old man sighed and then scratched his head. ¡°How do I say this, I never told you anything about her because I didn¡¯t want to talk about it. But after hearing you defeat Kokabiel, I changed my mind. Follow me.¡± My old man turned and walked to the house that was on the end of the road. ¡°Your mother was just an ordinary girl, she was a sweet girl. I met her around 20 years ago, that time I was eating without paying as usual.¡± He began his storytelling as we walked slowly toward the house. ¡°I was already the leader of East Youkai Faction, and that girl was sitting beside me, holding me from leaving without paying the bill of the restaurant. I was surprised when that girl was able to see me, and I became interested in her.¡± This damned old man, he met my mother when he was in his usual dine and dash? But, she was able to see my old man through, huh. As expected, my mother seems to be not normal at all. ¡°Well, after that I used my Fear and ran away from that restaurant though. The next day also likes that, and that lasted for about a month before I asked her name.¡± This old man had too much fun doing that. Even though I can¡¯t see his expression right now, I knew that he was smiling happily. Looking back at it, he was never interested in other women. From what I realized from seeing Yasaka, I knew that she gave up already and didn¡¯t want to make a move towards my old man. It made me curious, what kind of woman was my mother. For my old man to be so devoted to her. ¡°When I knew her name, things changed. I invited her to my mansion, and then I asked my subordinate to build this house for her because she was not comfortable living in a mansion. One day, I learned that the girl was a former Onmyouji, Japan¡¯s exorcist that specializes in mystic art.¡± That was not too surprising, seeing that my mother can see through my old man. Without his Fear, he was skilled enough to hide his presence from the other, so it need some skill to see through him. ¡°The family of Onmyouji in Japan is part of Five Principal Clan, so at first I thought that the girl came from that family. But it turned out I was wrong, that girl was not part of the Five Principal Clan, she was a wandering Onmyouji with no family ties.¡± We have arrived in front of the house and my old man stopped on his track. I stopped on his left and looked at the house closely. ¡°Magicians, she was part of the Magician family, but she ran away and live as a wandering Onmyouji after she mastered the art. Inside this house, there was a certain skill that my wife specialized in. She was researching youkai and managed to complete this skill after we are married. It was a skill that used Senjutsu as the energy, it was my trump card when I faced an opponent stronger than me.¡± My old man looked at me with a serious face and said. ¡°You are my heir, so it¡¯s the time for me to give this to you. Protect our clan, I am counting on you, Riku.¡± I nodded my head and answered, ¡°You don¡¯t need to say that. That was my intention from the start.¡± RaizarP Author Here~ More than 55 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 84 – New Technique ¡°Cheeky brat, do you think the Supernatural are so weak that you can say that confidently? The reason why I brought you here in the first place was to learn my trump card, it won¡¯t be easy but I know that you will succeed.¡± My old man walked to the entrance of the house and touched the door handle. He opened the door and then looked at me over his shoulder. ¡°Well, if you can¡¯t do it, I guess I need to whoop your ass again like in your childhood.¡± He smirked at me and entered the house. I was irked, but it was almost a daily thing that happened whenever I was with my old man. I sighed and then transformed into my Youkai form before following my old man inside the house. Knowing my old man, whenever he went out of sight then he surely will try to prank me. That was why I had developed a habit to cover myself with Fear and heightened my senses when I was with him. But, to my surprise, I could feel a rich Natural Energy centered inside the house as soon as I transformed into my youkai form. I was more sensitive to the energy, and my old man right now was in front of the center of that energy. I hurriedly entered the house and saw my old man sitting in front of an altar. The house was empty with one altar standing in the center of the house. I slowly approached my old man and looked at the altar. It was a simple wooden altar that was built in the house when there was someone dear to you who had passed away. Usually, it has a small shrine on the top of the altar, but this altar had none of that. The altar only had a scroll that was tied with red string. My old man stood up, took the scroll, and then looked at it with a nostalgic smile on his face. He then turned to me and extended his hand that held the scroll. ¡°Take it, and then study it. I will have you master it as soon as possible. There is some movement in a certain organization that I observed for a while now.¡± I narrowed my eyes as I looked at my old man. ¡°That organization, is it Khaos Brigade?¡± My old man¡¯s eyes widened in surprise, but then he laughed hard while holding his stomach with his free hand. ¡°Riku, you kept surprising this old me. How can I didn¡¯t know what my son did right in front of me?¡± I smirked at him and took the scroll that he held. ¡°Hah! It¡¯s because you are old and rotten already, old man.¡± Not really though. If I didn¡¯t record my memory of this world in the notebook that I hid then I certainly forgot about the thing that will happen in the future. The history had changed because of my old man¡¯s existence, and now the future event was affected by my interference. That doesn¡¯t matter, I just need to focus on one thing, screw the canon, I will kill everyone that wanted to disturb me or my clan. ¡°Eh, I guess so. And this old man wanted to retire. With you having a Hyakki Yakkou of your own, this old man can rest assured and go on a trip.¡± ¡°A trip, where are you going?¡± I put the scroll inside my Kimono and asked my old man. ¡°Just visiting an old monkey that became a Buddha somehow. That old monkey had his descendant infiltrating that Khaos Brigade and gave him info.¡± Old monkey? Could it be? ¡°Sun Wukong? You know him?!¡± I was surprised that my old man knew Sun Wukong to the point he called him an old monkey. ¡°Hahahaha, of course, I know him! I had my share of dining and dash with him in my younger day. He hate evil, but he didn¡¯t hate an innocent prank that I did. More importantly, we had a great affinity with each other.¡± Bad, this is bad. I can¡¯t imagine their youth, moreover the victim of their prank. Nurarihyon was bad enough, but if you add Sun Wukong, the monkey king, then I can¡¯t imagine their mischief anymore. ¡°By the way, I slipped my subordinate inside Khaos Brigade too.¡± Said my old man with a smirk on his face. I became interested in my old man story and listened to it seriously. If he slipped his subordinate inside the Khaos Brigade, then it will be beneficial for us. My old man then began to walk out of the house and waved his right hand. ¡°I will let you stay here for a while. I need to go to my room and prepare for the meeting tonight. Don¡¯t stay for too long!¡± He closed the door and left me alone inside the house. This place indeed had abundant Natural Energy, but I don¡¯t need them for now. My old man knew that I defeated Kokabiel, but I bet he didn¡¯t know that I had a technique called Matoi. But since I was in this place, I used this chance to open the scroll that my old man gave me earlier. I took out the scroll from my Kimono again and then untied the string. I then opened the scroll. The scroll was over 10 years old, that was why I opened it slowly. After the scroll was opened, I read the content that was written in Kanji and Katakana. It was about a technique that my old man called Tsuki Giri, talking about a lame name. It was a technique that was similar to Matoi, where I concentrated Senjutsu energy to sent a flying slash toward my opponent. But then it was strange, Magari said that my old man was not talented in Senjutsu. I will think about that later. More importantly, this technique, I can see it used alongside my Matoi. The energy used in the attack is different, but I had used Senjutsu energy to imbue my Matoi attack when I killed Kokabiel. ¡°This is good, I can use this.¡± RaizarP Author Here~ More than 55 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 85 – Nura Clan Meeting The sun had set and the night had arrived. Every guest that will attend tonight¡¯s meeting had arrived, they were ready in the meeting room, waiting for me and my old man. Hagoromo Gitsune also arrived with Kuroka. She was wearing a black Kimono with white lining instead of the usual school uniform. Right now I was sitting in the courtyard, looking at the Sakura tree above the pond with Hagoromo Gitsune sitting beside me. ¡°So, I heard from Kuroka that Nurarihyon wanted me to attend this meeting with you?¡± Hagoromo Gitsune asked me without even glancing at me. Her gaze was focused on the Sakura Tree that had yet to bloom. The tree was filled with green leaves without a single pink color from the flower. ¡°Yeah, I don¡¯t know his intention, but he wanted to announce to his subordinate that I will be his Heir in the future.¡± ¡°I see, so he will be stepping down from his position? But that doesn¡¯t concern me.¡± ¡°That¡¯s true.¡± Hagoromo Gitsune was an outsider, she was the being from another world for my old man. Why did he specifically want her to attend the meeting, not Tsuchigumo that went back to Kyoto or Kurotabo who had a close tie with me in these past days? ¡°That old man has something in his mind for sure. He never did anything useless¡­ or he did it several times. But in the end, he planned something in this meeting.¡± ¡°Surely so. Does the time arrive yet for the meeting?¡± Asked Hagoromo Gitsune as she looked to her right, the direction of the meeting room. I smiled and looked in the same direction as Hagoromo Gitsune. I could feel a lot of youkai inside the room, while the youkai from our mansion was running around, preparing everything with all their energy. ¡°Not yet, my old man had yet to leave his room. He will fetch us when it¡¯s time for the meeting. I will enjoy the moment of silence because I will leave to take a trip after the meeting is over.¡± ¡°A trip, you wanted to find that sword, didn¡¯t you?¡± Asked Hagoromo Gitsune as she turned to me and smiled. I shook my head in response. ¡°Nay, I¡¯m not trying to find those swords. I wanted to look at the situation of the world before it plunged into turmoils because of some terrorists.¡± ¡°Terrorists? And you are afraid of them?¡± Asked Hagoromo Gitsune in a curious tone. ¡°Did you hear about the Dragon God in this world?¡± I asked Hagoromo Gitsune as I crossed my arms inside my Kimono. Hagoromo Gitsune nodded his head a little. ¡°I have heard about them. It seems they had the power to destroy this world if they wanted to.¡± ¡°Correct.¡± I turned my gaze to the Sakura tree and continued. ¡°The leader or rather the figurative leader of that terrorist organization is one of the dragon god, Ophis.¡± Hagoromo Gitsune was interested in my story, but at that time I felt my old man approaching us. It was unfortunate, but I stopped telling her about Khaos Brigade and stood up. ¡°It¡¯s time.¡± I said to Hagoromo Gitsune and she stood up. ¡°I will tell you when I have more time to spare.¡± I began to walk toward the meeting room with Hagoromo Gitsune on my left. We met my old man who stood in front of the meeting room while smiling with his arm crossed. ¡°You have arrived. Riku, I must warn you that the youkai that attended this meeting are all the leaders of their own army. Each of them had their own Hyakki Yakkou, and I commanded all of them as the Commander. That position will be yours after I stepped down. Now, they brought their heir to meet you, so they know the person that they serve in the future.¡± I nodded my head in understanding. East Youkai Clan were formed from a lot of clans, and each had its own power and army. The young youkai from each clan will always be dispatched to our mansion to greet my old man, but they never met me personally except for some. They just heard about me, about what their dad told them. Without my old man telling me anything, I understood what he meant. ¡°You want me to show off?¡± Nurarihyon youkai was lurking in the shadow of the moon, that was our existence. Showing off will only be done in front of the ally after the battle was over. I followed those since I was a little, and only used my Fear to threaten my enemy when they underestimated me. My old man turned his gaze to Hagoromo Gitsune and put on a serious face. ¡°Yes, I wanted the young lady beside you to show her power too. No, showing her tails are enough, can you do that for me?¡± ¡°I must ask, why?¡± Asked Hagoromo Gitsune in a displeased tone. ¡°Your existence was discovered by the other youkai when you trashed Satan¡¯s little sister. And now, doubt began to rise that you were a rogue, a dangerous youkai that wanted to inflict war against the devils.¡± Hagoromo Gitsune narrowed her eyes at my old man and began to let out a dangerous aura around her body. ¡°Are you trying to threaten me?¡± My old man smirked at Hagoromo Gitsune and said. ¡°Nah, why? I don¡¯t need to threaten you, I just told you the opinion of other youkai.¡± Hagoromo Gitsune calmed down a little after she heard what my old man said and her aura disappeared. ¡®That was close, I bet the youkai inside the meeting room who mastered Senjutsu had felt that aura¡­¡¯ At that moment, I looked at my old man who still had a smirk on his face. ¡°Sly old man.¡± He laughed a little and then put his hand on the door handle. ¡°Well, let¡¯s enter. You can just sit silently beside Riku and let me handle everything. Riku, I believe in your ability to make a speech.¡± He opened the door and the other youkai who sat on the left and right turned their gaze at us. My old man walked between the youkai who sat on the left and right to the front row with 3 Zabuton that was prepared for us. I followed my old man from behind with a steady step. The youkai were looking at me in awe, they were comparing my appearance with my old man. Some of the youkai nodded their head with a smile while the others, mainly female youkai had their mouth opened while looking at us. Hagoromo Gitsune also realized that she has been played by my old man. She gritted her teeth silently and followed us. My old man took a seat in the Zabuton in the middle while I took a seat on the Zabuton on his right and Hagoromo Gitsune took a Zabuton on his left. My old man put his left hand on his thighs and rested his head on it. ¡°Let¡¯s begin the meeting.¡± RaizarP Author Here~ More than 55 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 86 – The Meeting The youkai that attended the meeting smiled and focused their gaze on us. ¡°Today, I plan to use this chance to tell you guys about something and announce my successor.¡± My old man said as he took out his smoke pipe and smoked it. The other youkai were chattering with each other, they were guessing what something that my old man talked about. The youkai had varieties of looks. A youkai that looked like a Chinese dragon¡¯s body with a big human face, a youkai that had two heads, a youkai with a big body wearing a white mask, and the others. I looked at them and was amazed by their strength. Although they were clan leaders, they were still youkai, the creatures that were not famous for their strength. But, the clan leaders that attended this meeting had at least the power of high rank or medium rank in terms of supernatural. The youkai that gathered here were just part of the East Youkai Faction. I didn¡¯t really know the strength of the West Youkai Faction, but I guessed that their strength was similar or a bit weaker than ours. ¡°Commander! Can you hurry up and tell us about that something?¡± The youkai with a scary face and green skin that wore a rag raised his hand and asked my old man. ¡°That¡¯s right, Commander! Hurry up! You know that we can¡¯t take something half-assed like that!¡± The youkai with one big eye and black hair shouted on top of his lung as he crossed his arm. ¡°If you gather us here, then that something must be important for our Faction! But, please introduce us to your successor first. I saw a young man that was similar to you and an unfamiliar girl, which one is your successor?!¡± A youkai wearing a white mask with a huge body asked my old man as he leaned his body forward. ¡°Don¡¯t be impatient! Commander wanted us to calm down first before he tell us about his plan.¡± A youkai with long hair wearing a dark green kimono and black haori spoke up. The other youkai started to state their opinion openly. Some of them even fought each other to prove that their opinion was the correct one. My old man just smiled while watching the youkai bickering with each other. I also found this sight of youkai bickering with each other as something pleasant, something that was natural for it to happen between youkai. ¡°They are a noisy bunch, different from the Ayakashi from my place.¡± Hagoromo Gitsune said as she opened her fan in front of her mouth. She was looking at the youkai with narrowed eyes. ¡°Lively, ain¡¯t it? I love the way they stated their opinions openly instead of kicking each other in the back like other factions.¡± I said to Hagoromo Gitsune as I looked at the youkai. I really like the way youkai does their things. Unlike devils who planned behind each other back or Angels who followed the order from seraph, the Youkai will state their displeasure right in front of each other face so they know each other opinions and finally they will settle it without any bloodbath. Some youkai retorted to bloodbath though, but it will not to the point of the war. At most, they will duel each other and get satisfied after the duel before drinking with each other again. ¡°Lively, but foolish. As expected of youkai under Nurarihyon.¡± Said Hagoromo Gitsune with a tone filled with ridicule. ¡°Even so, they are united under his banner, none of them will defy him or me.¡± I answered Hagoromo Gitsune with a smirk on my face. ¡°Don¡¯t be too impatient. I will tell you about it.¡± My old man finally spoke up and the other youkai went silent immediately as they turned their gaze to my old man. With my old men spoken, the atmosphere tensed all of a sudden. They were anticipating what my old man said with a smile on their face. ¡°The terrorist organization that I kept my eyes on was on the move. They began to move when my son, Riku, killed Kokabiel.¡± ¡°Hahahaha, so that long-haired ugly fallen angel has been killed by young master!¡± Shouted one of the youkai that attended the meeting. ¡°No one can beat us! Long live East Youkai Faction!¡± The atmosphere had turned lively once again, such change often happened in the meeting of youkai. ¡°Be quiet!¡± My old man shouted and the youkai shut their mouth instantly. ¡°Don¡¯t focus on Kokabiel, the organization that I tracked is more dangerous than him. They targeted all supernatural, the most annoying bunch among them were the ones who called themselves Hero Faction and a faction that was led by someone we all hate.¡± My old man narrowed his eyes and dropped his smile. The other youkai also put on a serious face as their aura spilled over their body. ¡°Old Devils Faction, am I correct, Commander?¡± The youkai with long hair gritted his teeth as he said that. I also put on a serious face after I heard my old man. Indeed, even if I didn¡¯t meet them yet, hearing their name made me disgusted. Hagoromo Gitsune who didn¡¯t know about Old Devil Faction was looking around the room, confused by the sudden change. She leaned her head near my ear and whispered. ¡°Who is this Old Devils Faction and Hero Faction? Are they different from the devil?¡± I glanced at Hagoromo Gitsune and said. ¡°They are vermin of this world. They wanted the devil to rule over the other faction and races. In another word, they are the mind behind the terrorist organization. The Hero Faction wanted humans to be free from other supernaturals. In simple terms, they are racists.¡± ¡°The idiot type then. Are they strong?¡± I nodded my head a little. I hate to admit it, but the old devil faction had a super devil in their rank while the hero faction had the True Longinus¡¯ user. I can defeat Cao Cao in a fight, as long as no one disturbs us. Rizevim Lucifer, I need to get a balance breaker before I am confident enough to defeat him. Maybe I can defeat him if I used Matoi with Hagoromo Gitsune or with a lot of youkai at once, but nothing is certain in a fight. ¡°Now, I wanted the youkai from East Faction to put their guard up. Hero Faction will target us soon, their target would be Nine-tailed fox youkai.¡± ¡°Lady Yasaka?¡± Asked one of the youkai. My old man nodded his head. ¡°Not only Yasaka but Kunou, her daughter, would be targeted too. We can leave them to west youkai because we had one more target of protection.¡± My old man turned his gaze toward Hagoromo Gitsune. ¡°Oh, I will be targeted too? How dare they target this lady.¡± Said Hagoromo Gitsune in displeased tone as she closed her fan and narrowed her eyes. ¡°She¡¯s nine-tailed fox youkai?!¡± Exclaimed one of the youkai in the meeting as he pointed his index finger toward Hagoromo Gitsune. ¡°How can it be?! Can you prove it to us?¡± Asked the one-eyed youkai. Silently, Hagoromo Gitsune¡¯s tails appeared from her back. The other youkai eyes widened in surprise when they saw her tail. My old man turned his gaze back to the other youkai. ¡°Now you understood it. We will protect her too.¡± ¡°This lady doesn¡¯t need your protection, Nurarihyon.¡± Hagoromo Gitsune refused with a firm tone. Both of them were looking at each other intensely, I can¡¯t stand this any longer so I spoke. ¡°I will take care of her alone, old man. We will go to Kyoto when the Hero faction launched their attack, or better yet, I will attack Hero Faction with my Hyakki Yakkou tomorrow.¡± My old man smiled as if waiting for my answer. ¡°Fine! But don¡¯t attack them. Their base is located outside of Japan, outside of our territory. We will be suspected to attack the other faction if we entered their territory without notice beforehand. I will leave her protection to you, Riku.¡± ¡°Leave it to me, old man.¡± RaizarP Author Here~ More than 55 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thank to the New Squad Leader!! - Vincent - Anonymous Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 87 – Khaos Brigade and Succession ¡°Now, let¡¯s talk about the next thing. Besides targeting the nine-tailed fox youkai, they are targeting something more troublesome. They wanted to summon Great Red using the power of leyline in Kyoto.¡± The youkai became restless when they heard the name of Great Red, one of the Dragon God that reside in Dimensional Gap. Even I will admit, trying to fight that thing is suicide. With my strength right now, I will be killed with just his slap. That¡¯s if I can¡¯t run from him, and I am confident in running away without getting caught. Hagoromo Gitsune also knew about the two Dragon Gods. I glanced at her and saw her glaring at me. She looked like she was about to kill me, and I realized that I told my old man that I will protect Hagoromo Gitsune right in front of her. She must¡¯ve thought of me as someone who never listened to the other, not that I mind about that stigma. ¡°Commander, is your information true? If you just wanted to prank us, then it was not funny.¡± Said one of the youkai. ¡°Yeah, commander! If you wanted to scare us with Great Red, then it¡¯s not funny anymore!¡± My old man blew his pipe and then put on a serious face. ¡°Is my face look like I am joking? I won¡¯t joke about something like Great Red.¡± The other youkai had a look of realization. They finally realized the danger that the organization posed. ¡°The organization, Khaos Brigade, had a lot of armies. We, youkai, have our own army, but it¡¯s not enough. The leader of the Khaos Brigade, it¡¯s one of the Dragon God, Ophis.¡± The muttering between the youkai in the room became louder, they didn¡¯t look at my old man now, but they were looking at each other and talking about what should they do in the future. ¡°That¡¯s not quite right, old man.¡± I said to my old man as I crossed my arms. The attention of everyone in the room instantly focused on me. ¡°Ophis is a leader in name only, the real leader of Khaos Brigade is Rizevim Livan Lucifer.¡± This time, even my old man was looking at me with a surprised expression. Hmm, did he fail to get that information? I will not hide anything from my clan. If the information inside my head was able to get me and my clan to advantage, then I will tell them. ¡°Ophis¡¯s goal is to chase Great Red away from Dimensional Gap. She wanted to gain her silence back, which is easy to do with my power or we just need to let her enter that place, old man.¡± I grinned at my old man and the other youkai. After entering that place behind our mansion, I thought of a plan. If Ophis wanted silence, then that place that was surrounded by my old man¡¯s Fear is perfect. There was no disturbing sound, and the place was concealed perfectly. Only me and my old man or someone who was able to cut my old man¡¯s Fear will be able to find that place. I doubt the devil would be able to find the place, and even Gods will have trouble finding the house if I add the effect of my Sacred Gear on top of the Fear. ¡°That¡¯s too good to be true. How did you find that information, Riku?¡± Asked my old man with a doubting tone. He wanted to test or try to get my source of information. ¡°Why are you asking that, old man. My source of information has nothing to do with you, right?¡± ¡°Haa?!¡± My old man scowled and shouted. ¡°You think that you are stronger than me now huh, you brat?!¡± ¡°Ha?! That¡¯s the fact, you shitty old man. Do you want to take it out right now?¡± I shouted back at my old man as I leaned my head closer and raised my right leg to intimidate him. The youkai were flabbergasted when they saw us, but they recovered quickly and took a sake cup in front of them, and smiled. ¡°Get him, young master! Commander has been too cocky these days!¡± ¡°No, commander! Young Master is too young, teach him some manners!¡± ¡°Haa?! What are you saying, young master is strong enough at his age! He even defeated Kokabiel without sweating!¡± The youkai had divided into two, those who support my old man and those who support me. But even so, they were like the supporter of soccer, they just talked to each other, maybe punching each other when their favorite team playing, then they will reconcile after the match. ¡°It seems the successor announcement needs to be put off after our match, brat.¡± My old man said with a feral grin on his face. closed my right eyes and put on the same grin as I said, ¡°Oh, I thought the same thing. I won¡¯t succeed you if you are weak, old man. I will make my own faction if that¡¯s the case.¡± The youkai started shouting, and then we disappeared from their sight at the same time. As I disappeared using Meikyo Shisui, I glanced at Hagoromo Gitsune and saw her smiling. As soon as I saw my old man disappear, I called my Nenekirimaru and imbued it with Fear, slashing the place in front of me. His Fear was cut rather easily and his body re-appeared from thin air. His kimono was slashed a little bit, but it left no scar on his body. ¡°Hahahaha, is that it, old man?!¡± I shouted while dispersing my voice so it would be heard from various places. My old man grinned and then imbued his right hand with a spear as he made a swing motion. He swung his right hand from the left to the right, aiming at my stomach. It¡¯s a mysterious thing, we Nurarihyon Youkai will never be felt by the others, but my old man somehow can pinpoint my place. But unfortunately, his Fear was a bit weaker than mine right now. I finally realized that my old man used most or at least half of his power to hide the house where my mother lived a long time ago. So, he can¡¯t cut my Fear and raised his hands in defeat. I showed up again, and the youkai clapped their hands for me. ¡°Whooo young master!!¡± ¡°Long live Commander! Long live Young Master!!¡± The youkai went into a lively mood as if the information about Khaos Brigade was just a passing wind. I knew this from the start, that was why I followed my old man''s lead and showed my power. This also worked to show my power to the leader of the clan so they will approve my position as the heir, the successor as the leader of the East Youkai Clan. ¡°Well, it seems that I am not wrong to appoint you as my successor, Riku.¡± Said my old man as he took his seat again. I took a seat again, ignoring the fact that we just had a quick exchange earlier, and smiled. ¡°As if there is anyone other than me to be your successor in the first place.¡± We laughed at the same time, and then the meeting proceed to a drinking contest as usual. RaizarP Author Here~ More than 55 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 88 – Visiting Vatican Again ¡°Are you sure, Riku? You won¡¯t be back for at least a week?¡± Asked my old man. We were standing at the entrance of my mansion. My old man was looking at me in front of me with Setsuna on his side while I stood with Masaomi and Kubinashi. Both of them will follow me wherever I went from now on. At first, I just wanted to bring Masaomi with me, but then Kubinashi asked to follow me because he can help with securing anything with his string. I didn¡¯t mind so I allowed him to tag along. I wanted to get an Excalibur shard to further enhance my strength, but after learning the technique that my old man gave me, I have enough power to cut my opponent. And so my goal had changed, I wanted to find Khaos Brigade¡¯s base. It could be in Dimensional Gap, but the Hero Faction would surely have a base on Earth, and that¡¯s my goal. I had read something alongside their base was in Japan from the series, but I forgot the exact place. It has been 16 years since I lived here, and my idiot self from years ago didn¡¯t write the location of their base in my notebook. ¡°Yeah, after hearing Khaos Brigade made a move, I will try to find their base by myself.¡± My best bet was Vali, if I could find him then I will be able to meet even Ophis herself. Talking about Vali, I grinned at my old man. ¡°Hey, old man. Give me a way to contact the descendant of your old friend. He will surely be a big help this time.¡± Setsuna covered her mouth with her kimono¡¯s sleeves, seemed to understand what I talked about. Masaomi and Kubinashi were in the dark because they didn¡¯t know anything about my old man. ¡°You have planned this since I brought you to that place, huh.¡± Said my old man as he scratched the back of his head. ¡°As expected of young master, he resembled you, Commander.¡± Said Setsuna as she chuckled in amusement with closed eyes. ¡°Damn, why did I raise him to be such a sly brat.¡± Grumbled my old man before he looked up to the sky. We were just smiling while looking at my old man until he finally lowered his head. ¡°Fine, his name is Bikou. He¡¯s a monkey youkai and he also has a weapon that looked like that old monkey¡¯s weapon, Ruyi Jingu Bang.¡± Bikou, huh. I expected it to be him, but he was leaking information about Khaos Brigade for Sun Wukong? My old man said that he also had some insiders. I looked at him with a sly smile on my face, telling him with my expression that he can¡¯t fool me. ¡°Haa-¡° My old man sighed and crossed his arms. ¡°I had some insider, but they were killed after they conveyed the information to me. It¡¯s unfortunate to lose him, but it can¡¯t be helped.¡± My old man had a sad expression as he said that. His informant was killed? So that was why he held that meeting yesterday. I nodded my head and then turned around. I walked away and raised my right hand. ¡°Don¡¯t worry old man, the one who sees Khaos Brigade as a nuisance is not only us. I will stop by someplace to tell them about this information, we have a lot of allies, old man.¡± I glanced over my shoulder with a smirk on my face. Kubinashi and Masaomi bowed their head to my old man and followed me. After both of them caught up to me, I teleported the three of us to Vatican City. We arrived right in front of their Church, and we were immediately surrounded by a lot of Exorcists. ¡°Stop where you are and identify yourself!¡± One of the exorcists with the typical exorcist''s robe stepped forward and pointed his sword at us. He was a man in his thirty with brown hair. The other Exorcists took out their light sword and pointed its tip to us too. When he saw us, no, when he saw Masaomi who stood beside me, he was surprised. ¡°Masaomi?¡± Asked the exorcist. I glanced at Masaomi and saw him smiling a little, but he had a sad expression on his face. ¡°It¡¯s been a long time, Shido-san. I never expected you to be in Vatican City when your post was in England. I heard you stopped being Exorcist and became a Pastor of the Protestant Church of England?¡± After realizing Masaomi¡¯s identity, the man with brown hair which I guessed as Shido Touji, the father of Shido Irina lowered his sword and gestured the other Exorcists to lower their sword with his hand. ¡°I was called here by Vasco Strada-sama, he said that he had some interesting information. Imagine my surprise knowing the subordinate that I killed myself was in fact still alive and visited Vatican Church a few days ago.¡± ¡°I was lucky, but I still can¡¯t forgive you. You know the reason without me telling you, right?¡± Masaomi narrowed his eyes and glared at Touji. Well, this is bad. Touji killed his beloved, so I understood why he was angry. But, we were in front of the Church right now, and I wanted to foster an alliance with them to tackle Khaos Brigade. ¡°Yes, I was wrong. I killed you and drive your lover back to the Underworld. I won¡¯t ask to be forgiven-¡° ¡°Wait a minute, drive back? Cleria is still alive?!¡± Masaomi interrupted Touji as he shouted with a loud voice. His expression turned into that of someone who hoping for something. I also didn¡¯t hear it wrong, Touji said ¡®drive away¡¯, not kill. So that meant, Cleria Belial was still alive. So that was why! Kuoh Town was leased to Devil for Satan¡¯s siblings. Cleria Belial was never an overseer of Kuoh Town. ¡°Yes? We drove her away to the Underworld because we wanted to maintain the status quo of the 3 factions. If we killed her, it will become a war and we wanted to avoid that.¡± Masaomi had a big smile on his face as he lowered his head. ¡°Is that so¡­ so she¡¯s alive¡­¡± He muttered in a low voice, and after clearing the misunderstanding, I spoke. ¡°So, can I meet Vasco right away?¡± Touji looked at me and nodded his head. ¡°Yes, please this way.¡± Said Touji as he gestured to follow him with his hand. The Exorcists made way for us and we followed Touji. RaizarP Author Here~ More than 55 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks for the New Squad Leader!! - kuba mytek Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 89 – Gabriel We were led by Touji to a grand room inside the Church. The room was empty, but there was a big table in the middle of the room and 3 chairs on each side of the table. Touji asked us to sit on the left side of the table while he called Vasco Strada and the other that wanted to meet me directly. He went out of the room and closed the big white door that was decorated in gold. ¡°Riku-sama, do you think I will be able to meet her again?¡± Asked Masaomi after the door closed. ¡°Let¡¯s talk about that later, Masaomi. Right now I was thinking about who will come with Vasco.¡± I answered Masaomi as I crossed my arms and smiled. ¡°My apologies, Riku-sama.¡± Said Masaomi as he bowed his head a little. I gestured at him with my hand to not mind it, and Kubinashi asked from my left side. ¡°Is that a problem, Riku-sama? I believe that humans would be weaker than us, except for some.¡± ¡°That¡¯s not a problem, but if a Seraph comes with Vasco, then it will be troublesome. Not only troublesome though, I actually prefer if a Seraph comes with Vasco.¡± That way, I can negotiate directly for an alliance between the Church and Youkai faction to destroy Khaos Brigade. ¡°I-Is that so. There is a possibility of Seraph will meet with us.¡± Said Masaomi with a cracked voice. The truth was, I had expected a grand audience like this after I visited Vasco that time. I was sneaking in when I met Vasco for the first time, but then the Exorcists, as in Irina and Xenovia must¡¯ve reported about me to the higher up. Not only that, I killed Kokabiel easily. It was like telling the supernatural world that I had joined in the fray, so it was natural for the leader of each faction to show up if I visited their base. The question was¡­ ¡®Which one of the Seraph will meet me right now. I had visited this place unannounced, so I guess Michael will be out of the list because he was busy maintaining the system. Either Gabriel, Uriel, or Raphael will visit this place.¡¯ ¡°Riku-sama, this is not the best time to ask this, but I was curious.¡± Kubinashi said with a serious tone. I looked at him and saw his head was looking at me with a serious expression. ¡°What did Humans think of us, Youkai, in this world? Do they believe us as a myth or as a ghost?¡± That¡¯s a good question, but really out of place to be asked in this place. ¡°Also, what does the Church think of us, Youkai in general? The gaze that I received earlier, they were different from the gaze that I got from the Keikain family. The humans in this place just looked at me like any other supernatural entity without having a look of hatred.¡± Ah, so that¡¯s how it is. Certainly, the Church had nothing to do with us. So that was why they didn¡¯t have any hatred towards us. ¡°We, the youkai was standing between the lines of neutrality. The other factions thought of youkai as Shinto Faction¡¯s subordinates, but that was far from the truth. Gods are strong, but someone like me and my old man can at least hold our ground if we fight against them. So, we are in a neutral stance in the Supernatural world.¡± Kubinashi seemed to be satisfied with my answer as he nodded his head and smiled. ¡°That¡¯s good to hear. Youkai isn¡¯t hated in this world, somehow that makes me happy.¡± ¡°That¡¯s true. For all I know before Riku-sama invited me, I had always thought of Youkai as a creature instead of Race of Supernatural. I had never expected a power like Nurarihyon or Riku-sama to exist.¡± Said Masaomi as he looked at Kubinashi. ¡°Youkai was a peaceful race, they never got involved in a war. That¡¯s until the Nekomata incident.¡± Added Masaomi. When he said that, I turned my gaze at Masaomi. ¡°Don¡¯t talk about that.¡± I said in a cold tone, causing Masaomi to widen his eyes in surprise. He bowed his head and said, ¡°My apologies, Riku-sama. I¡¯ve overstepped the bound.¡± I glanced at Kubinashi and saw him having a surprised expression too. It seems that he wanted to ask about the incident, but he held himself as the door of the room was opened. 3 people were entering the room. One of them was Vasco. Behind Vasco was a woman wearing nun clothes that looked like in her late 20. The last one was rather surprising though, the only female Seraph, Gabriel was following the two of them with a smile on her face. Touji also entered the room after three of them walked towards their respective chair. He stood in front of the door and crossed his hand behind his back. Gabriel sat on the chair in the middle, Vasco sat on the left while the woman in nun clothes sat on the right. ¡°Hello, it¡¯s the first time we are meeting each other right?¡± As soon as Gabriel sat in her seat, she didn¡¯t waste any time and asked us a question. I glanced at Vasco and saw him grinning. Every old man that I met really loved surprise, I didn¡¯t get surprised though as I had experienced a lot of unexpected situations. I relaxed my arms and smiled at Gabriel. ¡°Indeed, and I never expected that Lady Gabriel herself would meet me in this room.¡± The woman beside Gabriel looked at me with a stoic face, but her lips were curved up in a smile. ¡°It¡¯s just natural. I am interested in you who visited the Vatican Church and meet Vasco who sit beside me as if visiting a restaurant.¡± Gabriel put her hand on her cheek as she said that. ¡°Hahaha, it¡¯s within my blood. You must¡¯ve heard about Nurarihyon who loved dine and dash.¡± ¡°Yes! His story was interesting, but I thought that he¡¯s a bad guy! You must pay for the dish that you eat!¡± Gabriel pointed her index finger at me while pouting cutely. As expected, she¡¯s the most clueless angel in Heaven. But that doesn¡¯t mean that she didn¡¯t know what she did. She had lived for quite a while, so she must¡¯ve learned one or two tricks in her life. I raised my arms beside my head and said. ¡°If you say so. I never did any dine or dash though.¡± Gabriel smiled at me and nodded her head. ¡°Good! That¡¯s a good boy! Now, why did a good boy like you visit Vatican Church again?¡± Gabriel''s tone turned serious at the end of her sentence and her smile now had resembled the woman beside her. I narrowed my eyes and my smile widened. I put my right hand on the table. ¡°First, let¡¯s talk about something interesting. Let¡¯s see, Khaos Brigade, the terrorist organization that is led by Ophis would be an interesting subject, no?¡± The atmosphere in the room turned tense all of a sudden. Vasco narrowed his gaze and the smile of the woman beside Gabriel turned into a frown. Gabriel was also surprised as she covered her mouth with her hands. ¡°Can you tell us about it?¡± Asked Gabriel. RaizarP Author Here~ More than 55 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks for the New Squad Leader!! - Abbys - Ryan - Other Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 90 – Alliance Formed ¡°This is bad¡­¡± Said Vasco as he crossed his arms. I told him about what my old man talked about in the meeting, and their reactions were what I had expected. Vasco was holding his head, Gabriel had a crestfallen expression while the woman beside Gabriel that I finally know her name as Griselda had a bitter expression. They didn¡¯t look good, especially since Church was one of the weakest factions right now in the Supernatural. The Angel had yet to invent their brave saint system, and the humans can¡¯t hope to fight against Ophis and Old Satan Factions. ¡°I never expected they will make an organization.¡± Muttered Gabriel as she looked down at the table. Griselda had the calmest expression. She looked at me with a stoic expression and asked. ¡°I understand that, but I wanted to ask something if you don¡¯t mind.¡± I raised my right hand at her and smiled. ¡°Feel free to ask.¡± ¡°What is the reason for your visit to the Vatican Church this time. Surely you are not here just to tell us about Khaos Brigade, right?¡± I like someone who was quick on uptake like her. She could recover quickly from her shock and made a sound judgment. With a wide smile on my face, I said. ¡°I¡¯m here to talk about something to Vasco about the swords. It was gone, I mean it was not in Japan. I think the swords were taken out of Kuoh Town by someone, and then it was robbed by the members of Khaos Brigade.¡± I didn¡¯t have the evidence about it, but I had confidence that the swords were taken by them. One of Vali Team¡¯s members, the one who took the name of Arthur Pendragon had Excalibur Ruler. If it was him, then he will be able to find the Excalibur Fragment without any difficulty. ¡°Is that so?¡± Answered Vasco as he regained his composure. ¡°I didn¡¯t think that someone would take the sword before you or us, it¡¯s our fault for not realizing the existence of Khaos Brigade faster.¡± I nodded my head in agreement. It was not like I didn¡¯t know about them, I underestimate them. Vali must have told Arthur about the existence of the fragments, but I just brushed it off and didn¡¯t act as fast as I can. ¡°We can¡¯t do anything if the fragments¡¯ location are unknown.¡± Said Gabriel. ¡°More importantly, I want to propose something with you, Nura Riku.¡± Gabriel looked at me with a serious face, to which I replied with a serious tone. ¡°Is it about alliance proposal?¡± Gabriel nodded her head. ¡°Yes, I know that I am in no position to propose an alliance, but honestly, Heavens and Church are in difficult situations right now. The angels¡¯ number are decreasing, and the Exorcists in the church were not as strong as the other supernatural being.¡± Touji and Masaomi had a bitter faces when Gabriel said her thought out loud like that. While it was true that Exorcists without holy sword or Sacred Gear can¡¯t even rival Ultimate rank or even High rank, they were still enough to protect humans from Supernatural. Now, how should I answer? Allying with Chruch was one of my goals, but I never expected that Gabriel was the one who proposed it. Certainly, I didn¡¯t expect her to be so honest about the situation of her Factions. If the one who sat in front of me was Michael, I would have a rather hard time getting an alliance with them. Even if we formed one, my advantages would be minimal at best. My inner strategist mind was smiling, I decided to get every advantage that I will be able to get in this alliance. ¡°Hmm, alliance, huh. If it is an alliance between Heaven and Church with YOUKAI Faction, it would be hard.¡± Gabriel became sad after she heard what I said. Griselda let out a sigh of resignation, but Vasco was smiling at me. ¡°YOUKAI Faction would be hard, huh. Then how about East Youkai Faction, Riku?¡± It seems he noticed what I wanted to say. Indeed, I have no authority over all Youkai Faction even if I was appointed as the successor of my old man. That was because the YOUKAI was divided into 2 factions. My best advantage at this was to lend them only a small amount of our power while getting help from Heaven and Church. Not only that, I planned to get something from them to complete my Hyakki Yakkou. There was something that my subordinates lacked. It was holy power. Only Masaomi had Holy Sword, the other fought with their specialty, Fear. If my enemy was immune to something other than Holy Power, then it would be hard for my subordinates to fight them. I had no problem though, as I can always use Nenekirimaru to cut them through their defense. ¡°That would be fine. Maybe you have heard about it, but I was officially appointed as Nurarihyon¡¯s successor. That means I could move East Youkai Clan and make a decision in Nurarihyon¡¯s stead.¡± Gabriel beamed into a smile as she leaned her body closer to me, ignoring the table between us, and took my hand. ¡°Thank you! Thank you for accepting the alliance!¡± ¡®Too close!¡¯ Kubinashi was also surprised by Gabriel¡¯s behavior. Griselda tried to hold Gabriel, but she was just holding to her lightly because Griselda didn¡¯t want to be rude to Gabriel, so her effort was in vain. ¡°I know, so can you please back up, Lady Gabriel? We had yet to talk about the content of our alliance and it was not official yet until we sign the contract about it!¡± ¡°Oh, please forgive me!¡± Gabriel backed out and sat on her seat while coughing in embarrassment. ¡°Then what do you want in this alliance other than helping each other, Lady Gabriel. I will add something if I find it difficult, please feel free to tell me about it. I will tell you my condition after yours.¡± ¡°Oh! I never think about our conditions! Well, how about something like information sharing between us?¡± Information sharing, getting more information would help us as well. ¡°I don¡¯t mind about that, are you sure that¡¯s all that you wanted?¡± I asked Gabriel with a smile on my face. That condition will help the two of us, and I had a hard time trusting those who never asked for an advantage for themselves. ¡°Eh, I thought that was a good idea? Was it not, Griselda?¡± Griselda closed her eyes and said, ¡°I believe that was a wonderful idea, Milady.¡± Ah, I forgot about it. Gabriel was na?ve, unlike her brother Michael. I laughed in front of them. They were surprised and Gabriel tilted her head. ¡°Hahahaha, sorry about that. Well then to my conditions.¡± I put on a serious expression but still smiled as I said that. ¡°I wanted to get a light sword and gun from Church.¡± They were a weak weapon, but if it was utilized correctly then it will become a plus to our power. I can ask that old crow to analyze the weapon to make a new one for my army too because he still has debt to me. ¡°I don¡¯t mind! If that could make you help us then I don¡¯t mind giving you the light weapon from Church!¡± Said Gabriel. Hearing her answer, my smile deepened. ¡°It¡¯s nice to have an alliance with you.¡± ¡°Likewise!¡± Answered Gabriel with an honest smile. RaizarP Author Here~ More than 55 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks for the New Squad Leader! - Kevin Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 91 – A clue about Khaos Brigade After talking about the details of the alliance, Touji exited the room and brought us the parchment to sign on. The alliance between us could be summarized in four clauses. First, each faction will help the other if the faction is attacked. Second, we will share information and provide any information if the other faction asked about it. This only includes the information that was already known to the faction. Third, Church and Heaven will provide Light Sword and Gun to East Youkai Faction in a reasonable amount. This will be active immediately and the Church will be allowed to keep the manufacturing method of those weapons a secret from the youkai. Four, if there is any betrayer from each side, both factions will deal with them together. This is implemented to forge trust with each other and keep misinformation to minimal. The ones who signed the alliance were me as the representative of Youkai, Gabriel as the representative of Heaven, and Vasco as the representative of the Church. It was a small alliance between youkai and the holy factions, and this was enough. After signing the alliance, I added some bonuses to them. ¡°Grigori and Sirzechs wanted to form peace with the three factions. I think that they will agree to a peace conference if one of the leaders brought it up and invited the others.¡± Clause two, information sharing. I gave them the information that I held in this meeting because I didn¡¯t want them to change their mind. Now that the alliance between us was official, I didn¡¯t need to hide this information anymore. ¡°Really?! I must tell my brother quickly!¡± Exclaimed Gabriel with a happy face. Vasco smiled wryly while looking at me. ¡°You deliberately hid that information on purpose, didn¡¯t you?¡± Griselda also looked at me suspiciously, but I just shrugged my shoulder without answering them. Touji approached Masaomi and was talking with him for a while. When he was done, Masaomi¡¯s complexion was better and he was smiling all the time. Because our goal in the Church was reached, I told them that we had something that we need to do. Gabriel thanked me for the information that I told them and we left the Church. We teleported to Kyoto to continue our purpose of finding Khaos Brigade¡¯s base. Kubinashi was curious why I choose to teleport to Kyoto instead of Kanto. I told him that we might as well tell Yasaka about Khaos Brigade so she could prepare herself. We boldly entered Yasaka¡¯s residence as I hid Kubinashi, Masaomi, and my presence with Fear. I didn¡¯t want any old youkai in the west faction to find us, as that will cause something troublesome. I had found Yasaka¡¯s location, she was in the yard with Kunou so I made my way to the yard without stopping in some random place. When we arrived at the yard, Yasaka was sitting on the terrace while watching Kunou practicing her Senjutsu. She held a teacup in her hand and a tray full of snacks was available on her right. I gestured Kubinashi and Masaomi to say a bit away from Yasaka as I walked to her and sat on her right. As I sat, I took the snack on the tray, it was dorayaki and brought it to my mouth as I dispelled my Fear. ¡°Hmm, this is good.¡± Yasaka was surprised by my sudden appearance, but she recovered rather quickly. ¡°It was not polite you know, taking other people''s snacks without telling them.¡± Said Yasaka as she looked at me with a small smile on her face. Kunou has also noticed my presence. She stopped her training, turned to me, and waved her hand. I waved my hand back and told her to continue her training as I only stay here for a while. She nodded her head and continued her training, which was good. ¡°So, Riku-han. Why are you here?¡± Asked Yasaka as she tilted her head. ¡°You see¡­¡± I then told Yasaka about the meeting of my old man yesterday. About Khaos Brigade and finally, I told her about the alliance that I forged with the Church earlier. She was surprised but as a leader of the west youkai faction, she choose to keep silent about this matter for a while. ¡°Except for that alliance, what are you planning?¡± Yasaka asked me in a worried tone. I guess I made her worried about me, huh. ¡°For now, I will visit a lot of places to find the base of the Khaos Brigade. They are bound to have a base or two on Earth, seeing this place was the meeting place of a lot of factions.¡± I looked at the sky and bit the dorayaki after I said that. I had spread my senses to the limit since I left Kanto, I even activated it when I talked with Gabriel. But as of now, I haven¡¯t found a place that screams ¡®This is Khaos Brigade¡¯s base¡¯ near the place that I visited. This will be a long journey, or rather this is bound to be. ¡°Why don¡¯t you find the member of their organization instead of their base? That way you could find their base by following them.¡± Suggested Yasaka. ¡°I know about that, but there is ¡­ oh¡± In the middle of my sentence, I realized something. That guy was a member of the Khaos Brigade, right? The devil who had a sick hobby of collecting Holy Maiden. ¡°It seems you realized something. But, are you okay?¡± Asked Yasaka with a worried tone. I looked at Yasaka with a reassuring smile. ¡°I¡¯m fine. But I need to go now. I have a Hakuryuukou that needs to be found.¡± ¡°Hakuryuukou?! Be careful, Riku-han. I will have a talk with Nurarihyon after this.¡± I stood up and laughed at Yasaka. ¡°Hahahaha, feel free to talk with my old man. Then I will go.¡± After leaving those words, I shrouded myself with Fear again and gone from that place. I exited Yasaka¡¯s residence with Kubinashi and Masaomi. ¡°Riku-sama, what are you going to do now? It seems you got a clue from the talk with Yasaka-sama.¡± Asked Masaomi. I just smiled at him and pulled out my phone. It was a flip model phone, and I didn¡¯t use it too often. This time, I need to make a call to someone as a debt collector. I dialed his number and put the phone near my ear. ¡°Yo, old crow. I need to take the compensation now.¡± A second later, the voice of someone with as much freedom as my old man sounded from my phone. ¡°Oh, do tell me about it.¡± RaizarP Author Here~ More than 55 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 92 – The Black Dog After contacting Azazel, we made a plan to meet each other tomorrow. I asked him to bring Vali with him, and he agreed because he said Vali has been pestering him to meet me. Because we had free time, I decided to go to Tokyo, the capital of Japan. This area was our territory, and I wanted to at least see it with my own eyes as I had never really visited the heart of Tokyo. Tokyo was big, we teleported to Shibuya and acted like normal humans. I was wearing my Kimono though, so we kind of gathered the attention of the people around us. Not to mention, we are three handsome men without the company of a girl. The curious one even talked to us and asked for my phone number. Kubinashi was fluttered and his head retreated back to the scarf that he wore to hide his neck area. Masaomi refused the advance of the girls because he said that he had a lover that was waiting for him. I rather felt bad toward Masaomi after I knew Cleria was still in Underworld, but that red-haired Satan still owed me something. I plan to visit the Underworld eventually to find the hidden base of the Khaos Brigade in the Underworld, I will use that chance to meet with Cleria Belial. If I remembered correctly, Diehauser once retreated from the war after seeing my old man. This will be interesting, what would his reaction be when he saw me who resembled my old man. We were able to shake the girls who followed us off and Kubinashi said. ¡°Riku-sama, why are we visiting this place? I doubt that the base of the terrorist will be located in a big city like this.¡± I looked at Kubinashi with my arms crossed inside my Kimono. ¡°To be honest, I never expected something like that. But, now that we are here, there is some suspicious place in this city that was unable to be reached by my Senjutsu.¡± ¡°So that means?!¡± Exclaimed Kubinashi with widened eyes. ¡°I think it is a place where a supernatural resident resides.¡± Said Masaomi. ¡°That¡¯s true, we can¡¯t be sure if that place was the base of Khaos Brigade. Even so, let¡¯s visit it.¡± I said with a grin on my face. My right eye was closed, and I covered Kubinashi and Masaomi with my Fear so no one could see them. ¡°There will be two places, let¡¯s visit the closest one first.¡± *** ¡°This is it.¡± I said as I looked at the place in front of us. I had dispelled the Fear around Masaomi and Kubinashi as I arrived in this place. ¡°A bar?¡± Asked Masaomi as he looked at the sign that was hung above the door. This place was located near the heart of Tokyo, more specifically, it was located in the red light district of Tokyo. ¡°Black Dog Bar? Are you sure it¡¯s here, Riku-sama?¡± Asked Kubinashi as he looked around the area. ¡°There is nothing special here.¡± While both of them were confused, I had a grin on my face. That old crow must¡¯ve never expected this. To think that this place was in this city, I was lucky. ¡°Let¡¯s enter, this place is one of our stop.¡± I had planned to meet him after I meet Azazel, but I found his place first so I will visit him right now. The sign that was hung on the door was indicating that this place had opened. It was still mid-day, so this bar didn¡¯t serve any alcohol yet. Even so, the restaurant on the first floor of this place also served as a restaurant. I opened the door while being followed by Kubinashi and Masaomi who looked around suspiciously. When we entered, a girl with brown light hair greeted us from the counter. ¡°Welcome!¡± That girl was wearing the waitress clothes, a white shirt, and a black skirt with a white apron on top of the shirt. She also had big boobs, as expected of this world. When she saw us, or rather me, she stopped for a while before approaching us with a smile. ¡°Table for three people?¡± Asked the girl. I nodded my head at her. ¡°Yeah, also can you call the ¡®dog¡¯ for me? I wanted to talk with him.¡± As usual, when I meet with new people I love to show off. I closed my right eye and raised my chin a little. Kubinashi and Masaomi didn¡¯t understand what I meant by ¡®dog¡¯, but they kept their mouth shut and put on a calm face. ¡°For four people then, please follow me.¡± The girl gestured with her hand and began to walk towards the stairs that led to the second floor. The second floor of this place was a bar, like the sign above the door signified. But, it was no ordinary bar. This bar was built by that old crow for the agents of Grigory, formerly Himejima Clan¡¯s member. This bar was supposedly located in another city, I forgot the specific place, but it was around Kyoto. For some reason, this bar was built in Tokyo instead of Kyoto, not that I mind it as I was able to find this place faster than I had planned. While we were following the girl to the second floor, Masaomi used this chance to ask me in a low voice. ¡°Riku-sama, could it be the ¡®dog¡¯ that you refer to that sacred gear?¡± As a former Exorcist, it would be strange if Masaomi didn¡¯t know about Sacred Gear. His question was on point, so I nodded my head to answer him. He let out a surprised gasp, which was natural for someone who know it. One of the thirteen Longinus, Canis Lykaon. The Longinus Sacred Gears were powerful, even a human, the current owner of the Longinus was regarded as a top fighter in Grigori. On the second floor, there was only a simple bar with a young man standing behind the counter. A blonde woman with magician robes sat on the counter with a smile on her face as she looked at the young man. The young man had nothing impressive, the usual black hair of Japanese and ordinary face. But, he was the current user of Canis Lykaon, Tobio Ikuse. ¡°Welcome, welcome to Black Dog Bar.¡± Said Tobio Ikuse from the bar with a smile on his face as he looked at me. The girl that escorted us bowed her head at me and then ran back to the first floor through the stairs. I looked at Tobio Ikuse with a big grin. RaizarP Author Here~ More than 55 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 93 – The Princess and Black Dog We sat on the counter after Tobio welcomed us. I took a seat before the blonde who wore magician robes and greeted her. ¡°Nice to meet you. I was expecting to meet a dog today, but I never thought that I will be able to meet a beautiful Princess too.¡± Kubinashi and Masaomi took a seat on my right and they greeted Tobio too. The blonde chuckled cutely with her hand covering her mouth and looked at me. ¡°You overpraise me. I was here for a drink, but I also never expected to meet a person who recently became a hot topic in supernatural for defeating Kokabiel.¡± ¡°Hahaha, I am not that great. Slash/Dog team had made a lot of achievements in Japan, you are more famous than this jokester of a youkai¡± ¡°My, you are a funny guy. Can I call you Ri-kun?¡± Asked the blonde as she tilted her head a little. ¡°This is my first time getting a nickname. I don¡¯t mind, but can I call you Reni too?¡± ¡°Sure! You are Va-kun¡¯s friend, so feel free to call me with whatever you want!¡± Exclaimed the girl, Lavinia Reni, happily as she clapped her hand. ¡°Ehem!¡± Suddenly, Tobio coughed hard as if trying to interrupt our conversation. He looked at me with a smile, but his eyes were not smiling, and said. ¡°Excuse me, this is a bar but don¡¯t you want to order anything? Oh, I forgot. You are underage.¡± ¡°Oh, are you jealous by any chance?¡± I smirked at Tobio and put my hand on the counter. ¡°Also, give me a Sake. Is age really a concern when we, youkai, were never following Japan¡¯s law?¡± ¡°Well, that¡¯s true. How about the two guys on your right?¡± Asked Tobio as he looked at Kubinashi and Masaomi. ¡°Sake for me too.¡± Answered Kubinashi. ¡°I will take a glass of wine, please.¡± Answered Masaomi. ¡°Alright, two Sakes and a glass of wine.¡± Tobio began to prepare our order and I continued to chat with Reni. ¡°Was Vali visited this place after he lost to me? I bet he wanted to fight me again, right?¡± ¡°Yes, he visited me and Tobi right after he had his duel with you. He told us about how he found a rival that was able to beat him even though he dueled a boy who was younger than him.¡± ¡°Oh, that seems interesting. He didn¡¯t get mad, but he was happy. What a strange guy.¡± ¡°You can¡¯t blame Va-kun. Although he¡¯s reckless, he¡¯s a good boy deep inside. I hope you can become his friend, Ri-kun.¡± ¡°I don¡¯t mind, I was about to meet him tomorrow after I am done with my business. I want to ask something if you don¡¯t mind.¡± ¡°Sure, feel free to ask.¡± As Reni said that, Tobio put our order in front of us. ¡°Customers, I thought you were asking to meet me. But why did you just talk with my singer and ignore me?¡± Tobio said with a low tone, showing his bad mood because I had ignored him all this time. ¡°It was because the Princess beside me was talking to me. As a gentleman, it¡¯s natural for me to give her company, right? But well, business comes first.¡± ¡°So, what¡¯s your business for coming here, oh the great famous youkai who defeated Kokabiel.¡± ¡°You can just call me Riku if you want to, Tobi.¡± We were glaring at each other for a while. Reni was chuckling beside me while Kubinashi was just drinking his sake as if nothing happened. Masaomi was confused for a second, but when he saw Kubinashi he decided to just enjoy his wine in silence. After glaring at each other for a while, we were bursting into laughter. I knew that this guy had a sense of humor, that was why I followed along to get a little closer to him. Even though he¡¯s a human, with his mastery over his Sacred Gear, maybe I can get a tip or two to awaken my Balance Breaker. So there was nothing wrong to get closer to Tobio Ikuse. ¡°Hahahaha, oh damn. It¡¯s been a long time since someone visited us, so I wanted to make the atmosphere lighter.¡± Said Tobio as he wiped the tears that formed on the edge of his eyes because he laughed too much. ¡°Hahaha, I don¡¯t mind. I visited this place suddenly, so it¡¯s enough for me if you are willing to talk to us.¡± ¡°So, back to business, you want to ask us something?¡± ¡°Yep.¡± I said and took the cup of sake that was in front of me and drank it in one go. ¡°So there is this terrorist group called Khaos Brigade. It seems that Reni¡¯s beloved Va-kun is about to join that group to fight a strong opponent. So, I wanted Reni¡¯s beloved Va-kun to help me with something in exchange for fighting with me once more time, or maybe we could even spar in my free time.¡± Tobio facepalmed at my mention of Vali planned to join Khaos Brigade. As expected from the agent of Grigori, he must¡¯ve collected information about Khaos Brigade even before the other factions noticed its existence. ¡°That guy, I know that he loves fighting a strong opponent, but he doesn¡¯t know what he¡¯s doing.¡± ¡°Nah, just allow him to join them. That way he can give you more information from Khaos Brigade.¡± I said as I raised my index finger. ¡°The problem is not that.¡± Tobio took a glass and wiped it with a cloth that he held with his left hand. ¡°There is someone that was related to Vali in that organization. Don¡¯t tell Vali that I told you this, but he¡¯s the descendant of the original Lucifer.¡± I was rather surprised that Tobio told me this. I knew about it, but that fact was rather sensitive and must not be told to anyone other than the trusted one. That meant¡­ ¡°Do you trust me that much?¡± Tobio just smiled at my question. He didn¡¯t say anything more and I guess that was enough. I still wanted to ask about some information, but that could wait. If one of the places that I couldn¡¯t feel was this place, then the other was more suspicious. It was a bit far from this, but I could reach it in a minute or two if I run at my full speed. I gulped the leftover sake in one go and stood up from the counter. ¡°Oh, you are about to leave now? I thought you wanted to ask something?¡± Tobio asked me with a confused tone, but it was only a question out of curiosity. ¡°Well, I wanted to ask something more, but I think I must get satisfied just by getting acquainted with Princess and Dog.¡± I smiled at him and walked away. Kubinashi also stood up and followed me from behind after thanking Tobio. Masaomi who held human¡¯s common sense pulled money from his pocket and put it on the table to pay for our drinks before following us. ¡°Take care of yourself.¡± Said Tobio. I replied by waving my hand and we went downstairs while leaving a message. ¡°Tag along with Azazel to meet us tomorrow!¡± We exited the building and I looked in the direction of a certain district of Tokyo. It¡¯s time to check the second place. RaizarP Author Here~ More than 55 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 94 – First meeting in Shibatama Taishakuten Shrine We exited the bar and walked to Katsushika city, it was the location of the last place that I couldn¡¯t feel. I used the chance to look at the map when we found it on the street and managed to pinpoint the location of the blank area that was able to block my perception. ¡°Shrine?¡± Asked Kubinashi. ¡°Yes, a shrine called Shibatama Taishakuten. It was a shrine or rather temple that was known for its ornate carvings. The location that I couldn¡¯t feel with my Senjutsu is that place. Also, if we are talking about the shrine, the possibility of the Supernatural entity that resides in one was reduced into three.¡± Masaomi looked at me with a serious face. ¡°Five Principal Clans, Humans that hide from Supernatural, or Gods of Shinto.¡± I nodded my head at him. ¡°Correct, but the Five Principal Clans are based in Kyoto. Gods of Shinto are unlikely to put something special in that shrine, so it¡¯s down to two. Either earth god or humans.¡± ¡°Riku-sama, if the one who resides in that shrine was an earth god, then it will become troublesome.¡± Said Kubinashi as he frowned. I looked at him with a curious expression. To be honest, I never meet Earth God or even the gods that were born from the attachment of someplace in Japan. At least not yet. But those gods often popped one after another in Kubinashi¡¯s world. ¡°If said Earth God was in the shrine where it was born, then it will surely be strong. Also, I have never met one in this world yet, so I thought that meeting Earth God in that shrine would be unlikely. With real Gods of Shinto in Japan, Earth God will have a low chance to be born, at least that¡¯s what I know after getting knowledge from Kuroka-sama and Tsura-sama.¡± ¡°Is that so? I never realized that. But then, it only came down to one last possibility.¡± I grinned as I looked at the shrine in the distance. It reeks of supernatural power now that I see it by myself, and there must be at least more than 10 people inside that place. ¡°So we hit our target on our first city? Talking about coincidence.¡± Said Masaomi as he fixed his suit. No, I don¡¯t think that it was a coincidence. My Sacred Gear must¡¯ve led me into this. This broken-ass Sacred Gear was really broken. I am looking forward to its Balance Breaker. Who knows? Maybe I can defeat Super Devil with its Balance Breaker. Let me correct, two of the three Super Devil. As the last one and the oldest one had a broken ability to cancel any Sacred Gear. ¡°I wonder about that.¡± I turned into my youkai form and began to walk toward the shrine in the distance. It has been half an hour after we are left the bar, and we had entered Katsushika City. The shrine was located near a river called the Edo River, so if we need to escape later, we can easily cross the river and hide. That¡¯s if we need to. I doubt that the one who made their base in Japan had the power to chase us out though. ¡°So, Riku-sama. Who do you think stayed in that shrine?¡± Asked Kubinashi as he cracked his fingers. I summoned Nenekirimaru, rested its blade on my shoulder, and used my Fear to hide our presence. ¡°It¡¯s the Hero Faction for sure. The humans who claimed themselves as Hero¡¯s descendants and wanted to kill every supernatural being that bring harm to humans. They are just the bunches of people with Hero Complex.¡± Masaomi who heard me looked at me while touching his chin with his right hand. ¡°That¡¯s a bit troublesome, Riku-sama. I had a chance to meet the descendant of Joan d¡¯Arc in my time as an Exorcist. And I must say, her Sacred Gear is simple, yet it¡¯s strong. Not on the level of Longinus, but at least she can kill Mid-rank devil by herself. As a human, that¡¯s impressive.¡± ¡°Mid-rank devil. If you compare it with the 6-winged crow that I killed at that time, how strong is Mid-rank devil?¡± Asked Kubinashi as he looked at Masaomi. ¡°I¡­ don¡¯t really know. But, Mid-rank devil should¡¯ve been able to fight 6-winged fallen angels. Not in the equal ground, but they can give them a long fight depending on the devil.¡± ¡°Then I will have no problem.¡± Said Kubinashi with a grin. We were eventually got closer to the Shrine and we had entered its vicinity. The area around the shrine had a different atmosphere from Tokyo. Tokyo was filled with high buildings and the modern road while this area was filled with houses that looked like from the Edo era and the road was made from the pavement, not the usual asphalt. ¡°It¡¯s nostalgic, seeing houses like these.¡± Muttered Kubinashi. There were a lot of stalls that sell traditional snacks from Japan. They sold Ohagi, Natto, and the others. Some of the stalls sold modern snacks though, so finding potato chips was not a problem. I took one bag of potato chips from the stall silently, of course, the owner didn¡¯t realize it. ¡°Riku-sama¡­¡± Said Kubinashi as he facepalmed when he realized a bag of potato chips in my hand. Masaomi smiled wryly while looking at me, but he then turned serious as we arrived in front of the shrine. I threw the remaining potato chips into my mouth and crumpled the bag before tossing it to the nearby trash bin. ¡°It seems they have not noticed us yet.¡± I licked my lips and lowered my hand that held Nenekirimaru to the side. Masaomi pulled out a light sword that was used by Exorcists and held it in his right hand while Kubinashi tightened his string. I erased the Fear that surrounded us and let out a pressure toward the shrine. No matter how much I loved to sneak around the enemy¡¯s base, this time I wanted to know who was inside this shrine before entering. A few seconds later, a rather strange boy walked out of the shrine. He had blue hair and wearing a blue school uniform. But the strange thing was he also wore an ancient Chinese robe on top of his school uniform. He held a spear in his right hand and looked at us calmly. ¡°Who are you?¡± The boy asked us with no hint of fear. ¡®This is exceeding my expectation. To think I made a hit on my first try.¡¯ I put my left hand inside my Kimono, raised my chin, and looked at the boy in front of me with a fearless smile. ¡°I am from a waste management agency, and I am here to dispose of trash.¡± The boy in front of me narrowed his eyes and glared at me. ¡°Is that so? Then you come in the wrong place.¡± He pointed his spear at me and the spear let out a holy aura that was even thicker than Excalibur Fragment. ¡°Because this place is cleaner than a garbage dump. As this place is the base of Hero.¡± Thus was my first conversation with the leader of the Hero Faction, Cao Cao. RaizarP Author Here~ More than 55 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 95 – Tsuki Giri ¡°Pfft!¡± I laughed so hard when he said that this was the base of heroes. It looked like he was just wanted to justify his position. More importantly, this place was not the base of the hero, Tokyo was still our territory. ¡°Base of hero you said? Why have I never heard of it? This is still my territory, the territory of East Youkai Faction!¡± Now I felt like an idiot. I just denied his claim and then I claimed this place for my faction. Am I actually an idiot? Nah, no. This was our territory, I don¡¯t mind if he make a bar or something, but this was a shrine. If he just built his territory in a building or so, and he didn¡¯t affiliate his faction to Khaos Brigade, then I will let it slip with some conditions. Cao Cao narrowed his eyes. ¡°Are you here to chase us out? I don¡¯t think you have the permission to do that.¡± ¡°Now, what makes you say that? I do have permission to exterminate pests, especially a pest that affiliated themselves with Khaos Brigade.¡± At my mention of the Khaos Brigade, Cao Cao¡¯s eyes widened and then narrowed again. He then glanced at his right. A second later, a loud voice was booming from my left, and a person that almost looked like Freed appeared. ¡°Yo! I heard what you said. How dare a lowly youkai as you order us around. Know your place!¡± The boy wore something like priest clothes. But instead of white color, the one that he wore was black. ¡°Eh, I heard there is some youkai who want to order us around, who is he?¡± This time a girl''s voice was heard from behind Cao Cao. A blonde girl with armor on her upper body was peeking from behind Cao Cao. ¡°Hoi, Jeanne. If the youkai was that arrogant, let me crush him.¡± Appeared from the gate of the Shrine was a two-meter tall gray-haired man. He was huge, but not that huge. Now that the key members were here, the last one must be hiding somewhere. The vice-leader of Hero Faction, another Longinus user. The thing was, the core members had the same school uniform, so it was easy to disthinguish them. But, even if he was hiding, he will not be able to fool me. I was able to feel everything in this area now that I had entered the barrier that surrounded this shrine. ¡°Riku-sama, it¡¯s a little bit troublesome.¡± Masaomi looked at four humans in front of us with caution. Kubinashi was smiling though. It seems he was pumped up trying to fight the human in this world. Meanwhile, I was a little bit amused. Those guys dare to call me lowly youkai, in my territory no less. Are they have that much confidence and power, or do they just barging like a dog without real power? I really wanted to test it out. I grinned and purposely let out my Senjutsu to oppress them. In an instant, the girl, Jeanne, and the boy, Siegfried, kneeled on the ground because of the pressure while Heracles was still able to stand with Cao Cao. The location where the last core member, Georg, was hiding was now filled with purple fog and it slowly made its way toward us. That fog was bad, to think that he will use the Longinus at this point where I just trying to test him. What an impatient man. I called Nenekirimaru¡¯s scabbard, held it with my left hand, and put Nenekirimaru into my scabbard before erasing my Senjutsu. Those who had been oppressed by my Senjutsu regained their power to stand up. The result was as expected, but the fog was still coming at us. The guys in front of me were also glaring hard at me, while Cao Cao still had his confident smile on his face. I ignored them for a second and looked at the fog. Black smoke began to form around Nenekirimaru. I also put Senjutsu aura around it, making it even stronger. It was the technique in that scroll, Tsuki Giri. This was the best time to test it. But, I added something more to my weapon. ¡°Any attack using Nenekirimaru will be able to slash anything.¡± I said in a clear voice and lowered my stance. ¡°This is bad, jump!¡± Cao Cao shouted and jumped up to the sky and looked at me before turning back to look at the fog of Dimensional Lost. Without asking what happened, his comrade also jumped to the sky. Kubinashi who saw them jump away used his string to try to bind them, but it was cut by Jeanne¡¯s rapier that she held in her left hand. I don¡¯t mind it, as my concern right now was that fog. After I was done collecting Senjutsu and ready to attack, I glanced at Masaomi and Kubinashi. Both of them nodded their head a little before jumping backward, giving me space to cut the Dimensional Lost. ¡°Tsuki Giri.¡± I said in a low voice and draw Nenekirimaru at a fast speed. It didn¡¯t create any giant blade, wind pressure, or flying blade. But, everything in front of me was just cut cleanly. It was including the fog of Dimensional Lost. The fog was cut, as Longinus also counted as a Supernatural thing, so Nenekirimaru was able to cut it. I aimed at the user of the Longinus, Georg. But, to my surprise, he was able to dodge the attack because I still feel his energy from the distance. A second later, the shrine that was cut into two started crumbling down. We are inside the barrier, and I had double-checked the area with my Senjutsu to make sure that no ordinary human was involved. The four that jumped earlier landed in front of us. Their look had changed, they were now full of hostility and fighting spirit. I fixed my posture and stood straight as I tapped Nenekirimaru¡¯s blade on my shoulder. ¡°If you still treat me with disrespect, then I won¡¯t hold my next attack back.¡± I bet they had realized by now, that I am strong, and I seriously wanted to kill them. RaizarP Author Here~ More than 55 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 96 – Raiding Hero Faction ¡°So this means I can go all wild, right?¡± Heracles cracked his fingers and walked towards us. If I must say, he was similar to Aotabo in terms of fighting style and strength. He had a big body, and his strength was immense. Each of his steps was embedded on the ground, and I know that he finally turned serious now. Unfortunately for him, there was someone who can even hold Aotabo¡¯s full strength here. When Heracles took a step forward, he immediately stopped moving. No, he can¡¯t move. ¡°Try it and let¡¯s see if you can take a step forward.¡± Kubinashi held a lot of strings in his hands and bit two strands of strings with his teeth. Heracles¡¯s body was bound by red strings and he can¡¯t move a muscle. ¡°Heracles! That¡¯s just string, why don¡¯t you just snap it and kill them!¡± Shouted Jeanne from behind. Even though it was just a string, if one looked closely, the string had a tiny layer of black smoke surrounding it. It was Kubinashi¡¯s Fear, to turn his string as strong as steel and as sharp as a blade. Heracles¡¯s vain was visible on his face. He was trying hard to free himself from the strings, but he can¡¯t. But it looked like I was wrong about something. The humans moved rather fast. When Siegfried saw Heracles can¡¯t move, two swords appeared in his hands and he rushed towards us while slashing horizontally. This time Masaomi was the one who blocked him. He leaped towards Siegfried and blocked his slash with the light sword. The swords that Siegfried held were demon swords Gram and Balmung. These swords would be proven useful for me, especially Gram with its dragon slayer characteristic. It would help me kill those Evil Dragon without any problem. ¡°You! How can a devil like you use that light sword!¡± Siegfried shouted at Masaomi as he tried to push him away. ¡°And why would someone who wears a priest robe wield demon swords?¡± Asked Masaomi back. ¡°It¡¯s because I am powerful!¡± Siegfried shouted and put more strength on his slash, sending Masaomi¡¯s slash away. They then exchanged sword slashes one after another while I still looking at their boss, Cao Cao. ¡°Yo, isn¡¯t it boring just watching them? How about you dance with me?¡± Unsurprisingly, the one who answered me wasn¡¯t Cao Cao, but Jeanne. ¡°You! I will fight you instead of him, prepare yourself!¡± Jeanne leaped towards me while pointing her rapier at me. Her speed was fast, but it was not enough to harm me. I didn¡¯t even need my Fear to dodge her attack. When she reached me, she thrust her rapier aiming at my heart. I just stepped to the right and put my left hand in my Kimono. ¡°Wow, you have a flexible hand. How about it, want to be a dancer in my Hyakki Yakkou?¡± I touched her hand and she went mad. She sent a series of thrusts towards me, but I just dodged it easily without moving my hands. Maybe because she reached her boiling point, she now used her sacred gear and a lot of holy swords appeared under my feet, trying to stab me. I jumped to the sky and made some distance between us and pointed my Nenekirimaru at her. ¡°Sword Blacksmith, truly a convenient Sacred Gear. Even I just use this my old trusty Katana to fight someone, and you can just make a lot of swords! But, you¡­¡± I rested Nenekirimaru¡¯s blade on my shoulder and raised my chin. ¡°You are weak, huh?¡± Her fuse was lit, and she gritted her teeth in anger. She jumped to the air and slashed her rapier from the left to the right. At the same time, she swung her rapier, a dozen of holy swords appeared on the ground and made their way towards me. The holy swords were advancing at fast speed, and when they almost reached me, they suddenly spread out and made a mountain of swords and stabbed the place I was in. Jeanne landed on the ground and made a smug smile. ¡°Hah, that¡¯s the consequences of trying to fight me.¡± Hearing my enemy getting satisfied after they have done nothing always amuses me. I put my head on her shoulder and canceled my technique, Meikyo Shisui, and appeared behind her. ¡°Are you sure?¡± She was surprised and jumped away immediately before touching her shoulder in confusion. On the side, Heracles was finally able to free himself from Kubinashi¡¯s bind. There was a glowing aura around his hand, a sign that he used his Sacred Gear. Siegfried who fought Masaomi also used his Sacred Gear. From his back grew a silver arm that held his third Demon Sword. Masaomi could still fight him, so it was no problem. ¡°You, how can you appear behind me without me noticing it!¡± Oh, I unconsciously ignored Jeanne. I smugly smiled at her and raised my left index finger. ¡°Nah, why don¡¯t you find it yourself?¡± As soon as I said that, I activated Meikyo Shisui again and disappeared from everyone¡¯s sight. I really hate someone who just watching the fight, so I made my way towards Cao Cao and strike him using my Nenekirimaru. I slashed him on his neck, but surprisingly he was able to respond and blocked my attack with his spear. ¡°Oh? You can block it? Interesting, how about you work for me instead of Khaos Brigade?¡± Cao Cao responded to me with a smile. ¡°Unfortunately I had no intention of working for someone. Let¡¯s do the opposite, how about you join the Hero Faction? Together, we will erase Devils and Fallen Angels from this land!¡± Our sword and spear were still interlocked. If we made a wrong move, the other side would definitely use that chance to attack. ¡°Erase the Devils and Fallen Angels? Nah, I am not interested. I am more interested in your plan that targeted youkai, that¡¯s why I come here you know?¡± That was a lie though. There was no reason to tell him everything I know and a lie could serve as a weapon to shake our opponents. ¡°Is that so? Then I will kill you here.¡± Magic Circle appeared behind Cao Cao and a beam was shot to me at a fast speed. I ignored it, as I had moved since earlier and used Kyouka Suigetsu. The thing that hold Cao Cao was just my fake that was given mass with my Sacred Gear. I found out that I was able to do this in our training, and it was good. The beam hit my fake and it dissolved in a black cloud of smoke. At that moment, Cao Cao was surprised and I slashed his left arm with Nenekirimaru. My slash was connected, and Cao Cao¡¯s left was injured. He was lucky because he realized something was wrong at the last moment and moved his arm slightly. He jumped backward and landed beside Jeanne before holding his left arm. ¡°Now, shall we begin round 2?¡± I said as I pointed Nenekirimaru to the ground and black smoke gushed out of my body. RaizarP Author Here~ More than 55 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks to the New Executive! - L1 Mainy Big Thanks to the New Squad Leader!! - Angelo Me?mer Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 97 – True Longinus Cao Cao was glaring at me while holding his arm. He must¡¯ve never expected my move, as I could feel his anger toward me. Jeanne who stood idly earlier was enraged too. She jumped toward me and swung her rapier a few times, using her Sacred Gear to make a mountain of holy swords that attacked me. This time I purposely didn¡¯t dodge the attack. I swung Nenekirimaru from the left to the right, cutting the holy swords, and jumped toward Jeanne before swinging my blade from the top of my head. Jeanne was able to block my attack, but she couldn¡¯t block the force behind it. She was blown to the ground and the ground was cracked from her land. Because she was trained, she was able to land on her feet, lessening the damage. ¡°It seems I need to get serious.¡± Said Jeanne as she lowered her rapier. I landed safely in front of her and waited for her next move excitedly. I know what she meant by getting serious. She was planning to use her Balance Breaker, which means this will be my second time seeing Balance Breaker directly. ¡°You know, my Sacred Gear, Blade Blacksmith, has a rather strange Balance Breaker. This is what they called sub-species. And I guarantee that you will not be able to defeat my Balance Breaker!¡± The usual speech of villains before they were defeated. Clich¨¦, but I didn¡¯t disturb her. I looked at her with an uninterested gaze. ¡°Yes yes, just hurry up and use your Balance Breaker.¡± I said in a mocking tone and the effect was effective immediately. ¡°You! I will shut that mouth of yours!¡± Holy swords began to appear behind Jeanne. It slowly climbed and made a mountain that stood more than 5 meters tall. It was big, but not too big. If I compare it with someone that I knew, then it was as big as Tsuchigumo. I can kill it with Tsuki Giri without amplifying it with Fear. If I added my Fear to Tsuki Giri, the flying slashes that should be visible to naked eyes turned invisible like earlier. I was not able to look cool because I didn¡¯t expect it, but it was fine. Not to mention, Jeanne Balance Breaker would be useless right now. The mountain of holy swords finally stopped moving, and Jeanne had a smile on her face. ¡°Stake Victim Dragoon!¡± Jeanne shouted the name of her Balance Breaker, and the mountain of swords behind her shattered to pieces. I grinned at that and Jeanne was confused. ¡°Eh?¡± I used this chance to close our distance and I looked at her straight in her eyes with a smug smile on my face. ¡°What¡¯s wrong? Cat got your tongue?¡± Jeanne jumped backward to Cao Cao who had recovered the wound on his arm. ¡°What did you do? Why did my Balance Breaker shatter before it was done?!¡± ¡°And I had no reason to answer your question.¡± I said and rushed towards the two of them. I slashed Nenekirimaru, aiming at Jeanne¡¯s neck but it was blocked by Cao Cao¡¯s spear. ¡°You, you use a Sacred Gear.¡± Said Cao Cao as he glared at me. I grinned at him and used Touki to enhance my strength. ¡°Is that so? I never know about it!¡± Cao Cao was unable to hold the force behind my attack and was blown away in the direction of Siegfried. Siegfried who saw Cao Cao blown towards him was quick in his decision. He caught Cao Cao and stopped him. It made him vulnerable for a second, and Masaomi used that chance to attack both of them. ¡°Tch!¡± Siegfried clicked his tongue and threw Cao Cao to the side before blocking Masaomi¡¯s slash with the silver arm. But he was not able to stop it. Masaomi¡¯s slash connected to Siegfried¡¯s shoulder and blood gushed out from it. ¡°It hurts!¡± Shouted Siegfried as he slashed both swords in his hand, forcing Masaomi to jump back. Jeanne who stood in front of me was still shocked by the fact that her Balance Breaker was canceled. I don¡¯t care though, because I was the one who caused it. Since we arrived at this place, I had always used Telos Karma. First, I made it that the Sacred Gear that I cut will not be able to activate their Balance Breaker. This was for Jeanne and Heracles. Their Sacred gear was easy to cut, especially Heracles just used aura which I can cut with Nenekirimaru. Second, Kubinashi¡¯s string will not be able to be cut by Sword or Spear. I never expected Heracles to be able to free himself, so it was my fault. Third¡­ ¡°As long as I used my Fear, no one will be able to touch me.¡± And so I rushed towards Jeanne with my Kyouka Suigetsu activated. My fake was running towards Cao Cao while my real body was rushing toward Jeanne. Jeanne was fooled by my fake and followed him with her eyes. And so, I canceled Kyouka Suigetsu when I reached Jeanne. My Fake disappeared, and Jeanne now was able to notice my presence behind her. Sneak attack isn¡¯t honorable, but I don¡¯t care. I am not a Knight or someone that seeks honor in battle. I am Nurarihyon¡¯s Youkai, the sneaky bastard. I used Tsuki Giri and swung Nenekirimaru at a close distance. But then, their leader was nothing to scoff of. Cao Cao appeared in front of me and swung his spear, True Longinus, and meet my attack head-on. There was unknown energy radiated from the spear, and it was able to block my attack head-on. Tsuki Giri was canceled, but it was able to leave a little nick on True Longinus. ¡°Jeanne, back off. Help Heracles over there, I will fight this man by myself.¡± ¡°But!¡± Jeanne tried to argue with Cao Cao, but he just looked at her. ¡°Jeanne. I will fight him seriously.¡± ¡°Fine!¡± Jeanne jumped towards Heracles. This was bad, Kubinashi would have a hard time fighting both of them. But I had no time to feel relieved either. As Cao Cao finally fought me seriously. I pulled my sword and sent another slash toward him, but he was able to block it using the shaft of his spear. Another slash, and blocked again. This time he attacked me with his spear, from the top aiming at my neck, but I was able to dodge it by stepping into the right and sending another slash. We exchanged slashes and thrusts for a while before I jumped away and gained distance from him. I had used Touki, but it was not my full power. To think that a human would be able to fight me while activating Touki, was the first. As expected of him, he was able to fight Vali and Azazel at the same time. It seems I need to get serious. My body was surrounded by black smoke, and blue Haori appeared on my back, strapped over my shoulder. I used Telos Karma to the limit, and I used the true technique of my Fear. ¡°Shin: Kyouka Suigetsu.¡± But it was not only me who turned serious. A halo appeared behind Cao Cao and 7 identical orbs floated around it. He had used his Balance Breaker. I wasn¡¯t able to stop it, because I didn¡¯t cut his Sacred Gear. I only left a nick, which was unexpected for me. Because the one that Cao Cao held was called the strongest Longinus, True Longinus. ¡°Polar Night Longinus Chakravartin.¡± Now, round three has begun. RaizarP Author Here~ More than 55 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks to the New Executive! - L1 Mainy Big Thanks to the New Squad Leader!! - Angelo Me?mer Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 98 – Retreating Hero Faction ¡°Kubinashi, Masaomi!¡± I shouted at both of them and lowered Nenekirimaru as my body become hazy. ¡°Don¡¯t hold back and kill them.¡± As soon as I said that, my body melted into thin air. I ran towards Cao Cao who held his spear in the distance. As I ran toward him, Cao Cao¡¯s spear blade emitted light and he swept it in front of him, creating a flying slash. I ducked to dodge it and made my way toward him. When I reached his back, I raised Nenekirimaru above my head and swung it down with both of my hands. However, my attack created a wind that was able to be felt by Cao Cao. He instantly turned back and blocked my attack with his spear. When our weapon interlocked, Cao Cao said. ¡°Cakkaratana.¡± I had a bad feeling about his technique, so I used my Sacred Gear almost at the same time on my blade. ¡°My blade will be unbreakable.¡± Our power clashes, creating a tremor to the area of our surroundings. Cao Cao seemed to be surprised when he saw that my blade wasn¡¯t destroyed. I grinned and pulled my hands before sending a kick aimed at his stomach. He wasn¡¯t able to react to my kick and was blown away a few meters. I didn¡¯t miss this chance and accumulate Senjutsu energy on my blade and used Tsuki Giri. A horizontal flying slash was sent towards Cao Cao who was blown away. But, he was somehow able to stop himself mid-air and then blocked the flying slash with his spear. Unlike earlier when he blocked my slash with his spear, this time the flying slash was sent back to me. ¡®Damn it! Fucking cheat Sacred Gear!¡¯ I cursed in my mind and cut the flying slash with Nenekirimaru. Cao Cao was prepared for that. He hid behind the flying slash that was sent back to me and thrust his spear as soon as I cut the flying slash. His spear impaled my body, but it just melted in a black cloud of smoke. My real body has long since moved, I had predicted his move and move behind him. I thrust my Nenekirimaru, aiming at his back, and was able to injure him slightly before he moved away at fast speed. He stood in the sky, levitating without any wings. I mustn¡¯t let him rest, so I kicked the ground and approached Cao Cao as I created fireballs using my Youjutsu. The fireballs flew faster than me and reached Cao Cao first. He spun his spear and blocked all the fireballs, but I just used these fireballs to stall him for a while. To increase my speed, I created a foothold in the sky using my Youjutsu and kicked it once again. This time, on top of using Shin: Kyouka Suigetsu, I used Touki too to further enhance my strength. ¡°Die.¡± I said in a cold tone and sent another slash at Cao Cao. Once again, True Longinus¡¯s tip was emitting light and Cao Cao pointed it at me. A white beam of light was shot from the tip of the spear. It reached me in less than a second, but that was it. It hit my fake body and just shot towards the ground, creating a large explosion. My real body appeared right beside Cao Cao and I focused all my Senjutsu aura on my blade. ¡°Tsuki Giri.¡± I swung Nenekirimaru from the left to the right, aiming at Cao Cao¡¯s arm. My slash was connected this time as he had no time to pull his spear. Cao Cao''s right arm was severed and he shouted in pain. He was not able to hold his position and fell from the sky. From the ground, I saw Jeanne shout and jump to the sky. Kubinashi was about to stop her, but Heracles punched him away and blocked his vision. They looked like they were about to run, so I rushed towards Cao Cao and concentrated Senjutsu on my blade once again. ¡°Tsuki Giri.¡± I sent another slash, but this time purple fog appeared in front of me and my slash disappeared into nothingness. The fog surrounded me and blocked my vision. My Fear somehow didn¡¯t affect the fog, so I cut the fog with Nenekirimaru a few times until finally the fog wasn¡¯t able to retain its power and disappeared. But, when I was able to escape from the fog, I couldn¡¯t feel any energy from the Hero Faction¡¯s members. ¡°Damn it, they escaped? They escaped from me?!¡± I looked around the area and clicked my tongue. How, why, more importantly, that Longinus was troublesome. My senses were a mess inside that fog, and my Senjutsu wasn¡¯t able to detect anything. The story was different if I was outside the fog. I could cut it without any problem. ¡°Coward. A hero never escapes from their enemy, and they called themselves heroes?¡± I canceled my technique and landed on the ground. Kubinashi approached me as he held his cheek that was punched by Heracles earlier. ¡°I¡¯m sorry, Riku-sama. I am at fault for not being able to stop that girl.¡± I looked at Kubinashi and placed my right hand on his shoulder. ¡°No, it was my fault. I underestimate the power of that Sacred Gear and I thought I had canceled it. To think that he was able to recover it that fast, it¡¯s my miscalculation.¡± Masaomi who fought Siegfried earlier approached us while holding another sword in his hand. I looked at him and smiled when I saw the sword that was in his hand. ¡°He escaped, Riku-sama. But, I think I was able to deal something to him.¡± Said Masaomi as he smiled. He extended his left hand that held an unknown sword to give it to me. I took the sword and raised it to the sky. ¡°Well, at least we got a demon sword. Gram was it, a sword with dragon slayer properties. This will be useful to us.¡± I dismissed Nenekirimaru and give Gram back to Masaomi. ¡°Hold onto it for now. I will try to bond with it later. I think they escaped to the Underworld, and I know someone who had a lot of information about Underworld.¡± I grinned as I looked at Masaomi and Kubinashi. ¡°I see. So, Riku-sama, what should we do for now?¡± Asked Kubinashi as he looked around the area. ¡°Because I think we destroyed more than we thought.¡± Right, the shrine was cut in half, the ground was gouged here and there. I touched my chin and looked at the sky. ¡°Well, let¡¯s go to a bar. Let¡¯s ignore this.¡± We can put the blame to Hero Faction later. And my raid towards the Hero Faction was over with me cutting Cao Cao''s right arm. At least we were able to decrease their fighting power and got Gram on top of that. RaizarP Author Here~ More than 55 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks to the New Executive! - L1 Mainy Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 99 – Adding Someone into the Fray ¡°So, why are you here again?¡± Tobio asked me from behind the counter as he took a bottle of wine from the shelf behind him. We visited Black Dog Bar again after the Hero Faction retreated. I was a bit angry at myself for letting them retreat, but I won¡¯t let them rest until I destroy them. Kubinashi and Masaomi were a little bit tired from fighting the Sacred Gear user, so they were sitting beside me while having a wry smile on their face. ¡°When I was about to go home, I remembered that there was a nice free lodging around here. So I let myself in. You don¡¯t mind, right Reni?¡± I turned to the girl beside me and she chuckled in amusement. ¡°I don¡¯t mind, Ri-kun. But, I must ask something.¡± ¡°Feel free to ask.¡± I raised my right hand and gave her my kindest smile. Reni had an aura of an elder sister, which was rare in this world. She was kind, kind enough of putting her guard down against me even though we just met earlier. ¡°Was it you who caused the disturbance earlier? Because we got a call from Azazel telling us that he will send his subordinate to fix a shrine near our place.¡± ¡°Ah, that thing. I found some trash who called themselves heroes, so I accidentally cut their base in half. Don¡¯t mind it.¡± Reni clapped her hands and smiled. ¡°Is that so?! Then that¡¯s good.¡± ¡°You¡­¡± Tobio facepalmed behind the counter and let out a tired sigh. He turned to Kubinashi and Masaomi then asked. ¡°Are you not tired of your boss? You know, when he acted like that?¡± I smirked at Tobio and Kubinashi said. ¡°You got used to it.¡± I turned to him, surprised by his answer, and saw Masaomi nodded his head a few times. Tobio served the glass of wine to us with a smile on his face. But then, I know my subordinate¡¯s personality so I crossed my arm and looked at Tobio. ¡°Right! My subordinate just need to get used to me.¡± ¡°Everyone had gotten used to Commander¡¯s whim, so following Riku-sama is not that hard.¡± Added Kubinashi as he drank the wine and looked at the glass with a surprised gaze. ¡°This is my first time drinking something like this but, it¡¯s delicious.¡± Praise Kubinashi. I also never had wine before as I only drank sake in this life. I looked at Masaomi and he smiled in victory. Come to think of it, that guy drank wine when we visited this bar too. ¡®Is wine that delicious?¡¯ I drank the wine in front of me and smiled. ¡°Indeed, this is delicious. But, Kubinashi was right. If you can cope up with my old man¡¯s whim, then my action will look like a child play.¡± That old man was literally a youkai that goes down to history for being a prankster and dine and dash after all. We are chatting for a few minutes until Tobio''s tone changed. ¡°So, why did you cause such a ruckus without putting on a proper barrier this afternoon? Just you know, I can feel your enemy¡¯s energy from this place even though we were separated for a few kilometers. Who was it that you fought?¡± I sipped the wine in my glass and looked at Tobio seriously. ¡°One of the factions that affiliated with Khaos Brigade. They called themselves Hero Faction, and the one that I fought was called Cao Cao, the wielder of True Longinus. Not only that¡­¡± Tobio was surprised when I said the wielder of True Longinus. As the wielder of a Longinus Sacred Gear, he certainly understood the power of it. ¡°Not only that?¡± Asked Tobio. ¡°His True Longinus¡¯s Balance Breaker is a subspecies. 7 orbs are floating around the halo on his back and each orb has a specific ability.¡± Tobio held his head with his right hand and sighed. ¡°This has become troublesome. And they managed to run from a youkai that was known for his escape technique. How?¡± He asked me with a worried tone. I rested my head on my hands and sighed. That was truly my fault, I didn¡¯t make sure to kill Georg the wielder of Dimensional Lost, and become conceited with my strength. ¡°Another Longinus user, Dimensional Lost. That Longinus was able to disturb my senses for a while, and they escaped in that time.¡± ¡°Damn it, I should¡¯ve followed you.¡± Tobio cursed to himself and then took a deep breath to calm himself. ¡°So, what¡¯s your plan for now? I bet you at least injured them.¡± ¡°Oh, I plan to meet with Azazel here. Can you contact him? Tell him to bring Vali, as I wanted to wipe those Hero faction bunch tomorrow. Just tell Vali that there will be a big fight, I know that he will agree to help me.¡± ¡°Ri-kun! I know that Hero Faction was retreating. But did you know their location?¡± Asked Reni from my side. ¡°About that, let¡¯s talk about it tomorrow. It¡¯s already dark outside, how about you go to sleep, Reni?¡± ¡°It¡¯s no problem, I can sleep later when I need to.¡± ¡°Well then, Tobio.¡± I called Tobio and stood up from my seat. ¡°Yeah, I know. I will contact Azazel and ask him to meet you here tomorrow. Is morning okay for you?¡± ¡°That would be perfect.¡± I answered him and walked away. Like before, Masaomi paid for our drink and we left the Black Dog Bar. When we exited the bar, I looked at the sky and gazed at the full moon floating at the sky. We are in the middle of Tokyo, so the moonlight was obstructed by the artificial light around the city. ¡°Riku-sama. I know that you had a plan of your own, but can you at least tell us?¡± Asked Masaomi as he looked at me seriously. ¡°Sure, for now, let¡¯s meet someone. He¡¯s the key to our plan after seeing the Hero Faction member.¡± I teleported the three of us to Kyoto, more specifically Nijo Temple. In front of us, Tsuchigumo was jumping around while stretching his body. He noticed us the moment we fully teleported and stopped moving before turning toward me. ¡°Oh, you are here. Do you want to have a fight with me?¡± Tsuchigumo sat with a crossed leg as he pulled out his smoke pipe. ¡°I got you a better one. We will raid someone, do you want to come?¡± Tsuchigumo puffed the smoke and asked. ¡°Are they strong?¡± ¡°At least they can escape from me.¡± ¡°That¡¯s interesting. Count me in.¡± ¡°Good, I will get you tomorrow.¡± With this, one youkai can fight at least one member of Hero Faction. I won¡¯t allow someone to disturb me anymore. And I certainly won¡¯t repeat the same mistake again. RaizarP Author Here~ More than 55 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks to the New Executive! - L1 Mainy - Walker Voss Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 100 – Preparing for Another Raid I teleported back to Kanto and took a rest for the day. Kubinashi and Masaomi also went back to their room to rest. They were more tired than me, especially Kubinashi. He fought two people at once, and both of them were Sacred Gear users which he wasn¡¯t used to. For me, I went to the courtyard to meet my old man. It was a night of the full moon, so he will be there watching the Sakura Tree which its flower began to fall. When I reached the courtyard, I saw my old man sitting under the sakura tree on top of cloth with 2 bottles of sake and a sake cup in front of him. He was holding a cup and drank it with closed eyes. ¡°I heard the commotion this afternoon. You can sit here if you need something from me.¡± Said My old man as he looked at me and raised his cup. I sighed a little and walked to my old man and sat in front of him. He poured sake into the cup in front of me and raised put the bottle down before raising his cup with his right hand. I raised the cup and raised it near his cup before drinking it in one go. I drank a few times today, but it was not enough to make me drunk. My old man put the cup on the ground and raised his right leg. He rested his hand on his knee and asked me with a smirk. ¡°So? They ran away?¡± I put the cup that I held on the ground and clicked my tongue. ¡°Yeah, but I plan to chase them in the Underworld after meeting with Azazel tomorrow.¡± ¡°You will meet Azazel tomorrow? For whatever reason?¡± My old man was curious and touched his chin with his right hand. ¡°He owes me something, and I was thinking about using his connection and information gathering to gather information about Khaos Brigade.¡± I smirked at my old man and poured sake from the bottle into my cup. My old man frowned and looked at me with a serious gaze. ¡°Are you sure, Riku? You are essentially making an enemy of an organization that was stronger than even a small faction.¡± What he said was not wrong, but Khaos Brigade was not on the level of a small faction. It could fight the three factions before losing because of the usual plot armor of the protagonist. ¡°Old man.¡± I drank the sake in my cup in one gulp and looked at him seriously. ¡°They are targeting youkai, Yasaka, Kunou, and Hagoromo Gitsune. Do you think that I will stay quiet?¡± We were looking at each other for a while before my old man sighed and lowered his leg. ¡°If you are that determined then I won¡¯t stop you. But, don¡¯t overdo it. I won¡¯t be here for long as I will start my journey with Setsuna. You can ask Magari if you need something.¡± ¡°Don¡¯t worry. I bet that girl will not stay quiet after what we said in the meeting.¡± I smiled and poured the sake again into my cup. ¡°Oho, so that was why you said that loudly. You want her to tag along from the start, huh.¡± My old man poured sake into his cup and raised it toward me. I also raised my cup and then drank it slowly. It was a peaceful night, a good night to rest my mind and prepare for another raid tomorrow. *** The next morning, I was standing in front of the entrance of my mansion waiting for Kubinashi and Masaomi. I told them to meet me right after the sun has risen, but they were nowhere to be seen. Thinking that they must be tired from yesterday, I waited for them for a few more minutes. At that moment, I was turning my Senjutsu off and leaning against the wall of the entrance. I put my guard down just because it was my mansion, and it was my mistake. From my left, a long-haired girl exited my mansion and looked at me with a mocking smile. ¡°What are you waiting for? Let¡¯s go.¡± I covered my face with my left hand as I peeked at Hagoromo Gitsune who just exited the gate wearing a black sailor uniform. ¡°Why are you here?¡± I asked Hagoromo Gitsune and let out a sigh. Kubinashi and Masaomi must¡¯ve met her and were stopped. She was the target of their organization, but she said let¡¯s go while knowing that I will attack them. Even though I know that she was not the type to hide, I hope she can stay still for now and let me handle all of it. ¡°Naturally to kill somebody who targeted me. Do you think I will stay still?¡± ¡°And you plan to follow me raiding their base?¡± ¡°That¡¯s right.¡± I sighed again and then crossed my arms. Well, at least she can protect herself just fine. I made the magic circle to teleport and we teleported to Black Dog Bar, the location where we will meet Azazel. When we arrived, I was greeted by the gaze of Azazel drinking at the counter with Vali beside him. Tobio was serving them while Reni was nowhere to be seen. They noticed us and Azazel raised his glass that was full of golden liquid. ¡°Yo, you¡¯ve arrived.¡± He looked at me over his shoulder and Vali turned to us. ¡°And I saw you brought a different companion. I thought you were going to bring the two subordinates that were with you yesterday.¡± I went and sat beside Azazel before ordering a sake. Hagoromo Gitsune sat beside me and asked for the same sake as me. ¡°Well, she wanted to tag along and root the one who targeted her by herself. More importantly, about why I called you here.¡± Azazel took a brown envelope from his suit and put it on the counter. ¡°I know, this is the location of their base in the Underworld. I heard that you wanted Vali to tag along too?¡± Vali smiled when he heard that. ¡°It seems you have an interesting fight for me. That¡¯s why I decided to tag along.¡± I smiled back and took the brown envelope. I opened it and my smile deepened. ¡°Yeah, why don¡¯t we visit them directly after I finished my drink? There is something that I wanted to talk about with you too, Vali.¡± ¡°Yeah, why not?¡± RaizarP Author Here~ More than 55 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks to the New Executive! - Walker Voss Big Thanks to the New Squad Leader! - Corrupt Zain Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 101 – To the Underworld My conversation with Azazel only lasted that long. Vali agreed to help me to attack the Hero Faction because as I had expected, he thought it was interesting. Vali moved his seat to the one beside me and Azazel just shrugged his shoulder before he changed his seat. ¡°So, are we going to the Underworld now?¡± Vali asked me with a small grin on his face. ¡°Nah, we will meet someone else after this. He¡¯s a battle maniac like you, so I think you will get along with him.¡± I drank the sake that I ordered and sat from my seat. Hagoromo Gitsune glanced at me and then she stood up. ¡°You will bring that guy?¡± I nodded my head at Hagoromo Gitsune. ¡°Yeah, I asked him yesterday and he agreed.¡± Hagoromo Gitsune went silent and just nodded her head a little. Vali was confused, but at the same time, I can see the excited look on his face. I grinned at Vali who had an excited look on his face. ¡°This guy is strong, you know? I bet he¡¯ll agree to fight you if you ask him.¡± ¡°Oh? That¡¯s reassuring. I will look forward to it.¡± I made a magic circle teleport us and it appeared under the three of us. When the magic circle was ready, I looked at Azazel who looked at me with a smile on his face. ¡°I suggest that you contact Sirzechs and Gabriel if you want your peace to come faster.¡± Azazel¡¯s smile fell from his face then he scratched the back of his head with his right hand and let out a sigh. ¡°I just paid my debt, and you make me owe you something again. Damn sly boy.¡± I smirked at him and then the Magic Circle that I made engulfed us entirely, teleporting us to Nijo Castle. When I opened my eyes again, in front of me stood two people and one giant. I understand the giant as he was Tsuchigumo, but¡­ ¡°Why are you here, Kunou-chan, Yasaka?¡± When I said their name, Hagoromo Gitsune who sat beside me narrowed her eyes. Right now Yasaka and Kunou were not hiding their tails and so it was apparent that they were the nine-tailed fox youkai. ¡°Riku-han, I heard from Nurarihyon-han yesterday. It seems you are planning to attack a ¡®Faction¡¯ by yourself?¡± Yasaka narrowed her eyes and crossed her arms under her boobs as she looked at me. She then glanced at Vali who was on my right and Hagoromo Gitsune who was on my left. ¡°Let me change it. You are planning to attack a ¡®Faction¡¯ with Two Longinus Sacred Gear wielder amongst them with just four people?¡± ¡°Four people with Two Longinus Sacred Gear Wielder, one nine-tailed fox youkai, and Tsuchigumo. Don¡¯t you think that¡¯s enough to throw a small faction like Hero Faction? I could have destroyed them yesterday if they didn¡¯t run to the Underworld.¡± Yasaka has still narrowed her eyes, but she eventually gave up and let out a sigh. ¡°Really¡­ You are really his son, alright.¡± Yasaka put on a smile on her face and walked towards us. I glanced at Tsuchigumo and saw he didn¡¯t give a fuck of what happened and smoked from his pipe. Yasaka stopped in front of Hagoromo Gitsune and extended her right hand. ¡°I never expected that our first meeting would be like this. But, it¡¯s nice to meet you. My name is Yasaka, a nine-tailed golden fox youkai.¡± Hagoromo Gitsune also smile and her eyes were narrowed. That was the sign that she was amused, I had seen that look on her a few times before. ¡°My, yeah. It¡¯s nice to meet you too.¡± Hagoromo Gitsune extended her right hand and shook Yasaka¡¯s hand. ¡°I am Hagoromo Gitsune, a reincarnation fox Youkai.¡± Yasaka must¡¯ve never expected that response. Her eyes went wide in surprise and Kunou who stood behind Yasaka was also surprised. I didn¡¯t take a look at Vali¡¯s reaction as I focused on their exchange. ¡°Reincarnation Youkai?¡± Asked Yasaka as she recovered from her surprise. ¡°That¡¯s correct. But let¡¯s not talk about that for now, just think of me as a nine-tailed fox youkai.¡± Nine white tails appeared from the back of Hagoromo Gitsune. Her tails were bigger and longer than Yasaka, it was even bigger than her body. Yasaka smiled when she saw the tails behind Hagoromo Gitsune. ¡°Although I am curious, let¡¯s let that slide for now. The important thing here right now is Riku-han.¡± Yasaka pulled her hand away and approached me this time. She leaned closer and her face was right in front of me, her eyes were peering right into my eyes. I was surprised by her sudden move, and my smile fell from my face for a second. ¡°What?¡± I asked Yasaka in a relaxed manner. She then pulled away and nodded her head. ¡°I wanted to come, but I can¡¯t leave Kyoto right now. So I will just ask you to be careful, Riku-han.¡± Yasaka gave me a warm smile and she touched my cheek with her right hand for a second before pulling it again and crossing her arms. I raised my chin a little and grinned. ¡°Of course. I will bring a piece of good news after we came back.¡± Kunou who stood behind Yasaka smiled and raised both her hands. ¡°Good luck, Riku onii-chan.¡± ¡°Ou.¡± Tsuchigumo who just watched silently since the start stood up and blew smoke from his mouth. ¡°Are we done here? Then let¡¯s go. I am itching to fight.¡± ¡°Nah, wait a minute.¡± I said to Tsuchigumo and then turned to Vali. ¡°The location of their hiding place is in the Underworld. As I had never visited Underworld, can you teleport us there, Vali?¡± Vali looked at me while crossing his arms. ¡°I don¡¯t mind.¡± He then turned to Tsuchigumo and grinned. ¡°You look strong. How about we fight after we are done later?¡± Tsuchigumo scoffed in amusement and laughed. ¡°Hahahahahaha, you? A scrawny little thing like you wanted to fight me?¡± ¡°Hahaha, it¡¯s the first time someone called me like that. Interesting, we really should fight later.¡± Tsuchigumo put his pipe in his pocket and said. ¡°As long as you are strong then I don¡¯t mind. All fights will be fun if it¡¯s against the strong opponent.¡± ¡°Agreed. Now, let¡¯s go to the Underworld and settle our matter first. I am looking forward to our fight.¡± As Vali said that, a magic circle appeared under us. Yasaka and Kunou backed away outside the magic circle and waved their hands at us. I waved back and then the Magic Circle teleported us to the Underworld. We were in the rocky mountain area. I looked up at the sky which had a different color than the sky on earth and muttered. ¡°So this is the Underworld.¡± RaizarP Author Here~ More than 55 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks to the New Executive! - Walker Voss Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 102 – Second Raid ¡°This is truly an amazing sight. The sky was different, and the Underworld was not what I expected.¡± Hagoromo Gitsune took out her black fan and spread it in front of her mouth. She was looking around the area. Meanwhile, I covered all of us with my Fear, erasing their presence. Although we were in the mountain area if Vali teleported us here that meant the location of the Hero Faction was near. I can¡¯t let my guard down and get ambushed, that would make me an idiot. ¡°Hou? You can do that too? I can¡¯t feel the presence of everyone here even though they are right in front of me. Amazing.¡± Vali raised his hands and looked at them then he looked at Tsuchigumo and Hagoromo Gitsune. I crossed my arms beneath my Kimono and grinned. ¡°Of course.¡± Tsuchigumo walked to the edge of the mountain that was right in front of us and looked down. ¡°This mountain, strange. We are on the edge of the cliff.¡± As Tsuchigumo said that, I approached him and looked down too. From my viewpoint earlier, I can¡¯t see the cliff that separated this mountain with the ground a bit distance away from us. But now that I stood on the edge, I can see the cliff that was around 100 meters deep. It was a deep cliff, but I can just jump down with no problem. Rather than the height, I was impressed by how beautiful the scenery was even though it was the Underworld. I can feel Hagoromo Gitsune approach us and she stopped on my right. ¡°So, where is the base of the people who targeted this lady?¡± Vali who heard Hagoromo Gitsune¡¯s question approached us and pointed his index finger to the front. ¡°Just beyond that cliff, there will be a hidden house in that forest. That¡¯s the location that was marked in the map given by Azazel.¡± I tried to use Senjutsu but I was a little bit surprised when I gathered the aura around me. My body¡¯s flinched a little and I closed my right eye because of the sudden pain. Hagoromo Gitsune and Vali noticed it. She looked at me and asked. ¡°What¡¯s wrong?¡± I quickly conquered the malice and then smiled at Hagoromo Gitsune. ¡°Nothing, just¡­ the malice in this place is stronger than Earth. It took me by a surprise.¡± ¡°Malice? Oh, you were using Senjutsu.¡± Exclaimed Hagoromo Gitsune as she closed her fan. ¡°Yeah, I was just surprised a little. But, I didn¡¯t find anything out of ordinary. Are you sure this is the place, Vali?¡± I looked at Vali and tilted my head a little. Vali was part of the Khaos Brigade even though he joined just for fun and to complete his goal of killing Rizevim. Even so, I didn¡¯t want to believe that this guy will trick us right now. ¡°Give me the letter from Azazel again. I am sure that this is the right place.¡± Vali had a confused expression. From his tone, he was sure that we were standing in the right place. I took out the brown envelope from Azazel and handed it to Vali. He opened the envelope read the location of the Hero Faction¡¯s base and looked around the area. ¡°Yeah, this is the right place. If you can¡¯t detect it with your Senjutsu, that means.¡± If this was the right place and I can¡¯t detect it with Senjutsu¡­ ¡®It¡¯s that guy, huh.¡¯ I grinned and then spread my Fear to the area around us. If they wanted to have a hide and seek with me, that meant they were underestimating me. ¡°They wanted to have a hide and seek with Nurarihyon Youkai. Are they an idiot?¡± My Fear covered an area around us and spread until it reached 200 meters in front of me. The area was covered with white fog that was made from my Youkai Aura. It was the phenomenon when a lot of youkai aura gathered in one place. The aura turned into white smoke that covered the area and hid the youkai from a normal human. Hagoromo Gitsune saw what I did and began to spread her Fear too. ¡°Finding them in a traditional way, huh. Let me help.¡± She smiled and pointed her fan forward. Tsuchigumo who was standing on my left began to crouch and jump to the sky. We were still not on the peak of the mountain we were in, so Tsuchigumo jumped on the rock to reach the peak of the mountain. He arrived at the peak in just 3 jumps grabbed the peak of the mountain with his right hands and observed the area from the vantage point. After a while, I saw Tsuchigumo grin and then he jumped down the mountain. He landed on the area a bit away from us, creating a crater with him in the center. He dusted his body and approached us. ¡°Found it. A kilometer from here, there is an area covered with rock. The fog avoided that rock, so that place is a hit.¡± Tsuchigumo pointed at a rock that was as big as a house in the distance. I put my right hand above my eyes, narrowed my eyes, and I noticed that the fog was avoiding the rock, like what Tsuchigumo said. Vali also looked at the rock that was pointed at by Tsuchigumo and he narrowed his eyes. ¡°Oh, that¡¯s it. So the wielder of Dimensional Lost just made an illusion around their base. I thought he was going to put the base in another dimension.¡± I looked at the rock again and thought. ¡®That will be the case if the Sacred Gear is still in the normal condition.¡¯ But it was fortunate for us that the wielder was not strong enough. He can send the base to another dimension, but I guess his Sacred Gear was still unstable after I cut it with Nenekirimaru. I grinned after knowing that my action was not useless. I summoned Nenekirimaru and strapped it on my waist before jumping to the forest in front of me. When I was in the sky, I looked over my shoulder and shouted. ¡°What are you waiting for? Let¡¯s go!¡± Vali¡¯s Divine Dividing appeared from his back and he flew down and matched my pace. Hagoromo Gitsune jumped at Tsuchigumo¡¯s shoulder and he jumped down, following me. I will destroy them completely this time. RaizarP Author Here~ More than 55 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks to the New Squad Leader! - Eduardo Tolentino Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 103 – A surprise visit We went through the forest by walking. I didn¡¯t want the Hero Faction to notice our presence and ran away, that was why I suggested walking to the rock where they hid their base. ¡°This forest is strange. I don¡¯t recognize any plants here.¡± Hagoromo Gitsune looked around the trees that stood more than Tsuchigumo. He was three to four meters tall, and the trees were even taller than him. Talking about Tsuchigumo, he walked leisurely while smoking from his pipe. ¡°Their leaves¡¯ color is also strange.¡± Said Tsuchigumo as he plucked one of the leaves from the tree. The trees had purplish-black trunks and leaves, it was a strange color for the trees that big. I can understand that some trees had a strange purple color, but I can¡¯t remember the tree with such color that grew as tall as these trees. ¡°They are the trees that grew in this place. The reason why they have such strange colors is that they absorbed the demonic energy in the atmosphere.¡± Vali explained the reason to us and both of my companions nodded their heads in understanding. ¡°Demonic Energy, huh. Is that similar to the one that youkai use?¡± Hagoromo Gitsune played with her fan and inhaled some air through her nose. She also opened her palm in front of her chest. ¡°What are you doing?¡± I asked Hagoromo Gitsune because I was curious about her weird movement. ¡°I tried to feel those so-called Demonic Energy. Why?¡± I looked at Hagoromo Gitsune with an expression that tell her ¡®Are you an idiot?¡¯ and then looked to the front again. ¡°Nothing.¡± ¡°Hahahaha, Hagoromo Gitsune.¡± Tsuchigumo laughed and blew smokes from his mouth. Hagoromo Gitsune turned to Tsuchigumo with a displeased expression and asked. ¡°What?¡± ¡°Don¡¯t you notice it? The so-called Demonic Energy is similar to what Nue used when he opened that cursed gate.¡± When Tsuchigumo said that, I turned to him instantly. We were stopped on our track, and Vali looked at us weirdly. Hagoromo Gitsune looked bewildered, while I was honestly surprised. ¡°What¡¯s wrong?¡± Vali asked us and pointed his thumbs toward the rock that was now visible from our place. ¡°We must move.¡± I turned at Vali and nodded my head. We then continued our track, but Hagoromo Gitsune and Tsuchigumo were not following us. A second later, Hagoromo Gitsune began to walk again. ¡°I will ask you about this later, Tsuchigumo.¡± ¡°Hahahaha, it seems that I will have more fun. This is so nostalgic.¡± Our group moved toward the hidden base without much talk. We arrived right in front of the rock and now I can see clearly the base that was hidden behind the illusion. I grinned and looked at Vali. ¡°I will take Cao Cao.¡± When I said that, Vali was visibly disturbed. But then, he sighed and scratched the back of his head. ¡°I will take the one with Longinus then.¡± ¡°So, which one shall this Lady take care of?¡± I looked at Hagoromo Gitsune and touched my chin. ¡°The ones inside were the members that managed to flee from me, and not all of their members. So will you be okay against two people at once?¡± Hagoromo Gitsune swung her right hand which she used to held her fan, raised her chin slightly, and smiled. ¡°Don¡¯t underestimate me. Don¡¯t you remember who am I?¡± I laughed and then turned to Tsuchigumo. ¡°You don¡¯t mind fighting against an opponent with six hands?¡± Tsuchigumo looked down and his eyes were narrowed. ¡°Is he strong?¡± I shrugged my shoulder. ¡°Don¡¯t know. At least he will be able to fight you for a while. You can take on a guy with monstrous strength who will fight Hagoromo Gitsune after you are done though.¡± ¡°Gahahaha, I will take two of them at the same time! Then Hagoromo Gitsune, I ask you to blow the one with monstrous strength that Nura talked about to me later.¡± ¡°I don¡¯t mind. As much as I want to kill them, I prefer to avoid dirtying my hand directly.¡± ¡°Good then, are you ready?¡± I asked all of them and looked at the base that was hidden by the rock in front of me. ¡°Anytime.¡± Vali answered and activated his Divine Dividing. His Sacred Gear appeared on his back and he has an excited smile on his face. ¡°Let¡¯s not wait anymore.¡± Hagoromo Gitsune''s tails appeared from her back and she held a black school bag that was chained to her right hand. Tsuchigumo crouched and began to stretch his legs and then he clenched his fist. ¡°First strike to win!¡± Tscuhigumo shouted and then punched the base hidden by the rock with his three right hands. The rock¡¯s illusion was shattered and a small house appeared. Tsuchigumo¡¯s fist hit a wall that was surrounded the small house and shattered it to pieces. It created a shockwave that flutter our hairs and Hagoromo Gitsune¡¯s tail. Because of the commotion caused by Tsuchigumo, the members of the Hero Faction exited the house and looked at us. There were only four of them who exited the house, and Cao Cao was nowhere to be seen. When they saw us, the expression of the only girl amongst them turned into an angry face and she shouted. ¡°You again!!¡± She waved her right hand and a wave of the holy sword appeared from the ground, rushing towards us at a fast speed. I stepped back a little and said. ¡°I¡¯ll leave it to you.¡± Hagoromo Gitsune took her fan from the bag and it became bigger instantly. ¡°No need to ask me.¡± She waved the fan that was now bigger than her body and the holy swords that rushed towards us were shattered in instant. I spread my Senjutsu and tried to find Cao Cao. I found him inside the house, but his energy was not as strong as when I met him. Vali must¡¯ve noticed it too, so he said. ¡°It seems that your prey has weakened. Don¡¯t mind me for taking the one who wears the glasses.¡± Vali flew up after he said that and shoot towards the boy who wear glasses. He picked him up with his right hand and they flew away from us. ¡°Georg!¡± Shouted Jeanne as she looked at the sky. ¡°Why are you looking away in a fight?¡± Tsuchigumo who just stood beside me jumped towards the three of the Hero Faction members and punched them. The Hero Faction members were able to avoid the punch, but Tsuchigumo¡¯s fist hit the ground and made a big crater around 5 meters. The destructive power behind his punch was no joke, and he just used one hand this time. One of them, Siegfried was not able to dodge the debris that flew toward him and he was forced to land inside the crater with Tsuchigumo in front of him. ¡°Hou, it seems you are my opponent.¡± Said Tsuchigumo as he looked at Siegfried. ¡°But it¡¯s strange, Nura said you have six arms. Show it to me, or you will die before you can move.¡± Tsuchigumo began engaging with Siegfried at a fast speed. The other two members landed in front of us. Jeanne was looking at me with a gaze full of hatred, while Heracles was still as haughty as ever. He looked down at us, but I don¡¯t care about that. ¡°As I said earlier, I leave them to you.¡± I said to Hagoromo Gitsune and disappear from their sight. I used Meikyo Shisui and was about to enter the house to find Cao Cao when I heard a shout. ¡°Where is he? That trick again?!¡± Jeanne waved her hands in a few directions, and each wave created a rush of holy swords. One of that waves was approaching Hagoromo Gitsune, but she just stood without even interested in that wave. She just wave her fan slightly, and a gust of wind that was strong enough to destroy the holy sword hit the area in front of Hagoromo Gitsune. The holy swords shattered. Jeanne and Heracles who stood right in front of Hagoromo Gitsune were hit by the shattered holy swords piece that was blown by the wind. ¡°Even though I hate dirtying my hand directly, I will make an exception for the two of you because you looked down on this lady.¡± RaizarP Author Here~ More than 55 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks to the New Squad Leader! - Skoll - Kaiseth - momon Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 104 – vs Cao Cao The space inside the house was bigger than I thought. As soon as I entered it, I was greeted with three hallways and there is a rather exquisite door in front of me. From the outside, the house was just as big as a normal house. But when I entered the house, it expanded two times its size. ¡°Surely it¡¯s the work of a magician.¡± I spent no time admiring it and spread my Senjutsu. I can feel Cao Cao right in the room that was in front of me. His energy was still lower than yesterday, but I can feel True Longinus on his side. So he¡¯s ready to fight me. But attacking from the front was not my style. I used Kyouka Suigetsu and then opened the door in front of me. The room was an arena. The wall was white, and the ceiling was high with a simple light. Cao Cao stood in the middle of the room while holding his spear with his left hand. He wore a long-sleeved shirt, so his right sleeve was hanging in the air without his arm. His closed eyes opened when he heard the door open. ¡°So you¡¯ve come? I was expecting it, but not this soon.¡± Cao Cao said in a calm tone, but I can tell from his expression that he was a bit afraid of me. Not only that, my Fear has gotten stronger since I met those guys. Just from the sight of me, I can tell that those guys were afraid of me. ¡°You underestimated me then.¡± I answered Cao Cao and unsheathed Nenekirimau. A black aura came out from my body, and I pointed my blade to Cao Cao. ¡°I got your right arm yesterday. Today, I will take your head.¡± It was not a threat, I just told him that I WILL take his head. Cao Cao didn¡¯t seem disturbed, but with the lack of arm, using a spear must¡¯ve been a hassle for him. Spear worked best when used with both hands. Having one hand will only decrease the variety of the attack. Even so, Cao Cao pointed his spear at me while holding its shaft with his left hand. His right leg stepped forward and he turned his body to the left, leaving his right side open. Without asking why he left his right side open, I understood it from my experience with my old man. ¡®He wanted me to strike his right side.¡¯ He purposely left an opening to make my attack easy to guess. ¡°It seems you are ready. Don¡¯t die too soon!¡± I kicked the ground and rushed towards Cao Cao at a fast speed. With one kick, I managed to close our distance in half. At that moment, I let my fake rush toward him and I jumped up. ¡°My fake attack will have a probability to injure my opponent.¡± Telos Karma activated and the probability has changed. There was a low chance for my fake from Fear to injure my opponent. It was weaker than me after all. All it can do was strike the opponent with the energy that was left, a portion of my real strength. My fake reached Cao Cao in a second and sent a horizontal slash. Cao Cao didn¡¯t bother to block the slash, he thrust his spear toward the fake body with all of his strength. His thrust was sharp and fast, it almost pierced the fake body. But I had arrived from above and sent a downward slash with all my strength. My fake melted in a cloud of black smoke and I appeared right before my slash connected to Cao Cao¡¯s neck. If I must choose anything troublesome about Cao Cao, then it was his reaction speed. He managed to detect any danger before it reached him. He sidestepped to the left and my slash wasn¡¯t connected. It hit the ground, and I looked up immediately and saw Cao Cao¡¯s spear was pointed at me. My blade was still on the ground, but I used its recoil to change the direction of my slash to above. Nenekirimaru meet True Longinus and both of our weapons bounced back. I quickly fixed my posture and sent a barrage of slashes towards Cao Cao. His expression turned into a frown and he had a hard time blocking my slashes with his spear. I used both of my hands to enhance the power behind my slash and keep pushing Cao Cao. Finally, his back meets with the wall. I imbued my blade with Senjutsu and used Youjutsu to add fire to my blade. I slashed to the right with all my strength. To my surprise, Cao Cao managed to dodge my slash by ducking and jumping to the left. He then jumped again to distance himself away from me. His breath was still normal, and he didn¡¯t use any technique other than his pure spearmanship. At that moment, I feel energy accumulated on the tip of his spear and he pointed his spear at me. The blue light of the beam was shot at me and I jumped to the right to dodge it. I looked at Cao Cao¡¯s location, and I didn¡¯t see him. I quickly turned my head to the right and saw him preparing another attack. I was still in the sky, and he shot another beam at me. It was fast, and I had no time to dodge. I clicked my tongue and used Youjutsu to made a foothold in the sky. With a steady foothold, I swung Nenekirimaru downward, slashing the beam in half. The beam disappeared, and Cao Cao appeared right in front of my eyes. He thrust his spear and I blocked it with Nenekirimaru. ¡°Nenekirimaru won¡¯t break no matter what.¡± I used my Sacred Gear again because I saw the halo behind Cao Cao. He used his fucking Balance Breaker in that time. I gathered all Fear that I can use right now and used Shin: Kyouka Suigetsu. Blue Haori appeared on my back and I used my Sacred Gear again. ¡°No one will be able to hit me.¡± This was the most broken combination that I found, and until now no one was able to hit me when I was in this mode. Nenekirimaru and True Longinus are still interlocked. I looked at Cao Cao who was frowning with a smile on my face. ¡°What happened? You used Balance Breaker and still not able to defeat me?!¡± ¡°Ha! And you can¡¯t land a single attack at me at all.¡± Cao Cao unexpectedly returned my word at me. But, I just grinned and said. ¡°Really?¡± The next moment, my body disappear and I appeared behind Cao Cao, slashing his back. My attack was connected and blood splurted out from the wound. Cao Cao groaned and then rotated True Longinus and shoot another beam from its tip toward the back. I disappeared with a smile on my face and appeared a little bit away from Cao Cao. My blade was rested in my right shoulder, raised my left hand and my chin. ¡°Come on, just like that? I am expecting more from True Longinus wielder.¡± Now Cao Cao was looking at me with eyes full of hatred. ¡°Don¡¯t regret it!¡± Cao Cao shouted and I had a bad feeling. The next attack from him was bad. I lowered my stance and held Nenekirimaru with my right hand. ¡°Come!¡± RaizarP Author Here~ More than 55 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 105 – Killing Cao Cao Cao Cao¡¯s spear tip glowed and he rushed at me while swinging his spear. Blue slash was shot out. I ducked to dodge it and as soon as the slash passed, I looked up and saw Cao Cao attack me from above. I raised Nenekirimaru to deflect his attack to the left and kicked him in the stomach. He jumped back at the same time my kick landed on his stomach. The damage was not that much, so I chase him by jumping towards him and slashing with Nenekirimaru. He blocked my slash with the shaft of his spear and his body levitated to the ceiling at a fast speed. I sent a flying slash horizontally towards Cao Cao who was now in the sky, but he dodged and my slash hit the ceiling, pulverizing it. With no ceiling on top of us, Cao Cao flew out and I chased him through the hole that I made earlier. As soon as I chased him, a blue beam was sent from above. I cut it into two and the rest of the beam that didn¡¯t hit me made contact with the ground. As soon as it hit the ground, the beam created an explosion that was strong enough to destroy the house. I made a foothold with Youjutsu and chased Cao Cao who had a smug smile in the sky. With my Fear, I created a fake that rushed straight towards him while I took a little detour and attack him from his left side. Although his right side was open because he didn¡¯t have an arm, I purposely attacked his left side in order to take his remaining arm. However, because I had attacked him like this a few times, he instantly knew that I who was in front of him was a fake. He purposely ignored the fake and blocked my real attack. It was his mistake. My fake carried weight, and it can injure him too. When he blocked my real attack, my real body has yet to appear. So my Fake still rushed and swung Nenekirimaru downward, injuring Cao Cao¡¯s left shoulder alongside his body. ¡°AAaaaah!¡± Cao Cao screamed in pain and he jumped away to make distance again. His scream was unexpectedly loud. ¡°Cao Cao!¡± I heard a shout and I saw that it was Siegfried who shouted. I glanced at the ground and saw Siegfried used his Balance Breaker already, wielding 6 swords at the same time while blocking Tsuchigumo¡¯s attack. ¡°Hahahaha, is this the extent of your power? You are weak!¡± Tsuchigumo shouted as he sent another punch with his three right hands. His hands were covered with a black cloud of smoke, indicating that he used his Fear to enhance his attack. ¡°Guh!¡± Siegfried tried to block his attack, but he was blown away by Tsuchigumo¡¯s punch. I ignored them now, and I looked at Cao Cao again. ¡°It seems I have no choice but to use that.¡± Cao Cao said in a serious tone and he raised his Spear in front of him. ¡°Oh damn, it¡¯s time for a big attack.¡± I muttered as I looked at the spear that began to let out a bright glow. However, I didn¡¯t stand idly while looking at him. I began to use Touki and concentrated my aura in Nenekirimaru. I sheathed it again and lowered my stance as I made my foothold stronger. This was not enough. I put all my Fear that was amplified to Nenekirimaru too, making a cloud of black smoke seeped through the gap of Nenekirimaru¡¯s scabbard and levitated to the sky before vanishing into thin air. With all my energy, I used Youjutsu to give my attack a Fire element. I was most proficient in Fire, maybe because one of the skills that I didn¡¯t use yet was creating a Fire. When I felt Cao Cao¡¯s energy nearing the peak, he looked at me with steeled gaze and shouted. ¡°You guys! Use your Chaos Break! Kill them!¡± I grinned when Cao Cao ordered the others to use their Chaos Break. I can feel the one who wore glasses¡¯ energy in the distance suddenly spiked down. Vali, that guy ended his fight faster than I am. I grinned and without waiting for Cao Cao, I sent my strongest attack without Matoi. ¡°Tsuki Giri.¡± Fire flying slash was sent towards Cao Cao before he managed to send out his attack. His eyes widened in surprise because my attack this time was the strongest one that I showed to him. But, he kept his calm and his mouth moved. ¡°Truth Idea.¡± As soon as Cao Cao said that, my attack disappeared in an instant. No, it didn¡¯t disappear. My attack that almost hit Cao Cao was sent back to me. I can¡¯t see it, but it was there. My Kyouka Suigetsu was still active, so I made a fake and jumped upwards before kicking the air to rush at Cao Cao. Not only that, I had used my Sacred Gear, so even if he created a miracle that saved him, I won''t be affected by any kind of attack. The invisible attack that was sent back to me hit my fake and it melted in a cloud of black smoke. Cao Cao breathed roughly after he used his move, and I saw this as my chance to end him. So I gathered Senjutsu energy from the atmosphere around me. Even though it was my second time gathering Senjutsu energy from the air in the Underworld, I was still able to feel their malice. My body was assaulted by pain, but it didn¡¯t matter. I raised my Nenekirimaru and sent a downward slash that was imbued with Senjutsu. ¡°Tsuki Giri.¡± This time the flying slash had a white color and it traveled towards Cao Cao at a fast speed. He must have never imagined that I was able to dodge his strongest trump card, an ability to create Miracle. Even though that''s a broken ability, my Telos Karma is also a broken Sacred Gear in terms of ability. He looked at me who just appeared above him and then the flying slash that I sent towards him beheaded him in an instant. The look on his eyes was that of disbelief. The fight also took tolls on my body, and I turned back into my usual Youkai form without my blue Haori. I slowly jumped down to the ground and looked at the fight of Hagoromo Gitsune against Heracles and Jeanne. They were in a settlement, but I saw Hagoromo Gitsune was still smiling confidently. There was a silver dragon behind Jeanne and there was something like a missile head in Heracles¡¯s hands. ¡°Yo, you are not done yet?¡± I asked Hagoromo Gitsune in a mocking tone. Heracles and Jeanne were surprised when they saw me. They then looked back at the house and Jeanne¡¯s expression changed. She was furious and looked at me with a deep frown on her face. Hagoromo Gitsune glanced at me over her shoulder and said. ¡°Just wait a minute, it will be over immediately.¡± RaizarP Author Here~ More than 55 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 106 – Hagoromo Gitsune vs Jeanne Hagoromo Gitsune held her fan tightly in her left hand and then swung it a little. The black metal fan immediately became bigger in her hand. ¡°That¡¯s a dragon? But why does it feel so weak?¡± Hagoromo Gitsune asked me while looking at the dragon behind Jeanne. ¡°Youu!!!¡± Jeanne shouted and rushed towards me, ignoring Hagoromo Gitsune who stood in front of me. She raised her rapier and sent a thrust when she was about to reach me. I just stood there with a smile on my face. Because I know, that her rapier won¡¯t reach me. Hagoromo Gitsune made a displeased expression because she was ignored. When Jeanne was about to pass her, her three out of nine tails moved at a fast speed and two of her tails blocked Jeanne¡¯s thrust. One of Hagoromo Gitsune¡¯s tails caught Jeanne¡¯s neck and swung her away. ¡°Gah!¡± Jeanne who was swung by Hagoromo Gitsune¡¯s tail crashed into the ground and rolled around a few times before she was stopped by the silver dragon. That dragon was Jeanne¡¯s Balance Breaker, Stake Victim Dragon. There was one thing that I was confused about yesterday. Why did Cao Cao didn¡¯t use Phoenix Tears to heal his wound? They must have something like that, but he didn¡¯t use it, why? But I then realized the reason. He can¡¯t heal his wound because I cut it while imbuing Nenekirimaru with my Sacred Gear power. It must¡¯ve disturbed the healing of his wound. Not only that, I remembered that he didn¡¯t bring his severed arm with him when I cut it. ¡°Haaa!!¡± When I was thinking about that, I heard Heracles¡¯s shout, and the missiles that were in his hand were shot towards Hagoromo Gitsune. It flew at a fast speed and it reached Hagoromo Gitsune in a second. ¡°Child play.¡± Hagoromo Gitsune said in a relaxed tone and swung her fan. Her fan made contact with the missiles. The missiles exploded right in front of the fan, creating a cloud of dust from the explosion that surrounded Hagoromo Gitsune. Heracles then rushed at Hagoromo Gitsune, thinking that she must be wounded from the attack. However, Hagoromo Gitsune was not that weak. I saw her smiling when the cloud of dust began to disappear. Heracles have no way to know about that because Hagoromo Gitsune¡¯s body was hidden by her fan. When he reached her, he punched with his right hand that was covered in glowing yellow aura. It was at that moment Hagoromo Gitsune¡¯s tails moved. From one of the tails, a spear with 3 blades was shot at a high speed. ¡°What?!¡± Heracles was put off guard from the surprise attack and he can¡¯t dodge it. He immediately changed his position and crossed his arms in front of his body, trying to block the spear. ¡°That¡¯s useless.¡± I muttered in disappointment when I saw the action that Heracles took. Blocking that spear is useless, that spear was able to pierce anything. My prediction proved to be correct. As the spear¡¯s blade made a contact with Heracles¡¯s hand, it pierced it and pushed Heracles¡¯s body until it crashed to trees in the distance. The trees were destroyed when Heracles¡¯s body crashed into them. The force behind the spear kept pushing Heracles until I can¡¯t see him anymore. All that left in front of Hagoromo Gitsune was the injured Jeanne and her Balance Breaker. The Stake Victim Dragon raised its head and let out a roar. ¡°Graaaaaaaa!!!!¡± I plugged my ears because his roar made me uncomfortable. Hagoromo Gitsune seems fine with the roar, but she turned a little wary. ¡°Annoying. Let me destroy you first.¡± Hagoromo Gitsune jumped towards the Stake Victim Dragon and swung her fan towards it. The Stake Victim Dragon tried to block the attack with its hand. Hagoromo Gitsune grinned when she saw what the dragon did. Hagoromo Gitsune¡¯s fan was made of an unknown metal, it was even stronger than most swords in the world. Even if the dragon was made of holy swords from Blade Blacksmith¡¯s Balance Breaker, it will still be no match against her fan. The arm of the dragon was destroyed, and Jeanne who managed to regain her strength back after resting for a while was looking up with a surprised expression. She then gritted her teeth and jumped towards Hagoromo Gitsune while pointing her rapier. ¡°Haaaaah!¡± Jeanne let out a shout when she attacked. Hagoromo Gitsune¡¯s tails moved to intercept Jeanne while she was swinging her fan towards the Stake Victim Dragon, destroying it little by little. The destroyed part of the dragon began to fall to the ground. Hagoromo Gitsune latched two of her tails in the dragon¡¯s head, so she can keep her position near him. ¡°Your ability ss only accounted to this much, and you wanted to make a mess against us?¡± Asked Hagoromo Gitsune in a haughty tone. ¡°I will kill you!¡± Jeanne dodged Hagoromo Gitsune¡¯s tail one by one by jumping around the destroyed part of the dragon. Hagoromo Gitsune looked a bit impressed by Jeanne, but she then smirked. ¡°Fine, let this Lady end you directly.¡± Hagoromo Gitsune swung her fan for the last time using all of her strength towards the head of the dragon. The destruction that the fan brought was nothing to scoff at. The dragon head was destroyed, and the land behind the dragon was gouged because of the force behind the swing. However, Hagoromo Gitsune didn¡¯t end it there. She immediately dismissed her fan and took a katana from one of her tails. She met Jeanne¡¯s rapier with her katana. The rapier was destroyed and Hagoromo Gitsune¡¯s katana slashed Jeanne¡¯s body. Blood spurted out from Jeanne¡¯s body. ¡°Aaaaaahhh!!¡± Jeane screamed out in pain, and Hagoromo Gitsune grinned when she saw the blood that spurted out from the wound that she made. ¡°Stop your scream, this is why you must never target me.¡± Hagoromo Gitsune let go of her sword and thrust her left hand at Jeanne¡¯s heart. Her left-hand pierced through Jeanne¡¯s body and it penetrated into the other side of her body. On Hagoromo Gitsune¡¯s hand, there was a red clump of heart that was still beating. Blood slowly dripped from the heart on Hagoromo Gitsune¡¯s hand until it stopped moving. Hagoromo Gitsune pulled her hand and landed on the ground safely while drenched in blood. The Stake Victim Dragon began to disappear in a mote of light. I sighed and crossed my arms as I looked at Hagoromo Gitsune. ¡°That¡¯s too much.¡± Jeanne¡¯s heart was still in Hagoromo Gitsune¡¯s hand. She looked at it with an uninterested gaze and finally, she threw it to the ground. ¡°She got what she deserves for aiming her sword at me.¡± RaizarP Author Here~ More than 55 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks for the new Squad Leader!! - Mudit Chadha - Azelios Rosemile Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 107 – End of Raid I grinned at Hagoromo Gitsune when I heard what she said. Certainly, those guys were aiming for youkai, they got what they deserved. It¡¯s strange though, I don¡¯t see the rest of their members. I looked around the area and I was greeted by a quiet landmass with a lot of broken trees. ¡°By the way, where is Tsuchigumo? Also, your spear, is Heracles dead?¡± ¡°I don¡¯t know. You are the one who stood behind me, if you don¡¯t know, it¡¯s natural if this lady doesn¡¯t know too. Also about the guy that was impaled with my spear, I think he¡¯s still alive.¡± ¡°Ho-, he¡¯s still alive, huh. Let¡¯s see.¡± I closed my eyes and spread my Senjutsu Aura. Because I spent so much aura in my fight, I can¡¯t cover a lot of areas at once. That was why I choose to scan the area slowly to get what I wanted. The first thing that I noticed was Vali who flew back to my location. There was another energy right on top of Vali, I guess he¡¯s Georg who was brought back by Vali. That guy, I knew that he loves fighting, but if he always left his opponent alive, what¡¯s the point of this raid? Whatever, Georg was not that much a fighter. He¡¯s a magician, maybe Vali wanted to have him in his team. I continued to scan the area and finally, I felt Heracles that were impaled by Hagoromo Gitsune¡¯s spear. He¡¯s not moving and his energy was decreasing at a fast speed. That was usually a sign that he was about to lose his life. ¡°He¡¯s dying.¡± I said to Hagoromo Gitsune and she looked at me with widened eyes. ¡°Is that so? Only from one attack?¡± Asked Hagoromo Gitsune as her lips curved downward. She was certainly displeased by what I said. ¡°That¡¯s too bad. I wanted to torture him before killing him. He seems durable, but in fact, he¡¯s so fragile that he was about to die from one attack.¡± I shrugged my shoulder at what Hagoromo Gitsune said. ¡°They are human. Even though they have a Sacred Gear and a strong body from training, they still have a limit. There are only a few humans who are strong enough to fight you.¡± ¡°Certainly, that¡¯s also the case in my world. Only that Keikain Hidemoto managed to seal me. That¡¯s also with the help of Nurarihyon.¡± To respond to Hagoromo Gitsune, I just nodded my head and began to scan another area again. Finally, I can feel Tsuchigumo. He¡¯s located right on my left. ¡°Around 400 meters from here, huh. He¡¯s taking his fight too far.¡± I looked at the area on my left and then I saw a burst of dirt flying in the sky with some trees amongst them. The next moment, the area where I and Hagoromo Gitsune were standing was attacked by a tremor that was big enough to be called an earthquake. ¡°Oh, that¡¯s a big fight going on.¡± I heard a voice from above me and I looked up only to see Vali carrying unconscious Georg under his right arm. He looked back at me with a smile on his face and began to descend slowly to my right. ¡°It seems you are done. How is it, was Cao Cao strong?¡± Vali landed on my right and his wing disappeared in blue light. ¡°He¡¯s strong. Maybe you will sleep in a hospital bed if both of you have a fight. Well, you will not be able to fight him once he used his Balance Breaker though. He¡¯s that strong.¡± Vali¡¯s compatibility with Cao Cao is not bad. But, Cao Cao had a lot of different abilities compared to Vali. Divine Dividing certainly is strong, but Cao Cao¡¯s Truth Idea, that skill is overpowered. If I didn¡¯t use Telos Karma beforehand, I will certainly be skewered in two by my own attack. ¡°That strong, huh. I wanted to fight him. But, I can¡¯t feel his energy so he¡¯s dead, right?¡± ¡°Yeah, if he just wanted to fight a strong opponent like you, maybe I can still spare him. But, his ambition is making him dangerous, so I kill him. Not only that¡­¡± When I said the last part, my lips curved up in a grin and my aura was spilling out of my body. ¡°He dares to target one of us. I won¡¯t forgive someone like that.¡± I glanced at Vali and saw him having a savage smile. He looked like a predator that was ready to attack me anytime. Seeing his expression, I sighed and controlled my aura, suppressing it. Vali looked disappointed, but I had my fill of fight today so I won¡¯t fight him even if he asked me. ¡°Anyway, why did you bring that guy with you? Are you going to make him join your team in Khaos Brigade?¡± I asked Vali while pointing my index finger at Georg. Vali looked down at Georg then turned to me with a smile. ¡°Ah, I think this guy is useful. I plan to have my friend educate him a little and make him join my team. But, you know more than I thought. How did you know that I joined Khaos Brigade too?¡± ¡°Hah! I know that you will get dissatisfied with Azazel when he wanted peace. Knowing your personality, siding with Khaos Brigade will give you more freedom to fight against a strong opponent, right?¡± ¡°Hahaha, I see. Well, I will be grateful if you don¡¯t tell Azazel about that. Let it be a secret until I tell him.¡± ¡°I have no plan to tell Azazel.¡± As I said that, I feel Tsuchigumo approached us at a fast speed alongside Siegfried. So their battle has not ended yet? I looked in their direction and saw Tsuchigumo emerge from trees while in front of him was Siegfried who was not looked like a giant spider with six arms. Each of his arms was wielding swords. Because I snatched Gram from him, he used two normal light swords from Church. Tsuchigumo¡¯s body was riddled with slash wounds, but Siegfried had sustained more injuries. ¡°Hahahaha, it was fun! But it seems that only you left, so I can¡¯t take this any longer.¡± The black cloud of smoke began to appear around Tsuchigumo¡¯s body. His eyes were letting out a golden glow. ¡°Kuh! I will fucking kill you, you bastard!¡± Tsuchigumo smirked and clenched his fists. He pulled his arms and then sent a punch with his six hands at the same time. Even I have a hard time looking at Tsuchigumo¡¯s punch from my position. It was fast, but Siegfried seems to be able to move his swords to block Tsuchigumo¡¯s punch. That was useless though, his swords didn¡¯t even touch one of Tsuchigumo¡¯s hands. The punch connected and Siegfried was blown to the ground. As Siegfried¡¯s body crashed to the ground, it created an explosion and made a big crater in front of me. I jumped to the sky to dodge the shockwave. Hagoromo Gitsune and Vali also jumped while looking at Tsuchigumo. ¡°Wow, that guy is strong. I am looking forward to our fight.¡± Vali muttered while looking at Tsuchigumo. The crater was around 5 meters deep with Siegfried¡¯s body in the center of the crater. His body has returned to normal and his swords were laying around him. Tsuchigumo landed beside Siegfried and began laughing. ¡°Hahahahaha, that was a great exercise.¡± I landed on the ground, made my way to Siegfried, and looked at his body. ¡°Hmm, he¡¯s dead, huh. Good job, Tsuchigumo.¡± Tsuchigumo looked at me with a satisfied smile on his face. ¡°Call me again if you have something fun like this. I am certainly having fun when he transformed into a spider.¡± I nodded my head at him and then looked up at the sky. ¡°So it¡¯s ended. We just need to deal with the aftermath that made their way here.¡± ¡°Ah, is that so? I will take my leave first. You can teleport out of the underworld with no problem, right?¡± Vali said to me and a magic circle appeared under his feet. I looked at Vali and said. ¡°Yeah, thanks for your help.¡± ¡°It¡¯s nothing. I hope we can spar someday.¡± Leaving those words, he teleported away. Well then, time to deal with the devil. RaizarP Author Here~ More than 55 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks for the new Executive!! - EchoingRuby Big Thanks for the new Squad Leader!! - Gloxie Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 108 – Visiting Gremory Territory I had felt them when I was searching for Tsuchigumo. A group of devils was approaching us from the direction where Hagoromo Gitsune had blown Heracles. I focused my senses on that area while looking at Tsuchigumo. ¡°Are your wounds okay?¡± I asked him while keeping my senses to feel the devils. It seems they found Heracles and were checking him. I could no longer feel Heracles¡¯s energy, so he¡¯s dead. ¡°Yeah, my wound is not something of concern. It will heal in no time at all.¡± Tsuchigumo pulled out his pipe from his pocket beneath his cloth and lit it up by snapping his finger. He inhaled the smoke and then exhaled it towards the sky. His wounds were visibly healed after he smoked. ¡°I¡¯m envious of your durability.¡± I turned away after I saw Tsuchigumo fully healed already. To be honest, I really am envious of his regeneration speed. What kind of bullshit was that. I remember that the protagonist of Nurarihyon no Mago slashed Tsuchigumo¡¯s head in half. But, Tsuchigumo was still not dead and proceed to stitch his body together. That tenacity and lifeforce that he had was the reason why he was so strong. ¡°You are bullshit too.¡± I can hear Tsuchigumo speak to me, but I ignored him as the devils had arrived. I saw 2 people jump out from the trees and land right in front of us. The ones who landed in front of us were a girl with black hair wearing a suit and someone that I knew, Sirzechs. He was wearing his Satan¡¯s outfit. We were in the Underworld, so it¡¯s understandable for him to wear his formal outfit unlike the girl beside him. When he looked at me, he let out a sigh which I replied with a smile on my face. The girl was looking at me with curious eyes. Based on what I remember, the girl in front of me must be her sister. ¡°I thought you are not going to meddle in the Underworld?¡± Sirzechs asked me with a tired voice. If he was here when Rias¡¯s wedding was supposedly held yesterday, he must have pulled some string to cancel it, huh. Siscon. ¡°It¡¯s a coincidence that my target runs to the underworld. You can¡¯t blame me.¡± I shrugged my shoulder as I dismissed Nenekirimaru from my hand. Hagoromo Gitsune also moved beside me and Tsuchigumo was sitting right on my left. Tsuchigumo ignored Sirzechs and the girl, which I guessed as Serafall Leviathan, and keep smoking while looking up to the sky. ¡°Your target?¡± Asked Sirzechs as he looked around the area. The grounds were gouged, a lot of trees were pulled from the ground. And the most eye-catching was the building that the Hero Faction used as a base was now just a pile of rubbles. ¡°It seems there is a big battle here. And you said that you are just chasing your target? I can even feel holy energy radiating from this place. That was the reason why I bring Serafall with me to check this place together even though this place is far from Gremory territory.¡± He turned at me and narrowed his eyes. So the reason why he decided to come here was because of Cao Cao¡¯s True Longinus that radiated holy energy? That was, understandable. Devil was weak towards Holy Energy. Especially, True Longinus¡¯s Holy Energy was massive. I can understand why two Satans themselves decided to check the source of it directly. If harmful energy appeared in my territory suddenly, I will certainly approach it by myself. There was no need to delay my action, as the harmful energy may cause damage to my territory or subordinates. ¡°I see, so that¡¯s your reason.¡± I looked at the pile of rubbles and pointed my left thumb towards it. ¡°If that¡¯s the one that you wanted to check, then don¡¯t worry. I killed the one who radiated that Holy Energy.¡± Sirzechs looked at the pile of rubbles and then let out another sigh. Finally, he looked at me with a smile. ¡°Well, I will let this one slip as you have taken care of the problem. But, can you tell me about the full story?¡± ¡°Hmm.¡± I stroked my chin as I looked at Sirzechs with my right eye closed and my chin raised a little. Serafall who stood beside Sirzechs was still looking at me curiously. She put her index finger in front of her mouth. I don¡¯t mind telling him about what happened as the Underworld was his territory. But the news of me defeating the True Longinus wielder would spread and the attention of the Supernatural will be focused on me. ¡®That is not bad. Why would I hesitate? If the attention of the Supernatural world is focused on me, I can arrange a lot of things without much problem.¡¯ I grinned and lowered my hand. ¡°Sure.¡± Sirzechs nodded his head, satisfied with my answer. Serafall then could no longer hold herself and made her way towards me. She leaned closer with her hands behind her back. ¡°Hey, are you the one called Nura Riku? So-tan said a lot of things about you!¡± Serafall¡¯s tone was cheerful, without a hint of authority that was contained in Sirzechs¡¯s tone. Even that old crow Azazel had a hint of authority in his tone. It was strange, but Serafall¡¯s cheerfulness put me off guard. ¡°What did you hear about me? I bet she was talking about me being handsome and managed to captive her at first sight?¡± I grinned at Serafall which she replied with a laugh. ¡°Hahaha, you are funny! No, she complained that a youkai called Nura Riku suddenly arrived at Kuoh Academy and created one trouble after another.¡± Serafall stepped back and made some distance as she stood beside Sirzechs. ¡°That¡¯s a praise in my ear. Right, about the chronology of what happened here¡­¡± I cut myself before continuing. I wanted Sirzechs to notice that I can¡¯t talk about that here. We don¡¯t know who was hearing our conversation. Since Sirzechs and Serafall arrived in this place, I keep my Senjutsu to cover the area around us. As expected, a few bats were trying to hear our conversation. Sirzechs understood what I wanted to say. He nodded his head and said. ¡°How about you tell me in my mansion? That way, you can tell us while having a rest. You must be exhausted.¡± ¡°Hahaha, thanks for the offer. I will accept it.¡± Tsuchigumo that hear our conversation exhaled smoke and looked at me. ¡°Are you done?¡± I looked at Tsuchigumo and said. ¡°Yeah, we are moving to his house.¡± ¡°Then let¡¯s go. I am starving.¡± Tsuchigumo stood up and I looked back at Sirzechs. ¡°I assume you are ready. I will teleport us to my mansion then.¡± As he said that, a red Magic circle appeared under us. The next moment, we were teleported in front of a big mansion. Sirzechs stood in front of us while spreading his arms. ¡°Welcome, to my mansion in Gremory Territory.¡± RaizarP Author Here~ More than 55 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks for the new Executive!! - EchoingRuby Big Thanks for the new Squad Leader!! - allan frutiez - Mattias Lilja Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 109 – Dining with Satan After we teleported, Serafall said that she was busy with work and left by teleporting away. She was so fast at teleporting away that I was amazed. There were 4 Satans, but she was still busy with work? Talk about a leader that only did paperwork. My old man never did any paperwork in the mansion. For as long as I remember, it was always Setsuna or Magari who did the paperwork in my old man¡¯s stead. When I took over his position, I also planned to have my subordinates do the paperwork in my stead. I have a lot of subordinates, if I didn¡¯t exploit it, they would be useless. Well, an important document that needed my approval still needs to be reported to me though. Youkai were an honest bunch of creatures. They never hid anything, unless necessary. That was why I could put my trust in them. Tsuchigumo can¡¯t enter the mansion of his body size. He looked at me and said. ¡°Nura, because I can¡¯t enter that small house, bring out something good for me.¡± Technically, Tsuchigumo wasn¡¯t my subordinate. He¡¯s more like a mercenary that had ties with me. That was the reason why he didn¡¯t use polite words, not that he will act polite towards someone else. I looked back at Tsuchigumo. ¡°What? You can¡¯t shrink yourself?¡± ¡°What do you think? If I can shrink myself, I would enjoy more fighting with my small body.¡± ¡°Hahahaha, is that so.¡± I looked at Sirzehcs with a smile on my face as I crossed my arms inside my Kimono. ¡°Sorry to bother you, but is it possible if someone brings Tsuchigumo¡¯s meal outside?¡± Sirzechs gave me a knowing smile and raised his right hand. ¡°No problem. I will ask Grayfia to prepare his meal. For now, please follow me. I will show you my mansion.¡± He turned around and walked to the entrance of the mansion. I and Hagoromo Gitsune followed him. ¡°The mansion is not that different from the human mansion.¡± Hagoromo Gitsune whispered to me. I glanced at her and saw her looking at the mansion with eyes full of interest. She was still holding a school bag in her right hand, but the chain that connected the bag with her arm was gone. Sirzechs seemed to hear Hagoromo Gitsune¡¯s whisper. He glanced at us over his shoulder, still smiling. ¡°Most of the buildings in the Underworld are inspired from the buildings on Earth. That¡¯s why the Underworld is no different from Earth. We have society, working place, even stalls on the street.¡± We arrived in front of the entrance of his mansion. The doors opened themselves as if they were automatic doors. But, when the doors opened, Grayfia stood on the other side of the doors while bowing her head. ¡°Welcome to Gremory Mansion, Nura-sama, Hagoromo Gitsune-sama. Please come in, I have prepared the tables inside.¡± Umu, that¡¯s nice of her. Sirzechs entered the mansion first and said something to Grayfia. ¡°Please prepare one more meal for the guest outside. He can¡¯t enter the mansion because of his size, I hope you can prepare something that fits him.¡± ¡°Certainly, I will prepare it right now.¡± Sirzechs nodded his head and looked at Grayfia with a different smile. If I need to describe it, the smile that he showed us was his business smile while right now he was smiling happily. Grayfia also smiled at Sirzechs before she went inside the mansion. ¡°Well then, please follow me.¡± As Sirzechs said that, I heard a loud girl¡¯s scream from the second floor of the mansion. ¡°AAAH! Issei!¡± I instinctively looked up at the source of the scream and smiled wryly. ¡°They are here?¡± I asked Sirzechs without looking at him. ¡°Hahaha, this is Gremory mansion, after all, my mansion is at a different location.¡± Not that I mind. If Issei was injured, then as expected, he managed to achieve forced Balance Breaker and beat the shit out of Riser. I looked at Sirzechs with narrowed eyes but he just smiling at me without changing his expression. That damn guy, ¡°Siscon.¡± I said with a grin on my face and he scratched his cheek. ¡°Hahahaha, I can¡¯t deny that. But aren¡¯t you similar?¡± He was laid-back, similar to how Azazel acted when he¡¯s not serious. But Sirzechs¡¯s response was not wrong too. If he cares about his Sister, then I care about Youkai in common. Although my lovers held a special place in my heart. ¡°I can¡¯t deny that too.¡± We smiled at each other after realizing our similarities. As expected of the strongest Siscon in the world, he won¡¯t let his Sister be sullied by other people. ¡°Well, let¡¯s go inside. I don¡¯t want Grayfia meal to turn cold because we are talking about something unnecessary.¡± He turned around and guided us to the dining room. Maybe because he knew that my story would be important, the dining room that he guided us was located on the edge of the mansion. The table was not the long rectangle that the devil often used, but it was a small round table enough for three people. We sat on the chair around the table and Grayfia brought the meal on the tray. She put three plates right in front of each of us. The meal was steak, a western meal. I had always eaten Japanese meals because of my mansion condition, so I was looking forward to the steak¡¯s taste. I looked at Hagoromo Gitsune and saw her eating the steak in a proper table manner. As expected of a her, with a lot of experience being reincarnated, she had achieved skills in almost everything. I also began to eat the steak. We finished our meals quickly, then it came to the real reason why we visited the mansion. ¡°It¡¯s delicious, thanks for the meal.¡± I said while clapping my hand to each other. Sirzechs wiped his mouth with a napkin. He put the napkin down and smiled, ¡°I¡¯m glad you like it.¡± ¡°Well, my stomach is full now. So, from where should I start my story?¡± I put my elbow on the chair armrest and rested my head on my hand. ¡°I would prefer to hear it from the start. But don¡¯t worry, if there is some kind of secret that you wanted to hide, I won¡¯t force you to tell me about it.¡± I grinned at Sirzechs. He certainly heard about my relationship with Azazel and how I visited the Church. He was implying that I don¡¯t need to tell him about it because he knows about it. What a shame, I can¡¯t make him surprised. An experienced leader which lived for more than a hundred years was different. ¡°I have no secret. Well then, let me tell you about it¡­¡± RaizarP Author Here~ More than 55 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 110 – Information Sharing I straightened my sitting position, crossed my arms under my Kimono, and asked. ¡°First of all, you do know about Old Satan Faction, right?¡± Sirzechs¡¯s expression turned serious. He put his hands on top of each other on the table. ¡°Of course, I know. Was what happened earlier related to them?¡± ¡°If you asked if the group that I destroyed related to the Old Satan Faction, then yes. A lot of Factions with different ambitions were creating an organization called Khaos Brigade. Do you hear about them?¡± ¡°Khaos Brigade? I heard some rumors from my subordinates. So they exist?¡± I nodded my head at Sirzechs¡¯s question. ¡°They are.¡± I paused a little and make a barrier around us. I amplified the barrier with my Fear so no one will be able to hear us. Sirzechs was surprised when I made the barrier. It must be because he can¡¯t sense anyone outside the barrier because it was blocked by my Fear. ¡°Don¡¯t worry, the next thing that I say is confidential. I just blocked anyone who tried to listen to our conversation.¡± Sirzechs looked at me and nodded his head. ¡°I see. I guess it was Zekram Bael and the others who tried to listen to our conversation.¡± Ah, the old devil bunch. He had greater influence compared to four Satans and was the head of the Great King Faction. If Cleria Beliel was driven back to the Underworld by Touji, there were two possibilities left for her. Either she managed to hide and ran away, or she was killed by Zekram for discovering the King Piece. I didn¡¯t tell Masaomi yet because I didn¡¯t know the truth. If I told her Cleria was killed when she was still alive, it could cause discord between us. That was why I kept this knowledge a secret from him. I wanted to give him some hope. ¡°Even as a Satan, you still need to watch your back, huh. Devil¡¯s society is troublesome.¡± I gave him a knowing smile. ¡°Hahaha, devil¡¯s politic is complicated. Well, back to the topic, can you tell me now?¡± ¡°Sure. I will give you good news. I meet Gabriel yesterday and I tell her that Devil and Fallen Angels wanted peace. I also met Azazel earlier before I went to the Underworld. Both of them wanted peace, so you just need to contact them to finalize the peace between three factions.¡± ¡°You¡­¡± Sirzechs¡¯s eyes widened in surprise, then he smiled with a kind smile and bowed his head. ¡°Thank you.¡± I didn¡¯t expect that he will bow his head to me. A Satan bowed his head in the Underworld, his territory. That itself showed how much he wanted peace, and more importantly, he was a good leader. ¡°You don¡¯t need to bow your head to me. Peace between three factions, no, all factions must work together this time.¡± Sirzechs raised his head and looked at me with a smile on his face. ¡°Even so, I must thank you for helping us.¡± So stubborn. I raised my right hand and said. ¡°Fine, let¡¯s leave it like that. Khaos Brigade is strong, I don¡¯t want the three factions to fight for now. Because, if three factions were fighting, Earth will be influenced by the fight between three factions. I wanted to avoid that.¡± ¡°I see, Earth is your home after all. But that doesn¡¯t explain why you go through the length for the three factions to have peace.¡± ¡°Ophis. She¡¯s the leader of the Khaos Brigade.¡± At my mention of Ophis, Sirzechs¡¯s body flinched and he held his head with his right hand. ¡°So that¡¯s the reason. You are not wrong then, the three factions need to stop fighting if that¡¯s the case.¡± There was one more reason. Trihexa, the beast will be resurrected if Khaos Brigade, no, if that man succeeds in his plan. In case Trihexa was freed from its seal, I need the leaders of the Faction to stop them. I¡¯m not a hero, so I won¡¯t join the everlasting fight inside the barrier of Trihexa unless I was forced to. But, I plan to wreck their plan. I will not let that old bastard realize the existence of The end of the world. By doing that, I will be able to destroy their plan. One of the keys that were important for their plan would be that girl. ¡°I will move to stop them. For that, I need help from the three factions. My old man was on the move already with the old monkey. I will leave one of the factions that joined Khaos Brigade to Devil Faction if you don¡¯t mind.¡± I put on a serious face and leaned my back against the seat backrest. ¡°Which Faction that you left to us?¡± I smirked at Sirzechs and said. ¡°Old Satan Faction. I bet you will be happy if I leave those guys to you.¡± ¡°You give us a tough opponent¡­ But, I will be happy to fight them. They had made trouble for us since the civil war. So some of them had survived.¡± The atmosphere was serious. Sirzechs was serious even though he was smiling. But, one existence that I forgot suddenly raised her voice. ¡°Hey, it seems I was unnecessary here. Can I leave?¡± I looked at Hagoromo Gitsune in disbelief. I sent a signal by my eyes that said ¡®You what?¡¯ Sirzechs also looked at Hagoromo Gitsune and smiled wryly. ¡°I don¡¯t mind. Please feel free and just consider this mansion as your home.¡± ¡°Sure.¡± Hagoromo Gitsune stood up with a smile on her face and walked out of my barrier. ¡°Hahaha, she¡¯s so carefree.¡± Sirzechs laughed happily as he looked at Hagoromo Gitsune who just left us. ¡°Such is youkai, they are too carefree. By the way, the group that I chased to the Underworld was called Hero Faction. They planned to use Yasaka and Hagoromo Gitsune to call upon Great Red to Earth. I found out about their plan and chased them until I killed their members.¡± ¡°So you were chasing terrorists. I will tell Serafall to make a report accordingly. She¡¯s in charge of Foreign Affairs after all.¡± ¡°Well, that¡¯s it from me. I must ask something to you though.¡± ¡°Feel free to.¡± I had given him important information. So, he will give me back the information that I asked for. ¡°Is Cleria Belial alive?¡± So I will ask him directly. If Touji only drove Cleria away, whether she was alive or dead was unknown. But, as a Satan, he definitely had that information. Sirzechs narrowed his eyes, but then he sighed. ¡°Yes, she¡¯s alive.¡± And that was good news for me and Masaomi. Masaomi will be able to meet his lover, and I will get another subordinate if she was willing to go back with Masaomi. ¡°I see, thank you. By the way, can I borrow your bath?¡± I stood up and looked at Sirzechs as I dispelled the barrier that surrounded us. Sirzechs blinked his eyes and then smiled. ¡°Sure, feel free to.¡± RaizarP Author Here~ More than 55 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 111 – Spar with Oppai Dragon RaizarP Eh, I write a new novel with Male MC again. The setting of the novel would be Earth that changed. The humans will get system and Earth would become bigger with a new inhabitants like monster and other race. Chapter 1 was uploaded on my Patr¨¦on and I plan to upload it on my Patr¨¦on until it reached chapters 30 Maybe it will be published next month or in two month, but I can say that the new novel is my greatest series in my opinion. That''s it, Enjoy the chapter!! After I got the location of the bath from Sirzechs, I walked away from the dining room. As the pervert from Kuoh had lived in this mansion, I wanted to play a little to relax. These few days were filled with me running around from Vatican, Tokyo, and even to the Underworld right now. Even though I had achieved my goal, I was not able to relax for a second. Hero Faction was not that strong, but a single mistake like yesterday led to them running away from me. ¡®Relaxing myself is good once in a while.¡¯ I tried to sense Hagoromo Gitsune, and find out that she was outside with Tsuchigumo and Grayfia. Inside the mansion, I can feel the pervert, Issei, on the second floor with familiar energy, Kiba, and another one who was not too familiar to me. I guessed it was Gasper. The direction where their energies gathered was the bath that Sirzechs told me. ¡®Oh, is that so. Did he think that I won¡¯t be able to feel them?¡¯ I grinned and use Meikyo Shisui to erase my presence. ¡®Let¡¯s play a little, shall we.¡¯ I entered the bath while my presence was erased and took off my clothes in the changing room. When I entered the bathroom, I saw a luxurious big bath. The ceiling was high, and there were even shower on the side of the room. The three energies that I felt earlier were as I had expected. Issei, Kiba, and Gasper were showering on the side of the room. They were washing their hair while conversing with each other. ¡°Hey, Kiba. What do you think about earlier? Suddenly, Maou rushed out at a fast speed while saying there was an emergency.¡± Umu, so they were talking about that. I made my way to the shower and turned on one of the showers beside Kiba. Because they washed their hair and closed their eyes, they didn¡¯t see or hear the new shower that was turned on. I washed my body with the soap that was in front of me and washed my hair too with the shampoo. To be honest, washing my hair in my youkai form was troublesome. My hands had a hard time reaching the tip of my hair and it won¡¯t come down even though it was washed with water. ¡°I don¡¯t know. But it seems he had come back with some guests.¡± ¡°Heeh- he came back with guests? So that was why Grayfia-san moved a lot today.¡± ¡°Maybe. But, who are the guests? I think that the guests are important people, as Maou-sama himself was the one who greeted them.¡± Issei and Kiba washed the shampoo on their hair with water at the same time. I glanced at Gasper who was silent all this time while imitating Issei and saw him washing his hair with water too. This was the perfect time to show me so I canceled my technique and said. ¡°That guest in question is me.¡± My voice seemed to surprise Kiba and Issei. They turned at me at the same time I spoke. ¡°Woaaah! You surprised me!¡± Issei¡¯s reaction was over the top. He took two steps back and he hit Gasper who stood beside him and they were crashed into each other. ¡°Ahh!!¡± ¡°Woa!¡± Both of them were shouting at the same time. They stumbled onto the floor and Issei was on top of Gasper somehow. Kiba took his gaze off from me and looked at Issei and Gasper. Gasper put his hands in front of him and his face turned red for some reason. ¡°I-Issei-senpai. I-if it¡¯s you then¡­¡± ¡°Gasper! No no no, he¡¯s a boy!¡± With a fast movement, Issei crawled back, and then he stood up. ¡°Ah!¡± Gasper let out a gasp and then he stood up, still with a red face. ¡®What happened? Did he just get embarrassed? He¡¯s a boy, right?¡¯ I was confused. It was me who was planning to surprise them, but they managed to counterattack by showing such comedy. However, I recovered faster than them and laughed. ¡°Hahahaha, what an interesting fall.¡± Kiba and Issei were looking at me again as I washed my hair with water. ¡°Ah! Come to think of it, why are you here!¡± Issei pointed his index finger at me while Kiba nodded his head. ¡°I must ask too, Nura-kun. You said you are Maou-sama¡¯s guest?¡± ¡°That¡¯s correct.¡± I turned off the shower and went to the bath. For some reason, Gasper was looking at me while hiding behind Issei. The three of them were done with their showers too, so they entered the bath too and sat a little bit away from me inside the bath. ¡°Hahaha, I won¡¯t do anything. Forget the thing about the school, I won¡¯t do anything if you didn¡¯t attack me.¡± I closed my right eye and looked at them with my chin raised. ¡°O-Oh, somehow I forgot to say it. I¡¯m sorry for that. I thought you killed Koneko-chan so I was angry. I¡¯m sorry!¡± Issei bowed his head at me. He was unexpectedly honest with his feeling. ¡°I¡¯m sorry too. Also thank you. I had gotten stronger because of that experience.¡± This time Kiba also bowed his head to me. Gasper looked at both of them with a confused gaze. He didn¡¯t know what to do and he was flailing his head around until he looked at me. ¡°I¡¯m sorry!!!¡± Gasper shouted the loudest as he bowed his head too. I blinked my eyes a few times and laughed. ¡°Hahahaha, just raise your head. Come to think of it, was her wedding canceled?¡± The three of them raised their heads and Issei scratched the back of his head with his right hand. ¡°W-well¡­ It was canceled after I beat up that grilled chicken. I managed to use Balance Breaker and beat him to a pulp!¡± ¡°Hoo-¡° I stroked my chin as I looked at Issei. ¡°Is that true, Kiba?¡± Kiba nodded his head and smiled. ¡°Issei-kun has become strong since we left the school. He said that he wanted to beat you the next time you meet.¡± ¡°Hoho, interesting.¡± So he wanted to beat me the next time we met? Now that we met again, let¡¯s test his strength. ¡°Eh- Kiba! What did you say?! I never said that!¡± I approached Issei and tapped his shoulder. ¡°So, shall we duke it out? Don¡¯t worry, I will be gentle.¡± Issei¡¯s expression paled, but I ignored it. ¡°Hahahaha, let¡¯s go. I wanted to have a rest, but having a spar is not that bad!¡± I stood up and walked out of the bath while laughing. ¡°I¡¯m dead¡­¡± I can hear Issei mutter from behind. RaizarP Author Here~ More than 55 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 112 – I will send you to Jesus I exited the bathroom after I wore all my Kimono. Even though I called it to spar when I threa- ask him nicely, this was more like practice for Issei. He was eager and followed me with Kiba and Gasper with his head looked down. That was the sign that he was happy with the spar. He wouldn¡¯t follow me if he didn¡¯t want to spar. ¡°Issei, don¡¯t you think this is a good chance? We are defeated by him when in school, so this is your chance to beat him in a spar!¡± Kiba tried to cheer Issei up. He was trying to rouse Issei¡¯s spirit by giving him the hope of beating me. ¡°I-Issei-senpai! I believe that you can defeat him!¡± Gasper clenched his fist in front of his chest and looked at Issei with a smile. As if he was given new strength, Issei raised his head and looked at Kiba and then Gasper. ¡°Kiba, Gasper! Right, I will beat him. After all, I beat that grilled chicken yesterday!¡± ¡°Right! You even defeat the high-ranked devil yesterday! I believe that you can at least land a hit on Nura-kun today!¡± Kiba patted Issei on his shoulder as we walked out of the mansion. ¡°Yosh, I will show you! I will prove that I am different from myself a few days ago!¡± Issei raised his right hand and Gasper looked at Issei with a gaze that seemed to worship him. ¡°Issei-senpai!¡± I, who was glancing at them since we exited the bath was laughing inside. ¡®Hahaha, well well. Nenekirimaru seems to be overkill for him, let¡¯s use that traditional weapon then. This is a spar and not a duel after all.¡¯ When we exited the mansion, the first thing that I saw was Tsuchigumo drinking a liquor that smelt like Sake from a big cup. On his side, there were a lot of empty sake bottles scattered on the ground. He was sitting on the ground right in front of the mansion while enjoying his drink. ¡°Puhaa! That hit me hard. The sake from the Underworld is not that bad!¡± He laughed merrily and I noticed that Hagoromo Gitsune was standing in front of a flower in the Mansion¡¯s garden, not far from Tsuchigumo. Hagoromo Gitsune had a sad smile, seemingly drowning in the memories. Well, if they enjoyed themselves, it¡¯s fine. ¡°W-What the fuck was that!¡± Issei shouted while pointing his index finger at Tsuchigumo. Ah, he destroyed the atmosphere, what bad luck. Tsuchigumo and Hagoromo Gitsune noticed us and looked in our direction. When Tsuchigumo saw me, he just raised his cup and said. ¡°Oi, Nura! Let¡¯s drink together, the Sake is good!¡± ¡°Next time, I have something to do for now.¡± I answered Tsuchigumo and he huffed before drinking his sake again. ¡°Puha! Even though the sake is good. Well, you do you!¡± I noticed Hagoromo Gitsune stopped smiling and made her way towards us. It seemed that she noticed Issei and the others behind me and his lips curved in a grin. ¡°Oya, who is this? Is this not the devil that attacked me in the school?¡± I turned my body and looked at Issei and Kiba in particular. Issei¡¯s expression paled while Kiba was smiling. Even though he smiled, I can feel his fighting spirit roused from his gaze that looked at Hagoromo Gitsune. ¡°I¡¯m sorry for that time. It was our mistake.¡± Kiba said while bowing his head slightly. ¡°Don¡¯t mind it, that was a good warm-up for me. However, I must say that you are a bit too weak for a devil. Even the human that I fought earlier was stronger than you.¡± I noticed Kiba¡¯s smile was about to break, but his fighting spirit was aroused even more and he raised his head. ¡°Then, may I have a chance to have a spar with you? I believe that I had gotten stronger in these past few days.¡± Hagoromo gitsune covered her mouth with her right hand and answered. ¡°I don¡¯t mind. When shall we do it? Right now?¡± Kiba looked at Issei and me before he looked at Hagoromo Gitsune again. ¡°That would be preferable. But, Issei and Nura-kun will have a spar right now. How about we have a spar after they are done?¡± ¡°Then, let¡¯s do that.¡± ¡°Awa.. awa wa wa.¡± Gasper let out a strange sound as he hid behind Issei. ¡°Gasper, what are you doing?¡± Issei seems to be able to recover himself after he felt Gasper. ¡°I-Issei-senpai, she¡¯s scary!¡± ¡°Don¡¯t worry Gasper! Don¡¯t be scared of her!¡± Shouted Issei. Even so, Issei¡¯s legs were trembling hard, he was trying to act strong in front of his junior. ¡°Well, where will we be sparring? Show the way, Kiba.¡± I spoke to Kiba and he nodded his head. ¡°Well then, please follow me.¡± *** Kiba brought us to a clearing near the mansion. It was big enough to spar, and I had no problem at all. This was a perfect place with no big boulder or trees in our way. Issei stood in front of me, ready with his boosted gear in his left arm. ¡°Let¡¯s do it, partner!¡± [Ou! I was asleep at that time, but let¡¯s beat him, partner!] I can hear Ddraig''s voice from the boosted gear as the green jewel on it shines. [Boost!] ¡°Are both of you ready?¡± Kiba acted as our referee and stood between me and Issei. ¡°I am ready!¡± Shouted Issei. I bent my body down and took off the wooden sandals that I wore all this time. I held the sandal that I wore in my right foot in my right hand and pointed it at Issei. ¡°I''m ready.¡± I thought that Nenekirimaru was a bit overkill, so I decided to play around in this spar. My goal was to relax myself, so I just consider this spar as entertainment. ¡°Well then, start!¡± ¡°Come here! I will send you to Jesus!¡± I shouted with a grin on my face. Finally, I was able to say it against the devil. Issei and Kiba held their heads with their hand, maybe because they got stinged by the name. They were the ones that stood near me, while Gasper and Hagoromo Gitsune were watching us from afar. Gasper was terrified by Hagoromo Gitsune, so he stood on the other side and cheered on Issei. That name was effective, now let¡¯s do it. RaizarP Author Here~ More than 55 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 113 – Slapping the Oppai Dragon Issei was dumbfounded by what I said, but he then kicked the ground and rushed at me. ¡°Oooooh!!¡± He let out a loud shout as he pulled his left arm, preparing a punch. His movement was faster compared to before. He was able to move 10 meters in one kick, which was impressive for him. He sent a punch at me with his left hand when he was about to reach me. However, I ducked and dodge his punch by a hairbreadth. Although his punch was fast for a normal devil, compared to Cao Cao that I fought earlier, that was still too slow. He was surprised that I was able to dodge his punch, but maybe because he had experienced a lot of fight, his right leg moved and he used his knee to attack. This time, I jumped up and landed behind him before his attack connected. Issei, who lost me from his sight, looked around furiously. ¡°Behind you, Issei-senpai!¡± Gasper shouted from the side and Issei looked back instantly. His neck moved at high speed, however, my right hand had moved. The sandals that I held met with Issei¡¯s cheek and he was sent flying. ¡°AAAHH!!¡± He was screaming while rolling on the ground a few times. It was only after 5 rolls he could stabilize himself with his right hand and stand up on his feet. ¡°That hurt! What¡¯s that?!¡± Issei held his left cheek that was hit by my sandals earlier and complained. ¡°Hahahaha.¡± I laughed and tapped the sandals in my right hand against my left palm. ¡°This is called sandals. Actually, I prefer slippers rather than sandals. You know how dangerous those things are, right?¡± ¡°Slippers?! I see, so that¡¯s it! That¡¯s dangerous.¡± Issei seems to understand what I meant. He punched his left palm with his right hand and then rushed at me again. ¡°Don¡¯t think that weapon will be able to beat me for the second time!¡± [Boost!] I grinned when I saw him increase his speed. He was about twice faster compared to before, maybe it was because of his Boost. My posture was relaxed, and I purposely left a lot of openings in my defense. If he can¡¯t hit me in this state, then he was still too weak. ¡°Ora!!¡± Issei shouted and then sent a barrage of punches towards me. I dodged the punches by using my footwork. I stepped to the left, right, and then I went behind Issei. But, using his experience against me earlier, he instantly knew that I went behind him and he turned around while swinging his right arm. ¡°Oraaaa!¡± I caught his elbow with my left hand, nullified his attack, and kicked him on the stomach. ¡°This is how you kick.¡± ¡°Ugh!¡± Issei was sent back, rolling on the ground again after receiving my kick. This time, I ran adjacent to him and stop him before he crashed into a tree with my right hand. I caught his collar and threw him to the middle of the clearing. ¡°Uwoooo!¡± Issei was shouting when I threw him. His arms were moving around, trying to stabilize himself. ¡°Let me tell you something. I have two sandals!¡± I shouted at Issei and threw the sandal in my right hand with all my force. The sandal was flying like a beam, leaving behind an afterimage. In no time at all, the sandal hit Issei right on his face and he was dancing in the sky. ¡°Aaahh! That hurt!¡± His body was rotating a few times before he crashed on the ground, with his head hitting the ground first. As expected of the protagonist, he didn¡¯t lose consciousness even after all of that. He got up while holding his hand, which was now had a red mark that looked like a sandal. I crossed my arms and laughed at Issei. ¡°Hahaha, that¡¯s good. How about I call you Oppai Sandal now?¡± Issei was glaring at me furiously and then raised his left hand. ¡°Partner! Let¡¯s do this!¡± [Ou! That guy humiliating us. Let¡¯s show him our true strength!] [Boost! Explosion!] Issei pulled his left arm and a white circle with a red glow appeared right in front of his left hand. ¡°Dragon Shot!¡± He punched the circle and then a red beam was shot at me. Seeing the red beam make its way towards me while destroying the ground around it, I relaxedly pulled another sandal that I took off earlier and imbued Senjutsu aura around it. It was a bit hard, but I managed to coat the sandal with senjutsu aura nevertheless. When the beam was about to hit me, I slapped it with my sandal and changed its direction to the sky. ¡°Homerun!¡± I had fun playing around with him that I shouted unconsciously. Maybe I lacked entertainment and got a lot of stress dealing with a lot of things at once, but that didn¡¯t matter. The beam that I redirected went towards Hagoromo Gitsune. She frowned and pulled her fan from her bag, spreading it in front of her. The fan became big and shielded her from the beam. The beam hit the fan and it disappeared into thin air. The fan turned smaller right after the beam disappeared and Hagoromo Gitsune held it with his right hand, covering her mouth. ¡°You, why did you turn the beam to me?¡± I looked at her and laughed. ¡°Hahaha, just because? I believe that you can ¨C¡° Before I ended my sentence, I felt Issei on my left, sending a punch to my face. I stepped back instinctively and his punch went past my face. I could see his disbelief expression when he looked at me right in front of me. ¡° ¨C evade that!¡± I finished my sentence and swung my right hand that held the sandal down. Bam! The sandal hit Issei¡¯s head and he crashed to the ground, creating a crater because I hit him too hard. I looked down on him and found out that he finally lost consciousness. ¡°Fuu- that was surprising. To think he tried to attack me while I was talking with Hagoromo Gitsune.¡± I wiped my imaginary sweat off my forehead with my right arm and looked at the sandal in my right hand. The sandal in my hand was destroyed and only left the part that I held. I threw it away and looked towards Kiba in the distance. ¡°Oi! He lost his consciousness!¡± Kiba made his way towards me and then looked at Issei on the ground. ¡°H-hahaha, you went too hard on him. But, it seems he¡¯s fine. Let him lay down for now and I will ask Asia to heal him later.¡± ¡°Okay. I will look after him then, feel free to spar with Hagoromo Gitsune.¡± I said to Kiba as I picked Issei up. I carried him as if I was carrying a sack of rice under my arm and brought him near the tree behind Hagoromo Gitsune. When I passed her, I saw her smiling and said. ¡°Well then, it¡¯s my turn.¡± Seeing her smile, I looked at Kiba and closed my eyes. ¡®My condolences, Kiba. I will call Asia for you later.¡¯ RaizarP Author Here~ More than 55 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks for the New Squad Leader!! - Skygo Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 114 – End of Spar I sat in front of the tree after I put Issei on the ground. Gasper who was watching approached us as soon as Issei was on the ground. He had a worried expression as he clutched his hands on his chest. ¡°Don¡¯t worry, he will be okay.¡± I said to Gasper. Gasper looked at me and let out a gasp. ¡°Ah! N-no. I¡¯m glad that Issei-senpai is okay.¡± A vampire, huh. I never visited them. The key of Rizevim¡¯s plan would be the Sacred Gear, Sephiroth Graal. that was used by Valerie Tepes. This guy will prove to be useful to meet with Valerie. A clueless guy who didn¡¯t know his worth right now. If I trained him a little, he would feel indebted and would help me when I asked him. However, I need to get my hand on one of the other Longinus first. It was already on my list since I decided to destroy the Hero Faction. I looked at Hagoromo Gitsune in the distance. She was now exchanging swords with Kiba with a relaxed smile on her face. Even though she was strong, she didn¡¯t have any Magic right now. Then there was that guy, the wielder of Annihilation Maker who was not present when we attacked the Hero Faction. Dimension Lost was a good Sacred Gear, but that was useless for me. Fear and Telos Karma combination were able to fool a lot of my enemies, I don¡¯t need more defensive type Sacred Gear. ¡®So it¡¯s better to attack Hexennacht next. Fortunately, I had an acquaintance that knows a lot about Magician.¡¯ I thought as I remembered Reni, the girl that I met in Tobio¡¯s bar. If my memories served me correctly, Reni was a former member of Wizard of Oz. There was a girl called Walburga who was the wielder of Incinerate Anthem, a Sacred Gear that was on my list. That was a unique Sacred Gear, which will enhance my destructive power. I realized it again after I fought Cao Cao, I was only specialized in one on one fights if I didn¡¯t use Matoi. ¡®Incinerate Anthem would cover that weakness. Not only that, I can get my hand on it just by killing one Magician.¡¯ If the Sacred Gear wasn¡¯t compatible with me, I can always use Telos Karma. Cheat for the win! Hagoromo Gitsune and Kiba spar were a bit boring. They only used swords without any flashy move. Kiba was smiling when he exchanged blows with Hagoromo Gitsune. That girl, she was just playing around with Kiba, didn¡¯t she? In the distance, I can feel three different energies approached us. Because I was familiar with the energies, I didn¡¯t bother to tell anyone about it. On my side, I saw Gasper sit beside Issei and watched Kiba and Hagoromo Gitsune¡¯s spar. ¡°Amazing.¡± He said as he looked at them with glistering eyes. ¡°Hahaha, that¡¯s still nothing.¡± I laughed and I changed my sitting position. I crossed my legs, put my left elbow on top of my thighs, and rested my head on my hand. Gasper looked at me with a confused gaze and I smiled. ¡°Hagoromo Gitsune is playing around with Kiba. In terms of swordsmanship, Kiba has experience of wielding swords for at least 7 years, right?¡± ¡°I-I don¡¯t know.¡± Answered Gasper as he looked flustered. ¡°Don¡¯t get flustered, if you are a man, look at me straight in my eyes!¡± I raised my voice a little and put on a serious face. ¡®Getting flustered over something so simple, how can he survive in this world?¡¯ ¡°Y-Yes!¡± Gasper straightened his sitting position and looked at me straight in my eyes. ¡°Good, you see. Even though Kiba mainly used Swordsmanship, the reason why he can¡¯t land a hit on Hagoromo Gitsune is because of the difference in their experience. Hagoromo Gitsune had lived more than 9 lives, and she got stronger in each life.¡± I raised my right index finger as I said that. Gasper nodded his head, indicating that he understood what I said. Hagoromo Gitsune herself said that she got stronger in each reincarnation. I don¡¯t know if the girl who transported her to this world gave her a bonus or not, but I was certain that Hagoromo Gitsune was stronger than herself in Nurarihyon no Mago. It was like, her physical strength was enhanced by the Mana in this world. ¡°I see! I now understand it. You are amazing!¡± Gasper exclaimed as he looked at me with his fists pumped in front of his chest. ¡°Hahaha, I am.¡± ¡°Can I call you Riku-senpai?! I¡­ I wanted to be a man, a strong man like Issei-senpai and you!¡± ¡°Sure, I don¡¯t mind. But, to be a strong man, you need to train hard. At least 100 push up, 100 sit up, 100 squads, and run 10 KM everyday.¡± I gave Gasper a simple trick to build up a muscle. That was the minimum requirement for training, at least for a human. Gasper¡¯s body was weak, he hardly had any stamina. So that training menu would be enough for now. ¡°Yes! I will do it with Issei-senpai to be as strong as you!¡± I just smiled at Gasper and looked at Hagoromo Gitsune and Kiba again. Their spar had almost done. Right now, Hagoromo Gitsune pushed Kiba to the corner. Kiba blocked and deflected Hagoromo Gitsune¡¯s slashes desperately. Finally, his sword snapped and Hagoromo Gitsune¡¯s sword touched his neck. Kiba raised both of his hands with a wry smile on his face and said. ¡°I surrender.¡± Hagoromo Gitsune pulled back her sword and it disappeared when she put it inside her bag. I was curious, was her bag connected to any space in her tail? And, she defeated Kiba in pure swordsmanship while holding her sword with one hand, huh. Kiba then asked some pointers from Hagoromo Gitsune, to which she unexpectedly answered. I kind of wanted to spar with her now. But it was not the right time. I felt the three energies earlier had arrived. I looked in the direction where I felt the energy and saw three girls appear from between the trees. Rias, Akeno, and Asia appeared in the clearing and looked around. When Asia saw Issei laying beside me, she quietly made her way towards him. Well well, they didn¡¯t scream or anything. Rias and Akeno saw me and they nodded their head silently before making their way to Kiba. When Asia reached Issei, her hands began to let out a green glow. Issei¡¯s body also glowed and I watched his bruises heal at a fast speed. ¡°So that¡¯s the Twilight Healing. That¡¯s some neat Sacred Gear, to be able to heal the wound at a fast speed.¡± I said as I looked at the ring in Asia¡¯s finger with a grin on my face. Asia looked at me and said. ¡°I-it¡¯s not that great. I cannot heal any grave wound yet, s-so I still need some training.¡± ¡°I see. Well then, because he¡¯s now in a good hand, I need to leave.¡± I stood up and then made my way to Hagoromo Gitsune. She was now talking with Rias and Akeno. So Rias really apologized to her, now that was good. ¡°Oi, we are leaving.¡± I shouted at Hagoromo Gitsune and she nodded her head. Rias and Akeno looked at me and then turned at Hagoromo Gitsune again to say something before they made their way towards Issei with Kiba. When they passed us, Akeno gave me a small smile without saying anything. Somehow¡­ ¡°They avoided me? What are you talking about earlier?¡± I asked Hagoromo Gitsune. Hagoromo Gitsune smiled at me and said. ¡°They apologized to me and asked me how to apologize to you. Funny, I don¡¯t think you need apologies.¡± I crossed my arms and glanced at Rias and the other before shrugging my shoulders. ¡°Nah, I, myself, never mind something like that. Well, shall we go?¡± ¡°Where?¡± Asked Hagoromo Gitsune. ¡°We are just resting for a while.¡± ¡°Kyoto, you said you wanted to talk with Yasaka, right? She must be worried about us, so I wanted to give her peace of mind by coming back faster.¡± ¡°If that¡¯s the case, then let¡¯s go back. I miss my bed.¡± I chuckled at Hagoromo Gitsune and we walked back to the Gremory Mansion. RaizarP Author Here~ More than 55 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 115 – Intruder When we reached the mansion, I saw Sirzechs was talking with Tsuchigumo. ¡°Hahaha, is that so. I would like to spare my time, but I am too busy right now.¡± I can hear Sirzechs speak to Tsuchigumo. From that alone, I knew that Tsuchigumo had asked Sirzechs for a spar. But because Sirzechs seemed to try to dodge that offer, I raised my right hand and shouted. ¡°Yo, we are back.¡± Both of them turned to me at the same time. ¡°Welcome back. How is it, I heard you had a spar with Rias¡¯s pawn, Issei-kun?¡± We stopped beside Tsuchigumo and I looked at Sirzechs while crossing my arms. ¡°To be honest, his strength as Sekiryuutei is disappointing. Hakuryuukou is stronger than him by a lot.¡± ¡°I see. But Issei-kun was only a normal human a few months ago. If compared to Hakuryuukou which was introduced to Supernatural at a young age, it¡¯s normal if their strength is not comparable at all.¡± That¡¯s true. Even so¡­ ¡°If you put it like that, aren¡¯t you spoil your sister too much? With her power of destruction, she could have defeated Riser with no problem if you trained her. I know your desire for peace, but being strong is better rather than being weak.¡± Sirzechs¡¯s smile turned sad as he shrugged his shoulder. ¡°Maybe. I was foolish back then.¡± ¡°Hah, that¡¯s not an excuse. I think you better train her from now on. Khaos Brigade will spare no one, even if their enemy is your sister.¡± ¡°Yeah, thanks for the advice. What¡¯s your plan for now?¡± I looked at Hagoromo Gitsune for a second. She was looking back at me and tilted her head a little before I turned back at Sirzechs. ¡°I will go back to Kyoto and rest. I had my fill of fight, so I want to spend some of my precious time of peace with my loved one.¡± ¡°I see. I will work on my end to push the peace of the three factions. Maybe there will be a conference in the future, and I think that the leader of each faction will try to invite you.¡± ¡°I am expecting that much.¡± I answered him with a grin. ¡°But, I won¡¯t allow the conference to be held in Japan. Hold it in that city, or at least in Rome. That way, I won¡¯t get any problem.¡± Sirzechs was not reacting, but I can see a hint of disappointment in his eyes. Hah, I won¡¯t let Japan be the center of the fight. If there will be a fight with Khaos Brigade in the future, just do it outside Japan¡¯s region. ¡°I will remember that.¡± Answered Sirzechs. ¡°Well then, I will go back to Earth. Also, I think you better ask a dragon to train that Issei. If possible, make him decrease his perverted behavior.¡± I made a magic circle to teleport under our feet as I said that to Sirzechs. ¡°It¡¯s not my responsibility. But I will tell Rias about it.¡± ¡°Very well. I just give you a suggestion, it¡¯s not like I can interfere with your problem.¡± Sirzechs smiled at my words and then he raised his right hand. ¡°I guess this is goodbye for now. I will contact you if I need you again.¡± ¡°I will not wait for that.¡± I smirked at him and teleported away from the underworld with Hagoromo Gitsune and Tsuchigumo. We arrived at Kyoto, and it was now nighttime. The place that I teleported to was in front of Nijo Castle, the castle where Tsuchigumo lived all this time. ¡°That was fun. Nura, I will wait for the spar with that silver-haired boy. Tell him to pick me in this place.¡± Tsuchigumo said and walked inside the Nijo Castle without waiting for my reply. I sighed and then looked at the night sky. Today was a full moon, it made me want to drink Sake under a Sakura Tree. ¡®It would be nice.¡¯ When I was thinking about that, the sleeves of my Kimono was tugged by Hagoromo Gitsune. I looked at her with curiosity and asked. ¡°What?¡± ¡°Oi, Riku. Let¡¯s go to Kyubi¡¯s house. I wanted to have a little nice chat with her. Somehow, when I was in Kyoto, I feel a little bit stronger than usual.¡± She didn¡¯t call me by my name too often, and it surprised me a little bit. I then noticed what she said. ¡°You got stronger when in Kyoto?¡± If that was true, then there was only one possibility. The Leyline. I had my suspicion about it because I knew that Yasaka was tied to the Leyline in Kyoto. She was stronger in Kyoto, and I remembered what my old man said a long time ago when he told me about Yasaka. Kyubi had a strong tie with Leyline. ¡°For some reason, yes. But it seems like you know the reason for it. I felt like this place amplified my power.¡± Hagoromo Gitsune narrowed her eyes and crossed her arms. She then put her right hand on her chin and leaned her face closer to mine. ¡°I see, maybe this is the reason why those trashes targeted me? No, they targeted something behind this strange feeling, huh.¡± I nodded my head at Hagoromo Gitsune. There was no reason for me to hide it. ¡°Right. To think that you would be affected by the Leyline, I am honestly surprised.¡± ¡°Leyline, as in the spiritual veins that run under the earth of Kyoto?¡± ¡°Yeah, you know about it?¡± Hagoromo Gitsune pulled her face away and put on a serious face. ¡°Of course. My son, or rather, Seimei had spells that need the Spiritual Veins to activate. I see, so that¡¯s the reason. If it¡¯s like that, then I can understand it. Spiritual vein, huh.¡± Hagoromo Gitsune mumbled as she covered her mouth with her hand. I narrowed my eyes at her and said. ¡°Don¡¯t think about it.¡± She got surprised and looked at me with her eyes widened. The hand that covered her mouth was also hanging in the air, so I can see her mouth widen in surprise too. ¡°Don¡¯t ever think of reviving that guy again. He¡¯s not your son, not after he tried to kill you. I won¡¯t let you endanger yourself.¡± I knew the reason why she got surprised after she noticed the existence of Leylines, or Spiritual Vein as she called it. From her look, she still held some hope to revive him again. She gritted her teeth and then looked at me with a kind smile. ¡°Yeah, I was foolish. Thanks for stopping me.¡± Her smile right now was the smile that I knew from the Nurarihyon no Mago series. It was the smile of Yamabuki Otome, a kind woman who loved the second head. I got a big smile on my face, my teeth were visible, and I closed my eyes. ¡°Sure.¡± ¡®Ah, this is bad.¡¯ I noticed it as soon as I opened my eyes. My eyes narrowed in the direction of Yasaka¡¯s shrine. My aura exploded from my body and surprised Hagoromo Gitsune. ¡°What¡¯s wrong?¡± My smile earlier turned into a frown and I called Nenekirimaru to my hand. ¡°There is a rat.¡± Kyoto was now surrounded by my Fear, it was the first time I had gotten this angry. I was angry at myself. My negligence caused this. I never expected that they will enter Kyoto at this time. ¡°A big rat that was not present in our extermination. And this energy¡­ he is with a dragon. Damn bastard!¡± RaizarP Author Here~ More than 55 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks for the New Executive! -Rex J Jensen Big Thanks for the Squad Leader! - Ryuu Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 116 – Attack on Kyoto The reason why I spread my aura to surround Kyoto was simple. The rat¡¯s real owner had yet to enter Kyoto. They were longing around Kyoto¡¯s border. Their location was right in the direction of Yasaka¡¯s shrine from my place, that was why I thought that the rat¡¯s owner had entered Kyoto. The rat was something created by a Sacred Gear, and it was destroyed by my pressure when it was about to enter Yasaka¡¯s shrine. The energy that I felt from the rat was similar to that of Longinus Sacred Gear¡¯s energy. ¡°This is troublesome, Annihilation Maker, on top of that, a dragon, huh. I have a request, Hagoromo Gitsune.¡± I said to Hagoromo Gitsune without looking at her. ¡°What is that? You never ask me anything until now.¡± I didn¡¯t need to look at her to know that she was smiling now. Getting angry was not my style. I let out a sigh to calm myself and smiled. My blade was resting on my shoulder and I looked at Hagoromo Gitsune. ¡°Can you get Tsura for me, I will teleport you to Kanto first, so get Tsura to Kyoto.¡± ¡°So you wanted me to be your messenger. Fine, I don¡¯t mind it. But, I will be back with them.¡± ¡°I don¡¯t mind, actually, I wanted you to help me in this. The enemy, no, the enemy¡¯s Sacred Gear this time is troublesome. It can create an army. Well, maybe I don''t need your help, but it''s better safe than sorry.¡± ¡°Hoo, that¡¯s interesting. Will you ask Tsuchigumo to help too?¡± As Hagoromo Gitsune said that, I felt Tsuchigumo¡¯s energy was moving towards the top of Nijo Castle. Considering his sense, he would be able to feel the energy that I spread around Kyoto. I looked at Nijo Castle¡¯s roof and saw Tsuchigumo looking around with his hand above his eyes. ¡°I don¡¯t think I need to tell him that.¡± Hagoromo Gitsune followed my gaze and looked at the top of Nijo Castle. ¡°Yeah, I see that. Teleport me right now, I will bring her in no time.¡± ¡°Sure, I am counting on you.¡± Black Magic circle appeared under Hagoromo Gitsune¡¯s feet and I teleported her back to Kanto. With no one beside me, I then shouted at Tsuchigumo. ¡°Oi! I know you wanted to fight, but at least don¡¯t fight near Yasaka! Their target is Yasaka, so don¡¯t let them go near her.¡± Tsuchigumo seemed to hear me, he turned his gaze at me and shouted back. ¡°Hah! So that means I can do what I want as long as it¡¯s not near that Kyubi woman, right?!¡± Thankfully he was not an idiot. I nodded my head. ¡°Sure! The enemy had an army, it was created by a Longinus called Annihilation Maker! The wielder is a boy with gray hair! If you can get him, then feel free to do whatever you want to! There is also a dragon near that boy, you can beat him if you can.¡± I grinned at Tsuchigumo when I said the last part. I intentionally provoked him to beat the dragon because it was too troublesome for me. The wielder of Annihilation Maker will prove to be useful, I will try to get him to join me if I can ¡°Oh, a dragon? Fine, I will dib on that fucking dragon! I am not interested in a boy, you can take him!¡± Tsuchigumo then moved away from the Nijo Castle¡¯s roof, destroying the roof as he jumped in the direction of the enemy. He then landed on the roof of a building near Nijo Castle and jumped again, destroying the part that he kicked. He did that a few times until he was gone from my sight. Now my priority was Yasaka. I used Meikyo Shisui and ran toward Yasaka¡¯s castle. If the enemy got a hold of Yasaka, that will be the worst outcome. Georg was now with Vali, but there certainly was still a lot of Magician that could force Yasaka to turn into giant Kyubi. Her strength as a giant Kyubi rivaled Dragon Kings. If I remembered correctly, it took Vritra and another Dragon King called Yu-Long that arrive in the middle of the fight with the old monkey, Sun Wukong. Right now, my old man had certainly met with Sun Wukong already. It would be good if they went and destroy some Khaos Brigade¡¯s small faction or cause some mischief in their base. The peace conference between the 3 Factions had yet to be held. Right now, asking for help from Fallen Angels or the Church was not an option. Because¡­ ¡®It was East Youkai Faction that agreed on the alliance. West Faction that was led by Yasaka have yet to meet them.¡¯ I had no way to reach Takamagahara where Amaterasu lived, so I can¡¯t ask for help from them too. If only Yasaka would go to the Takamagahara herself and let me go wild on Kyoto, that would be the best. Even so, asking Devil was the most ridiculous thing. A lot of youkai hate them because of the Nekomata Incident. ¡°For now, let¡¯s meet Yasaka first. Really¡­ protecting someone is not my forte.¡± I muttered as I ran at my full speed. The reason why I asked Hagoromo Gitsune to get Tsura was simple. Tsura was suited to protecting someone with her ability, so I can leave her with Yasaka while I try to defeat the enemy. I must not move carelessly. One wrong step will lead to something that will make me regret it, like when I raided the Hero Faction for the first time. Yasaka¡¯s shrine was now visible to me, and the situation had gone out of control. There were at least 50 youkai, all of them were Tengu with black wings that stood around Yasaka¡¯s shrine. They had a long nose and red skin, the normal Tengu youkai. I canceled Meikyo Shisui and made myself visible to them. When they saw me, they pointed their index finger. One of them, an old Tengu with long white hair, walked towards me. ¡°Nura Riku, why did make a barrier that covered the Kyoto? I hope there is an explanation about this.¡± He asked in a serious tone. I nodded my head at him. ¡°There is an intruder in Kyoto. I need to see Yasaka right now.¡± His expression turned serious and he nodded his head before turning around. ¡°Make ways!¡± He shouted and some of the youkai that guarded the entrance moved away to make a way for us. ¡°Follow me, I will take you to Yasaka-hime.¡± I followed him obediently and he guided me inside the shrine. He took me to the meeting place and asked me to enter. Without waiting any further, I opened the door and saw Yasaka and Kunou sitting inside the room. ¡°Riku-han, is the situation that serious?¡± ¡°Yeah, a Longinus wielder and a Dragon. Right now Tsuchigumo is fighting them outside of Kyoto. I hope he can hold on until I assist him.¡± ¡°I see. As expected, I am their target, right?¡± Asked Yasaka. ¡°Unfortunately, that¡¯s the case. Tsura will arrive in a minute, I hope you will stay with her.¡± I turned around after I placed a barrier around the room. Yasaka stood up hastily and shouted. ¡°Be careful!¡± I looked over my shoulder and smiled. ¡°Don¡¯t worry, I am strong.¡± Because I had confirmed their safety, I didn¡¯t need to hold back any longer. Tsura will arrive and protect them, and I trust her. ¡°I hope Tsuchigumo left me with something.¡± RaizarP Author Here~ More than 55 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks for the New Executive! -Rex J Jensen Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 117 – Leonardo When I was running, I spread my Senjutsu to feel where Tsuchigumo was. He went out of my barrier so I can¡¯t feel him anymore. My Senjutsu¡¯s range was now could cover more than a city, somehow it increased after I went to the Underworld. It was around two times bigger compared to what I can create before. Maybe it was because I can filter the resentment in the air better than before. Enough of that, I found Tsuchigumo inside a new barrier right beside my barrier. He was trapped inside with the dragon, while the Annihilation Make wielder was right outside of the barrier, surrounded by four people with energies similar to Reni. ¡®Magician, what are they doing here? Wait, could it be?¡¯ I realized something, it was one of Rizevim¡¯s tricks. It was something that hurt someone, especially the target of the trick. Forced Balance Breaker. Did they plan to force the wielder of the Longinus to achieve the Balance Breaker? That was bad. At least a thousand of those monsters that had a special immune against something would be born. If they made the monsters to be immune to Senjutsu and Youjutsu, Youkai will not be able to do anything! ¡®I must hurry.¡¯ I used Meikyo Shisui and Touki to enhance my physical abilities. I ran at my fast speed, and then when I was about to exit my barrier, I felt another 4 people teleport near the Annihilation Maker wielder. From their energies, they were humans, maybe the remnants of the Hero Faction? Without thinking about anything else, I jumped out of my barrier and then I saw four people wearing a robe surrounding a young boy with silver hair. They were surrounded by a lot of Magic Circles, some of them were a defensive type while some of them were unknown to me. The location of their ritual was on top of a bridge, and I landed on one side of the bridge after dispelling Meikyo Shisui. In front of me, the other four people that just teleported to this place were looking at me with narrowed eyes. Three of them were girls with brown hair, while one of them was a boy with sunglasses. ¡°You, I will take revenge for Cao Cao!¡± The boy pointed his index finger at me while shouting. I had no time for these small fries. Because I used most of my Fear to enhance the barrier that surrounded Kyoto, I can only use a small part that left with me. The barrier that I made this time was the result of me imitating my old man¡¯s barrier, it was strong and could only be destroyed by those who mastered Fear. It took me a lot only to maintain it, which was surprising because my old man maintained the barrier on our mansion 24/7. That was why I shrank the barrier behind me. I made it to only cover Yasaka¡¯s shrine and hid it with Meikyo Shisui. My mastery with Fear had increased again, now I can do something like hiding a place with a barrier that was amplified with my Fear. After I made sure the barrier was covering Yasaka¡¯s shrine, I glared at the remnant of the Hero Faction in front of me. ¡°I have no interest in small fry.¡± My body was surrounded with my Fear as I said that and I disappeared from their sight. I don¡¯t care if they were girls or kids or old men, if they stood in my way, I will cut them. Four of them didn¡¯t realize it though, that I moved behind them and already beheaded them with Nenekirimaru. Because my cut was clean, their brain had yet to process that their head had been cut. To make them realize it, I appeared behind them and said. ¡°Waste of time.¡± As if they had trained their reaction, they turned towards me. At that moment, their heads slide off their neck before the boy spoke for the last time. ¡°Eh?¡± Without looking back at them, I walked towards the Magicians and the boy. Leonardo was the youngest Longinus User. Maybe he was only 13 or 14 years old, but the conflict had reached out to him and wanted to use him. The Magician made the layered barrier around them, their robes were fluttering because of the spell inside the barrier. The barrier around them were 5 layer barriers, and the four of them didn¡¯t even bother to look at me. They had underestimated me too much. A smile crept into my face as I gathered Senjutsu aura and Fear into Nenekirimaru¡¯s blade. I had used Touki, but because it would be overkill, I dispersed the aura around my body. Leonardo was kneeling in the middle of a magic circle that was surrounded by Magicians on four sides. ¡°It seems you didn¡¯t even investigate about me, or you lot had underestimated me by a lot.¡± I spoke to the magicians inside the barrier, and one of them responded. ¡°No, we are not. You will not be able to break the barrier around us no matter what.¡± All of the magicians were wearing robes with hoods above their faces. I couldn¡¯t see their eyes, but at least I can see the smirk of the magician that answered me. It was either they were confident, or they didn¡¯t know. ¡°Ignorance is bliss.¡± I said to them and swung Nenekirimaru with my right hand. My blade met with the barrier, shattered it in an instant, and created a glass-breaking sound. The Magicians looked surprised because I destroyed their barrier with just one swing, but their surprise didn¡¯t last long. There was still a layer of Defensive Magic Circle around them, so they were smiling in relief. But well, I guess I can give them hope for a second. I called Nenekirimaru¡¯s sheath and sheathed Nenekirimaru. The sheath was strapped into my waist and I lowered my stance. ¡°Tsuki Giri.¡± I spoke in a low voice and pulled my sword at a fast speed, using a move called Iai. It made a flying slash and destroyed the Magic Circle that surrounded them with almost no resistance. The flying slash then move at a fast speed and beheaded the four magicians at the same time, canceling their rituals. Their body collapsed to the ground as blood was spurted out from their neck. The boy, Leonardo, fainted in the middle of the disappearing magic circle. I made my way to the boy and carried him over my shoulder. Need to treat him carefully, so he will agree to join me. RaizarP Author Here~ More than 55 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks for the New Executive! -Rex J Jensen Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 118 – New Pet As I killed the magicians, the barrier that surrounded Tsuchigumo with the dragon was dispelled. I looked at Tsuchigumo and saw him grappling with a blue dragon that looked like a western dragon. From his energy, it was a young dragon, maybe it was tamed by the magicians. However, it was still a dragon. I was a bit worried about Tsuchigumo. Even though he was not my subordinate, he was like a friend who had fun with me when we fought together. But, what I saw was not what I had expected. The dragon was small, it was only around 3 to 4 meters in size. ¡°That guy, he chokes the dragon?¡± Right, Tsuchigumo was on top of the dragon and choked the Dragon with his six arms. Tsuchigumo was big, their size matched with each other. It looked like a wrestle instead of a fight. I did call Tsura because I was worried about Yasaka¡¯s safety, but it looked like she will has nothing to do. Because the Magician¡¯s barrier had broken down, I made a new barrier around Tsuchigumo to separate them from the real world so that the normal civilians won¡¯t be dragged into their fight. ¡°Hahahaha, is this the strength of the so-called dragon? You are too weak!¡± Tsuchigumo jumped from the dragon¡¯s back lifted the dragon by its neck. He jumped around 10 meters high, and then he slammed the dragon to the ground on its back. ¡°GRAAAAAAAA!!¡± The dragon roared in pain, but it quickly used its front claw to attack Tsuchigumo¡¯s arm. The claw hit Tsuchigumo¡¯s left arm, leaving a deep wound. However, instead of shouting in pain, Tsuchigumo¡¯s smile turned ferocious. ¡°Gahaha, fight me seriously, you overgrown lizard!¡± Tsuchigumo released four of his hands from the dragon¡¯s neck and sent a barrage of punches on the dragon¡¯s stomach. ¡°Grrrr!!¡± The dragon let out a grumble of pain. It flinging around its claws and wings in an attempt to break free from Tsuchigumo¡¯s grip. But it cannot free itself from Tsuchigumo, his grip was too strong. ¡°Hmm¡­¡± Tsuchigumo noticed that the dragon was in pain and released his grip. He stood up and looked down at the dragon while crossing his arms. ¡°Hmm, boring. Even that six-armed guy is more interesting than you.¡± The dragon didn¡¯t even move, it had lost its strength because of its injuries. It let out a whimper and then it closed its eyes. Even though the dragon was not that strong, it was still a dragon. It had yet to die, so it had strong tenacity too. ¡°You leave me with no choice, die.¡± Tsuchigumo pulled his arm and was about to send a punch to the dragon¡¯s head. But, before his punch connected with the dragon¡¯s head, I called out to him. ¡°Oi, stop!¡± His fist stopped in an instant and he looked at me. ¡°What?¡± He asked me with an angry tone. Did he get angry because I stopped him from killing the dragon? I grinned at him and pointed my index finger to the dragon. ¡°You see, I am interested in that dragon. Maybe he will be a good pet.¡± Tsuchigumo¡¯s eyes narrowed as he leaned his head closer to me. ¡°Are you serious?¡± He was indeed scary with his face that looked like a Hanya mask and his red hair. But, I didn¡¯t lose my composure and closed my right eye. ¡°A dragon could grow stronger if it is trained correctly. I will also bind him with Youjutsu so he won¡¯t betray me.¡± Tsuchigumo¡¯s eyes turned normal as he pulled his face away from me. He then stroked his chin and looked up to the sky. ¡°Grow stronger. Fine, I will not kill it. However, I will be the one who looks after him. I will make him stronger.¡± It looked like his curiosity had gotten better than him to make him change his mind like that. I shrugged my shoulder at Tsuchigumo and said. ¡°Well, I can¡¯t say no. You are the one who defeated that dragon after all.¡± ¡°Kukukuku, this will be interesting. HAHAHAHAHA.¡± Tsuchigumo laughed out loud as he picked up the dragon on the ground and carried it over his shoulder. A giant who carried a dragon, this was a surreal sight. ¡°Well then, I need to go back. You know the way to the Nijo Castle, right? Don¡¯t forget to erase your presence.¡± ¡°Don¡¯t worry about it, I know the rules.¡± After nodding my head to Tsuchigumo, I created a teleportation circle under my feed and teleported to Yasaka¡¯s shrine. I had felt Tsura and Hagoromo Gitsune inside the meeting room where I met Yasaka earlier. I had teleported right outside of the room, so I can hear their conversation inside. ¡°Oh! So you are the ruler of Kyoto Youkai in your world? That¡¯s impressive.¡± I can hear Yasaka praising someone inside the room. From her sentence, I knew that she praised Hagoromo Gitsune. There was something that I didn¡¯t understand. How did the youkai believe me or Hagoromo Gitsune when I told them that Hagoromo Gitsune originated from another world? ¡°Unfortunately, a Yakuza stormed inside my castle and killed me in my eighth reincarnation, soiling my plan to give birth to my son at that time.¡± ¡°That¡¯s unfortunate. That Yakuza really know no manner, who is that person?¡± ¡®Yah, she¡¯s talking about Nurarihyon, alright.¡¯ Because the conversation was interesting, I used Meikyo Shisui to surround myself and Leonardo who was on my shoulder, and entered the room quietly. The sound of me opening the door had disappeared and now I was inside the room. Hagoromo Gitsune and Yasaka were looking at each other with a smile on their face. A contrast of blonde and black hair really stood out, but someone could guess that both of them were Kyubi because right now their tails were dancing behind them. Tsura sat on the right side of Hagoromo Gitsune and Kunou sat across from Tsura. ¡°His name is Nurarihyon, well, Nurarihyon from my world. I don¡¯t want to talk about the details, but in the end, he killed me on top of my castle with the help of an Exorcist named KeikainHidemoto, that wretched clown .¡± ¡°Exorcist, a human?¡± Asked Yasaka. When Yasaka said that, I put Leonardo on the floor behind Tsura and sat beside Yasaka while canceling my technique. ¡°That¡¯s correct. An exorcist, from Hagoromo Gitsune¡¯s description, they are similar to someone from Five Principal Clan.¡± ¡°Ah!¡± Yasaka was surprised with me appearing beside her all of a sudden and let out a yell. ¡°Riku-sama, welcome back.¡± Maybe Tsura had gotten used to it, but she just greeted me normally. ¡°Oh, Tsura! There is a boy behind you, can you heal him?¡± Tsura looked back and saw the fainted Leonardo before turning to me again. ¡°If I may ask, who is this boy, Riku-sama? You didn¡¯t kidnap him, right?¡± Tsura narrowed her eyes dangerously as a cold aura came out from her body. ¡°Hahaha, not quite.¡± ¡®Technically I did kidnap him from Khaos Brigade though.¡¯ ¡°Let¡¯s just say, that he¡¯s an aspiring member of my Hyakki Yakkou.¡± The cold aura around Tsura dissipated and she closed her eyes as she bowed her head. ¡°Alright, I will look after him. Please excuse me, Riku-sama, Yasaka-sama.¡± Yasaka nodded her head and smiled. ¡°Please don¡¯t mind me, healing that boy come first.¡± ¡°Ou, I am counting on you, Tsura.¡± Tsura carried Leonardo and then exited the room before closing the door behind her. I moved beside Hagoromo Gitsune. With my head above my knee, I looked at Yasaka. ¡°Well then, Yasaka-hime. There are a few things that I need to talk about, I will let you choose. Bad news, or Good news first, you can pick one.¡± Yasaka looked at me and gulped her saliva because of nervousness. ¡°Bad news first, please.¡± RaizarP Author Here~ More than 55 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks for the New Executive! - Ryuu Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 119 – A Promise ¡°Okay then. Khaos Brigade is stronger than I thought, with my strength right now, I will have a problem defeating them by myself or even with the help of my Hyakki Yakkou.¡± Yasaka¡¯s expression turned grim. She was told that one of the Khaos Brigade¡¯s objections was her. If I had not enough strength to fend them off myself, she was in danger. But, she also noticed something from my sentence. I had no way of defeating them by myself even with the help of my Hyakki Yakkou. In Khaos Brigade¡¯s rank, there was someone with ties with gods, that old Rizevim. His ambitions were boundless, he even planned to use Ophis. Spies existed in the rank of gods and even the small factions. I bet they also planted spies amongst the Youkai. For now, the ones that I could trust amongst the youkai were none other than my Hyakki Yakkou that came from another world, my old man and his trusted aide, then Yasaka and Kunou. I don¡¯t know how trustworthy Yasaka¡¯s subordinates, especially the one who held political power. My old man must have realized that that was why he took Setsuna with him and went to visit Sun Wukong. ¡°Riku-han, are you implying that we need help from the other factions?¡± I nodded my head seriously. Although I had defeated Cao Cao, one of the charismatic leaders that lead the Humans in the Khaos Brigade, the majority of their members came from the Old Satan Faction and Nilrem, the Magicians. There was also Qlippoth which had a goal to invade the other worlds. That was fucked up goal, and maybe that was one of the reasons why most of the people that I met just accept Hagoromo Gitsune when she said that she came from another world. Getting Ophis on my side was important, but should I? Ophis''s help would be appreciated while Mature Ophis will be a tremendous help. I kind of wanted to meet her if possible. I can also stop Lilith¡¯s birth by getting Ophis away from Rizevim. ¡°Please tell Amaterasu about this. Khaos Brigade is not the concern of Youkai only, there is a chance that they had planted a spy in Takamagahara too. So, please make sure to tell Amaterasu directly.¡± Yasaka nodded her head seriously. ¡°I will tell Amaterasu-sama about it. Spy, huh. It seems we had underestimated the situation too much.¡± I certainly wasn¡¯t underestimated the situation. I knew the severity of it, that was why I killed Cao Cao first. With his death, I must move to the Vatican after this and ask Gabriel about the next True Longinus wielder. We mustn¡¯t let Khaos Brigade hold the True Longinus, that will be dangerous. ¡°Then Riku-han, what¡¯s the good news.¡± Yasaka¡¯s tone held a hint of expectation. The good news was always a mood changer. ¡°My good news will gain some displeasure from some youkai. I will tell you about it, but it would be preferable if Amaterasu is the one who spread this news. Maybe even you will get displeased with the good news.¡± Although it was strange, I still don¡¯t know Yasaka¡¯s feelings about the Nekomata Massacre. In the series, Yasaka was fine and acted normally around the devil when Issei¡¯s group visited Kyoto. But, that was after the peace conference. Khaos Brigade¡¯s threat had unified a lot of factions, including Gods from various mythology. ¡°I see, alright. I will not hold too much expectation about this but do tell me about it. As long as it can protect our family, I will do whatever it takes.¡± Kunou looked at Yasaka who put on a serious expression with a gaze full of respect and worry. ¡°Mother¡­¡± She muttered in a low voice, but Yasaka noticed it and petted her head. ¡°Don¡¯t worry, Kunou. I won¡¯t do anything reckless.¡± Maybe because it was her motherly instinct, Yasaka noticed Kunou¡¯s worry. ¡°Un!¡± Kunou nodded her head and smiled at Yasaka. ¡°So that¡¯s a relationship of mother and her daughter¡­¡± Hagoromo Gitsune muttered beside me and looked at Yasaka with a warm smile. Ah, that¡¯s right. Yamabuki Otome, the body that Hagoromo Gitsune had right now never had any children although she wanted it. It was the reason why she left Rihan in the first place while leaving a poem. I remembered the poem because it was a beautiful piece from Nurarihyon no Mago. Unconsciously, my mouth moved by itself as I turned to look at Yasaka who was smiling at Kunou. ¡°Flowers bloom sevenfold and eightfold, but the kerria laments, for not a single fruit does it bear.¡± Yasaka and Kunou seemed to hear me reciting a poem. They turned to me and Yasaka said. ¡°That¡¯s a wonderful Haiku, Riku-han.¡± After she said that, Yasaka turned to Hagoromo Gitsune. ¡°What¡¯s wrong? Why are you crying, Hagoromo-han?¡± Yasaka¡¯s voice was full of concern. I turned to look at Hagoromo Gitsune instantly and saw that her face had tears trailing down from her eyes. ¡°Eh?¡± I was surprised that I let out an idiotic sound. Hagoromo Gitsune¡¯s hand moved and touched the tears on her face. ¡°Strange, why did tears come out from my eyes unwillingly?¡± From her tone, I noticed that she was confused. She wiped the rest of the tears with the sleeves of her clothes. After she wiped everything, I looked at her seriously and asked. ¡°Is it because of that poem?¡± ¡°Maybe, I remembered that poem, and felt sad.¡± ¡°Somehow, sorry.¡± I apologized and bowed my head a little. That was clearly my fault. I made her cry by reciting a poem that she left. A poem that was able that Rihan recited to Hagoromo Gitsune and the same poem that Yamabuki Otome left for Rihan. That poem ended Yamabuki Otome¡¯s relationship, as well as gives Hagoromo Gitsune¡¯s memories back, in other words, the start of Hagoromo Gitsune¡¯s ninth reincarnation. The day Rihan recited the poem to Hagoromo Gitsune was the day she killed him with her own hand. ¡°Don¡¯t be. Although I felt sad, somehow I¡¯m happy that I can hear that poem from the same voice as that man. I like it.¡± Hagoromo Gitsune smiled warmly with her hand on her cheek. I was not as dense as an Isekai protagonist, so I knew. ¡®Isn¡¯t that basically a love confession? Damn it, girl.¡¯ ¡°Umm, Riku-han. I¡¯m sorry to interrupt, but you haven¡¯t told us the good news yet.¡± I turned at Yasaka who interrupted with a disappointed gaze. But, she only said that out of concern. ¡°You¡¯re right. The good news, I had signed an alliance treaty with the Church and Heaven. It was me and my Hyakki Yakkou that signed the alliance treaty, you had no obligation to follow the clause. Azazel will also help in any way he can if we fought the Khaos Brigade. Lastly, Sirzechs promised me to help too.¡± As I said the last part of the good news, Yasaka¡¯s mouth opened wide. She covered it with her hands and said. ¡°Really? Devil, so that¡¯s the reason why you said that the good news will bring some displeasure. But, considering the situation of the Supernatural world right now, we must put aside our difference, huh.¡± ¡°Yeah, that¡¯s why I will make it work.¡± Yasaka looked at me with a concerned gaze. ¡°Aren¡¯t you working too hard, Riku-han? Have some rest for a day.¡± I smiled back at Yasaka and reassured her. ¡°Don¡¯t worry, I have enough rest.¡± Right now I can¡¯t rest yet. If I didn¡¯t do my best right now, I will not be able to rest in the future. ¡°So, please just tell Amaterasu about it. I promise that I will protect the youkai, our family.¡± All of those things were for the future. I didn¡¯t want my friend or even my lover to be worried all day because of the Khaos Brigade. ¡°So, leave the rest to me. You know that I never broke my promise.¡± RaizarP Author Here~ More than 60 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks for the New Executive! - Ryuu Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 120 – Walking Around ¡°Well then, Riku-han. It¡¯s now past midnight, isn¡¯t it time for you to rest? I will tell someone to prepare a room for you and Tsura-chan. How about you, Hagoromo-han?¡± Yasaka stood up and asked Hagoromo Gitsune. I also stood up, crossed my arms inside my Kimono, and looked at Hagoromo Gitsune. Maybe because Yasaka knew that Tsura was my attendant as well as my lover, she just prepared one room. What a considerate woman. ¡°I would like it if you prepare one room for me.¡± Yasaka nodded her head and then exited the room. ¡°Follow me. I will show you your room. Riku-han, do you mind tagging along with Kunou?¡± ¡°Nah, I¡¯m fine.¡± I looked at Kunou who was smiling while sitting in front of me. I extended my right hand towards her to help her to get up. ¡°Do you mind guiding me to my room, my little princess?¡± Kunou took my hand with hers as her face turned red. ¡°Princess¡­ Riku Onii-chan, you are a playboy.¡± She stood up as I pulled her, but her words surprised me a little. When I was in Kuoh, a lot of students called me handsome and such, but this was the first time someone close to me called me a playboy. ¡°I am nothing compared to my old man or even Azazel.¡± Those two guys were too popular with their subordinates. My old man was adored by widow and milf, Azazel was adored by his subordinate and fell because of sex. Not only that, the reason why Raynare went crazy in the first place was she wanted to get Azazel¡¯s recognition. Kunou looked at me with a smile and closed her eyes. ¡°For me, you are a playboy, Riku Onii-chan.¡± Her smile was so bright that I looked away. I felt bad. Even a younger girl like Kunou called me a playboy, I didn¡¯t deny it though. ¡°Yeah, Riku-han. You are a playboy, similar to Nurarihyon-han.¡± From behind me, I heard Yasaka¡¯s voice. I turned around and saw her chuckling. Hagoromo Gitsune also unexpectedly let out a chuckle while covering her mouth with her hand. ¡°Well then, I will go first with Hagoromo-han. Your room is located in a different direction.¡± After she said that, Yasaka turned around and walked away. ¡°Let¡¯s go, Hagoromo-han.¡± ¡°I appreciated it.¡± Both of them walked together side by side and talked about something. Was that the one called woman¡¯s bond? The sleeve of my Kimono was tugged and I saw Kunou looking at me while pointing her index finger to the exit. ¡°Let¡¯s go, Riku Onii-chan. You see, I wanted to walk in the city for now, will you accompany me?¡± Walking around Kyoto on this night? Why not? To begin with, Youkai was a night creature, and the night was the time when we were roaming in the street. I crossed my arms and looked at Kunou with a smile. ¡°Why not? Where should we go?¡± ¡°Really? Let¡¯s go to a convenience store first, and then I wanted to visit one of the night markets in Kyoto. I heard from the tengu that the night on night market was lively.¡± Night market? Could it be, the one that she talked about was the red light district? Even though Kunou was an Adult in Youkai¡¯s society, was it okay for her to visit it? Well, screw it. If she wanted to visit, then let her visit. I just need to protect her from some pervert. ¡°Let¡¯s go then.¡± I gestured Kunou with my chin. She smiled happily and clapped her hands before she jumped at me and hugged me from the side. ¡°Thank you, Riku Onii-chan! I wanted to visit it badly, but my mother had always refused to accompany me.¡± Kunou released her hug and looked down to the floor. I put my left hand on top of her head and she raised her head again. To match her gaze, I was crouching a little and closed my right eye. ¡°Then, I will accompany you tonight. Let this little adventure be our secret.¡± *** ¡°Uwaa! This is amazing, Riku Onii-chan!¡± Kunou who was walking beside me expressed her amazement as her hands moved around uncontrollably. The night market that Kunou talked about was not the red light district, it was an actual night market in Kyoto. There were a lot of stalls on the sides of the road. The night market was located in the shrine near Yasaka¡¯s shrine. It was a big shrine so it could accommodate a lot of people at once. It was bustling with pedestrians even though it was now past midnight. I turned into my human form and Kunou also hid her tails and ears. She was wearing a Miko outfit while I was wearing a black striped green kimono. Our outfits brought attention to us, but because some of the people also wearing a kimono, we didn¡¯t attract a lot of attention. ¡°Riku Onii-chan, let¡¯s go. There is a delicious Apple candy in that stall!¡± Kunou ran ahead of me while pointing at the stall on the left side of the road. The stall sold a sweet apple candy that looked delicious. I smiled while looking at Kunou and followed her to the stall. ¡°Ou, what a cute little lady.¡± The stall owner was a middle-aged man wearing a white headband. He greeted Kunou friendly with a smile on his face. In front of him was a row of apple candy that was wrapped in plastic. I stood behind Kunou with my arms crossed under my Kimono and said. ¡°Give me one apple candy.¡± ¡°Ou, here it is.¡± The stall owner picked one of the apple candy and gave it to Kunou. Kunou received the apple candy with a big smile. ¡°Thank you, Ojii-san!¡± The stall owner¡¯s face melted in a smile after Kunou thanked him. His eyes were closed, and I used this chance to put my hand on Kunou¡¯s shoulder and used Meikyo Shisui. We disappeared from the stall owner¡¯s sight and I ran away with Kunou in my arm. We ran together and I canceled Meikyo Shisui after we entered a crowd. Before we came here, I told Kunou a secret, that was actually a lie. ¡°Hahaha, so this is what Youkai in Kanto did, Riku Onii-chan?¡± I told her that youkai in Kanto never paid for any of their meals, especially in a festival like this night market. ¡°That¡¯s right, it was fun, isn¡¯t it?¡± Kunou looked at me and nodded her head. ¡°Un, that was fun!¡± ¡°Is that so? Then let¡¯s enjoy it until the stall closed!¡± Just like that, we visited almost all the stalls and got a lot of food and drinks. We screwed around until the sun had almost risen and the stalls began to close. RaizarP Author Here~ More than 60 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks for the New Executive! - Ryuu Big Thanks for the New Squad Leader! - foolishlurker Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 121 – Rest Kunou was tired after we were walking around all night. She fell asleep on a bench that was located in the shrine, so I carried her on my back and brought her back to Yasaka¡¯s shrine when the sun had risen. When we came back, Yasaka was standing in front of the shrine¡¯s entrance. Her arms were crossed, and she had an angry expression on her face. Hagoromo Gitsune stood beside her with a smug smile on her face. At that display of Yasaka, I knew that I had screwed up. She was angry, like, really angry. However, I just smiled at Yasaka and raised my right hand. ¡°Yo, we are back.¡± Yasaka frowned deeper and with an angry tone. ¡°And?¡± ¡°We are having fun.¡± ¡°Haa-¡° Yasaka let out a sigh and held her head with her right hand. ¡°I should¡¯ve never asked Kunou to guide you. I know that this will happen.¡± ¡°You know, Kunou was tired after having a lot of fun. Can we speak about this after I put her in the bed?¡± ¡°Fine, let me carry her, you must be tired too. You have yet to rest after having a lot of fight.¡± Yasaka walked to me and took Kunou from my back. She carried Kunou in her arms and I smiled at her. ¡°Thanks, I think I will go back to Kanto after I see the condition of the boy that I brought yesterday. I will trouble you to house him and Tsura for a few days, Yasaka.¡± ¡°It¡¯s not a problem. I am happy with Tsura-chan¡¯s company too.¡± I nodded my head and turned to Hagoromo Gitsune. ¡°How about you? Will you stay here or come back to Kanto with me?¡± Hagoromo Gitsune touched her chin and said. ¡°I will stay. Kyoto is interesting, and I am now learning about the Leyline from Yasaka. Go back without me.¡± Oh, so she was learning about Leyline? That was good if she could use the power of Leyline, she will get stronger. If she got stronger, then the youkai will get more chances to drive our enemy ourselves. ¡°Fine, then I will take my leave now.¡± As I said that, I created Magic Circle under me and teleported back to Kanto. My mansion was like usual, in the morning it was bustling with my Hyakki Yakkou running around. I teleported right in front of the entrance and saw Kubinashi sweeping the ground with a broom. When he saw me, he stopped sweeping, and with widened eyes, he shouted. ¡°Riku-sama! You are back!¡± His shout was heard by the other youkai and they ran towards the entrance at once. ¡°Riku-sama!! Thank god you are not injured!¡± Aotabo was the first one who saw me and he shouted with tears in his eyes. ¡°Hahaha, do you think I will be injured by those guys? I am fine.¡± ¡°That¡¯s right, Aotabo. You should welcome him with a smile, don¡¯t cry.¡± Kurotabo appeared from behind Aotabo and he looked at me with a smile. ¡°Welcome back, Riku-sama. You must be tired, I had asked Kejoro to prepare a bath and a meal for you.¡± Having capable subordinates were nice. They had prepared everything that I needed even before I asked. ¡°I will take a bath, the one that Kejoro prepared was the outdoor one, right?¡± ¡°That¡¯s right, Riku-sama.¡± Answered Kubinashi. ¡°She also prepared breakfast in the hall, we were thinking about having a meal with you if you don¡¯t mind.¡± ¡°Sure, let¡¯s have breakfast after this. Come to think of it, where is Kuroka?¡± I didn¡¯t feel Kuroka¡¯s energy anywhere in this area. It was strange, but then I remembered that Kuroka wanted to stay at Kuoh for a while. ¡°Kuroka-sama had stayed in Kuoh for three days. She was attending the school with her sister.¡± ¡°Right, I forgot about that for a second. Well then, I will take a bath now, Kubinashi.¡± ¡°Alright, I will tell Kejoro about that.¡± *** We had 2 baths in our mansion. One of them was an indoor bath, that bath was often used by my old man¡¯s subordinate. While the other was an outdoor bath. It was a typical bath like those in a hot spring inn, but the water of our bath was drawn manually. The bath had rock on the edge to lean our back. Right now, I was sitting in the bath while leaning my back against the rock and looking at the sky. ¡°Ah, this is bliss.¡± Compared to the bath in Gremory¡¯s mansion, I preferred this bath. The water in this bath made me relax. Sirzechs needed a few days to contact Azazel and Gabriel. I was thinking of having a rest and looking around with Tsura or Kuroka. Having a rest day was important, especially at this moment. Vali had yet to contact me again, I wanted to talk with him about something. He had a magician in his team, if I was not wrong, she was Le Fay Pendragon. That girl was an amazing magician in my opinion. Her personality was not rotten too, unlike the other magicians. ¡°Oh, right. Only Kuroka can use magic amongst us, the other could only use Fear or Youjutsu. Hmm, well, it¡¯s not like I need a magician in my Hyakki Yakkou.¡± I muttered alone and then drowsiness seemed to get a hold of me. My fatigue finally caught up to me after I relaxed and put my guard down. In the Gremory¡¯s mansion, I was not able to put my guard down in fear of an attack from the Devil. Now that I was in my own mansion, I felt tired and the only thing in my mind was to sleep. ¡®Let¡¯s get out before I fell asleep in the bath.¡¯ I stood up and then walked out of the bath. I put my clothes back and made my way to my room. I met Kubinashi on my way to my room and told him that I can¡¯t join the breakfast because I was too tired. He was worried about me, but I told him that I was fine. He then made his way to the hall to inform the others while I fell asleep in my bed. RaizarP Author Here~ More than 55 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks for the New Executive!! - Zeki-SF Q W Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 122 – Black Dog again I felt like I was sleeping like a baby. When I woke up, I heard a voice above me. ¡°Have you woken up yet, nya?¡± That typical nya that I didn¡¯t hear for a day had woken me up completely. I opened my eyes and saw Kuroka¡¯s face right in front of me. ¡°Morning, Kuroka.¡± Her face was so close, so I pulled the back of her head and planted a kiss on her lips. The kiss only lasted for a second before Kuroka pulled her face away. Her face turned red a little and then she said. ¡°It¡¯s not morning, Riku-sama. The sun has almost set today nya.¡± ¡°Oh, it¡¯s that late?¡± I raised my body and then I realized that I had been laying down on Kuroka¡¯s thighs. I looked at her and asked. ¡°Since when did you put my head on your thighs?¡± While asking that, I cracked my body that was a bit sore because of too much sleeping. Kuroka was sitting in Seiza and she smiled at me. ¡°Just an hour ago nya! I was coming back from Kuoh and saw Riku-sama sleeping, so I can¡¯t help myself.¡± ¡°I see.¡± After my body had cracked enough, I stood up and crossed my arms. Tsura was still in Kyoto, and I had enough rest. ¡°Kuroka, do you want to go with me for now? I need to meet someone.¡± ¡°Nya?¡± Kuroka tilted her head and stood up slowly. ¡°Where are we going nya?¡± ¡°Tokyo.¡± I grinned at Kuroka and she was confused. *** Kuroka entered the Black Dog bar with me walking beside her. I didn¡¯t change to my youkai form and I was now wearing a white shirt and black pants instead of my usual Kimono. Kuroka was also wearing casual clothes, a black dress with a white collar on her neck. She also hid her tails and ears. When we entered the bar, a few customers were sitting at the table, but only one girl was sitting in front of Tobio at the counter. Reni was standing in front of a microphone and singing. Her voice was clear and beautiful, it was amazing. ¡°Riku-sama, she¡¯s a good singer nya!¡± Kuroka held my right arm and pressed her boobs against it. As it was her usual behavior, I just smiled at her and said. ¡°That¡¯s Reni. The reason why I am here is to ask her something. But it looked like she is still busy, so why don¡¯t we have a drink first?¡± ¡°Yes, nya!¡± We walked to the counter and sat beside the girl. Kuroka sat between me and the girl, and I didn¡¯t ask her why because I knew the reason. When I looked at the girl closely, she was the one who worked as the waitress in the restaurant below the caf¨¦ the first time I visited this place. ¡°May I ask your order?¡± Tobio who worked as the bartender asked us with a smile on his face. His right hand was wiping a glass in his left hand with a cloth. I felt goosebump all over my body when I saw him act friendly towards me. Did he not recognize me because I wasn¡¯t in my Youkai form? ¡°Just the usual sake, Tobi-kun.¡± I smirked at him and then he realized it. His hands stopped moving and his mouth opened wide. ¡°You, Nura Riku? But, your hair!¡± Ah, as I had expected. With my hair tied in ponytail like this, someone would confuse me with another person, right? After all, my hairstyle in my youkai form was a distinct characteristic of me, Nura Riku. ¡°Eh, he¡¯s that Nura Riku that you talked about, Tobio?¡± The girl beside Kuroka peeked at me as her body leaned to the front of the counter. Her brown hair was pulled by gravity and fell into her face. She was a beautiful girl with big boobs, which was expected from this world. ¡°Nice to meet you.¡± I said to the girl and looked at Tobio before pointing my index finger to the girl. ¡°So, who¡¯s that? Your lover?¡± ¡°Hahaha, she¡¯s a friend and comrade.¡± Answered Tobio. The girl looked a little disappointed by Tobio¡¯s answer and she straightened her sitting posture. ¡°Nya, that¡¯s out.¡± Said Kuroka beside me as she looked at the girl. ¡°Yeah, that¡¯s out, Tobi-kun.¡± I nodded my head a few times. Tobio was confused, but the girl was smiling towards Kuroka. Seeing her chance, Kuroka introduced herself. ¡°My name is Kuroka, nice to meet you nya! Can I know your name?¡± ¡°My name is Minagawa Natsume, nice to meet you too.¡± Ah, so she¡¯s that girl. Tobio seemed to ignore what I said, put a bottle of sake and a cup in front of me. He then looked at Kuroka and asked. ¡°May I get your order?¡± Kuroka looked at Tobio with narrowed eyes and raised her index finger. ¡°Cocktail nya!¡± Tobio nodded his head and began his work to make a cocktail for Kuroka. He was skilled as a bartender and the cocktail was prepared in no time at all. He put the glass of cocktail in front of Kuroka then looked at me. ¡°So, what¡¯s your intention of visiting this place again. I thought you are done with your problem, the Hero Faction was it?¡± ¡°Yeah, that matter was done. Right now I am here for personal reasons, you see? I wanted to ask Reni about something.¡± Tobio narrowed his eyes when I said that I wanted to ask Reni. He put both of his hands on the counters and glared at me. ¡°Don¡¯t you dare drag Reni in your war. We had enough of that, so if you want to do that, I ask you kindly to leave.¡± Kuroka and the girl, Minagawa Natsume, were looking at Tobio because they sensed anger behind his voice. Kuroka was looking at him with narrowed eyes while Natsume was looking at him with a worried face. Meanwhile, I just grinned and face him without turning away. ¡°I said that I wanted to ask something. I won¡¯t drag anyone in my personal reason, am I that untrustworthy in your eyes?¡± We were glaring at each other for a few seconds before Tobio let out a sigh and scratched the back of his head with his right hand. ¡°Right, you didn¡¯t even drag us in the matter of youkai a few days ago. However, I need to make sure about that, I¡¯m sorry.¡± ¡°Your apology is accepted. Well, I don¡¯t know whether she will answer my question though. I was thinking of visiting Vali if Reni doesn¡¯t answer my question.¡± ¡°So you have a backup plan. I am curious what is this personal reason of yours. But, asking you about it would be rude, isn¡¯t it?¡± I was glad that he was not just a dense man. I smiled without saying anything, and at that moment I heard applause from behind. I looked back and saw Reni had done with her singing and another singer went on the stage. Reni saw us and made her way toward the counter. ¡°Tobi-kun, can you make me a drink? The usual one please.¡± Reni sat beside me as if that was her spot and asked Tobio. She then looked at me and smiled. ¡°I heard everything, Ri-kun. You can ask me anything.¡± RaizarP Author Here~ More than 55 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks for the New Executive!! - Zenith-SF Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 123 – The Location of Incinerate Anthem I poured the sake inside the bottle into the cup before I raised the cup and drank it in one gulp. ¡°It¡¯s a bit sensitive, care if I put on a soundproof barrier?¡± When I raised my right index finger and was about to put up a barrier, a translucent barrier appeared around us, shrouding over the five of us and cutting off the sound outside of the barrier. In a surprise, I looked at Reni and saw her smiling while her index finger was raised. ¡°I thought that you need it, so I prepared it in advance!¡± Maybe I should say as expected from a magician? They worked fast if Magic was involved. ¡°That¡¯s amazing nya!¡± Kuroka that was also well versed in Magic let out her amazement. She hugged me from behind and her face was put on my shoulder. ¡°You are even faster than me nya!¡± She was smiling from ear to ear as her arms were wrapped around my neck. ¡°My, thank you.¡± Reni was smiling with her hand covering her mouth. Her eyes were closed and she tilted her head happily. ¡°I am flattered by what you said.¡± ¡°No, nya. You are really amazing in magic!¡± Kuroka released her hug and then sat normally. She was still looking at Reni with a smile on her face though. ¡°Let¡¯s put that aside, Kuroka. We know that she¡¯s good in magic. For now, I wanted to ask her about something rather serious. Maybe it will hurt your feeling, so I will apologize in advance.¡± I said seriously and Reni opened her eyes. She was looking at me with her right hand still covering her mouth, but her eyes turned serious. ¡°Ri-kun, although I said you can ask anything, you are too straightforward. But, fine, I will answer it to the best of my ability. Think of it as thanks for bringing Va-kun to play.¡± ¡°Ahahaha, then I won¡¯t hold back my question. Do you know the location of the Incinerate Anthem¡¯s wielder, Walburga is?¡± In an instant, Tobio and Reni frowned. I glanced back and saw Minagawa frowned too. Ah, I knew that they had some ties. But, it seemed that I had underestimated it. ¡°Why are you searching for her?¡± Reni¡¯s voice had gone cold and the ground around her had been turned into ice. ¡°Riku-sama.¡± Kuroka said in a low voice behind me, indicating that she was ready to fight anytime. I raised both of my hands and looked at Reni seriously. ¡°Personal reason, and the matter from yesterday. I met magicians that I guessed from the Wizard of Oz attacking Kyoto yesterday.¡± After I said that, I narrowed my eyes and my mouth was curved downward. ¡°There is no way I will let the enemy of Youkai run around freely after attacking Youkai in our territory.¡± To show them that I was serious, I turned into my youkai form and a black cloud began to seep out from my body before disappearing into thin air. At first, I was thinking of getting Incinerate Anthem without killing those magicians. But they dare to attack Kyoto by forcing Leonardo¡¯s Sacred Gear to go berserk. Not only that, they brought a young dragon to rampage in Kyoto. ¡°Kyoto was attacked by Magicians? How did that happen? There is not even news about that.¡± Asked Reni in surprise. The ice melted at a fast rate and the atmosphere turned normal again. I lowered my hands and poured another sake into the cup before drinking it slowly. ¡°Well, I put a big barrier and killed them all as soon as they attacked. It¡¯s normal if there is no news because the barrier that I used yesterday was a bit special.¡± ¡°Haa- those guys are searching for trouble. Did they not hear that Youkai is now strong?¡± Tobio sighed and held his head as he took a cloth and began wiping a glass again. ¡°Reni, I will leave it to your decision. She was your former friend, so I will leave the decision to you.¡± Walburga, was her former friend? Ah, that was right, they were in the same group, the Wizard of Oz before someone called Augusta took over Reni¡¯s body to fight Tobio and Vali. ¡°I must ask.¡± Reni lowered her hand that covered her mouth and looked at me seriously. ¡°What do you want to do with Incinerate Anthem?¡± So she was worried about that. The cup in my hand was now empty, so I put it down and said. ¡°I want to use it to protect youkai. I am too weak right now.¡± ¡°But, didn¡¯t you have the Longinus already? Is that not enough?¡± When Reni said that, I looked at her and smiled slightly. ¡°Having too much strength is better than being weak. You will not be able to do anything, someone stronger will take something from you and you can¡¯t do anything because you are too weak. Even if I have a Longinus Sacred Gear, my attack power right now is too weak. I can only run and dodge, I can¡¯t save someone by dodging and running.¡± ¡°To protect youkai, huh. Fine, I will tell you the location of Walburga. But, are you confident that you can take her Sacred Gear?¡± I grinned at Reni and poured another sake into my cup before raising it to Reni. ¡°There is nothing that I can¡¯t do with probability. Even if there is only a 1% chance that I will be able to control Incinerate Anthem, then I will be able to control it.¡± ¡°Hahaha, I see. I forgot that the Longinus that you have is that one. Azazel told me about it, and I think that you are a cheater. Fine, we are allies although we didn¡¯t have any fancy parchment.¡± Tobio laughed and then put the cloth and the glass that he had in his hand on the counter. ¡°If Tobi said so, then I will trust Ri-kun too. Seeing her personality, I guess Walburga now is in the Dimensional Gap, at Wizard of Oz¡¯s former base.¡± I stroked my chin after I heard Reni¡¯s answer. ¡°Dimensional Gap, huh.¡± ¡®It¡¯s troublesome, I have no way to go there right now.¡¯ When I was thinking about that, Reni then continued. ¡°If you want to, I can take you there.¡± ¡°Really?¡± I asked Reni for confirmation and she nodded her head. ¡°Sure, but I will just take you there and won¡¯t help you with anything else.¡± I took Reni¡¯s hands and clenched them between my hands and said. ¡°Thank you! You are a lifesaver!¡± Usually, a girl¡¯s face would turn red if I did this, but Reni¡¯s face was still normal. She smiled at me and said. ¡°You¡¯re welcome.¡± RaizarP Author Here~ More than 55 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks for the New Executive!! - Zenith-SF Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 124 – Drink and Michael ¡°By the way, Ri-kun. When should I take you to Walburga? You don¡¯t mean, right now?¡± Reni asked with a concerned tone. She looked like she was not ready to take us now, and I don¡¯t know what preparation needed to be done before we can go to the dimensional gap. That was why I had planned to give her time to prepare. ¡°I am thinking that we can go in three days. Or, do you have another plan? If you need anything for the preparation, you can always tell me.¡± Reni waved her hands in front of her chest. ¡°No, that was not what I meant. Today, I still had a schedule to sing in this bar, you see? So when you said that we will go in three days, I can adjust my schedule with Tobi.¡± ¡°I see, is that so.¡± I turned into my human form again and drank the sake in my cup in one go. Seeing me turned into my human form again, the barrier around us was dispelled by Reni. ¡°I wanted to take it easy first. Sometimes, I wanted to spend my time with my lover too, you know?¡± After I said that, I glanced at Kuroka and smiled at her. She too smiled back at me. ¡°Nya, so you wanted a date with me!¡± She exclaimed happily while touching her cheeks with her hands. ¡°Tsura must be sad that only I got a date.¡± Muttered Kuroka. I heard that and patted Kuroka¡¯s head. ¡°Don¡¯t worry, I plan to take her on another date too. That¡¯s why I plan to go to the magician¡¯s base in three days. It¡¯s a rest day.¡± ¡°Really, nya?! Then¡­ tomorrow, can we do it? It¡¯s been a long time since you know nya?¡± Kuroka was a bit shy and her body was squirming a little. I was about to answer her, but then I heard a loud cough from Tobio. ¡°Cough! Eh, even though it¡¯s a bar, please refrain from that kind of talk. You are bothering other customers." I looked at Tobio and saw him looking at us with a displeased expression. Because I was irritated, I clicked my tongue and rested my head on my hand while my elbow was put on the counter. ¡°You are not fun.¡± After saying that to Tobio, I turned to Kuroka and leaned my head near her ears. ¡°Don¡¯t worry, tomorrow I will give you a lot of love.¡± I whispered to Kuroka with the sexiest voice that I could make. Her ears turned red and then her body squirmed even further. ¡°Nya!!¡± She shouted and then slammed the counter with her hands. ¡°Give me sake nya! The strongest one that you got!¡± I pulled my head away and then chuckled. Never in my mind that I could see Kuroka embarrassed because of her own word. She was trying to hide it by ordering a drink, but I had been with her for a long time now, so I understood what she did. ¡°Haa-¡° Tobio let out a sigh but as a professional bartender, he began to work and prepare Kuroka¡¯s order. Because Sake was an easy drink to prepare, he was done in just a minute and put a bottle and a cup in front of Kuroka. ¡°Don¡¯t waste yourself, Kuroka. We need to go to Vatican¡¯s Church after this.¡± However, Kuroka didn¡¯t hear me and gulped the Sake from the bottle instantly. She drank without minding her manners and then wiped her mouth before turning to me. ¡°Eh, Riku-sama~ Please don¡¯t say that! The night was still young, let¡¯s drink more nya!¡± She was wasted. Just a bottle of Sake and she got wasted already? What kind of Sake that Tobio gave her? I looked at Tobio and he shrugged his shoulder. ¡°She said the strongest one, so I give her the strongest Sake that I got.¡± I sighed again and then I patted Kuroka¡¯s shoulder. ¡°Hey, if you got wasted here, then I won¡¯t take you to the Vatican, you know?¡± ¡°Eh, what are you saying nya! Aren¡¯t we going on a date after this?¡± Kuroka said in a tipsy tone as she raised the bottle of Sake with her right hand. ¡°Tomorrow, we got one more stop today, so stop drinking already.¡± I took the bottle from her hand and drank the remaining Sake before I put the bottle on the counter. That was a pretty strong drink, I admit. ¡°Aha! That was indirect kiss nya, Riku-sama!¡± Kuroka giggled happily and then leaned her body at me. I caught her before she fell and then I stood up from the seat. She seemed to be down already, so I carried her in a Princess Carry and said. ¡°Yeah yeah, I know.¡± ¡°Hehehe, I was hugged by Riku-sama!¡± Kuroka then hugged me by circling her arms around my neck. I looked at Reni and then smiled. ¡°I will come back in three days. Because my lover seems to be wasted, I will take my leave now, bye.¡± Without waiting for their answer, I coated ourselves with my Fear and disappeared from their sight. ¡°You didn¡¯t pay yet!¡± Tobio shouted behind the counter, but I ignored him and teleported away without being seen by anybody. Re-appeared in my room, I put Kuroka down and saw that she was now sleeping soundly. I put a blanket over her body to make sure that she won¡¯t catch a cold. ¡°What a troublesome girl.¡± I crouched and patted Kuroka¡¯s head. She was smiling happily in her sleep and muttered. ¡°Date with Riku-sama nya¡­¡± I wanted to lay beside her and sleep again, but I need to visit the Vatican for now. Getting the location of True Longinus from the Angel needed to be done as fast as possible. ¡°Yeah, I promise you that I will take you to a date tomorrow.¡± I kissed Kuroka¡¯s forehead and then stood up before turning into my youkai form. I used Meikyo Shisui to disappear and then teleported to the Vatican. Because I had visited this place a few times and knew where my target¡¯s location was. I didn¡¯t waste any time and jumped to the highest floor of the Vatican¡¯s Church. One of the windows where Vasco¡¯s room was located was opened. I entered without saying anything and looked around. There was no one in the room, so I went out of the room and scanned the Church with my Senjutsu. I found Vasco¡¯s location in the hall of the Church so I made my way over there. There was a presence of an Angel near Vasco, it was a Seraph, but the energy was different from Gabriel. When I reached the hall, I saw Vasco was talking with a handsome man with long blonde hair. What luck, with him being here, I can ask the location of the True Longinus directly. So I approached them from behind and canceled my technique. ¡°Ya, I came again, Vasco.¡± I greeted Vasco while putting my arms on his shoulder. He was surprised, as usual, and then he turned to look at me. The handsome man also looked at me with his eyes widened in surprise. I ignored Vasco for now and looked at the handsome man. ¡°Isn¡¯t it the Seraph, Michael? What a coincidence, I have something to ask you.¡± Maybe it was as expected from an Angel? He recovered quickly and smiled kindly at me. ¡°Please do ask me. You had saved us even though you didn¡¯t realize it, so I will do my best to answer your question, Nura Riku.¡± RaizarP Author Here~ More than 55 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 125 – Asking for Spar We went to the meeting room, guided by Vasco. It seemed like Michael visited Earth because he wanted to meet me. I bet it was my Telos Karma that was acting for my sake again. On our way to the meeting room, Michael was talking about hearing about me from Gabriel. He said that he wanted to know what kind of person I was, but after I surprised him earlier, he just laughed a little and told me that I was what he expected me to be. Not only that, he had met my old man in a great war too. I wasn¡¯t surprised again by that, as I now knew that my old man loved intruding to the Great War and visited a lot of leaders from each faction. After we arrived at the meeting room, Vasco was about to leave us alone. I stopped him because I still had something with him. Because it was my request, Michael also stopped Vasco and told him to sit beside him. Now we were sitting while looking at each other in the Church meeting room that I visited the last time I was here. ¡°So, Nura Riku. I think I know what you wanted to ask, but please ask me yourself.¡± Maybe as expected from the leader of Seraph, Michael. He was so sharp. But, well, anyone who knew me would be able to guess my goal of visiting the Vatican. Even Tobio didn¡¯t say anything to me as if he knew my objective. I put my hands on top of the table and smiled. ¡°Maybe my question was something that you guessed. I wanted to ask, does True Longinus has a new wielder yet?¡± ¡°As I thought, you were asking that.¡± Michael put his hand inside his robe and pulled out a white envelope. He put the envelope on the table and then handed it to me. ¡°Unfortunately, I can¡¯t say it to you. However, maybe, just maybe that there will be an envelope that will tell you the new wielder of the True Longinus in front of your mansion. Of course, I don''t know anything about that, as the leader of the Heaven, I must follow some rules.¡± Michael closed his eyes as he said that. He couldn¡¯t tell me, so he put the answer in the envelope, huh. We had an alliance, and there was one person who would know it from Michael and wasn¡¯t restricted by Heaven¡¯s rule as much as Michael. The image of a clueless girl flashed in my mind and I closed my right eye and smiled. ¡®It seems I need to thank Gabriel for this.¡¯ ¡°Is that so, it¡¯s unfortunate but I will only accept this envelope.¡± I took the envelope and then put it in the pocket of my pants. ¡°I¡¯m sorry that I couldn¡¯t help much. However, Nura Riku, there is something that I am thankful for and something that I must request of you.¡± Michael¡¯s tone turned serious. For the leader of Heaven to turn serious, meant that something serious had happened. ¡°Let¡¯s hear it.¡± I looked at Michael seriously. He nodded his head a little before saying. ¡°Sirzechs Lucifer tried to contact me this morning. He said that he wanted to propose peace between the three factions. There will be a meeting in a week, may I request your presence to mediate the meeting? It will be held in Rome. To be precise, the Rome Colosseum.¡± So it was a meeting for the peace conference. But, to think that Sirzechs was suggesting the meeting to be held in the Rome Colosseum. That was a bit unexpected. Although I said that Japan was out of the question, they could pick England or somewhere else to hold the meeting. When I thought about it again, Sirzechs wasn¡¯t that idiot to suggest the meeting in Rome without any reason. Maybe he wanted to appeal to Angel¡¯s Faction that he really wanted peace. That was why he didn¡¯t mind if the meeting was held in Rome, a country near the headquarter of the church. ¡°Peace conference between three factions, huh. I will attend it, as an observer.¡± I answered with a positive response, and it seems that Michael was satisfied with my answer. He nodded his head a few times before standing up. ¡°Thank you, I will be counting on you to observe it. If something happens in the meeting, please feel free to run first. You are an innocent man. To tell you the truth, I don¡¯t want to involve you in this meeting, but you are the most trustworthy man who held the neutral stance in the Supernatural world.¡± Hearing Michael¡¯s word, I laughed out loud. Me? I was the most trustworthy man in this supernatural world that held the neutral stance? ¡°Hahahaha, your joke is too funny!¡± I couldn¡¯t stop laughing. Michael looked at me with a confused expression, and I closed my right eye as I looked at him. ¡°Michael, as a leader, you are not too good at judging people.¡± If he called me the most trustworthy man, then everyone in this world was trustworthy. ¡°No, I believe in my eyes.¡± Answered Michael shortly. Nah, you couldn¡¯t trust youkai, Michael. I moved for my own gain, to think he called me the most trustworthy man. What a joke. ¡°Well, then just believe your judgment. For I don¡¯t even see myself as a trustworthy man.¡± I stood up and extended my right hand with a grin on my face. Michael smiled softly, took my hand, and shook it. ¡°That¡¯s why I can trust you.¡± Angel was so strange. I couldn¡¯t understand their train of thought. We shook hands for a while and I released it first. ¡°Well, Nura Riku. Heaven is busy, so I need to excuse myself now.¡± As Michael said that, Vasco stood up from his seat and said. ¡°Let me guide you out, Michael-sama.¡± He gestured with his right hand, but then Michael stopped him. ¡°No, Nura Riku said that he had something to talk about with you. So please accompany him, Vasco.¡± ¡°Yes, certainly.¡± Michael walked to the exit. Vasco¡¯s gaze was still glued to Michael until he left the room. As soon as Michael left the room, Vasco sat on the chair again and looked at me. ¡°So, what do you want to ask me?¡± I sat down on the chair too and crossed my legs. ¡°I wanted to spar with you a little. With sword, of course.¡± This guy was the former wielder of Durandal. He was skilled with greatswords like Durandal or the western sword. My swordsmanship was focused on Katana, and I didn¡¯t understand swordsmanship that uses the western double-edged sword. While I could defeat them in a fight, I couldn¡¯t use the double-edged sword myself. More accurately, my move was a bit awkward when I used a double-edged sword. That was why, in order for me to use Gram, I was thinking to learn about it from Vasco first. ¡°I don¡¯t mind, but why?¡± Vasco answered me and then asked me with a curious tone. ¡°Because I wanted to steal your technique by sparing with you.¡± It was the best choice to not beat around the bush. That way, he would show me all that he got. Vasco seemed to be interested as he had a feral grin on his face. ¡°Oh, why not? Follow me, let¡¯s do it right now.¡± Vasco stood up and then walked out of the room. I followed him and we were walking side by side. ¡®I can¡¯t wait to see his skill, the one who is called the strongest human.¡¯ RaizarP Author Here~ More than 60 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks for the New Squad Leader!! - Bryce Mcdeavitt Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 126 – Training with Vasco The church training ground. It was located underground and it was vast. The size of the training ground was as big as a football stadium. There were a lot of different types of equipment and weapons. However, there was no one here. ¡°The exorcists from the main church usually trained in this place. But, they only have morning and afternoon training while they went hunting the stray and patrolling at night.¡± Vasco explained the reason why the training ground was empty and walked through the location where wooden swords were placed. It was on the side of the training ground, and there were various sizes of wooden swords. Starting from a normal short sword until a greatsword that matched Vasco¡¯s size. Without a single hesitation, Vasco took the biggest wooden sword and held it with his right hand before swinging it lightly. The greatsword looked like a normal sword when Vasco held it, that was ridiculous. ¡°Feel free to pick one, you can take your time.¡± Vasco looked at me, patted me on my shoulder before he made his way to the center of the training ground, leaving me in front of the piles of wooden swords. I looked at the piles of wooden swords and held the wooden swords one by one, trying to find the one similar to Gram. The reason why I wanted to learn the double-edged sword was to held Gram, nothing was wrong with increasing my strength. In this world, I had nothing like a bullshit power up like Issei or Vali. I had something similar, but Telos Karma was not that good to be used for an offensive. At most, I could destroy their armor or weapons with probability. However, Longinus like True Longinus and the Scale Mail of Ddraig and Albion were hard to destroy. Nenekirimaru was proven to not be able to cut through scale mail, but it can cut it if I hit the scale mail at the same place two or three times. My enemies in Khaos Brigade had Dragon that rivaled Dragon Kings amongst them, there was a strong Evil Dragon called Crom Cruach. Gram had Dragon Slayer properties, so it would be the best sword to be used when fighting against the Dragons. Finally, I found a wooden sword that was similar to Gram in size amongst the piles of wooden swords. I took it and tried to swing it lightly, it was perfect. The blade was rested on my shoulder and I turned to Vasco who stood in the middle of the training ground. ¡°Oh, finally found one?¡± ¡°Yeah, this one is perfect.¡± I made my way towards the center of the training ground and faced Vasco. When he held the greatsword, he looked big and intimidating. For a human or even humanoid that I met, he was the most who gushed out intimidation with his body alone. ¡°Are you ready, Vasco? Can you correct my stance if I do something wrong?¡± ¡°Sure, as I thought, you wanted to practice. You are not trying to win the spar but stole my technique, right?¡± ¡°Hahahaha, something like that. But, that¡¯s not a problem for you, right?¡± ¡°Oh, nothing.¡± Vasco began to strip his robe, showing his bare body that was bulging with muscles. White aura began to come out of his body. It felt similar to holy energy that most exorcists used, but it was more potent. ¡°I won¡¯t hold back though, be careful.¡± If I remembered correctly, he was able to beat Kokabiel in the second world war. So I will face him a bit serious right off the bat. The white aura surrounded my body and enhanced my whole physical strength. I used Touki, and I was now confident that my physical strength now was at the same level as Vasco. I purposely limited my Touki so I won¡¯t be stronger than Vasco, this was practice after all. If I was stronger than Vasco, it would not be counted as a practice. ¡°Then, here I go.¡± I shouted and kicked the ground, creating a crack on the ground that I kicked. I held the wooden sword in my right hand. My blade was aimed at Vasco¡¯s upper body, but he blocked it with his sword easily. However, his hand was now trembling, I bet it went numb after our exchange. My hand was a bit numb too, so I used my left hand to support my right hand and the wooden sword danced again, sending a barrage of slashes and thrusts towards Vasco¡¯s body at various points. The slashes were awkward because I used Katana¡¯s swordsmanship as my basic stance. Vasco looked at my slashes while deflecting most of them. He either dodged, blocked, or deflected the slashes and thrusts. ¡°You have good power, but the double-edged sword is not for thrusting! Focus on slashing and crushing the opponent with the weight of the sword.¡± In the middle of the slashes, Vasco gave me a tip. Right, I was thrusting too much because I was too used to Katana. Following his advice, I stopped thrusting and began to put my weight into my sword. Now, my slashes were heavier than before, and I could see the effect of it immediately. Vasco frowned while blocking my slashes, and now he focused on either deflecting or dodging my slashes. ¡°Oi, this is too much! And you are still holding back?!¡± Vasco had a difficult expression and held his swords with both of his hands. I smirked at Vasco and raised the wooden sword high above my head. ¡°Of course!¡± I brought my sword down and Vasco blocked it with his wooden sword. When the wooden swords made contact with each other, they broke because the force was too much for a wooden sword to bear. Both of us held only the handle of our sword and looked at it. ¡°It broke, huh.¡± Vasco said with a happy tone in his voice. ¡°Yeah, it broke. Well, it seems that double-edged sword focused on slashing and crushing. I learned a lot.¡± I grinned at Vasco and he scoffed. ¡°You learned a lot? I just give you one tip and you just went and changed your style immediately. Are you sure this is your first time holding a double-edged sword?¡± I threw the broken handle to the ground and shrugged my shoulder. ¡°I used Katana all this time. You see how often I thrust, right?¡± ¡°I thought you are faking it. But, well, you are good with a sword. Maybe you are blessed with talent in handling the sword.¡± ¡°Let¡¯s leave it like that. Thanks for sparring with me though.¡± ¡°No problem, shall we head back? You are satisfied, right?¡± ¡°Yeah, let¡¯s go back.¡± Vasco took his robe and wore it again. We then went back to the church hall. RaizarP Author Here~ More than 60 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 127 – Planning Friendly Competition In the church hall, I was walking with Vasco by my side. He was complaining about how the exorcist in this age became so weak compared to the previous generation. The young generation of exorcists couldn¡¯t achieve the same strength as the older generation. They were not as good in skill, but he said that there were a few promising individuals. Those promising individuals were the younger generation that could wield holy swords. He was proud of them, and he wanted to train the one who wield Durandal as Vasco could also wield Durandal. We were talking about various things until he finally proposed. ¡°So, how about we make a friendly competition between the exorcists and youkai? We can deepen the bonds between our alliance in that way. Youkai will got experience dealing with exorcists, and the exorcists would get stronger when they fought various youkai.¡± That was a good idea. I was wondering how could I get my boys to gain experience fighting the supernatural in this world, but the chance came from none other than Vasco. ¡°How about we invite the angels? That way you will get some chance to win.¡± I grinned at him and provoked him a little. I jabbed him indirectly by saying that Exorcists had no chance to win against us, Youkai. ¡®My boys are strong, you know?¡¯ ¡°I should consul to Michael-sama or Gabriel-sama about that. But, it seems that you are interested in the friendly competition too.¡± ¡°Actually, that¡¯s a good idea Vasco. When should we hold the competition?¡± Vasco touched his chin to think for a while. ¡°Hmm, that¡¯s another problem. The exorcists are spread in a lot of places, so we need to gather some of the fighters first before we can hold the friendly competition. I think a week or two will be good.¡± ¡°A week, huh. By the way, when is the peace conference? Isn¡¯t it in a week?¡± ¡°Ah, I almost forgot about that.¡± Vasco loosened his shoulder and then he touched his chin again. ¡°Hmm, this is difficult. After the peace conference, we will certainly be busy for a month or so. But, the peace conference was only attended by the leaders, right? How about we held the competition the day after the peace conference.¡± The day after the peace conference? It would be best if the three factions attended the friendly competition in that case. If we only held the competition between Church and Youkai, the other factions would think that the two of us were planning something without their knowledge. Maybe the leaders wouldn¡¯t think so, but I doubt the people under them would believe it. Another problem was the attack from Khaos Brigade. I don¡¯t think that they will attack when knowing that the peace conference will be held in Rome, but those crazy people maybe will not think about the place as long as they could kill the leaders of the 3 factions. But for now, I will agree with Vasco¡¯s suggestion. ¡°A day after the peace conference would be good. How about we invite the devils and the fallen too? They will be your allies after they sign the peace treaty.¡± ¡°That¡¯s true. A friendly competition between the four factions, it will be great!¡± I just smiled at Vasco without saying anything. With that, I had a reason to bring my Hyakki Yakkou when I was acting as an observer in the peace conference. This guy had helped me without him realizing it, what a good guy. If Khaos Brigade brought an army when I was acting as the observer of the peace conference, it would be troublesome. I was thinking of going with Vali at that time while hiding myself, but what was the better practice other than experience? My Hyakki Yakkou need to fight against another army to build up their strength in this world, and there was a perfect chance for that. ¡°It¡¯s already midnight. What will you do? Will you stay in the church? I can ask the nun to prepare your room in that case.¡± Vasco offered me to stay in the church, but I just woke up in the evening, so I didn¡¯t feel sleepy at all right now. ¡°No, thank you. I was thinking of going around for now. I slept a whole day, so I need to move my body.¡± I rotated my left arm while holding my shoulder with my right hand. Vasco looked at me and laughed. ¡°Hahahaha, so that meant you are sparring with me after waking up? Not only that, your body was still not in the best condition?¡± ¡°I told you, I am strong. So you better bring that Longinus user if you want to win the friendly competition.¡± Vasco was surprised, his mouth gaped and his eyes widened. ¡°So you knew about his existence? I expect no less from you.¡± He then smiled slightly and scratched the back of his head. ¡°How is this, Dulio loves running around the world to find delicious cuisine. Well, in that case, I would say that he¡¯s quite similar to you. Now I know the reason why I didn¡¯t find you uncomfortable.¡± ¡°Hahahaha, I will take that as praise.¡± A carefree person who wasn¡¯t held back by rules and focused on his goal. ¡°But there is something different though.¡± Vasco added with a serious face. ¡°He always paid for his meal and shared it with the children.¡± I looked at him while having a displeased expression. ¡°You think I won¡¯t share my food?¡± He didn¡¯t know it, I always share my sweet with the little youkai in the Hyakki Yakkou. How dare he said that I won¡¯t share my food. ¡°Not that part. I knew that Nurarihyon always run after he had a meal.¡± Ah, that part. My right hand now touching my chin, and I looked at Vasco with realization. I paid for the food though, at one time in that convenience store. Come to think of it, I never paid for any food after that. When I was walking with Kunou, I always used Meikyo Shisui to disappear before paying. ¡°That¡¯s true¡­ Well, that Dulio is different then. I also didn¡¯t pay for my meal.¡± ¡°Hahahaha, well then. I will ask him too. See you again next week.¡± I raised my right hand at him while a teleport magic circle appeared under my feet. ¡°See you next week.¡± Then I teleported away. RaizarP Author Here~ More than 60 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 128 – Bath and Date After I teleported back to my mansion, I was greeted by the youkai that started to become active in the night. They were lovely bunches, but then I made my way towards Kuroka¡¯s room, where she was sleeping. When I entered the room, I saw Kuroka was sleeping soundly. Her posture was a bit risky, her clothes were now disordered. The blanket was kicked away, and her boobs were almost slipped out of her clothes. Because she was wearing a dress before she went to sleep, right now it was wrinkled. ¡°This girl really had bad posture.¡± I approached Kuroka and fixed her clothes before putting a blanket on top of her. She moved her body a little when I fixed her clothes and muttered, ¡°Riku-sama, date nya~¡± My lips rose to a smile when I heard that. I then kissed her forehead, walked out of the room, jumped to the roof, and looked up to the sky where the full moon was a bit hidden behind the cloud. Hagoromo Gitsune was now still learning about the Leyline from Yasaka, while Tsura was looking after Leonardo in Kyoto. The night was peaceful, although the danger was roaming out there. ¡°My low firepower will be fixed by having Incinerate Anthem, but I still have no skill to stop my enemy from running away.¡± It was another problem that I realized when fighting Cao Cao. Almost everyone in the Supernatural world was able to teleport, and I wasn¡¯t able to make a barrier to prevent teleport. Kuroka would be able to do it using her Demonic Power, but I was still not able to replicate that using my Youjutsu. ¡°Should I try to imbue my Barrier with Telos Karma? I need to try it tonight.¡± So I made my way to the courtyard of my mansion. I began to experiment with the barrier and I succeeded after a few tries. As I had thought, my teleportation, or rather, Magic that used energies other than Senjutsu and Youjutsu would be canceled inside my barrier. The Fear of Youkai inside the barrier would be enhanced because I also used my Fear to make the barrier. I still to make sure that the barrier work, so I will try it again later with Kuroka. ¡°Good.¡± I nodded with satisfaction and looked at the sky. My energy was a bit drained, but it was better than before. Now I was certain, I was stronger than the first time I visited Kuoh Town. ¡®Let¡¯s continue a bit more.¡¯ *** It was now bright, and the sun had risen. The experiment took more time than expected. As I wiped a little sweat that was formed in my forehead and I was greeted from behind. ¡°Good morning nya!¡± I turned around and saw Kuroka holding a towel. ¡°Here nya, I heard from the little youkai over there that you are training in the courtyard nya!¡± She handed me the towel and looked at the little youkai that was peeking at us from the mansion. When I looked at them, they hurriedly hid and peeked their head again from the gap of the doors. ¡°Thank you.¡± I looked at Kuroka again and wiped the remaining sweat with the towel. She smiled happily and closed her eyes. ¡°No problem nya! You should take a bath after this, or ¡­ should I help you in the bath?¡± Kuroka was looking at me with upturned eyes. I was taller than her in my youkai form, so the effect of her eyes was immense. I couldn¡¯t refuse her, and I had no intention to refuse her in the first place. ¡°Sure, shall we go?¡± I grinned at Kuroka and her face reddened a little. However, she seemed to be happy and took my arms. ¡°Let¡¯s go, Riku-sama!¡± *** We entered the outdoor bath together. I wrapped a towel around my waist while Kuroka wrapped a towel around her body. ¡°Shall I clean your back first, Riku-sama??¡± ¡°I¡¯m counting on you for that.¡± Kuroka brushed my back with a soft towel in the shower side of the bath. As she brushed my back, she spoke. ¡°Riku-sama, I know that you wanted to protect youkai nya, but please don¡¯t force yourself too hard.¡± Her voice sounded sad. It was as if she hated the fact that I tried too hard for protecting youkai. I had moved without rest these past few days, and it seemed that I worried her. ¡°Please count on us more, Riku-sama. I can also fight, so please also take me if you go out nya.¡± Right, I somehow deliberately push Kuroka and Tsura to safety. They could also fight, I didn¡¯t forget about that, but I was worried too. ¡°Yeah, I will bring you along someday.¡± I glanced over my shoulder and saw Kuroka smile at me. Her body was now not wrapped by the towel, and she hugged me from behind. Her breasts were pressed against my back, they were soft, but I heard something else that made me not able to enjoy them. ¡°*Sob* promise?¡± ¡°Yeah, I promise.¡± I patted Kuroka¡¯s head and then she leaned her head forward, asking for a kiss. I planted my lips into hers and then I pulled away after a few seconds. There were tears on the edge of Kuroka¡¯s eyes, I wiped them and then I said. ¡°The date, shall we go now?¡± ¡°Wait nya, let me wash real quick!¡± Kuroka began to wash beside me. While she was washing her body, I helped her by washing her hair so it will be done faster. I was such an idiot, I will bring her in the future. Kuroka was as strong as an Ultimate-class devil, she was strong. In the past, I said to Rias that I wasn¡¯t that overprotective, but it seems that I need to take that back. It would change from now on though. ¡°Done nya! Let¡¯s go, Riku-sama!¡± Kuroka pulled my hand enthusiastically and we wore our clothes before running out of my mansion. I was wearing my usual kimono while she was wearing her usual kimono too, the black kimono that emphasize her breasts. I was in my human form while Kuroka hid her youkai parts to blend with the humans. ¡°Where should we go nya, Riku-sama?! ¡®Hmm, is there a festival somewhere? I think it maybe good to visit one¡­ maybe Osaka?¡¯ ¡°How about we go to Osaka? There is a lot of delicious food in that place.¡± Kuroka smiled happily and then nodded her head. ¡°Un, let¡¯s take a train! It¡¯s a date, so we need to enjoy it!¡± I chuckled at her and answered. ¡°Sure, let¡¯s go.¡± RaizarP Author Here~ More than 60 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 129 – Uneasy Feeling When we arrived in Osaka, we moved immediately. We visited a lot of places, starting from Osaka Castle. The Osaka Castle was big, bigger than Nijo Castle where Tsuchigumo resided right now. Right now was the end of the spring, the Sakura tree around the Osaka Castle began to fall. However, a lot of Sakura Trees were still blooming with pink flowers, it was a beautiful sight. ¡°Riku-sama! There are a lot of people here nya! As expected, the tourist spot will be crowded on weekend!¡± ¡°Yeah, l forgot that it was the weekend.¡± It was crowded, at the point that our Kimono didn¡¯t even gather any attention. Osaka was famous for its culture, a lot of people were still wearing a Kimono while going out. I guessed that was why we were not standing out too much. ¡°Well, it¡¯s a date, so just ignore the other and focus on having fun.¡± I gave Kuroka my hand and she gripped it tightly, clinging into my arms with her boobs pressed against my arm. She raised her head a little and looked at me. ¡°Yes nya!¡± We then proceed to the gate of Osaka Castle and entered it. I didn¡¯t want to be bothered by other people, so I surrounded us with a bit of Fear so that the other people would ignore our presence. We entered Osaka Castle with no problem. It was usually not open for tourists, but who could stop us? The interior of the castle was beautiful, and we visited the museum inside the castle. After getting tired of the Osaka Castle, Kuroka pulled me and said. ¡°Let¡¯s go to Tsutenkaku Tower nya! That way we can see Osaka from the high place!¡± I just smiled at her and followed her to Tsutenkaku Tower. It was a tall tower, similar to Tokyo Skytree. From the top of the tower, we could see the entire Osaka. Not gonna lie, the scenery of the buildings in Osaka was not as beautiful as the mountain scenery. I was a bit disappointed by it, and so did Kuroka. However, from the top of the tower, I managed to find a thing. ¡°Kuroka, it seems that there is a faction hidden in Osaka. What do you think, shall we continue our date like this or should we visit the said faction? We are not detected yet, so we can continue our date with no problem.¡± We were now on the ground, under Tsutenkaku Tower. Personally, I wanted to continue our date because the hidden faction was not that hidden. The fact that I could feel through their barrier was enough for me to judge that they were not that skilled. ¡°Hmm, let¡¯s just continue our date nya! You need a rest, don¡¯t push yourself! Besides, I think that the hidden faction in Osaka is part of Five Principal Clans.¡± That maybe true. I could feel Youkai inside the barrier too, and the only faction or families that had ties with youkai were Five Principal Clans. ¡°Yeah, that¡¯s true. Where should we visit next?¡± Kuroka smirked at me and looked at the sky. It was now orange and the sun was about to set. ¡°Shall we have dinner and book a hotel nya?¡± ¡°Hmm, I know a good place to eat in Osaka. Do you mind Ramen? If it¡¯s Osaka, then you must eat Ramen!¡± ¡°Ooh! I love Ramen nya! Let¡¯s go!¡± With that, we went to have our dinner in one of the Ramen houses in Osaka. It was located in the middle of the city, and we entered the famous Ramen house called Kadoya Shokudo. When we entered the Ramen house, the owner greeted us with high spirit. ¡°Welcome!¡± I looked around the restaurant because I felt uneasy. Usually, it was at the time like this a hindrance appeared. However, the coast was clear, no one but ordinary people were in the Ramen restaurant. We then sat at the table seat before the employee of the Ramen house approached us and put two glasses of water on our table. ¡°What¡¯s your order, Customer!¡± ¡°Miso Ramen for me nya!¡± ¡°Wonton Men for me.¡± The employee noted our order and then shouted at the chef behind the counter. ¡°One Miso and one Wonton!¡± ¡°Ouu! Wait for a minute!¡± The employee then bowed and walked away. The uneasy feeling that I felt had yet to disappear. I still put my guard up in case of something happened. ¡®I hope it was just my feeling. I want a fucking rest today, so don¡¯t come to me, whatever you are.¡¯ ¡°What¡¯s wrong, Riku-sama?¡± Kuroka asked me with a concerned expression and snapped me out of my thought. ¡°Ah, it¡¯s nothing. I just had some uneasy feeling since earlier.¡± Hiding something would not make difference. Hence, I never hid something from others except something important. A trivial thing about my feeling was best to be said outright, so my companion would know what I felt. On top of that, I am the wielder of Telos Karma, my feeling was usually on spot. After waiting for a few minutes, the Ramen finally arrived at our table. ¡°Thanks for waiting!¡± ¡°Oh! It seems tasty nya!¡± I smiled at Kuroka and then said. ¡°Let¡¯s eat!¡± We began eating the Ramen. Kuroka looked happy when she slurped the noodles and drank the broth. I fought the Khaos Brigade to protect a moment like this, but how could I forget to enjoy it while it still last? ¡°Eat slowly, Kuroka. No one would take the Ramen from you.¡± It happened as soon as I ate the Ramen. I felt an energy from the underground move at a fast speed. The direction of the energy was unknown, it was splitting as soon as it concentrated in Osaka Castle. Kuroka seemed to feel it too, she looked at me with a worried gaze. ¡°Riku-sama, did you feel it nya?¡± ¡°Yeah, the energy is similar to Amaterasu.¡± It was the energy that was similar to Amaterasu. In other words, it was the energy of Gods from Takamagahara. ¡°Who made a move in Osaka? Well, it¡¯s not our problem though.¡± I said then continued eating my Ramen. ¡°Yes nya!¡± However, it still remains in my mind. ¡®Could it be, there is a god in Takamagahara that rebelled? The energy earlier, maybe Kuroka didn¡¯t realize it, but there was dragon energy mixed inside that swirl of energy.¡¯ RaizarP Author Here~ More than 60 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 130 – A Night in Ryokan 1 WARNING: NSFW ***** I decided to forget about the energy that I felt earlier and continued my date with Kuroka. It was now night, and so we decided to go to find a hotel in Osaka. My mansion was filled with Youkai now, so we decided to spend a night in a hotel instead. Money was not a problem, I had a lot of it because we never really bought anything except for ingredients to cook and sake. I suggested spending a night in the hotel that had a suite room, but Kuroka refused. Because we were in Osaka, she wanted to sleep in Ryokan that had a private outdoor bath. She knew the location of the Ryokan, so I just followed her. It was not strange for her to prefer Ryokan as the mansion we were in was also a traditional Japanese mansion. As we arrived at the Ryokan, I was marveled at its size. It was half the size of my mansion, quite big for a Ryokan in the city. The location of the Ryokan was a bit far from the center of Osaka though, seeing as this was a lodging district. There was a sign in front of the receptionist of a Ryokan, that only a couple allowed to sleep in the same room. That was not a problem though, and fortunately, the Owner and the Employees of this place were youkai, so they were understanding and recognize me when I entered the Ryokan. We were given the best room with a private outdoor bath. After we entered the room and changed our clothes to the blue Yukata that was prepared in our room, we went to the outdoor bath together. We did need to take off our clothes again, but well, wearing a Yukata was a must in a Ryokan to enjoy the atmosphere. Like this morning, Kuroka washed my back, this time she didn¡¯t hide her body with a towel, neither did I. I had expected it, and I wanted it too. There were just the two of us, there was no way I won¡¯t get excited. It has been a few days since I last did it with them, and I had always been bothered by an attack or something that made me tired. Hence, I decided to forget the energy that I felt earlier and enjoyed the night. When Kuroka washed my back, she pressed her body against me and whispered to my ear. ¡°Riku-sama, is this good nya?¡± I could smell her because we were close to each other. The soap that she used to wash my body was so sweet, that I turned to Kuroka unconsciously. When her gaze met with mine, she closed her eyes slowly as if she has been waiting for it. Seeing her like this, I didn¡¯t hold myself back any longer and kissed her lips. ¡°Hmn¡­¡± It was a passionate kiss with our tongues intertwined with each other. Although we ate a lot of things earlier, Kuroka¡¯s lips were sweet. The fragrance of Kuroka¡¯s body made me aroused, I hugged her and she squirmed around in my arms, pressing her body against mine. She had surrendered her body to mine, and I supported her back with my arms. With her body loosened, I ended the kiss for now and carried her. ¡°Mm, more, Riku-sama~¡± She begged me with upturned eyes. Her face was now redder than tomato, it was cute. I smiled at her and carried her to the bath. I sat on the edge of the bath and put Kuroka on my lap. We were looking at each other before she planted a deep kiss on my lips. My lips sucked her tongue and we tasted each other¡¯s saliva. With one hand supporting her back, my other hand made its way to her breast. ¡°Hnn~¡± Muffled moan let out from Kuroka¡¯s mouth as my hand touched her breast. My finger dug into the soft breast of her. It was soft, as soft as the best cloth that I had, no, it was softer. With a soft movement, my thumb and index fingers met with her now erected nipple and pinched it. ¡°Mnn!¡± Muffled with my lips, Kuroka let out a cute moan. It was after a few seconds that Kuroka finally got satisfied and pulled back her lips. ¡°Haa- Haa- Riku-sama¡­ I, I love you nyaa!~¡± It was at the end of her sentence that I pinched her nipple again and she let out a loud moan. She was so cute when she said that, so I couldn¡¯t help myself to tease her. I could feel her crotch getting wet on top of my lap. My erect member was pressing against her and I looked at Kuroka with a gentle smile. ¡°Hahaha, I love you too, Kuroka.¡± I kissed her again, this time was a simple peck on her lips to make her satisfied. She smiled at me and stood up. She then sat beside me while her hand was slowly made its way to my member. ¡°It¡¯s big, maybe because you have not been able to let it out for a few days nya, Riku-sama?¡± She gently stroked the tip of my member while leaning her face against my neck. I felt a cold sensation mixed with a wet feeling on my neck. Kuroka¡¯s hand kept moving, stroking my members. I didn¡¯t sit idly too, my hand moved to Kuroka¡¯s crotch, teasing her outer lips. ¡°Ahn!¡± When I stroked it, Kuroka let out a loud moan and her body jolted a little in surprise. I stopped my hand and then she stopped stroking my member and looked at me with upturned eyes. ¡°W-why did you stop nya¡­¡± ¡°Oh, you wanted me to continue?¡± Somehow, I felt happy teasing Kuroka like this. Could it be that my sadistic nature has been awakened? ¡°Y-yes nya, please.¡± ¡°Then beg for it.¡± I stood up in front of her and bent my knees to match her gaze. Her mouth moved uncontrollably, but then she said. ¡°Please play with me nya.¡± ¡°Play with you?¡± I smirked at Kuroka, and she averted her gaze a little. ¡°P-Please play with my pussy nya, I-I wanted to feel good.¡± Satisfied with her words, I planted a simple kiss. ¡°Now that¡¯s a good girl.¡± My hand was now between her crotch, stroking the outer lips of her pussy with my fingers. ¡°Ahhn~¡± With her moan of pleasure in the background, I moved my fingers and planted a hickey on Kuroka¡¯s neck. ¡°Hnnn~¡± She tried to stop her moan by covering her mouth, but it was to no avail. With my free hand, I held her hands and now she moaned loudly without anything covering her mouth. My middle finger slid into her narrow crevice. Kuroka¡¯s body jolted when she was attacked by the pleasure. Her body began twitching. I planted another hickey on her neck. My thumb and index fingers were playing with her clitoris, sending another pleasure to Kuroka. ¡°Ahn nya!!¡± A moment later, a surge of love juices squirted out and I pulled my hand away from her pussy. Kuroka¡¯s face was that of bliss. RaizarP Author Here~ More than 60 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 131 – A Night in Ryokan 2 (18+) Kuroka that was orgasming earlier began to recover and leaned slightly to my crotch. ¡°Riku-sama, let me pleasure you with my mouth nya~¡± Her voice was a bit feverish. I nodded my head and her hands approached closer to my cock and wrapped around the shaft. She was now inside the bath, in front of me. Her big breasts were floating on the water, I giggled a bit when I saw it. With a rough breath that I could feel, her face leaned closer to the tip, sticking out her tongue, and licked the tip before putting it in her mouth. Because of the sudden pleasure from her mouth, my body jerked a little. She noticed it and smiled at me while stroking the shaft of my cock. ¡°Fufufu, do you like it, Riku-sama nya?.¡± ¡°Yeah, keep going.¡± ¡°Well then.¡± Kuroka put my cock into her mouth again. Her cheeks bulged slightly and she moved her head up and down. I could feel her tongue wrapping around my cock as she gave me a blowjob. ¡°Hnm. Hnn!¡± Kuroka¡¯s hand didn¡¯t stand idly. She massaged the shaft and keep bouncing her head up and down. Before long, my cock was now drenched in her saliva. Her technique was now better than before, she kept sending pleasure to me. My hands moved to the back of her head and I pulled her head, causing her to eat my entire cock. ¡°Hmn!!¡± She moaned in surprise, but her eyes looked happy. She momentarily stopped before moving her head again, this time my entire cock was fit in her mouth. I felt the urge to cum, and maybe Kuroka felt it too because she was begging with her eyes. I began to move my hips too, and before long I couldn¡¯t hold it anymore. ¡°Take it Kuroka!¡± Semen gushed out of my cock, and Kuroka accepted it happily. She pulled back her mouth with a pop and then beamed with a wide smile. Inside her mouth was full of white liquid, she looked at me with a passionate gaze, gulped, and opened her mouth wide to show that she had swallowed all my semen. ¡°Haa- haa-¡° Kuroka had a rough breath that tickled my cock in front of her face. She then began licking my cock, cleaning the remaining semen before saying. ¡°Haa- R-Riku-sama¡­¡± She climbed up my laps and spread her legs, showing her pussy that was dripping with love juices and the hot water. ¡°Yeah.¡± I answered her. She smiled happily and grabbed my cock with her hand, positioning it on the opening of her pussy. She had a hard time because she couldn¡¯t see it, so I assisted her by holding her hips. ¡°Pleasure me, Kuroka.¡± My free hand was slowly made its way to Kuroka¡¯s breast, pinching her erect nipple. ¡°Ahn~!¡± She moaned loudly and her hips bent down. My cock slid into her pussy easily, causing another moan from Kuroka, ¡°Ahnyaa~!¡± ¡°Haa- Haa- I- I will move now, Riku-sama!¡± Kuroka moved her hips, her inside wrapped my cock, sending pleasure to me as she kept moaning in pleasure. Her body didn¡¯t expect the pleasure and now I moved my hips as well to help her. ¡°Ahn! Hmnn!¡± My hands made their way to Kuroka''s back, grabbing the round ass and moving it up and down. She paid no heed on my hands. Her hands were hugging my neck, buried her breast on my chest. She didn¡¯t stop moving her hip as she did that and I assault the deepest part of her inside, invading it with the tip of my cock. ¡°NyaaA!¡± Unexplainable pleasure hit me as Kuroka moaned loudly. ¡°R-Riku-sama, more, faster!¡± Her hips moved faster as her sensual moans became louder. I lifted her by holding her ass, surprising her. ¡°Nyaa!¡± I paid no heed to Kuroka¡¯s surprise and started to assault her pussy faster than she wished to. She clung to me tightly and moaned right beside my ear. Kuroka bouncing on my lap. I could no longer hold my load, but fortunately, Kuroka send a signal. ¡°Ah, C-cumming!¡± I thrust deep inside her and released my load. Kuroka¡¯s back arched backward as her body trembled for a few seconds. She collapsed on the bath floor as a stream of juices flowed out of her. Both of us breathe heavily, but we were satisfied. Kuroka recovered faster than I thought and crawled to me. She saw my still erect cock and smiled. ¡°It seems that you are not satisfied yet nya, Riku-sama.¡± I smiled back at her and planted a deep kiss. The kiss lasted a few seconds. ¡°Of course. I am not satisfied easily.¡± I lifted her in my arms, brought her back to our room, and dropped her on the futon. Kuroka¡¯s naked body on top of the white futon was so sexy. She extended her arms and said. ¡°Feel free to feel my body nya, Riku-sama.¡± As a man, I couldn¡¯t refuse her. I approached her and we had sex until the sun had risen. In the end, I creampied her a few times. RaizarP Author Here~ More than 60 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 132 – Moving the Patient In the afternoon, after we washed clean from any lingering smell whatsoever, we teleported back to Kanto only to see a lot of youkai running around in my mansion as usual. At that moment I remembered the energy last night. The energy felt like Amaterasu, yet it had dragon energy mixed in it. There was one person who I knew had that kind of energy. ¡®Isn¡¯t he Susanoo no Mikoto? What the heck did he do in Osaka?¡¯ Amaterasu¡¯s older brother, the slayer of Yamata no Orochi. The one who found Ama no Murakumo no Tsurugi. I was at first wondered why did he in Osaka, but then I knew his personality. ¡®He¡¯s a battle crazed god. He saw Sirzechs as his rival, but my question remains¡­¡¯ While I was lost in my thought, Kuroka walked inside my mansion with a smile on her face and shouted. ¡°We¡¯re back nya!¡± ¡°Ah, welcome back Kuroka-sama!¡± The small youkai ran towards Kuroka and some of them were tugging her sleeves. ¡°Let¡¯s play, let¡¯s play!¡± One small youkai with white skin, oval head, and one eye looked at Kuroka and invited her to play. ¡°Let¡¯s go nya. Let¡¯s ask Shirone too, shall we?¡± Kuroka raised her right hand and lead the small youkai inside the house. ¡°¡±¡±YEAH!!! Shirone-sama too!¡±¡±¡± She looked like the leader of these small youkai, I smiled outside of my entrance and looked in the direction of Kyoto. ¡®Shall I go to Takamagahara? Nah, that¡¯s a silly question.¡¯ My mouth curved in a grin and I looked at Kuroka for the last time before creating a teleport circle under my feet. ¡°Kubinashi! I am leaving for Kyoto!¡± I shouted in the direction of my mansion. I felt Kubinashi¡¯s energy right inside the mansion, on the other side of the wall. He walked out from the entrance and nodded his head a little. ¡°Have a safe trip, Riku-sama.¡± *** The location I teleported to was the room that was assigned to Tsura to nurse Leonardo. When I arrived in the room, Tsura was sitting beside the unconscious Leonardo and poured some kind of liquid into his mouth from a bowl. She poured it slowly, after all of the liquid seemed to be swallowed by Leonardo, Tsura sighed and turned to me. ¡°Welcome, Riku-sama. I¡¯m sorry for not greeting you earlier.¡± ¡°Nah, don¡¯t worry about it. How¡¯s the boy¡¯s condition?¡± ¡°He¡¯s fine, but his mind seems to be in a mess because of some drug or the magic.¡± Tsura looked at the boy with a worried face and then she looked at me seriously. ¡°Maybe, when he opens his eyes he won¡¯t be able to remember anything.¡± ¡°Amnesia?¡± I didn¡¯t expect that and got surprised. My hand touched my chin and I looked at Leonardo with much interest. I was planning to ask him nicely to join us, but if he got no memories, I just need to put him in our mansion and got those small youkai to play with him a little so that he felt kindness from them. A grin crept up my face as I looked at Tsura. ¡°Can you teleport the boy and nurse him in our mansion? You can ask for help from Magari or Kejoro to nurse him too. I bet they will help happily, knowing that the boy was saved from a terrorist organization.¡± Tsura thought a little before nodding her head. ¡°Yes, I think I can do that. I need to greet Yasaka-sama first before leaving though.¡± ¡°Let¡¯s go, I need to ask Yasaka for transportation too.¡± Tsura got up on her feet and looked at me suspiciously. ¡°What are you planning, Riku-sama? You are just resting, but you wanted to make another move again? I heard from Kuroka, the next one is my turn!¡± She pouted her cheeks cutely and crossed her hands over her boobs. ¡°Yeah, don¡¯t worry about it.¡± I patted her head a little, ruffling her hair before turning away and walking out of the room. Because I felt Tsura still standing still, I looked over my shoulder and said. ¡°Let¡¯s go.¡± We went to Yasaka who was now in the courtyard with Kunou. When we arrived at the courtyard, I saw Kunou was practicing her Senjutsu while Yasaka was coaching her from the side. ¡°That¡¯s right, feel the energy in nature and use it to enhance your body!¡± ¡°Yes, mother!¡± A pale white aura began to surround Kunou¡¯s body. ¡®Oh, so she was learning Touki?¡¯ That kid learned fast, to think she was learning Touki at her age. Well, I was learning Touki with Magari when I was still 10 years old, so I didn¡¯t see something wrong with that. Yasaka noticed our presence and looked at us. ¡°Oh, Riku-han, Tsura-chan. Do you want something from me?¡± Without beating around the bush, Yasaka asked me. When Yasaka called out to us, the aura around Kunou began to waver and disappeared into thin air. Yasaka felt that and turned to Kunou. ¡°Don¡¯t lose your concentration! Keep going at that, I will talk with Riku-han and Tsura-chan first.¡± ¡°Yes, I¡¯m sorry, mother.¡± Yasaka nodded her head and then she walked towards us. I just smiled and sat in the hallway, looking at Kunou. Tsura sat beside me, and Yasaka who noticed that the thing that we asked was not that important also sat down in the hallway, looking at Kunou beside Tsura. ¡°So, Riku-han, Tsura-chan. You have something to say to me, right? You never look for me unless you have something to talk for after all.¡± Tsura looked at me for a second and I nodded my head at her. ¡°Yes, Yasaka-sama. I am thinking of bringing the boy back to Kanto so Magari could help me to heal him.¡± ¡°Oh, is that the case? I don¡¯t mind, Tsura-chan.¡± Yasaka responded with a smile on her face. ¡°Well then, Yasaka-sama. Please excuse myself.¡± Tsura stood up without waiting for another second, which surprised Yasaka. ¡°You are going now?¡± ¡°Yes.¡± Tsura bowed her head a little, ¡°I think it¡¯s better if I move him now. I, myself couldn¡¯t provide the best treatment for the boy.¡± ¡°I see.¡± Yasaka looked up at Tsura and smiled, ¡°Then you may excuse yourself.¡± Tsura bowed once again and walked away, leaving us. ¡°So, Riku-han. What do you want to say to me? You are just resting yesterday, and yet you are here today.¡± ¡°Yah, I have something else that I wanted to ask.¡± I looked at Kunou when I said that. Yasaka also looked at Kunou and then looked at me. ¡°You wanted Kunou?!¡± She exclaimed, surprised by her own misunderstanding. ¡°No!¡± I quickly answered her. Kunou¡¯s body flinched in the distance when she heard us. I could feel her glance and the murderous intent from her, aiming at me. Yasaka grinned at me, and I realize that I had fallen into her trap. I scratched the back of my head and said. ¡°Maybe when she¡¯s a little older?¡± ¡°Hahaha, Riku-han, I was just joking.¡± Laughed Yasaka. The murderous intent that I felt disappeared in an instant. I then looked at Yasaka seriously and said. ¡°Putting that aside, take me to Takamagahara. I wanted to get a little help from Amaterasu-sama you see?¡± ¡°To Takamagahara? I don¡¯t mind. Rather, Amaterasu-sama¡¯s brother, Susanoo no Mikoto was asking for you.¡± Ah, as I had expected. So he did tail me to Osaka yesterday. I laughed dryly. ¡°Ha-hahaha, well let¡¯s go?¡± RaizarP Author Here~ More than 60 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 133 – Takamagahara ¡°Kunou, you can rest for now.¡± Yasaka shouted at Kunou. Kunou turned towards us as the aura that surrounded her disappeared. She smiled and strode over us. ¡°Really? Where are you going after this, Mother, Onii-chan?¡± Asked Kunou. ¡°We are going to go to meet Amaterasu-sama. It¡¯s something a bit urgent so can you stay at home? It will be fast.¡± Answered Yasaka as she petted Kunou¡¯s head. ¡°Eh, could it be, you are going to Takamagahara?!¡± Kunou¡¯s eyes shined and she raised her hands in front of her. She looked at me with expectation as if she wanted to come with us. I crossed my arms and looked at Yasaka. She noticed what I wanted to say and shook her head. ¡®No, huh?¡¯ I then turned to Kunou and smiled. ¡°Sorry, Kunou. Maybe next time. I have something rather important to talk about with Amaterasu and her brother.¡± ¡°Eeh.¡± Kunou was visibly disappointed as her ears dropped and she looked at the ground. I approached her and whispered in her ear. ¡°When I come back, I will treat you to Ramen.¡± She raised her head at my words and beamed into a smile. ¡°Yes! It¡¯s a promise!¡± Kunou walked away after she said that and waved at me. I waved back and then turned to Yasaka. She was smiling with her arms crossed over her breasts and asked. ¡°Shall we? Please follow me.¡± ¡°Where are we going?¡± ¡°We will go to the Torii that connected Kyoto to Takamagahara. It¡¯s the only way for us, youkai, to enter Takamagahara without alarming the guards.¡± I nodded my head at her. Yasaka then walked in front of us slowly. I thought that we will teleport with the usual Magic Circle, but I was wrong. Maybe it was God''s privilege that they could teleport to their realm with just Magic Circle. But yeah, they must¡¯ve had the security that didn¡¯t allow anyone without any permission to teleport into their realm. It was logical that they could detect anyone who tried to enter their realm and stopped it. I was glad that the Gods in Takamagahara were not as stupid as I thought. ¡°The location of the Torii, is it far?¡± Yasaka glanced at me over her shoulder and answered. ¡°No, it¡¯s located in this temple. But, I need to ask for Amaterasu-sama¡¯s permission before the teleportation portal opened and we can cross to Takamagahara.¡± ¡°The one who asks permission, must it be you?¡± ¡°Yes, or the portal won¡¯t be opened.¡± I nodded my head. That was a good move. No one could kick Yasaka out of her position. I was still a bit skeptical about the youkai under Yasaka, they acted similar to Devil and always prioritize politics. While I followed politics too, like the alliance, I was not that tied to it. The youkai who should¡¯ve been the free race was tied to politics. It was laughable. I even laugh at myself, but I couldn¡¯t avoid it. But well, after Khaos Brigade was destroyed, and Rizevim was killed. I didn¡¯t need to involve myself in any politics in other factions again. I would live freely in my mansion while eating out sometimes. We stopped in front of a room in the center of the temple. It was a normal room with sliding doors, next to the meeting room. She opened the door and there was red Torii inside the room that was about twice my height. I was around 180cm, so the Toori must be around 300cm or higher. There was nothing else in the room, only the Torii. ¡°Please come in and close the door, Riku-han.¡± I stepped inside the room and closed the door. As soon as I closed the door, Yasaka looked at the Torii while stretching her right hand. I felt energy moving towards the Torii, and Yasaka closed her eyes. She was silent, the room was silent. I bet that she was communicating with Amaterasu through telepathy. A few seconds later, the Torii shined and the gate was connected to somewhere else. The other side of the Torii was now full of green grass and in the distance, I could see a row of traditional Japanese houses. Yasaka lowered her hand and looked at me. ¡°Let¡¯s go, Riku-han. I will guide you to Amaterasu-sama¡¯s abode.¡± She walked to the gate and crossed the Torii. It was a bit scary to cross into Takamagahara, but I followed her nonetheless as my goal lay right in front of me. When I crossed the Torii, there was an uncomfortable feeling as if I just entered a barrier uninvited. I looked around the area and I noticed that we were on top of the mountain with clouds hiding the base of the mountain. There were three peaks of the mountains, and we were on one of them. It was a beautiful sight, it was the opposite of the Underworld. Yasaka noticed that I was amazed and let out a light giggle. ¡°Welcome to Takamagahara, Riku-han.¡± ¡°Yeah, where is Amaterasu-sama¡¯s abode?¡± I asked Yasaka while being careful with my tone. I now couldn¡¯t afford to call Amaterasu without ¨Csama or goddess. This was Takamagahara, and she was the leader of the Shinto God, alongside his brothers. My head could fly if I called her carelessly. It was just a metaphore, as I could always escape when I was in danger. Yasaka looked behind me and pointed her index finger. ¡°There, we are right in front of it.¡± I looked back immediately and saw a Japanese mansion behind me. The Torii that I crossed was still there, but I couldn¡¯t see the other side like earlier. The mansion in front of me was not as big as mine, but it was more luxurious. It was decorated with white paint and a lot of Japanese lanterns. The gate was opened when I looked at the mansion, and a girl with black hair walked out of the mansion with a smile on her face. She walked towards us and greeted us. ¡°Welcome to my abode, Yasaka, Riku.¡± I smiled at the girl and bowed my head a little. Yasaka also bowed beside me and we both said. ¡°Thank you for welcoming us, Amaterasu-sama.¡± RaizarP Author Here~ More than 60 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 134 – Susanoo no Mikoto We were now inside Amaterasu¡¯s mansion. There were a lot of servants here that looked like Miko. They were all wearing Miko outfits, white tops, and red bottoms. Their face was hidden with some kind of cloth, it was so that they won¡¯t be able to look at Amaterasu directly. It was their custom to honor the Shinto Gods, as they were just humans Miko. Calling them normal humans would be wrong, however, they were not like Magicians or the other humans that were involved in the Supernatural world. They were born to serve Gods, that was the meaning of their existence. Yasaka didn¡¯t mind them and Amaterasu took us to one of the separate places to greet a guest. It was located on the side of her mansion, right on the edge of the mountain. The scenery from that place was amazing, and it was not a building, it was like a terrace with a roof, table, and chairs. We sat on the chair that circled the table with me beside Yasaka and Amaterasu in front of us. The servant that was donned in Miko outfits also followed us. When we sat, they quickly prepared three cups of green tea on top of the table. ¡°Thank you.¡± I said to one of the Miko. She? just nodded her head without saying anything before walking to the edge of the mansion and standing there, under the sunlight. Now that was another mystery of this realm. How could there be a sun in Takamagahara? Was Takamagahara actually located on Earth? ¡°It¡¯s rare for you to contact me first, Yasaka. Moreover, Riku is tagging along with you.¡± Amaterasu said while lifting the teacup to her mouth. ¡°I¡¯m sorry for the sudden visit, Amaterasu-sama.¡± Yasaka smiled and bowed her head a little. ¡°Don¡¯t mind it, I''m rather happy to see you. I guess the one who wanted to see me today is Riku, no?¡± Amaterasu looked at me with a smile. It was a gentle and kind smile, really different from the smile of the other people that I met all this time. ¡®Most of them are battle crazed smiles or a sly one, this is healing my soul to see there is still someone as gentle as her.¡¯ Amaterasu was gentle, but she was still a God. She was strong, so I mustn¡¯t forget about that. ¡°Yes, Amaterasu-sama. The thing is, I wanted to tell you something¡­¡± Then I told her about everything that I did in the past few days. Starting from destroying the Hero Factions, making an alliance with the Church and Azazel, continuing to my journey to the Underworld. Amaterasu listened to me patiently. She sometimes covered her mouth in surprise, but the real surprise was when I told her that the Devil, under the Satan, wanted peace and the peace conference between the 3 factions would be held in a week. ¡°Sirzechs is like that. He wanted peace to protect the Devil, or at least his family. When you are in a war, you will feel you are in danger each time. Because the Satans experienced War themselves, they tend to cherish their family more than the older devil.¡± Amaterasu took a sip from the teacup in her hand and looked at me. ¡°Sirzechs and Serafall are like that. But be careful of the older devil, especially Zekram Bael. That old devil is cunning, and he¡¯s the one who controls the devil society from behind the Satans. Even the 4 Satans couldn¡¯t do anything to them for now, at least not yet.¡± Right, I knew that already. Which was why I nodded my head at Amaterasu. ¡°Also, the East Youkai Faction will have a friendly competition with the exorcists under Vasco. If you are interested, I will invite you to watch it, Amaterasu-sama.¡± I smiled at her and she seemed to be interested in it. Her eyes shined and she leaned her head a little closer to me. ¡°Really? When is it? You really do a good job forging the relationship with all those factions!¡± ¡°Well, the enemy called Khaos Brigade is strong. I admit that I will not be able to destroy them myself, or even with my Hyakki Yakkou. So, I decided to just make allies.¡± ¡°I don¡¯t mind. Nurarihyon had visited me before his journey, and he talked about that himself. He was now in India with Sun Wukong if I am not wrong.¡± So my old man visited Takamagahara before he went on his journey? Damn, and now he was in India with Sun Wukong, he reached that place in just a few days. ¡°However, Riku. I got a bit of disturbing information from Nurarihyon that stayed in India.¡± Amaterasu said in a serious tone. ¡®Disturbing Information?¡¯ I leaned my head closer and put on a serious face. ¡°Let¡¯s hear it.¡± Amaterasu nodded her head, ¡°It seems that the Hero Faction that you destroyed has a God from the same mythology as Shiva backing them. And now, the god in question is interested in you.¡± My eyes narrowed dangerously. A god that was backing the Hero Faction, I really forgot about him. ¡°Indra, huh?¡± ¡°You knew?¡± Asked Amaterasu, surprised. I nodded my head slightly and crossed my arms. ¡°Yeah, just by a chance. When I said that I will take on the Hero Faction, my old man suddenly decided to go on a journey to meet Sun Wukong. From that, I could narrow my suspicion to the God in that place.¡± I let out a sigh and then continued. ¡°It¡¯s not like he wanted to kill me, right? As a God of War himself, he would be delighted to be able to see a good fight.¡± ¡°Fortunately, that¡¯s the case.¡± Amaterasu nodded, confirmed my words. ¡°Indra just got interested in you, he wanted to meet you. And so my brother too.¡± ¡®Ah, that¡¯s right.¡¯ I slammed my hands on the table, surprising Amaterasu and Yasaka. ¡°That¡¯s right! I felt Susanoo no Mikoto energy in Osaka yesterday.¡± Amaterasu covered her face with her hands and sighed. ¡°Sigh, I know. I had told him, and it seems that he¡¯s here too.¡± Amaterasu looked in the direction of her mansion, to the row of the Miko in the distance. ¡°Brother, you can come out, you know?¡± I looked in the direction where Amaterasu looked at and then a guy with long black hair stepped out from behind the Miko. ¡®When?¡¯ I was surprised. Although I didn¡¯t spread my Senjutsu in this place to respect the gods that reside in Takamagahara, I couldn¡¯t sense his presence at all. The guy walked to us with a smile on his face and then greeted me. ¡°Hello, I am Susanoo no Mikoto. Let¡¯s cut the greeting and how about having a duel with me, Nura Riku?¡± This guy was a nut. Another battle maniac. However, it was not my style to refuse an offer to duel. I smiled back at Susanoo and answered. ¡°Sure, I don¡¯t mind.¡± ¡®Time to see how I fare against God.¡¯ RaizarP Author Here~ More than 60 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 135 – Duel with Susanoo ¡°Susanoo Onii-sama, don¡¯t be too rash!¡± Right now we were in the hall at the foot of the mountain. The hall was big, enough to let us fight freely on the ground or the sky. Susanoo brought me here after he asked me for a duel. Yasaka and Amaterasu followed us and stood by the side. In front of me, Susanoo stood with a smile without even holding a weapon. Was he overconfident or did he underestimate me? Both were possibilities, and it irked me. When someone acted overconfident in front of me, I couldn¡¯t help but act like one too. Which was why I didn¡¯t summon Nenekirimaru. Susanoo had a smile on his face and he looked at me. ¡°Are you going to face me barehanded?¡± He moved his hands and warmed up by stretching them to the side. I loosened my shoulder and cracked my neck. ¡°Don¡¯t worry, I am strong.¡± ¡°I know. Then, should we use a wooden sword instead of a real one? We are strong, so we need to hold back a little bit to not disturb this realm.¡± That was reasonable. But the wooden sword broke easily, was that okay? ¡°The wooden sword won¡¯t break, it was made from a special tree.¡± As Susanoo said that, two wooden swords that were as long as Nenekirimaru appeared in his hands. He tossed one of the wooden swords to me and I caught it with my right hand. I looked at the wooden sword and it was as strong as he said. I smiled and looked at Susanoo. ¡°Do you mind if I take this as a gift for this duel?¡± Susanoo held the wooden sword with both of his hands and pointed the tip at me, taking a stance of kendo. ¡°Sure, let¡¯s start with a little battle first?¡± I held the wooden sword tightly in my right hand and pointed the tip to Susanoo. My left hand was hidden behind my body, my left leg was behind my right leg. ¡°Let¡¯s do it.¡± We both looked at Amaterasu at the same time and nodded our heads before looking at each other again. It was to signal Amaterasu to start our duel. ¡°Well then, don¡¯t be too rash! Begin!¡± As soon as Amaterasu shouted, both of us leaped at the same time and met in the middle of the arena. Our wooden swords clashed, creating a small shockwave around us. Susanoo had a grin on his face. ¡°You are strong as I have expected.¡± ¡°While you are stronger than I thought,¡± I answered Susanoo and sent a kick from below. He jumped back to dodge my kick and he just stood there silently while in his stance. To be honest, he was stronger than I thought. When our swords clashed earlier, his strength was visibly far above Vasco while he was clad in his holy energy. If I compared his strength to someone, it would be Tsuchigumo. It was like I was punched with 2 of Tsuchigumo¡¯s arms at the same time. ¡°This is fun.¡± I muttered and then kicked the ground, closing my distance with Susanoo. My swords moved a few times, aiming at Susanoo¡¯s limbs. Slashes after slashes were blocked or dodged. Susanoo also sometimes deflected the slash and counterattacked. He purely used swordsmanship. He was the first one after my old man who could fight me this long with just pure swordsmanship. ¡°As expected of the slayer of Yamata no Orochi!¡± I shouted at Susanoo and increased the strength behind my swing. Susanoo blocked the swing and was blown away a few meters to the side. He must¡¯ve never expected it. His grin turned wider, and I could now feel some energy surrounding him. The energy was similar to the one that I felt in Osaka. ¡°I see, let¡¯s increase the pace, shall we?¡± I began to gather Senjutsu aura around me and enhanced my physical body a little. It surprised me again, the Senjutsu Aura in this place was clear, it almost contain no Malice Energy that made the process painful. The effect was also greater, I grinned in response. ¡°Yeah, be careful though, I am not used to the Senjutsu Aura in this place yet!¡± As I said that, I ran so fast that I left afterimages. It was a sham technique that was similar to my Kyouka Suigetsu, but it was purely speed, unlike the technique that used Fear to create a living image of me. I swung my sword from below to the upper right, catching Susanoo off guard. When he realized it, I was already below him. It was only when I swung my sword that he noticed me and moved his sword to block my strike. This time he was not blown away, but the shockwave that was created from our clash was bigger than the first shockwave. Susanoo didn¡¯t stop that. After he blocked my strike, he took a step backward, raised his sword, and swung it downward in one swift movement. My position was not favorable, so I dodged the strike by stepping to the right and swinging my sword horizontally. Susanoo stopped his swing midway and changed the course towards me. It surprised me for a second but I immediately changed the trajectory of my swing and blocked his strike. ¡°Tsk!¡± It was hard enough to change the trajectory of my swing, but blocking Susanoo¡¯s strike made it harder. My stance was not good enough, so I decided to jump back as soon as our sword clashed to minimalize the damage caused by the attack. I landed around 10 meters away from Susanoo on my feet. Then I looked at Susanoo. He also didn¡¯t escape from the clash uninjured. His hand that held the sword trembled a little, and he raised it a little. ¡°My hand went a little numb from that.¡± He said slightly. To be honest, my hand also went numb a little from stopping my attack midway. But I acted strong and tapped my sword against my shoulder. ¡°Hahahaha, our sword skill seems to be almost equal. How about we go to the next stage already?¡± It made me happy. My sword skill was equal to a God that slew Yamata no Orochi. Susanoo looked at me and then said. ¡°You¡¯re right. Should we increase our pace?¡± The energy that surrounded Susanoo became thicker. The wind blew inside the hall and it made a small storm that centered around Susanoo. The storm was trying to suck us in. Amaterasu and Yasaka on the side were hidden behind a barrier that Amaterasu made, they looked at me with concerned eyes. Seeing the intensity of the storm, I couldn¡¯t hold back any longer. I gathered Senjutsu Aura around me and enhanced my body to the limit. I also shrouded my body with Fear and now I could stand in the storm with no problem. Susanoo¡¯s voice rang from inside the storm. ¡°Now, let¡¯s begin.¡± RaizarP Author Here~ More than 60 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 136 – Duel with Susanoo 2 With him being ready, the storm¡¯s intensity increased. It sucked me towards him. ¡®If that¡¯s what you want, I will give it to you.¡¯ I grinned and used Meikyo Shisui. It was my first time using this technique against a God, so I needed to make sure I applied enough Fear. My Fear was not as effective against someone who had no Fear, but God still Fear something unknown. As proof, they fear Great Red, Ophis, and Trihexa. A black cloud of smoke surrounded my body, and I melted into thin air, disappearing from Susanoo¡¯s sight. I observed his reaction, and sure enough, he wasn¡¯t able to see me. ¡°Hoo, is that a technique that could only be used by Nurarihyon? I believe it¡¯s called Fear.¡± Susanoo was interested in my technique, and he grinned. ¡°Let¡¯s see if you can escape this storm!¡± The hall became darker, and then a flash of lightning appeared. ¡®For real?¡¯ I was standing a bit distance away from Susanoo and got surprised by the lightning. ¡°You created a real storm inside this hall?!¡± I shouted at Susanoo while dispersing my voice, in order to hide my real location from him. ¡°Hahaha, of course, come here!¡± As he said that, Susanoo swung his wooden sword. It generated a wind blade that slashed through the storm and advanced towards my previous location. However, I had moved from that, so the wind blade only hit the floor, and it exploded into a burst of lightning. Bam! Crackle! I looked at the place where the wind blade stuck, it was now destroyed and charred. Sweat began to form on my forehead. ¡®That¡¯s dangerous. I have no Nenekirimaru, so I should dodge it.¡¯ Even a wind slash created from a wooden sword was enough to destroy the ground, what if he held Amano Murakumo no Tsurugi? However, I just need to dodge his attack, I could do that much. ¡°Come here, don¡¯t hide!¡± Susanoo shouted and sent a barrage of slashes. All of it contained the same destructive power as the first slash, it was terrifying. I advanced through the storm, dodging the frequent lightning that struck a random place inside the storm, and reached Susanoo after a few seconds. As I reached Susanoo, I coated the wooden sword with flame using Youjutsu, creating a blue flame over the blade. I was under him, and I swung my sword from the bottom left to the upper right. When I swung my sword, I appeared in his sight and he glanced at me. He grinned and moved his sword to intercept mine. His sword was surrounded by a swirl of wind. Bam! Both swords clashed with each other and creating an explosion. Fury storm was now filled with a blue flame that was dancing in the sky. We were in the center of the storm, so we were not affected, but Yasaka and Amaterasu were having a hard time on the side. ¡°We will be leaving first!¡± I could hear Amaterasu shout from the side, and the next thing that I felt was their presence disappeared from the hall. So they teleported away, that was good. This meant¡­ ¡°We can now go all out!¡± Shouted Susanoo as he pulled his sword away. He raised it above his head and sent a barrage of slashes towards me, each getting stronger after each slash. ¡°Show me all you got, Nura Riku!¡± ¡°Fine, I will.¡± I answered Susanoo with a grin, and right after I said that, the storm disappeared. ¡°Oh?¡± He wasn¡¯t surprised, but he was intrigued. We were still exchanging swords slashes at a fast speed, it was now pure swordsmanship again. The reason why the storm disappeared was I changed the probability of that. A storm was a natural phenomenon. So I just need to lower the probability that there was a storm in this area. ¡®It¡¯s easier than I thought. And Telos Karma now could affect even a God.¡¯ It was the proof that I got stronger, and I was happy. In the middle of our exchange, I used Kyouka Suigetsu and moved to the side. My fake was defending against Susanoo, but it had a hard time. Susanoo noticed it, and he raised his sword high above his head, intending to end the duel here and then. His sword was covered with enormous energy, creating a tornado around the blade. ¡°It¡¯s over!¡± He swung his sword down and struck my Fake. As soon as the attack connected, a fury wind appeared and sweep the area clean, even I couldn¡¯t see the black smoke that usually appeared when my Fake got hit. Susanoo then felt uneasy, he had a confused expression. The wind abated after a few seconds, and he noticed that I was not there. He looked around, but it was too late. ¡°Yeah, it¡¯s over.¡± My sword had already been swung, and it hit Susanoo¡¯s solar plexus without him being able to defend against it. I infused all Senjutsu into the blade, and I further coated it with flame created from Youjutsu. It burnt Susanoo as soon as it made contact with his body, and he was blown away to the wall of the hall. Crash! He crashed to the wall, stopping his body. The wall cracked and created a lot of dust around the crash area. The building was made from a rather strong material, and Amaterasu was confident that we wouldn¡¯t be able to make a dent in the wall. However, now the wall had cracked, which showed how strong my attack was. I was happy, but the next second surprised me more than my old man¡¯s prank. The dust around the area where Susanoo¡¯s landed had subsided, and I saw Susanoo walking to me with a smile on his face. There were bruises here and there, even his clothes and skin were burnt. But, he acted as if nothing had happened and walked to me. ¡°Hahahaha, you are strong, as I had expected.¡± He said to me and patted my shoulder with his hand. When he was standing in front of me, I could see his wound healing at a visible rate. How could someone explain this? Maybe he could see my confusion from my expression, Susanoo lowered his hand and said. ¡°There is a barrier around this hall. The wound healing faster in this place. Look, even your stamina had recovered already, right?¡± When Susanoo brought that up, I noticed that I was in my top condition even when I went almost all-out in the duel earlier. ¡°That¡¯s true.¡± ¡°See?¡± Said Susanoo, ¡°You are stronger than I thought. You are able to defeat me when I was using half of my strength.¡± ¡®That was half? Then¡­ isn¡¯t he too strong? Indeed he couldn¡¯t even hit me, but I couldn¡¯t land a hit on him too. As expected, I need to get Incinerate Anthem to increase my attack power.¡¯ ¡°Yeah, thanks. You are strong too.¡± ¡°Well then, let¡¯s eat! I guess my sister had prepared food in her residence, let¡¯s go there!¡± Susanoo circled his hand over my shoulder and pulled me away from the hall, towards Amaterasu¡¯s house. RaizarP Author Here~ More than 60 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 137 – Ame no Murakumo no Tsurugi ¡°Hahahaha, he was able to land a hit on me while I was a bit serious! Not only that, he was able to erase my storm, he¡¯s amazing.¡± Susanoo praised me with a happy tone in front of Yasaka and Amaterasu. We were now inside Amaterasu¡¯s abode, sitting around a round table in seiza. He talked with a soft voice, not too loud not too quiet. Yasaka seemed to be amazed by the story, she stole a glance towards me a few times as we ate the dish that was prepared by Amaterasu¡¯s Miko. ¡°Brother, if you grade his strength amongst the Supernatural world, then what¡¯s his position in your opinion?¡± Asked Amaterasu. ¡°Hmm¡­¡± Susanoo touched his chin as he looked at me. ¡°I guess if it¡¯s about running away, he will be number one. Even I couldn¡¯t detect him when he used his Fear.¡± I crossed my arms and nodded with a smug smile. Of course, that would be the case, no one would be able to catch me if I seriously hid myself. Unless they had a goddamn cheat that was called Telos Karma themselves. To get recognition from a God that was said to be able to match Sirzechs was good. If he couldn¡¯t catch me, then Sirzechs would certainly be unable to catch me too. ¡°That¡¯s his running and hiding skill. But his power is too low, maybe he¡¯s in the top 100? Or top 300 in terms of strength. If he could fix that weakness, then getting into the top 50 or top 30 of strength is not strange at all.¡± Amaterasu and Yasaka were surprised, their mouth gaped. Susanoo looked at me with a grin on his face. He seemed to read my thought and maybe he was thinking something. That problem would be fixed in a while. I grinned at Susanoo and said. ¡°I plan to fix that in two days. This is a good chance, do you want to tag along, Susanoo? I can call you that, right?¡± ¡°Hmm, I don¡¯t mind. However, please do call me with my title in front of other Gods other than my sister and brother.¡± ¡°Of course.¡± I nodded my head. He nodded back to me and leaned his head a little, interested in what I said earlier. His hand was blocking his mouth, and he whispered to me. ¡°So, where do you want to go?¡± I whispered back to him, covering my mouth so Amaterasu and Yasaka wouldn¡¯t know. If they knew, they would certainly try to stop me, I couldn¡¯t risk that. ¡°Dimensional gap. You heard that Magicians attacked Kyoto 2 days ago, right? I will go to their base and wreak havoc in there. My main objectives are two. Destroying their group, and getting a special Sacred Gear called Incinerate Anthem.¡± ¡°Oho, that¡¯s certainly a good Sacred Gear to fix your weakness. But how¡­¡± Susanoo asked me with a tone of curiosity. But then, maybe he noticed a grin on my face, he pulled away and smiled. ¡°Nevermind, I know what you think. But, sorry Riku. I can¡¯t go with you to that place.¡± ¡°Is that so?¡± I was a bit disappointed. If Susanoo accompanied me to that place, the thing would be much easier. But well, Dimensional Gap was not a place that could be visited by someone like Susanoo easily without much thought. ¡°But well, I was thinking of going there with Kuroka and Tsura though. They will be enough to help me.¡± I sat straight and ate the dish in front of me. It was a typical Japanese dish that consisted of Rice, Mackarel, and Miso soup. The taste, however, was different from the dishes from Earth. It was more delicious. ¡°So, Riku-han. You are already met Susanoo-sama. Isn¡¯t there something that you wanted to talk about with him?¡± Asked Yasaka. Ah, right. My main objective of visit Takamagahara. Susanoo looked at me, waiting for me to ask him after he heard Yasaka. I looked at him and asked. ¡°Were you in Osaka yesterday?¡± I almost forgot about it, but I couldn¡¯t feel the Dragon¡¯s energy from Susanoo. The energy that I felt yesterday was clearly Susanoo¡¯s, but there was a Dragon¡¯s energy mixed in it. ¡°No? I was creating rain someplace in Japan yesterday because of a prayer from the farmer. However, I didn¡¯t think that I visit Osaka.¡± ¡°Wait a minute, are you sure?¡± If that was true, then whose energy was that? It was clearly Susanoo¡¯s, but¡­ Wait, Susanoo¡¯s energy? He was a god of Storm, and he was famous because he slew Yamata no Orochi. If there was a dragon¡¯s energy mixed in that energy, then¡­ ¡®Yamata no Orochi had been revived? No, maybe it¡¯s just the sword, Ame no Murakumo no Tsurugi.¡¯ ¡°Yes, I am sure. Why do you ask that question?¡± Yasaka looked at me with a worried gaze, but I looked at Susanoo seriously. ¡°I felt your energy yesterday, in Osaka. After meeting you like this, I am sure that the one that I felt was similar to yours.¡± ¡°Are you sure?¡± Susanoo raised his voice a little. Amaterasu also got surprised by what I said. ¡°Brother, does that mean, the sword?¡± Asked Amaterasu to Susanoo with a worried tone. ¡°Yeah, that¡¯s the only possibility.¡± Answered Susanoo. ¡°As I thought, the Kusanagi sword is not in the hand of Shinto, right? Did you lose it?¡± I asked Susanoo with a serious tone. That sword was a Holy Sword of Shinto God that was found inside Yamata no Orochi¡¯s corpse. I thought that the Shinto God was able to keep it in this world because there was my old man, but it seemed like that was not the case. ¡°I am ashamed to say this, but it was stolen a few years ago.¡± Said Amaterasu as she lowered her face. ¡°But how?¡± The sword was stolen. There was one possibility, but Amaterasu and Susanoo wouldn¡¯t be able to believe that. No, they didn¡¯t want to believe it. ¡°I always had this uneasy feeling, but tell me, are you sure it¡¯s my energy?¡± ¡°Yeah, it then split into different directions. Mayb- wait. It was headed in 8 different directions. Could it be?¡± 8 different directions, 8 heads. Yamata no Orochi¡¯s soul was inside the sword. ¡°Then it¡¯s Ame no Murakumo no Tsurugi. I will make my move, thank you for informing me about this, Riku.¡± As Susanoo said that, he stood up. Amaterasu also stood up and looked at me with a smile, ¡°Thank you for the information. I¡¯m sorry, but I think it¡¯s better if you leave right now before the thing goes south.¡± Ah, I understood. Susanoo wanted to weed the traitor. I stood up calmly, Yasaka followed suit. ¡°Alright. Thanks for having me.¡± I said to Amaterasu and walked away, followed by Yasaka after she said something to Amaterasu. When I was about to exit the house, Susanoo called out to me. ¡°I will visit you someday, let¡¯s have a spar again.¡± I waved my right hand at him and answered. ¡°Sure!¡± And so, I and Yasaka left Takamagahara by teleporting through the Torii that we used to come here. RaizarP Author Here~ More than 60 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 138 – Bringing Kunou Home As we arrived at Yasaka¡¯s shrine, Kunou was already waiting in front of the room. She noticed us and entered the room with a smile on her face. ¡°Welcome back! Onii-chan, Mother.¡± She approached us and stopped in front of us. My hand reached out to her head and patted her before Yasaka even moved. ¡°Yeah, I¡¯m back.¡± Kunou closed her eyes to feel my hand as her smile widened. ¡°Ara, are you that happy to get patted by Riku-han, my little daughter? I feel jealous now.¡± ¡°Hahaha, are you jealous of Kunou or me? I can pat you too if you want to. I have two hands.¡± I said to Yasaka with a joking tone. Unexpectedly, Yasaka just smiled at me without saying anything for a moment. Kunou who felt the atmosphere had changed into a weird turn tugged my Kimono. ¡°Hey, Riku Onii-chan. You promised to take me to the Ramen shop after you come back, right? Let¡¯s go, to the ramen shop.¡± I looked at Kunou and remembered my promise. I crouched to match her gaze and smiled. ¡°Sure, where should we go?¡± ¡°Umm, Kanto. I wanted some ramen in Tokyo!¡± ¡°Sure, how about you hide your ears and tails? We will go in our human form.¡± As I said that to Kunou, she nodded her head energetically and said. ¡°Un!¡± I then looked at Yasaka. ¡°Do you want to come too?¡± ¡°Do you need to ask? I can¡¯t leave Kyoto.¡± Answered Yasaka. Of course, that would be the case. ¡°Sorry.¡± I said to Yasaka as I stood up. ¡°Then, how about me? Can I tag along?¡± Suddenly a voice came from outside of the room. I looked at the source of the voice and saw Hagoromo Gitsune standing at the entrance. ¡°It¡¯s ramen, you know?¡± I asked her. ¡°I can stand garlic.¡± Answered Hagoromo Gitsune. She then looked at Kunou with a smug smile on her face. Kunou looked back at her with a slight frown. Ah, so she was teasing Kunou. Hagoromo Gitsune that I knew would never tag along with me if I went to eat something. She knew what I did, eating without paying. ¡°Don¡¯t worry, Kunou. It will only be the two of us.¡± I ruffled Kunou¡¯s hair, making her turn to me with a big smile. I then looked at Hagoromo Gitsune. She crossed her arms and approached me. ¡°How is it, your training with Yasaka?¡± I asked her. ¡°It¡¯s good, I am now able to at least use a bit of Leyline¡¯s power. Maybe, in a week or so I will be able to help Yasaka to control the Leyline, allowing her to leave Kyoto.¡± She then looked at Yasaka with a smile. I looked at Yasaka too, her eyes widened, but she had a sad smile on her face. ¡°I am grateful, but please don¡¯t push yourself.¡± She thought that Hagoromo Gitsune was pushing herself to learn Leyline? Yasaka, I knew that you were a leader and someone who had a close tie to Leyline. However, Hagoromo Gitsune was not an ordinary youkai. She was a youkai that reincarnated a few times. Her son was the most skilled exorcist, he had technique with a close tie with Leyline too. ¡°Sigh, I am not pushing myself.¡± Answered Hagoromo Gitsune. Yasaka seemed to not believe Hagoromo Gitsune, so I spoke to her. ¡°Don¡¯t worry about Hagoromo Gitsune, Yasaka. She had experience with the Leyline in her world, so it was not strange that she could master the technique in a week or so.¡± My words seemed to be heard clearly by Yasaka. Her worried expression melted and now she had a warm smile on her face. She faced Hagoromo Gitsune and said. ¡°Thank you.¡± ¡°You¡¯re welcome.¡± Answered Hagoromo Gitsune. ¡°Can you teach me again? I was waiting for you.¡± ¡°Sure.¡± It seemed that they would start Hagoromo Gitsune¡¯s training. I won¡¯t be any help in this place, so I walked away silently after I gestured Kunou. When we were outside of the room, I looked at Kunou who walked beside me. ¡°Let¡¯s go? Besides Ramen, is there anything that you like to see?¡± ¡°I want to visit your mansion, Riku Onii-chan. I heard from Hagoromo Gitsune that there is a lot of a different kind of youkai in your mansion.¡± ¡°Oh, you want to see those guys? Sure, I will introduce you to my boys.¡± ¡°Un!¡± Answered Kunou with a nod. Because our destination had been decided, I teleported ourselves to Kanto. We arrived in front of my mansion. Right when I appeared in front of the mansion, Kubinashi who was sweeping in front of the entrance greeted me. ¡°Welcome back, Riku-sama.¡± He then noticed Kunou who stood beside me and made a difficult expression. ¡°Riku-sama¡­ do you kidnap that kid?¡± I looked at Kubinashi for a second then turned at Kunou. I pointed my index finger at the clueless Kunou and Kubinashi nodded his head. When I saw that, I grinned and put my right hand on top of Kunou¡¯s head, ruffling her hair. ¡°Yeah, I found a cute girl in Kyoto, so I kidnapped her.¡± ¡°You have finally gone too far, Riku-sama.¡± Answered Kubinashi while shrugging his shoulder. Kunou was clueless, she was now looking at me with a confused expression. Not long after that, a lot of small youkai from the mansion came out while running around, playing. They were shouting so loudly that Kunou noticed them, and she got a curious face when she saw those youkai. Small youkai was rare in this world, most of the youkai had a body of a human. So the youkai like Nattou-Kozou was not seen often. ¡°I was just joking, Kubinashi. She¡¯s Yasaka¡¯s daughter, Kunou.¡± As I introduced her, Kunou looked at Kubinashi and bowed her head a little. ¡°I am Kunou, nice to meet you!¡± Kubinashi was taught about this world, especially the leader of the Youkai Clan. That was why he knew Yasaka too. Kubinashi then bowed his head at Kunou and introduced himself with a smile. ¡°Ah! My name is Kubinashi, nice to meet you.¡± After introducing himself, he looked at me and sent a sign with his eyes. He looked at the dojo where Masaomi frequently used. He wanted me to visit the dojo? That wouldn¡¯t be a problem. Kunou said she wanted to visit my mansion, I could ask Kubinashi to accompany her for a while. ¡°Kunou, I have something do to for a few minutes. You said you wanted to see my mansion, right? Have Kubinashi to show you around the mansion.¡± ¡°Please leave it to me, Riku-sama!¡± Exclaimed Kubinashi. ¡°I don¡¯t mind. Just don¡¯t forget the ramen that you promised.¡± Said Kunou. ¡°Yeah, have fun in the mansion.¡± As I said that, I entered my mansion and made my way towards the dojo. Kunou walked to Kubinashi and began to talk with him. I didn¡¯t need to worry about her, Kubinashi was good at handling someone at Kunou¡¯s age. I had arrived at the dojo and saw Masaomi sitting in the middle of the dojo with closed eyes. There were two swords in front of him, Gram and Excalibur Rapidly. ¡°What¡¯s up, Masaomi?¡± I greeted him as I entered the dojo. He then opened his eyes and said. ¡°Welcome, Riku-sama.¡± ¡°So, why do you want to see me?¡± I asked Masaomi as I sat in front of him. Masaomi gulped a little and answered, ¡°To be honest, can you please take Gram away? I can¡¯t handle holding two swords like them at the same time.¡± RaizarP Author Here~ More than 60 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 139 – Bonding Gram ¡°Is that so? My bad, I didn¡¯t think that you would be burdened.¡± I said to Masaomi as I reached the handle of Gram. ¡°No, Riku-sama. Please don¡¯t worry about it. It¡¯s an experience for me, and I did get stronger a little because I fought the pressure for a few days straight.¡± Answered Masaomi with a smile. I raised Gram with my right hand. It didn¡¯t pressure me at all. Rather, the sword felt right in my hand and it glowed a little when I held it. My lips curved into a smile as I looked at Gram. ¡°Could it be? I have the affinity to be a demon sword user? This sword didn¡¯t even resist when I held it.¡± ¡°That¡¯s great then! You didn¡¯t even need to use your Sacred Gear!¡± Masaomi sounded happy. However, I just held it. I didn¡¯t use it yet and I didn¡¯t even know whether I was able to use Gram¡¯s power yet. I stood up and held Gram with both of my hands. I tried to bond with the sword, but how? Should I inject my energy like I did when I bonded with Nenekirimaru? Without much thought, I slowly injected my energy towards the sword. The sword glowed a little and trembled in my hand. It was like a child that was getting fed after letting starved for a few days. The black blade was now letting out a red ominous aura. As expected of the one called strongest demon sword, it was amazing. It was stronger than Durandal, a perfect sword to kill a Dragon. Now I could feel a connection with the sword. I now tried to dismiss it, similar to what I did to Nenekirimaru and puff, the sword disappeared from my hand. ¡°Hahaha, it¡¯s done.¡± I laughed. My mood had become better, this sword alone was worth the problem of destroying Hero Faction. The next agenda would be Incinerate Anthem, after that would be Valerie Tepes. I had established a friendly relationship with Gasper, but with just that, I doubt he would agree if I asked him to take me to Vampire World. But well, testing the world came first. ¡°Masaomi, mind following me a second? Let¡¯s try the sword capability in the mountain. Let¡¯s have a small spar.¡± Masaomi took the Excalibur Rapidly in front of him and dismissed him. Hou, so he was able to bond with the sword, that was good. He then stood up and nodded his head. ¡°Sure. Please be kind to me.¡± Said Masaomi. ¡°Hahahaha.¡± I just laughed it off and teleport us to the mountain. *** We were in the mountain near Kuoh Academy that was often used for the devil to try. I could feel Sona and her peerage in the school, even Shirone was now in the school. That was why I didn¡¯t see her in the mansion. The first thing that I did when I arrived at the mountain with Masaomi was to make a barrier around us. I added Fear to the barrier to hide our presence. Gram was one of my trump cards, I couldn¡¯t let any other people know about it. Vasco maybe knew about it because I sparred with him, but he wasn¡¯t someone who would spread it to other factions. ¡°Are you ready, Masaomi?¡± I asked him and called Gram again to my hand. I didn¡¯t need to use Gram¡¯s ability in the spar, but I would certainly try it later. ¡°I¡¯m ready.¡± Answered Masaomi as he called out to Excalibur Rapidly. The probability that Masaomi would be harmed by Holy Energy had been lowered as much as possible. He was now looked better compared to the first time he held the Excalibur. He trained hard, and it was visible. Let¡¯s see how strong my subordinate was after all this time. ¡°Ha!¡± I let out a small shout and kicked the ground. I reached Masaomi in one kick, and I swung Gram from above. Masaomi moved his sword with swift movement and redirected my strike to the ground. ¡°Guh!¡± He grunted. He was pushed back a little when he redirected my strike. Because of Gram¡¯s weight, I couldn¡¯t stop the strike and the blade hit the ground. Swish! It cut the ground as if it was butter, leaving a deep mark on the ground. I was surprised by how sharp the sword was, it similar to Nenekirimaru. Masaomi was also surprised, however, he took this chance to attack me. I quickly pulled Gram from the ground and blocked Masaomi¡¯s slash. Clang! Our sword interlocked, creating a spark in the meeting point. We both pulled away at the same time and sent a barrage of slashes towards each other. Clang! Swish Clang! The sound of blades meeting each other reverberated through the mountain. Our exchange was creating a small shockwave that blew the tree around us. Masaomi had a smile on his face, but his breath slowly turned rough. ¡°Hahahaha, what¡¯s wrong, Masaomi? Tired?¡± I laughed and mocked him through the exchange. ¡°Haa- Haa. I can still go.¡± Answered Masaomi. The exchange lasted for a few seconds. Thinking it was enough, I put more strength into my slash and swung my sword horizontally. ¡°Ora!¡± Masaomi was able to block my swing with his sword, but he was blown away and hit the tree in the distance. Crash! ¡°Ugh!¡± Air was pushed out from his lungs. He then collapsed to the ground, his sword fell to the ground. However, he got stronger a little. It was clear that he got stronger because he could now fight me longer than before. He didn¡¯t even use Excalibur Rapidly¡¯s buff, and yet he was able to move as fast as me. While it was true that I wasn¡¯t used to using Gram yet. The fact he was able to fight me that long was amazing. I approached Masaomi and saw that he lost consciousness. ¡°Welp, I went too far.¡± I was never expecting him to lost his consciousness. But well, I still had an experiment left, so I would stay here for now. ¡°Let¡¯s try the destructive power of Gram. I¡¯m excited.¡± RaizarP Author Here~ More than 60 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks for the New Executive! - Quellec Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 140 – Gram’s Power Before I tested Gram¡¯s full power, I carried Masaomi to the side, leaned her body against the tree. Not only that, I put a barrier in front of him to make sure he will be safe from the blast. It was said that Gram was stronger than Durandal. I knew Durandal¡¯s destructive power was nothing to scoff at, so maybe I could destroy this mountain with Gram? I walked to the center of a clearing that we used as a spar earlier. I held Gram with both of my hands and try some moves first. I swung Gram a few times. Downward swing, horizontal swing, and then finally I raised Gram above my head. Gram began to let out a red aura around the blade after I imbued it with my energy, forcing the destructive power out. For the first time ever, I wanted to use Gram at its full strength. I felt it, Gram could still take in more energy. So I feed it, I didn¡¯t stop. The red aura that surged out of the Gram¡¯s blade was now becoming thicker. It kept piling up, and then I couldn¡¯t inject my energy again. ¡°Oh?¡± I let out a surprised sound. The energy that surrounded Gram now was almost similar to the power of destruction. The color was the same, but I knew that they were different. Gram had a destructive force, not the power that eat anything. It was similar, yet different. I looked at the mountain in front of me, it was a medium-sized mountain. I shouldn¡¯t try this here, I just realized that fact after I accumulated the energy on my sword. However, I already made a barrier that isolated this area from the mundane world, even if I destroy a mountain or two, it will be restored as soon as I took the barrier down. But well, who cares. ¡°Let¡¯s see what you can do, Gram.¡± I swung gram downward with all my strength. The energy that I used was pure from Gram, I didn¡¯t add something like Senjutsu or Youjutsu to the sword. That meant, the destruction that was caused would purely come from the sword¡¯s power. As soon as I swung the sword down, the aura suddenly became a big sword, as big as the mountain. It surprised me, but the aura was composed of destructive force. When the aura hit the tip of the mountain, a loud explosion was heard from the distance. I swung the sword down again, ignoring the explosion. After I made a full swing, a loud explosion and crumbling sound followed suit. BAAAM!!! CRUMBLEE! I looked at the sight in front of me. The fucking mountain was split in half, and there was a new ramp that extended until the end of the barrier, making a triangle shape with me on the tip of it. The mountain was split, and the road to the mountain became a new cliff. ¡°Ha-hahaha.¡± I could only mutter a dry laugh as I looked at the destruction. It was ridiculous, I just swing the sword. I didn¡¯t use any technique such as Tsuki Giri, but it had this much destructive force? ¡°I obtained something ridiculous.¡± I said as I dismissed Gram. This would be used as my trump card. I should hide Gram. Nenekirimaru would be enough if I was fighting against someone under Super Devil class. Tsuki Giri was enough to defeat them, and there was also Matoi. Once again, I looked at the destruction in front of me. Fortunately, I hid our presence with a barrier that was imbued with my Fear. If I didn¡¯t add Fear into my barrier, someone must¡¯ve noticed this much destruction. That would be bad for me. Looking around, I saw that Masaomi was safe from the blast. I made my way towards him and carried him over my shoulder. ¡°Let¡¯s run from here.¡± While that maybe true no one would be able to feel it, I still need to be careful. I teleported away back to my mansion after dispelling the barrier in the area. The first thing that I saw after I teleported back to my mansion was chaos. The mansion¡¯s entrance was dirty with fallen leave, colored paint, and tree trunks that were scattered around. Kubinashi was looking at the mess with a tired face as he held his head. ¡°What happened, Kubinashi?¡± I asked him. He turned towards me and then smiled, ¡°Riku-sama! You are finally here! I have been searching for you since earlier!¡± He didn¡¯t notice Masaomi that was on my shoulder. First thing first, I tossed the unconsciouss Masomi towards Kubinashi. Although he was surprised, he was able to catch Masaomi with no problem. ¡°Eh? Why did he faint? Could it be, an attack?¡± Asked Kubinashi. ¡°No, I just hit him too hard in our spar.¡± I answered him and walked to my mansion. Kubinashi followed me from behind while carrying Masaomi on his shoulder. ¡°So, what happened?¡± I asked Kubinashi. ¡°Ah, right. To be honest, it was those small bastards doing. They were playing around too much, dragging Kunou-sama around.¡± Answered Kubinashi as he looked in the direction of the dining hall. ¡°They are now resting in the mansion. Kunou-sama has been searching for you right after the small youkais took a break.¡± Oh, right. The sun was about to set, it was time for dinner. ¡°Where is she right now?¡± Crossing my arms, I looked at Kubinashi. He then pointed in the direction of the pond in the backyard, near the Sakura Tree. ¡°I believe she¡¯s with Kappa in the backyard right now. He¡¯s good when taking care of a child, so I asked him to accompany Kunou-sama.¡± I nodded my head and headed to the backyard of the mansion. As usual, the youkai that saw me greeted me and I waved my hand at them with a smile on my face. Taking care of subordinates and servants was important, I should be kind towards them. When I arrived in the backyard, I saw Kunou was playing near the pond with Kappa. Kappa had an appearance of a young boy with a white cap on his head. ¡°Yo, Kunou, shall we go now?¡± I called out to Kunou from the hallway. Both of them looked at me. ¡°Riku Onii-chan!¡± She called out to me and ran towards me. Kappa stood up near the pond and nodded his head. When Kunou reached me, she pointed at Kappa. ¡°Is it okay if he came too?¡± She asked. I looked at Kappa and touched my chin. ¡°Hmm, you want to have ramen, Kappa?¡± ¡°Is it okay?¡± He asked with an uncertain tone. ¡°Yeah, I don¡¯t mind. Let¡¯s have a meal together.¡± Kunou had a smile after I answered Kappa¡¯s question. ¡°Then I will tag along, Riku-sama.¡± Answered Kappa. He walked to us and bowed a little at Kunou. Kunou seemed to be happy. Well, maybe she made friend with Kappa. Their height was also similar, maybe Kunou thought Kappa¡¯s age was similar to her? He was older though. ¡°Let¡¯s go then, to Tokyo.¡± I said while raising my right arm. ¡°Ou!¡± Kunou imitated me and shouted. RaizarP Author Here~ More than 60 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks for the New Executive! - Quellec Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 141 – Dulio Gesualdo The three of us were eating Ramen in Tokyo happily. Kunou¡¯s face was full of smiles as she ate the ramen. It was a short trip, but it was worth it. I took Kunou back to Kyoto after we were done eating, Kappa also followed us. While we were at it, I went to Nijo castle to see what Tsuchigumo doing with the dragon. I hope he didn¡¯t do anything strange or even taught the dragon something absurd. The last thing that I wanted to get was a battle-crazed dragon. It would be a disaster, and Tsuchigumo¡¯s existence would be known by the mundane that lived in Kyoto. Arriving at Nijo Castle, I saw Tsuchigumo sitting in front of the castle while smoking. The dragon was nowhere to be seen, but I could feel its energy inside the castle. The energy was smaller compared to the first time I met the dragon, maybe it was exhausted? ¡°Yo, Tsuchigumo.¡± I greeted Tsuchigumo as I raised my right hand. Kappa followed my gesture and raised his right hand too, waving at Tsuchigumo. ¡°Oh? What are you doing here, visiting me all of a sudden.¡± ¡°Just wanted to check on the dragon that you took. How is it?¡± ¡°Oh, that guy.¡± Tsuchigumo puffed smoke from his mouth and held the smoke pipe with her right hand. ¡°That guy got stronger faster than I thought. He¡¯s also able to recover his strength in just a day. A perfect time killer for me.¡± He smiled and pointed his pipe at me. ¡°So, I am grateful for that one. Don¡¯t try to take it from me.¡± I raised both of my hands, ¡°Don¡¯t worry, I won¡¯t.¡± I then lowered my hands again and smiled at Tsuchigumo. ¡°Rather, I got good news. In a week, there will be a friendly competition between youkai and church. Do you want to participate?¡± ¡°Hmm? Do you need to ask?¡± Tsuchigumo leaned his face closer to me. He was grinning happily, to the point his face turned creepy. ¡°Hahaha, I just wanted to say it to you. Don¡¯t worry, I will take you along. However, can you become smaller, maybe took on a human form?¡± ¡°Human form?¡± Asked Tsuchigumo as he fixed the way he sat, pulling his face away from me. ¡°I don¡¯t think I can do that.¡± Ah, that was disappointing. I thought that he would be able to pass off as a human and decimated the exorcists, but that was impossible, huh. ¡°You can¡¯t do it¡­ Well, that¡¯s not a problem. I will go then, the friendly competition will be held in a week, ask Yasaka or Kunou to bring you to Kanto.¡± I walked away from Tsuchigumo after I said that, Kappa followed me quietly. I began to create a magic circle to teleport us, but Tsuchigumo stopped me. ¡°Yeah, I will remember that. By the way, one last thing.¡± ¡°Hmm?¡± I looked back at Tsuchigumo. ¡°Are the exorcists strong?¡± He asked. I grinned at Tsuchigumo and said. ¡°They are weak. But, some of them are even stronger than the dragon in your place.¡± ¡°Is that so?! I am looking forward to it then. Hahahaha.¡± He laughed out loud. It was so loud that the earth vibrated. As I had no more business in this place, I teleported away with Kappa, back to the backyard of my mansion in Kanto. ¡°Hmm~¡± I stretched my arms to the sky and then looked at Kappa. ¡°Kappa, there might be a person that comes to visit tomorrow. If you see someone suspicious, can you wake me up?¡± ¡°Hmm? Me?¡± Asked Kappa. ¡°Yeah, well, you can ask Kuroka or Tsura to wake me up too if you want to.¡± Kappa nodded his head. ¡°I will ask Tsura-sama then.¡± ¡°Good, then I will go back to my room and sleep.¡± I walked away after I said that. Kappa waved at me and I entered my room, sleeping soundly. *** ¡°Riku-sama, wake up. There is a guest looking for you.¡± It felt like I just slept for 4 hours when I heard a voice above me. ¡°Ugh.¡± I grumbled and opened my eyes. I saw Tsura was looking at me with a smile. ¡°Good morning, Riku-sama.¡± Greeted Tsura. I rubbed my eyes and looked around. The sky was still dark, it was still dawn. However, Tsura said that there was a guest for me. I spread my Senjutsu and felt the energy from the room that was used to take care of the guest. ¡°Agh, he came in the dawn. Does he think that I am not sleeping?¡± I grumbled as I stood up slowly. Tsura walked to the closet and brought me a change of clothes, the striped black, and green kimono. ¡°Well, Kappa told me that you are expecting a guest. But, I think he came a bit faster than you thought?¡± I took off the clothes that I used to sleep and changed to the Kimono that was handed to me by Tsura. ¡°Yeah, and to think they send that guy. Is he playing with me? Yawn~ It¡¯s still not morning yet.¡± I fastened the Obi of my Kimono and covered my mouth. I walked out of my room as I crossed my arms inside my kimono, making my way towards the gallery room where the guest was waiting. ¡°Who is that guy, Riku-sama? It seems you know him?¡± Asked Tsura as she walked behind me. ¡°Yeah, I know him. This energy came from a Longinus Sacred Gear. There is no other person than that guy.¡± I reached the gallery room in no time at all. I opened the sliding door and saw a young man with long blond hair in priest clothes sitting in the room while eating a meal that was prepared by our servant. He happily devoured the meal but stopped suddenly when I entered the room. He looked at me and smiled, with rice on his cheek. ¡°Ah! You must be Nura Riku. Nice to meet you!¡± The young man greeted me. ¡°You must be the guy that Vasco talked about, it¡¯s nice to meet you too, Dulio Gesualdo.¡± RaizarP Author Here~ More than 60 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks for the New Executive! - Quellec Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 142 – True Longinus New Wielder Whereabout ¡°Hahahaha, don¡¯t be so stiff. By the way, the meal is so good, may I bring some home to give it to the orphanage kid?¡± Dulio laughed and then he ate the meal in front of him again. I sat in front of him and rested my head on my hand. ¡°I don¡¯t mind. I will ask Kejoro to make more meals for you to take home.¡± ¡°Ooh! Thank you for that. Also, I didn¡¯t think that it¡¯s still dawn in Japan, forgive me for the sudden visit.¡± Oh, right. Time differences. He could arrive in Japan by teleporting, that was why he didn¡¯t take account of the time difference. It wasn¡¯t strange considering Dulio often went out for a job. He must¡¯ve been visiting a lot of countries. Knowing the time difference was easy, but I thought he just didn¡¯t think about it. ¡°Don¡¯t mind that. You are here for that, right?¡± I asked Dulio. He was done with his meal as I asked him and gulped down the remaining one in his mouth. He then licked his lips happily and answered. ¡°Yes, I am here for that. Do you want to go now? I was tasked by Michael-sama to accompany you, in case of something.¡± Accompany me? More like, spying on me. I knew that the True Longinus was important for the church. As proof, they sent Dulio, their strongest exorcist to accompany me. Their intention was as clear as day, they wanted to make sure that I didn¡¯t get the True Longinus. Even though we were in alliance with each other, there must be someone who disapprove of the alliance. However, I had no intention to let them take the True Longinus. ¡°Just tell me the location, I will check it myself.¡± I narrowed my eyes as I said that. Dulio didn¡¯t show any reaction, he just smiled and looked at me with his usual kind smile. ¡°I thought you would say that. Michael-sama had told me about you, after all. But well, let me tell you clearly, I will accompany you.¡± His tone was serious, and he looked at me with a steeled gaze. This was troublesome, I just wanted to protect the True Longinus user. If the church got its hand on its user, they would certainly take him under their wing. That way, I wouldn¡¯t be able to protect the user. Although the Holy Longinus user was strong, if the user was under the control of an organization, they would lose their freedom. I couldn¡¯t let that thing happen. If the new wielder of Holy Longinus was from church since the beginning, I wouldn¡¯t mind if they took care of them. However, if the new wielder was chosen from the normal human, that would be problematic. Something like Asia¡¯s incident could happen. Well, I didn¡¯t care about Asia in the first place, and I did know that she would be saved. This time, I didn¡¯t have any clue. ¡®Let¡¯s confirm it first.¡¯ ¡°Then tell me about the new wielder of the Ture Longinus first. I will decide whether I will let you accompany me or not later.¡± ¡°That¡¯s fair.¡± Answered Dulio with a nod. At least he was a reasonable guy. He took an envelope from his pocket and handed it to me. I took it with my right hand and looked at the envelope. It was sealed with red wax, talk about outdated. I opened the envelope and there was a photo of a young boy with black hair wearing a white shirt. His face looked like a Japanese, but his eyes were grey. He looked like 10 to 12 years old kid, even younger than Kunou. His face was a bit familiar to me, but I didn¡¯t recognize the young boy in the photo. Alongside the photo, there was a letter with the location of the young boy. It was written, ¡®Underworld¡¯ which surprised me. ¡°He¡¯s in the underworld?¡± I asked Dulio with a surprised tone. ¡°Eh? Really?¡± He asked back, surprised. He then touched his chin and muttered. ¡°This can¡¯t do, I can¡¯t go to the underworld because of my position. What should I do?¡± Ah, so he didn¡¯t know. His surprised expression was real, so he really didn¡¯t know the young boy¡¯s location. I grinned at that. Because of his position as the current strongest exorcist, he couldn¡¯t move to the underworld freely. That would cause some problems in the relationship with the devils. ¡°See? Just leave the new user to me.¡± I said to Dulio. He was conflicted, he looked at me for a while before he hit his palm with his hand. ¡°Ah! Let¡¯s do this. I will ask someone else to accompany you.¡± As if that idea was brilliant, he had a big smile on his face. It irritated me, so I shut it down immediately. ¡°No thank you.¡± I stood up and then walked away. Dulio also stood up immediately, following me. ¡°Nee, don¡¯t be like that! I was tasked by Michael-sama, you know?¡± He spoke from behind, but I ignored him. I felt a bit bad though, he was only here because Michael asked him. So I stopped on my track and looked over my shoulder. I saw him smiling happily, maybe he was thinking that I would allow him to ask someone else to accompany me. With a smile on my face, I turned around and patted Dulio¡¯s shoulder. ¡°I feel bad for you. You are here because of order right? And yet I asked you to return immediately.¡± ¡°So you know about it! If you feel bad, can you wait for a while? I will ask another exorcist to accompany you.¡± Dulio said with a smile on his face as he took out his phone. I stopped him with my hand and shook my head. ¡°No no no, please don¡¯t. The exorcist that you call will have the same difficulty as you. So, here is my proposal¡± I grinned at Dulio and he was looking at me, expecting what I said next. ¡°What is it? I can¡¯t go to the underworld, you know? It will cause some trouble.¡± ¡°I know. That¡¯s why, Tsura!¡± I called out to Tsura. The door was slid open and Tsura was sitting in a Seiza in front of the door. ¡°Yes, Riku-sama?¡± She asked. ¡°Ask Kejoro to prepare a meal for our guest again. Also, a lot of sweets for the souvenir to be given to the guest.¡± I ordered. ¡°Certainly, I will ask Kejoro about that.¡± The door was closed again, and I heard Tsura walk away from here. Dulio was confused, so I patted his shoulder once again. ¡°Just enjoy the meal, and I will let you see the boy later. Okay?¡± I used Meikyo Shisui after I said that and disappear from Dulio¡¯s sight. ¡°Eh?¡± I heard his surprised sound, but I ignored him. Underworld, huh? It seems that I will visit that place more often in the future. RaizarP Author Here~ More than 60 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 143 – Kidnapping Sona ¡°It¡¯s like that, so I will leave now,¡± I said to Dulio that was frozen in place. He couldn¡¯t see me, but he certainly heard my voice as I saw him looking around, confused. I walked out of the room and stood outside, looking up at the sky. Tomorrow was the promised day where Reni would take me to the Dimensional Gap, so I only had one day to find the True Longinus wielder. It would be a chore, but I needed to try my best now to at least find a clue about him. So I created the Magic Circle under my feed, preparing myself to go to the underworld. ¡°Wait!¡± At that moment, Dulio shouted and he coincidentally stepped into my magic circle. ¡°Eh? You idiot!¡± I canceled my Meikyo Shisui and shouted at him. The Magic circle to teleport has been activated, and it couldn¡¯t be stopped anymore. ¡°Ah, I found you!¡± Said Dulio. However, when he said that, the Magic Circle was fully activated and both of us were teleported to the Underworld. I facepalmed and looked at Dulio through the gap of my fingers. ¡°¡­ Why did you follow me?¡± I asked him. ¡°Ha-hahaha, well, I wonder why too. Usually, I would be too lazy to even move, but something about you keeping me from that. I would just follow you, don¡¯t worry about anything.¡± Answered Dulio as he scratched his cheek. ¡°Sigh, well. Did Michael tell you something about the picture? Like, where is he located and such?¡± I knew that the Heaven system couldn¡¯t even work properly in the hand of Michael. However, who knows that he somehow managed to find out the new wielder location, right? I had no hope about it though. If Heaven could know the Sacred Gear wielder¡¯s location, they would annex a lot of them to the church. Especially the Longinus user. ¡°I don¡¯t know. But, Michael told me that maybe you can try Belial territory to find the boy in the picture. The boy¡¯s grey eyes were similar to Diehauser.¡± Come to think of it, that was true. However, the boy had black hair. From the start, I knew that he was a half-devil, but Belial territory? My lips curled up to a grin. Could it be, the boy was his son? Black hair, it was similar to his. His age also matched the year when he was killed. ¡°Maybe I can meet the boy easier than I thought,¡± I muttered to myself. Dulio heard me, but he was confused. I should¡¯ve asked that man to go with me, it was better that way. However, I just¡­ beat him yesterday, so he needed rest. ¡°What are you saying?¡± Asked Dulio. I waved my hand at Dulio and said, ¡°You are a great help. You can go back now.¡± A magic circle appeared under Dulio¡¯s feet at a fast speed. He couldn¡¯t respond and he was teleported away. This time, I teleported him back to the Vatican. It was his fault for following me, at least I would bring the meal that Kejoro made to Vatican Church later¡­ if I had time. Well then, now that I knew the location of the boy, I should make my move. The question was, where was the Belial territory? ¡°I make a mistake, again¡­ Well, let¡¯s just go to Gremory territory first, and ask Sirzechs to take me to Belial territory. That way, I won¡¯t cause some trouble.¡± I was a bit skeptical about what I said. There was no way I wouldn¡¯t cause some trouble, it was bound to happen. ¡°Well then, I should visit Sirzechs now. It¡¯s still morning in this place, surely he will not mind that I visit him, right?¡± I made another teleport magic circle again, and now my destination was Gremory territory. Before I teleported, I used Meikyo Shisui to stay inconspicuous. My teleport magic circle led me to the city of the Gremory Territory. It was big, and I couldn¡¯t possibly teleport myself to the mansion of Sirzechs due to the barrier that surrounded it. But, when I thought about it again, Sirzechs¡¯s mansion was not in Gremory territory, right? So the only one who I could possibly ask for help was Sona¡­ I was an idiot. Maybe it was caused by me just waking up from sleep, but I made a lot of mistakes today. I ruffled my hair in annoyance, and I teleported again, this time to Kuoh. Because I had an apartment here, I teleported to the apartment and changed my clothes to Kuoh Academy uniform before leaving to meet Sona. It has been a long time since I went to the Kuoh Academy, a week maybe? Some students were already made their way towards the school, the Sun has risen while I was talking with Dulio, and it seemed like now was time for school. I could feel Sona alongside her peerage¡¯s energies in the school, so I made the correct decision. As a sister of a Satan that dealt with foreign relationships, I was willing to bet that Sona had visited Belial territory. She was just a transport bus for me right now, but because I asked for a small favor this time, I guess I would need to prepare myself if she needed something. I could always counter her later, but who knows what would happen? There was always the last resort of ¡­ taking her by force. I also met with Serafall already, so the thing would be easy to explain. I would pass things as a joke and prank. But well, now I arrived at Kuoh Academy, I made my way towards the Student Council room, where Sona and her Peerage worked their ass to make the Kuoh Academy a better place. Well, that didn¡¯t matter to me because I didn¡¯t need to attend school anymore, yikes. It seemed like they noticed me this time, that was an improvement to them. However, that was not enough. They just noticed me because they saw me through the window when I entered the school, that would be fatal if I had a malicious intention. Because they noticed my presence already, I opened the door of the student council room without knocking and greeted them. ¡°Ya!¡± Sona and her peerage were looking at me with tired looks. Sona even sighed hard. They thought they had nothing to do with me again after I left the school, but I proved them to be wrong. I made my way to Sona without saying anything and put my hand on her shoulder. I looked at Sona¡¯s queen, Tsubaki, and said. ¡°Well then, I need to borrow your leader for a while.¡± ¡°Wha?!¡± Sona let out a surprised voice, but I ignored it. I just made a teleport circle under our feet and teleported us to the underworld. Now, I got my guide, let us go meet the boy in Belial territory. RaizarP Author Here~ More than 60 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks for the new Executive! - Gloxie Big Thanks for the new Squad Leader! - Darren latiker Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 144 – To Belial Territory The place where we teleported to was in the Gremory territory. The first thing that Sona did after I forcefully take her was a shock. She was frozen in her place. I waved my hand in front of her face, but she didn¡¯t even move. Because she was still frozen, I leaned closer to her left ear and whispered. ¡°Hey, I will pull something nasty if you keep silent, you know?¡± ¡°Ah!¡± Sona¡¯s body jolted up and she covered her left ear with her hands before looking at me with her face reddened a bit. So even her could get embarrassed if I did that? Noted. ¡°W-W-What are you doing!¡± She shouted at me and pointed her index finger. We were in some kind of alley in the middle of the city, so her voice was pulling some attention to us. Not only that, because Sona was a little sister of Satan Leviathan, some people in the street noticed us. But, I think Sona didn¡¯t notice that, because she was now angry. ¡°Kidnapping you?¡± I answered calmly. ¡°Wha?!¡± It took her off guard, she was confused and her hand was trembling in anger. ¡°You!! How could you do that? You just stormed into our office and teleport me to this place! In the first place, where are we?¡± Finally, after calming down a little bit, Sona lowered her hand and looked around. ¡°The area seems familiar, is this underworld?¡± She then recognized some of the buildings and asked me. ¡°Correct!¡± I answered with a smile on my face. I closed my right eye and crossed my arms. ¡°I need some help from you, you see? Just help me this time, think of it as repaying a favor for that time.¡± ¡°That time, which one? I don¡¯t remember owing you favor at all.¡± Sona fixed her glasses, then crossed her eyes. Hou? Did she forget about that time already? I approached her with a smirk on my face. Her expression turned bad, she seemed to have something in her mind and took a step back. ¡°H-hey, what are you doing?¡± She asked me, but I keep stepping forward. Her back was now hit by the wall, she looked around in panic and raised her hands to stop me. ¡°Stop it!¡± She shouted, trying to draw attention from the people who passed us in the street. However, too bad for her. I surrounded the area around us with my Fear - blocking the sound from inside - as soon as I took a step forward. I cornered her and slammed my hand to the wall, right beside her head. It was my first time doing this, but this was unexpectedly fun. I leaned my head closer and looked at her straight in her eyes. ¡°Did you forget how I save you and the other when the army of Fallen Angels came to Kuoh? Don¡¯t tell me that you forget that favor? I stop them.¡± I turned to my youkai form as I said that, my height became taller, and now I was looking down at Sona. Her gaze followed my eyes unconsciously as ¡°Ah!¡± escaped her lips. ¡°Th-that don¡¯t mean you could take me forcefully!¡± ¡°Is that so?¡± I smirked at Sona. Her expression was funny right now, her usually stern face was nowhere to be seen. Right now she had a normal expression of a girl of her age. ¡°Hahahaha, I am just joking. Well, I need to move fast, so I have no time to talk casually.¡± ¡°You said that but you are playing around right now!¡± said Sona. She took a deep breath and recovered from her flustered condition. ¡°Nah, yeah right. But, if I talk with you in the student council room, it will take longer. Rather than that, let me tell you about the payment that I wanted for the favor at that time.¡± Sona grumbled a little, but then she looked at me and said, ¡°Fine. You did do us a favor at that time. But, don¡¯t think that I will agree to anything that you ask me for. There is a limit to the repayment that I can provide.¡± Nice, she took the bait. To be honest, I already forgot about Kokabiel¡¯s incident, but this was good timing to bring that up. She didn¡¯t need to know my real goal, she just need to take me to Belial territory. In a way, it seemed trivial for her, but it helped me greatly. ¡°I want to visit Belial Territory. You have been there before, right?¡± ¡°Hmm, Belial territory?¡± Asked Sona. ¡°Why do you need to visit the Belial territory. Maybe you already know about it, but that¡¯s Diehauser Belial, the devil who stands on the top of the Rating Game, territory.¡± As I had expected, she asked me about it. But, then, I had no intention to tell her that I was looking for True Longinus in that territory. I hope the boy was smart enough to hid that he had Sacred Gear before I could get to him. At least, I hope that he didn¡¯t tell any untrustworthy devil about it. ¡°Well, I wanted to visit that exact Diehauser Belial. I heard from Kokabiel at that time, Diehauser Belial know my old man. I wanted to hear the story directly from Diehauser Belial to at least know my old man better. Any problem about that?¡± ¡°Really?¡± Sona narrowed her eyes and asked me with a suspricious tone. She seemed to be skeptical about what I said, but she then sighed and held her head with her hand. ¡°It¡¯s not my place to say this, but please, I mean that, please don¡¯t make any trouble in devil¡¯s territory.¡± I smiled at Sona and nodded my head, ¡°I can¡¯t promise.¡± Hearing my answer, Sona was glaring at me. ¡°Fine! But, I swear I will be the first one to stop you when you make a problem. So, stick close to me.¡± Sona then approached me and created a teleport magic circle under our feet. ¡°Hahaha, that, I can promise. Do your best, Sona.¡± ¡®Not that you could stop me.¡¯ I added inside my mind. Sona sighed once again, and then we teleported to Belial territory. RaizarP Author Here~ More than 60 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks for the new Executive! - Gloxie Big Thanks for the new Squad Leader! - john Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 145 – Belial Mansion and Sairaorg Bael Belial territory was incomparably different from Gremory¡¯s. The architecture of the buildings was different. As soon as we teleported to the Belial territory, I spread my senjutsu and covered the city. The devil didn¡¯t realize it, and I scanned the area to find the Sacred Gear wielder. I couldn¡¯t find it though, it was hidden. If there was no news about the boy at all, I could guess that Diehauser tried to hide the boys from the other devils or even the supernatural world. ¡°So, we are here. What are you planning to do?¡± Asked Sona. ¡°Hmm?¡± I looked at Sona and stroked my chin. ¡°I wonder, what should I do?¡± Sona looked at me with a look that said, ¡®Are you kidding me?¡¯ as her eyes twitched in annoyance. She held her head again and sighed for how many know today. ¡°Well, I wanted to visit Diehauser mansion for sure. You know the way?¡± I asked Sona. ¡°Hmm? It will be a bit hard to visit him. Diehauser Belial-sama is a busy man.¡± Answered Sona as she crossed her arms. I didn¡¯t care if Diehauser was a busy man or not, I asked her if she knew her mansion. But well, maybe he wouldn¡¯t allow us to enter? There was only one way left then. ¡°Just answer my question, Sona. Do you know his mansion?¡± ¡°As I said-¡° Before she finished her sentence, I cut her by stepping in front of her, ¡°Do you know where his mansion is? Answer that and I will let you go later.¡± Sona flinched. She seriously considered my offer. But, that was a trap. I said later, but I didn¡¯t specify when I will let her go. ¡®I can let her go later after I meet the boy, or later when I am done with all thing that I need to do in the underworld.¡¯ In other words, it was her misunderstanding. ¡°When you said later, when is that?¡± Asked Sona. Well, it seemed like she was not as clueless as I thought. She knew my trap, dang. ¡°Whatever do you mean? Of course, after I am done with all of the things that I needed to do. Oh, I will not force you to stay, but I will not consider you repaying a favor to me if you go without helping me.¡± I smirked at Sona, and she grumbled as she gritted her teeth. ¡°Fine, I will follow your whim for now. But, I will blame you for anything that happens later. I won¡¯t take any responsibility at all.¡± ¡°I don¡¯t mind about that. But, you will take responsibility for your own action.¡± If she blamed me for something that she did, I won¡¯t accept that. Also, I never blamed someone else for anything that I did, or was I? ¡°Yes, I can at least be responsible for what I do. Please don¡¯t worry about it!¡± Sona said with a rather angry tone. Did she get mad because of what I said? She was so strange, but I couldn¡¯t blame her. After all, what I did to her was similar to kidnapping. ¡°So, I will ask once again. Do you know Diehauser Belial¡¯s mansion?¡± Sona nodded her head and said, ¡°Follow me. I will take you there.¡± She then began to walk without waiting for me. I scratched the back of my head, sighed, and followed her. ¡®Can she be a little bit gentle?¡¯ I grumbled inside my mind. ¡°She¡¯s not cute at all.¡± ¡°Tsk!¡± Sona clicked her tongue and walked faster. Oops, she heard me. *** We were now standing in front of a big mansion that was surrounded by high fences. It literally screamed ¡®I am the lord of this territory¡¯ from just seeing the mansion. ¡°It¡¯s big,¡± I said as I put my hand above my eyes, looking at the mansion. I was observing the escape path or possibly a path that led inside the mansion in case we couldn¡¯t enter from the entrance. ¡°Of course. This is Belial¡¯s mansion, one of the 72 pillars in the underworld.¡± Sona boasted. ¡°For an important mansion, there is no guard outside of the mansion.¡± It was strange though, even my mansion had a guard that always waiting at the entrance. Kubinashi, Aotabo, and Kurotabo took a turn to guard the entrance. They swept the ground while looking around. They looked like a servant, but they were the strongest fighters under me. So it was strange that Belial mansion had no guard outside of their mansion. ¡°They don¡¯t need a guard to protect their mansion. Almost all devils knew that they shouldn¡¯t mess with Belial, especially because there is Diehauser Belial-sama in this mansion.¡± Explained Sona. But that didn¡¯t guarantee the safety of the mansion. If there was someone crazy like me who loved to sneak around, this mansion was fucked up. It gave me advantage, but I hate this. There was no real challenge. It was as if inviting me to come and steal something. ¡®Should I try to steal something?¡¯ I thought. ¡°I should try to steal something,¡± I muttered as I touched my chin. ¡°Don¡¯t even try it.¡± Plead Sona with a skeptical tone. ¡°Please.¡± She even added ¡®Please¡¯. ¡°Hahaha, I won¡¯t try it. Maybe.¡± I laughed a little. Somehow teasing Sona was a bit fun, her expression was different from usual girls. ¡°I really can¡¯t understand you.¡± Said Sona. She then walked towards the gate of the mansion. There was no guard, but somehow there was an intercom on the side of the gate, so Sona pressed that. ¡°Yes? May I know who is this?¡± A man¡¯s voice came from the intercom, asking our identity. ¡°I¡¯m sorry for the sudden visit. My name is Sona Sitri, and I am with a Youkai called Nura Riku. We are here in order to visit Diehauser Belial-sama. Is he available?¡± Asked Sona. The intercom went silent for a while. The other side seemed to be talking with someone, but then it answered again. ¡°Yes, you may enter. Please wait for a minute as we will welcome you in the gate.¡± The intercome exchange ended after that. Sona stood in front of the gate gracefully, and I sat beside her while crossing my arms. ¡°It seems they welcome us with open arms,¡± I said to Sona with a smirk. ¡°Yeah, we are lucky. Because you don¡¯t need to break in.¡± there was malicious intention mixed in her tone, and I noticed that. ¡°Hahahaha, nice joke.¡± I laughed and brushed off Sona¡¯s remark. After a few seconds, not even a minute, the gate opened and there was a guy with short black hair who stood beyond the door. He was big, but not as big as Aotabo. ¡°Hahahaha, welcome to Belial mansion.¡± Greeted the guy. Sona¡¯s eyes widened, and she muttered. ¡°Sairaorg?¡± RaizarP Author Here~ More than 60 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks for the new Executive! - Anna Haig - Frede Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 146 – Sairaorg Bael ¡°Oh, Sona! What are you doing here? Also, who is he?¡± Sairaorg turned to me with his arms crossed. He was observing me, trying to judge my strength from my posture. I deliberately stood in my most natural stance with my arms crossed too, looking back at him. His body was big, he looked strong. He could also use Touki to enhance it, which was ridiculous. After observing my body, he grinned and approached me, ignoring Sona that was in front of him. ¡°You, you are strong.¡± He said with a grin on his face. ¡°You seem strong too,¡± I answered him with a smirk on my face. He then nodded his head, satisfied, and then turned around to Sona. ¡°So Sona, what are you doing in this place?¡± Sona looked at Sairaorg with an annoyed look, she tapped her feet repeatedly and said, ¡°That guy over there wanted to meet with Diehauser Belial-sama.¡± Sairaorg then turned to me again and smiled, ¡°Oh?! Can I ask why did you want to meet with him?¡± ¡°Mainly because I have something to talk about. Well, it¡¯s not that important. Can I meet him?¡± ¡°Hmm, that would be difficult. He¡¯s outside of the territory right now with his peerage. Maybe he will be back in an hour or two. By the way, what¡¯s your name? My name is Sairaorg Bael, the oldest son of Bael house as well as the heir of one of the 72 pillars in the underworld. Nice to meet you.¡± Sairaorg stretched his right hand towards me with a big smile on his face. I took his hand, shook it, and introduced myself. Because he introduced himself with his title, I also introduced myself with my title. ¡°I am the successor of the East Youkai Clan, the Second Lord of Pandemonium, Nura Riku. Nice to meet you too.¡± His smile turned fierce after I introduced myself, he gripped my hand with all his strength. Hou, he challenged me in a strength contest? I didn¡¯t back down on any challenge, so I gripped his hand back, putting all my strength into it. His hand began to deform because of my strength, and his face was visibly in pain. ¡°Interesting,¡± Sairaorg said with an excited voice. ¡°This is the first, you managed to compete with me in a strength contest! I will be serious from now on, be prepared!¡± As he said that, a white aura seeped out from his body. This guy was nuts, he actually used Touki in a grip strength? His strength was now enhanced, I lost against him. ¡°Tsk, you are strong,¡± I said to Sairaorg. ¡°Hahaha, are you going to back down now?¡± He taunts me with his words. Of course, I won¡¯t back down. I used Touki too. My mastery in Senjutsu was higher than him, so my Touki was stronger. I gripped his hand with all my strength. ¡°Kuh!¡± He let out a small groan, but he was still excited. ¡°Hahahaha, so you can use Touki too!¡± ¡°Of course. But, unlike your Touki that use your life-force, I used Senjutsu. It¡¯s stronger than yours.¡± We kept doing this for a few seconds, until finally, Sairaorg said, ¡°Fine, you win.¡± He loosened his grip, and so I released his hand too. ¡°But, to think you are this strong with your build. I never met someone like you, hahaha.¡± Sairaorg laughed happily. ¡°Could it be, you are older than you look?¡± ¡°Nah no, I¡¯m not a monster that lived for more than 500 years like Sirzechs or my old man. I am a genuine teen.¡± ¡°Hou, so we are the same age? I am most interested to have a spar with you if there is a chance.¡± ¡°Hmm, spar? I don¡¯t mind. Because Diehauser is not home, why don¡¯t we have spar right now?¡± I said that with a taunting tone. Sairaorg blinked his eyes a few times until finally he punched his own palm and grinned. ¡°You are more interesting than I thought. Let¡¯s go, I will show you my full strength in our spar.¡± Sairaorg then turned away and walked inside the mansion area. I walked beside him. When we passed Sona, I heard her sighing and holding her head. ¡°What are you doing, Sona? We will leave you if you stand still there, you know?¡± I said to Sona. ¡°Well, yeah. You don¡¯t need me, right? Right now you are with Sairaorg already, so can I leave?¡± Both of us stopped walking and looked at Sona as if she was an idiot. ¡°Hey, you are his guide, aren¡¯t you?¡± Asked Sairaorg. ¡°Yeah, are you an idiot?¡± I said clearly while raising my chin. ¡°Ha? What did you say?¡± Sona snapped. A vein popped up on her temple, and she walked towards us while stomping the ground. She stopped in front of me and pointed her index finger at my chest, touching it. ¡°Did you just call me an idiot? Let me tell you, I am not an idiot.¡± I looked at Sairaorg and he looked back at me. We had understanding, nodded our head at each other, and then I said to Sona. ¡°If you are not an idiot, then you know that we need referee for our spar, right? If you want to walk away, at least do it after our spar.¡± ¡°He¡¯s right.¡± Sairaorg nodded his head. ¡°Can I ask you to be our referee?¡± Sona then froze on her spot, her face went red. Her mouth gaped, her finger that touched my chest fell lifelessly. ¡°Just that?¡± I heard a mutter from her. She then took a deep breath, let it out, then raised her head. ¡°Fine, I will leave after your spar. You said it yourself.¡± ¡°Of course.¡± I nodded my head at Sona. Well, since the start, I just wanted her to show me Diehauser Belial¡¯s mansion. After I managed to enter this mansion, Sona¡¯s role had ended, and I didn¡¯t need her anymore. ¡®I can sneak in easily after I gained Sairaorg¡¯s trust.¡¯ Which was why I proposed the spar. I knew that he liked strong people, and befriend them. ¡®My plan will run smoothly after this, and I found the boy already.¡¯ The boy was inside the mansion. After the spar, I would meet him before meeting Diehauser Belial. ¡°Good, now follow me. I will show you the location that¡¯s perfect for our spar.¡± Sairaorg then walked away, and we followed him. RaizarP Author Here~ More than 60 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks for the new Executive! - Anna Haig - Frede Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 147 – Spar with Sairaorg Bael RaizarP Quick Notice. I wrote a new novel for contest in webnovel. If you interested, you can check it here. The title is The Regressor is Already Dead https://www.webnovel.com/book/the-regressor-is-already-dead_22781826306399505 Also, give me you power stone while you are at it!! (Just kidding, I am not forcing you) Thanks! Sairaorg took us to the place that looked like a field behind the mansion. It was big enough to have something like a duel. ¡°How is it? This location is good enough, right?¡± Asked Sairaorg with his hands on his hips. He was standing beside me while I looked around the area. The ground was made from dirt, it was dense enough so it would serve as a good foothold. The area around us also had nothing, so it allow a head-on fight without hiding. It was advantageous for Sairaorg in that area, he could also fly. While I could only walk in the sky by making a foothold using Youjutsu. But in all, it was a good arena. ¡°This is good enough. By the way, I am a swordsman. So I can use my sword for the spar, right? Feel free to use anything on your arsenal too.¡± I called out Nenekirimaru and held it with my right hand. I raised it to Sairaorg and he looked at Nenekirimaru with intrigued eyes. ¡°Hou? I don¡¯t mind. Please do fight me with all of your strength. The fight will be fun that way.¡± ¡°Alright. Let¡¯s do it right now then.¡± I said to him as I walked towards the field. Sairaorg''s lips curled up as he punched his palm. He had an excited smile, then he walked to the field too. While I walk to the left side of the field, he walked to the right side. Sona stood on the side, looking at us with tired eyes. ¡°Let me say this first. Don¡¯t use all of your power, it will destroy this place. I will put on a barrier just in case, but if I judge that both of you are too much, I will stop this duel.¡± Said Sona. I looked at her as if she was ridiculous, it was written on my expression. I utterly expressed my displeasure. ¡°You are no fun eh, Sona? What kind of spar is that? We need to push ourselves with all our strength if we are talking about spar. Aren¡¯t you agree with me, Sairaorg?¡± I deliberately asked Sairaorg too because I too know that he doesn¡¯t like holding back. ¡°That¡¯s true. If you put on a barrier, isn¡¯t that meant we are allowed to use all of our strength? A spar without using our full strength is boring, boring I tell you!¡± Sairaorg nodded in agreement and pointed his index finger at Sona. Sona then looked at us alternatively before letting out a sigh. ¡°Fine!¡± She shouted. ¡°But I won¡¯t be responsible for any kind of destruction that happens later.¡± She then extended her hands towards us, creating a barrier that was big enough for our spar. I and Sairaorg then faced each other. He cracked his knuckle with an excited grin on his face. I strapped Nenekirimaru on my belt and unsheathed the blade. ¡°Are both sides ready?¡± Asked Sona from outside the barrier. ¡°Yeah, I am ready,¡± I answered. ¡°Anytime.¡± ¡°Well then, start!¡± As soon as Sona gave us the signal, Sairaorg used Touki. Without wasting time, he kicked the ground and reached me in less than a second. In terms of speed, maybe he was the fastest opponent that I ever met. Might be because all opponents that I met before couldn¡¯t even follow my movement, this was exciting. Sairaorg¡¯s fist was right in front of my face when I noticed it. However, it seems that he underestimated me a little. I could dodge his fist, but I didn¡¯t do that. Instead, I swung my sword from below, aiming to cut Sairaorg¡¯s arm off his shoulder. Bael''s house must¡¯ve got a phoenix tear or two, so I fight him seriously, without holding back. When my blade was almost cut his arm off, Sairaorg noticed it and quickly pulled his right arm. His feet planted on the ground, and he arched backward. My sword left a light trail behind, but my attack didn¡¯t end there. I took a step back, rotated my body a little to gain momentum, and swung my sword downward. ¡°Try to dodge this,¡± I said with a grin on my face. I had yet to use Touki, so my slash this time was a bit slower than usual. With his feet planted on the ground, Sairaorg couldn¡¯t dodge my slash. I could see him gritting his teeth and spreading his arms. When my sword was about to hit him, he clasped his hands, stopping my blade between his hands. ¡°Kahahaha, I stopped it!¡± He laughed. Unfortunately for him, Nenekirimaru was effective against the Supernatural being. ¡°You laughed too soon.¡± I bet his hand was now in pain with his Demonic Energy being burned by Nenekirimaru. ¡°Uh?!¡± Sairaorg let out a surprised voice. He quickly pulled his feet from the ground and jumped away. With him gaining a distance, I stood in my natural stance, tapping Nenekirimaru¡¯s blade against my shoulder. ¡°It seems you never heard of me and my sword,¡± I said to Sairaorg. ¡°Yeah, no. I heard about Nurarihyon¡¯s sword from Belial-sama, but I never thought the effect would be this painful.¡± Said Sairaorg as he looked at his hand. ¡°My demonic energy left my body as soon as I make a contact with that sword, it¡¯s terrifying.¡± Oh right, Diehauser knew my old man. From Kokabiel¡¯s story, it seems my old man had some history with Diehauser, to the point that Diehauser decided to retreat when my old man arrived. ¡°Well then, let¡¯s get serious, shall we?¡± As Sairaorg said that, the energy around him changed. He then got into something called horse stance and shouted. ¡°Haaa!!!¡± Something that looked like a glowing yellow aura appeared around him. The energy was spiked up, and he at least became stronger than before. If this was a real battle, I would sneak in behind him and killed him. I didn¡¯t do that before this because I wanted to gain battle experience. As of now, I believe that my battle experience was enough, so I would change my style. If I wanted a fun battle, I could always spar like this. So I waited. A second later, Sairaorg¡¯s body was clad in golden armor. His chest armor looked like a lion''s head, and his helmet make him look like a golden lion. ¡°Regulus Nemea! Regulus Rey Leather Rex!¡± One of the thirteen Longinus that was tamed by Sairaorg. To be honest, it was absurd, a pure devil had a Longinus. Not only that, he even used Balance Breaker right of the bat. ¡°I am ready.¡± He punched his palm and smiled at me. To answer his serious form, I clad myself in Fear and used Touki. As usual, blue Hairo appeared on my back, I used all my usual power while hiding some trump card. ¡°Well then, find me.¡± I said to Sairaorg. ¡°Or you will lose without being able to understand how you lose.¡± I used my technique. ¡°Shin Kyouka Suigetsu.¡± And disappeared from Sairaorg¡¯s sight. RaizarP Author Here~ More than 60 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks for the new Executive! - Anna Haig - Frede Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 148 – Spar with Sairaorg Bael 2 RaizarP Quick Notice. I wrote a new novel for contest in webnovel. If you interested, you can check it here. The title is The Regressor is Already Dead Here is the new novel! Also, give me you power stone while you are at it!! (Just kidding, I am not forcing you) But do give me if you have it! Thanks! Sairaorg¡¯s speed increased, as soon as I used my technique, he appeared in front of me. He tried to punch me, but I had long gone from the spot, leaving only my fake. That was his first mistake, he didn¡¯t know my skill. I was standing behind him right now, and he punched my fake. As Sairaorg¡¯s fist hit my clone, it melted in a black cloud of smoke and surprised Sairaorg. His movement became dull for a moment, so I used this to strike him with Nenekirimaru. I aimed at his side, right under his armpit. My sword flashed, leaving behind a light trail and connected. However, I couldn¡¯t cut him, the armor was too strong. When it made contact with his armor, my sword was bounced off with a loud clang. Clang! Sairaorg noticed my location, he instantly rotated and sent a roundhouse kick. Huh, he thought he could hit me with a roundhouse kick? My old man had kicked me enough for me to dodge such a kick without seeing it. After dodging his kick by ducking, I imbued Nenekirimaru with Fear and Senjutsu, swung it horizontally, towards Sairaorg¡¯s leg. ¡°Got you,¡± I said from below. ¡°Not too fast!¡± Sairaorg shouted and he jumped. My sword lost its target, and I looked up immediately only to see Sairaorg¡¯s fist. ¡°Orya!¡± He let out a shout as his fist get closer to my face. With the help of Youjutsu, I was able to move away and only left my clone at that place. Once again, my clone melted when Sairaorg¡¯s fist made contact with its face. Because he was punching down from mid-air, his fist hit the ground and made a 3 meters wide crater. His gold armor was really bright that it made me squint my eyes just to look at him. ¡°Where are you! If you are a man, then fight me like one!¡± Shouted Sairaorg. Man or not, all was fair in love and war. A fight was no different than that. More importantly¡­ ¡°Unfortunately, I am a yakuza, you know? If you can¡¯t even defeat me, don¡¯t even dream to become the strongest!¡± It was not my style answering my opponent¡¯s quip, but I somehow answered him. My voice was melted in the air, coming from various directions because of my Fear. Sairaorg looked around with a frown on his face, he then bumped his fists with each other. ¡°Right, I am wrong.¡± Somehow, his next move surprised me. He punched his cheek with his left hand. Blood dripped from his mouth that got injured by his punch. ¡°Sorry for that. I am too caught up in a moment and got a bit angry because I can¡¯t land a hit on you.¡± ¡°Don¡¯t worry about it, shall we continue?¡± I said as I appeared 5 meters away from him. I was not a fool though, I just showed him my Fake while my true body was looking down at him from the crater. ¡°Yeah!¡± His Touki aura then enlarged, it became bigger and bigger until finally, it died down. His physical strength was increased, he was even stronger now. ¡°That¡¯s the spirit.¡± My Fake¡¯s mouth moved, and my voice came from my Fake. I made my Fake take a basic stance of Kendo and waited for Sairaorg to come at my Fake. His speed increased again, he managed to reach my Fake right after he launched himself. Not that he would hit the real me, but that speed was surprising. Even I would need to use Touki to the limit to achieve that. But, doesn¡¯t that mean I was stronger? I meant, he was using his Balance Breaker and Touki to achieve that speed, yet I just need my Touki. Sairaorg was even called the strongest young devil, but that was a given, right? If he couldn¡¯t achieve the strongest with even his strength, then this world was too fucked up. I could also fight Susanoo without any problem. ¡®I need to break that armor though.¡¯ Sairaorg was now rampaging on the field, punching every Fake that appeared one after another. He was laughing like crazy, while I observed him look for his weak point. His chest was clearly the strongest. The only open part of his armor was his face. But this was a spar, so I couldn¡¯t use my sword to stab that face, he would die. ¡®Let¡¯s punch him then.¡¯ I began to make my move. Dismissing Nenekirimaru that was on my hand, I opted to use my bare hand to fight Sairaorg. It was a good chance to know how skillful I am with my martial art. I had only used a sword to fight all this time, so I was curious myself. ¡°Hey, I¡¯m over here, you know?¡± I showed him my real location as I waved my hand, gesturing for him to come at me. ¡°There you are!¡± Sairaorg kicked the ground, creating a crack under his feet, and he reached me in less than a second, sending a right jab right at my face. I stepped to the left to dodge the punch, grabbing his arms with both hands and throwing him to the ground. Bam! ¡°Kah!¡± The air came out from Sairaorg¡¯s lungs because I threw him to the ground, landing on his back. The ground under him cracked, but I didn¡¯t stop my attack yet. I quickly sent a punch at his face, but he had already recovered and moved his head to the right, dodging my punch by hair breath. As a result, my fist hit the ground and shattered it, creating four meters deep crater. Sairaorg got blown away by the shockwave. He managed to land safely 10 meters away from me. His inside was a bit damaged though, as I used a certain technique to injure his vital. This was taught by Magari when I learned Senjutsu from her. A technique of using Senjutsu to attack my opponent¡¯s internal organ. I let out the breath that I held. From my mouth, white smoke came out alongside my breath. It was a Senjutsu aura that I infused into my body to use the technique from Magari. I turned to look at Sairaorg. Blood was dripping from his mouth, but he quickly wiped it with his hand and he smiled at me. ¡°Khahahaha, you used your fist? That¡¯s a good attack.¡± He then cracked his knuckle again, then he got into a stance. ¡°Come, let¡¯s make this spar memorable!¡± I grinned at his invitation. I got into a stance too. My left arm was straight in front of me, with my left palm opened. I pulled my right hand, positioned it beside my waist while I opened my leg a little, with the left in front of the right. This was the so-called kung fu stance, but this was not kung-fu. Instead, this martial art used Senjutsu to injure our opponent. ¡°Anytime you want.¡± I said to Sairaorg while waving my left hand. RaizarP Author Here~ More than 60 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks for the new Executive! - john Big Thanks for the new Squad Leader! - Paul Lineham Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 149 – Spar with Sairaorg Bael Final We kicked the ground at the same time and met in the middle. He punched with his right hand while my right fist also moved towards his face. Sairaorg¡¯s body was big, that was why I was able to land a hit on his face. I was a bit faster. His punch only hit the air because I ducked down. Although he got punched, there was a smile on Sairaorg¡¯s face. He was smiling and laughing as he sent a barrage of punches toward me. ¡°HAHAHAHAHA, your punch does no damage to me!¡± shouted Sairaorg as he kept sending punches towards me. None of them hit my body though, as I moved around while punching him. ¡°Huh?!¡± I said with a mocking tone. ¡°You didn¡¯t even graze my body, say that after you land a hit!¡± I shouted the last part of my sentence as I covered my fist with Senjutsu aura. My attack power increased, and my punch connected with Sairaorg¡¯s face. He thought that this punch was the same as before, but this was lethal. He was blown away because of the force of my punch, his nose bleed, and there was blood trickling from his mouth. He was able to stop after rolling on the ground a few times, and he instantly kicked the ground, rushing towards me. He grinned and his fist was moving fast, toward my face. I also grinned, this was fun. I never knew that exchanging fists was this fun, although as usual, I never got hit. Once again, I dodged Sairaorg¡¯s fist by stepping to the left and sent a side jab using my left hand. ¡°Guh!¡± Sairaorg grunted, but he quickly rotated with his right leg as a pivot and used his left leg to kick me, aiming at my rib. With his body, he was able to kick me in all places, but he choose my rib? I somehow sense that it was only a faint, so I just ducked to dodge his kick. And as expected, Sairaorg¡¯s hand was already raised, his fist was covered with a thick amount of energy. ¡°That¡¯s bad.¡± I smiled wryly as I saw his fist closing in. Without any hesitation, I used Kyouka Suigetsu and jumped back. Sairaorg¡¯s punch passed through my fake, and it hit the ground, creating a loud explosion. Bam!! The destruction caused by that punch was no joke, a new crater with a diameter around 10 meters was created. Sairaorg stood in the center of the crater, looking at his right hand without moving. Black smoke that was created from my Fear surrounded my body as I re-appeared right on the edge of the crater. ¡°That¡¯s serious damage! That¡¯s why your punch hurt so much!¡± He said as he looked at me. ¡°Fucking copycat. You copied the technique that I created ten seconds ago!¡± ¡°Not gonna lie, this is good!¡± As he shouted that, he coated both of his fists with Touki and rushed towards me once again. He looked happy, maybe because he had no rival that could fight him equally in the underworld. He jumped towards me, but he jumped too high. Right now he was above me with his hands put together, raised above his head. ¡®Damn it! I have a bad feeling about this!¡¯ I quickly jumped away and stood in the sky with my Youjutsu. However, I forgot about it¡­ that devil could fly. Sairaorg quickly changed his direction and flew toward me. That was fucking cheating, Youkai couldn¡¯t fly at all! I quickly made a lot of footholds in the sky using Youjutsu. When Sairaorg closed to me, I kicked the foothold and jumped around, finding a chance to knock Sairaorg with one attack. Because I could coat my fist with Senjutsu, maybe I could use that too? I coated my whole body with Senjutsu aura, trying a technique that Shirone used in the original series. If I wasn¡¯t wrong, Shirone was able to grow her body when she used a lot of Senjutsu. I tried to imitate that and enter my youkai form that was called Offense. It was often used by the MC in Nurarihyon no Mago when he was in a bind. His hair became straight and turned black, his attack and speed increased drastically. More importantly, his technique became stronger. So with Senjutsu, I tried to imitate that effect. That technique turned into the Fear that I usually used to dodge and create a Fake clone to imbue my attack. It was a broken technique, but I had a hard time using it. Mainly because I could stay in my Youkai form all day. Not only that, I was strong enough without that technique. I thought that I would be able to beat anyone by just dodging and attacking from behind, but I was wrong. Heavenly Dragon Scale Mail and Sairaorg¡¯s armor was too fucking hard. I need to use it. Slowly but surely, my aura changed and black some seeped out from my body and floated to the sky. My ponytail was untangled, and my hair was dancing in the sky. ¡°Ah, I can use it,¡± I muttered and stopped jumping around. I stood right in front of Sairaorg with my newfound speed. ¡°Wha?!¡± Sairaorg let out a surprised sound, but he quickly pulled his arm and sent a punch. I was twice faster than before, and I could feel that my strength was increased too. Sairaorg¡¯s punch was now looked like a snail, it was slow. ¡°Block this or you will die.¡± I said to Sairaorg and sent a punch toward him. His brow furrowed, he sensed the danger that came from my attack. He quickly stopped his punch and crossed his arms in front of his chest in an X sign. My fist hit his arms, destroying his armor, and then blowing him away. Crack! Bam! He flew at a fast speed and crashed into the barrier. Creak! Crack! The barrier began creaking, it was almost destroyed. Sairaorg collapsed in the distance, he wasn¡¯t even moving. His armor began to dissipate into a golden light. I also couldn¡¯t hold this Offense form any longer, I turned back after a few seconds. I need to train later, this would be a great trump card too. RaizarP Author Here~ More than 60 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks for the new Executive! - john Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 150 – After Spar Talk Sona quickly canceled the barrier and made his way to Sairaorg. She crouched beside him, then sighed in relief before turning at me. ¡°Hey!¡± She shouted. ¡°You¡¯ve gone too far!¡± I just shrugged my shoulders as if that was not my problem. ¡°It¡¯s a spar, why should I hold back? Even Sairaorg asks me to not hold back.¡± ¡°Look at your surrounding!¡± Shouted Sona as she pointed her finger at the ground around me. I looked around. The ground was destroyed, the flat ground was now full of craters and debris. But, I saw nothing wrong and looked back at Sona. ¡°There is nothing wrong.¡± It was just an aftermath of our spar, there was nothing wrong. However Sona looked dumbfounded, she held her head with her hand. ¡°Truly, you see nothing wrong in this?¡± And she snapped. ¡°Yeah right, nothing is wrong with the ground being destroyed. I am the strange one!¡± I blinked a few times. Sona stood up and approached me. She stomped the ground and had an angry expression. ¡°You, hear me.¡± She pointed her index finger to my chest and raised her face to look at my face. ¡°Spar is not like this! This is a duel, not a spar! Both of you have gone too far and destroyed the property of Belial!¡± When she said it like that, I forgot that we were in the Belial mansion. I fought Sairaorg, and he came from Bael''s house. In the middle of our fight, I just wanted to defeat him, and we had too much fun. I looked away from Sona, and at that moment, I heard Sairaorg grunt and moved his body. ¡°H-Hey, Sairaorg began to get his consciousness back!¡± ¡°Don¡¯t change the topic!¡± Shouted Sona. ¡°You understand that this will be a problem? You destroyed a field in the Belial Mansion. If Diehauser=sama saw this, what do you think will happen to you?¡± ¡°Nothing,¡± I said to Sona and used Kyouka Suigetsu and let Sona talk with my Fake. Getting lectured like that was annoying, I left her alone in that place and approached Sairaorg. He then gained his consciousness back and opened his eyes. ¡°I lost.¡± He said. ¡°So there is someone in my generation that¡¯s stronger than me?¡± Sairaorg raised his body slowly and now he sat with crossed legs. He looked at Sona who lectured my Fake. He tried to stand up, but he staggered. ¡°Don¡¯t push yourself,¡± I said to Sairaorg in a low voice. He stopped moving and looked in my direction. He couldn¡¯t see me because I used Kyouka Suigetsu, that was why he was confused. He looked at my fake again who was lectured by Sona and then turned his gaze in my direction again. ¡°You used your technique to run from Sona, huh?¡± He noticed it. Of course, if he couldn¡¯t guess what kind of technique I used against him, he won¡¯t be called the strongest young devil. He was able to get that title because of his fighting powers. Not only that, I knew that he was at least smarter than the other people my age. ¡°She¡¯s annoying,¡± I said to Sairaorg. ¡°She always has this calm air around her, but somehow she always got angry at me.¡± ¡°Hahahaha, doesn¡¯t that mean she¡¯s opening her heart to you, eh?¡± Sairaorg said with a smile. It was surprising, he could joke around like that too. I sat in front of him and canceled my technique. My Fake that was in front of Sona disappeared and she froze in her position. ¡°Nah, no thanks. I have too much in my hands now.¡± ¡°Hahaha, so you are a playboy, huh? Not that I mind that. After all, a lot of devils have more than 5 wives. Especially the strong one.¡± ¡°I am not a playboy.¡± I denied his claim. At that point, Sona noticed me and made our way towards us. ¡°Well, to be honest, I prefer to not have any relationship with devil shitty society and politics.¡± Sairaorg looked at me with a gaze that said he could understand my feeling. I interacted with him normally and had no problem whatsoever. I didn¡¯t show my contempt towards devils nor tell him that I hate devils. But, I hate their politics. I just didn¡¯t want to have a relationship with one. I didn¡¯t hate them, but their politics were troublesome. ¡°I know your feeling. But, tell me if I am wrong, isn¡¯t youkai also have those kinds of politics?¡± Asked Sairaorg seriously. Sona was standing beside us now, she kept her silent because she looked curious about the situation of the youkai now. I couldn¡¯t blame them for being curious, because the supernatural society didn¡¯t really know much about youkai. We were rather seclusive while handling our matters. Not only that, each faction had its own problem at hand, so they couldn¡¯t care less for a weak faction like youkai. They thought that we were weak, that was far from the truth though. ¡°Nay,¡± I answered Sairaorg¡¯s question with a grin on my face. I put my elbow on my knee and rested my head on my hand. ¡°We do nothing like politics in my faction. The leader will choose the next leader. As long as the successor is strong enough to lead our clan, then our subordinates will follow us. If they wanted to express their dissatisfaction, they will speak loudly in the meeting without even hiding their feeling.¡± I paused a little and observed Sairaorg¡¯s expression. He turned a bit grim, maybe because he had a situation that was similar to the one I talked about. He didn¡¯t inherit his family¡¯s power and was only chosen as the heir after he beat his little brother. ¡°Devils are also about power, right? But they kept their desire hidden. We are not like that. Youkai are free, we love freedom. So, any dissatisfaction will be settled on the same day, with a method that¡¯s acceptable for both sides.¡± Sairaorg then has a wry smile on his face, ¡°How envious. I hope we are like that too.¡± ¡°Hahahaha, I bet you do.¡± I laughed and stood up. I looked at the entrance of the mansion and felt big energy coming from the distance. ¡°It seems that the master of the mansion will arrive shortly.¡± Sairaorg who heard me stood up and asked. ¡°Really? How can you tell?¡± I looked at him and put my index finger in front of my mouth. ¡°Secret. Do you think I will tell you all my techniques?¡± ¡°Nah no, hahahaha. Well then, let¡¯s meet him immediately. I will take you to him.¡± Said Sairaorg as he walked away. ¡°Much appreciated.¡± I then followed him from behind, leaving Sona alone. I waved my hand at her and said, ¡°You are free to leave, Sona. I don¡¯t need you here anymore.¡± RaizarP Author Here~ More than 60 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 151 – Diehauser Belial Because I was technically a guest, Sairaorg took me inside the mansion and guided me to the gallery room. There were two couches and one table in the room. On the wall, there was a drawing of Diehauser Belial in his formal outfit. Sairaorg told me to wait here while he would get Diehauser Belial and informed him about me. The gallery room was on the first floor, while the boy was on the second floor of the mansion. There was a person with an energy similar to Diehauser beside the boy, but the energy was smaller than him. ¡®It seems that my guess is correct. So Sirzechs wasn¡¯t lying when he said that she¡¯s still alive.¡¯ A few minutes later, the door opened and Sona appeared from beyond the door with a frown on her face. ¡°Hey¡­ I am leaving.¡± She said as she entered the room. She closed the door behind her and walked to me. ¡°Hmm, yeah. If you want to leave, then feel free to leave.¡± I said to her as I waved my hand. ¡°Tsk!¡± Sona then clicked her tongue and a blue magic circle appeared under her feet. ¡°Don¡¯t cause any trouble.¡± ¡°Yeah yeah, I know. I can¡¯t promise you though.¡± Because I plan to meet the boy even if Diehauser didn¡¯t allow me to. ¡°Do as you please! Goodbye!¡± Sona then teleported away as the light engulfed her body, leaving me sitting on the couch alone in this gallery room. It was quiet, but then I felt that Diehauser had arrived at the entrance. The energy moves closer to this room. Now, I had no plan at all. To be honest, I just wanted to visit here to meet that boy. I didn¡¯t know Diehauser¡¯s character. Would he be offended if I say what was in my mind? Would he be offended if I asked him about Cleria Belial? Should I just teleport for a second to grab Masaomi and took him here? The half-devil, the boy was his son, that was what I guessed. The energy that felt similar to Diehauser Belial, could only possibly be had by his sibling or his relative. And Cleria Belial was his cousin. There was a possibility that the energy that I felt on the second floor was Diehauser¡¯s parents, but I don¡¯t think that was the case. Diehauser¡¯s energy was now in front of the gallery door with Sairaorg. The door was opened and I saw a big man with gray hair enter the room, followed by Sairaorg. He scanned the room and stopped when he saw me. ¡°You are Nura Riku?¡± I stood up and greeted him with a smile, ¡°Yeah, and you are Diehauser Belial?¡± His eyes squinted. He looked at me from shoes to head, and then his eyes stopped at my hair. ¡°You are similar to him. It¡¯s a bit unpleasant.¡± He then smiled, ¡°But your aura was different from Nurarihyon. Well, please be at ease and take a seat.¡± As he said that, he walked to the couch across from me and sat down. I also sat down. Sairaorg walked to me and sat beside me as if this was his home. He was too relaxed. When Diehauser sat down, a maid appeared from the door while pushing a tray. There were three cakes on top of the tray, two western teacups with black tea, and one traditional Japanese teacup with green tea. The maid then put the cake and the tea in front of us. Naturally, she put the green tea in front of me. I looked at Diehauser and he smiled. ¡°Let¡¯s have sake later. I heard from Sairaorg that you wanted to meet me, so I guess tea is fit for a discussion, no?¡± This guy knew about it. ¡°So my old man had visited you before?¡± Surely. There was no way Diehauser would know my preference if that old man didn¡¯t visit him in the past. My preference was the same with my old man, maybe it was because we were related. ¡°Yes.¡± Diehauser raised his tea and took a sip from it. ¡°He suddenly appeared in our dining room when I was having a meal with Sirzechs-sama. Not only that, he demanded Sake and meal as if my mansion was his house.¡± ¡°Hahahahaha,¡± I laughed at Diehauser. ¡°Well, I should¡¯ve visited with the same way if I knew my old man had visited you before.¡± Diehauser looked at me with a wry smile, ¡°Actually, I appreciated you more than your father because you visited me normally. However, please do call me first if you wanted to visit in the future. I can somehow guess your intention for coming to my mansion this time.¡± I took the teacup in front of me and raised it with two hands. My right hand was on the cup¡¯s body while my left hand was supporting the cup from the bottom. I took a sip from it and looked at Diehauser. ¡°Oh? You know about my intention?¡± I asked him. ¡°Yeah, somehow. The reason why I leave my mansion earlier was to meet with Sirzechs-sama. I got rather interesting information regarding youkai and the church. I heard that you will have a friendly competition with the church and heaven a day after the peace conference?¡± Asked Diehauser back. ¡°So I guessed the reason for your visit. I guess you wanted me and my peerage to take part in the friendly competition?¡± While he was not wrong about the information, his guess was far from my real intention of coming here. So I cut him off. ¡°Unfortunately, that¡¯s not the case this time, Diehauser. I will appreciate it if you or the devils join the friendly competition, but that¡¯s not the reason for my visit this time.¡± Diehauser then looked at me with interest. He slouched his back a little and asked. ¡°So, what¡¯s your reason for visiting me this time? Surely it¡¯s not because you wanted to have a free meal.¡± ¡°Yes, this is rather important for me, you know? I wanted to meet with Cleria Belial.¡± Diehauser frowned as soon as I mentioned Cleria Belial. ¡°Why?¡± He asked with a different tone from earlier. His tone was cold and commanding. ¡°Because I wanted to meet her son. Also, my subordinate will certainly be happy if he could meet his beloved again.¡± Diehauser¡¯s eyes widened. He stopped moving for a few seconds before he finally let out a sigh and leaned her back against the couch''s backrest. ¡°Sigh, so he¡¯s still alive? Not only that, he becomes your subordinate?¡± ¡°Yeah, indeed. I saved him when he was about to die.¡± Diehauser straightened his sitting position again and smiled, ¡°Thank you. Cleria will be happy to hear this.¡± I smiled back at Dihauser. ¡°My subordinate was also happy when he heard Cleria is still alive. So, can I meet her?¡± Diehauser nodded his head and stood up from the couch. ¡°Sure, follow me. I think it will be okay if it¡¯s you. After all, those old devils didn¡¯t have any influence in the youkai faction. So I will believe you. I believe that you will not spread the news about Cleria to those old devils.¡± ¡°You can trust me in that matter.¡± RaizarP Author Here~ More than 60 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 152 – Cleria Belial Diehauser guided me to the second floor of his mansion. Sairaorg left us while saying he had something to do in his house though, so it was just the two of us. While we were walking there, we were chatting a little bit. ¡°However, how did you know that Cleria is still alive?¡± Asked Diehauser. ¡°Hmm? About that, it was a bit complicated story.¡± I said to him as I crossed my arms. Usually, I crossed my arms underneath my Kimono. But, because I wore Kuoh¡¯s uniform today, I couldn¡¯t do that. ¡°I don¡¯t mind, to be honest, I am really interested in your story. I heard about you for the first time when you killed Kokabiel and decimated his army of thousands with just a few hundred Youkai. You are amazing, maybe you have surpassed your father in his youth.¡± My old man in his youth. I was interested in that. I meant, he was strong, especially in his youth. Age has made his blade dull, not only that, he had been pampered by peace. ¡°Well, I have no story to be told except that one tho. To be fair, I only destroyed a big army and one small faction. So my story is limited.¡± ¡°Oh? You destroyed one small faction, how could I never heard of that?¡± Asked Diehauser with curiosity written clearly on his face. ¡°Sirzechs and Serafall limited the news. Because it happened in the underworld. I destroyed one of the factions that affiliated with Khaos Brigade, named Hero Faction.¡± ¡°Hero Faction? You destroyed them?¡± Exclaimed Diehauser with a surprised tone. ¡°Yeah, you know them?¡± I asked Diehauser. ¡°Of course, I know about them. I was hunting them at some point, but Cao Cao¡¯s Sacred Gear is too strong, especially against a devil such as me. Don¡¯t tell me, you kill Cao Cao too?¡± ¡°Yeah. Of course. I destroyed them completely. So, the True Longinus also found its new wielder. It¡¯s a bit surprising because I thought that the spear at least won¡¯t appear for the next decades. However, Michael told me that the spear has found its new wielder already. By the way, don¡¯t tell anyone about this information, at least until the peace conference, okay?¡± ¡°Hmm? I don¡¯t mind. But at least, can I share this information with Sirzechs or Serafall? Knowing that they knew the death of Cao Cao.¡± I smirked at Dihauser as we stepped on the second floor, ¡°You can decide that yourself. So, where is Cleria?¡± Although I knew her position already, I decided to ask him, trying to be polite in his mansion. Not my style, but it couldn¡¯t be helped. I was an uninvited guest after all, and I did know a manner. ¡°This way. Cleria is still a bit cautious against a stranger, but I think that she will be fine if you are the one who visited her.¡± Hmm? She would be fine if I visited her? I never had any relation with her though. ¡°Why?¡± I asked Diehauser. ¡°I never met her before, and I just acquainted with Masaomi for a while now. Why are you so sure that she will be fine even if she meet me?¡± Although I was her lover¡¯s superior, I was a stranger to her. There was no way she would be fine with me, right? He even said that Cleria was cautious against a stranger. ¡°Well, how do I say it, you seem to be a likable individual. Not only that, somehow I feel like I can trust you easily.¡± Again, someone who said that they could trust me when they only met me once. Why did they always say that to me? Was I that trustworthy? Because I, myself, never thought that I was a trustworthy individual. I did what I wanted to do. So I couldn¡¯t understand their thought. ¡°Whatever. In short, Cleria might be agreeing to meet me, right?¡± ¡°Yeah, that might be the case. Well, follow me. I wanted to tell her the good news that her loved one is alive, so she could recover. I was always regretting when Cleria cried at that time, so I am glad that he¡¯s still alive.¡± Diehauser then walked again, I followed him quietly as I scanned the mansion. This was extravagant, the ceiling was so high. Compared to my Japanese Mansion, this mansion was shinier. However, in terms of size, I could boast that my mansion was bigger than this mansion. Someone said that a mansion was proof of someone¡¯s power, and I agree with that. The bigger the mansion, the stronger the one who lives there. After walking for a while, we stopped in front of a door. Behind this door, I felt the True Longinus and the energy that was similar to Diehauser. As expected, that energy was Cleria¡¯s. ¡°She¡¯s here. I will enter first. Can you follow me from behind?¡± ¡°Yeah, sure, no problem.¡± I nodded my head to Diehauser. He nodded back, and then he knocked on the door three times. Knock, Knock, Knock ¡°Cleria, it¡¯s me.¡± He said. A girl''s voice then answered from beyond the door. ¡°Yes, please wait a second.¡± After she said that, footsteps followed suit. A second later, the door was opened and a girl with long gray hair and gray eyes. She looked at Diehauser with a smile, then he noticed me who stood behind Diehauser. Her eyes widened a little, but she looked back at Diehauser. ¡°May I ask something, Diehauser?¡± Asked the girl, Cleria Belial. ¡°Yes, anything.¡± Answered Diehauser with a sweet smile. So the Belial house did treasure their family. I heard from the rumors that Belial was the house that treasured their family the most, so it was true. It was our first meeting, but Cleria¡¯s reaction was strange. ¡°The gentleman who is standing behind you, he¡¯s not Nurarihyon, right? Because I remember that guy is not this¡­ polite? This gentleman is more, reserved with his conduct.¡± And I should¡¯ve known this from the start. Fucking old man, what did he do in Belial''s house? ¡°No, he¡¯s Nurarihyon¡¯s son. His name is Nura Riku, and he has good news for you.¡± Diehauser stepped to the side and pointed at me with his hand as he introduced me. ¡°Nurarihyon¡¯s son, is it? He¡¯s as handsome as his father. Truly a sinful race, Nurarihyon. Fufufu.¡± Said Cleria as she giggled. ¡°Ah, forgive me. Nura Riku, was it?¡± ¡°Indeed, my name is Nura Riku.¡± I said to Cleria as I nodded my head. ¡°And I am here to see you and your son.¡± ¡°Hmm? How did you know about Yae?¡± Asked Cleria as she squinted her eyes. Diehauser was only looking at us from the side, as he knew that I wanted to tell Cleria that Masaomi was still alive. However¡­ ¡®She named his son Yae? Pfft!¡¯ I laughed when I heard the name of her son. Cleria¡¯s face contorted into a frown as she asked again, ¡°Was there something funny?¡± ¡°Ah ah, sorry about that. Just, I never thought that you would give your son that name. He will be troubled when he heard that. Damn, that guy was lucky to get a girl like you.¡± I said as I wiped the tears that built up in the edge of my eyes because I was laughing too hard. ¡°He?¡± Cleria¡¯s eyes widened a little, ¡°What do you know about my loved one?¡± Asked Cleria with a cold tone. ¡°Chill, Cleria. Well, what do I know about Masaomi Yaegaki? Well, he¡¯s living in my mansion right now, serving me as part of my Hyakki Yakkou. Is that answer satisfying?¡± ¡°Eh?¡± Cleria let out a surprised voice, ¡°He¡¯s alive?¡± ¡°Yup, alive and kicking. I saved him when I met him. Are you happy?¡± I asked her. Tears flowed out of her eyes. She then covered her face with her hands and sobbed, ¡°Y-yes¡­ Y-Yaegaki is alive¡­ I-I¡¯m glad.¡± Diehauser approached her and hugged her to comfort his cousin. After a while, she managed to contain her tears. She released her hug and then smiled at me. ¡°Thank you¡­¡± She wiped the tears on her face and said again, ¡°Thank you very much.¡± RaizarP Author Here~ More than 60 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 153 – Cleria’s Wish ¡°Don¡¯t worry about it. Masaomi also tried to find you. However, can I hear your side of the story? How can you survive? And, why did the old devil didn¡¯t make any move?¡± Cleria looked at Diehauser for a second before turning to me again and nodding her head. ¡°Yes. Please come in, this is my son¡¯s room, but I believe you don¡¯t mind about it?¡± ¡°I don¡¯t mind. I can be everywhere. Hahahaha.¡± ¡°Fufufu, well then, please come in.¡± Cleria said as she entered the room. ¡°Do you want to go in too, Diehauser?¡± ¡°No, I still have something to be done in the territory. My peerage has been waiting for me.¡± ¡°Ah! What a shame. I wanted to have tea with you, Diehauser. Yae also wanted to meet you.¡± ¡°Maybe later. You have made Nura Riku waiting, you know? I will leave now.¡± Diehauser smiled sheepishly as he walked away and waved his hand. ¡°Yes, Diehauser.¡± Said Cleria. She then turned to me as she smiled shyly. ¡°Ah, please do forgive me. This time is real, please come in.¡± For the third time, Cleria said please come in. This time, however, I entered the room and saw a boy from the picture sitting on a chair in front of a desk. He looked at me a second, then turned to Cleria and asked. ¡°Mother, who is he?¡± He stood up and observed me with eyes full of interest, especially when he saw my hair. ¡°This is Nura Riku, he¡¯s the successor of the East Youkai Faction. Can you introduce yourself to him?¡± The boy¡¯s mouth opened and he walked in front of me. He then bowed to me a little and introduced himself. ¡°It¡¯s nice to meet you, my name is Yaemasa Belial.¡± He then raised his head and smiled brightly. This¡­ strange. He had Masaomi¡¯s feature, but¡­ he also had Cleria¡¯s eyes. Black hair, grey eyes. I crouched to match his gaze and said. ¡°Yo, I am the lord of pandemonium, Nura Riku. Your mother¡¯s introduction wasn¡¯t wrong, but I have officially become the leader of the East Youkai Clan because my old man had left for his journey. Nice to meet you, boy.¡± ¡°Oh, I¡¯m sorry about that. I seldom leave this mansion, so I don¡¯t know about the news outside.¡± Cleria apologized to me as she looked at me with apologetic eyes. I looked at her and said, ¡°Don¡¯t worry about it. We just have a small party and didn¡¯t even announce it. Also, only you and your son knew about it right now.¡± I smiled at Cleria with a playful look. ¡°Eh? Then isn¡¯t that a problem?¡± Asked Yaemasa as he freaked out. I put my right hand on his head and ruffled it, ¡°Don¡¯t worry about it. You are the son of my subordinate, I won¡¯t do anything to you. Well, except when there is something that requires me to, but don¡¯t worry about it too much.¡± Yaemasa¡¯s eyes widened as he asked, ¡°What do you mean by that?¡± Cleria approached us and hugged Yaemasa from behind, ¡°Yae, your father is still alive¡­¡± ¡°Eh?¡± Yaemasa let out a surprised voice, ¡°Really?¡± He asked again. ¡°Yeah, Masaomi Yaegaki is still alive and kicking. Though he¡¯s been turned to a devil, I had extracted his evil piece safely, so he¡¯s not under anyone¡¯s influence now.¡± ¡°That¡¯s a relief. Really¡­¡± Cleria then cried again, this time she hugged her son as she cried. I let her cry for a while as I sat on the chair around the table in the room. She cried for around 5 minutes, she then sat on the chair across from me, and Yaemasa sat beside her. ¡°For now, I am really thankful for bringing such good news.¡± Said Cleria as she bowed her head to me. ¡°Thank you!¡± Exclaimed Yaemasa. ¡°You¡¯re welcome. Well, I just coincidentally found him when I walked inside a forest. He¡¯s now in my mansion, and he worked as my subordinate.¡± ¡°I see. Nura-sama, please hear my wish if you don¡¯t mind.¡± Said Cleria as she put on a serious face. I nodded my head a little and said, ¡°Please do tell me. I wanted to ask something from you too if you don¡¯t mind.¡± ¡°Hmm, I need to hear it first before I can give my answer. But I am thankful that you are agreeing to hear my wish.¡± ¡°Don¡¯t mind that. Technically, you are my subordinate¡¯s wife. It¡¯s natural to hear the wish from my subordinate¡¯s family.¡± I said to Cleria as I smiled. ¡°I already regard Masaomi as my family, as my comrade. So do tell me your wish.¡± ¡°Yes, the truth is¡­ I wanted to meet with Masaomi-san again. Can you maybe take me, no, take us to the human world? Even a day is enough. However¡­¡± ¡°You are currently being hunted by the old devil because of your knowledge of the King Piece as well as the sudden Sacred Gear that appeared in your son, right?¡± ¡°How did you know about that?!¡± Cleria¡¯s eyes widened in surprise, ¡°No, considering you, I guess the information is really easy, right? Maybe the other doesn¡¯t know about it, but Nurarihyon has a lot of friends from each faction.¡± She misunderstood that my connection was my old man¡¯s, huh? Well, I don¡¯t think that I need to tell her that Michael was the one who told me about her son¡¯s Sacred Gear. Regarding King Piece, I just remember it from the series which was now blurry. I couldn¡¯t remember a lot of things, which was natural because I was in this world for more than 16 years! I don¡¯t need those memories again though, as history had changed, and I at least still remember the key players that wanted to destroy the world. So I answered Cleria. ¡°Correct. So you want to meet Masaomi? I can help you with that.¡± Cleria¡¯s face brightened as she clapped her hands in front of her chest, ¡°Really?¡± ¡°Yeah,¡± I said and stood up from the chair. ¡°Shall we go now? I will tell you what I want when we are in my mansion.¡± ¡°Yes, please!¡± Cleria then stood up and looked at Yaemasa. ¡°Yae, let¡¯s go.¡± I then made a magic circle to teleport under our feet, ¡°Are you ready?¡± Cleria and Yaemasa nodded their heads, and I then teleported us to my mansion. After thinking for a while, wasn¡¯t I basically kidnapping Diehauser¡¯s cousin because he didn¡¯t know about this? Well, whatever. RaizarP Author Here~ More than 60 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 154 – Lover Reunion Once again, after I teleported to the entrance of my mansion, Kubinashi looked at me and sighed. ¡°Another one, Riku-sama?¡± He said as he held his head in place. ¡°What do you mean by another one? She¡¯s a guest.¡± I said to Kubinashi as I walked inside the mansion. ¡°You can follow me, Cleria. Bring your son inside too, there is a lot of youkai that love to play, so he can play with them if he wanted to. Oi guys!¡± ¡°Ah, yes. Come on, Yae.¡± Cleria looked at her son with a smile. ¡°Yes, Mother. May I play with someone like he said?¡± Asked Yaemasa. ¡°Of course, feel free to play with the others. But¡­¡± Cleria¡¯s words stopped midway, mainly because there was a lot of youkai appearing around the mansion. ¡°Riku-sama!¡± ¡°Welcome back, Riku-sama!¡± ¡°Yayayaya, do you bring any food with you, Riku-sama?!¡± ¡°Cut it out! Don¡¯t you see that there is a guest here?!¡± Kubinashi shouted at them, and they finally quieted down. They welcomed me back, but Cleria was surprised when she saw them. I must admit that they indeed look scary, but they were a good guy. Each youkai had no similar form. Small, big, animals, monsters, they had a lot of looks. Yaemasa didn¡¯t look scared though, he looked at the youkai with eyes full of interest. ¡°Yo guys, can you play with that boy over there? He never had any friends, so teach him how to have fun.¡± ¡°Leave it to us, Riku-sama!¡± ¡°Yeah! We will have fun with him!¡± Cleria then looked dumbfounded, but Yaemasa had a big smile on his face. He looked at Cleria and said, ¡°Mother, may I play with them, please?¡± ¡°Y-yes. Make sure to get along well, okay? ¡°Of course! Thank you, Mother!¡± Seeing that the boy had agreed to play with them, a youkai that had a human body with a Natto head, often called Nattou Kozou, approached Yaemasa and pulled his hand. ¡°Let¡¯s go! I am Nattou Kozou, the leader of the small youkai. I will teach you how to have fun.¡± ¡°Okay!¡± Exclaimed Yaemasa as he beamed into a smile. Cleria looked at his son with a loving expression, and I used this chance to whisper something to Kubinashi. ¡°Hey, did Dulio already leave the mansion?¡± Kubinashi put on a serious face and nodded his head, ¡°Yes. He left after Kejoro gave him bento. But, why did you ask, Riku-sama? You even left him here.¡± ¡°It¡¯s a bit complicated. Well, I managed to gain something because I left Dulio though.¡± I said as I looked at Cleria who was looking at Yaemasa who run around the mansion with the other youkai. Her expression changed a few times when she was looking at her son. Kubinashi followed my gaze and looked at Cleria, ¡°However, who is that? You brought a lot of women home recently, are you trying to be a scumbag, Riku-sama?¡± ¡°You didn¡¯t hold your mouth in front of me, eh?¡± I looked at Kubinashi as I smirked. ¡°I can¡¯t find another word, so I used that. But, if I may ask. Who is she, Riku-sama?¡± ¡°She¡¯s Cleria Belial, Masaomi¡¯s lover. And apparently, he fucking did it and had a son before he was turned into a mindless stray devil.¡± I answered Kubinashi and he exclaimed. ¡°No way! But, well, if you want to find Masaomi, he¡¯s in the dojo as usual. He sure loves being there while meditating.¡± ¡°I know, I plan to bring her to meet Yaegaki after this. Keep your eye on the boy, Kubinashi. Don¡¯t let him wander out of the mansion. He¡¯s.. a bit special.¡± Kubinashi nodded his head seriously, ¡°Please leave it to me.¡± ¡°I am counting on you.¡± I then turned to Cleria and shouted, ¡°Hey! Are you ready to meet your lover?¡± ¡°Kya!¡± Cleria looked at me and yelped in surprise. Her face turned red, but she nodded her head, ¡°Yes.¡± ¡°Hahaha, follow me then. Let¡¯s surprise him for good.¡± I then walked towards the dojo. Cleria followed me from behind. *** After we¡¯ve arrived in front of the dojo, I asked Cleria to wait outside of the dojo first while I talked with Masaomi. It was to surprise him, so she happily agreed to my plan. I slide the door open and saw Masaomi swinging Excalibur Rapidly in Hakama. He was sweating profusely. He stopped his swing after she noticed me and turned his gaze to me. ¡°Riku-sama, what¡¯s bring you here today? Do you want to spar again?¡± I leaned against the wall near the door and waved my hand, ¡°Nah, no. I have to deal with something later, so I have no time to spar. More importantly, are you free right now? I wanted to ask something from you.¡± Masaomi made his way towards the corner of the dojo where towels were stacked. He took one of the towels and wiped her sweat with it as he said, ¡°Of course. I have nothing to do except for training. I can use Excalibur Rapidly for a few hours straight without being burnt by the holy energy now.¡± ¡°Oh, that¡¯s impressive.¡± That was really impressive. It¡¯s only a few days, and yet he made such progress. I also made a lot of progress in the last few weeks thanks to spars with a lot of people. But Masaomi was a former human, now a devil. He was able to grow faster than most people in this world. ¡°Thank you for your praise, Riku-sama.¡± Said Masaomi as he smiled, ¡°By the way, you said that you wanted to ask something. What is it, Riku-sama?¡± ¡°Ah, right. You did know that your lover, Cleria Belial, is still alive, right? Do you want to meet her again?¡± Masaomi¡¯s expression then turned gloom as he lowered his head, ¡°Yes¡­ Of course, I wanted to meet her again¡­ But, it will be hard with the situation right now.¡± ¡°However, you wanted to meet her right?¡± I asked him again. Masaomi raised his head and nodded, ¡°If I am given the chance to, then I really love to meet her again.¡± I grinned at his words and raised my chin, ¡°Then I have good news for you.¡± Masaomi was confused, but his eyes were filled with hope after I told him that. He must¡¯ve connected the dot between my question and the good news. I then knocked on the door a few times and said, ¡°You can enter now.¡± As I said that, Cleria then appeared from the door and cried as soon as she saw Masaomi. ¡°Masaomi¡­¡± Said Cleria as she sobbed. However, her lips were curved in a smile. Masaomi¡¯s eyes were widened in surprise. Without waiting for anything, he run towards Cleria and hugged her. ¡°Cleria!¡± ¡°Yes, Masaomi!¡± Both of them then hugged each other, ignoring my existence who was looking at them from the side. Masaomi also cried as he hugged Cleria. ¡®Well, my role is over here. I will leave them for a while before I spoke to their son.¡¯ I then left the reunited lover quietly, as quiet as a leaf that fell on the pond without causing a ripple. RaizarP Author Here~ More than 60 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 155 – Disturbing Invitation After I left the couple alone, I went to the pond in the backyard and climbed the sakura tree. From here, I could see the small and young youkai running around the mansion, playing along with Yaemasa. They seemed to be having fun, to the point their smile never left their faces. I was really interested to make Cleria lives in this house. Maybe I should talk with Diehauser about that? My mansion was safe from the old devil, unlike the underworld. In this place, no one would be able to find her. Masaomi would be happy if he could live with his loved one, and they could get married on top of it. ¡°Hmm, what should I do? Tomorrow I need to go to the dimensional gap too.¡± I muttered to myself as I looked at the Sakura tree. It was now filled with green leaves, the summer has arrived. I¡¯m tired of dealing with all of those things. I wanted to laze around like now and sleep all day. ¡°If only I know their base, I would¡¯ve stormed in with my Hyakki Yakkou. However¡­¡± Their base was hidden. I don¡¯t know the locations of Rizevim¡¯s base. ¡°Damn, there is also the matter of Valerie. I should save her as soon as possible. There is a sign that her power was used. As proof, that Yamata no Orochi energy that I felt at Osaka.¡± I need her to restore Vasco¡¯s youth too. Although he was muscular right now, he¡¯s a geezer in his 80. His power was far from his peak, and Sephiroth Graal could do that. ¡°I should use that power to restore my old man¡¯s youth too. Even though his appearance still looked young, he¡¯s too old. It¡¯s time for him to retire.¡± Yaemasa and the young youkai passed the pond and waved their hands at me. I smiled and waved back before looking up at the sky. ¡°Ah, shit. If only Ophis is here, I can ask her to directly transport me to their base. I have no way to contact that bastard named Vali too.¡± I ruffled my hair and jumped down from the tree. I made my way towards my room and changed into my usual Kimono. These were the best clothes, I felt comfortable just by wearing them. ¡°Should I go for a quick lunch? I couldn¡¯t feel Dulio already. Kuroka and Tsura seem to be out either.¡± I exited my room and headed towards the exit. When I was on my way, I saw someone outside my mansion talking with Kubinashi. That someone was unexpectedly the biggest pervert in the universe, Azazel. He saw me and waved his hand. ¡°Oi, Riku!¡± I looked away from the gate and continue my walk. ¡°Oi! You heard me, right?! Don¡¯t ignore me! I have information that may interest you!¡± Shouted Azazel. Kubinashi tried to stop Azazel from entering too. However, that was no use. Although he was like that, Azazel was still the leader of the fallen angel, a former Seraph. His strength was greater than Kubinashi''s. Usually, I would ignore someone like Azazel if I had no reason to meet him. However, the information that he talked about made me curious. I stopped on my track and ordered Kubinashi. ¡°Kubinashi, let him pass.¡± Azazel beamed in a smile. He walked in my direction while looking around, ¡°Hou, this is a big mansion. It¡¯s a good place.¡± He said. There was something that made me curious, ¡°How did you find our mansion?¡± This mansion was hidden by my new barrier on top of my old man¡¯s Fear. Not anyone could find this mansion, especially the other factions. That was why I was a bit surprised when I saw Azazel in front of the entrance. The reason why Dulio could find my mansion was I told Vasco the location of my mansion. I thought he would be the one to visit, I never expected that he would send Dulio instead. ¡°I do admit that finding this mansion is hard. I need to spend more than a week tracking you down.¡± Said Azazel, ¡°However, it¡¯s worth it. Although I just find it a few minutes ago, I rushed here because I found something interesting and I want to share it with you.¡± He stroked his beard as he looked at me with a playful smile. I sighed and pointed at the room to receive a guest. ¡°Let¡¯s head inside. The lunch is almost prepared, let¡¯s have a chat while having lunch.¡± ¡°Oh? Lunch, was it? Is there a sake too?¡± Asked Azazel. ¡°Of course. The sake that youkai made is strong though, are you confident you won¡¯t get drunk?¡± ¡°Hahahaha, I am looking forward to it. Even though I look like this, I can hold my liquor pretty well.¡± Azazel imitated a gesture of drinking sake with his hand. ¡°That¡¯s good then.¡± I then looked at Kubinashi and shouted, ¡°Kubinashi! Can you ask Kejoro to bring us two lunches and two bottles of Sake?¡± ¡°Certainly, Riku-sama!¡± I then turned to Azazel, ¡°Follow me.¡± *** We were sitting around the table. Kejoro prepared our lunch in no time at all. She set the meal on the table, and she didn¡¯t forget the sake either. After she left the room, I asked Azazel. ¡°So, why did you visit my mansion?¡± He began eating the meal that was prepared for him, but he still answered my question. ¡°As I said earlier, I bring some information that will make you interested. Do you want to hear it?¡± Azazel pointed his chopstick at me. ¡°Just tell me about it. I am busy preparing for tomorrow.¡± ¡®I¡¯m too busy that I felt like hiding in some forest and let the Khaos Brigade screw this world.¡¯ That maybe a good idea, but I was deeply involved with them to bail out right now. ¡°Well, just hear me out. I think your plan for tomorrow needs to be canceled.¡± Hmm? ¡°What do you mean by that?¡± ¡°As I said, cancel your plan with Reni tomorrow, it¡¯s useless. The magicians had long abandoned that base.¡± ¡°Damn, I thought they still hid at that place.¡± If they had abandoned their base, then searching for Walburga would be a tedious task. ¡°That¡¯s where my information comes in. Say, care to accompany me to the vampire world? Your target is in that place too, helping a certain vampire to control another vampire.¡± Asked Azazel as he poured his sake on his cup, ¡°Let¡¯s sneak in the vampire world.¡± This guy really knew how to make me interested. ¡°I am in. When should we go?¡± Azazel grinned, ¡°Right now.¡± RaizarP Author Here~ More than 60 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 156 – Azazel’s plan ¡°Right now?¡± I asked Azazel with a confused tone, ¡°How? The vampire world is hidden, and from what I know, only a vampire can find the entrance to the vampire world. Unless you have a vampire in Grigori, I don¡¯t think we will be able to go to the vampire world.¡± Even I will need help from a vampire to go to the vampire world. That¡¯s why I tried to get closer to Gasper. If I get closer to him, and he somehow owes me something, such as asking me to help Rias¡¯s peerage or something along the line, I will ask him to take me to the vampire world. ¡°Well, that matter is somehow fixed.¡± Azazel put his hand in his pocket and pulled out a phone. Wait, I was expecting a magical item or something, but he pulled out a phone? He put the phone on his ear after he dialed someone. ¡°Ah? Are you there already?¡± He began talking with someone on the phone. I couldn¡¯t hear who was talking with him, but I guess that he was talking with someone from Grigori? ¡°Yeah, wait for me there. I got the last member for the raid.¡± After he said that, his expression then changed. His eyes widened for a while, but he then grinned. ¡°So you managed to bring her too? Good!¡± I don¡¯t like his grin. Usually, when the old people in the supernatural world had that smile, they would have a rather nasty plan that put others in danger. ¡°I don¡¯t like your smile.¡± So I told Azazel directly.¡± He just looked at me with a sly smile and then continued his chat with someone on the phone. ¡°Right, wait for a few minutes. I will finish my sake first¡­ Yeah, good job.¡± He then ended the call and poured his sake on the cup. ¡°So, who was that?¡± ¡°Ah, that¡¯s Vali. He will tag along to help us this time because you know¡­ I am expecting a little bit of chaos later.¡± He said as he raised the sake cup and drank it. I then filled my cup with sake too and gulped it down in one chug. ¡°What the fuck are you planning in the vampire world? I can understand where you got the information that I wanted to hunt a certain witch. However¡­¡± I glared at Azazel as I filled up my cup with sake. I raised the cup to my mouth and continued. ¡°Tell me your plan. I won¡¯t join if you keep me in the dark.¡± ¡°Of course, I plan to tell you our plan. However, can I do that after we rendezvous with the other? It¡¯s a pain if I need to explain the plan two times.¡± Said Azazel as he shrugged his shoulders. ¡°Tsk, because you come to me despite it¡¯s your plan, doesn¡¯t that mean you need me for something? I guess it¡¯s hard to stay low when you crossed to the vampire world, huh?¡± If that was not the case, then he wouldn¡¯t even come to me. I had a bit of my own hypothesis about Azazel¡¯s plan. Whoever that girl he mentioned on the phone was able to cross to the vampire world. However, because that girl used a different method from the normal one, their crossing could be detected by the vampires. That was where I came in. With my Fear, I could hide our presence as soon as we arrived at the vampire world. ¡°That¡¯s why, tell me your plan, or I won¡¯t even tag along. I have a little connection that I could use to cross the vampire world myself, you know?¡± It was a bluff, though I knew that Azazel had investigated it. He knew that I went to the underworld, there was no way he didn¡¯t know that. With that, he would try to guess what I did in the underworld. Then he would connect the dot with Gasper, the dhampir. ¡°Tsk, I guess you are as sly as me, huh?¡± Azazel clicked his tongue and put the cup down on the table. ¡°Fine, but can you make sure no one could hear this?¡± ¡°Sure.¡± I then snapped my finger as I made a barrier around us. Although I was sure that we wouldn¡¯t get detected inside my mansion, I added a layer of Fear on top of my barrier for extra safety. Azazel made it like his plan was so important that it was dangerous if someone knew about it. ¡°As I have expected, this is amazing.¡± With a gaze full of amazement, Azazel looked at my barrier, ¡°I want one of these barriers to cover my base.¡± He said as she smiled at me. ¡°No, it¡¯s hard to maintain. I don¡¯t want to go to your base and make a barrier or maintain it.¡± ¡°That¡¯s a shame.¡± He said as he shrugged his shoulders. He then put his arm on the table and grinned, ¡°So, let me tell you a little bit of my plan. First of all, have you noticed that there is something unusual happening in the world right now?¡± Asked Azazel. Something unusual? I could think of a few. ¡°Are you talking about Khaos Brigade? Or the revival of something that should¡¯ve been died a long time ago? I felt Yamata no Orochi¡¯s energy in Osaka two days ago.¡± ¡°So you know about it. We guessed that the source of this strange thing is one of the Longinus, Sephirot Graal. Now, that caliche is in the vampire world, held by a dhampir. That¡¯s why, help us in this case, before any other unwanted creatures are revived from death.¡± Did he find the source of the trouble that fast? This guy was insane. However, it seems he didn¡¯t know that Valerie was controlled by Khaos Brigade. ¡°Hmm, fine. I will help you in this case. Vampire, huh. Should I bring him? He will give us extra help.¡± ¡°You have someone in mind? I don¡¯t mind if you bring one more person.¡± ¡°Really? Good then. I have someone rather useful in a case like this.¡± I grinned as I looked at Azazel. RaizarP Author Here~ More than 60 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks for the new Executive! - Hpez Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 157 – Walk I went to find someone who would be useful in a case like this. Azazel followed me because he was interested in the person that I mentioned. He strode behind me as he looked around the mansion. The young youkai and Yaemasa were running around the garden, and they caught Azazel¡¯s attention. ¡°Oh? Who is that boy?¡± Asked Azazel. ¡°Just a son of my subordinate. Don¡¯t mind him.¡± I said to Azazel without looking at him. ¡°You said to not mind him, but you do know that¡¯s impossible, right? I meant, what¡¯s the possibility of True Longinus finding its new wielder again in such a short time? They usually sleep for around a hundred years. Though, I don¡¯t think the boy will be able to awaken the Sacred Gear, knowing that he¡¯s half-devil.¡± ¡°Tsk, you can feel it, huh? Well, it¡¯s my fault for not covering his energy with my Fear. However, how can you find that out?¡± Azazel looked like he was offended by my statement. He had a bitter smile. ¡°Oi oi, who do you think I am? I researched Sacred Gear for a long time already. That¡¯s why I can feel it. Not only that, I am curious. You are already strong enough to use Balance Breaker. But, how could your wasn¡¯t awakened yet?¡± ¡°That¡¯s a good question.¡± I nodded my head at his question. To be honest, I was confused too. I was strong enough to beat Vali when he used his Balance Breaker. I could beat Sairaorg when he used his Balance Breaker too. Two people that were considered as strongest in my generation lost to me. Yet, I couldn¡¯t use my Balance Breaker yet. ¡°Maybe because I am too strong that my Sacred Gear thought I don¡¯t need the Balance Breaker?¡± I asked Azazel with a playful tone. However, when I said that, Azazel stopped on his track and touched his chin. I also stopped on my track and looked at him. ¡°That¡¯s possible¡­ Your Sacred Gear was special even among the Longinus. It messed with probability.¡± He then looked at me with a serious face, ¡°Hey, tell me. Do you ever try to increase the probability of awakening your Balance Breaker?¡± ¡°Hmm?¡± When he said it like that, I couldn¡¯t help but think of it. ¡®Do I ever try that? I think no?¡¯ I tried to fake it with my smile, but Azazel then looked at me in disbelief. ¡°You never tried that? Are you serious?¡± He asked. ¡°Isn¡¯t Balance Breaker achieved by pushing myself? I never thought that I would need something like probability too.¡± I answered him as I looked away from him. ¡°Sigh, listen here¡­ There are a lot of people who can¡¯t awake their Sacred Gear, even more so their Balance Breaker. There is a certain possibility that they will be able to use Balance Breaker, hence it¡¯s depending on their strength and chance. You are already strong enough, but you never fought someone who could push you to the point of dying, right? Not only that, you never had any strong emotion until now.¡± When he put it like that, he¡¯s correct. I nodded my head to Azazel and he held his head. ¡°What to do with this blockhead. That¡¯s why you couldn¡¯t awaken your Balance Breaker! It feeds on emotion. The stronger your emotion is, the easier it is to awaken your Balance Breaker.¡± ¡°As expected of the knowledge from the ancient,¡± I added a bit of mocking there, but I was grateful for his information. ¡°Don¡¯t mind that. The old generation has to help the new generation. To be honest, I don¡¯t want to involve you or Vali in this one, but we are too weak for that. I must apologize for that. Our shortcoming forced the new generation to be involved in this mess.¡± ¡°Personally, I don¡¯t care if you involve me.¡± I then turned around and began walking again, ¡°I am now the leader of this faction because my old man has left for his journey with Setsuna. So it¡¯s my responsibility to keep the peace of this faction. To do that, I need strength. Because you said that the magician that I am targeting is there, that¡¯s enough for me to move.¡± ¡°Hah! I know that I can count on you on this.¡± Azazel then laughed as he followed me. ¡°So, isn¡¯t it the time for you to tell me who you are trying to meet?¡± ¡°Yeah, wait a minute, you will see him around¡­ now.¡± I was now near the pond in the backyard. I was expecting someone to be here, and he was indeed here. The monk robe and long black hair. He was sweeping the area near the sakura tree and I called him out. ¡°Kurotabo!¡± Kurotabo then turned to me and tilted his hat with his hand, ¡°Is there something that I can help you with, Riku-sama?¡± ¡°Yeah, I need you to follow me for a while. We are going on a walk.¡± ¡°A walk, is it?¡± Asked Kurotabo with a serious expression. ¡°Yeah, a walk.¡± Azazel didn¡¯t seem to know what we were talking about. He looked at me with a skeptical gaze. ¡°Please let me prepare for a while, Riku-sama. I believe a minute is enough.¡± ¡°Sure, I will wait for you at the entrance.¡± I turned around and walked away as I said that. ¡°Yes, Riku-sama.¡± Kurotabo bowed a little before making her way to the mansion. Azazel followed me again then he asked. ¡°We are going to the vampire world and you just brushed it off as a walk?¡± I glanced at him over my shoulder and grinned, ¡°Hey, Azazel. Devil has its peerage, Angel has its children, I don¡¯t know what you call your subordinate is. However, we youkai have something too¡­¡± ¡°Ah!¡± Azazel gasped in realization, ¡°Hyakki Yakou, the parade of hundred demons. That¡¯s why you said walk.¡± ¡°Correct,¡± I answered him. ¡°Walk as in a parade. That¡¯s a cue that we will be going to attack someone.¡± ¡°Hou, that¡¯s new knowledge for me. Well then, let¡¯s go to the vampire world then.¡± ¡°Sure, I wanted some action too.¡± RaizarP Author Here~ More than 60 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks for the new Executive! - Hpez - Kamryn Kes Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 158 – Gathering and Ophis ¡°I¡¯m sorry for taking too long, Riku-sama.¡± Kurotabou greeted me from behind as he stepped out of the entrance. I was waiting for him with Azazel as we chatted about the plan later. ¡°Oh, you¡¯re here,¡± I said to Kurotabo as I crossed my arms. ¡°Yes.¡± Answered Kurotabo. He bowed his head and then asked, ¡°May I know what do you need me for, Riku-sama?¡± ¡°We will sneak to the vampire world. We will kidnap a girl and wreak havoc, so I need you for that.¡± With just that word, Kurotabo understood what I meant and nodded his head. ¡°Matoi, right?¡± ¡°Correct.¡± I grinned at him. ¡°Matoi?¡± Azazel asked from the side, ¡°Now you got me interested. What is that?¡± He rubbed his chin as he looked at me with an interested gaze. I smirked at Azazel and raised my chin, ¡°Don¡¯t waste your time, Azazel. It¡¯s a technique that can only be used by me.¡± ¡°Only be used by you?¡± Asked Azazel, ¡°Now you got my interest. If that¡¯s the case, your father can¡¯t use this technique called Matoi either?¡± ¡°He can¡¯t. This is a technique that I created in this world. This guy, Kurotabo, is the one who helps me to create this technique.¡± ¡°It¡¯s nice to meet you.¡± Said Kurotabo as he looked at Azazel. ¡°Yes, nice to meet you too.¡± Answered Azazel. ¡°Hmm, interesting. Well, I will be able to see the technique later, right?¡± ¡°Maybe?¡± I answered him with a grin, ¡°So, where are your subordinates?¡± ¡°You are no fun¡­ Well, you know the place well. You have visited that place a few times.¡± ¡°Oh? That bar, huh.¡± ¡°Yep, shall we go now?¡± Azazel extended his hand and created a magic circle under our feet. ¡°Are you ready?¡± He asked us. ¡°Anytime,¡± I answered. ¡°Yes.¡± ¡°Then, here we go.¡± The Magic circle flew up and engulfed us. Our vision distorted, and now we were inside the familiar bar. I looked around and saw a few unfamiliar faces. ¡°Oh?! Is he the one that defeats you, Vali?¡± A guy with a golden headband asked Vali as he nudged his elbow against him. ¡°Eh, Vali-sama was defeated?¡± A girl with blonde hair who sat beside Vali exclaimed. She was wearing a magician''s clothes. ¡°Hmm? He¡¯s kind of handsome.¡± She smiled and covered her mouth with her hand/ ¡°Le Fay, keep your manner.¡± A blonde-haired boy beside the blonde girl said as he fixed his glasses. He then looked at me and said, ¡°Nice to meet you, Nura Riku. I am Arthur Pendragon.¡± ¡°Ah! I forgot to introduce myself. My name is Le Fay Pendragon! Nice to meet you, Nura Riku-san!¡± ¡°Ou, maybe you already know me or maybe you don¡¯t. My name is Bikou! Nice to meetcha!¡± I didn¡¯t see Georg that Vali kidnapped anywhere. Maybe he was still in Vali¡¯s base? They, Team Vali, introduced themselves to me. Vali ignored me as he was chatting with Tobio. I didn¡¯t see Reni anywhere, but I could feel her energy on the first floor alongside the girl that I met that night. However, why did Vali bring his team along? He did know that we are going to enter the Vampire World and there was a chance of someone from the Khaos Brigade to be there. ¡°Nice to meet you too,¡± I answered while still crossing my arms as I turned to Bikou. ¡°Bikou, huh? Are you the old monkey¡¯s descendant?¡± ¡°Hmm?¡± He raised his eyebrows and then pointed his index finger at me, ¡°You¡­ I think we can get along well.¡± ¡°Is that so?¡± I just answered calmly and then turned to Kurotabo. ¡°This one is Kurotabo, a member of my Hyakki Yakkou.¡± Kurotabo put his hand on his chest and bowed his head a little, ¡°My name is Kurotabo, it¡¯s nice to meet you. Maybe my ability is insignificant compared to Riku-sama, but I will do my best to help with anything.¡± ¡°Alright!¡± Suddenly Azazel raised his voice and gather attention to himself, ¡°Vali, where is that girl? I don¡¯t want to meet her because she¡¯s scary but¡­ you said that she¡¯s here already?¡± Vali turned to Azazel and said, ¡°Wait for a few seconds, she was still in the bathroom.¡± He then pointed his index finger to the door near the counter. My gaze followed his finger, but I couldn¡¯t feel anyone in the bathroom. No, maybe couldn¡¯t feel was wrong. It was because the energy inside the bathroom was too big, I didn¡¯t even realize that there was someone there. Sweat began to pour out of my forehead, ¡°Oi, Vali.¡± I called Vali with a cold tone, ¡°Who is that girl that you talked about? Surely, it¡¯s not Ophis, right?¡± Even Draigg and Albion''s energy were fell short of this one. The gods in Takamagahara and Sirzechs pale in comparison. This was the first time that I felt energy this big since I learned Senjutsu. I tried to appear calm and smiled. It was surprising to feel massive energy that I didn¡¯t even realize. But now, I managed to collect my thought. ¡°Riku-sama? Are you fine?¡± Kurotabo asked with a worried tone. ¡°Yeah,¡± I answered him, ¡°So, Vali. Don¡¯t tell me the one inside that bathroom is Ophis?¡± Somehow, Vali just smirked at me and it made me irritated. Not only that, Azazel looked away from me too. ¡®This old sly bastard.¡¯ ¡°Bastard, you said that you know someone who could enter the Vampire World. I never expected that someone is Ophis. Do you want to die, huh?¡± Azazel turned at me while waving his hand, ¡°Well well, she¡¯s harmless. Not only that, Vali managed to snatch her away from Khaos Brigade. Isn¡¯t he doing a good job?¡± Good job your ass! I wanted to scream at him. However, he didn¡¯t say anything wrong. This situation was better than I had expected. From Ophis¡¯s energy right now, I knew that Rizevim had yet to put his hand on her. ¡®Isn¡¯t this a chance to destroy the Khaos Brigade?¡¯ As I thought that, the door of the bathroom opened and a girl with gothic lolita clothes appeared from behind the door. She had black hair and black eyes as deep as the abyss. She turned to me and tilted her head cutely, ¡°Is he the one?¡± Asked Ophis. ¡°Yeah, he¡¯s the one that can help you.¡± Answered Vali. Somehow, I got a really bad feeling about this conversation. Ophis nodded her head and smiled, ¡°I see. Finally, I will be able to get my silence back. You.¡± She pointed her index finger at me, ¡°Help me to get rid of Great Red.¡± When she said that, I literally cursed inside my mind, ¡®Fuck.¡¯ RaizarP Author Here~ More than 60 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks for the new Executive! - Hpez - Kamryn Kes Big Thanks for the new Squad Leader! - Ganoush Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 159 – Loli Dragon Get! I looked straight at Ophis''s eyes after she said that. She was dead serious. What kind of thing that Vali and the other told her about me? ¡°How?¡± I asked Ophis. ¡°How can I help you get rid of the Great Red? I am nothing but a weak youkai.¡± I shrugged my shoulders and glanced at Vali. He was laughing. That bastard was laughing. ¡°Hmm?¡± Ophis tilted her head cutely. ¡°Vali, you said that he¡¯s strong?¡± She then asked Vali. ¡°Yeah, he¡¯s stronger than me. Maybe he¡¯s even stronger than you?¡± Answered Vali. Tsk! I clicked my tongue inside my mind as I saw Ophis walk towards me. No shit. I was stronger than Ophis? If that was true, then I would kill Rizevim and the others earlier before they built Khaos Brigade. No, I would be able to take the youkai to some remote place and enjoy the show. I would only move when the one who tried to protect the world had almost lost. Ophis was now standing in front of me and looked at me in my eyes. ¡°You are strong.¡± She said calmly. ¡°Help me get my silence back?¡± Silence. I could make her a place where she won¡¯t be bothered, but I think she won¡¯t be satisfied by that. Silence in her words maybe meant her home in the Dimensional Gap. I don¡¯t know whether my Fear worked in Dimensional Gap or not. So I can¡¯t promise her. ¡°How?¡± I asked again. This time I put on a serious face. ¡°What is there for me? What do I get from helping you?¡± Ophis¡¯s mouth gaped as she muttered, ¡°Ah¡­¡± She then nodded her head, ¡°That¡¯s right¡­ I will give you power.¡± Kurotabo was confused by what Ophis said, but the others in the room understood what she said. Maybe someone from Khaos Brigade would be tempted by that. One of two Dragon Gods offered you power just by giving her a promise to help her. They were a sly bunch. They didn¡¯t hold promise as high as I am. If I promised someone, I would fulfill my promise. That was why I couldn¡¯t promise Ophis. So I rejected her power. ¡°I don¡¯t need it.¡± Ophis was surprised. ¡°Why?¡± She asked. ¡°Because I don¡¯t need your strength. I don¡¯t need power given by you.¡± Even if she gave me that snake that could make someone stronger. I doubt that it will make my Fear stronger too. ¡°So, Ophis. Tell me about something.¡± I began to surround my body with Fear. Blue Haori appeared on my shoulder and my body blurred. Ophis was visibly confused, he looked at me who stood in front of her while tilting her gaze. ¡°Can you see the real me?¡± I said loudly as I took a bottle of sake from the shelf behind Tobio. My body that stood in front of Ophis melted and she looked around, confused. She then finally found me as she looked in my direction. The others in the room also found me after Ophis. ¡°Damn, that¡¯s neat.¡± Exclaimed Azazel as he whistled. ¡°No matter how many times I saw that technique, I can¡¯t feel his real body.¡± Said Vali as he smiled bitterly. ¡°So that¡¯s the power of Nura?! That¡¯s why that old man said that you won¡¯t be able to catch Nurarihyon if he¡¯s trying to run from you.¡± Exclaimed Bikou with shining eyes. I ignored them for now because I was still talking with Ophis. ¡°So, Ophis. Can you feel the real me? I don¡¯t need your power, but I also can¡¯t help you. But¡­ There is one thing that you can do if you really need my help.¡± I smirked at Ophis as I said that. ¡°What is it? You are strong. I can¡¯t feel you. So help me.¡± When I heard her answer, a grin plastered into my face. Right now I was the leader of the East Youkai Clan. Helping Ophis would put my faction in danger. With helping Ophis that was known as the leader of the Khaos Brigade, although she was actually just a figurehead, my faction would be considered helping Khaos Brigade. The story would be different if Ophis was the one who help me. It would be different if Ophis left her place as Khaos Brigade leader. I disappeared from behind the bar and stood in front of Ophis as I extended my right hand. ¡°Join me, Ophis. Join my Hyakki Yakkou and I will help you. My subordinates, more than a hundred youkai will help you. Maybe I can¡¯t defeat Great Red, but I can give your silence back in the dimensional gap. If you can¡¯t feel me at that time, I will make you can¡¯t feel Great Red. How about it?¡± Indeed, I couldn¡¯t defeat Great Red. But I had a plan after seeing how Ophis reacted when I used my technique. I couldn¡¯t defeat Great Red, but I could make him or Ophis disappear. They wouldn¡¯t be able to feel each other, then Ophis would gain her silence back. Dimensional Gap was vast, so the chance of them meeting with each other was slim, to begin with. ¡°How about it?¡± I asked Ophis with a grin. ¡°He¡¯s crazy.¡± Said Azazel. ¡°Indeed. To think that he will do that.¡± Added Vali. ¡°Join me, Ophis. If you help me, then I will help you.¡± Ophis was hesitant. She raised her hand, then lowered it again. She did it a few times already. Maybe she was thinking about it. She was thinking whether she should take my hand or not. If she took my hand, I would help her get rid of Great Red¡¯s presence. However, Great Red would still be in the Dimensional Gap. When Ophis was hesitant, Azazel shouted once again. ¡°Oi, Riku! You are a crazy bastard! To think you will ask her to join your faction. What a reckless bastard.¡± He was shouting, but there was an excited smile on his face. ¡°Riku-sama is indeed like that. He will invite everyone, even his enemy, to join his Hyakki Yakkou.¡± Kurotabo tilted his hat with his hand as he smiled. Everyone was waiting, they were waiting for Ophis¡¯s answer with excitement. ¡°How about it?¡± I asked once again. Finally, Ophis took my hand and nodded her head. ¡°Help me. Give my silence back and make Great Red¡¯s presence disappear.¡± ¡°Ou, leave it to me.¡± It was at that time, I got a loli dragon. My Hyakki Yakkou has become something else, it was turned into something absurd. RaizarP Author Here~ More than 60 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks for the new Executive! - Hpez - Kamryn Kes Big Thanks for the new Squad Leader! - abdulla Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 160 – Information Letter ¡°Oi oi, she agreed, Vali.¡± Said Bikou as he smiled bitterly. ¡°Yeah, that¡¯s how he is. But, to think he even asked Ophis¡­ I can¡¯t understand him at all.¡± Answered Vali from the bar. ¡°That¡¯s how he is.¡± Said Tobio with a smile. I could hear all of them and then I glanced at them over my shoulder. Le Fay¡¯s eyes shined as she pointed in my direction, ¡°Look look! He¡¯s amazing!¡± ¡°Yeah, I never expected that.¡± Said Arthur in disbelief. ¡°To think he could even sway Ophis¡­ It¡¯s outside our expectation.¡± ¡°Hey, name?¡± Ophis asked me while tugging my sleeves which made me turn to her again. ¡°Nura Riku. You can call me Riku if you want to.¡± Ophis nodded her head slowly, ¡°Un, I will. Riku.¡± She was¡­ somehow cute. Wait. No, she was a Dragon God, perish your thought that considered her as cute, Riku. She could defeat anyone here with just a flick of her finger, don¡¯t forget about that. Ugh, now I was regretting something. Could I use Matoi with someone else? Does Matoi only let me equip Fear? I wanted to try doing Matoi with Ophis. How strong would I be if I could use Matoi with Ophis? Maybe stronger than Great Red? Since I would be able to use Ophis¡¯s power on top of mine. For now, the most important thing was to go to the vampire world. I turned to Azazel and asked him. ¡°So, what do we do right now? We are all here, so we just need to go now, right?¡± ¡°Right, all of us are here already.¡± Answered Azazel as he looked around. ¡°Then I will explain the plan for today.¡± The atmosphere turned serious as Azazel narrowed his eyes. He scanned over us quickly and nodded his head. ¡°The operation this time is to rescue Valerie Tepes. There is a chance that she¡¯s been prisoned in the vampire world and her Sacred Gear, Sephiroot Graal, was forced to activate by someone else.¡± From his word, I was a bit confused. I felt something off. ¡°From what I know, the one who controlled Valerie Tepes was his half-brother called Marius Tepes. Not only that, we found the trace of Rizevim Lucifer in the vampire world. That¡¯s why I called you here, Vali.¡± He then turned to Vali. ¡°Yeah, thanks for that, Azazel.¡± There was a wave of cold anger beneath Vali¡¯s tone. ¡°Leave that man to me. I will do what I need to do.¡± It was not surprising for Vali to get angry. His relationship with Rizevim was one of the worst kind. Hence I knew why he wanted to kill Rizevim with his own hand. But, I was still confused about something. I felt something was out of place from Azazel¡¯s words. ¡°Good. Then we will ask Ophis for help to go to the vampire world. We will break through the vampire world through the dimensional gap. It¡¯s a bit dangerous, but I have a tool to make a barrier that allows us to survive for at least a few hours.¡± Azazel then took out something, a white palm-sized orb, from his pocket. ¡°It¡¯s thanks to the effort of Le Fay Pendragon and Lavinia Reni that make this orb.¡± ¡°Hehehe, it¡¯s nothing special.¡± Le Fay giggled and scratched the back of her head with her hand. Finally, I noticed something that was off. Azazel turned to Ophis and asked, ¡°Can you take us to the vampire world?¡± Ophis slowly turned to me, ¡°Hmm¡­ what should I do?¡± She asked. Maybe because she had decided to join my Hyakki Yakkou, she asked me what to do. I put my hand on my chin for a while and then called out to Kurotabo. ¡°Kurotabo, come here for a second.¡± He didn¡¯t answer me or anything, but he made his way towards me. He stood on my left and then I put on a serious face as I looked at Azazel. ¡°Azazel, let me ask you something first.¡± Azazel raised his eyebrow, ¡°Yeah? Ask me.¡± ¡°You¡­ where do you get that information from? Don¡¯t tell me that you put a spy in the vampire world, because that¡¯s a bit impossible even for you. There is only one way to get that information. Either you got it from the member of Khaos Brigade or have someone sneak into the vampire world undetected.¡± We stared at each other for a while, until finally Azazel sighed and pulled out a letter from his pocket. ¡°Indeed, I got this information from someone who sneaks into the vampire world. You know that someone well, here.¡± He tossed the letter to me and I caught it with my hand. I opened the letter and then my eyes squinted in disbelief. The content of the letter was absurd. It contained all information about what happened in the vampire world right now, including the appearance of Marius and Rizevim that were seen talking to each other in Marius¡¯s mansion. I was wondering who the sender was and then I squeezed the letter when I saw the sender¡¯s name. ¡°That old man!¡± I shouted as I tossed the letter back to Azazel. ¡°Oi oi! Don¡¯t squeeze the letter! It contained important information!¡± ¡°How can I not squeeze it? He said he was going on a journey, but then he sent you a letter about the vampire world? If I knew he could enter the vampire world with no problem, I would attack it right after I felt Yamata no Orochi¡¯s energy, damn it!¡± ¡°Hahahaha, well, maybe he wants to keep you away from the conflict?¡± Asked Azazel. I was about to say something, but Kurotabo cut Azazel¡¯s words first. ¡°There is no way Commander would do that. If anything, he loves to put Riku-sama in danger to see how he will react.¡± ¡°Indeed.¡± I nodded my head, ¡°I guess I fell into my old man¡¯s trap again. Sigh¡­¡± ¡°Oh?!¡± Azazel¡¯s tone was visibly brightened. ¡°Does that mean, you will help us?¡± ¡°Yeah, I will.¡± I nodded my head, ¡°I have a target in that place too. Walburga is there, right?¡± ¡°Yes, we confirmed her appearance in the vampire world.¡± I nodded my head as I crossed my arms, ¡°Then, let¡¯s go. To the vampire world.¡± RaizarP Author Here~ More than 60 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 161 – Vampire World ¡°Alright, come here come here, let¡¯s deploy the barrier and get done with it,¡± Azazel said as he waved his hand towards Vali and his group. Tobio didn¡¯t come to us, he just waved his hand towards Vali and his group. They grumbled a little before walking towards Azazel. Le Fay was clearly happy though, she looked excited. ¡°So, how does that orb work?¡± I asked Azazel with a curious gaze. If that orb really could make a barrier strong enough to survive the dimensional gap, then I want it too. ¡°As I said earlier, it will make a barrier around us¡­ well, like this.¡± Azazel poured some kind of magical energy into the orb and a translucent circle surrounded us a second later. He knocked on the translucent barrier that surrounded us and said, ¡°As you can see, it¡¯s durable.¡± Azazel smirked happily. I glanced at Kurotabo and he nodded his head. He took out a monk staff from his sleeves and thrust it towards the barrier. It made a loud sound, but the barrier wasn¡¯t cracked or anything. It stood strong and I could feel that the durability of the barrier wasn¡¯t decreasing at all. ¡°Are you satisfied?¡± Asked Azazel with a smug smile. Kurotabo nodded his head at me and I turned to Azazel, ¡°Not yet.¡± I grinned at him. This barrier was solid, I would admit that. It was needed for us to cross the dimensional gap safely. If there was a person who could destroy this barrier, then it was certainly Ophis. But, I wanted to test the barrier¡¯s strength against something else. I looked at Vali, ¡°Can you divide the barrier¡¯s power, Vali?¡± ¡°Oh?¡± Vali seems interested too because he smiled. He was about to use his Sacred Gear, but Azazel stopped him. ¡°Oi oi, don¡¯t do that. This orb is the only one that I have, okay? There is no other orb like this!¡± ¡°Yeah yeah, you bummer.¡± Said Vali as he crossed his arms. Azazel sighed then looked at me. ¡°So, I wanted you to hide the presence of this barrier and us, could you do that?¡± ¡°I think I can do that.¡± I spread my Fear to surround the orb from outside. It was a bit hard to go through the orb, but it was eventually able to surround the orb completely. ¡°There, it¡¯s done.¡± The others looked at the orb with amazement while Azazel took out a phone and called someone. He put the phone on the speaker and it seems he called Tobio. ¡°Hello.¡± ¡°Oh, Tobio. Can you still see us?¡± ¡°No, you are completely disappeared from my sight. But, you are still there, huh?¡± ¡°Yeah, can you call your wolf to see if he can detect us? If even your dog failed to detect us, then those vampires are certainly will not able to detect us.¡± ¡°Sure, wait a few seconds.¡± He then cut off the call. After Tobio cut off the call, I looked in his direction. He made a strange movement with his hand, then a big wolf appeared in front of the bar. It holds a black blade on its mouth, and a droll was dripping from its mouth. Its eyes were red and the blade had some red words on it. ¡°Grrr.¡± The wolf growled as it turned towards Tobio. ¡°Can you find Azazel in this room?¡± ¡°Graaa!¡± The wolf answered Tobio with a growl, and it then sniffed around before shaking its head. ¡°I see, you can return.¡± The wolf then disappeared in a black mist. So that was his Sacred Gear? It doesn¡¯t look special. It couldn¡¯t even find me. ¡°It¡¯s like that, Azazel.¡± Said Tobio with a voice loud enough to be heard by us. ¡°Hahahaha, you are indeed a monster at hiding. Even Canis Lykaon can¡¯t find it. Now I¡¯m confident that we can enter the vampire''s world without getting detected.¡± ¡°Of course.¡± I smugly smiled at Azazel, ¡°My Fear is even stronger than my old man now thanks to all opponents that I fought. Also, why did you ask Tobio to check about my ability? Even Ophis couldn¡¯t sense me earlier.¡± ¡°Well, I just thought that maybe the vampire with their disgusting sense of smell which can smell blood from far away could detect us inside the barrier. That¡¯s why I asked Tobio to use his Longinus, Canis Lykaon, to try to find us with our smell. It turns out that the barrier is better than I had expected.¡± Azazel shrugged his shoulders as he made his excuses. Well, he and his excuses. But I was also curious about that, so it managed to sate my curiosity. ¡°Are we ready now?¡± Asked Ophis with a bored look on her face. ¡°Yeah, we are ready.¡± Said Azazel. ¡°Take us to the dimensional gap anytime.¡± ¡°Alright.¡± Ophis extended her right hand as she said that. The next thing that happened almost made me faint. A surge of energy came out from her and a purple magic circle appeared under our feet. The others were amazed, but not for me. I had always activated my Senjutsu, that was why sudden energy that appeared like this really put a burden on me. ¡°Be careful.¡± As Ophis said that, the magic circle engulfed us and we were teleported to a different place. We were on top of a floating rock. The sky was strange, the color changed like a kaleidoscope. I couldn¡¯t feel the top and bottom in this place, the gravity was also over the place. I quickly shut my Senjutsu off and dropped on my knees. I didn¡¯t expect this. The energy around this place was strange, that was why I got attacked with a lot of pain before I shut my Senjutsu off. ¡®The energy clashes in chaos. It¡¯s weird.¡¯ ¡°Riku-sama! What¡¯s wrong?¡± Kurotabo was worried, his face was pale. I raised my hand to show that I was fine and turned to Ophis. ¡°Go to the vampire world now. The energy in this place is worse than I thought.¡± Ophis nodded her head and extended her hand again. ¡°I know.¡± Another magic circle appeared under us, and we got teleported again. This time we were teleporting in the forest, and I used my Senjutsu again, ¡°Ah¡­¡± a sound escaped my mouth. I felt a lot of energy that was unique to vampires in the distance, that was why I know about it, ¡°We have arrived in the vampire world.¡± RaizarP Author Here~ More than 60 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 162 – It seems The Big Boss is here Azazel stood up and looked at me, ¡°Can you hide our presence once I deactivate the orb?¡± He asked. ¡°Sure, wait a second.¡± I had mastered my Fear. Surrounding 8 people with my Fear was not hard at all for me. My Fear that covered the barrier made from the orb earlier slowly surrounded the other¡¯s bodies. Their presence was erased, but their bodies were still there. To make them disappear, I need to have direct contact with their bodies. However, this was enough. I didn¡¯t need to make them disappear. As long as the vampire couldn¡¯t sense us, that was enough. ¡°It¡¯s done,¡± I said to Azazel and he nodded his head. ¡°Then I will lower the barrier. Once I did that, can you find the information about whoever is present near this place with that senjutsu of yours, Nura?¡± ¡°Yeah, I can do that.¡± I nodded my head to Azazel. It was serious work from now on. I shouldn¡¯t be playing around¡­ but¡­ maybe just a little is fine? Azazel then turned to Vali and his team, ¡°Vali, can you scout the area around us from the sky?¡± Vali nodded his head and his sacred gear, Divine Dividing, appeared behind his back, ¡°Sure.¡± He then flew towards the sky, leaving us on the ground. However, Azazel wasn¡¯t done yet, ¡°Bikou, seeing that we are in a forest, find out where we are right now. Scout the forest to secure our retreat route. I would like to secure two paths to retreat in case something unexpected happens.¡± Bikou put his staff on his shoulder and put his arms over it. He had a smile on his face then rotated his staff and hit the ground with its tip, ¡°Leave it to me.¡± After he said that, he jumped away from the trees to the trees. When Bikou was gone from our sight, Le Fay raised her right hand and asked. ¡°Umm, should I find out whether there are magicians here or not?¡± ¡°Hmm, you can do that? Then I will count on you.¡± Said Azazel with a smile. This guy. Did he forget that I could do that too with my senjutsu? I hadn¡¯t spread it to my limit, but I could feel some magicians and vampires gathered in one place right outside of this forest. However, Le Fay looked happy when Azazel left the job to her, so as a gentleman, I won¡¯t say anything that would make her feel down. ¡°Sure! Leave it to me!¡± Le Fay made a movement with her hand and a staff that looked like a broom appeared in her hand. ¡°I will disable their Security Magic while I am at it.¡± She rotated her broom and smiled brightly. Oh, right. So that was why Azazel allowed her to do that. He knew that Le Fay was adept in that field. She was skilled in terms of Security Magic. There were a lot of Magicians outside of this forest. Surely they put on a Security Magic to detect the intruder. If I was alone, I was confident that those Security Magic won¡¯t be able to detect me. However, a lot of people were here, and I needed to spread my Fear to keep them undetected. ¡°Riku-sama, what is that Security Magic that she talked about?¡± Kurotabo asked me with a serious face. I was about to answer Kurotabo, but I didn¡¯t know much about the Security Magic myself. However, I was a bit fortunate as Arthur began to explain it to Kurotabo. ¡°It¡¯s a magic that allows the user to enhance their magical techniques and another formula to prevent them from being affected by other magic. My sister is a Master in Security Magic, so she could disable them and cancel their Magic such as the barrier that detected an intruder.¡± ¡®Oh¡­ I thought the security magic is an alarm or something. It seems I was wrong.¡¯ ¡°So that¡¯s it¡­ Magic is complicated.¡± Said Kurotabo. ¡°That¡¯s right. But¡­ magicians are underestimated by the other supernaturals world because they are humans.¡± Arthur pushed his glasses then he turned to Le Faw who closed her eyes, concentrating to disable the enemies¡¯ magic. Magicians were indeed underestimated. Because they were not that strong to begin with. Even I underestimated magicians. They were weaker than youkai, their magic was not as strong as Devil or Angels. However, they had one specialty. ¡°But they are sneaky bastards with a lot of ritual magics. Magicians are skilled in those areas.¡± I said to Arthur and he nodded his head. ¡°That¡¯s right. They are skilled in long and complicated magic. Especially rituals.¡± After a while, Le Fay opened her eyes and then she beamed in a smile, ¡°It¡¯s done!¡± Seeing that she was done taking over the enemies'' security magic as well as their barrier, I was a bit impressed. But, it was now my turn. ¡°Then, I will spread my senjutsu now,¡± I said as I grinned. I stood in my place and crossed my arms as I spread my senjutsu towards 360 direction. The other stayed silent as I concentrated to spread my senjutsu as far as I could. I felt Vali flying in a distance a bit away from us, he moved at a fast speed, trying to scout the area. Then I felt Bikou who moved through the tree. He looked in my direction when my senjutsu passed him. As expected from a youkai, he could notice my senjutsu. I concentrated further. Right outside the forest, I felt 5 magicians and 3 vampires walking around in a group. Then I felt a lot of vampires walking around in a place that looked like a city, but almost no one was outside, all of them were inside their own house. Finally, I felt an energy that was similar to Longinus Sacred Gear and grinned. ¡°Found Valerie Tepes. Now I will find her half-brother, Marius Tepes.¡± I said to Azazel and he had a surprised face. ¡°That was fast. As soon as you find him, can you tell us about it? We will make our move as fast as we can.¡± Said Azazel. I nodded my head at him, and then I felt energy similar to Valerie Tepes. However, there was another energy beside him, it felt heavy, almost as big as Sirzechs. ¡°I found it. With an extra.¡± ¡°Extra?¡± Asked Azazel. ¡°Could it be?!¡± He realized what I tried to say to him. ¡°Yeah¡­ it seems the big boss is here.¡± RaizarP Author Here~ More than 60 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 163 – Parade in Vampire World ¡°The big boss? Are you trying to tell me that Rizevim Lucifer is here?¡± Asked Azazel. ¡°Yeah. Sorry, Azazel, it seems that I have something that I need to do right now,¡± I said to Azazel with a serious face. ¡°Oi, don¡¯t try something reckless. We need to get rid of the magicians and Marius first.¡± As expected, he tried to stop me. However, I don¡¯t have a plan to do that. The reason why I wanted to get a lot of Sacred Gear was to protect youkai. If I killed their big boss, their organization would be in a mess, and they wouldn¡¯t be able to function properly. I then could lead my Hyakki Yakkou to hunt the rest of them. The Old Satan Faction could be left to the devil, and I could enjoy my time with Kuroka and Tsura. Secretly, I informed Tsura and Kuroka to ask my Hyakki Yakkou to prepare themselves. ¡°I know about that, Azazel. Can I leave this place for a while? There is someone that I need to get.¡± ¡°Hmm? Who is it?¡± ¡°You will know her when I got her.¡± I then turned to Ophis, ¡°Can you take me to Kyoto, Ophis? To Yasaka¡¯s shrine.¡± ¡°Hmm? Why?¡± Asked Ophis as she tilted her head. ¡°We need to kill a rat that tried to take your power away. Can you lend me your strength?¡± ¡°Oh¡­¡± Ophis exclaimed, ¡°Sure.¡± Azazel¡¯s face paled, but I don¡¯t care about that. He extended his hand, trying to stop us. ¡°Kurotabo!¡± I called out to Kurotabo, and he moved fast. ¡°Yes.¡± He answered quickly and stopped Azazel, who tried to stop me. ¡°Hey! I told you to wait!¡± Ophis had made the magic circle under us, and we teleported back to Kyoto. I appeared in front of Yasaka¡¯s shrine with Ophis. I felt Yasaka and Hagoromo Gitsune made their way towards my direction as soon as I teleported here with Ophis. Nice reaction, but that was a bad decision. I knew that Yasaka was concerned with the big energy from Ophis while Hagoromo Gitsune seems to accompany Yasaka. They came out from the entrance with a pale face. ¡°Riku-han! W-who is she?¡± Yasaka called out to me as soon as she noticed me while pointing her index finger at Ophis. ¡°She¡¯s Ophis, but that¡¯s not important. Hagoromo Gitsune, can you come with me? The big boss has been found.¡± ¡°Oh?¡± Hagoromo Gitsune sounded interested, ¡°Fine.¡± She then walked towards me with a confident smile as she eyed Ophis. Yasaka couldn¡¯t understand what happened and froze in her place. Hagoromo Gitsune stood in front of Ophis and me and said, ¡°Nice to meet you.¡± Ophis nodded her head without saying anything, and I smiled at Yasaka. ¡°Yasaka, don¡¯t worry about it and just sit here. I will handle the rest.¡± As I said that, I made a magic circle to teleport to Nijo Castle. If we were going on a big fight, there was no way I would forget him. When we appeared in front of Nijo Castle, I saw Tsuchigumo stretch his body. The blue dragon that he took as a pet was standing behind him. ¡°Oh?¡± A small sound escaped his mouth, ¡°Three powerful people are here.¡± He said with a big grin on his face. ¡°Is there any big fight?¡± He asked me. He looked like a veteran that could feel a big fight coming to him. But, no, he do know that there is a big fight. ¡°Yeah, care to join?¡± ¡°Sure, where and who are our enemies this time?¡± He walked towards me. The dragon followed him from behind; it looked like he managed to tame it. ¡°Vampires and Devils.¡± I answered Tsuchigumo lightly and made a big teleport magic circle under our feet. ¡°Seems interesting.¡± This time we teleported to my mansion. It was in an uproar. The youkais were lining in front of the mansion. The ones such as Aotabo, Kubinashi, and Kejoro had blue Haori over their shoulder with the Nura Clan symbol of Fear written on the back. Tsura and Kuroka also had similar Haori. Unexpectedly, Shirone was tagging along and stood beside Kuroka in her uniform. She looked a bit excited as she touched the Haori that she wore. ¡°Riku-sama, we are prepared.¡± Kubinashi informed me. He handed me my Haori, and I put them over my shoulder as I grinned. ¡°Then, shall we go to war?¡± I told them while closing my right eye. ¡°¡±¡±OUUUUUU!!!!¡±¡±¡± The youkais shouted while raising their hands, paws, and heads. All youkais in the mansion were tagging along in this parade because I instructed Kuroka to do so. There were only youkais that do housework left in the mansion. ¡°Our target is the one called Rizevim Lucifer. I will take on him myself. You guys¡­ Make some noises. Are you ready?!¡± ¡°HAAHAHAHAHAHA, leave it to me, Riku-sama!¡± Shouted Aotabo. ¡°I am ready anytime, Riku-sama.¡± Answered Kubinashi with a feral grin. ¡°Nya! I will do my best too!¡± Exclaimed Kuroka. ¡°I will help them to hide from the sun by trapping them inside my ice, Riku-sama.¡± Answered Tsura with a cold smile on her face. I then looked at Ophis, ¡°Then, can you take us back to the vampire world?¡± ¡°Un.¡± Ophis nodded her head slightly and created a big magic circle to surround us. Right before the magic circle teleported us, I shouted at my Hyakki Yakkou, ¡°It¡¯s time to have a parade in Vampire World!¡± RaizarP Author Here~ More than 60 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 164 – It’s a Party Appearing back in the forest where I left Kurotabo and Azazel, I saw Arthur and Azazel¡¯s surprised face when I brought an army bag with me. Kurotabo slowly made his way towards Aotabo and joined the parade. He smiled at them and seemed to be glad to have them with us. Masaomi was left in the Mansion with Cleria because I asked Kuroka to not disturb him for now. Well, that didn''t change anything though. ¡°You¡­ Sigh- I can¡¯t even get angry at you, considering the current situation. That being said¡­¡± Azazel looked at the youkais behind me that already masked their presence. ¡°They are all skillful at hiding.¡± The only ones who didn¡¯t really hide their presence were Hagoromo Gitsune, Tsura, Kuroka, and Shirone. By the way, Hagoromo Gitsune¡¯s Hyakki Yakkou were now also mixed in mine; they became a friend after living together for a while. Talk about being so free. They were enemies for generations, but they had bound together in such a short amount of time. ¡°Yeah, they are. Then Azazel, I have a plan.¡± Azazel narrowed his eyes at me and crossed his arms, ¡°Let¡¯s hear it.¡± ¡°So, our target is Valerie Tepes. There is a chance that the Khaos Brigade will enter this world even if we save her, right?¡± ¡°That¡¯s right. That¡¯s why I wanted to keep this operation a secret.¡± I grinned after hearing his answer, ¡°So, why don¡¯t I kill Rizevim real quick while you rescue Valerie Tepes. My Hyakki Yakkou will deal with the magicians and vampires, so rescue that girl while they are under confusion.¡± ¡°Huh?¡± Azazel was confused, ¡°Wait¡­ that could work too. But, are you sure? Rizevim, even though he was like that, was on par with the super devil, you know?¡± ¡°Yeah, I¡¯m sure of it.¡± I glanced at Hagoromo Gitsune when I said that. She noticed my glance, and her face turned sour, ¡°Don¡¯t say that you will use me.¡± ¡°Hmm? What¡¯s wrong with that?¡± I asked her with a big smile on my face, ¡°There is no way you will refuse, right? After all, right now was the chance to kill the real leader of Khaos Brigade and bring an end to their terror.¡± ¡°Nyaa, I hope I can use Fear too so I can help you, Riku-sama.¡± ¡°For that, I need you to do something with Le Fay over there, Kuroka.¡± ¡°Nya? What is that?¡± Asked Kuroka as she tilted her head. She was supposed to be a part of Vali¡¯s team, so I guess I could leave this task to Kuroka and Le Fay. Le Fay also tilted her head, but she seemed to be interested in this. ¡°I need you to catch the witch called Walburga. Take Tsura and Shirone with you too.¡± ¡°Eh, Walburga?¡± Asked Le Fay, ¡°You mean, the magician with Longinus Incinerate Anthem? You want us to catch her?¡± ¡°That¡¯s correct. Don¡¯t worry about the fire; Tsura can handle that.¡± I smiled at Tsura, and she nodded her head confidently. ¡°Please leave it to me, Riku-sama. I will undoubtedly bring you the magician named Walburga with her body encased in ice.¡± Shirone also nodded her heat with guts pose. ¡°Oh! It¡¯s cold!¡± Exclaimed Le Fay as cold air came out from Tsura, ¡°I guess we can do this.¡± ¡°Alright. Then, Azazel. Can you handle the rest? I don¡¯t think I can command Vali and Bikou. I will give you a sign when I begin to fight Rizevim, so just wait for it.¡± ¡°Sigh, alright. I will do that.¡± ¡°Nice.¡± I answered him and then walked to Kuroka. I patted her shoulder and whispered, ¡°If you manage to catch Walburga before I am done with Rizevim, can you bring her to me?¡± Kuroka knew that I didn¡¯t want to be heard by the others, so she whispered back, ¡°Of course, nya. You can leave it to me.¡± I nodded my head a little, and then Vali and Bikou returned and landed beside Arthur. ¡°Azazel, it seems there are more enemies than we originally thought.¡± Said Vali, ¡°They hide in the buildings and disguise themselves as a normal vampire.¡± ¡°I see; thanks, Vali. It seems that your decision is correct, Riku.¡± He said to me with a confident smile. I shrugged my shoulders, ¡°I know, right? I found out about that from the start. Well, I will go now. Hagoromo Gitsune, let¡¯s go.¡± I asked Hagoromo Gitsune to come with me, and we began to walk towards the enemy. ¡°You don¡¯t need to ask.¡± However, when I was about to walk, Ophis pulled the sleeves of my Kimono and asked, ¡°Where are you going?¡± I stopped a little and turned back to Ophis, ¡°I will beat some bastard, then I will come back to give you your silence, okay?¡± ¡°Un. I will help.¡± This was unexpected. She wanted to help me? With her help, it would be easier. Only a fool would refuse it. ¡°Then, can you go with Tsura and the other to catch Walburga? I need to get her Longinus called Incinerate Anthem. If you don¡¯t mind, can you help them?¡± ¡°Yeah, I will.¡± Ophis answered with a little nod. ¡°Then, I will go now. Good luck.¡± I layered myself and Hagoromo Gitsune in my Fear as we walked away. When we were a bit away from the others, I talked to Hagoromo Gitsune. ¡°Do you mind if we used Matoi now?¡± To be honest, I had no high hopes for it. The strongest youkai that could use Matoi with me was Hagoromo Gitsune. Rizevim Lucifer was strong; he was a Super Devil for a reason. That was why I was counting on Hagoromo Gitsune right now. I need the strength she had, the nine weapons she got through her reincarnation. ¡°It can¡¯t be helped. I will help you just this once.¡± Answered Hagoromo Gitsune with a slight smile on her face, ¡°But you will owe me one.¡± ¡°Yeah, I don¡¯t mind.¡± As soon as I answered that, Hagoromo Gitsune let out her Fear for the first time. It had an oppressing feeling. Her Fear that formed a cloud of black smoke was absorbed into my back as I used Matoi. My Blue Haori changed a little as a brown nine-tailed fox sat on my shoulders. My face felt hot, as if a tattoo was made on it. Nenekirimaru appeared in my hand, and the hilt was surrounded by Fox¡¯s fur. My Fear had also amplified a few times; it was stronger than before. ¡°Shall we crash into the party then?¡± RaizarP Author Here~ More than 60 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 165 – Sneaking Around ¡°This feels rather uncomfortable. Kill that someone called Rizevim quickly so you can end this technique, Nura.¡± Hagoromo Gitsune¡¯s voice rang from the fox¡¯s head that was on my shoulder. This was rather interesting. Usually, the ones who used Matoi with me would become one with my Fear, and their voice would ring in my head. ¡°Yeah, I know about that. But, they are a bit distance away from me.¡± I jumped to the highest tree near me and looked at the house where Rizevim and Marius were currently in. The house they were in was near the place where Valerie was kept. So I need to at least kill either Marius or Rizevim before forcing the one alive to go out of the house. If I remember correctly, Marius had one Sephirot Graal at this moment, so¡­ ¡°Let¡¯s kill the vampire first, then kill the devil at that time,¡± I muttered my plan to Hagoromo Gitsune. If I killed Rizevim and he was revived with Sephirod Graal, it would be troublesome. ¡°Hmm? Isn¡¯t the devil the stronger one? Why did you target the vampire first?¡± Asked Hagoromo Gitsune, clearly confused with my plan. I could do that too, but I was a bit hesitant. If my surprise attack failed or he had something to protect him, that meant I would need to fight two people at once. The story would be different about the vampire. Although his weakness was not too apparent, and maybe he had regeneration ability. I could cut his head with Nenekirimaru, and he won¡¯t be able to recover as his energy will leave his body. ¡°What if I can¡¯t kill him in the first strike?¡± I asked Hagoromo Gitsune, ¡°I can¡¯t risk getting sandwiched between two people.¡± ¡°Then, just kill him at the same time. Use my sword. I got that from the third generation after killing Nue.¡± Said Hagoromo Gitsune. ¡°Hmm? Why did you just tell this right now?!¡± I shouted at Hagoromo Gitsune. I couldn¡¯t believe that she kept her sword a secret from me. The sword that the protagonist of the Nurarihyon no Mago got after his Nenekirimaru was destroyed was overpowered as fuck. It could split a mountain in a single swing and cut even Nue¡¯s flesh that was tempered in hell. ¡°You didn¡¯t ask me. You can get it from my ninth tail.¡± Said Hagoromo Gitsune with an amused tone. It seems like she was happy that she saw my surprised expression. With that sword, the story would be different then. The sword that could destroy a supernatural being was made from Nenekirimaru¡¯s broken blade before the battle against Hagoromo Gitsune¡¯s son, Nue. Unlike Nenekirimaru, which could cut the supernatural energy, the third generation''s sword in the last battle could Destroy the supernatural energy. ¡°The story will be different then,¡± I said to Hagoromo Gitsune as I took the sword that she mentioned from the fox ninth¡¯s tail. I was holding the Katana with a purple and golden hilt in my right hand after switching Nenekirimaru to my left. ¡°This is amazing, actually. The Keikain family was terrifying. If they were in this world, they surely could fight against High-Ranked Devil.¡± ¡°Surely that¡¯s the case.¡± Answered Hagoromo Gitsune. She knew their strength because she had been defeated by them a few times already. ¡°Enough talking, now let¡¯s get to work. You have two swords, so you can cut both of them at the same time, right?¡± ¡°Yeah,¡± I answered her and used Shin Meikyo Shisui to disappear from everyone¡¯s sight. I jumped off the tree and ran in the direction of Rizevim¡¯s energy. To be honest, I could only feel him because his energy was similar to Vali''s. I wanted to stop that bastard from making a mess in this world for such a silly reason. Although many respected him and feared his strength, his goal was so lousy that I wanted to laugh at it. His goal for making a mess in this world was to see his mother again. ¡°Let¡¯s kill that Mama Boy and end this bullshit.¡± *** Right now, I was running in the city of Vampire. There was no one outside as the sun was still high. Sneaking into the house where Rizevim was in was simple, but there were a few vampires who walked around the house, guarding the surrounding. I needed to make sure that Azazel could rescue Valerie Tepes without any problem too. If there was one thing that I could do to make the sign, that was to cause a riot. I should be able to make a riot after I snuck behind Rizevim. From what I felt from my Senjutsu, Rizevim was on the third floor of the building. I didn¡¯t know when he would leave, so I ran as fast as I could to reach the house. Sneaking inside the building was easy with Meikyo Shisui. I could just run past the guards, and they won¡¯t even notice it. I quickly made my way towards the third floor. When I arrived on the third floor, I saw the door of the room where Rizevim and Marius in were opened. Were they that confident that no one could enter the house? Or they had already detected me and were waiting for me? I approached the door, and it looked like they didn¡¯t notice me yet. Stood inside was a guy with silver hair and a young man with a beautiful face. Both of them seemed to be talking, and I used this chance to enter quietly. ¡°So, how about the plan?¡± The silver-haired guy, Rizevim, asked Marius as he held a glass of wine in his right hand. ¡°The plan is going well. In just a month or two, we will be able to get Ophis¡¯s power to revive her.¡± ¡°Good.¡± Rizevim smiled. ¡°Finally, after so long.¡± He raised his wine glass towards Marius. Marius smiled too; he took a wine glass from the table beside him, ¡°Right, after so long.¡± He then bumped his glass against Rizevim before drinking them at the same time. This was my chance. I put all my Senjutsu in my swords; then, I swung the two of them at the same time. Nenekirimaru sliced through Marius¡¯s neck with no problem. He fell lifelessly as blood, and his supernatural energy spurted out from his neck. His face was still smiling; he didn¡¯t even notice that he had been beheaded. However, the other sword was blocked by Rizevim with a sword in his hand that appeared out of nowhere. My Meikyo Shisui was canceled because my location was revealed. Rizevim threw the wine glass in his hand and looked at me with a grin. ¡°I have been waiting for you, Youkai.¡± Only then did I notice that I fell into his trap. RaizarP Author Here~ More than 60 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 166 – Against Rizevim This bastard had known my presence since the start. Maybe he felt my Senjutsu when I didn¡¯t hide myself completely. By hiding the fact that he knew my presence beforehand, he was waiting for me to slip into this place. ¡°Well, for an ancient, you are a bit strong.¡± I said quietly as I swung my Nenekirimaru to slice his neck. ¡°Not as much.¡± Rizevim dodged my sword by jumping back, and the sword in his hand disappeared. He looked rather calm for a person who was about to get his neck sliced. Maybe as expected from an ancient, the son of real Lucifer. ¡°By the way, you have been a thorn in my plan since the start. How do you know that Khaos Brigade exists?¡± I rested the sword in my right hand on my shoulder while pointing Nenekirimaru to him, ¡°It¡¯s easy.¡± I sneered a little, ¡°You are just a fool who wanted to bring chaos to this world. Do you think that I will not notice your presence?¡± ¡°Is that so?¡± Rizevim had a small smile on his face as his Demonic Energy sprung out from his body, ¡°Then I guess I will need to exterminate you before continuing with my plan.¡± ¡°Yeah sure.¡± I lowered my stance as I answered him, ¡°I will kill you, and someone called Euclid later. That way, no one will know Trihexa¡¯s location as well as the Holy Grail''s true power.¡± ¡°Huh? So you do know about them? Then why.¡± Rizevim questioned me curiously. ¡°Why didn¡¯t you covet those power? Youkai has always been like that, right? They coveted power lived with freedom and brought chaos to humans. I thought that Youkai, like you, would understand me, the one who brought chaos.¡± ¡°Hah!¡± I sneered at his face. ¡°Is he a fool?¡± Hagoromo Gitsune even added from my side in disbelief. She was the youkai leader of Kyoto, the one who brought humans into fear. Rizevim was surprised to hear Hagoromo Gitsune¡¯s voice. But he composed himself and asked. ¡°Is there something wrong? Youkai loves to bring chaos to humans, aren¡¯t they?¡± It seems that he misunderstood something from Youkai¡¯s behavior in the past. Maybe we looked like creatures who brought chaos to humans, but they were wrong. ¡°No.¡± I denied him flatly with a smug smile on my face, ¡°It¡¯s not strange that you saw us like that. But that¡¯s wrong.¡± Even Hagoromo Gitsune, who ate humans¡¯ hearts, never brought chaos to humans. ¡°Truly foolish. I can¡¯t see why you see us like that.¡± Said Hagoromo Gitsune. A black cloud of smoke began to appear from my body. He dares to put youkai at the same level as him? That was something I could never forgive. Youkai was the same as the old devils? What a foolish man. He clearly didn¡¯t know anything about us. ¡°I will ask you a question, Rizevim Livan Lucifer. Why do you want to bring chaos to this world?¡± If his answer was unreasonable, I would use my strongest technique here and get done with it. He was not an opponent that I could underestimate. With my Offense Fear, I would be able to at least put him in a tight spot in less than a minute. I didn¡¯t care if he canceled my Sacred Gear, as I didn¡¯t really need it unless necessary. ¡°Why do I want to bring chaos to this world?¡± Asked Rizevim with a sneer, ¡°Isn¡¯t that question a bit foolish too? I am the true devil. We, devils, are beings that have to be evil, wicked, brutal, as well as vicious. Is that even a question, young Youkai?!¡± ¡°Ah, my bad about that. You know¡­¡± I quietly used Kyouka Suigetsu to make my presence blend with my surrounding. ¡°If you know that, then why do you say that we, youkai, are the same as you? Because I will tell you something.¡± I took a step forward as my hair changed a little. It moved like it was blown by the wind, and it fell to my shoulder. I used Offense Fear right now, and my body was stronger than ever. Combined with Touki and the new sword from Hagoromo Gitsune, I was now confident to take on a Super Devil by myself. ¡°We youkai didn¡¯t spread Chaos; we spread Fear, you man-child!¡± With a fast movement, I swung both my swords horizontally. Rizevim was able to react, but he was too late. Both of my swords cut his chest, causing blood and demonic energy to splurt out from his wound. ¡°Tsk!¡± He clicked his tongue and jumped out of the house through the window. However, I didn¡¯t allow him to leave that fast. Pulling my swords a little, I coated them with Senjutsu aura and swung them in an X shape. ¡°Tsuki Giri!¡± Crossed blue flying slashes sprung out from my blades and destroyed the house as it flew towards Rizevim in the sky. Surely they should¡¯ve noticed this as my signal. Then, I felt my Hyakki Yakkou and Azazel, and the others make their way toward us. Their shouts were heard from here; they were really loud. ¡°OOOOOOOOOOHHH!!!!!!¡± Rizevim¡¯s attention was grabbed by the sound, he turned his attention towards my Hyakki Yakkou in the distance, and his face was twisted in anger. He then turned to me and shouted loudly, ¡°Youuu!!¡± But, I was already in front of him. I used the chance when he looked away to close my distance and swung my swords. One was aimed at his neck, and one was aimed at his legs. He pulled his head away and tried to kick me with his right leg while dodging my attack. My sword missed his neck, but I managed to injure his left leg. ¡°Agh.¡± He grunted in pain, but he didn¡¯t stop his kick. Looking at his kick that got closer to my head, I was calm. It didn¡¯t matter if he hit me who was in front of him because that was a fake. His kick passed the fake¡¯s head, and it dissolved in a cloud of black smoke. He was clearly surprised by my Fake, but he quickly recovered and looked in the direction where I reappeared. ¡°You have a nasty trick. Is that the power of the Sacred Gear that I heard so much? Telos Karma, is it?¡± He misunderstood it badly. While that was true that Telos Karma could achieve that feat, it was nowhere enough to create a fake like that. It was way below that, and I could only make his kick miss my head by messing with the probability. Well, it was good that he misunderstood it. That meant I could defeat him without him realizing my real power. ¡°Yeah, sure. It¡¯s Telos Karma; congratulations, you are correct!¡± I mixed a bit of mocking tone as I clapped my hands. ¡°So, let¡¯s continue our dance, shall we? Show me the power of the Super Devil!¡± ¡°It seems I need to get serious. I had underestimated you, Youkai.¡± RaizarP Author Here~ More than 60 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 167 – Rizevim’s Army The energy around Rizevim increased. It became so potent that it turned red and was visible by naked eyes. ¡°Boy, you don¡¯t understand how the world work. Do you think you can stop me with that army? Do you forget that I am a leader of my own army too?¡± Rizevim began to speak about nonsense. Of course, I knew about that. I also knew he could bring his army here like what he did right now. He extended his hand towards the sky, and a lot of portals appeared in the sky as devils and magicians came out one after the other. Some devils were stronger than the others, especially the original Satan¡¯s descendant such as Katerea Leviathan, Creuserey Asmodeus, Shalba Beelzebub, and even Diodora Astaroth. In other words, all Old Satan Faction had appeared behind him. ¡°Oh? Rizevim. You called us to deal with this boy?¡± Katerea said with a confident expression. ¡°What nonsense. He¡¯s just a man, and you called all of us here with emergency teleport to deal with him?¡± Creuserey, a devil with long black hair that was one shot by Sirzechs in the original story, sneered at me. ¡°He¡¯s a youkai? Can¡¯t you deal with him by yourself?¡± Asked Shalba Beelzebub. ¡°He¡¯s the same age as me, isn¡¯t he? Why did you call us here? My brother will notice that I am gone in a minute!¡± Diodora Astaroth shouted. They didn¡¯t seem to notice the army that closed in from behind. This was rather¡­ bad for me? Nah, I didn¡¯t think so. ¡°They appeared one after another.¡± Muttered Hagoromo Gitsune. ¡°Well, you know about how cockroaches lived, right? They are similar to that.¡± I said with a smug smile on my face. They didn¡¯t stop appearing. The next thing that appeared was a person with long black and blond hair. That appearance, I recognized it. He was Crom Cruach. All of them stood in the sky right above Rizevim. We were also standing in the sky as I stood above an air platform that I made with Youjutsu. ¡°Even the one called Strongest Evil Dragon appeared? Tsuhigumo will love this.¡± ¡°Strongest evil dragon? They could take a human¡¯s appearance?¡± Asked Hagoromo Gitsune. ¡°It seems so.¡± I answered Hagoromo Gitsune as I turned to Crom Cruach. ¡°Rizevim, what happened?¡± He asked Rizevim with a calm tone. ¡°This boy is dangerous. I need the help of everyone here to defeat him.¡± ¡°Hah?!¡± Crom Cruach questioned Rizevim, ¡°What do you mean by that? You know that I hate it when someone interferes with my fight, and yet, you ask me to help you?¡± Even when he asked Rizevim like that, there was an excited tone mixed in. He was a battle maniac even more than Vali, so it was a bit understandable if he wanted to fight a strong opponent. ¡°Strong enough to put me in a bind and call all of you here. Not only that, he has his Hyakki Yakkou making their way toward this place.¡± ¡°Hyakki Yakkou? So he¡¯s a youkai?¡± Crom Cruach looked at me with a feral grin, ¡°Can I fight him alone?¡± What was he saying? ¡°Hey! Human-shaped lizard!¡± I shouted at Crom Cruach, and he turned to me. ¡°Hah?!¡± He bared his teeth to me. As expected, that kind of mocking was really effective against a dragon. I pointed my index finger to the sky with a grin on my face, ¡°Above.¡± Right above him, Tsuchigumo fell from the dragon that he rode and punched Crom Cruach right in his face. Crom Cruach was blown to the ground and created a big crater. A cloud of dust was created from the impact, hiding Crom Cruach¡¯s figure. Bam! ¡°Huahahahahahaha, a lot of enemies appeared. You have my gratitude, Nura!!¡± He laughed hard as he landed on the crater. As soon as he landed, he looked around to find Crom Cruach. A figure appeared from the dust with an excited expression. ¡°Hahaha, Rizevim. I will take this guy!¡± He punched Tsuchigumo in the face, but it did no damage to him. ¡°That tickles,¡± Tsuchigumo said with an uninterested tone and swatted away Crom Cruach away with his hand. ¡°Nura!¡± He shouted at me, ¡°I will not forgive you if you interrupt me.¡± ¡°Ah, go ahead.¡± I waved my hand at him, and he grinned before jumping away to chase after Crom Cruach. Now, what was left was the old devils and Rizevim. I had felt they were coming, so I didn¡¯t even bother to hide my big grin. I released Nenekirimaru, and it disappeared. As expected, dual-wielding was not my style. One katana was more than enough. ¡°Shall we continue our dance, old man?¡± I pointed my katana to Rizevim as I said that. ¡°Rascals!¡± Rizevim shouted and created a big magic circle in front of him. ¡°Kill him!¡± At the same time, the devils behind him created magic circles to attack me too. It filled the sky, but I didn¡¯t care about that. ¡°Are you ready, Hagoromo Gitsune?¡± ¡°Anytime.¡± Answered Hagoromo Gitsune. ¡°Do it!¡± I shouted at no one in particular, and voices answered me. ¡°Yes nya!¡± Kuroka shouted from behind, and a purple poisonous smoke filled the sky in an instant. ¡°What is this!?¡± ¡°I can¡¯t breathe!¡± ¡°H-Help!¡± The devils in the sky began to panic. Only some could jump out of the smoke, including Rizevim and the other people that I recognized. They began to fall from the sky one after the other, and they hit the ground after that. However, as soon as they hit the ground, Tsura''s low tone echoed through the battlefield. ¡°Freeze.¡± The ground froze in an instant, and the devils were encased in ice. Only five of them left, and their expression was twisted in anger. Rizevim also couldn¡¯t believe what he saw, which was visible from his expression. Kuroka flew beside me while Tsura made an Ice pillar to stand beside me. ¡°Why are you guys here?¡± I asked them. They were supposed to take Walburga to me. ¡°Ophis said she would take Walbuga by herself nya! So we came here to help! But don¡¯t worry about her; I asked Shirone to make sure that Walburga is still alive!¡± Exclaimed Kuroka. ¡°Please do leave the rest to us, Riku-sama. I will take the girl and black-haired boy.¡± ¡°I will take on the other nya! So you can fight the big boss with no problem!¡±¡¯ Well, look at them. They were so dependable. ¡°In that case, I will leave them to you.¡± RaizarP Author Here~ More than 60 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks for the new Executive! - L1 Mainy Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 168 – Playing with Rizevim ¡°You guys, take those two girls down first. I will take care of that kid myself.¡± Rizevim ordered the four devils behind him. ¡°Yeah yeah, don¡¯t command me. I will take care of that ice user even when you didn¡¯t ask me. She reminded me of someone unpleasant.¡± Katarea Leviatan scoffed as she glared at Tsura. ¡°Then allow me to assist you, Katarea-sama.¡± Diodora Astaroth flew to Katarea¡¯s side and offered help, ¡°She looked like someone pure, and you do know that I love breaking someone like that.¡± ¡°Hah! Do as you please. But don¡¯t hold me back.¡± ¡°Of course not.¡± I felt a bit irritated when I heard their conversation. Tsura covered her mouth that turned downward with the sleeve of her Kimono and muttered, ¡°I am allowed to kill them, right, Riku-sama?¡± She asked me with a chilling tone. ¡°Do as you please. Kuroka, I will leave the rest to you.¡± I said that to Kuroka and rushed towards Rizevim while brandishing my sword with both of my hands. I closed our distance in less than a second, and I kicked his abdomen. He managed to block my kick with his arm, but he was blown back to the field around 100 meters from here. Because I approached Rizevim who was still surrounded by the other devils, they instantly turned to me and sent their strongest Magic. ¡°Die!¡± Katarea Leviathan shouted as a blue-shaped dragon made from water closed into me. Water magic, huh. The specialty of Leviathan¡¯s clan. However, using water near Tsura was an idiot move. ¡°Your enemy is me, you know?¡± Tsura said slowly, and the dragon froze in an instant. Another attack was closing in from my side. It was a black beam that Creuserey Asmodeus sent toward me. I just looked at the attack with no interest because Kuroka had already appeared in front of me with her body surrounded by Senjutsu aura. ¡°It¡¯s weak nya!¡± Kuroka shouted and swatted away the beam, changing its direction to Diodora Astaroth. He quickly created a magic circle to make a barrier to defend himself from the beam of demonic energy. The beam hit the barrier, and it created a loud explosion. Bam! The two of them then stood beside me. ¡°Riku-sama, you can go now.¡± ¡°That¡¯s right nya! They are weak, so we will be okay!¡± ¡°Sure, I will leave them to you.¡± Leaving those words, I kicked the air and moved towards the location where I blew Rizevim. It was filled with dust, but I saw Rizevim had already stood up, and there was a big magic circle in front of me. ¡°Die, kid!¡± A black beam made its way towards me at a fast speed. It went faster and bigger once it hit the second magic circle that suddenly appeared in the middle of the sky. But that was futile. I didn¡¯t even need to dodge. I kicked the air once again, speeding up in the sky with a grin on my face. Understanding my plan, Hagoromo Gitsune asked. ¡°You are going to cut it?¡± ¡°Yeah, that way I can show him the difference in our strength.¡± ¡°You are too rash, but I don¡¯t think that black thing will be a problem to you.¡± ¡°Yup, it¡¯s not a problem!¡± I shouted at Hagoromo Gitsune as I swung the sword in my hand as I coated it with senjutsu aura, ¡°Tsuki Giri!¡± A Blue slash appeared from my sword, but it didn¡¯t end there. ¡°It will cut anything.¡± I used my Sacred Gear to add a possibility to my slash. Combining the sword¡¯s effect towards the supernatural, the flying slash cut the beam and destroyed it once it made contact with it. Once the beam was destroyed, I could see the ground again and noticed that Rizevim was gone. His energy was hidden by the beam earlier, so I couldn¡¯t feel his location. I spread my Senjutsu again, and I felt him on my side. I used Kyouka Suigetsu to create a fake without wasting a second and jumped away from my place. As soon as I jumped away, Rizevim¡¯s fist pierced through my fake¡¯s head, dissipating it into a cloud of black some. At that moment, my flying slash carved the ground and created a cloud of dust that reached us. With my presence hidden by Kyouka Suigetsu, a cloud of dust wouldn¡¯t reveal my position. However, while we were in the middle of the cloud of dust, my sight was limited. Rizevim was able to use his demonic energy to attack me, while I was able to feel his presence with my Senjutsu aura. ¡°Spear,¡± I said lightly, and the spear appeared from the eight¡¯s tail of the tail on my shoulder. ¡°Aim at his body, don¡¯t aim at his head.¡± Suggested Hagoromo Gitsune with a stern voice. ¡°Yeah, I know.¡± I held the spear shaft tightly with my left hand, aiming the tip at Rizevim¡¯s body that I felt through Senjutsu. ¡°Where are you, kid! Don¡¯t hide and face me head-on!¡± Rizevim shouted; maybe he wanted to taunt me so he would know my position. I wasn¡¯t that stupid. There was no way I would throw my biggest advantage and jump into his trap. So, I would use his trap to my advantage. Another fake appeared, and it made its way in the opposite direction of me. Once he was in the position, I shouted at Rizevim, and my voice came out from the fake. ¡°Shut up, you shitty bat! I guess this is the limit of the so-called true devil? You are weaker than Sirzechs!¡± What I shouted was true. He was still weaker than Sirzechs. For a devil, being compared to the other was humiliating. He would get angry and attack my fake; that was what a normal devil would do. But Rizevim was different. I felt a lot of magic circles created around one spot. The next thing that I knew was a lot of black beams shot in all directions, clearing the dust in an instant as well as destroying my fake. Rizevim stood in the sky with a grin on his face as he looked at my real location that I deliberately revealed to him. ¡°Good job, Rizevim,¡± I said to him with a mocking tone, and he realized that he had fallen into my trap. I threw the spear in my left hand to Rizevim as strong as possible. It flew towards Rizevim at a fast speed, even breaking a sound barrier, and impaled his body before bringing him to the ground. Crash! Bam! A big crater around 15 meters was created on the ground with Rizevim in the center. ¡°So this is a super-devil? Talk about disappointing.¡± Said Hagoromo Gitsune. Right, if super-devil was limited to this, then they wouldn¡¯t be feared. ¡°Hagoromo Gitsune, don¡¯t underestimate him. He¡¯s still alive.¡± I said as I narrowed my eyes. The super-devil had something similar. They had another transformation that they called true-form. And¡­ Rizevim had revealed that yet. ¡°YOU HAVE MADE ME ANGRY, KID!¡± The hoarse voice of Rizevim echoed in the battleground as I saw him stand up slowly and pull Hagoromo Gitsune¡¯s spear from his chest. His energy exploded as he looked at me with anger. ¡°Let me show you my real strength! The real strength of Lucifer¡¯s Son!¡± RaizarP Author Here~ More than 60 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks for the new Executive! - L1 Mainy Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 169 – Playing with Rizevim 2 The energy that he emitted now couldn¡¯t be compared to earlier. It was so potent that the atmosphere around him was twisted; it looked like the air that was burned with high heat and distorted because the oxygen was burned. According to the energy that I felt now, it was now rivaling Sirzechs. So the Super Devil that used all his strength looked like this? The wound on Rizevim¡¯s chest began to heal at a visible speed. I had used my Offense form right now; it was already more than a minute since we fought. I didn¡¯t know how long I could stay in this form, and Matoi with Hagoromo Gitsune took a lot more than I thought. Not only that, I had thrown the spear with all my strength. I only had half of my energy left in my body. ¡°Hahaha, isn¡¯t this a bit bad?¡± A youkai that had yet hit 20 like me had a fight with centuries years old Super Devil. Shouldn¡¯t my old man come to my rescue like Azazel, who had always helped Issei in the main story? Or better yet, Sirzechs should¡¯ve arrived in Vampire World by asking Gasper. Rizevim was stronger than I thought, and I had yet to absorb Incinerate Anthem to me. ¡°Concentrate, Nura. Don¡¯t worry about healing; I learned a bit of healing magic from Yasaka.¡± Hagoromo Gitsune¡¯s voice rang beside me. Instantly, I calmed down and grinned, ¡°Well yeah, I know.¡± I didn¡¯t panic because I felt bigger and familiar cat-like energy making its way toward me while bringing some small energy. Maybe they tried to teleport to my place but couldn¡¯t because Rizevim¡¯s energy twisted the magical energy around this area. ¡°Well, it¡¯s not like he can hit me with his strength, though.¡± As soon as I said that, I used Kyouka Suigetsu and observed Rizevim calmly. My hair was blown by the air current caused by the energy around Rizevim. Without wasting a second later, he shot out to my fake and kicked its head, causing my Fake to disappear into a cloud of black smoke and my true self to appear. ¡°He¡¯s faster than before,¡± I muttered slowly as I gripped my sword tightly. As I had expected, Rizevim immediately turned his head towards me and kicked the air. He closed our distance in less than a second and sent a fast jab towards my stomach. But I was not that slow. I managed to dodge his punch and swung my sword towards his arm. My sword met his energy and caused a spark to fly. The sword in my hand was better than Nenekirimaru in terms of slashing the supernatural. However, what stopped my sword was not Rizevim¡¯s energy but his body. His body was as strong as steel, and it was a bit hard to cut it. If this was an RPG, then his defense now was as high as Issei or Vali in their Balance Breaker. Also, since earlier, I couldn¡¯t use Telos Karma to make his punch miss. He kept punching me. A jab, uppercut, and backhand kept coming toward me. Without Telos Karma, I purely used my Fear to keep dodging while slashing his body while I was at it. It was a bit hard, and I was in a bind. The Matoi was running long enough, I bet Hagoromo Gitsune was tired right now. However, she knew that if she canceled the Matoi, I would be hit by Rizevim and lost. That was why she kept the Matoi ongoing. The Vampire World¡¯s Senjutsu Energy was not as pure as Earth. I tried to recover my energy by absorbing It while we were fighting, but I could only recover little by little while expending greater energy to dodge and attack Rizevim¡¯s punches. Suddenly, he stopped and jumped back, creating a distance between us. ¡°This energy is?¡± Rizevim muttered while he looked around the area. Oh, they were finally here? In the distance, I saw Ophis and Shirone bringing someone with witch clothes on her shoulder making their way here. From their speed, they would reach this place in less than a minute. If Rizevim ran at that time, I would be in trouble trying to find him. Not only did I need to find him in the vast world again, he would hide for a while to avoid me. ¡®I couldn¡¯t let him run.¡¯ ¡°Yo, Rizevim.¡± I called out to him with a mocking tone, ¡°You old devil couldn¡¯t even beat me, huh? Look, I am fine without any scar on my body.¡± Rizevim turned his gaze towards me and frowned, ¡°Don¡¯t get cocky, boy.¡± He was clearly angry from my provocation. Silently, I used Kyouka Suigetsu again. While covering my body with Fear, I walked in the air, slowly making my way towards Rizevim as my Fake shrugged his shoulders. ¡°Hahaha, so the son of lucifer is nothing. I had beat Vali, your grandson, and yet¡­ you are weaker than him. What a joke, the son of Lucifer, is weaker than his great-grandson. And, Vali is only half-devil!¡± Rizevim¡¯s face contorted into an ugly twist. His muscle relaxed a little as veins popped out from his face. As expected, this was the most effective way to beat a devil, by making them mad. Now I had stood behind Rizevim. His energy thinned out because of his anger, and I was confident that I could cut him now. So I raised my sword, injected it with all my energy alongside Hagoromo Gitsune¡¯s Fear, and swung it down at Rizevim¡¯s neck. ¡°Tsuki Giri.¡± At the same time, I swung my sword; my Fake disappeared, and Rizevim realized that he had fallen into my taunt. Although I aimed at his neck, it looked like he had a fail-safe to save his life. His neck was uninjured, but I managed to cut his left arm and burn it by Fox Fire that was imbued to my attack by Hagoromo Gitsune¡¯s Fear. Blood and demonic energy spurted out from his wound as he jumped away. He landed 20 meters from me and cut the stump with a hand blade to stop his demonic energy from leaking out. Surprisingly, it did stop, and he used his demonic energy to stop the bleeding from his arm. If he glared at me in anger earlier, now he glared at me with gazes full of hate as he muttered ominously, ¡°I will kill you, brat!¡± "Yeah yeah, I heard that a few times already!" RaizarP Author Here~ More than 60 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks for the new Executive! - L1 Mainy Big Thanks for the new Squad Leader! - Anonymous Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 170 – Ending the play With Rizevim only having an arm left, I was no longer afraid of his attack. He charged at me with his fist in a punching position. His movement was clearly slower than before, and I could see it even without squinting my eyes. I calmly dodged his strike by stepping to the left and kicking him in the stomach. He was weak now; even his title as a Super Devil could be stripped from him right now. He was only around ultimate rank without his left arm, which actually was still stronger than the average devil. However, I was using my Offense Feat as well as Matoi with Hagoromo Gitsune, who was also stronger than Ultimate-Rank Devil. It was natural for me to beat him with all the buff that I used. He was sent flying by my kick and crashed into the nearby tree, snapping it into two. He was able to get his balance back in a matter of seconds and glared at me. A dozen of magic circles were then created around him. Peeking out from the magic circles were black spears; they looked strong at first glance. Did he perhaps forget that I could destroy Supernatural energy with this sword? I guess he did forget about it. The spears came out slowly until half of them were visible. ¡°Damn brat! Do you think you can kill me with your current strength?!¡± He roared loudly. At the same time, the spears flew toward me. There were too many of them to count, and they were fast. Swoosh! However, I had something that could protect me from these spears. ¡°Hagoromo Gitsune, War Fan.¡± I said lightly, and she answered. ¡°First tail.¡± I put my hand on the first tail and pulled out a black fan that Hagoromo Gitsune often used. I opened the fan with a flick of my finger, and it enlarged immediately, covering my body. Clang Clang Clang! Cling! The spears hit the black metal fan. It created a loud sound, and I couldn¡¯t hear anything but the sound of the magic spears that disappeared as soon as they hit the fan in front of my body. A smart opponent would use this chance to attack me or run away from me. And as I had expected, Rizevim tried to run from me using this chance. The magic spears were still raining toward me, but I couldn¡¯t let that old bastard escape. So I imbued Senjutsu aura into the fan in front of me and swung it with all of my strength. Swoosh¨C! A raging wind that swept all the magic spears came out from the fan. Because it was infused with Senjutsu, the magic spears that were usually not affected by winds were now turning back in the other direction because of the intensity of the wind. They flew back towards Rizevim, who tried to run away by creating a magic circle under his feet. These magic spears won¡¯t be enough to stop him. So I called Nenekirimaru, which could cut Supernatural things, and threw it towards the magic circle under Rizevim¡¯s feet. Nenekirimari flew even faster than the magic spears and landed on the magic circle under Rizevim. Crash¨C! As soon as Nenekirimaru landed on the magic circle, a sound of broken glass echoed through the battlefield, accompanied by Rizevim¡¯s surprised expression. ¡°What?!¡± But he had no time to get surprised. The magic spears that I sent back to him were now in front of him. With his remaining energy, he created a barrier in front of him. I quickly put the fan back to Hagoromo Gitsune¡¯s tail and kicked the compressed air that I created with Youjutsu. Although Rizevim was on the edge of the dead, my energy was almost depleted too. So I needed to kill him as fast as I could. Calling Nenekirimaru back, I threw it again towards his barrier to destroy it. However, the barrier appeared to be a solid object, unlike the magic circle earlier. Clang¨C! Nenekirimaru bounced against the barrier, but I had reached Rizevim now. Infusing all my remaining energy into the sword that was upgraded from Nenekirimaru in my hand, I swung it down. ¡°Tsuki Giri!¡± A vertical flying slash was sent out towards Rizevim, who hid behind the barrier. The flying slash was black because Hagoromo Gitsune had also infused part of her Fear into it. The destructive energy was not a joke; it was three times greater compared to when I used Garm on that mountain. The flying slash hit the barrier and easily destroyed it. Rizevim¡¯s scared expression was visible. Compared to a grin that was plastered on my face, he looked really ugly. ¡°Y-You!!¡± He immediately jumped to the left and created another barrier, but that was no use. Maybe because he was quick on his feet, Tsuki Giri only severed his right arm and leg. ¡°AaARAARARGgG!¡± a scream of pain echoed through the area as blood and demonic energy spurted out from his wound. He was trashing on the ground. He had no arms left, and he only had one left leg. With my senjutsu, I could feel that his energy was all depleted. I landed in front of him and pointed the tip of my sword at his neck. His eyes were bloodshot as he looked at me, clearly scared. ¡°A-aah, p-please spare me!¡± He began to beg like the usual villain. I felt Vali¡¯s energy flew towards me faster than a sound from a distance. Ophis and Shirone seemed to stop near Kuroka and Tsura, who had their energy decreasing little by little. Maybe they helped them first. It was okay, as I had defeated Rizevim. ¡°Look at you, really unsightly.¡± I mocked him. ¡°S-Spare me¡­ D-d-don¡¯t kill me.¡± Begged Rizevim. ¡°I won¡¯t.¡± I said slightly as I pulled my sword away. His expression brightened, but then he paled once again as Vali landed beside me. He wore his scale mail. I pointed my thumb at Vali and grinned at Rizevim, ¡°But he will.¡± ¡°Thanks.¡± Vali said to me as he coated his fist with a mix of demonic and dragon energy from Albion. ¡°V-Vali! D-Don¡¯t kill me! I-I am your grandfather!¡± ¡°Shut up!¡± Vali shouted at Rizevim, ¡°Die.¡± He then punched Rizevim¡¯s face, severing his neck. The head of Rizevim flew towards the tree in the distance before crashing into it and falling to the ground. Thud¨C Vali had a rough breath, but he then looked at me as he took his helmet off, ¡°Thanks. I owe you one.¡± I waved my hand at him as I canceled my Matoi. My hair and clothes turned to normal, and Hagoromo Gitsune appeared beside me before dusting her clothes. ¡°Don¡¯t sweat it~¡± I said to Vali with a joking tone, ¡°More importantly¡­ can you help my girls over there? I am¡­¡± I almost fell to the ground because I was too exhausted. However, Hagoromo Gitsune caught me and put my arm over her shoulder. I smiled at her a little before turning to Vali. ¡°I am too tired, you see?¡± He smiled and put his helmed back, ¡°Sure. I will take care of the rest.¡± RaizarP Author Here~ More than 60 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 171 – Finished The rest of the fight had ended without much going on. From the information that I gained from spreading my Senjutsu, I was able to find out a few things. With the help of Ophis and Shirone, Kuroka and Tsura were able to defeat their enemies with no problem. They killed the descendants of Satans while Tsura froze Diodora Astaroth to be used as a trading chip with the devil. Although he joined Rizevim under the old Satan Faction, there was no denying that he was still the little brother of one of the four satan, Ajuka Beelzebub. The best way to not offend the devil and get my peace back as soon as possible was to keep Diodora Astaroth alive. I also managed to recover some of my strength. Now I was able to walk by myself. After burning Rizevim¡¯s corpse to make sure he won¡¯t revive again, I made my way to Tsura and the other who stood in front of Diodora Astaroth. There was an unconscious girl on the ground beside Ophis. Judging from the clothes, I guess that was Walburga? I approached them with Hagoromo Gitsune and greeted them. ¡°Yo!¡± They had noticed me and turned to me. Kuroka was still energetic as she jumped at me and hugged my arm. ¡°Riku-sama!¡± She then observed my body to find whether I was injured or not before stepping away with a satisfied nod. ¡°There is no injury nya! That¡¯s great!¡± ¡°Yeah, I am fine.¡± I patted Kuroka¡¯s head before walking towards Walburga, lying on the ground. I crouched to see her better before turning to Ophis, ¡°Good job, Ophis. I will help you to gain your silence back after I am getting ready.¡± Ophis nodded her head, ¡°No problem. You can do¡­ whenever you are ready.¡± ¡°Thanks.¡± After answering Ophis, I turned my focus to Walburga again. My energy had recovered a little, but it was by no means enough to absorb the Incinerate Anthem for now. So I used Youjutsu to keep Walburga unconscious for now before turning to Tsura. ¡°Can you go back to our mansion first, Tsura? Take her with you and put her in a safe place. Restrain her with your ice too while you are at it so she won¡¯t be able to escape when she regains her consciousness.¡± ¡°Certainly, Riku-sama.¡± Tsura then picked up Walburga and bowed at me before teleporting back to our mansion. After they were gone, I stood up and looked at Diodora Astaroth. He was still conscious as Tsura kept his head outside of the ice to keep him alive. ¡°Who do we have here¡­ Ajuka¡¯s little brother. To think that Satan''s little brother is the member of Khaos Brigade.¡± ¡°You!! Release me right now!¡± He shouted and struggled, but it was no use. Tsura¡¯s ice was strong; there was no way someone like Diodora could break it. Even I needed some strength to break it. ¡°Release you?¡± I asked in a low tone, ¡°Do you know what your position is? Even if you go back to the underworld, I bet your brother will just kill you to maintain his position.¡± ¡°There is no way that can be true!¡± ¡°Shall we take a look ourselves later?¡± I grinned at him, and Diodora instantly paled. I turned to Kuroka, ¡°For now, take him to our mansion too. Put him near Kappa¡¯s pond and ask Tsura to keep an eye to keep him frozen.¡± ¡°Yes, nya!¡± Exclaimed Kuroka. She then walked to Shirone, who only stood while looking at me, and pulled her hand. ¡°O-Onee-sama?!¡± Shirone was surprised by the sudden pull and shouted at Kuroka. ¡°Let¡¯s go nya!¡± ¡°B-but wasn¡¯t he only asked you to go, Onee-sama?¡± ¡°What are you saying, Shirone nya! The reason why he asked me to go back with him was to run from this place nya. This place will become dangerous soon with the dragon that was fighting against Tsuchigumo approaching at a fast speed!¡± Oops, she noticed it. That was true. I felt Crom Cruach made his way here with Tsuchigumo and his pet dragon at a fast speed. They were still fighting, and they certainly weren¡¯t looking around at where they were fighting. When two battle-maniac met with each other, the result like this was inevitable. ¡°I will leave Diodora to you, Kuroka.¡± I said to Kuroka with a smile, ¡°Also, Shirone, you can also go with Kuroka. I think you wanted to beat Diodora for a little. He¡¯s the reason why Asia was exiled from the church.¡± ¡°Asia-senpai?¡± Asked Shirone. ¡°He¡¯s the reason? Asia-senpai was kind to me at that time. She¡¯s a poor girl.¡± Shirone then glared at Diodora before turning to me again, nodded her head, ¡°I will do that then.¡± ¡°Good. Don¡¯t kill him though.¡± I waved my hand as I saw both of them touching the ice that froze Diodora as a magic circle appeared under their feet. They were gone after a few seconds as Kuroka waved her hand to me. Only the three of us were left in this place. Now I could see a big dragon was fighting against a smaller dragon and an orange giant in the distance. Each of their attacks pulverized the area around them; it was a surreal sight on earth. However, I had no intention to help them. Because the mission in this place had finished. ¡°You are late, Azazel,¡± I said slightly, and Azazel landed beside me while holding a beautiful blond-haired girl. ¡°Don¡¯t say that. You are fighting that monster near the house where this girl was kept. It was hard, you know?¡± ¡°Don¡¯t make excuses. So we are almost done here?¡± I asked him. ¡°Yeah. Just need a clean-up a little bit. But¡­ I think your subordinates and Vali Team are enough for that.¡± I couldn¡¯t deny him. My subordinates killed the magicians and the vampires at a fast speed, while Vali and his team destroyed a lot of building to take the hidden enemies. ¡°Well, that meant I can relax a little bit.¡± ¡°Correct! Let¡¯s relax a little bit.¡± RaizarP Author Here~ More than 60 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks for the new Executive! - Julian Juhl Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 172 – Clean-up Plan A few minutes later, my subordinates started to gather behind me with satisfied smiles on their faces. They looked fresh, as if they had thrown away the burden that held them back all this time. ¡°Hahahaha, did you see me earlier? I crushed that perky-eared guy with one hand!¡± Aotabo boasted his achievement, accompanied by a loud laugh. If there was something missing in this place, then that would be alcohol. There was no sake to complete this situation. ¡°What are you saying, Aotabo. Did you not see my spears and swords impaled into those robed guys'' bodies?¡± Kurotabo Asked Aotabo with a smirk on his face, ¡°I certainly killed more than you.¡± ¡°Hah!¡± Aotabo scoffed, ¡°You are daydreaming. It¡¯s obvious that I killed more than you.¡± ¡°Ya~ What a peaceful day,¡± I said with a happy tone as I looked at them. ¡°Peaceful?! I think you need to get your eyes checked.¡± Azazel denied it flatly and smiled wryly at me. He then turned to Crom Cruach in the distance, who was now fighting against Tsuchigumo and Vali. For some reason, after Vali came back with his team, he joined Tsuchigumo in the fight. However, Vali¡¯s team said that they were tired and joined my subordinates and talked with each other. Bikou was the one who managed to get used to the atmosphere the fastest. Him being a youkai might be helping him to adapt to the situation faster, and my subordinates certainly were interested in him being Sun Wukong¡¯s descendant. Le Fay was talking with Kejoro while Arthur was now talking with Kubinashi. Both of them had good synergy, and they certainly had similar personalities. Maybe that was also why they talked to each other like a friend after just a few minutes of talking. Surprisingly, Valerie Tepes also joined the hustle and talked with a lot of different youkai. ¡°This is peace, Azazel. Partying after a fight is natural for us. So, do you mind if we crashed into your base to have a party?¡± I smirked at Azazel, and he looked at me with a bitter smile. ¡°Hey hey¡­ my base is located in the underworld, you know? How can you teleport them¡­ oh.¡± Azazel noticed something and looked at Ophis. He then turned to me and said, ¡°Don¡¯t ever think about it.¡± ¡°You are no fun¡­¡± I looked at Azazel and let out a tired sigh, ¡°For once, let¡¯s have a party in your base¡­ Well, I don¡¯t really need your permission though. Hahahahaha.¡± ¡°Hey! I told you not to party in my base.¡± ¡°Hahaha, well, I won¡¯t. Setting that aside, Azazel. What will you do now?¡± I asked Azazel seriously. ¡°What will I do? To be honest, I don¡¯t know. For now, I want to attend the peace conference and sign the peace treaty.¡± Answered Azazel. ¡°I know about that already. What I mean is¡­ what will you do to the rest of the Khaos Brigade. We just literally destroyed two of their main force and killed their leader. There are still some factions left in Khaos Brigade, but I don¡¯t think they will do anything as of now.¡± ¡°Oh, so that¡¯s what you mean¡­¡± Azazel turned silent for a while before he let out a sigh as he scratched his head. ¡°Sigh¡­ I have no further information about the rest of their factions, so I think I will try to investigate them for now.¡± He then crossed his arms and looked at Valerie, who was talking with Kejoro and Le Fay happily. ¡°I have that girl to protect too.¡± ¡°So you are out of the play? Talk about lackluster. You are pulling me here, and I kill the leader of the Khaos Brigade thanks to that, and now you are trying to stop right now?¡± ¡°Oi oi, I am pulling you here to save that girl. Who knows that Rizevim was here? That old fossil''s movement couldn¡¯t be predicted.¡± ¡°Well, you are correct. But¡­ thanks to that, we are one step closer to destroying their organization.¡± I crossed my arms as I turned to Hagoromo Gitsune. She was watching Tsuchigumo¡¯s fight that was now reached its climax. She had a stoic expression. After looking at her for a few seconds, I turned back to Azazel. ¡°I wanted to at least destroy them in a month. Don¡¯t you think we need to bring this subject up in the peace conference?¡± ¡°Hmm? I plan to do that from the start. Come to think of it; you are also attending the peace conference, huh?¡± ¡°I was invited by Sirzechs and was told by Vasco to attend. It seems like I am acting as a middleman.¡± I shrugged my shoulders at his words. ¡°Middleman, huh? What kind of middleman who plans to have a competition with one faction after the peace conference, huh?¡± ¡°That¡¯s me.¡± I answered with a grin, ¡°Well, why don¡¯t the fallen angels join the friendly competition too? That way, the devil will also join, and we can treat the competition as a way to commemorate the peace conference.¡± ¡°Hah!¡± Azazel scoffed, ¡°I bet you have another plan besides that competition.¡± Well, it seemed like he found out. It was not strange at all, considering the thing that I proposed to him. Each faction that joined the competition wouldn¡¯t want to lose to the other. That way, they would send their best fighter to join the competition. That would mean the strongest fighter from three factions would gather at the competition. To be honest, I planned to sweep the rest of the Khaos Brigade at that time. With the strongest fighters gathering together, destroying the rest of the Khaos Brigade would be a piece of cake. ¡°Well, it¡¯s not hurt to at least follow my plan for once, right? You owe me one, after all.¡± ¡°Tsk! When you put it that way, I couldn¡¯t refuse it.¡± Azazel clicked his tongue, but there was a grin on his face. Oh¡­ So he needed a reason to join. As expected of him, what a sly bastard. He got a reason to join, so his subordinate didn¡¯t chew him out, and he made me use the favor that he owed. Damn bastard, I still needed to learn to match their slyness. ¡°Well then, that¡¯s decided. I will work your subordinates hard at that time.¡± ¡°Hahaha, sure. They are a tough bunchs.¡± RaizarP Author Here~ More than 60 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks for the new Executive! - Julian Juhl Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 173 – Giants Battle and Bet ¡°They are almost done.¡± Hagoromo Gitsune said quietly without looking at me. I glanced at her before turning my gaze toward the three giants plus a man that fought in the distance. The fight was chaotic. They didn¡¯t even try to work together and even punched at each other. The strange thing was¡­ they had a smile on their faces. I thought that I was a battle maniac because I loved to have a nice fight too. However, when I looked at them, the real battle-maniac, I changed my mind. ¡°Look at their smiles,¡± Azazel commented as he watched the battle. The youkai were also watching the battle with interest. Such entertainment was rare, especially when three people with an additional pet that had strength rivaling Ultimate-Class devil fought each other. They didn¡¯t want to miss it, and I heard some of them were pilling up a bet. ¡°Tsuchigumo is in the lead! Who wants to bet on Vali Lucifer or that black dragon?¡± ¡°Hahaha, I bet that small man will win! I will bet a bottle of sake for Vali!¡± ¡°What nonsense! I will bet my mocha for Tsuchigumo!¡± ¡°I will bet my red bean paste for Tsuchigumo too. I still remember how painful his punches are.¡± Their bets were food and sake, truly the youkai way of doing a thing. I looked at Azazel and smirked. ¡°Do you want to have a bet too? I will put on the best sake that I have for Tsuchigumo. The spirit sake that you will not be able to get anywhere.¡± Hearing my offer, Azazel turned to me and smirked, ¡°Interesting¡­ I will bet my oldest wine for Vali then. I hope you accept my bet.¡± He extended his hand toward me. I shook his hand with a smile, ¡°Deal.¡± We then turned to the fights again. Just a few seconds had passed since I shook Azazel¡¯s hand. Now the fight had become a brawl between three sides. ¡°Hahahahaha, this is fun!¡± Crom Cruach shouted with a hoarse voice, then he sent a fire breath toward Tsuchigumo. Whoosh! His claw moved toward Vali and slapped him to the ground. Bam! ¡°I agree!¡± Tsuchigumo shouted back and punched the breath, dispersing it before launching himself toward Crom Cruach. He grabbed Crom Cruach¡¯s claw with his hand before punching him repeatedly. But Crom Cruach didn¡¯t stay silent either. He freed his claw from Tsuchigumo¡¯s grip and began to punch back. It hit Tsuchigumo¡¯s face, but Tsuchigumo just flinched a bit before his face turned into a mad grin and punched Crom Cruach back. They repeated the same exchanges a few times and generated a shockwave that I could feel even from here. ¡°Woah, that¡¯s a strong punch.¡± Commented Azazel. Vali, who had been slapped away by Crom Cruach earlier, began to get up and flew toward both Giants that were punching each other. ¡°Bastard, I will beat you up!¡± Vali shouted as his wing flashed a bright light. His armor changed a little, and the gem on his armor let out a bright flash similar to his wing. Energy began to gather around his fist, and he then entered the battle between two giants with his small fist. However, the two giants knew that Vali was not someone to scoff at. Both of them stopped their punches and turned to Vali. Crom Cruach began to gather energy around his throat. He prepared a breath. Tsuchigumo, a cloud of black smoke began to appear around his body. He used his fear, the Hyakki Yakkou destroyer. His Fear was a fearsome one. If I challenged him with my Hyakki Yakkou, there was a chance that I would lose. His Fear allowed him to get stronger the more opponents that he faced at the same time. Also, it made his opponents see him as an overwhelming being that was unbeatable, and of course, he got stronger as he used his Fear too. They seemed to be ready to end their battle. Seeing them, Hagoromo Gitsune suddenly said. ¡°It seems they are ready to end this. I will bet my personal sake on that dragon.¡± ¡°Your personal sake? That¡¯s indeed interesting.¡± ¡°Hahahaha, so the winner will get two alcohol now?¡± Azazel laughed as he looked at the battle that unfolded. The battle became fiercer than before, and the shockwave was even bigger. Hagoromo Gitsune¡¯s long hair ruffled in the air because of the shockwave. My hair only moved a little because¡­ it literally couldn¡¯t move around. ¡°Tsuchigumo! Beat them, and let me get my Ohagi intact!¡± ¡°Hey! Do your best, you big lizard! I am betting my mochi on you!¡± ¡°White guy! Don¡¯t even lose! My sake is in your hand!¡± The youkai cheered loudly to make sure the one that they put the bet on won. As usual, the war that involved youkai would always end up like this. It would end in a festival. But, the battle was putting Vali in a disadvantageous position. Mainly, it was because of his size. The three fighters jumped back and then looked at each other. Tsuchigumo¡¯s pet was looking at them from the sky. When they were looking at each other, Crom Cruach suddenly spoke. ¡°Hum, both of you are strong, but I don¡¯t think going like this is fun. That¡¯s why¡­¡± As he said that, his dragon body was surrounded by bright light and compressed down. After a second, he became human with blond and black hair and black clothes. ¡°I will fight in this form.¡± Tsuchigumo looked at him with interest before stroking his chin. He then turned to me and met my eyes before shouting. ¡°Teach me how to turn into a human, will you?¡± Ah, he wanted to fight them fairly? ¡°Move the energy inside your body and compress it while thinking to turn your body into a human!¡± I shouted back at Tsuchigumo, and he nodded his head. He then began to compress his energy, as I said. Vali and Crom Cruach understood that they shouldn¡¯t bother Tsuchigumo right now. They were battle-maniacs, so they would wait for him to have a good battle. ¡°Will he be okay?¡± Asked Azazel. ¡°Hah! He will be okay.¡± I answered him, ¡°Do you know? Tsuchigumo is famous for destroying Hyakki Yakkou. He¡¯s literally a Hyakki Yakkou himself.¡± ¡°Huh?¡± Confused, Azazel turned to me. ¡°What do you mean?¡± ¡°He meant that he¡¯s as strong as a Hyakki Yakkou combined. Only me and this guy would be able to fight Tsuchigumo if he fought seriously.¡± Hagoromo Gitsune answered Azazel as she spread her fan in front of her mouth. ¡°Isn¡¯t that¡­ so he¡¯s as strong as me?¡± ¡°Yep, he is.¡± Azazel had a wry smile on his face before turning to Tsuchigumo, that was surrounded by black smoke right now. ¡°Youkai is scary¡­¡± He muttered quietly. ¡°¡­ we are fortunate that we make rules to only fought our war in the underworld at that time.¡± I ignored Azazel¡¯s muttering as I looked at Tsuchigumo¡¯s body which was now compressed down into human size. The smoke that surrounded him was now gone, and a human with a Yasha mask and four arms appeared in his place. He moved his arms before clenching his fist. The mouth of the mask on his face moved, it curled into a smile, and he then took a fighting stance. ¡°Let¡¯s continue our battle!¡± He roared loudly with his now small body.¡± Crom Cruach grinned back, and I didn¡¯t know Vali¡¯s expression because he was wearing a helmet. However, knowing him, he must¡¯ve smiled too. ¡°It¡¯s interesting! Let¡¯s kill each other!¡± RaizarP Author Here~ More than 60 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 174 – Going Back to Kanto Their battle resumed. However, there was not much to be addressed. The three of them met in the center and punched each other out. Because Tsuchigumo was not used to his human form yet, his movement felt a bit sluggish, and his punch was weaker than before. However, that was already enough to fight with them. They exchanged punches fiercely. Vali was the one who held the most advantage because he had no change in his body size. Crom Cruach was compressing his dragon form into human form, and he was certainly skilled, but he couldn¡¯t use his breath. ¡°Hyak!¡± Crom Cruach yelled as he punched Vali, blowing him away to a distance. Tsuchigumo was also like that. His biggest advantage, his size, was now gone, and he could only focus on technique. He then used his leg in the battle. He kicked Crom Cruach on his head and planted him on the ground. The fight continued with the three of them punching and kicking each other with their fist covered in some aura. Five minutes later, the three of them were already battered. ¡°Hahahaha, this is fun!¡± With a mad grin, Crom Cruach¡¯s voice boomed through the area. ¡°Kahahaha, you¡¯re not bad! It¡¯s been a long time since I had this much fun!¡± Tsuchigumo answered with a burst of mad laughter. ¡°I agree. Having a good fight after killing that bastard is all I could ask for.¡± Vali took his helmet off and wiped the blood that was on his lips. ¡°However¡­ I think we need to end this now.¡± ¡°That¡¯s right. We have been in this for too long! Let¡¯s end this with the final strike.¡± Crom Cruach agreed with Vali and began to gather his energy in his fist. ¡°Not bad! I will entertain you!¡± A black cloud began to appear around Tsuchigumo¡¯s body again. The atmosphere suddenly became heavy, and some of the youkai behind me fell to their knees. Azazel, who stood beside me, had shuddered. Sweat began to drip from his forehead. He had never experienced Tsuchigumo¡¯s Fear at full strength. His Fear itself was the Fear that youkai held for him for over 500 years. It was heavy as if his Fear could control the gravity around him. But, that was not correct. What made his Fear heavy was that Azazel subconsciously got scared of him. If someone didn¡¯t get scared of Tsuchigumo, they wouldn¡¯t be affected by his Fear too much. As proof, Hagoromo Gitsune and I were fine even when we were exposed to such Fear. ¡°You are too weak, Azazel. How can a leader like you be scared of the other?¡± I mocked him, and he turned to me with a wry smile. ¡°I see¡­ so this is the power that only youkai have? They got stronger the more I fear him¡­ that¡¯s why it¡¯s called Fear.¡± ¡°That¡¯s right. And that¡¯s why no one can find me too. Because¡­ they are all scared of Nurarihyon. They feared us¡­¡± I boasted, ¡°Humans had a legend about us. They are scared of us. That¡¯s why¡­ we are strong.¡± In this world where the supernatural was known to a lot of people, accumulating Fear from humans was easy. That was why the youkai from Nura Clan were stronger in this world, and so did Tsuchigumo. ¡°Well, it looks like they are ready to end this,¡± Azazel commented as he looked at Vali. Vali¡¯s wing flashed a few times before the energy that had accumulated in his wing transferred to the gauntlet in his right hand. ¡°Ready?¡± Asked Crom Cruach. Tsuchigumo¡¯s black cloud was slowly being concentrated in his four fists. They were blazing like a black flame, covering his fist tightly. ¡°Let¡¯s just do it.¡± With that as a signal, the three of them kicked the ground, and their fists met each other in the center. BOOOOM¨C¨C! A loud explosion was created, and the blinding light combined with a black cloud filled the area around them, creating a sphere that made us unable to look inside. An earthquake followed the explosion, and the ground started to cave in. Azazel and I jumped up and stood in the sky while Hagoromo Gitsune countered the earthquake with her fan. ¡°Woahh!¡± ¡°Be careful!¡± ¡°Help!!¡± The youkai behind us fell to the newly created crater and tried to get up. Some were able to avoid it, and they were amazed by the sheer destruction that was created from the attack earlier. I looked at where their fists met as the blinding sphere began to dim. In that location, a big crater was created, and two people had laid on the ground unconscious while one who wore silver armor was still standing. ¡°Hahahaha, it seems that Vali won, huh?!¡± Azazel¡¯s laughter rang beside me. ¡°Tsk! He¡¯s able to stay conscious because of his armor!¡± ¡°Say no more! Both of you owed me sake!¡± Azazel laughed and then made his way to Vali. I followed him and landed beside Vali. Azazel tapped his shoulder with a big smile, ¡°Hey, Vali! Are you okay?¡± He asked. Vali slowly turned toward Azazel, ¡°Yeah¡­¡± His voice was weak. He was too exhausted from the fight. Slowly, his body collapsed, and he fainted. ¡°Woah¡­¡± Azazel caught him in time as his armor and wing crumbled. ¡°Well well, look at this. He¡¯s able to stay awake by sheer will.¡± ¡°That¡¯s amazing by itself.¡± I answered Azazel and crouched beside Tsuchigumo. He had a satisfied smile on his face. For some reason, he didn¡¯t turn back to his giant form, but this was better. When I was about to carry Tsuchigumo, I heard a growl from above. ¡°Graaa!¡± I looked up and saw the blue dragon that had been tamed by Tsuchigumo descent toward me. ¡°Grrrr¡­¡± He growled at me as if he was trying to protect Tsuchigumo. ¡°Don¡¯t worry. I am this guy¡¯s friend.¡± As I answered that, the dragon backed away a little and lowered its head. I carried Tsuchigumo over my shoulder and turned to Crom Cruach. ¡°What should we do to him?¡± I asked Azazel, who carried Vali the same way as I did. ¡°What should we do, indeed.¡± He muttered, ¡°Killing him here will be the best action, but¡­ I think he¡¯s just similar to Vali, someone who wanted to fight a strong opponent.¡± ¡°I think so too.¡± I answered Azazel with a smirk, ¡°Then I will take him too. I will let him rest with Tsuchigumo.¡± ¡°Oh, sure. Take him.¡± Azazel turned away and made his way towards Vali¡¯s team, which ran from a distance. ¡°I will leave first, have good luck.¡± Azazel met with Vali¡¯s team, and they teleported away. I made my way back after I picked Crom Cruach and met up with the other, Ophis included. ¡°Well then, let¡¯s head back! We have a party waiting for us!¡± ¡°Ouu!!¡± RaizarP Author Here~ More than 60 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 175 – Ophis Silence We teleported back to Kanto, and I was greeted by Tsura, who had arrived first. ¡°Welcome back, Riku-sama.¡± ¡°Ou, I¡¯m back.¡± I greeted her back. I gestured for the youkai to go inside first to rest, and they ran inside the mansion while chattering loudly. Tsura approached me in the mids of the crowd, and then her eyes glued to Crom Cruach and Tsuchigumo on my shoulder. ¡°Should I administer medical attention immediately?¡± Asked Tsura worriedly. ¡°Yeah, please do so.¡± I then threw both of them to the ground, ¡°The four-armed one is Tsuchigumo. I believe he will be fine after you sprinkle some sake on his body.¡± ¡°Certainly.¡± Tsura then looked at Aotabo, who boasted about his achievement in the previous battle with the small youkai. ¡°Aotabo-san! Can you help me a little?¡± She called out to him. Aotabo turned around and approached us, ¡°Oh? Is there something that I could do for you, Tsura-san?¡± ¡°Yes, can you please carry these two to the medical ward? They need immediate attention.¡± ¡°Ou! Leave it to me.¡± Aotabo then picked Crom Cruach and Tsuchigumo. He carried them under his armpit as if he carried a bag of rice. ¡°Thank you, Aotabo-san.¡± Tsura then looked at me, ¡°Well, then, Riku-sama. I will leave now. The prisoner, Diodora Astaroth, is now near the pond with Kappa watching over him.¡± ¡°Yeah, thanks for your hard work, Tsura.¡± I patted her head, and she smiled happily. ¡°No, Riku-sama. I am happy to do this.¡± I pulled my hand away as Tsura bowed her head. She then walked away, with Aotabo following from behind. I looked at them and walked away with my arms crossed inside my Kimono. However, I stopped when I felt my Kimono being pulled from behind. ¡°Hey¡­¡± I looked back and saw Ophis tugging my Kimono. ¡°Oh¡­ what¡¯s wrong? I thought you were going with the crowd?¡± Ophis shook her head at my words. ¡°Silence. I want to sleep.¡± Ah, I see. The youkai were rowdy bunches, so it was noisy here. Should I take him to that place? Well, there was nothing there, so I guess it would be okay. ¡°I can¡¯t take you to the dimensional gap now, but¡­ let me show you a place where you can get your silence.¡± Ophis nodded her head, ¡°I don¡¯t mind.¡± After getting confirmation from Ophis, I took her to the house that was located behind my mansion. It was the one that was surrounded by my old man¡¯s Fear. The house was far from the mansion, and with my old man¡¯s Fear, it became the quietest place in this city. It was still in the same state as when I visited it last time. However, the flowers had already fallen as it was now almost autumn. Ophis looked around curiously. She had noticed the barrier that surrounded this place. The rowdy shout of the youkai was still loud even from this place. However, as soon as we passed the barrier, the sound was gone. ¡°It¡¯s¡­ quiet,¡± Ophis muttered as she pressed her hand against the barrier. ¡°This is? The same power that you use but¡­ different?¡± She noticed the difference between my old man and my Fear. ¡°Yeah, it¡¯s my old man¡¯s. This area is quiet and got the silence that you wanted. Is it good enough for now?¡± ¡°Un.¡± Ophis nodded her head, ¡°I like this place.¡± ¡°Good. I will show you where you can sleep. I will ask Kejoro to bring a futon later.¡± Ophis nodded her head again, and then I took her inside the house. I took her to the room with the temple and added a layer of my barrier with Fear to make her comfortable enough. She noticed it again, as expected of a Dragon God. ¡°I like it here.¡± ¡°That¡¯s good. I still have something to do, so I will leave first.¡± ¡°Un. I will sleep.¡± She then made her way toward the small temple in the middle and leaned her back against it. She closed her eyes and fell asleep in just a few seconds. Looking at her like this, I couldn¡¯t see her as a Dragon God. She looked just like a little girl who wanted her home back. However, I shouldn¡¯t forget that Ophis was dangerous. She could destroy this world if she wanted to. Even Gods couldn¡¯t even kill her. Maybe we could only seal her if we worked together. I could hear a soft snore coming from Ophis. She really did fall asleep. I quietly walked out of the room and went to the pond that was located near the sakura tree in my mansion. For now, Ophis was still okay. I could make her a quiet barrier in the dimensional gap later. Maybe I could even make her stay for a few months. Her sense of time was jumbled because of how long she had lived. Waiting for a few months wouldn¡¯t be a problem. I could also ask for her cooperation in the clean-up operation. When I arrived at the pond, I saw Kappa sitting on top of the ice that covered Diodora Astaroth. He was sitting with his leg dangling around, and he looked bored. Diodora Astaroth looked mad and struggled around with his head. It was no use, though, as he couldn¡¯t even move inside Tsura¡¯s ice. ¡°Hey, Kappa! Good job.¡± I greeted Kappa, and he turned at me as his face brightened. ¡°Riku-sama.¡± ¡°I heard from Tsura that you are looking at him. Good job.¡± ¡°No, it¡¯s not a problem. Tsura said that she would give me Ohagi for this.¡± ¡°Oh, then it¡¯s good. You can leave now. I will take care of him.¡± ¡°Yes.¡± Kappa then ran toward the mansion; he was headed to the kitchen. I then stood in front of Diodora Astaroth as he glared at me. ¡°Yo, how are you?¡± ¡°Youkai!!¡± He growled. ¡°I will kill you! My brother will kill you!¡± ¡°Haa?!¡± I glared back at him while putting on an act as if I didn¡¯t hear him, ¡°What did you say? Did I just hear you trying to intimidate me, the leader of the East Youkai Faction? What will happen if Satan hears this?¡± Diodora scoffed, ¡°Of course, they will kill you! I am Ajuka Beelzebub little brother after all!¡± His face was irritating. It looked punchable, so I punched him once. Smash! His head was smashed against the ice as I punched him. Blood ticked out from the wound on his head. He looked miserable, but I didn¡¯t care. ¡°Oh~ I am afraid! I just punched Ajuka¡¯s little brother! Save me, Ophis~¡± I acted scared as my body squirmed around. I glanced at Diodora Astaroth, but I found out that he had fainted in just one hit. ¡°Tsk! He could only mention his brother when he¡¯s cornered.¡± But well, I could use this as a chance to make Sirzech and Ajuka owe me. ¡°Well, let¡¯s go to the Underworld then.¡± RaizarP Author Here~ More than 60 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 176 – Yo, I have a terrorist with me! I teleported to Underworld; more specifically, I teleported to Gremory¡¯s Mansion with the encased Diodora Astaroth. As soon as I had arrived, the first thing that I did was to find Sirzechs. However, he was not in this territory. Maybe he was called for a meeting of Satan because a lot of devils had gone missing because they had been summoned by Rizevim earlier. The situation must be really confusing for them, especially because Diodora had gone missing too. As I didn¡¯t even try to hide my presence, I could feel Rias¡¯ and Issei¡¯s approaching me, who stood in front of the entrance of their mansion. Soon, I saw the two people walking toward me from inside the mansion. Rias seemed to be surprised when she saw Diodora, who was encased in ace beside me. She quickened her pace and opened the gate. ¡°Why does Diodora getting encased in ice?¡± She asked me calmly as she glanced over at Diodora. Hmm¡­ she was not raging or anything. Issei was also just looking curiously while looking at Diodora Astaroth. ¡°Buchou, do you know this guy?¡± He seemed to ignore me as he asked Rias. Rias crossed her arm and looked at Issei, ¡°He¡¯s Diodora Astaroth, Ajuka-sama''s little brother.¡± ¡°What?! Then why does he encased in ice?¡± ¡°That¡¯s what I wanted to ask this guy.¡± Rias then glared at me, ¡°So can you answer me?¡± ¡°Hmm¡­¡± I mumbled a little, ¡°Unfortunately, I can¡¯t tell you yet. But, if you are interested in the answer, you can tell me where Sirzechs is and tag along.¡± ¡°Huh?¡± Rias let out a confused voice, ¡°You wanted to meet my brother?¡± ¡°Yup, there is a little trouble with our agreement, so¡­ I wanted to have a talk with him again.¡± ¡°Agreement¡­¡± Rias muttered quietly as she glanced at Diodora. She then held her head and sighed tiredly. She gestured for Issei to stay by her side and then looked at me, ¡°My brother is still in the meeting of Satans. I think he will stay until tomorrow, depending on how the meeting goes.¡± Tomorrow? I don¡¯t have time for that. The traitor, Euclid, would get time to get away after he got the news about Rizevim¡¯s death. Not only that, the god such as Thanatos, who helped Rizevim in the dark, would make his move too. However, Thanatos wouldn¡¯t be able to move openly, as he was a god and was different from Euclid, who was a Devil. ¡°Do you know the location of the meeting?¡± I asked Rias with a sense of urgency in my tone. ¡°Hmm¡­ why should I tell you?¡± Rias smirked at me, ¡°I mean, you suddenly appeared in front of my mansion. When in Kuoh, you didn¡¯t even help me and even made me driven out of the academy. Not only that, Koneko even leave my peerage because of you. So¡­ why do you think I will help you this time?¡± That was reasonable. I didn¡¯t help her and even made her get kicked out of the Kuoh Academy. It was actually her own fault, so I didn¡¯t think too much about it. About Shirone, though, it was also her fault. So what did I do wrong? This was a dire situation where I needed to move fast to get rid of the Khaos Brigade. I thought she had matured. No, she had indeed matured and became even smarter than before. But, she still harbored some hate for me. ¡°Hey.¡± My tone has lowered a notch. ¡°I don¡¯t care if you hate me or something. But¡­¡± I began to oppress her with Senjutsu a little, and her body flinched because of that. Issei had taken out his Boosted Gear and lowered his stance too. ¡°¡­I don¡¯t have a lot of time right now. Do you know that I only find Sirzechs to talk about something important? Just tell me where he is, and I can always ask other people to teleport me there.¡± ¡°Ugh!¡± She glared at me as Issei jumped in front of her. ¡°Buchou! Are you okay?¡± I pulled my Senjutsu back and looked at her again. ¡°Just tell me where Sirzechs is. I am tired after I killed the biggest terrorist leader, so don¡¯t make my life harder by acting like that. Put your hate for me away for a little, and you will be able to become a splendid leader of your house.¡± ¡°Guh¡­ well.¡± Rias took a deep breath and looked at me. ¡°Fine, I will take you there.¡± ¡°Buchou¡­ are you really okay?¡± Issei asked worriedly. Rias raised her hand at him and put on a reasurring smile, ¡°I am okay. He didn¡¯t do anything to me.¡± ¡°If that¡¯s the case¡­¡± Issei then looked at me and pointed his index finger at me. ¡°I will also tag along! I won¡¯t let you be with buchou and bully her when I am not there!¡± ¡°I don¡¯t mind, just teleport to Sirzechs location right now. Along with this guy.¡± I pointed my thumb at Diodora Astaroth. He still fainted, and there was no sign of him waking up. ¡°Fine¡­ I will teleport you there.¡± As she said that, a red magic circle appeared under our feet. We then got teleported in front of a mansion in the middle of nowhere. Inside the mansion, I felt a lot of strong energy and recognized some of them. Sirzechs, Serafall, even Diehauser was here. Without waiting for anything more, I carried Diodora Astaroth over my shoulder and used my Fear. ¡°Thanks, you can go back now.¡± I left those messages to Rias and disappeared from her sight. ¡°Wha?!¡± Issei was surprised and shouted; he looked around to find me, but I had already walked inside the mansion. Some of the devils who wore maid costumes had hurriedly exited the mansion. Maybe someone had felt Rias¡¯ energy and ordered them to greet her? Well, it made me easier to enter the mansion tho. Diehauser was standing near the door with crossed arms. He had his guard up. From his position, I could somehow guess that he was acting as a guard of this meeting between Satans. I felt Sirzechs energy from the second floor, so I made my way to that room. There were four energies in the room in front of me. They were Satans, and Ajuka Beelzebub was certainly inside too. I canceled my Fear and opened the door nonchalantly as I shouted, ¡°Yo! I have a terrorist with me! Care to deal with him?¡± The four Satans¡¯ attention immediately turned to me, and their surprised faces were a sight to behold. RaizarP Author Here~ More than 60 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 177 – Compensation Ajuka immediately stood up and extended his hand toward me. Demonic energy began to gather around his hand as he was about to attack me as soon as he saw Diodora on my shoulder, being encased in ice. I had prepared myself and used Telos Karma to make his attack miss me, but there was suddenly an influx of demonic energy as Ajuka furrowed his eyebrows. Without even thinking hard, I knew what he did. He used Kankara Formula, his specialized move. That was interesting. Kankara Formula was predicting how I moved, but Telos Karma changed that possibility. Which one was stronger? I threw the encased Diodora Astaroth to Serafall without saying anything and took out Nenekirimaru. ¡°E-eh!¡± Serafall let out a yelp, but she caught Diodora with no problem. Surprisingly, Sirzechs didn¡¯t move from his seat as he just sipped his tea. ¡®Oi, stop him!¡¯ I sent a signal with my eyes, but Sirzechs ignored me. As I looked back at Ajuka, the energy in his hand had already gathered and was ready to fire at me. ¡°What did you do to my little brother?¡± He asked me seriously. I shrugged my shoulders, ¡°As I¡¯ve said earlier¡­ I got a terrorist with me.¡± ¡°Again¡­ what do you mean by a terrorist?¡± Oh, I forgot. Diodora was too careful to hide his move, and Ajuka was too busy to watch over Diodora. I now know where the problem was, but it would take a long time to explain. I turned to Sirzehcs. ¡°Sirzechs, it¡¯s time for you to speak.¡± ¡°Hmm? What do you mean?¡± He was still acting oblivious. This guy, was he really serious about this? Serafall was still looking around the ice and trying to find a way to melt it, but she was confused as she stroked her chin. The ice was not magic after all; that was why she was confused. Back to Sirzechs again, I calmly said. ¡°This guy.¡± I pointed at Diodora Astaroth, ¡°Was there, in the Vampire world, with Rizevim Lucifer and the other old devil.¡± With the information that I just told them, even Sirzechs stopped moving, and Ajuka¡¯s demonic energy was dispersed. ¡°Are you serious?¡± ¡°Yeah, ask Azazel if you didn¡¯t believe me,¡± I spoke seriously and approached Diodora Astaroth, patting the ice lightly. The situation had calmed down a little, and Ajuka lowered his hand. Thankfully he was able to be talked to, unlike some devils. ¡°Azazel and I went to the Vampire World earlier. Our goal was to save a certain vampire from being exploited by the Khaos Brigade. My old man was the one who managed to find the information about this vampire.¡± I walked toward the table where they sat. The other Satan, Falbium Asmodeus, was sitting with his arm crossed without even glancing at me. Sirzechs made a chair for me and put it between his and Serafall¡¯s. I sat down, and they sat down too. Serafall was still curious about the ice and looked at me with shining eyes. ¡°Should I explain all things first?¡± I asked them, and they nodded their heads. ¡°Well then¡­¡± I began to explain how I went to the Vampire World with Azazel and Vali¡¯s team. I also told them about how I found out that Rizevim was there, planning something with Marius Tepes. Not only that, but I also told them about how I fought Rizevim and his attempt to summon the old devils, and Diodora Astaroth was among them. I purposely let Ophis hidden from them. It would be foolish of me if I told them about Ophis. But I did tell them about Valerie Tepes, who had now in my mansion for some reason. She was really comfortable with my subordinates that she followed me back to the mansion. I thought that she was with Azazel, but then¡­ I found her energy in my mansion when I was showing Ophis her place at that time. My story ended with me killing Rizevim. The Satans were surprised, especially Sirzechs and Ajuka, who knew Rizevim¡¯s strength rivaling them. ¡°I see now,¡± Ajuka stated calmly. ¡°I apologize for my brother¡¯s behavior. Also, I thank you for not killing him. I will execute him myself.¡± He was able to make a rational decision as a leader, which was good for me. I knew a bit about his personality; that was why I chose to get into his good side by bringing Diodora intact. ¡°Good. If you say that you will take revenge for him, I have no other choice but to fight you. I¡¯m glad that such a thing could be avoided.¡± I hadn¡¯t recovered all my strength yet, so it was good that he didn¡¯t lash out at me. ¡°No.¡± Ajuka smiled bitterly, ¡°I understand that Khaos Brigade is a terrorist organization, and the Old Satan Faction is our enemy too. So¡­ I can¡¯t punish you for capturing a terrorist. Even though that terrorist is my little brother.¡± ¡°I see. Even I will not forgive my subordinate if they choose to betray me. That¡¯s reasonable, I guess¡­¡± ¡°Now I see that we have no need to continue this meeting,¡± Sirzechs said seriously. Falbium nodded his head, and Serafall exclaimed. ¡°I guess so! We now know where the missing devils were! They are all dead!¡± ¡°Yes. This meeting is over then?¡± Oh, so that was why they held the meeting? Rizevim suddenly summoned a large number of devils from Underworld who were part of the Old Satan Faction. That was why the Satans were holding this meeting, as the devils that were on their watch list suddenly disappeared from the Underworld. ¡°Wait.¡± Ajuka stopped them, ¡°We still have one thing that we need to talk about.¡± He then looked at me, and now the Satans¡¯ attention was on me. ¡°Oh, right.¡± Said Sirzechs. ¡°I almost forget about it!¡± Serafall shouted. ¡°Un.¡± Falbium, as usual, just nodded his head. ¡°Then there is no problem.¡± Ajuka spoke seriously. ¡°What do you want as compensation?¡± So that was it? Compensation for causing trouble. ¡®What should I ask?¡¯ I thought as a grin appeared on my face. RaizarP Author Here~ More than 60 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks for the new Squad Leader!! - James31292 Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 178 – Dragging the Devils along There were a lot of things that I could ask from the devils at this time. However, all of them were only temporary measures or something that I could get easily in the future. They had a lot of good things for sure, such as phoenix tears, or phoenix tears¡­ wait. Come to think of it, I only asked for phoenix tears from them. Sirzechs had a lot to owe me, and Ajuka certainly also owed me one after this incident. Serafall¡­ she seemed to be interested in me as she looked at me with shining eyes since early. ¡°You really killed Rizevim? Is there any proof of that?¡± Asked Serafall curiously. ¡°Hmm, yes. I am strong after all.¡± I winked at Serafall, and she laughed. ¡°Hahahaha, sure. You are funny! That¡¯s why So-chan always talks about you.¡± ¡°Oh? What kind of talk things did she tell you about me.¡± ¡°A lot! Mainly about how much she hates you, though!¡± We were kind of ignoring the other three Satans as we talked. ¡°Kuhum¨C!¡± Ajuka faked a cough and stared at me. ¡°What kind of compensation that you want? We are still in the middle of a meeting, don¡¯t talk about a private thing.¡± ¡°Oh! Sorry about that! I am curious about Ri-kun, you know?¡± Answered Serafall energetically. She scratched her neck as she smiled wryly at Ajuka. With a stoic expression, Ajuka just nodded his head a little and asked again. ¡°So? What kind of compensation that you want?¡± I didn¡¯t waste my time by talking with Serafall. I had been thinking about what I wanted as compensation from the devils. First, I could ask for a batch of phoenix tears again in case my subordinates got injured from battle. But I had two phoenix tears right now, and I didn¡¯t really need it as Youkai could recover easily. Second, I could also ask for Cleria and her son, Yaemasa. However, that was unnecessary as she had decided to live with Masaomi, and Diehauser had allowed her after knowing Masaomi was my subordinate. Although he didn¡¯t say it clearly, the reason why he left her with me was clear. I was not an idiot who couldn¡¯t guess what he thought when it was as clear as that. Third, this was what I wanted the most right now. The peace conference was held in a few days. At that moment, there would be held a friendly competition. ¡°I want devils to join the friendly competition between the Heaven Faction and East Youkai Faction. The fallen angels had confirmed their participation, so bring all your strongest fighters to the peace conference.¡± ¡°Oh, the friendly competition.¡± Exclaimed Sirzechs. ¡°Hmm? Do you know anything about that, Sirzechs?¡± Asked Ajuka. ¡°Yeah, Riku had mentioned it before. At first, I was thinking of bringing along some devils to participate in the friendly competition but¡­¡± Sirzechs paused a little and looked at me. ¡°It seems right now he¡¯s serious about asking us to bring all of our strongest fighters to the friendly competition.¡± ¡°So he has another aim for asking us?¡± Asked Ajuka as he narrowed his gaze at me. ¡°Hahaha, I am just a youkai; how could I think of something complicated.¡± I shrugged my shoulder and laughed. ¡°The trickiest youkai, I might add.¡± Added Sirzechs with a sly smile. ¡°Well, I will not deny that.¡± I smiled back at Sirzechs. ¡°Also, yes. I have a different plan for asking you to get your strongest fighter ready. As compensation for making me fighting hard¡­¡± I paused a little as I saw Ajuka and Sirzech flinched a little. They were anticipating my request. Even Serafall also turned serious. ¡°I will ask devils to participate in the clean-up operation of the Khaos Brigade. The enemy composes of stray devils, magicians, stray fallen angels, and some gods. I believe you guys will help me in this operation. As you guys have me to choose the compensation myself.¡± ¡°See? He¡¯s the trickiest youkai that I have ever met. That¡¯s including Nurarihyon.¡± Said Sirzechs as he pointed his finger at me. ¡°Yeah, he is. As expected of a boy who can cause So-chan a lot of troubles!¡± ¡°I will take that as a compliment.¡± I smiled and crossed my arms. ¡°So, Sirzechs. Can I count on you for that? I believe you want to exterminate the remaining stray by yourself.¡± ¡°That¡¯s very thoughtful of you.¡± He said with a small smile. ¡°Personally, I agree to help you. How about you guys?¡± I looked around to see their reactions. Ajuka stroked his chin. Serafall was smiling and looked back at me. For Falbium¡­ I didn¡¯t know what he thought inside his head; he was so mysterious. The silence descended once again, then Serafall broke the silence by raising her hand. ¡°I will help him. After all, he has done a lot for us by destroying the leaders of the Old Satan Faction, which is the source of our headaches for a long time now.¡± ¡°I agree as well. We can use this chance to wipe them out.¡± Added Ajuka. Falbium nodded his head and muttered, ¡°I agree.¡± ¡°Then the answer is obvious.¡± Sirzechs nodded his head. He then looked at me. ¡°We will participate. Thanks for everything before though.¡± ¡°No problem.¡± I stood up as my business here was done, ¡°I will go now. I have something that needs to be done. I will leave the matter of Diodora Astaroth in your hand.¡± Sirzechs stood up and nodded his head. ¡°Sure. See you in a few days.¡± ¡°Yeah, see you in a few days.¡± I exited the meeting room and then went to Diehauser, who stood near the entrance. ¡°Yo! We meet again!¡± He turned over, seemingly surprised by my appearance. ¡°Nura Riku?¡± ¡°Yeah, it¡¯s me. Do you have a minute? I need to talk about something.¡± ¡°Hmm? I still need to stay here though. The Satans still have a meeting upstairs¡­¡± He then looked at me suspiciously. ¡°Or did you sneak in here to disturb the meeting? I shook my head, ¡°No, why should I disturb them? I have talked to them earlier, and they don¡¯t mind if you leave your post for a while.¡± ¡°Ah, as expected. You have sneaked in.¡± This guy didn¡¯t listen to me. It was true that I sneaked in, though, but that didn¡¯t mean that I disturbed their meeting. ¡°So, have a minute?¡± ¡°Well, if the Satans already give their permission then¡­ sure.¡± RaizarP Author Here~ More than 60 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks for the new Squad Leader! - TOLUWANIMI D AKINBINU - Crash Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 179 – Just a little chat RaizarP Yo! I uploaded 2 new novels to join WSA in webnovel. I will be glad if you take a loot at it, because I mass-uploaded it today! Both are with Weak to Strong MC, unlike the usual Overpowered that I made The link is here -> 5 Star Review Appreciated! And give me power stone! Diehauser and I went outside the mansion and sat on the bench in the garden. ¡°What do you want to talk about?¡± Asked Diehauser curiously. Before answering his question, I put up a barrier to make us completely soundproofed. ¡°It¡¯s about Cleria¡­¡± As soon as I mentioned her, Diehauser smiled warmly. ¡°About her?¡± His tone was like an older brother who was worried about his little sister. He held no animosity toward me even though I mentioned Cleria casually. Well, deep inside him, maybe he knew that Cleria should¡¯ve been able to live without any worry if she stayed in my mansion. Maybe he had already planned this once he heard that Masaomi was staying in my mansion as my subordinate. ¡°¡­Will you allow her to stay in my mansion? Also, I need to tell you something about Yaemasa.¡± I said seriously, and Diehauser furrowed his brow. ¡°I can allow her, but¡­ What is this about Yaemasa?¡± I was bad at things like this. Telling someone that his nephew had a big spear with a lot of holy energy was¡­ surely unusual especially when that big spear could harm the boy because he was half-devil. But, if he stayed in my mansion, I could at least use Telos Karma to stop the possibility of the True Longinus being awakened and wretched the boy¡¯s soul. ¡°He has Holy Longinus¡­ More specifically, the True Longinus next wielder is Yaemasa. But, you know his situation.¡± Diehauser¡¯s face paled a little, but he nodded his head. ¡°¡­I see.¡± He understood with just a few words. Should I be happy with that? His face was pale, clearly worried about Yaemasa, his nephew. ¡°So that¡¯s the situation¡­ He¡¯s a half-devil, so his soul will be ripped if the True Longinus awakened, as he¡¯s vulnerable to holy energy.¡± Muttered Diehauser. ¡°Yeah, that¡¯s the case. I will ask Michael to seal the True Longinus and use my Sacred Gear to keep the possibility of him awakening the True Longinus as low as possible. But¡­ you know, a possibility is still a possibility.¡± ¡°I know about that.¡± Answered Diehauser. ¡°Those with Senjutsu can detect the energy from the True Longinus. So there is a chance he will be targeted or even exploited by devils, right?¡± ¡°Yeah, so I have a little proposal. Let Yaemasa and Cleria stay in my mansion until we exterminate the rest of the Khaos Brigade. The operation to clean them up will be started after the peace conference.¡± ¡°I see¡­ Is there any way for me to help?¡± Diehasuer smiled wryly as he looked at me. He was really a man of conviction; he was even willing to help. But that was enough. I had no intention to receive his help¡­ for now. He would naturally be included among the strongest fighters that Satans brought to the peace conference to fight in the friendly competition. As the one who had the peerage that currently stood at the top of the others in the rating games, Diehauser was a valuable asset to be included in the friendly tournament. That was the chance for devils to show off their powers, and naturally, they would bring along their strongest fighters even if I didn¡¯t request it earlier. However, I needed to make sure that they brought their strongest fighter, as I wanted to gain my peace as soon as possible. After dealing with the Khaos Brigade, I would lay around in my mansion without caring what the other factions thought and just sleep all day while pulling a prank or two. That was my goal. But now, that goal was nowhere to be seen. I was too busy. Then, I had decided. Diehauser had offered me his help, so the answer was natural. I looked at him with a big grin. ¡°Then, can you kill Trihexa and Great Red for me? That will be a great help.¡± ¡°No, that¡¯s just asking me to die. Did you actually ask that?¡± Answered Diehauser without changing his serious expression. What a bummer. That would solve a lot of problems, though. As when Great Red died, Ophis would be willing to help me if I coax her that I was the one who liberated the dimensional gap for her. ¡°Hahahaha. I was just joking. Don¡¯t take it too seriously.¡± I laughed it off, but Diehauser was giving me a skeptical look. ¡°I am being serious here. Is there anything that I can help you with? Be it money or power; I will help you once. As you know¡­ I owe you something from saving my nephew.¡± ¡°Hmm, well. I can¡¯t think of anything right now, so I will ask you someday.¡± ¡°Well that¡¯s fine.¡± Diehauser rose up from his seat. ¡°I will help you once someday.¡± ¡°Sure.¡± I also stood up, and we exchanged looks for a moment. ¡°I will be counting on you at that time.¡± ¡°You can count on me. Also, I will be counting on you for looking after Cleria and her son.¡± ¡°Don¡¯t worry. I will keep her safe. Not only that, but Masaomi is also there with her.¡± ¡°Hahahaha. That¡¯s true. I wanted to meet him someday.¡± ¡°Feel free to visit my mansion.¡± As I said that, I dismissed the barrier around us. Without saying another word, Diehauser walked away to go back to his spot. I also quietly created a magic circle under my feet to teleport back to my mansion. The location that I chose was in my backyard, in front of the pond. ¡°Welcome back, Riku-sama.¡± As I appeared in my backyard, I was greeted by Masaomi, who held his son in his arm, and Cleria, who stood beside them. ¡°Ou! I am back.¡± I greeted them back and looked at Cleria. ¡°Also, I had talked with Diehauser. He will allow you to stay in this mansion for a while.¡± ¡°Is that so? I am glad.¡± Replied Cleria. ¡°Thank you very much for everything.¡± ¡°Hahahaha. It¡¯s not a problem at all.¡± After chatting with them for a while and quietly using my Telos Karma to keep True Longinus from being awakened, I walked away and entered my room to sleep. RaizarP Author Here~ More than 60 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 180 – Surgery RaizarP Yo! I uploaded 2 new novels to join WSA in webnovel. I will be glad if you take a loot at it, because I mass-uploaded it today! Both are with Weak to Strong MC, unlike the usual Overpowered that I made The link is here -> 5 Star Review Appreciated! And give me power stone! When I woke up the next day, I was greeted by Kejoro, who sat outside of my room in Seiza. ¡°Good morning, Riku-sama.¡± ¡°Kejoro¡­? How long have I been asleep?¡± I asked her as I raised my body. I was so exhausted yesterday that I hit my bed without even finishing the last thing I should do, dealing with Walburga and absorbing the Incinerate Anthem. I rose from my bed and noticed that my clothes were in disarray. Taking a second to fix it, I then crossed my arms and looked at Kejoro. ¡°So, do you need something from me?¡± I asked her with a faint smile. ¡°Yes. Actually, there is something that the others want to request to Riku-sama.¡± Answered Kejoro. ¡°What is it?¡± The youkai had almost never asked anything from me. They were content with what they got, and they certainly would have never asked for something useless. Usually, some of them asked for a fight, while the others asked for Sake or something. But I think I knew what they wanted this time. ¡°Yes. It seems that most of them were having a bet when Tsuchigumo had a fight with Vali Lucifer and Crom Cruach. And now, after getting a lot of Sake from youkai under Hagoromo Gitsune¡¯s Hyakki Yakkou, they all want to hold a big party. It also serves as a party for destroying our enemy.¡± As I had expected. They all wanted some party, huh? I grinned at Kejoro. ¡°Give them what they want. Also, do you know where Shirone is?¡± ¡°Shirone? I believe she¡¯s with Magari and Kuroka-dono right now.¡± ¡°I see, thanks.¡± After getting confirmation from Kejoro, I spread my Senjutsu to find Shirone. Finding her was easy; I found her near the entrance, with Yaemasa and the other youkai. I walked out of my room, and Kejoro bowed her head to the floor. Right now, what I needed to do was clear. I should take the Incinerate Anthem from Walburga¡¯s body. Killing her was the fastest way, but then I could keep her alive to find the information about the hideout that the magicians used to hide. I now stood in front of my mansion. Shirone was sitting on the terrace while looking at Yaemasa and the other small youkai. ¡°Yo, what are you doing?¡± I asked her from behind. Startled, Shirone¡¯s ears perked up as she turned around. ¡°Riku-senpai¡­¡± she muttered. ¡°You surprised me.¡± ¡°My bad. It seems you still need a lot of training.¡± Shirone narrowed her eyes at me. ¡°No one will be able to sense you even if they spread their Senjutsu, Riku-senpai.¡± ¡°Are you sure? I didn¡¯t even use my Fear, you know?¡± I jokingly said, causing Shirone furrowed her eyebrows even further. ¡°Liar.¡± ¡°No, I am not. You really need some extra training.¡± ¡°I see¡­¡± Muttered Shirone. Her expression became normal again; it was her usual stoic expression with a faint smile. ¡°So what do you want from me, Riku-senpai? Aside from the time when you attended Kuoh Academy, you rarely find me unless you want something. And that fact was applied to anyone that even Kuroka nee-sama had some trouble finding you.¡± ¡°Yeah. Actually, where did you put Walburga? You know, that magician? I couldn¡¯t even find her with my Senjutsu.¡± ¡°Oh, her?¡± Shirone rose up and turned around. ¡°Let me take you to her. She¡¯s inside Magari¡¯s Barrier.¡± Shirone then began to walk toward Magari¡¯s residence right beside our mansion. It was still part of my mansion, but she had a special house separated from the main building. Magari had a separated house because of her position. She was the one who put the barrier around this mansion area, so that was why she didn¡¯t go out of the mansion unless it was really necessary. There were a lot of Magical Formations surrounding Magari¡¯s house. When I arrived right in front of it, I was a bit amazed by the scale and the complexity of the barrier. Combined with my old man¡¯s Fear, no one would be able to find this mansion. Unless an extraordinary thing happened like what Azazel did, he was freaking detecting the energy of a person who teleported with me to find my mansion. Not only that, there was another barrier that blocked Senjutsu in the back area of her house. ¡®So that¡¯s where Walburga is?¡¯ I had been here a few years ago when I was still in training with Kuroka. However, as soon as I was sent to Kuoh, I never stepped into this place again. ¡°Oh, you are here.¡± A voice came from beyond the door, and then the door was opened, revealing Magari walking with her four legs. ¡°Magari.¡± I called out to her, and her mouth curved into a smile. ¡°The magician is in the back. Do you need my assistance again?¡± She asked with a knowing tone. That was what I intended from the start. I was about to ask for her assistance because I would be vulnerable when I absorbed the Incinerate Anthem. I would need to use all my strength, and it was the time to push Telos Karma to the limit. I hope to achieve Balance Breaker by absorbing Incinerate Anthem. So I nodded my head to Magari. ¡°Yeah, I am counting on you.¡± ¡°Well then, come inside. Shirone, you are helping too.¡± Shirone nodded her head, ¡°Un. I will heal Riku-Senpai if he¡¯s injured.¡± ¡°Good.¡± Satisfied, Magari nodded and turned around. I followed her inside the house, and she took us to a room that looked like a warehouse. A woman in magician''s clothes was squirming around the ground with her hands tied behind her body with a magic-imbued rope and her mouth blocked by a tape. She was Walburga. ¡°Hmmmnn!! Hmnn!!!¡± She tried to say something, but no sound came out as her mouth was blocked. ¡°Well then,¡± I muttered and took out Nenekirimaru. Seeing the sword in my hand, Walbura¡¯s eyes widened, and she tried her best to crawl away from me. ¡°Let¡¯s take the Sacred Gear out of her body.¡± I said with a grin befitting the lord of pandemonium. RaizarP Author Here~ More than 60 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 181 – Absorbing Incinerate Anthem RaizarP Yo! I uploaded 2 new novels to join WSA in webnovel. I will be glad if you take a loot at it, because I mass-uploaded it today! Both are with Weak to Strong MC, unlike the usual Overpowered that I made The link is here -> 5 Star Review Appreciated! And give me power stone! First of all, Magari closed the warehouse door after we entered it. She then created blue fires that lit the dark warehouse. Walburga was now sitting with her back leaned against the wall as she glared at us. ¡°Uhhh!! Grrrr!!¡± She growled in order to intimidate us. She couldn¡¯t talk, so her only option was to growl. ¡°What? You think your silly growl will intimidate me?¡± My eyes flashed a strange golden light as I crouched in front of Walburga. She didn¡¯t understand how to intimidate the others, so I thought of giving her an example. I just smiled warmly at her, but my eyes were narrowed dangerously. My hand moved and grabbed her chin, forcing her to stare directly at my eyes. Her body was trembling; she was afraid. It only took those small steps to intimidate your enemy. ¡°Growling at your enemy only showed them that you are desperate,¡± I said slowly. She tried to throw her face away, but I kept her head in place. ¡°Well, let me tell you what will happen next.¡± She was waiting for me to continue, but she still glanced away from me. With a tone lower than usual, I told her. ¡°First, the sword in my right hand will pierce your heart. You will die from that. Next, I will take Incinerate Anthem out of your body, will make your soul get destroyed in the process.¡± I paused a little as Walburga glared at me dangerously. Her glare itself could kill people who were not strong enough; it contained her hate toward me. ¡°When the Incinerate Anthem leaves your body, I will then absorb it. Is there any question?¡± ¡°Hmm!! Grrr! Hmuuuu!!!¡± ¡°Oh? I forgot about this.¡± I peel the duck tape off Walburga¡¯s mouth. Screech¨C! As soon as the duck tape peeled off, she began to curse at me. ¡°Haa! Fuck you and your plan! Do you think I will go down easily, huh?!¡± Her tone was similar to those of a delinquent. There was not even a shred of femininity. Maybe she threw them away after I threatened her earlier. She was still full of energy even though she was tied in this place for a day. But I didn¡¯t like her cursing at me. ¡°Shirone, duck tape,¡± I called out to Shirone. ¡°Un.¡± She answered with a short confirmation. Then, she took out a duck tape from her pocket and threw it at me. I didn¡¯t know that she had it; I only said that to act cool. ¡°You know, if I hear another curse, I will not only ducktape your mouth, but your eyes too. It will make you unable to close your eyes, and you will be able to see the process of your body being ripped off.¡± I raised the duck tape in front of her face, and it was effective. Walburga¡¯s body jolted a little. ¡°Hooo¨C I dare you to try that, fucker!¡± She was still putting on a brave front. Without saying anything again, I taped her mouth and her eyes to keep them open. She tried to fight me even in her tied form. ¡°I told you that I would tape your eyes too. It¡¯s your fault.¡± I then grabbed her collar and dragged her to the middle of the warehouse. ¡°Magari, hold her,¡± I told Magari, and she nodded her head. Then a light chain shot out from her body, binding Walburga¡¯s limbs in four directions. Walburga was still trying to fight by moving her body around, but it was futile. As soon as her limbs were chained, I heard Walburga chanting something with her taped mouth. I immediately put my sword near her neck after slashing the magic energy that formed around her throat. ¡°Do that again, and my sword will separate your neck from your body.¡± ¡°Ngghh!! Ghhh!¡± I couldn¡¯t care less again. Did I really need her? There were two other Magicians that I knew, so as expected, Walburga was useless to me. But¡­ having Walburga alive was beneficial for me too. I could stand her cursing at me. However, I couldn¡¯t observe her all the time. What would happen if she betrayed me in the future? ¡°Riku-senpai¡­ Are you going to spare her?¡± Asked Shirone from behind. She may be noticed my hesitation. I glanced at Shirone and smiled at her. ¡°Nah, no.¡± I answered her. Being betrayed was the last thing that I wanted. That was why I arrived at a conclusion. ¡°I will just kill her.¡± Magicians were not to be trusted. As a former street magician myself, although I failed horribly, I knew that fact better than anyone. They were liars, even more so the magicians in this world. Without a contract, they would certainly betray us. ¡°So that¡¯s the conclusion, magician.¡± I glared at Walburga. ¡°I will kill you because I can¡¯t trust you.¡± Slowly, I pushed my sword toward Walburga¡¯s stomach. ¡°Hnnnn!!!!¡± She let out a shriek as she squirmed around. ¡°Magari!¡± I shouted at her, then a lot of chains shot out to bind Walburga¡¯s body. Incinerate Anthem would leave the host¡¯s body when they died. I maximize the possibility that I would be the best host to house the Incinerate Anthem after Walburga died. After everything was in order, I slashed Walburga¡¯s neck in one swing. Her head fell to the ground, and then a ball of purple flame shot out from her dead body. This was Incinerate Anthem¡¯s true form. It bounced a little before it stopped, and then it went inside my body. My plan to maximize my compatibility with Incinerate Anthem was a success. However, I couldn¡¯t rest easy yet. The pain followed immediately. ¡°Arrggg!!¡± It tore through my body; it was hot. The purple holy flame had made my body its host. Shirone ran toward me and began to heal me with Senjutsu. Magari placed a seal around us and helped Shirone to heal me. The pain subsided a little. A few minutes had passed, and I was now used to the pain. Sweat poured out from my body because of how hot it was. Then, it suddenly cooled down as I felt Incinerate Anthem fully merge with my body. My mouth curled into a grin. ¡°I did it.¡± Now I got the second Longinus, and I felt like I could use Balance Breaker already. ¡°Thanks, Magari, Shirone.¡± I thanked both of them. ¡°Un, no problem.¡± Answered Shirone. ¡°Well, it¡¯s my duty. Go rest. I will clean the body for you.¡± ¡°Yeah, no,¡± I answered Magari and picked myself up. ¡°I think I need to try a new power that I got first.¡± RaizarP Author Here~ More than 60 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 182 – Testing Incinerate Anthem ¡°Shirone.¡± I called out to Shirone, and she looked at me while tilting her head. ¡°If anyone asks where I am, tell them that I am in a mountain.¡± ¡°What mountain?¡± Asked Shirone. ¡°The one behind Kuoh Academy. I turned that place into my training place.¡± ¡°Un, okay. I will tell Kuroka nee-sama about that.¡± ¡°Thanks.¡± I raised my hand at her and then teleported to the mountain behind Kuoh Academy. Spreading my senjutsu to feel whether there was anyone here, I found no one in particular. Even Sona and her peerage were not in Kuoh Academy. The Satans must¡¯ve called them to prepare for the friendly competition. Young Devils would be asked to come too, huh? That would be the best choice for them. From what I knew, even the Church was preparing their best fighter as well as their new exorcists to join the friendly competition. The ones who had no such thing were us, youkai. There was no young youkai in my Hyakki Yakkou. Only I was the part of the new generation. Well, enough of that. I put a barrier around the mountain so no one could enter. There were two things that I wanted to try. I felt like I had achieved Balance Breaker once I absorbed Incinerate Anthem earlier. So, I wanted to test it after trying Incinerate Anthem. If I remember correctly, Incinerate Anthem was a Holy Fire and was considered one of the Holy Relics. It was the Holy Cross that crucified Christ. This Longinus was an independent-Avatar type similar to Regulus Nemea, which was bound to Sairaorg. Now, the ability of the Incinerate Anthem was to control Holy Fire that could slay Ultimate-class and even Satan with ease. This was good. I now had the Holy element to eliminate the rest of the Khaos Brigade as well as that sly Lucifuge who was still hiding in wherever he was right now. ¡°Well, let¡¯s try it.¡± I tried to call upon Incinerate Anthem¡¯s power as I raised my right hand. It was a bit hard to call it, but then I succeeded. A purple flame appeared from my palm and floated slowly. Finally, it formed a ball, and it moved following my command. I tried to make it shaped like a sword, and it complied. It formed a normal long sword-shaped fire. ¡°Woah, this is cool.¡± I played around with the fire a little. Incinerate Anthem was so convenient and could be shaped into anything. I now had a lot of ideas on how to utilize this Sacred Gear. But now, I should test something again. I called Nenekirimaru in my right hand and created the fire in my left hand. The experiment that I wanted to try was combining Incinerate Anthem with Nenekirimaru. ¡°Can I do it?¡± Nenekirimaru had a special characteristic that cut any supernatural power. While Incinerate Anthem was a holy fire that could take any form or be imbued to any weapons, I had no confidence whether it would work on Nenekirimaru or not. This was honestly a gamble. If it worked, then it would be the best. If it didn¡¯t work, I could try to imbue Incinerate Anthem to Garm. I had no expectation with Garm, as the sword was a Demon Sword. Maybe Incinerate Anthem would purify Garm and make it a holy sword? Who knows. Now I should concentrate on imbuing Incinerate Anthem to Nenekirimaru. I slowly brought my left hand near Nenekirimaru. Controlling the fire of Incinerate Anthem, I made it circling Nenekirimaru with care. Touching Nenekirimaru¡¯s blade was risky for now, so I tried to at least make it revolve around its blade. The fire followed my command, and it now revolved around Nenekirimaru¡¯s blade. Step one was good; now, into step two. I made a small fire again in my left hand and tried to imbue it into Nenekirimaru¡¯s blade. It slowly approached it, and when it made contact with Nenekirimaru¡¯s blade, it burst. ¡°Damn, so it¡¯s impossible after all?¡± I ruffled my hand and sat on the ground. I admired Nenekirimaru, which had purple fire revolving around it. It was beautiful. However, being beautiful was not enough. I was still in a sitting position as I raisedNenekirimaru above my head. Incinerate Anthem could burn Satan¡¯s level devil with no problem. It should be hot, but when I touched it, it was only warm. That was why I needed to test it. ¡°Tsuki Giri.¡± I swung Nenekirimaru down, and a crescent slash flew to the tree across from me. The usual blue slash was now purple while leaving a fire trail. My mouth gaped a little. I never thought that only adding Incinerate Anthem around the blade would have this effect. But, the slash was slower than the usual one, maybe because I was in a sitting position. Although it was slower than the usual one, it was still faster than Issei¡¯s dragon shot. The flying slash traveled to the tree and hit it in less than three seconds. When it made contact with the tree, it didn¡¯t cut it, but it engulfed the tree. Swoosh! In an instant, the tree was burnt down, leaving only ash. The power of Incinerate Anthem was stronger than I thought. Once again, I looked at the purple fire that danced around Nenekirimaru¡¯s blade. ¡°Nice! I did it!¡± With this, I shouldn¡¯t have any problems fighting Super Devil by myself without using Matoi. Incinerate Anthem itself was strong enough, and it didn¡¯t cost a lot of energy from me because it was sentient-avatar. Now, there was the last thing that I needed to do. I needed to test whether I could use Balance Breaker yet. No, I was confident that I could use it, but¡­ I didn¡¯t know the effect of Telos Karma Balance Breaker. There was nothing known to it. I should be prepared for the worst. ¡°Well, I won¡¯t know if I don¡¯t try.¡± Pulling myself up, I made Nenekirimaru disappear and took Incinerate Anthem back to my body. ¡°Let¡¯s just do this. I hope this Balance Breaker can be combined with Incinerate Anthem.¡± RaizarP Author Here~ More than 60 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 183 – Fixing the Aftermath ¡°How should I say it¡­ It¡¯s crazy¡­¡± I looked at my aftermath of using Balance Breaker. After making sure that I could use Incinerate Anthem with Nenekirimaru, I tried my Balance Breaker that was unlocked after I absorbed Incinerate Anthem. To be honest, I had no expectation of the Balance Breaker of Telos Karma. I thought it would create a world where I could freely control the possibility of things. However, it betrayed me in a good way. The Balance Breaker was crazy¡­ ¡°To think the Balance Breaker of Telos Karma and Incinerate Anthem will be combined.¡± Right, two Sacred Gear¡¯s Balance Breaker was combined to create a new one. With what happened earlier, I was now sure that the reason I couldn¡¯t use Telos Karma Balance Breaker was this. It guided me to get Incinerate Anthem first because the Balance Breaker turned out to be strong. I looked at the scenery in front of me once again. When I tested Garm a few days ago, a part of the mountain was destroyed, but it was quickly recovered by my barrier. However, the scale of destruction caused by my Balance Breaker this time was greater than that. A big crater, maybe around 200 meters, was made in front of me, spanning from me to the mountain. The trees around the crater were pulled out because of the shockwave. Not only that¡­ my barrier was destroyed, so this destruction would stay unless it was fixed manually. I couldn¡¯t fix it by myself, and it led me to this trouble. ¡°Fallen Angels will be able to fix it.¡± I muttered to myself and pulled out my phone. There was one guy who was indebted to me, and I should use that to ask for this favor. The phone beeped a few times before a cheerful voice greeted me. ¡°Heya~ What do you want from me, you brat?¡± His voice was as loud as usual. That perverted fallen angel must¡¯ve been glad that the favor that I needed was only this small. ¡°Hey, Azazel. Can you fix something for me?¡± ¡°Fix something? Sure! What is it?¡± Asked Azazel curiously with a tone mixed with excitement. Did he think that I wanted him to fix some weapon or something? I had some unusual stuff after all. ¡°Yeah, I want you to fix some land. There is a chance that ordinary humans will notice the supernatural existence if this is discovered. For now, I put a barrier to make it look like nothing is wrong with the area around the source of the problem.¡± ¡°Land? What happened?¡± Asked Azazel worriedly. ¡°Well, it¡¯s like this¡­¡± I then explained to him that I tried some new technique, but I couldn¡¯t judge its strength and ended up blowing the mountain as well as my barrier. Silence descended between us for a few seconds until it was broken by Azazel¡¯s laughter. ¡°Hahahahahaha. You did what?!¡± ¡°Don¡¯t laugh. It¡¯s my fault; I know that.¡± ¡°Yeah yeah. But what kind of technique can destroy your barrier on top of some land and mountain?¡± ¡°It¡¯s my trump card,¡± I answered him vaguely. Azazel seemed to catch what I implied as I could hear him snickering through the phone. ¡°Trump card, eh? Well, I won¡¯t pry. I will arrive personally in a minute, don¡¯t forget to put your barrier down so I can teleport to that place.¡± ¡°Yeah, I will be waiting.¡± *** A few minutes later, Azazel called me again, and I took down my barrier for a few seconds to allow him to teleport here. A magic circle appeared in front of me as soon as I gave him a sign, and two people appeared from it. One of them was Azazel himself, while the other was Le Fay Pendragon. I put up the barrier once again before greeting them. ¡°Yo, sorry to call you here.¡± ¡°No problem. It¡¯s not troubling me at all, but¡­¡± Azazel looked at the aftermath of my attack behind him. ¡°¡­ This is too much for me to fix. Thankfully, I bring Le Fay with me.¡± ¡°Yahoo~¡± Le Fay waved her hand to me energetically. ¡°We met again, youkai-kun!¡± ¡°Yeah. If I remember correctly, you are called Le Fay Pendragon?¡± ¡°Yes! That¡¯s me!¡± I nodded my head and pointed at the gouged Earth across from me. ¡°Can you fix that?¡± ¡°Hmm¡­¡± Le Fay turned to look at the destroyed ground. When she turned around, her skirt was dancing in the sky. ¡°I think I can do that much. But¡­ the fire over there.¡± She pointed at the burnt tree in the distance. The tree was still burning with a purple fire caused by Incinerate Anthem¡¯s attack. ¡°I can¡¯t extinguish that.¡± ¡°That¡¯s easy.¡± I had grasped the trick to controlling Incinerate Anthem. Even the fire that was not inside my body was easy to control as long as it was part of Incinerate Anthem. I extended my hand toward the fire, and it then disappeared instantly. ¡°Hoh?! Is that Holy Fire?¡± Azazel exclaimed. He turned to me. ¡°How can you use a Holy Fire that even the Angel couldn¡¯t?¡± ¡°About that. Remember the magician that I caught yesterday?¡± ¡°Oh, right. You caught Walburga.¡± Replied Le Fay. I nodded my head at her and raised my right hand. Slowly, a purple fire appeared on top of my palm. Azazel looked at what happened with interest. He was curious about it, but then he realized the identity of the purple fire. ¡°Is this Incinerate Anthem? You are really ridiculous¡­ A strong youkai who needs nothing to beat his opponents now holds 2 Longinus; what a joke. Who can defeat you now?¡± ¡°I can also use Balance Breaker,¡± I added, and Azazel could only smile wryly. ¡°Really ridiculous. I think no one can beat you now; even gods from mythology will have some trouble defeating you.¡± ¡°Well, I know that. Putting that aside, can you fix the destroyed earth now?¡± ¡°Sure~ I will work on it now!¡± Le Fay then turned to the destroyed Earth and extended his hand. A wand that looked like a broom appeared in her hand, and then magic circles followed suit. A lot of magic circles of various colors appeared in the sky. The next thing that happened was miraculous. The destroyed Earth began fixing itself slowly. It only took a round a minute that it turned back to normal. ¡°It¡¯s done!¡± Exclaimed Le Fay. ¡°Good job. Thank you for coming here.¡± ¡°Nah, it¡¯s nothing.¡± Answered Azazel. Why did he be the one who answered me? Well, it was no problem. I then looked at Le Fay. She had helped me this time. As a good person, I should at least offer her something. ¡°Want to have breakfast in my mansion?¡± And now it was still morning, so breakfast was good. ¡°Sure! I am famished after the work.¡± Azazel answered once again. I glared at him, and he smiled wryly. As they had agreed to have breakfast in my mansion, I then teleported back to my mansion with them. RaizarP Author Here~ More than 60 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 184 – Day of Peace Conference 1 A few days passed with me trying various things. In the morning, I would train Incinerate Anthem and my Balance Breaker. While in the night, the youkai would patrol and exterminate any stray devils or the former member of the Khaos Brigade. Unexpectedly, a lot of them hid in Japan. Because they were too much for us to handle alone, I contacted Yasaka and got her help to patrol the majority of Japan. The remnant of the Khaos Brigade couldn¡¯t even hide in the mountain, as mountains in Japan were part of older youkai¡¯s home. They were quickly exterminated by them, and no Khaos Brigade¡¯s remnant was in Japan right now. Today, the peace conference had finally started. For a day, there would be various activities such as signing the treaty, party, and party¡­ Yeah, there would be a lot of parties. That was why, the youkai were excited. We were now in Rome, the place where the peace conference would be held. My Hyakki Yakkou, as well as Hagoromo Gitsune¡¯s, was hiding their presence and walking behind us. The only ones who didn¡¯t hide from the public were Hagoromo Gitsune, Kuroka, Tsura, Shirone, and me. Hagoromo Gitsune, Shirone, Kuroka, and Tsura were similar to humans while I was in my human form. So, from the outside view, the humans only saw me walking with four beautiful girls, which invited their jealous gaze. ¡°There are a lot of people nya!¡± Kuroka exclaimed as she looked around curiously. ¡°Shirone! That seems delicious nya!¡± She then ran off to a stall that sold a kebab-like food. ¡°Nee-sama! Wait for me!¡± Shirone then followed her. ¡°Hey! Don¡¯t forget to pay! We are not in Japan. Also, go to that colosseum when you are done, I will be there!¡± I shouted at them, and a reply came back from Kuroka. ¡°I know nya!¡± Hearing her answer put a smile on my face. This is Rome, not Japan. There was a quote that said, ¡®When you are in Rome, do as the Romans do.¡¯ Certainly, they paid for their foods, unlike me, so we must at least follow the tradition here. If there was someone who didn¡¯t pay for their food, then I certainly wouldn¡¯t pay for it though. As they said, a good example must be followed, and you must not follow a bad one. Eating without paying was a good example that should be followed, so I should adhere to the traditions. ¡°What a cheerful bunch.¡± Hagoromo Gitsune commented with a smile. ¡°This is an important day, and they are stopping in a stall. Truly a youkai, never caring for anything besides their own interest.¡± I shrugged my shoulders. ¡°Well, what can I say? I bet you are here because you are interested in the peace conference too.¡± ¡°You know me well.¡± Answered Hagoromo Gitsune with a sly smile. ¡°I heard there are Gods who will join the peace conference today?¡± ¡°Yeah, some of them will be in the colosseum too.¡± I was surprised when I heard the news from Michael. It seemed like gods from other mythology were interested in the peace treaty too. Some of them were Asgard, Shinto, and Indian gods. Greek didn¡¯t participate yet because they didn¡¯t know that Thanatos had some devious plan yet. The strong ones were interested in it. Mainly because of the friendly competition after the conference and the clean-up of the rest of the Khaos Brigade after the competition. They found out that some gods among their members were, in fact, the members of the Khaos Brigade. That was the reason why they were interested in the conference. With Odin in its lead, Asgard wanted to exchange information with us. Indian gods were interested in the Khaos Brigade. Some of the Khaos Brigade members had been found among their servants. While Shinto¡­ they joined the peace conference because of me. When I heard about Asgard and Indian gods making their moves, I thought it was a chance for Shinto gods to make a move as well. They would be left behind the alliance if they didn¡¯t make a move. And if they were late, they would only get a low position because of how badly they looked from the other mythology perspective. Shinto gods were underestimated. So they needed to move more proactively to get a spot in this alliance. Well, with me here, getting a spot was easy though. ¡°Have you ever met with Gods, Hagoromo Gitsune?¡± I asked something that had been on my mind a while back. He had fought Exorcist in her original world. One of them had the ability to call their dead ancestors, similar to the death god, called Hagun. I wondered whether there were gods in that place. ¡°Hmm, no. Amaterasu was the first real god that I met.¡± ¡°Is that so? So what¡¯s Hagun?¡± ¡°That cursed technique from Keikain? They are just dead souls, much like soul fire.¡± Soul fire, huh? The fire was used by fox youkai. It was a deceased soul that was burned with Senjutsu in this place while they were showed up because of humans'' fear in Hagoromo Gitsune¡¯s world. ¡°I see¡­ well. You will meet a lot of gods later. But, I must remind you something. You too Tsura.¡± I said seriously. ¡°Yes?¡± Asked Tsura as she tilted her head. Hearing me getting serious, Hagoromo Gitsune was also curious. She looked at me and waited for my next words. ¡°Don¡¯t get close to Odin. The god from Asgard. He¡¯s¡­¡± I paused a little to see their reactions. Tsura was serious, while Hagoromo Gitsune narrowed her eyes dangerously. ¡°Is he dangerous?¡± She asked. I shook my head. ¡°No. Dangerous won¡¯t cut it.¡± Among the gods, the most dangerous one would be Odin. He was too dangerous for girls. ¡°He¡¯s a pervert at the same level as Azazel¡­¡± ¡°Oh.¡± Tsura let out a weak sound. Hagoromo Gitsune then glared at me. ¡°Just that?¡± I nodded my head. ¡°Just that.¡± ¡°I have gotten used to pervert, don¡¯t worry about it.¡± Leaving those words, Hagoromo Gitsune walked faster toward the colosseum in the distance. RaizarP Author Here~ More than 60 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 185 – Day of Peace Conference 2 As soon as I arrived at the colosseum, I went to the room designated for the peace conference. There, I was greeted by Michael, who had already been waiting ¡°It¡¯s good to see you again, Riku-kun.¡± Dulio stood behind Michael as his attendant as well as the representative of the Church. When he saw me, he waved his hand lightly. I brought Hagoromo Gitsune with me in case something happened. ¡°Yeah,¡± I answered shortly as I crossed my arms beneath my Kimono. The room was big, with a round table in the middle. There were seven chairs around the table for the representatives of each Faction. As there was no one except for Michael and Dulio in this room, I sat on the chair further away from Michael. Hagoromo Gitsune stood behind me without saying anything else. Because this was a peace conference, I guess it was okay for me to act like usual again. In the last few days, I had been too serious and didn¡¯t act like I usually did. I then turned to Michael as I closed my right eye and had my signature grin plastered on my face. ¡°Have I arrived too early?¡± Michael smiled kindly. ¡°I think so. I have expected Azazel to come first, but it seems my guess is wrong.¡± ¡°Hahaha, well, I have nothing to do, so I came here. By the way, where is Vasco? Is he doing well?¡± ¡°He¡¯s not coming because of his responsibility in the Church. He¡¯s in charge of defense as we do that plan.¡± Answered Michael. Ah, right. It would be bad if the Church was attacked when the strong people were away. So it was natural if he put one of the strongest exorcists in that place. I also put Masaomi at home with Kubinashi and Kejoro in case something happened. Magari was also there, so I had no problem. I was confident that my mansion was safe from intruder if they were there. Well, it was not like the enemy could find my mansion in the first place. Not only that, I heard some news from my old man. It seemed like he was running around with Sun Wukong to destroy the remnant of the Khaos Brigade too. They were hunting Evil Dragons that were revived by the Khaos Brigade. I was surprised when I heard that they were hunting Evil Dragons, but when I heard that they were accompanied by Yu-Long, my worry was gone. Crom Cruach was now in Kyoto with Tsuchigumo. It seemed like they became a friend after talking with their fists, and he planned to stay in Kyoto and would help in Kyoto''s defense in case some enemy attacked the city. The youkai that followed me earlier were in the colosseum to wait for the friendly competition. Some of them were walking around in Rome in their human form; I just hope they wouldn¡¯t cause a big problem. Small problems were fine though. ¡°I see. He¡¯s already old, so I guess that¡¯s natural for him to be left behind.¡± ¡°Hahahaha, even so, he¡¯s still one of the strongest exorcists in the Church.¡± I chatted with Michael for a bit until I felt a lot of energy belonged to Fallen Angels appeared in the colosseum where our subordinates were waiting. The energy that belongs to Azazel and his subordinate walked towards this room. ¡°Azazel is here.¡± I said to Michael. ¡°It seems so.¡± The door was opened not long after we said that, and Azazel entered the room. ¡°Did you wait long?!¡± Behind him was a man with white hair. If I remembered correctly, he was Shemhazai, Azazel¡¯s trusted subordinate. So he didn¡¯t bring Vali this time? I couldn¡¯t feel his energy anywhere too. ¡°Yeah, but you are not too late, considering only two of us are here right now.¡± I answered Azazel with a tone full of sarcasm. He grinned at me before he sat beside me. ¡°What can I do? I am busy.¡± ¡°Michael is busier than you, and yet he arrived first.¡± I glanced at Michael and saw him smile kindly as if nothing had happened. As expected of an Angel. Their smile was like their basic expressions. Truly different from the sly smile of the Fallen Angel beside me. ¡°Peace conference is important. So it¡¯s natural for me to spare my time to attend it. Also, as Rome is technically a part of the Church¡¯s territory, I must arrive first to welcome the others.¡± Said Michael. ¡°You heard him. It¡¯s your fault for arriving first even though you are just the supervisor, hahahaha.¡± Azazel laughed at me. He irritated me, but I couldn¡¯t deny it. But, I had prepared a comeback. I grinned at Azazel and pointed outside with my thumb. ¡°Well, I came here first to enjoy free food. I think my subordinates now are partying outside. I am a good leader, unlike someone who doesn¡¯t reward his subordinates for coming along with him.¡± ¡°Pfft!¡± Azazel¡¯s subordinate, Shemhazai, burst into laughter. Even Micael chuckled a bit while Dulio tried his best to look away. That guy always brought food for kids in the orphanage, so it was natural for him to laugh when I mentioned some food. Angels didn¡¯t need to be rewarded as following orders from the higher Angel was natural for them. Fallen Angels, however, had a desire. So I poked Azazel a little in the area that he forgot. ¡°Hah! I will reward them when they win the competition, which is a certain thing. So you don¡¯t need to worry.¡± As expected of a sly crow. He could make a comeback statement. ¡°I see. Well, if the Fallen Angels lose to youkai, I will at least let your subordinates join our party. Of course, you are not invited.¡± ¡°Hahahaha, funny!¡± ¡°Hahahahaha.¡± We laughed while ignoring Michael, who smiled wryly. Hagoromo Gitsune sighed behind me and exchanged a look with Shemhazai, who also let out a tired sigh. It must be hard for him to have Azazel as his superior. I understand that. Our exchange didn¡¯t last long. I felt the others had arrived with their subordinates and walked to this place. Sirzechs was walking here with Diehauser. Odin was walking here with a strange energy that I had never felt before; I guess it belonged to Rossweisse. I somehow knew that the other belonged to Odin because I had met gods before. The energy that belonged to the Indian or Hindu god was strong. Maybe it belonged to Shiva. He was not accompanied by anyone else. From Shinto, it was Susanoo and accompanied by a human. I didn¡¯t recognize the energy, but I could guess that human belonged to the Five Principal Clans. It could be from Himejima or Nakiri clan. My best bet was Suzaku Himejima, the inheritor of the Sacred Beast, Suzaku. ¡°They are here.¡± I said seriously. Even so, a grin appeared on my face. This peace conference must succeed. That way, I would be free from the problems and leave the world in their care. ¡°Yes. Let¡¯s start the peace conference.¡± Declared Michael. RaizarP Author Here~ More than 60 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 186 – Peace Conference 1 The people who attended the peace conference had all arrived and seated. They were all the leaders of each faction, a big faction. The only small factions attending this meeting would be Shinto and Youkai. We were able to attend here because this conference was held because I got involved with the three factions. The atmosphere within the room was tense. Each leader just looked at each other while Michael was just smiling. The attendants of each leader were restless, while I just leaned my back against the chair¡¯s backrest and analyzed the situation. My role at this conference was to supervise them. I didn¡¯t know whether I could do my job properly because the ones who attended this conference were powerful enough to fight me one on one. That was why, I decided to bring Hagoromo Gitsune in case some fight broke out. With Matoi and my new Balance Breaker, I was confident to take on Sirzechs now. After a few minutes of silence, Michael finally opened his mouth. ¡°It seems that no one is willing to talk first. Then, please allow me to start this peace conference. Is there anyone who has any objection?¡± ¡°No.¡± Answered Azazel. ¡°None.¡± Replied Sirzechs. ¡°I have no objection.¡± Nodded Susanoo. Behind her was a girl who had a similar appearance to Akeno. She was someone from the Himejima clan, Suzaku Himejima. My guess was right concerning her being Susanoo¡¯s attendant. ¡°Hahahaha, let¡¯s start this conference.¡± Laughed Odin. Rossweisse held her head for the shameful display of Odin, who had no qualm about the place. It must be hard to be her. ¡°I agree. Let¡¯s start this conference.¡± Added Shiva. Michael nodded his head to everyone¡¯s answer. He then looked at me. ¡°What about you? You are the supervisor of this conference, do you have any objection?¡± ¡°Nah, no.¡± I waved my hand at Michael. ¡°Just start the conference. Think of me as air. I have no presence here among the leader of big factions.¡± ¡°Hahahaha. How can we do that? However, seeing you have no objection too, let me start this peace conference.¡± As Michael said that, Dulio raised his hand and created a barrier around us. The barrier was solid. Maybe it could hold one serious attack from Super Devil. However, it was not solid enough. ¡®Should I add Senjutsu?¡¯ As I thought that, Odin glanced at Rossweisse, and she nodded her head. She then extended her hand and created another layer of a barrier. It didn¡¯t stop at that. Diehauser also added a layer of barrier with Demonic Energy. Those barriers were strong, but they only served as a barrier. ¡°Oh?¡± Azazel let out a single voice; then, he glanced at Shemhazai with a grin. After letting out a little sigh, Shenhazai added a layer of barrier too. Now all factions had added a barrier except for me, Shinto and Hindu factions. Shinto didn¡¯t add any barriers because Suzaku didn¡¯t seem to be able to create one, while the Hindu faction didn¡¯t bring any attendants with him. I glanced at Hagoromo Gitsune, but she was just glaring at me with a look of ¡®Don¡¯t ever think about it.¡¯ Seeing her reaction, I could only shrug my shoulders and added the barrier by myself. I used Senjutsu and Fear to amplify the current barrier that existed in the place. My Fear was used to hide this place from outsiders, while the Senjutsu further strengthened the current barrier. ¡°Hou¡­ No matter how many times I saw the way you use your power to strengthen the barrier, it¡¯s still amazing.¡± Praised Azazel. ¡°Indeed. It¡¯s amazing. We are now hidden from even Super Devil. My subordinates tried to contact me because he said that he couldn¡¯t feel my presence.¡± Added Sirzechs with a smile. ¡°Even heaven tried to contact me. I see. So this is his power.¡± Said Michael as he looked at me with a bright smile. ¡°Oya? What is this? Is this that youkai¡¯s doing?¡± Asked Odin as he looked at the barrier curiously. ¡°It¡¯s a peculiar power. Truly peculiar power.¡± ¡°Let¡¯s end it at that.¡± Shiva said seriously. ¡°More importantly, let¡¯s start the peace conference.¡± ¡°I agree.¡± I nodded my head. Michael nodded his head and looked around. ¡°Well then, the peace conference started. First of all, I wanted to thank you for taking the time to attend this conference. The peace conference is held this time because of the danger concerning an organization called Khaos Brigade.¡± The atmosphere turned serious. Each leader listened to Michael¡¯s explanation seriously. He explained about the Khaos Brigade and the danger that they present to the world. I already sent some information to Michael to be used to explain to each leader. Some information was confidential enough that even Susanoo and Azazel didn¡¯t know about it. He explained that the Khaos Brigade was a combination of a lot of factions under the same goal of creating chaos in the world. The explanation didn¡¯t end there. The leaders in this room knew the rumors about Ophis. Odin even asked about it. ¡°How about Ophis? I heard she¡¯s the leader of Khaos Brigade.¡± ¡°She¡¯s¡­¡± Michael was about to explain it, but Azazel cut him off. ¡°About that matter¡­¡± Azazel then looked at me. ¡°Our youkai over there can explain it better than Michael.¡± The attention then suddenly shifted to me. They looked at me curiously while Azazel was grinning happily. I glared at him a little before sighing. Putting my usual air, I closed my right eye. ¡°Ophis has become my subordinate,¡± I said with a big grin on my face, surprising the other leader, including Susanoo. Azazel must¡¯ve never expected that I would answer honestly as his smile fell from his face. ¡®Hah! Who does he think he deals with?¡¯ With me achieving my Balance Breaker and with Rizevim, who could make Sacred Gear useless was gone, I was now confident to take on anyone. Not only that, but Hagoromo Gitsune was also stronger than before thanks to her new connection with the leyline. Bring any gods to us; I was not afraid of anyone. ¡°Are you telling the truth, Riku-kun?¡± Asked Susanoo. There was a smile on his face. With me having Ophis as my subordinate, Shinto was surely delighted. After all, Shinto and Youkai have had bonds since a long time ago. We were allies that helped each other to protect our territory. ¡°Yeah. She¡¯s now in a space that I created for her. Let me tell you something. Only I can keep Ophis from wreaking havoc in this world due to my ability to create this. Ophis''s goal is to gain silence, and I gave it to her.¡± I pointed at the black smoke that surrounded the barrier. I made them visible for the leaders to see. ¡°I see.¡± Sirzechs understood what I meant. ¡°That¡¯s certainly true.¡± ¡°Her goal is silence, huh. With your ability, then it¡¯s possible.¡± Michael nodded his head in understanding. ¡°Ophis¡¯s matter is done with this, right? Continue your peace conference.¡± I waved my hand at them, and they nodded their head. Shiva seemed to be smiling while glancing at me, but I ignored him. Seeing that no one objects to my suggestion, Michael continued. ¡°Let¡¯s continue¡­¡± RaizarP Author Here~ More than 60 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 187 – Peace Conference 2 Michael continued his explanation. In the mid of his explanation, he turned to Azazel. ¡°Can you continue the explanation? I don¡¯t know the detail about you and Riku-kun attacking the Khaos Brigade¡¯s leader, Rizevim Livan Lucifer, in the vampire world.¡± Azazel nodded confidently. ¡°Sure.¡± He then cleared his throat with a cough before continuing Michael¡¯s explanation. ¡°So, we actually were not trying to kill Rizevim in the vampire world. Our goal is to save a vampire with Sephiroth Graal in the vampire world. However¡­¡± Azazel glared at me with a dissatisfied gaze. ¡°My companion at that time decided to take the matter on his own and called his army. As a result, it became a war greater than our first plan.¡± I smiled proudly because my achievement got praise from Azazel. However, he looked at me in disgust. ¡°Look at him being so proud after causing such chaos.¡± He said while pointing his index finger at me. The other leaders chuckled at Azazel. I laughed loudly and answered him. ¡°Did you forget what I am, Azazel?¡± I asked him as I raised my chin. ¡°No, I know. It¡¯s my fault for thinking that you are different from your pops.¡± ¡°Nah, don¡¯t worry. That¡¯s a beginner mistake. A lot of people had experienced it already. So you should be proud that you are able to take part in that war, hahahaha.¡± Azazel sighed lightly before smiling. ¡°You are correct. I should be proud to be a part of a war that killed the real leader of the Khaos Brigade.¡± The other was confused by Azazel¡¯s words. Sirzechs then asked. ¡°So Rizevim is the true leader of Khaos Brigade?¡± ¡°Yes, according to that guy.¡± Once again, Azazel pointed his finger at me. The other leaders looked at me, and then Susanoo spoke. ¡°Can you please explain it to us, Riku?¡± ¡°Hmm, sure.¡± I then explained the conversation between me and Rizevim about how he wanted to create Chaos in this world. Because I always attacked him, I got no chance to hear his real explanation, though. I meant, who would wait for the enemy to explain something in the middle of a fight? Only the crazy people here did that kind of thing. That was why I added some twists from what I remembered from his actual goal. I told them how he wanted to revive Trihexa and bring chaos to this world. Not only that, but I also added his goal of reviving Lilith using Ophis¡¯ power. When I mentioned that, the expression of Michael and Azazel turned. Azazel was clearly angry, while Michael frowned at his beautiful face. Hagoromo Gitsune stared at me suspiciously. She heard all my conversations with Rizevim and knew that I was lying. However, she didn¡¯t say anything but stare at me suspiciously. I should explain something to her later. ¡°Is that true?¡± Asked Azazel in a low tone. ¡°Well yeah. That¡¯s why I had Ophis away from me in that fight. I could kill Rizevim easily if Ophis joined the fight, but I was afraid that he would get Ophis back to his side and make things messy.¡± Sirzechs, who stayed silent all this time, then put his hand on his chin. His gesture was strange; even Azazel looked at him strangely. ¡°What happened, Sirzechs? You are unusually serious about this matter.¡± Sirzechs was surprised when he was called out suddenly. He lowered his hand and looked at Azazel with a smile. ¡°Ah, no. Just thinking about something, you see?¡± ¡°Suspicious.¡± Azazel narrowed his eyes. ¡°Just tell us what¡¯s wrong.¡± ¡°Hahahaha. Yes, just tell us, Sirzechs!¡± Added Odin with a thundering laugh. ¡°We are here to share information too! So don¡¯t keep the thing for yourself. We do not agree to sign this treaty yet. If you hide some important thing, we might consider withdrawing, you know?¡± Sirzechs looked at Odin with a wry smile. ¡°Please don¡¯t say it like that, Lord Odin. I just remembered something.¡± I looked at Sirzechs with interest. Did he know something about it? Maybe he did know some hidden information that was only available to the devil. It was not strange considering that he was Satan. There should be some record about Lilith, the one called the Mother of Devils. No, it was strange if there was no record of her. ¡°Do you know something about Lilith?¡± I asked Sirzechs curiously. ¡°Yes, I know something about Lilith. No devils didn¡¯t know about her. She¡¯s the origin of devils, the mother of all devils after all.¡± Nodded Sirzechs. ¡°However, only some people know the truth about her.¡± That was interesting. I didn¡¯t remember something like this. If there was indeed a record of her, then that should make him easier to believe me. ¡°Then you should know, Sirzechs. She shouldn¡¯t be revived.¡± I said seriously. ¡°If Khaos Brigade succeeds in reviving her, then a new Devil will be born. The Devil will have a personality similar to or even worse than the old Satans.¡± The room went quiet for a moment. They knew that old Satans did not have the best personality. They were literally walking destructions whose sole purpose was destroying anything in their path. ¡°Let¡¯s say that we are grateful you killed Rizevim before he achieved his goal,¡± Shiva said seriously as he looked at me. ¡°But, you sound like there is still someone trying to revive her.¡± ¡°That¡¯s correct,¡± I answered Shiva with a nod. ¡°Even without Rizevim, the Khaos Brigade''s sole purpose is still not to deviate from the start. They want to create chaos. There is still a Devil with enough influence in Underworld trying to revive Lilith. Some gods also side with Khaos Brigade.¡± As I said that, I looked at Odin. ¡°It seems one of your sons is not as filial as you think, Odin.¡± ¡°Haa¨C As I thought, I am not a good father, huh?¡± Said Odin as he sighed. ¡°Nah, you are a good father. It¡¯s just that¡­ you are too pervert, and your son is too cunning.¡± ¡°I see¡­¡± muttered Michael. The others had also realized who we were talking about. ¡°Loki¡­ that idiot! I will deal with him myself when I come back to Asgard.¡± Muttered Odin with anger. RaizarP Author Here~ More than 60 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 188 – Signing Peace Treaty Check out my new novel here! The peace conference continued without any problem. We exchanged information, decided on the clause of the treaty, and finally, we signed the peace treaty. The treaty between the seven sides has been signed today. We were now officially allies. Due to me attending this conference, I was asked to sign the treaty too as the supervisor. Not only that, I was trusted to keep the information about Khaos Brigade by them. They would send some people to inform me of the information that they knew in full detail after the friendly competition. I thought they were joking, but it seemed like they were not. They actually trusted me in this one. When I asked why they trusted me, Sirzechs said that I was the only one who could run whenever and from anyone. I couldn¡¯t deny him due to my pride in my ability, so I just boasted more. That was my only mistake at that conference. They trusted me more and would ask for my cooperation when the time came. Well, my job was only guarding the information, so I agreed with them. In the peace treaty, my faction had no responsibility to the other factions, while they were supposed to help us if we were in danger. That was the only reason why I agreed to the job of keeping the information. I had gotten free helpers. The agendas today were finished. Michael stood up and closed the peace conference. ¡°Well then, as the treaty has been signed, I declare that the peace conference is over. There is a party held at the colosseum after this; please enjoy it.¡± The other leaders stood up after the meeting was adjourned. ¡°Well then, it¡¯s time to drink! Azazel, do you want to come with me?¡± Odin was the most spirited one. ¡°Oh? I don¡¯t mind. However, it seems your attendant is more eager to drink more than me.¡± He glanced at Rossweisse, who was fidgeting behind Odin. When she was mentioned, her face turned red, and she turned away. Odin looked at her and laughed. ¡°Hahahaha, if you keep doing that, no man will come to you, you know? Try to loosen yourself a little!¡± ¡°Odin-sama!¡± Rossweisse shouted in embarrassment. ¡°It¡¯s not like that! Besides, I don¡¯t think any man will like someone like me.¡± ¡°Oh, but I think that almost every man wants to date you. Isn¡¯t that right, Riku?¡± Azazel suddenly called out to me when I was about to leave this place. I stopped on my track with Hagoromo Gitsune. She appeared to be pissed when we were stopped. She even glared at Azazel with a death stare. Azazel only smiled back with his coy smile. This guy was really fearless. ¡°Hmm¡­ Well.¡± I glanced at red-faced Rossweisse behind Odin. She tried to hide her embarrassment by punching Odin. ¡°I guess she¡¯s okay? She has a beautiful face and good figure after all.¡± I grinned as I said that. ¡°Eh?¡± Rossweisse let out a small sound as she stopped moving. ¡°Hahahaha. Look, Rossweisse. How about you marry that guy? He¡¯s the leader of the East Youkai Faction, you know? He¡¯s also strong, strong enough to kill a Super Devil by himself.¡± Actually, Hagoromo Gitsune helped me. But I didn¡¯t bother to fix him because he didn¡¯t know about Matoi. I would be a fool if I explained Matoi to him. Azazel alone was enough to know my technique. ¡°U-umm¡­¡± Rossweisse mumbled in a low voice as she glanced at me. But she quickly turned away when she saw Hagoromo Gitsune glaring at her with a dark aura around her. ¡°Well, I have two lovers already. I don¡¯t think I can add someone else right now.¡± I crossed my arms and smiled playfully. Rossweisse lowered her head deeply. I then knew why Odin loved to tease her. She was cute and was easy to get embarrassed. As no one seemed to have anything to say to me again, I decided to leave the room. ¡°Well then, I will leave first.¡± I used my Fear to hide my presence and Hagoromo Gitsune. I was now skilled enough to use my technique with other people. I grew stronger. ¡°There they go¡­¡± Said Azazel as I left the room with Hagoromo Gitsune. *** I went to the colosseum as soon as I left the meeting room. My subordinates were in this place with the other factions. Devils, Angel, and Fallen angels had gathered in the middle of the colosseum. Although there was a party in this place, each faction stayed away from the other. They looked at each other with wary on their faces. No one enjoyed the party, except for the youkai. ¡°Buahahaha. Drink! Drink!¡± Aotabo shouted happily as he raised a big mug of beer with his right hand. ¡°Hahahaha. Take this!¡± A youkai that looked like a snake shouted to the other while throwing a sweet toward the crowd of small youkai. ¡°I got this!¡± A youkai called Natto Kozou jumped and snatched the sweet that was thrown at him. The atmosphere around the youkai bunch was merry, unlike the other factions. Some of the members from other factions glanced at the youkai. Some of them even muttered. ¡°How can they be so loud?¡± Muttered a fallen angel to his colleague. ¡°They are uncivilized.¡± Muttered a certain devil. The angel only looked at the youkai with displeasure. ¡°It seems they are doing okay.¡± I said to Hagoromo Gitsune. We were still hidden by my Fear, so no one had noticed us yet. ¡°The same bunch as usual. It¡¯s better than the others who are too stiff though.¡± ¡°Hahahaha. That¡¯s true.¡± We approached the youkai bunch, and I released my Fear. They noticed us instantly and greeted us. ¡°Onee-sama! Welcome back!¡± Shouted Kyokotsu as she approached Hagoromo Gitsune. She smiled at her, then Hagoromo patted her head with a smile. ¡°Welcome back, Riku-sama! Is the conference already ended?¡± Asked Kurotabo. ¡°Yeah, it¡¯s done. But¡­ it seems that they are still wary toward each other, eh?¡± I spoke rather loudly on purpose so the other factions could hear me. ¡°Although their leaders have become allies, it seems that the subordinates are not getting along.¡± Kurotabo smiled and shrugged his shoulders. ¡°Well, it can¡¯t be helped. They are too STIFF, after all. Unlike us, who can forgive ANYONE easily, it seems that they are too dumb for that. They don¡¯t understand the danger of our common enemy and choose to FIGHT their old enemies.¡± Kurotabo answered me loudly while throwing some sarcasm intentionally. ¡°Well, it can¡¯t be helped then. Let¡¯s just enjoy the party. If they don¡¯t want to enjoy the party, why don¡¯t you guys kick them out?¡± ¡°Oh, good idea. The food on their tables is still untouched, so why don¡¯t we take it too?¡± Kurotabo¡¯s mouth curled into an evil grin. The other youkai who heard us slowly turned their heads toward the tables of the other factions. Greed was written on their faces. The other factions glared at us with displeasure. The atmosphere then tensed all of a sudden. Seeing the situation that suddenly turned tense, I grinned to myself. I took some food from the table and looked at the situation while filling my mouth with sweets. ¡®It has become interesting.¡¯ RaizarP Author Here~ More than 60 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks for the New Executive! - Gilles Hanson Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 189 – Teaching Young Devils The other factions were offended by what Kurotabo¡¯s said. The devils were the ones who made a move first. I could feel Rias, Sona, and their peerages among the devils and tried to find them. I quickly found them because Rias¡¯ hair was too eye-catching to miss. They were in the back of the devils'' crowd, talking with Sairaorg. They didn¡¯t seem to notice that three devils had made their way toward my place. The devils that made their way in our directions were young, around Rias¡¯ age. They were cocky and had a smirk on their face. As I had hidden in the corner and observed the situation while munching on a sweet, the devils were confused. However, their attitude changed when they saw one of the youkai that stopped them; it was Kurotabo. ¡°Is there anything that I can help you with?¡± Kurotabo smiled as he asked politely. ¡°Hah! Where is your leader? I am here because I heard that he was able to defeat Sairaorg Bael.¡± Said the young devil in the middle. He had blonde hair and a cocky attitude. ¡°And what do you want with him?¡± Kurotabo narrowed his eyes, but his smile was still intact. That meant he was not too irritated yet. ¡°Of course, we want to show him his place! How dare the leader of a small faction like youkai defeat a devil?! I bet he¡¯s cheating!¡± The devil on the left shouted at Kurotabo. This was getting more interesting. So the news about me defeating Saiarog was already spread among the young devils? Should I ask Sirzechs to spread the news about me killing Rizevim then? I was curious about their expressions when they heard it. I bet the old devils would go, ¡®How dare he kill the son of Lucifer!¡¯ or something like that. It was basically the same reactions that the young devils had but in a grander form. ¡°Is that so? You think that Riku-sama cheated when he fought with this Sairaorg? Do you have proof?¡± Kurotabo¡¯s smile fell from his face. He gripped his monk staff and was ready to attack in case the devils made some aggressive move. ¡°Of course! There is no way that the strongest among the young devil could lose against a youkai! Not to mention that youkai is only a teenager!¡± The devils did live a long life. But, didn¡¯t the young devils who approached us also still teenagers? They brought that up as a reason? At this time, the other devils, Fallen Angels, and angels had noticed the commotion. From a distance, I could see Rias¡¯ panicked face and Sona¡¯s troubled face. Sairaorg, who was with them, narrowed his eyes while looking in our direction. Their reactions were funny. Rias tried to make her way here with Sairaorg and her peerage. While they were at it, Sona chose to stay and held her head. Her lips moved, and from what I deciphered, she seemed to mutter, ¡®Haa¨C Do anything become this troublesome when youkai is involved?¡¯ or something like that. I didn¡¯t deny it, but this time it was not our fault, you know? ¡°Then, what do you want with us, hah? Do you want to try to fight us to show that devils are strong? Hah! What a joke! I crushed a lot of devils¡¯ heads a few days ago!¡± Aotabo approached from behind Kurotabo and scoffed. ¡°Do you want to try it, kid?¡± He glared at the blonde devil with a smirk. His presence itself was big, so the young devils were afraid of him. They took a step back before snickering. ¡°H-Hah¡­ It seems it¡¯s only your body that¡¯s big; your brain is so small that you can¡¯t judge our strength!¡± The blonde devil even poured fuel into the fire. Rias and Sairaorg were still trying to come to this place. The crowd stopped them, but they parted after seeing their serious expressions. However, they were too late. Aotabo cracked his hands and stood tall in front of the young devils. ¡°How about we try it right now, brat?¡± Rias was panicked when he saw Aotabo. I also didn¡¯t want to see a fight today, as the peace treaty was just signed earlier. So I appeared beside Aotabo and patted his shoulder. ¡°Well, stop that for now.¡± ¡°Oh? Riku-sama!¡± Aotabo turned to me and smiled. Kurotabo looked at me with a tired gaze and let out a sigh. So the reason why he kept his calm was that he knew I was nearby? I did talk to him earlier, but I made it look like that I was leaving the area. That was not important though. ¡°So you are the leader of those guys? Hah! You didn¡¯t look too strong!¡± The devils scoffed at me. Although I stopped Aotabo, I still need to educate these devils because they looked down on me too much. Even when I was in front of them, they were still looking down at me. I turned to them and smirked as I closed my right eye. ¡°You said that I was cheating when I beat Sairaorg?¡± Maybe because Rias had seen this gesture a few times, she shouted to stop me. ¡°Wa¨C¡° But she was late. I had already used my Senjutsu to pressure the three devils in front of me to their knees. Thud! ¡°Guh!¡± ¡°W-what is this! I-I can¡¯t move!¡± ¡°H-Help!¡± The three of them fell to their knees, and their heads looked at the ground. They couldn¡¯t even look up, and they dared to look down on me. ¡°Well, aren¡¯t you guys too weak? Even Sairaorg could stand when I used my Senjutsu to put pressure on him.¡± I looked down at them and said my part. ¡°S-Stop it!¡± ¡°You want me to stop?¡± I asked playfully. ¡°Maybe another time? I have a guest here, so let¡¯s talk later.¡± I then turned to Rias and Sairaorg, who finally arrived. ¡°Yo, aren¡¯t you too late?¡± ¡°Hahahaha. The crowd stopped us. It seems that my colleagues bothered you and your faction. For that, I am sorry.¡± Sairaorg bowed his head, followed by Rias. ¡°I¡¯m sorry for that.¡± I was a bit surprised, but then I smiled. ¡°Don¡¯t mind it~ They are just na?ve and need some education. I think they had changed their minds now.¡± I looked at the young devils beside me. They had passed out from the pressure. I pulled my pressure and smiled at Rias and Sairaorg. ¡°Besides¡­ I can always show my strength tomorrow.¡± Both of them raised their heads. Rias smiled wryly while Sairaorg had an excited grin. ¡°I hope to meet you in the tournament tomorrow.¡± Said Sairaorg. ¡°Well, let¡¯s see how it goes. I doubt that I will be scheduled to fight with young devils because¡­ I am too strong for that.¡± RaizarP Author Here~ More than 60 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks for the New Executive! - Gilles Hanson Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 190 – First Match 1 The next day, the day of friendly competition, four factions filled the colosseum. Each faction took a side on the spectators¡¯ seat. Devil took the east side. The Heaven factions that composed with Angels and Exorcists that just arrived today took the west side. Fallen Angels took the south side, while youkai took the north side. Somehow, it was not too unexpected; the one who took the role of emcee was Azazel and me. At first, it was only Azazel who took the role of emcee. However, I was also interested in becoming one, so I joined him to add some comments and maybe diss some fighters later. ¡°Ladies and Gentlemen! Welcome to the friendly competition between 4 factions! I will be your emcee today. For those who don¡¯t know me, allow me to introduce myself. I am the Governor of Grigori; Azazel is my name!¡± He bowed his head and said, ¡°Nice to meet all of you.¡± Then he raised his head and pointed his hand at me, who stood beside him. ¡°And there is also the sudden emcee that accompanies me.¡± ¡°Yo! I am the second MC today, the Lord of Pandemonium from the Nura clan. My humble name is Nura Riku. It¡¯s nice to meet you.¡± I winked my right eye as I finished my introduction. For the reason that I knew, the girls were shrieking when I did that. It had been a long time since I heard the shrieking. Was it since the time I attended Kuoh Academy? It was a refreshing feeling. Showing off was what I was born for, which was ironic because Nurarihyon Youkai had always fought while hiding their presence. ¡°It seems that you are popular, eh, Riku?¡± Azazel joked around and made the crowd laugh.¡± ¡°It¡¯s natural. I am just too handsome.¡± ¡°Hahahaha. Putting that aside, can you explain how the tournament worked? If the information that I got was correct, then you are the one who planned this tournament with Vasco Strada. Is that true?¡± ¡°That¡¯s correct,¡± I answered Azazel with a nod. We had planned to explain this competition before it started, and he told me that it was better if I was the one who explained it. There were various reasons, but the most important one was to reduce casualties. The casualties that he talked about were those who tried to fight me without knowing my real power. I guess Azazel had a soft spot on him, huh? To think that he would like to minimalize the casualties. However, it seems that his plan was backfired. The crowd from the Devils and Fallen Angels faction was surprised that I was the one who suggested friendly competition. ¡°It seems some of you are not happy with that, eh?¡± Azazel said with a grin. The crowd then booed and asked for explanations. ¡°Yeah!¡± ¡°How can a youkai such as him plan competition between three factions! He even brings his weak faction to join!¡± ¡°That¡¯s right!¡± Some expressed their dissatisfaction. At the same time, the youkai were glaring at them while fanning the flame. ¡°Buahahaha. Want to try us?¡± ¡°We will crush you like an ant!¡± ¡°Don¡¯t make me eat your head, you silly devils!¡± ¡°Alright, stop it!¡± I shouted at them, and the youkai immediately stopped. However, the devils were not stopped yet. ¡°Hah! They even followed that guy¡¯s order!¡± ¡°Hahahaha. As expected of the weak.¡± At that moment, Azazel stepped forward. ¡°Young devils, it¡¯s better if you stop at that.¡± Azazel said with a deep tone without a smile. ¡°If you continue that, I am afraid that your faction will be destroyed. This guy here¡­¡± He pointed his finger at me. When he said that, I somehow knew that he would expose me, so I grinned and put off a show too. I used Fear to surround my body and spread my Senjutsu to oppress the arena, especially the devils'' side. As a black cloud of smoke came out of my body, Azazel then continued. ¡°He killed Rizevim Livan Lucifer by himself. And that¡¯s the reason why we could hold the peace conference yesterday.¡± The devils turned silent while the youkai cheered at my show. ¡°Riku-sama!¡± ¡°As expected of Riku-sama!¡± ¡°Long Live Nura Clan!¡± Immediately the atmosphere turned to favor the youkai. As it was enough, I turned off all my abilities and said. ¡°Well, we are allies. Don¡¯t worry about me. Let¡¯s explain the rules of this competition.¡± ¡°Hahahaha. You¡¯re right! This is a friendly competition, so we should have no hard feelings to each other!¡± ¡°You said it yourself!¡± We, the emcees, were laughing while the devils couldn¡¯t say anything. Some of them who knew my strength only smiled lightly. The Devils respected strength; that was why Azazel put on such a show. He had already instructed the Fallen Angels, so they didn¡¯t make such a fuss as the devils did. As for the Angels, they were also informed by Michael. Not only that, they were not too caring about me as they were supposed to be holy creatures that couldn¡¯t even lie, maybe. I was skeptical about that, though, as the Angels in the DxD even attacked Issei to get his¡­ seed¡­ Putting that aside, Azazel began to explain the competition rules. ¡°First of all, the format of this tournament would be group against group! One group will have three people, and everyone is allowed to join. It¡¯s also allowed to team up with someone from another faction.¡± ¡°Secondly, the competition will be held inside a special dimension like Rating Game. Ajuka Beelzebub has kindly lent his hand to create this arena!¡± ¡°Thirdly, no killing is allowed. Well, I guess it¡¯s been resolved by the space created by Ajuka, but I guess I need to say this.¡± Azazel chuckled as he found the rules to be funny. ¡°And lastly¡­ due to the special spectators'' request.¡± Azazel looked at the special spectators. They were Odin, Susanoo, and Shiva. ¡°It seems the first match will going to be a battle royale between four factions. Each will send one of their strongest fighters to fight.¡± I didn¡¯t know about it. I looked at Azazel with a dissatisfied look, but he returned a grin as if he had won something from me. ¡°Is that so? Then without further ado, let¡¯s start the first one.¡± I shouted to make the spectators hear me. They were all cheering and shouting a name. ¡°Diehauser-sama!¡± ¡°Dulio!!¡± ¡°Shemhazai-sama!¡± Three factions shouted each name that they thought were the strongest fighters. Meanwhile, in the youkai seat¡­ They had started something else. ¡°Move off! I will go!¡± Aotabo shouted. ¡°That will never happen. As I will go as the representative.¡± Replied Kurotabo. ¡°I¡¯m sorry, Kurotabo. But Kappa will go.¡± Said Kappa as he spurted water from his gills. ¡°Hey¡­ your faction¡­¡± Azazel said to me while I just grinned back at him. ¡°They are always like that. But don¡¯t worry, I got it.¡± I looked at Hagoromo Gitsune, who sat soundly beside Kyokotsu on top of a big skeleton, Gasadokuro¡¯s head. ¡°Let¡¯s announce it.¡± I said to Azazel as I saw fighters jump to the arena from each faction. ¡°Alright!¡± Azazel shouted excitedly. ¡°From the devil faction, we have Diehauser Belial!¡± ¡°Woaahh Belial-sama!!¡± ¡°Diehauser-sama!!¡± The devils shouted excitedly. ¡°Then from the Heaven Faction, we have Dulio Gesualdo!¡± ¡°Kyaaa! Dulio!¡± ¡°Beat them, Dulio!¡± His fans were cheering from behind. Dulio raised his hand to wave at them. ¡°From the Grigori, we have Shemhazai!¡± ¡°Don¡¯t lose, Shemhazai-sama!¡± Shemhazai walked with a tired expression. He sighed and mumbled. ¡°Why me?¡± ¡°And from the youkai faction!¡± Azazel shouted and looked at me. At that time, I had already used Kyouka Suigetsu to leave my Fake beside Azazel while my true body was behind Hagoromo Gitsune. I canceled Kyouka Suigetsu, matching Azazel¡¯s shout, and reappeared behind Hagoromo Gitsune. She immediately turned to me and said, ¡°Don¡¯t tell me.¡± ¡°Yo, help me in this one.¡± I picked her up and jumped to the arena. She tried to resist at first but found out that it was useless. Kyokotsu, who just realized that I had picked Hagoromo Gitsune and jumped, shouted from behind¡°Onee-sama!¡± ¡°Oh! It seems that Riku has picked her up himself! Once again, let me announce it!¡± I put Hagoromo Gitsune on the ground and walked to Azazel. She was sending a death glare at me, but then she faced the other three who stood side arena in front of their faction seat. ¡°From the youkai faction, we have Hagoromo Gitsune! A lot of you must¡¯ve never seen her, but her strength is real! From my information, she¡¯s on par with Nurarihyon himself!¡± The Kyoto youkai cheered loudly with the appearance of Hagoromo Gitsune on the middle of the arena. And with that, the first match was ready to begin. RaizarP Author Here~ More than 60 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 191 – First Match 2 Azazel and I jumped out of the arena and landed in the observation area while giving a comment. In there, Sirzechs and Michael had already seated behind a table. ¡°Finally, the first match is about to start. Before we start the first match, let¡¯s invite the representative of Angel and Devil Factions to help us commentate the fight! Give warm applause for Sirzechs Lucifer and Michael!¡± The crowd applauded as Azazel instructed. ¡°Hello.¡± Greeted Michael with a smile. ¡°It¡¯s an honor to be chosen as a commentator from the Devil Factions.¡± Said Sirzechs. ¡°Hahahaha. Don¡¯t be so humble. Today, the Devils are the favorite to be a winner, especially since Diehauser participated in the first match.¡± ¡°I wouldn¡¯t say that.¡± Retorted Sirzechs. ¡°I don¡¯t know if Diehauser can beat Hagoromo Gitsune from the Youkai Faction.¡± ¡°Oh?! We have an unexpected reveal! Satan himself has recognized the youkai strength that he¡¯s not even confident if the devil¡¯s representative, Diehausar Belial, can win against the youkai!¡± Shouted Azazel. ¡°That¡¯s right. I have a chance to meet Hagoromo Gitsune directly, and I must say she¡¯s quite strong. Diehauser is one of our strongest fighters, but¡­ you know a strange power that Nurarihyon and Nura Riku have, aren¡¯t you?¡± ¡°Of course. It¡¯s something called Fear, right?¡± Sirzechs nodded in confirmation and turned to me. ¡°I believe that Hagoromo Gitsune has that Fear similar to Nura Riku.¡± ¡°Hmm¡­¡± Azazel mumbled as he glanced at me. ¡°Do you have any comment about this?¡± He grinned. He knew that Hagoromo Gitsune could use Fear as he saw her melt into a black cloud as I used Matoin in the vampire world. However, maybe because he respected my privacy, he decided to ask me himself. ¡°About that. I also have a chance to meet with all of them except for Shemhazai. But if Shemhazai¡¯s strength is similar to Diehausre or Dulio, then I can say this confidently.¡± I grinned and continued. ¡°Hagoromo Gitusne will win easily even if the three of them grouped against her.¡± ¡°What a proclamation.¡± Said Azazel in an amazed tone. ¡°Everyone could hear your voice, you know?¡± ¡°It doesn¡¯t matter. Let¡¯s just start the match and see what will happen.¡± ¡°I agree.¡± Said Michael. ¡°I agree too. Let¡¯s start the match right now.¡± ¡°Well then, as everyone has agreed to start the match right now, let me introduce the referee for today¡¯s match!¡± As Azazel shouted that, a portal appeared in the middle of the colosseum, in the middle of the participants. From the portal, Tobio appeared and smiled at the audience. ¡°Hello, my name is Tobio. I will be the referee for today¡¯s match as requested by Azazel-sama. It¡¯s a pleasure to meet you.¡± That guy really prepared everything while hiding it from me and the others. While I didn¡¯t mind it, at least he could tell us about his preparation. ¡°He will act as a referee and will only watch the match without interfering! Well then, you can start, Tobio!¡± ¡°Alright.¡± Tobio looked at the four participants alternatively. ¡°I believe the rules of the matches have been explained, correct?¡± ¡°Yes, that¡¯s correct.¡± Answered Dulio with a bright smile. Even after I said that Hagoromo Gitsune could win easily against the three of them, no one surrendered or even asked for a change of fighter. The situation of the matches was tense. The spectators were not focusing on Hagoromo Gitsune to gauge her strength. She looked like a girl from a high school with her black sailor uniforms and a school bag that she held with her right hand. As she became uncomfortable with the gazes of the others, she pulled out her steel fan from the bag and frowned. ¡°Such an unpleasant feeling. Just start the match.¡± Yasaka had trained her about how to utilize Leyline. Because of that, she had now able to use Senjutsu and was sensitive to the emotion directed at her. Diehauser put on a serious look and nodded his head. Shemhazai raised his hand slowly. ¡°Umm¡­¡± He called out to Tobio. ¡°Yes, Shemhazai-san?¡± Asked Tobio. ¡°Can I just like¡­ surrender from the match? You can fight in my place, and I will become the referee.¡± Shemhazai said something rather shocking for the crowd. He wanted Tobio to replace him to fight for the first match. ¡°Umm, about that¡­¡± Tobio was troubled. This had been dragged for too long. ¡°Hey, just start the match! If he doesn¡¯t want to fight, then just let him be the referee!¡± I shouted at them, and Tobio chuckled wryly. ¡°Well, I guess I have no choice.¡± Finally, Tobio relented and replaced Shemhazai''s position as Fallen Angel¡¯s representative. Shemhazai now stood in the middle of the arena. He became the new referee by chance. I somehow couldn¡¯t trust him. ¡°Azazel, I will be the referee,¡± I said to Azazel before jumping to the arena. ¡°Hey, wait!¡± He tried to stop me, but I had now landed in the middle of the arena and patted Shemhazai¡¯s shoulder. ¡°Let me take care of it.¡± He was surprised when I suddenly appeared behind him, but he nodded his head and walked away with a smile. I hated it when someone tried to drag something easy to be so long. It reminded me of a school entrance ceremony that was dragged on for too long because of a principal¡¯s speech. The crowd booed at me for taking such selfish actions. I glared at them and used my Fear to make them scared. There was no one else that fit to be the referee except for me. I could see the fight while being hidden from the eyes of the fighter, so they weren¡¯t disturbed. ¡°Oi, if anyone disagrees with me being the referee, just come here and become one. I bet you will be killed by the shockwave though.¡± After I said that, the crowd turned silent. Satisfied with their silence, I nodded my head and looked at the fighters alternatively. Because the fighters were ready, I raised my hand and shouted. ¡°Well then, match start!¡± RaizarP Author Here~ More than 100 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 192 – Hagoromo Gitsune’s true strength As soon as I started the match, I used Meikyo Shisui to hide and not disturb the fight. Four fighters were only looking at each other, trying to gauge the others¡¯ strength. The first one to make a move was Tobio. He called his Canis Lykaon. The wolf appeared beside him while holding a black sword in his mouth. ¡°Woof! Grrr!¡± ¡°It¡¯s time to fight. Will you help me?¡± Asked Tobio as a scythe appeared in his hand. ¡°Woof!¡± Canis Lykaon answered with a bark. Looking at them was Hagoromo Gitsune. She seemed interested in the wolf that Tobio called. Its aura was like Fear, but it was magical energy instead of Fear. ¡°Are you done preparing?¡± Asked Hagoromo Gitsune as she closed her fan. ¡°Yes, I am done.¡± ¡°How about you guys?¡± She asked again. This time, it was directed to Dulio and Diehauser. Dulio¡¯s hands were now covered with swirling wind. He used his Sacred Gear, Zenith Tempest. He could manipulate Element and Weather with that Sacred Gear, which was a cheat. When I thought about it, almost everything in the DxD world was a cheat. Like the Thirteen Longinus, each of them had a broken ability. In terms of rank, Zenith Tempest was ranked second, just below True Longinus. It could certainly injure even Hagoromo Gitsune if used by the right person, and Dulio was that right person. He was the strongest in the church; even Vasco and Michael would admit that if I asked them. In contrast to Dulio, who only created some swirling winds around his hands, and Tobio, who summoned his Longinus and scythe, Diehauser went all out from the beginning. Demonic Energy appeared around his body, creating a purplish aura. The wind began to blow from Diehauser¡¯s direction. It was a strong wind that even moved my hair. Tobio covered his eyes with his left hand. Dulio created a wind barrier around his body, while Hagoromo Gitsune just stood calmly as the wind blew her hair. She narrowed her eyes as Diehauser created Magic Circles aimed at her. ¡°I¡¯m sorry, but you are the most dangerous one here. I also don¡¯t know your ability, so forgive me for aiming at you first. Prepare yourself!¡± Shouted Diehauser. A barrage of magic came out from the magic circles; all were aimed at Hagoromo Gitsune. Seeing the barrage of Magic, the corner of Hagoromo Gitsune¡¯s mouth lifted a little. She then swung her fan. It became big and sent a fury wind towards the magics direction. The wind blocked the magics as they exploded in the sky. Some of the magics were even cut and disappeared. Hagoromo Gitsune¡¯s attack was infused by her Fear. As Diehauser acknowledged her as a threat, he subconsciously also feared her. That was why her Fear would take effect on Diehauser better. ¡°Oooh! What an attack from Diehauser Belial! However, Hagoromo Gitsune managed to stop them easily!¡± Azazel shouted, full of spirit. The arena was now filled with smoke; even I had a hard time seeing what happened inside. I tried to get closer to have a better look. ¡°Boring.¡± She muttered. However, Diehauser was not done yet. He was already in front of Hagoromo Gitsune, sending a punch with his Demonic Energy-covered fist. He was fast, and his fist was now in front of Hagoromo Gitsune. If his enemy was a normal devil or a high-ranked devil, that move would connect and make his enemy blown away. But his enemy was Hagoromo Gitsune. Nine Tails spurted from her back and blocked Diehauser¡¯s punch easily. ¡°Nice try.¡± Said Hagoromo Gitsune. A spear then jutted out from one of her tails and stabbed Diehauser¡¯s right arm. ¡°Guh!¡± Diehauser grunted a little before jumping away to create distance between them. The spear then retreated back inside the tail. Their fight was in a settlement as they only glared at each other from a distance, trying to gauge each other¡¯s strength. No, more accurately, Diehauser tried to judge Hagoromo Gitsune¡¯s strength while Hagoromo Gitsune looked bored. Dulio and Tobio analyzed the fight between Diehauser and Hagoromo Gitsune. Both of them were also checking each other so no one made a move ahead of the others. To be honest, Hagoromo Gitsune¡¯s Fear was not her weapon that came out from her tail. No, they were just a bonus that she got from her reincarnation, a so-called New Game+ bonus in a game. Her Fear was simple yet deathly. It was her presence. ¡°Hmm, I never did this before in this world, so I don¡¯t know the effect on you guys.¡± Said Hagoromo Gitsune. She then shouted. ¡°Nura! Stop me when I win.¡± She was confident about it. A black cloud of smoke began to cover her body and tails. Her presence became big enough to even rival the presence of Heavenly Dragons inside the Sacred Gear. Diehauser seemed to be wary as he narrowed his eyes. Dulio and Tobio also nodded at each other. They had decided to take out Hagoromo Gitsune first. They understood that she was the most dangerous person among the four fighters. The sky turned dark and was covered with a black cloud all of a sudden. There was something that happened, and it was related to Dulio¡¯s Zenith Tempest. ¡®That guy gathered cloud purposely?¡¯ Dulio sent a barrage of wind blades toward Hagoromo Gitsune. Not only that, he extended his left hand to the sky. ¡°I hope you can take this with no problem!¡± Said Dulio with a smile. Lighting began to crackle in the sky. Hagoromo Gitsune looked up. It was a ridiculous situation. The lightning turned into something like a whip and struck Hagoromo Gitsune. Tzt! Crackle¨C Bang! It destroyed the ground and engulfed Hagoromo Gitsune inside it. The lighting kept hitting the same spot until her figure couldn¡¯t be seen from the outside. At that moment, the wind blades that Dulio sent earlier had arrived and passed the lighting where Hagoromo Gitsune was located. It didn¡¯t stop there. Tobio sent Canis Lykaon to strike Hagoromo Gitsune. ¡°Use the blade, Canis!¡± Ordered Tobio as he pointed his index finger at the lighting. ¡°Woof!¡± Canis Lykaon tried to approach and slash Hagoromo Gitsune with the sword in its mouth. Diehauser also sent another batch of magic barrages toward Hagoromo Gitsune. They hit the same spot as the lightning. But, at that time, a clear voice rang. ¡°Is this it?¡± Suddenly, the lighting that struck disappeared, and Hagoromo Gitsune appeared from within, completely unharmed. She held the Demon Sword that I used to fight Rizevim in her left hand while her fan was stuck inside the ground. There was a bit smoke in her fan, the result of blocking the wind slashes from Dulio earlier. Hagoromo Gitsune then pulled out her fan and swung it. Canis Lykaon was close to Hagoromo Gitsune¡¯s location and was blown away by the wind. It landed beside Tobio and growled. ¡°Grrr!!¡± ¡°Are you okay?¡± Asked Tobio without turning his head. His gaze was focused on Hagoromo Gitsune, who stood just fine after being attacked with varieties of techniques. ¡°Woof!¡± ¡°Wow¡­ This is absurd.¡± Commented Dulio. Hagoromo Gitsune¡¯s eyes flashed gold as she panned over the three enemies that had just attacked her. She then raised her sword and said. ¡°Is it over? Then it¡¯s my turn.¡± RaizarP Author Here~ More than 100 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 193 – Hagoromo Gitsune vs Three With a sword in her hand, Hagoromo Gitsune kicked the ground and approached Diehauser at a fast speed. He was the most dangerous one among the three for her. If it was Canis Lykaon, then she was able to scare it with her Fear. Dulio¡¯s Zenith Tempest could also be blocked by her fan and tails, so it would be no problem for her. However, Diehauser¡¯s close-range fight skills would be troublesome for her. That was why she decided to go after him first. Diehauser put on a stance as he saw Hagoromo Gitsune rushing toward him. There was a slight smile on his face. ¡°So you¡¯re going for me first? It¡¯s an honor!¡± ¡°You are the most troublesome one.¡± Said Hagoromo Gitsune as she swung her sword. It was fast and was leaving a trail of black clouds from her Fear. Diehauser had prepared for the attack. He coated his fists with demonic energy and was about to block the sword. However, he changed his mind when he saw it. He had fought my old man before. The sword that Hagoromo Gitsune had was an upgraded version of Nenekirimaru. Of course, he would recognize it. He then ducked to dodge the slash and rolled back. At that time, Canis Lykaon had already pursued Hagoromo Gitsune as Tobio had no plan to take her one on one. He was following the wolf closely from behind. In a battle royale, the best strategy would be to take out the strongest fighter before fighting the other. Tobio and Dulio understood that. So Dulio also prepared his move to stop Hagoromo Gitsune. The cloud from before gathered in one place, right above Hagoromo Gitsune¡¯s head. Storm then appeared. A heavy rainfall pushed Hagoromo Gitsune¡¯s body. It was so heavy that she had a little bit of difficulty seeing her surrounding. ¡°Canis!¡± ¡°Woof!¡± Tobio quickly shortened his distance with Hagoromo Gitsune. Canis Lykaon tried to slash Hagoromo Gitsune¡¯s arm, but was blocked by her sword. At the same time, Tobio swung his scythe, aiming at Hagoromo Gitsune¡¯s neck from behind. Dulio also created an ice spear and threw it at Hagoromo Gitsune¡¯s side. It didn¡¯t stop there; Diehauser had already recovered from his fall and sent another punch with his fist covered with demonic energy towards Hagoromo Gitsune¡¯s solar plexus. She was attacked from four sides. Her sword was now still interlocked with Canis¡¯ blade, putting her at a disadvantage¡­ Well, that would only work on humans or creatures with two arms. Hagoromo Gitusne didn¡¯t even move her left hand, it was still chained to her bag. ¡°Useless.¡± Hagoromo Gitsune said in a low voice as her eyes narrowed into a slit, similar to fox eyes. In an instant, Hagoromo Gitsune¡¯s body was coated in a white aura. She used Touki. ¡®Damn! She already mastered that?¡¯ Her tails were also covered in Touki. It then moved at a fast speed. From her first tail, a big fan appeared. It was stabbed on her side and blocked by the ice spear. From her second tail, a sword appeared and blocked Tobio¡¯s scythe. It then hit Tobio in his stomach, sending him flying away. Bam! Crash! He crashed into the wall of the arena and grunted in pain. ¡°Ugh¡­ that hurts.¡± He was injured, but it was not as And finally, she blocked Diehauser¡¯s punch with three tails. The remaining tails then tried to pierce Diehauser¡¯s body. It made a sharp sound of cutting the wind as it closed into Diehauser. He tried to dodge, but his hand was caught by one of Hagoromo Gitsune¡¯s tails. ¡°You won¡¯t be able to run from Hagoromo Gitsune. Only one¡­ two people had ever managed to do that.¡± ¡°Guh!¡± The tails impaled into Diehauser¡¯s body. He was greatly injured, and then his body was gone from the arena. It seemed like the system had worked wonderfully; he was teleported away. I could feel his energy in the medical room that was prepared beforehand. ¡°Oh! It seems we have our first bail! Diehauser Belial has lost! He¡¯s teleported out, and we only have three fighters left in the arena!¡± Azazel shouted loudly. It invited a cheer from the youkai side. ¡°Hagoromo-sama!¡± ¡°Hagoromo Gitsune-sama!¡± ¡°Long live Kyoto Youkai!!!¡± ¡°Long live Hagoromo Gitsune-sama!¡± ¡°Hahahaha, it seems the youkai are excited! What do you think, Sirzechs? How is your feeling after your faction bailed first?!¡± Mocked Azazel. He was happy that his faction didn¡¯t get bailed out first, what a dick. Sirzechs didn¡¯t seem to really care about his mocking. ¡°It¡¯s fine. In a battle royale, the one who lost first usually poses the most trouble among the participants. That means Hagoromo Gitsune had thought that Diehauser was the most dangerous one among her enemy and took him out first. In a way, you can say that I am proud of him for being able to pose trouble for Hagoromo Gitsune.¡± ¡°I see, so you take it like that, huh?! Well¡­ I can¡¯t deny that though.¡± ¡°Troublesome.¡± As if she didn¡¯t care about the commentator, Hagoromo Gitsune flicked her hand and freed her sword from Canis Lykaon. Then with her tail, she sent Canis Lykaon flying toward Tobio. He, who had just recovered, was surprised when Canis Lykaon flew to him. ¡°Woah!¡± He caught Canis Lykaon and looked at his condition. ¡°Are you okay?¡± ¡°W-Woof!¡± ¡°It¡¯s hard¡­ She¡¯s so strong.¡± Muttered Tobio with a weak laugh. ¡°Maybe I should just give up? ¡­Yes, let¡¯s give up.¡± He then stood up and raised his hand. ¡°Umm! I give up!¡± Tobio then shouted. As soon as he shouted, he was teleported to the medical room. The spectators were silent, and Hagoromo Gitsune also couldn¡¯t process what happened under the heavy rainfall that poured into her. She was starting to get irritated with the rain, so she dispersed the cloud with her fan. Azazel also couldn¡¯t say something as her jaw dropped. Sirzechs and Michael chuckled beside him. This couldn¡¯t do; there was no commentator at all. After a few seconds, Azazel recovered and shouted angrily. ¡°T-T-T-That bastard!! I should¡¯ve sent Vali instead of him!¡± Well, everyone ignored Azazel¡¯s angry shout and focused on the arena. Hagormo Gitsune and Dulio stared at each other. Hagoromo Gitunse put her weapons back to her tail, leaving only a single Katana in her hand, and spoke. ¡°It seems that you are the only one left.¡± ¡°It seems so.¡± Answered Dulio. ¡°Why don¡¯t you just give up? I dislike a persistent man.¡± ¡°Unfortunately, I can¡¯t do that,¡± Dulio replied. His body was then covered in light energy as a light spear appeared around him. ¡°I am the hope of the Heaven Faction, you see?¡± ¡°Is that so?¡± Hagoromo Gitsune smirked. ¡°It will hurt a lot.¡± ¡°Hahahaha. Please go easy on me.¡± RaizarP Author Here~ More than 100 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 194 – First Victory! Dulio was the one who made the first move. Dozen of wind and ice spears appeared around him as he jumped back. The cloud in the sky also thickened; it crackled with lightning. Zenith Tempest had shown its real power. Once again, I realized that Longinus was a cheat. The spears were then launched at Hagoromo Gitsune at the same time. It flew at a fast speed. ¡°Hoh?¡± Hagoromo Gitsune looked at the spears with an amazed gaze. She dodged some of them as they flew past her, embedded in the ground, creating a deep hole here and there. Some of the spears couldn¡¯t be dodged, so she cut them with her sword. ¡°What else do you have in your sleeves?¡± ¡°Well, look up.¡± Answered Dulio. Hagoromo Gitsune usually wouldn¡¯t follow what her enemy said. However, this was a rare occasion when she decided to follow her enemy''s advice. He was still a distance away, so she was not too worried about being attacked from a close range. She looked up and saw that the cloud above her had crackled with blue lightning. The lightning danced in the sky before focusing on the spot right above her. If that lighting hit Hagoromo Gitsune, it would be fatal for even her. But¡­ ¡®Dulio doesn¡¯t know her sword can destroy the supernatural.¡¯ ¡°Is this your strongest move?¡± Asked Hagoromo Gitsune with a mocking tone. ¡°You have underestimated me.¡± She took a stance and readied herself to take on the lightning. Even if the sword could destroy the supernatural force, there was still a force behind the attack to be taken. Destroying it didn¡¯t mean she destroyed the force behind the attack. She powered up her Touki and gripped her sword tighter. As she did that, the lighting fell from the sky. Even my eyes couldn¡¯t follow its movement. But, at that time, Hagoromo Gitsune thrust her sword at the lightning. As soon as the sword touched the lightning, it immediately dispersed. But, Dulio had already moved. It seemed that he had anticipated her to block the lightning as he had made his way behind Hagoromo Gitsune. The storm intensified, it now covered the whole arena, and the wind was too strong for normal people to stand. Although the match was held inside the barrier, it was too intense for a friendly fight. Usually, I would stop this. But, because I knew Hagoromo Gitsune¡¯s real power, I let the match continue. ¡°Cough. I am sorry for the shameful behavior earlier; I will continue to comment on the match!¡± Azazel finally recovered from his anger. ¡°It seems that Dulio had focused his attack toward Hagoromo Gitsune! He started using his Zenith Tempest to the limit! He¡¯s flying!¡± In Dulio¡¯s hand, lightning cracked, and fire surged out. It was a combination of fire and lighting, and he planned to attack Hagoromo Gitsune with that, knowing that she would still be able to fight back. The wind swirled around and lifted him to the sky at his back. He was flying even without wings. He was ridiculous. ¡°So you can fly? What an interesting human. But¡­¡± Hagoromo Gitsune took the spear from her tail with her left hand and made a throwing motion. ¡°I have defeated a lot of flying enemies.¡± She threw the spear toward Dulio in the sky and launched herself with her tail following after it. ¡°Woah!¡± Dulio controlled himself in the sky and dodged the spear. But Hagoromo Gitsune had prepared herself near him; she had predicted his movement. ¡°Hello there.¡± Said Hagoromo Gitsune with a big grin. She then swung her sword. Dulio blocked her sword with his fist, which was covered with lightning and fire. They were immediately destroyed, and the sword cut right through his right arm. Blood spurted out from the wound. ¡°Woah! Hagoromo Gitsune cut Dulio¡¯s hand! What a ruthless attack! But don¡¯t worry, we have a lot of Phoenix Tears to heal the fighters wounds! It¡¯s thanks to the devils for donating phoenix tears!¡± Shouted Azazel. He sounded excited by the development of the fight. ¡°Guh!¡± He grunted and immediately sent an attack with her left fist. However, it was stopped by Hagoromo Gitsune¡¯s tail, and he was flung out to the ground. Crash! He crashed into the ground and created a huge crater. Hagoromo Gitsune fell to the ground and landed right beside him as she couldn¡¯t fly. She was fine because she used Touki, but the same couldn¡¯t be said for Dulio. He had a hard time standing up, and I judged that he couldn¡¯t fight again. Hagoromo Gitsune intended to approach him, but I appeared between them and raised my hand to stop her. ¡°It¡¯s enough.¡± ¡°It¡¯s too easy.¡± She stopped in her track before putting her sword away in her tail. ¡°It seems the match is over!¡± ¡°I-It¡¯s not over yet,¡± Dulio said as he picked his body up. He was injured all over his body. He was in no condition to fight. I approached him and pushed his body with my hand. With just a light push, he fell to her butt. ¡°You can¡¯t continue the fight anymore,¡± I said lightly. ¡°Ha-hahaha, I see. Well, she¡¯s so strong.¡± ¡°It¡¯s natural.¡± Answered Hagoromo Gitsune proudly. ¡°I surrender. I lost.¡± As soon as Dulio surrendered, his body was surrounded by light and teleported away to the medical room. I then looked at Azazel, and he nodded his head. ¡°Alright!¡± I shouted at the spectators. ¡°The first fight is over!¡± The spectators were excited. There was no booing from the devils or anyone. They had recognized youkai¡¯s strength after seeing Hagoromo Gitsune. Most people cheered at her victory, that bloated her ego. She grinned at the spectators and crossed her arms. I guess it was fine; she had the right to brag after winning again three people that considered the strongest from each faction. And so I declared. ¡°The winner is! Hagoromo Gitsune!¡± ¡°WOAAAHH!!¡± ¡°Hagoromo-sama!¡± ¡°Long Live Youkai!!¡± The first fight was over. But I hate waiting. So I announced. ¡°I guess you guys are bored if you need to wait, right? Without further ado, let¡¯s continue to the second fight!¡± And the spectators cheered. RaizarP Author Here~ More than 100 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 195 – Exhibition Match ¡°For the second fight, it¡¯s one versus one! Whoever wanted to fight, feel free to jump to the arena! You are allowed to choose your opponent freely!¡± As soon as I shouted that, I remembered something. There was someone that I forgot to take before we came here. The most notorious battle-maniac from the youkai side. ¡®Tsuchigumo¡­ Well, he will be fine with Crom Cruach. At least he won¡¯t get bored for a while.¡¯ A few seconds later, someone from the devil''s side stood up and jumped into the arena. He was the young devil that approached us earlier. He landed on the side of the arena and walked toward the middle where I was standing. ¡°It seems we have our first fighter! Who wil-¡° Before I finished my sentence, the devil cut me off. ¡°You. I will fucking kill you in this match.¡± Well, it seems he still didn¡¯t believe my strength. He looked at me with a ridiculing smile. I looked in Azazel¡¯s direction, and he smiled as if he enjoyed this situation. Sirzechs looked tired, but he nodded his head while moving his mouth. ¡®Just beat him.¡¯ I guess that was the only way to make the other stop ridiculing me. I was planning to save my strength to fight a stronger opponent later, but it couldn¡¯t be helped. It was not like it would take a lot of stamina to defeat him. ¡°Haa¨C¡° I sighed. ¡°It seems the new fighter wants to fight me. Azazel, come down here and be the new referee.¡± ¡°Nah, I don¡¯t need a referee. Or what? Are you scared that no one will help you when you lose to me? I know that you can only hide, unlike the girl earlier. The pressure that made us kneel earlier was also that girl, right? Don¡¯t be so cocky when you hide behind a girl¡¯s back!¡± Is this guy an idiot? No, he was an idiot. Youkai Fear was indeed similar to each other, but it also held a bit of difference. If he couldn¡¯t even differentiate between our Fear, then he was just a small fry. I was waiting for Azazel to come down, but he shouted from the commentator seat. ¡°Just do it!¡± I shrugged my shoulder and answered. ¡°Fine. I will end this fast.¡± I didn¡¯t even bother to take my Nenekirimaru out as I walked to the side. I also crossed my arms underneath my kimono. ¡°Oi, Azazel! Give us the sign to start.¡± ¡°That isn¡¯t needed!¡± The young devil shouted as he created three magic circles around him. ¡°Take this!¡± Three red magic bullets were shot toward where I stood even before Azazel started the match. If it was only that, then I wouldn¡¯t be mad, but¡­ ¡°Oh! Look at that! He immediately attacked with Magic. How will Riku react to such attacks?!¡± Azazel shouted excitedly. He did a proper commentation in this match. It was strange, wasn¡¯t it? I was calm even when I was faced with three magic bullets that went on my way. The energy packed inside those bullets was not enough to even injure me right now; I had grown. To show the difference between our power, I smacked the magic bullets with my left hand while grinning. ¡°Riku has slapped the magic bullets! What a way to destroy his opponent''s attacks! Way to go, you bastard!¡± Azazel laughed loudly. I could hear Sirzechs mutter while holding his head. ¡°This is not what I mean by just do it.¡± Sorry Sirzechs, but you were the one who gave me permission. I was about to go easy, but you said just do it, so I did it. The young devil was shocked that I defended easily; now was the right time. Rising my chin a little, I smirked at him. ¡°Oi oi, is this the extent of your power? You can¡¯t even kill a mosquito with that!¡± ¡°Bastard!¡± He gritted his teeth in anger as he created more magic circles around his body. He also had Demonic Energy surrounding his body. ¡°Try to dodge this, bastard!¡± A barrage of Magic Bullets was launched at me. At the same time, he kicked the ground and leaped. I had a question about what he said. ¡°You¡­¡± I muttered slowly and moved at a fast speed. From his perspective, I must¡¯ve disappeared from my spot as he was stopped on his track and looked around. The Magic Bullets hit the spot where I stood before and created a small crater. That was unexpected. So he could at least make a small crater with his Magic Bullets? I should give him a compliment. ¡°Where are you! Show yourself!¡± ¡°Right here.¡± I reappeared beside him and sent a low kick toward his leg. I didn¡¯t kick him too hard. If I kicked him with all my strength, his legs would be blown away from his body. If he was injured that much, the ones in the medical team surely would give him Phoenix Tear. That would be a waste to be used on this trash. Tak! He was unprepared, so he fell on his but. ¡°Guh!¡± He grunted and looked at me. I grinned silly as I stomped on his face with my right leg and pushed him to the ground. Bam! Because the barrier that Ajuka made only teleported someone when they were unable to fight or badly injured, I could torture this cocky guy as long as I didn¡¯t go overboard. He struggled to move my feet from his face. His hands were gripping my feet, trying to throw me away, but that was useless. I ground his face while laughing. ¡°Hahahahaha. Is this it? You are challenging me with such strength? Hahahaha, take this!¡± Somehow¡­ torturing someone that got cocky and didn¡¯t understand his place was fun. ¡°Hora hora~ Do you want to say something?¡± I kept grinding my feet against his face. ¡°Hmm!! HMNN!!!¡± ¡°What a psycho! This is why you shouldn¡¯t fight a youkai!¡± Azazel shouted with a scared tone. However, I knew that he was laughing inside. But, I played along with him. ¡°Hahahaha. We are not using Fear as our symbol for nothing!¡± ¡°That¡¯s right!¡± ¡°Long live, Riku-sama!!¡± ¡°Nura clan is the best!!¡± My subordinates were shouting, following my lead. The atmosphere was good for us, that was until Sirzechs said. ¡°Enough. He surrenders.¡± After Sirzechs said that, the devil under my feet teleported away to the medical room. ¡°Tsk! That¡¯s not fun, Sirzechs.¡± I grumbled. ¡°Just forgive him with that, Riku. With this, people have understood that you are strong.¡± I glanced at the spectators, and they were looking at me with respect now, more specifically, the devils. That was strange. I just played with their comrades, but they were happy? Could it be, the guy that I played around with earlier was hated? That must be it. Well, at least I had fun. ¡°Alright then! That was only an exhibition match!¡± I shouted at the spectators. ¡°Then, let¡¯s start the real second match!¡± RaizarP Author Here~ More than 100 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 196 – This has become interesting! How do I put it? The next matches after that were purely out of enjoyment. Only low-ranked and middle-ranked ones volunteered themselves to fight. The youkai that joined the match were also just the small fry who couldn¡¯t even use Fear. Some of them won against the low-ranked devil or one winged angel and a fallen angel, but most of them lost to them due to playing too much. I wasn¡¯t needed to oversee the match as Tobio had arrived. He became the referee again, and I am now in the commentator seats, sitting with the other leaders. Right now, a fight between a middle-ranked devil against a two-winged angel was in progress. The devils managed to corner the angel, but he was not given up yet. ¡°This is getting boring,¡± I muttered to myself, and Azazel heard it. ¡°Well, it can¡¯t be helped. The strong fighters are still judging each other.¡± ¡°That¡¯s right.¡± Added Sirzechs. ¡°By the way, where is the big guy with a lot of arms, Riku? I didn¡¯t see him in youkai¡¯s seat.¡± ¡°Oh, Tsuchigumo? He¡¯s in Kyoto with Crom Cruach right now. They became a pal after fighting each other.¡± ¡°Crom Cruach? As in, Crom Cruach, the evil dragon?¡± Asked Michael. ¡°Well, yeah.¡± I grinned. ¡°They became a good pal, right, Azazel?¡± ¡°Tsk! You can say that. Words couldn¡¯t explain the bond of battle-maniacs.¡± ¡°That¡¯s unexpected.¡± Chimed Sirzechs. ¡°I thought that guy would come here. So he chose to stay at Kyoto.¡± ¡°About that¡­¡± I crossed my legs as I turned to Sirzechs. ¡°I forgot to bring him.¡± ¡°¡­¡± The three leaders looked at me in disbelief. They couldn¡¯t believe that I forgot to bring one of youkai¡¯s strongest fighters, Tsuchigumo. ¡°Oi oi, are you serious? Wouldn¡¯t he be mad when he knew that?¡± Asked Azazel. ¡°Maybe. But I think he¡¯s already on his way here, with Crom Cruach.¡± There was no way Tsuchigumo would skip something exciting like this tournament. I had told him about the location of the tournament, so I bet he was now flying on Crom Cruach¡¯s back to come here. ¡®I will not be surprised if he suddenly falls from the sky¡­ right about now.¡¯ I looked at the sky beyond the barrier. The barrier was inside a separate dimension, so no one would be able to enter without the permission of the barrier creator, or at least that was how it was supposed to be. ¡°Sirzechs, I will open a part of the barrier a little; you can fix it later.¡± I stood up and called Nenekirimaru to my hand as I said that. His body jolted a little as he looked at me. ¡°What are you trying to do?¡± ¡°Nothing.¡± I grinned at him. ¡°Just making a way to enter the barrier for one of youkai¡¯s fighters.¡± I jumped off and swung my blade as I reached the top barrier. The barrier was cut without creating any sound. It created a hole of around 3 meters. At the same time, two people entered the barrier before it was closed off by Sirzechs from the commentator seat. I glanced at him while falling to the ground slowly and caught sight of him extending his hand toward this place while frowning. The crowd was clamoring. They were confused by what had happened. The fight was also stopped as both fighters looked our way. Fortunately, Azazel was quick to catch on. ¡°Just ignore what happened earlier! Two people were late, so the leader of the youkai clan opened the barrier for them!¡± The fighters nodded their heads and continued their fight. I shrugged my shoulders as I landed softly at the edge of the colosseum beside two new presences that had just entered the barrier. They were Tsuchigumo and Crom Cruach in their human form. ¡°Yo!¡± I greeted them, and Tsuchigumo scoffed. ¡°How dare you leave me out. Thankfully this guy could use teleport.¡± He pointed at Crom Cruach. ¡°Hahahaha. I am also interested in the fight! Can I join too?¡± I snapped my fingers and grinned. ¡°Of course. As long as you are part of a force. How is it? Want to join my Hyakki Yakkou in order to participate in the fight? You may fight anyone of your choice if you participate, you know?¡± This was a chance to get an Evil Dragon that was called to be equal to Ddraig and Albion. Crom Cruach stroked his chin and grinned. ¡°Very well. I will join you.¡± ¡°Nice! Then, how about you participate in the next fight?¡± ¡°That will be ideal.¡± Answered Crom Cruach. ¡°Oi, I will fight next. You will fight after me.¡± Tsuchigumo chimed in, certainly pissed because he was ignored. Crom Cruach looked at him and asked, ¡°Oh? But, who is your opponent? Do you know his or her name?¡± ¡°Hah! I know his name. He pissed me off with his cocky attitude when in that world.¡± Answered Tsuchigumo. Oho? I felt like something interesting would happen. Crom Cruach seemed to have a same mind as me as he said, ¡°Very well, I will let you fight next.¡± ¡°Right. I have been itching to fight this guy because I feel like he¡¯s looking down on me too much.¡± Grumbled Tsuchigumo as he eyed the devil''s spectators seat. So the one who pissed Tsuchigumo was a devil? I tried to follow his gaze and found someone familiar to me. He was still ignorant that he was targeted by Tsuchigumo. ¡®He¡¯s too unlucky.¡¯ I could only hope for him to survive. But, with Ajuka¡¯s barrier working perfectly, I didn¡¯t need to worry about him at all. ¡°If you want to fight later, just jump in the middle of the arena when the referee asked if someone wanted to fight. You will be asked to choose your opponent at that time.¡± ¡°Sure. That¡¯s easy. I guess we need to wait at that side first, right?¡± He pointed at the youkai spectator¡¯s seat.¡± I nodded my head. ¡°Yeah. I will leave you now.¡± As I had nothing to do here, I jumped back to the commentator area while being greeted by Sirzechs displeased gaze. ¡°My bad. It¡¯s an emergency.¡± ¡°What are you talking about?¡± He asked, clearly still angry by what I did. ¡°If I leave him alone, he would destroy the barrier. That would be troublesome, no?¡± I sat on my previous seat while crossing my leg. Sirzechs blinked his eyes and touched his chin. ¡°That might be true.¡± ¡°See?¡± As I said that, a cheer erupted from the devil¡¯s side. It seems that the winner is the devil. Tobio quickly announced the winner and asked for the next fighter. Tsuchigumo immediately responded by jumping to the arena. Tobio, as a referee, asked his name and Tsuchigumo answered. ¡°I am Tsuchigumo! I will choose Ddraig, who resides inside Hyoudou Issei as my enemy.¡± As expected, this would be interesting. Did he hear about Ddraig from Crom Cruach? And so¡­ ¡°This turned out interesting instantly,¡± I muttered to myself. RaizarP Author Here~ More than 100 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 197 – Tsuchigumo vs Issei [1] Like an idiot, Issei pointed at himself and shouted. ¡°Me?!¡± ¡°No, no, bring out that dragon, lad.¡± Answered Tsuchigumo. ¡°Use that something called Balance Breaker like Vali. I know that you can use that to bring out that dragon as your armor or something.¡± ¡°N-no, I can¡¯t.¡± Issei shook his hands in front of him. Rias and the others from her peerage looked at Issei¡¯s pathetic figure with a wry smile. She ultimately patted Issei¡¯s shoulder and whispered something. Right after that, the look on Issei¡¯s face changed. He clenched his fist, and his expression changed into a perverted one. He then raised both his hands and shouted. ¡°Uwoooohh!! I will win this!!¡± Without wasting much time, Issei ran down from the spectators'' seat, parting the devils in front of him, and jumped to the arena while activating his boosted gear. [Boost!] He landed with no problem and pointed at Tsuchigumo with his left hand that was encased with Boosted Gear. ¡°I will defeat you, Tsuchigumo! Rias-senpai¡¯s boobs are waiting for me!¡± It was as I had expected. Azazel and I laughed at the same time. ¡°Hahahahahaha. He never changed, huh?¡± I said as I looked at Issei. ¡°Buahahahaha, Sirzechs! That boy is too funny!¡± Sirzechs held his head and muttered. ¡°My sister¡­ To think she would go that far¡­¡± ¡°I can¡¯t comment on anything¡­¡± Added Michael. ¡°Well, you don¡¯t need to. I think that guy will show us something interesting.¡± I put my elbow on the chair armrest and rested my head on my hand. Tsuchigumo really decided on something interesting. I didn¡¯t know how strong Issei was right now. Did he already manage to awaken his Balance Breaker? Or did he even go through the length of my expectation and could use Juggernaut Drive? If he was able to use Juggernaut Drive, I guess even Tsuchigumo would have a hard time fighting him in his human form. This was just a sparring match; there was no way Issei would use Juggernaut Drive, right? But, considering what Rias did earlier and Tsuchigumo¡¯s personality, which was twisted and he wanted to fight a strong opponent, I guess the possibility of Issei using Juggernaut Drive was still there. ¡°Hey, Azazel. I will step up if Issei uses Juggernaut Drive.¡± ¡°Hmm? Do you think it¡¯s possible for him to use that?¡± Asked Azazel. ¡°Also, how did you know about Juggernaut Drive? I thought it was only me who knew about it.¡± ¡°I heard something from someone, let¡¯s just put it like that. More importantly, if he used Juggernaut Drive, it would be too dangerous to continue the match.¡± ¡°Are you afraid that he will harm Tsuchigumo, Riku-kun?¡± Asked Sirzechs. ¡°No.¡± I shook my head. ¡°It¡¯s the opposite.¡± They still didn¡¯t know why Tsuchigumo was feared back in his world. He was known as the strongest battle maniac that went too far with his fight. He was even willing to fight until death if he was not satisfied yet. ¡°I am afraid that Tsuchigumo would go on a rampage.¡± ¡°Is that so? Is he that strong to the point you need to be worried about it?¡± Asked Azazel. But he quickly denied his own words. ¡°I don¡¯t think he¡¯s¡­ never mind. He even fought Vali and Crom Cruach in his human form that¡¯s supposed to be weaker than his youkai form.¡± ¡°Correct.¡± I nodded my head. ¡°Well, for now, let¡¯s just watch this interesting show. Issei stood in front of Tsuchigumo with a determined gaze. Tobio was standing on the side of the arena because he knew that the match this tie would need a lot of space. ¡°Tsuchigumo! I will defeat you and squeeze Rias-senpai¡¯s boobs as my reward!¡± Issei shouted with a silly grin on his face. ¡°Hahaha! I don¡¯t understand what you meant by reward, but it seems that you are determined to win?¡± Asked Tsuchigumo as he punched his palms. ¡°Of course! I don¡¯t know why you asked me to fight you, but I am grateful for this chance! Thanks to you, I will be able to touch Rias-senpai¡¯s boobs!¡± ¡°I see. Now, kid. Stop talking and use that armor similar to that white guy.¡± ¡°Armor?¡± Asked Issei. Then Ddraig spoke from the gauntlet. [He means the Balance Breaker, partner. The one that you used when you were training with Tannin.] ¡°Oh!¡± Issei exclaimed. ¡°The Scale Mail!¡± ¡°Yeah, that one. Use it right now, or the fight won¡¯t be fun.¡± Tsuchigumo crossed his arms and waited for Issei to use his Balance Breaker. ¡°Let¡¯s do this, partner!¡± [Alright, partner!] Firstly, Issei put his left hand in front of his chest and shouted. ¡°Promotion!¡± [Queen!] After he was promoted to Queen, he then started shouting. ¡°Haaaa!!¡± Demonic energy started to gather around his body. The orb on his gauntlet was repeatedly blinking; each blink was faster than before. Wind soared from him, and Ddraig''s voice repeated a few times. [Boost][Boost][Boost][Boost][Boost!] [Balance Breaker!] Finally, Issei¡¯s body was covered in red light. As the light began to dim, Issei slowly appeared. He was covered in red armor, similar to Vali, with red dragon wings spurted from his back. [Boosted Gear: Scale Mail!] ¡°Yosh! I am ready!¡± Said Issei. ¡°Good!¡± Tsuchigumo started laughing as he put on a fighting stance. ¡°Come!¡± ¡°Don¡¯t regret it!¡± Issei put on a stance too. ¡°Because I am strong when I use this!¡± [Boost!] Issei kicked the ground, rushing toward Tsuchigumo while brandishing his fist. It was covered in Demonic and Dragon energy. He managed to reach Tsuchigumo at a fast speed. If I compared him with Vali, then he was half of his speed, which was already impressive, knowing that Vali had a lot of experience using his Balance Breaker while Issei was only turned into devils around a month ago. ¡°Uoooh!!¡± With a shout, Issei threw his punch at Tsuchigumo. ¡°Hahahaha! Nice!¡± Tsuchigumo took the punch head-on. A fist and a palm clashed, but Tsuchigumo managed to win the clash with his technique. He grabbed Issei¡¯s wrist and yanked him. Issei was sent flying at a fast speed and crashed against the wall. Dust was created around him, and no one knew Issei¡¯s fate. Crash! ¡°Oooh! Issei, in his Balance Breaker, is not able to win against Tsuchigumo and was sent flying!¡± Shouted Azazel. ¡°Hahahahaha, come at me again, kid! You are better than I thought!¡± ¡°Ouch ouch ouch.¡± Issei grunted in pain. He was fine, thanks to his armor. He stood up again as the dust started to drift off. ¡°That hurts.¡± Grumbled Issei. Tsuchigumo laughed madly. ¡°I see! That hurts, huh?¡± He then gestured to Issei with his hands. ¡°Come! I will show you what hurts actually is.¡± RaizarP Author Here~ More than 100 Advanced chapters (For ALL my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 198 – Tsuchigumo vs Issei [2] I have uploaded a new novel in this site! The update will be daily until it catch up to the one in webnovel. Put it in your reading list folks! 5 Star rating is appreciated. Thanks! [Boost!] Issei boosted himself once again as the green gem in his armor flashed a light. He leaped to Tsuchigumo as his wings boosted his speed. He was faster than before as he had boosted himself with Boosted Gear. ¡°Oho?¡± Tsuchigumo let out a low voice, interested in what just happened. ¡°You can still go faster?¡± Issei didn¡¯t answer Tsuchigumo. Instead, he yelled with all his strength. He gathered the demonic energy around his hands. ¡°Haaaa!!¡± He aimed at Tsuchigumo¡¯s head. His punch was also deadly, as it severed the wind. Woosh! Tsuchigumo met Issei¡¯s punch with his face. He didn¡¯t try to block or parry it, surprising the spectators with his brazenness. ¡°Woah!! Issei managed to land a punch at Tsuchigumo! He couldn¡¯t react to it at all!¡± Shouted Azazel. ¡°No.¡± I quickly denied Azazel¡¯s claim. ¡°It¡¯s not that he couldn¡¯t react to Issei¡¯s punch, but he purposely let the punch land on his face.¡± ¡°Huh? Why did he do that?¡± Asked Sirzechs. ¡°Because¡­¡± I paused my sentence as Tsuchigumo¡¯s laughter rang from the middle of the arena. ¡°Hahahahahahaha!¡± His face that was punched by Issei slowly turned toward Issei. ¡°Wha? No way!¡± Issei gasped and tried to run, but Tsuchigumo¡¯s hand caught his left arm before he could run away. ¡°L-Let it go!¡± ¡°Hahahahaha!¡± His laughter continued. ¡°I can feel that one!¡± His masked lips curled up, and Issei shuddered when he saw that. ¡°Let me give you one punch.¡± Tsuchigumo pulled his right fists. They were covered with a black cloud of smoke. It was Tsuchigumo¡¯s Fear that further enhanced his strength. ¡°That seems bad¡­¡± muttered Sirzechs. ¡°That is indeed bad,¡± I added while grinning. Issei was panicked. ¡°Partner! Do something about it!¡± [Use your strongest technique, partner! We have enough boost!] ¡°I see!¡± Issei took a step backward with his right leg and prepared Dragon Shot with his right hand. ¡°Hoh? What is this? You still hide something interesting after all!¡± ¡°I won¡¯t lose against you!¡± ¡°Hahaha, good! That¡¯s the spirit!¡± Both of them gathered their strength while staring at each other. Issei had a bit of the upper hand due to his armor, but Tsuchigumo¡¯s body was nothing to scoff at too. His regenerative power would be able to fix his wound at a moment''s notice, and he won¡¯t die even if he was severed into two. Now I was intrigued. Would Issei¡¯s Dragon Shot beat Tsuchigumo? With him being boosted a few times by Boosted Gear, his strength was surely similar to high-ranked devil. Tsuchigumo was able to beat Ultimate-Class devil with no problem, but he was still able to get injured. Even though Issei¡¯s strength was only similar to High-Ranked Devil, his Dragon Shot was surely at the same level as Ultimate Class devil¡¯s attack. That was why I was rather curious about the outcome. The exchanges between two punches with the power similar to Ultimate-Class, what would happen was intriguing. Though Issei¡¯s punch was actually shooting a beam, that didn¡¯t really matter. A few seconds had passed since they accumulated the energy in their fist. A grin plastered on Tsuchigumo¡¯s face as he said, ¡°Are you ready, kid?¡± ¡°Hah! I am ready!¡± [Boost!][Transfer!] Both of them threw their punches at the same time. Red versus Black. It was a rather similar color, but the energies used in their punches were different. Fear versus Demonic Energy combined with Dragon Energy. The Fear around Tsuchigumo¡¯s hand was dancing like smoke from a cigarette, while Issei¡¯s Demonic Energy was compressed in a sphere shape in front of his hand. He punched the sphere, and a beam of demonic energy was shot toward Tsuchigumo. Tsuchigumo¡¯s fist met with the beam and created a big shockwave. Winds raged in the arena, toppling a few spectators who couldn¡¯t handle the clash. Tsuchigumo¡¯s hands were burnt by the blast of the beam, but he didn¡¯t even flinch. Instead, he laughed. ¡°Hahahahaha, what is this?! Is this all your power?!¡± ¡°Kuh!¡± Issei had a hard time pushing Tsuchigumo. His left hand was held by Tsuchigumo¡¯s hand; it was tied. ¡°It¡¯s honestly disappointing! I am expecting more, at least at a similar level to that white guy!¡± ¡°I¡­ I won¡¯t lose!!¡± Issei shouted, then added more Demonic Energy to his attack. The beam became larger and stronger. Tsuchigumo was pushed back a little, but he was not over yet. ¡°This is it! This is what I was talking about!¡± He held the beam with one hand and then gathered his energy in the others. He had an excited grin, and Issei tried to shake his hand stronger than before. ¡°What an exchange! So this is the true strength of Tsuchigumo from the youkai clan!¡± Azazel exclaimed energetically. ¡°Riku, as the leader of the youkai clan, what do you think about this exchange?¡± ¡°It¡¯s just so so. It¡¯s interesting, but I already know that Tsuchigumo will win.¡± I answered shortly. ¡°Is that so? What made you that confident.¡± ¡°Because¡­ Tsuchigumo is one of the strongest youkai in the world. His title is Hyakki Yakkou destroyer.¡± ¡°Hyakki Yakkou destroyer? Sound like bad news.¡± Said Azazel. ¡°He is bad news. There is a saying among the youkai¡­¡± I paused a little as I wanted to make it dramatic. ¡°What is it?¡± Asked Azazel curiously.¡± I stared at the exchange of power that happened in the arena and answered, ¡°Don¡¯t even try to fight the hungry Tsuchigumo. He will eat you alive.¡± ¡°¡­ That¡¯s ominous.¡± ¡°Well, he¡¯s not hungry now, so you can rest easy.¡± I stopped talking and focused on the match once again. Ddraig¡¯s concerned voice rang in the arena loudly. [Partner! Go away now!] ¡°I know! L-Let it go!¡± ¡°Why don¡¯t you take this attack first, kid?¡± ¡°I will die! I don¡¯t want to die before touching Rias-senpai¡¯s boobs!¡± ¡°You won¡¯t. Clench your teeth.¡± Tsuchigumo threw the punch with his free hands, aiming right at the beam instead of Issei¡¯s body. The beam was pushed back at Issei. At the same time, Tsuchigumo released Issei¡¯s hand, and he was blown away by his punch. ¡°Gaaaahh!!!¡± Issei flew fast, crashed against the wall, and made a big crack behind him. He instantly fell unconscious, and his Balance Breaker was canceled. His body was then covered in light and was teleported away to the medical room. ¡°I guess I won. This is easy.¡± Tsuchigumo said calmly. RaizarP Author Here~ More than 100 Advanced chapters (For all of my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks for the New Executive! - Not a Shrimp Big Thanks for the New Squad Leader! - Richard Darden Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 199 – The match continued! After Tsuchigumo won, he didn¡¯t seems to be satisfied with the result. Or rather, he was not satisfied with the fight itself. He stood with his arms crossed in the middle of the arena. The burnt from Issei¡¯s attack earlier had already been healed. ¡°Come! That¡¯s too easy! Give me more fight!¡± Either he didn¡¯t know the rule, or he knew but chose to ignore it; Tsuchigumo was smiling. He was not afraid of anyone, as he believed that he was stronger than anyone. Usually, no one would answer him after they saw what he did to the Sekiryuutei. He was strong, to the point he was able to beat Sekiryuutei without any problem. However, there were exceptions; they were the so-called battle maniacs in this world. One of such battle maniacs came from the devil''s side. ¡°I will fight you!¡± A boy with black hair stood with an excited grin, surrounded by the young devils, including Rias and Sona. He was also someone who was confident in his strength, and he believed that he could fight the weird youkai called Tsuchigumo. That boy was Sairaorg Bael, the one that pushed me to the point I used Offense Fear, and thanks to that, I managed to get even stronger. ¡°Hou? Come here then. I will fight you delightfully!¡± Exclaimed Tsuchigumo. ¡°Of course!¡± Sairaorg shouted as he jumped from where he stood. Rias was about to grab him, but she ultimately stopped herself. Maybe she understood that stopping Sairaorg was useless? Sairaorg ultimately landed right in front of Tsuchigumo. They stared at each other with wild grins on their faces. ¡°You are strong; I can feel that.¡± Commented Sairaorg. ¡°Hahaha, of course! Did you not see how I crushed that red guy earlier?¡± ¡°I did see it! That was magnificent! But, you are still holding back, aren¡¯t you?¡± ¡°That¡¯s impressive.¡± Praised Tsuchigumo. ¡°You are one of a few who knew that I was holding back.¡± Seeing a chance to make a comment, Azazel jumped from his chair and swung his hand energetically. ¡°What a surprise! To think that Tsuchigumo is still hiding his true strength!¡± The crowd murmured, especially the devils. The Sekiryuutei was defeated, yet his opponent wasn¡¯t even using his full strength. When someone thought about it, the incident was quite absurd. However, for me, it was a normal thing. After all, Issei¡¯s motivation wasn¡¯t high enough. He was promised to be able to touch Rias¡¯ boobs if he won; that was it. If, by chance, Rias was in the arena with Issei, maybe the situation wouldn¡¯t be like this. Instead, he would at least be able to push Tsuchigumo to reveal his true form. ¡®How ironic. His plot armor is still strong, but not too strong to the point he will win all fights.¡¯ Tobio was looking to this place. He was confused as he didn¡¯t know what to do next. There has yet to be an instance where the same people fought twice before, so he became confused about what he should do. Azazel nodded at him, gesturing that it would be okay to continue the match as now. ¡°Alright.¡± Tobio stepped between Tsuchigumo and Sairaorg. ¡°This match will become rather dangerous, so I will put a barrier to separate the arena and the spectator seats. Is that okay?¡± ¡°No problem.¡± Answered Sairaorg. ¡°Do what you need to do.¡± Added Tsuchigumo. ¡°Alright. Then I will ask you to make a distance between each other before we start the match.¡± Unexpectedly, Tsuchigumo followed Tobio¡¯s instructions obediently. He went to the side of the arena while Sairaord went to the side across from Tsuchigumo. Next, Tobio made a barrier that separated the spectators and the arena before he asked. ¡°Are both sides ready?¡± ¡°Yeah.¡± Replied Tsuchigumo. ¡°Wait.¡± Answered Sairaorg. He then put on a horse stance and shouted. ¡°Haaa!!¡± A yellow aura began to appear around him. It intensified and began to turn into golden armor. A golden lion head was protecting his chest, and he wore a golden helmet with a mane that looked like a lion. After he was done transforming, he shouted. ¡°Balance Breaker! Regulus Rey Leather Rex!¡± ¡°I see. You are like that red guy!¡± Shouted Tsuchigumo. ¡°Yeah, it¡¯s similar.¡± Answered Sairaorg as he gestured at Tsuchigumo with his hand. ¡°Why don¡¯t you turn into your real form?¡± ¡°It isn¡¯t needed.¡± Tsuchigumo, for the first time, took a stance with his left hand in front of his body. ¡°This form is enough.¡± ¡°Don¡¯t regret that. Hey referee! I am ready!¡± Sairaorg said as she put on a fighting stance. Both fighters were similar to each other, only, Tsuchigumo had the advantage of having multiple pairs of hands. ¡°Well then. Match, start!¡± As soon as Tobio started the match, both fighters kicked the ground at the same time. They moved so fast, even faster than a raging wind, and met in the middle of the arena while punching each other¡¯s faces. Both were smiling with their faces bruised from the punch; they were happy after meeting an opponent with whom they could use all of their strengths. ¡°Hahahahaha.¡± ¡°Hahahahaha!¡± Mad laughter filled the arena as both fighters pulled themselves. They stared at each other for a second, then, as if they were agreeing on moving at the same time, they sent a barrage of punches at each other. The punches met with each other and created a small shockwave. Tsuchigumo only used two hands to match Sairaorg. What a psycho; this was why I could never understand battle maniac. ¡°Hora hora hora! I can do this all day, golden boy!¡± Shouted Tsuchigumo. ¡°Hahahaha. I know that! I can also do this all day. However, how about this?!¡± Sairaorg¡¯s body began to be covered with a ridiculous amount of yellow aura. He used Touki on top of his Sacred Gear, further enhancing his strength. He focused all his energy on his right hand and sent a jab. ¡°Ora!¡± The punch hit Tsuchigumo¡¯s face directly without him being able to block it. No, he didn¡¯t block it on purpose. Crash! Tsuchigumo was sent flying and crashed into the barrier that Tobio made, creating a ripple that shook the barrier. ¡°That is my serious punch, Tsuchigumo.¡± Said Sairaorg as he grinned happily. RaizarP Author Here~ More than 100 Advanced chapters (For all of my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Big Thanks for the New Executive! - Not a Shrimp Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 200 – Tsuchigumo vs Sairaorg I looked at the side where Tsuchigumo was sent flying to. A cloud of dust was still covering the area, but from what I see, the barrier had a small crack, and Tsuchigumo was bleeding from his face. His white mask was painted red by the blood, and his body was a mess. ¡°Kukuku.¡± A low laugh escaped Tsuchigumo¡¯s mouth. ¡°This is it.¡± He slowly got up and dusted his body. He wiped the blood on his mask with his hand as he took a step forward. ¡°You are strong.¡± He kept walking slowly. However, as he walked, a change happened to his body. His muscle bulged a little; his skin turned into an orange hue. His hair became longer, and his mask became more sinister. ¡°I will admit that you are strong. That¡¯s why I will fight you with all my strength.¡± His clothes were ripped, replaced with wild short pants and a tank top. Sairaorg was excited as he looked at Tsuchigumo. The change that happened to his body meant that he was turning into his real form. The others might not know this, but Tsuchigumo¡¯s strength in real form was not too different from his human form strength. However, his skill was different. He was used to his real form, and there was one more thing that made him different. He was now finished transforming. His body was more than 3 meters tall; he was a giant. Sairaorg gazed with awe. His eyes held a hint of respect. ¡°Amazing.¡± Muttered Sairaorg. ¡°Let¡¯s do this.¡± Tsuchigumo stopped when he was still a distance away from Sairaorg, confusing the spectators. He took a deep breath and then spurted a white web from his mouth that covered the whole barrier, making a shapeshift ring. He then crouched and put his right hand on the ground, imitating a sumo stance. ¡°Come, golden boy!¡± Shouted Tsuchigumo. ¡°Yeah!¡± Sairaorg rushed toward Tsuchigumo while covering his body with Touki. As soon as Sairaorg moved, Tsuchigumo jumped back. ¡°What happened?! Why did Tsuchigumo jump back at such a time?!¡± Asked Azazel. He was having fun commentating on the match. He then looked at me. ¡°Can you explain it?¡± ¡°Haa¡­ well. You know about wrestling and sumo, right?¡± I asked Azazel back. ¡°I know. And, what is the relation of wrestle and sumo with this case?¡± ¡°It¡¯s related. Because¡­ what Tsuchigumo did was exactly that.¡± Tsuchigumo jumped into the net behind him and propelled himself toward Sairaorg in a tackling motion. The wind was severed as he advanced toward Sairaorg. As Sairaorg approached Tsuchigumo at a fast speed and was close to him already, he couldn¡¯t possibly dodge the incoming attack. The only choice that he had was to brace himself for the impact. ¡°This is bad...¡± Sairaorg muttered as he sent a punch to stop Tsuchigumo¡¯s advance. However, that was useless. Tsuchigumo¡¯s body was not as weak as the other. ¡°Huahahahahaha!¡± Sairaorg¡¯s fist met with Tsuchigumo¡¯s body, creating another wave of a shockwave that knocked the ring net around the barrier. The spectators were awed, and they began to cheer. ¡°Uwoooh!! Tsuchigumo!!¡± ¡°Sairaorg-sama!! You can beat him!!¡± ¡°Bael-sama!¡± ¡°Don¡¯t lose, Tsuchigumo!!¡± They stood up in anticipation. Both fighters were still trying to push each other. At that time, Tsuchigumo made a strange movement. He pivoted on one leg and rotated his body. ¡°Huh?!¡± Sairaorg was surprised by the sudden movement. His punch was now slid off Tsuchigumo¡¯s body, and he lost his balance. ¡°Hah!¡± With a fast speed, Tsuchigumo sent a roundhouse kick at Sairaorg¡¯s body. The kick landed cleanly, and Sairaorg was sent flying. As he was in the sky, Sairaorg¡¯s wings spurted out, and he tried to adjust his balance. However, Tsuchigumo didn¡¯t let him do that. He was already running beside Sairaorg and smashed him to the ground. Bam! ¡°Hauk!¡± The air inside his lungs was pushed out as a small crater was made with him in the center. But, that didn¡¯t stop Tsuchigumo from jumping. He jumped high in the sky before spiting a web to the ground. He then grabbed the web and propelled himself to Sairaorg on the ground. ¡°Hora!¡± Tsuchigumo shouted as he landed right on top of Sairaorg. ¡°GUH!¡± Blood spurted out from Sairaorg¡¯s mouth. His internal organ must have been injured from that attack. ¡°Woah! W-what a one-sided match!¡± Even Azazel was surprised by Tsuchigumo. He was far too terrifying right now compared to when he fought Issei. ¡°It¡¯s not over yet,¡± I said to Azazel. ¡°Huh?¡± As Azazel let out a strange voice, Tsuchigumo picked up Sairaorg by his leg. Sairaorg¡¯s condition now was rather wretched. Blood covered his body, and his armor was half-destroyed. The world would finally understand why Tsuchigumo was feared. Even the youkai fear him, even when we arrived at the new world. Maybe he was the only one who would be okay after he took my attack head-on. ¡°Oi, is this it?¡± He slammed Sairaorg to the ground. ¡°You disappointed me! Even that quarter youkai is more durable than you.¡± A small crater was made with Sairaorg on the ground. He tried to get up, but he met Tsuchigumo¡¯s fist and pushed back again. ¡°Huak!¡± His cry of pain didn¡¯t stop Tsuchigumo to sent a barrage of punches. He kept punching the same spot where Sairaorg lay down. The devils couldn¡¯t say anything. The youkai grimaced. The angel and fallen angels looked away from the sight. ¡°Azazel, stop this.¡± I told Azazel as I jumped down from the commentator seat. I opened a hole in the barrier and landed right beside Tsuchigumo. Even though Sairaorg couldn¡¯t fight against Tsuchigumo, the reason why the match still continued was his spirit alone. He still believed he could still win. But this was enough. He couldn¡¯t win against Tsuchigumo right now. At the same time, Azazel announced. ¡°The match is over! Tsuchigumo is the winner!¡± As if he didn¡¯t care about the announcement, Tsuchigumo was still punching the same spot. ¡°Stop it, Tsuchigumo,¡± I told Tsuchigumo with a commanding tone. ¡°Hah?!¡± Tsuchigumo stopped his punches as he glared at me. ¡°What do you mean, Nura? I am still in the middle of the fight.¡± ¡°Your opponent has long since lost. You can fight again next time.¡± ¡°I am still not satisfied.¡± Answered Tsuchigumo. ¡°Then¡­¡± I paused in the middle of my sentence as I disappeared from my spot. I approached Tsuchigumo at a fast speed and kicked him in the stomach. He was sent flying and crashed into the barrier, instantly losing his consciousness, and teleported away to the medical room. ¡°I guess I need to stop you by force.¡± RaizarP More than 100 Advanced chapters (For all of my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 201 – Surprise Attack The match continued without any problem after Sairaorg was transported to the Medical room. The arena was fixed by devils and fallen angels with their miraculous magic that could build a mansion in a night. It was such a fast fix, to the point I wanted to learn their magic, however, it was impossible for me. It continued with Crom Cruach¡¯s match against Vali. Not much to say about the match except that it was a match between two monsters. They had grown stronger from before, like Tsuchigumo, and almost destroyed Tobio¡¯s barrier. Fortunately, Susanoo managed to fix the barrier in time, and the match could be continued. However, Tobio couldn¡¯t become the referee for such a match as his level was similar to theirs, not higher, so he stepped down, and I became the substitute referee¡­ again. As much as I only wanted to watch the match from the commentator seat, I had already become the substitute referee when Tobio had his match in the first round, so I was chosen again as a default, which was suck. The match continued for a few minutes as both sides didn¡¯t want to take it the hard way. They were punching at each other while using their magical energy. Vali sometimes divided Crom Cruach¡¯s strength, but he looked like he was not affected by it. It seemed like his regeneration managed to outlast the damage that Vali had done to him. In short, it was a match between two wild dragons in a human form. ¡®They are too crazy.¡¯ I only watched the duel from the side of the arena while leaning my back against the wall. I was too lazy to watch the match, as it was boring. They only punched at each other without any variety of strength. It became boring after watching what Tsuchigumo did earlier. Finally, after ten minutes, Crom Cruach let out a wild roar and concentrated his energy in his right fist. ¡°ROOAAAARRR!!¡± Vali didn¡¯t want to lose as his crystal wing let out a bright light and concentrated the energy that he stole into his hand too. Both fighters jumped back, getting ready to end the fight with their last punch. ¡°It¡¯s been fun, Crom Cruach!¡± ¡°Hahahaha, it¡¯s been fun for me too, Hakuryuukou!¡± At the end of their conversation, both of them launched themselves and met in the middle of the arena; their fists met with each other, creating a wave of a shockwave that was even stronger compared to what Tsuchigumo had created in the previous match. They were gritting their teeth, trying to overpower each side. However, before they managed to finish their fight, I felt a tremendous amount of energy appear outside the barrier. There were many of them, and it seemed like the gods noticed it as I caught sight of Odin standing up and shouting. ¡°Lokii!!!!!!¡± The spectators were surprised. It even made Crom Cruach and Vali break their exchange and jump backward. ¡°What happened?¡± Vali asked me, clearly irritated that his match was interrupted. ¡°Yeah, what the fuck happens for that old man to shout like that?!¡± Added Crom Cruach. The gods in the spectators'' seats began to stand up one by one, except for Shiva, who gazed at the sky with an amused smile. ¡°It¡¯s something that I am waiting for,¡± I called Nenekirimaru in my hand and surrounded myself with Fear. This was the last war; the remnant of the Khaos Brigade had arrived as planned. No one knew this plan, as I only told Azazel and Michael about it. Not even Sirzechs knew about it. He knew about the plan to attack the remnant of the Khaos Brigade, but he didn¡¯t know I had expected the remnant to attack us after the peace conference. Now they were here, with gods among their members. Even the death aura that a certain god had was right outside the barrier. They could find this place because I didn¡¯t even add my Fear to the barrier. There were two satans here, Sirzechs and Ajuka, who was now in a different dimension to control the barrier. There were also gods such as Odin, Susanoo, and Shiva. The strongest fighters from four factions were also here. The ones in the medical room had also recovered with Phoenix Tears; they were ready to fight once again. I had sent Shirone, Kuroka, and Tsura to call Serafall, Amaterasu, and my old man, respectively; they should be here at any moment now. ¡°Azazel!¡± I shouted at the commentator seat, and he nodded his head as affirmation. ¡°Don¡¯t panic, everyone!¡± He shouted. ¡°I believe all of you have been briefed by your leaders! The original plan was to destroy the remnant of the Khaos Brigade after we finished the friendly competition. However! It seems like they have decided to attack us at this place!¡± The unrest began to spread among the people from three factions. The youkai was always ready for war, so they were not panicked at the news. Instead, the members of my Hyakki Yakkou began to wear a blue Haori that they brought to the arena with wild smiles on their faces. They were laughing happily as if they knew no fear like a youkai should. ¡°It¡¯s a war, guys!¡± Shouted Aotabo. ¡°Squad one to three will follow me. The rest will follow Aotabo!¡± Added Kurotabo. ¡°Kyoto Youkai will follow Kyokotsu and me! No one is allowed to die without taking an enemy with them!¡± Commanded Hagoromo Gitsune as she jumped on top of Gasadokuro¡¯s head. Azazel flew to the fallen angels'' side, while Michael and Sirzechs went to their factions'' side. They began to instruct them to get ready for a fight. Odin clenched his fist as he ordered Rossweisse to get his weapon. He didn¡¯t bring his Gungnir, which was his mistake. Rossweisse quickly made a telepathic call to get Gungnir delivered. Meanwhile, Vali and Crom Cruach nodded at each other before looking at the sky. I knew what they were thinking, so I stopped them before they even did it. ¡°Don¡¯t destroy it yet.¡± My tone was cold as the purple flame began to dance around me; it was Incinerate Anthem. ¡°Wait a minute. Then I will let you fight the strongest people out there.¡± RaizarP More than 100 Advanced chapters (For all of my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 202 – Primal Roar The force outside was trying to break through the barrier that Ajuka made; however, it was useless. Ajuka had joined Sirzechs in organizing the devils while I sat on the edge of the spectator seat while looking at the chaos caused by the reorganization of the troop. Three factions tried to combine their troops into one, which was today''s first thing that happened. Hagoromo Gitsune sat on top of Gasadokuro¡¯s head with Kyokotsu. They were right beside me. ¡°Riku-sama, should we join them too?¡± Kurotabo asked from behind. He was standing beside Aotabo and was ready to go to war anytime. ¡°No. We are already two troops combined into one; we don¡¯t need to join them. Rather¡­ we can¡¯t join them.¡± I rested my hand on my knee as I stroked my chin. ¡°May I know the reason, Riku-sama? As you know, I am a bit behind in something like this.¡± Asked Aotabo. ¡°Hmm¡­ We are mostly used Fear to fight. However, they used magical energy such as Demonic or Holy energy. They are troops, a military, so to say. But, are we a military troop?¡± ¡°No,¡± Kurotabo Answered shortly. ¡°We are a parade.¡± I grinned at his answer. ¡°Correct. We don¡¯t need to act like an army. Just do whatever you want. Beat whoever you want. But, don¡¯t die.¡± ¡°What a speech from you, Riku.¡± Chimed Hagoromo Gitsune. ¡°But, what you said is true. Our Hyakki Yakkou doesn¡¯t need other leaders like them. We, the head, are the only leader of our parade. If we die, our Hyakki Yakkou will crumble. It¡¯s that easy.¡± ¡°That¡¯s right. That¡¯s how we work.¡± I added Hagoromo Gitsune. ¡°But, if their leaders died, the one under him would take over their work. We couldn¡¯t relate to that.¡± ¡°I see. I now understand, Onee-sama!¡± Exclaimed Kyokotsu. ¡°We did have such a mindset to follow the leader of Hyakki Yakkou. No! We are only here because we want to follow you, Onee-sama!¡± The youkai was a merry bunch. They were talking and laughing merrily as if the enemies outside the barrier were not their concern. As we waited for the three Factions to be reorganized, I felt Tsuchigumo approaching our place from the Medical room. He unexpectedly walked to this place instead of destroying the wall in his way. I saw him walking toward this side in his human form. There was an excited grin on his face. He glanced at the sky every now and then. ¡°Nura. I see that you have planned this since the start.¡± Said Tsuchigumo as he stopped beside me. ¡°Yo. You have recovered, huh?¡± ¡°Yeah. However, how dare you kicked me, huh? Do you know what you did?¡± ¡°Stopping an idiot from taking it too far. That guy, Sairaorg, is an important asset in this fight.¡± I glanced at the sky, where the enemies were still trying to breach the barrier. I used Telos Karma to make the barrier stronger, and the possibility of them breaching the barrier be lowered, but the barrier couldn¡¯t hold for too long. Maybe it would be breached in under 30 minutes? That time should be enough for Tsura and the others to get my old man and the others. ¡°Hah, just excuses. However, I will forgive you this one. There are many enemies to be beaten, be glad that I don¡¯t beat you.¡± ¡°As if you can beat me in the first place.¡± ¡°¡­¡± Tsuchigumo was silent. He couldn¡¯t retort to what I said. It was true that he couldn¡¯t beat me right now. Even when he learned how the power in this world worked, I had already attained enough power to fight even a god. Tsuchigumo was indeed strong, but he was still far from me. ¡°Tsk! How arrogant.¡± ¡°Hahahaha. I just said that because I know, I am strong.¡± As I was laughing, the troops of three factions had finished reorganizing themselves. The ones who led them were three leaders of each faction. Sirzechs became the representative of the devil, and each commanded their own squad. ¡®There is no difference at all¡­ Are they actually stupid?¡¯ Well, maybe not. They might only reorganize the troop to show their subordinates that three factions were banded together to fight the new threat, the remnant of the Khaos Brigade, who tried to breach the barrier when a friendly event was held. Actually, they were kind of funny. As we were just a neutral faction, we didn¡¯t need to join their play. A moment later, I felt the rather familiar energy of Serafall and Amaterasu arrive right outside the barrier at the same time. My old man¡¯s energy was nowhere to be found, but that was as expected of him. Then I stood up and patted Nenekirimaru against my shoulder. ¡°It¡¯s time.¡± The youkai looked at me and nodded their heads. ¡°Finally, huh?¡± Asked Hagoromo Gitsune. Sirzechs and Azazel noticed my movement and nodded their heads. Next, I put Nenekirimaru into his sheath that I held with my left hand. The youkai understood what I did when I lowered my stance a little. They took a step back away from me; even Hagoromo Gitsune commanded Gasadokuro to take a step back. ¡°The fight almost started! Are you guys ready to fight?!¡± Azazel shouted at his subordinates, the fallen angels. ¡°Yeahhh!!!¡± ¡°Let¡¯s goo!!!!¡± Sirzechs and Michael also pushed their subordinates¡¯ spirits, and then they nodded their heads in my direction, giving a signal that they were ready. ¡°Alright.¡± I muttered as I used Touki and imbued Senjutsu around Nenekirimaru. With a fast speed, I pulled my blade and slashed toward the sky. ¡°Tsuki Giri.¡± A pale blue flying slash was sent to the sky, flying toward the barrier as it became bigger and bigger. The flying slash approached the barrier at a fast speed, severing the wind. The troops in the middle of the arena looked at the slash with their mouth gaped. But, some of them snickered; they didn¡¯t believe that such a slash could destroy the barrier. Are they blind? I was clearly able to cut the barrier when I let Tsuchigumo and Crom Cruach enter the barrier, but I guess they only thought that as something that only scarred the barrier a little as Sirzechs immediately fixed it. But, their looks changed when the flying slash cut through the barrier and even cut some of the people who tried to breach it from outside. As the barrier was gone, I grinned, raised Nenekirimaru to the sky, and shouted. ¡°Let¡¯s go! Show them the power of my Hyakki Yakkou!¡± ¡°Hyaaa!!!!!¡± ¡°Wooooo!!!!¡± Primal roars filled the arena. It became the cue for the big full-blown war with the remnant of the Khaos Brigade. RaizarP More than 100 Advanced chapters (For all of my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 203 – Thanatos As soon as I cut the barrier, chaos broke out. The Khaos Brigade¡¯s side sent their small fries composed of stray devils and fallen angels to fight the army of three factions. Hagoromo Gitsune and I also sent the youkai who could fly to help the army of three factions. The Tengus from Kyoto Youkai and some of the flying youkai from my Hyakki Yakkou entered the fight with high spirit. ¡°Kill them!¡± ¡°Burn them!¡± ¡°Skewer them!¡± The youkai shouted energetically as they stormed to the battlefield. A lot of enemies were engaging on the ground, trying to flank the three factions'' army. They raised their swords and claws and clashed against the enemy, killing some of them with surprise attacks. Kurotabo and Aotabo led them into the battlefield as he mowed down their enemies. Amaterasu joined Susanoo in the spectator seats while being accompanied by Kuroka and Shirone. Serafall joined the fight immediately on Sirzechs¡¯ side as she froze the enemy with her magic. Hagoromo Gitsune and Kyokotsu still stood beside me as we had a guest from the sky. He was a man wearing white clothes with light blue hair that was similar to mine. However, his hair was longer, and he had two bangs; it fluttered in the sky as it was blown by the wind. He had three blue jewels on his forehead and two golden pearls as earrings. ¡°Oi, Nura. You have a brother?¡± Asked Hagoromo Gitsune as she snickered at me. ¡°He¡¯s sickeningly familiar; his white hair is similar to that brat.¡± Said Kyokotsu. The white hair that she mentioned might refer to that guy''s white hair, Nurarihyon¡¯s grandson in their world. However, I didn¡¯t think that this guy¡¯s hair was similar to mine. Did the author a fan of Nurarihyon no Mago too? ¡°What are you talking about, Harogomo Gitsune? I am more handsome than him.¡± I smirked as I looked at the guy in the sky. I recognized him as Odin had screamed his name in the peace conference. ¡°Don¡¯t you agree with that, Loki?¡± Loki narrowed his eyes as if he was disgusted by us and spoke. ¡°Truly fearless.¡± He crossed his arms as he looked down on us, specifically me. ¡°But you are not my target. I am here to meet my esteemed father.¡± He turned his head around and looked at Odin, whose face had turned red from anger. With a fast speed, Odin approached us and stopped in front of the man. Rossweisse was left behind to fend off an enemy that suddenly appeared from the sky. She was screaming in our direction, but there was a new enemy that attacked her from behind, distracting her once again. ¡°Loki! You ungrateful son!¡± ¡°Look who we have here, my esteemed father who signed a peace treaty with mortals! We can always rule over them. Have you gone silly after a long peace, father?¡± ¡°You! War is not needed anymore!¡± ¡°How silly of you, father. No, Old Man! We need war! I will kill you and invoke a Ragnarok upon this world, old man!¡± It seemed like I could leave Loki to him. He should be able to handle him. At least Hagoromo Gitsune was still here to help him in case he had a hard time. ¡°Odin, can you handle him?¡± I asked him about leaving to deal with other enemies. He certainly heard me, but he ignored me and shouted due to his anger. ¡°What are you talking about, ungrateful son!¡± Odin tried to punch Loki, but a new presence stopped him. I was also stopped and looked at the new presence as I narrowed my eyes. ¡°It¡¯s like that, Odin. I will help your son to create a Ragnarok.¡± The new presence smirked at Odin as he stopped beside Loki. He wore a skull mask and exquisitely decorated cloak, a standard outfit of the grim reapers in this world. He was the leader of all grim reapers, the strongest Grim Reaper, Thanatos. ¡°Thanatos¡­!¡± Odin growled as he gritted his teeth while glaring at Thanatos. ¡®This guy is here too, huh?¡¯ His subordinates would certainly be here if this guy were here. I glanced at Hagoromo Gitsune, and she immediately understood what I meant. Tapping on Gasadokuro¡¯s head, she was about to go to the battlefield with Gasadokuro and Kyokotsu, but before they could go, a group of five people with outfits similar to Thanatos appeared in their way. ¡°Sorry, lady. I couldn¡¯t let someone like you go to the battlefield. Hades-sama wants to get you to his side.¡± Said Thanatos. ¡®Hades? Is that guy here too? Where is he?¡¯ I tried to find his presence through Senjutsu, but I couldn¡¯t find him. That guy was the main reason why all this shit happened in the world. He was by no means evil; he only hated Devils and Fallen Angels to the point he wanted to get rid of them to free this world. Despite that, he wanted to create a devil. He was a strange man, but I could somehow understand him. On the side, Gasadokuro¡¯s bones made a rattled noise as he spoke. ¡°Move! Hagoromo Gitsune~ sama~ wanted to pass!¡± His way of speaking was like someone who intentionally dragged his voice. However, that was how he spoke. He couldn¡¯t speak clearly because he was all bones. ¡°No.¡± Answered the robed people. ¡°Just swat them away, Gasadokuro.¡± ¡°Certainly~¡± Answered Gasadokuro as he swung his hand. He swatted the robed figure, and they couldn¡¯t react to his attack. They underestimated him because of his size. They must have thought that he would be slow with his big size. He was fast and swift, also¡­ he was strong. The robed people were sent flying, and Gasadokuro¡¯s bones rattled once again. ¡°Fools.¡± Muttered Kyokotsu. Hagoromo Gitsune spread her fan in front of her mouth. ¡°Let¡¯s go.¡± ¡°Yes!¡± Gasadokuro¡¯s bones rattled as he answered. He tried to move away, but this time, 10 Grim Reapers appeared on their way. Hagoromo Gitsune frowned and growled. ¡°It seems the small fries need to be weeded out first.¡± RaizarP More than 100 Advanced chapters (For all of my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 204 – Crazy Madlad As Hagoromo Gitsune and the other two fought the newly appeared Grim Reapers, I jumped to the sky and stood beside Odin, facing Thanatos directly. Slowly, quietly, I used Kyouka Suigetsu to create a fake while my real self was circling behind him. Then, I made my fake talking to him. ¡°Black hair that defied the gravity and that green Japanese Kimono. You must be the youkai who made his name recently, the second Lord of the East youkai faction, Nura Riku.¡± ¡°Indeed, I am,¡± I answered as I patted Nenekirimaru against my shoulder. ¡°And who might you be, oh skull masked man?¡± I asked him playfully, although I knew about his identity. ¡°This one¡¯s humble name is Thanatos, the leader of Grim Reaper. Under the order of Hades-sama, I am trying to kill the one who made his plan astray.¡± ¡°Oh? And who is that person? Can you tell me about him? I want to thank him because he made this one called Hades¡¯s plan to go astray.¡± ¡°That guy is right in front of my eyes, unfortunately. How about I let you meet him in the death realm? I can split you into two, so you can see the face of the guy who made Hades-sama¡¯s plan go astray.¡± ¡°I see. That guy must be so handsome. Unfortunately, I think a mirror is enough for that.¡± ¡°Is that so? Then, may I have your time for a dance with blades, oh mightly lord of pandemonium?¡± Thanatos bowed his head respectfully as he said that. ¡°I must refuse.¡± I answered from my real body and kicked him on his back with a roundhouse kick. He was sent flying to the other side of the battlefield and was gone in less than a second. I then looked at Odin and said, ¡°As I said earlier, I will leave him to you, Odin.¡± ¡°Umu, thanks for getting rid of the pest.¡± ¡°No problem. Let me kill the pest first, then. Good luck.¡± Leaving those messages, I kicked the air and followed the Thanatos that I sent flying earlier. Unexpectedly, he had already recovered and tried to approach me at a fast speed while shouting. ¡°Youu!!¡± ¡°Me!¡± I answered playfully and swung my sword, sending a flying slash in his direction. He avoided the flying slash and rushed toward me. Even though he wore a mask, I could feel that he was angry. Was it due to me kicking him in the back while he was talking? Or was it because I was more handsome than him? I don¡¯t know. He was supposed to be calm and reserved, but maybe, a cowardly tactic wasn¡¯t his taste. He should¡¯ve hated Hades, so what was the reason for him being here? But one thing was for sure. He wanted a battle. As he rushed at me, a scythe suddenly appeared in his hand, and several duplicates of him appeared. ¡°Wow, so you can make some illusion too? Neat. But¡­¡± I leaped at him, the real him, and swung Nenekirimaru, which was covered in Senjutsu. ¡°You are 100 years too early to fool me with duplicates.¡± ¡°Kuh!¡± Thanatos blocked my sword with his scythe as he grunted. He was fast to the point that his duplicates had a presence. If his opponent was anyone other than me, maybe his trick would work. Unfortunately, his opponent was someone who could even create a fake that could no longer be differentiated from the real one. I raised my sword and sent another slash. He managed to block it again, so I sent another one. I kept pushing him back, but neither of us was serious for now. We only used our weapons to best each other. It made me even wonder. Why did he didn¡¯t he use Magic or the other? As a Grim Reaper, he should¡¯ve been able to use Magic. Because my attack didn¡¯t seem to work and we were already a distance away from the main battlefield, I jumped back to create a distance between us and asked. ¡°You didn¡¯t seem to take it seriously. What is your objective, Thanatos?¡± I looked at him seriously as I narrowed my eyes. ¡°Did my acting so easy to see?¡± Asked Thanatos as he relaxed his stance. ¡°I am afraid that I can¡¯t tell you my objective. However, I want to stop Hades-sama¡¯s plan of creating an artificial devil.¡± Ah, there is also something like that. Hades hated devils, but he knew everything about them, including how Lilith died. It was easy to guess that Rizevim went to him to ask how Lilith, his mother, had died. So that meant this Thanatos wanted to stop Hades all along? ¡°Why do you want to stop him?¡± ¡°Well, there is nothing special. I just want to stop this pointless thing.¡± ¡°And, how do you intend to do that?¡± ¡°Just let me capture the white-haired nekomata in the arena. I promise I won¡¯t do anything more and even pull the other grim reapers. I can¡¯t allow the research of the Super Devil to be spread at this age.¡± As he said that, I immediately knew the nekomata that he was talking about was Shirone. He would pull his army if I handed Shirone to him? Although his intention was good, I wouldn¡¯t allow that. I was not a pushover. ¡°Hey.¡± I asked him. ¡°Yes. I am serious.¡± But he answered strangely. Did he think that I would hand her over to him? He was someone crazy if he thought that I would hand over Shirone to him. She was Kuroka¡¯s sister, a part of my family. ¡°You are seeking death, you know?¡± I told him calmly as I used Incinerate Anthem. The purple flame danced around Nenekirimaru as if delighted that its turn had finally arrived. I also used Kyouka Suigetsu to reduce my presence and further enhance my physical capabilities with Touki. Even if the one in front of me was called the strongest Grim Reaper and had power rivaling those of Gods, I wasn¡¯t afraid. After I managed to use Balance Breaker and Offense Fear, I was confident to take on even Sirzechs. If I added Matoi on top of that, maybe I could beat Sirzechs in a fair one-on-one duel, although I would still be injured if I tried it. Thanatos took on a serious stance once again. ¡°It seems you have underestimated me too much. Do you think I can¡¯t protect my own family from Hades, huh?¡± To take him on, my Balance Breaker wasn¡¯t needed. I didn¡¯t even need to turn my Fear into its offensive form; this was enough. ¡°Let me tell you something.¡± I pointed Nenekirimaru at him. ¡°I am strong.¡± Then purple flame surged out and engulfed Thanatos whole. RaizarP More than 100 Advanced chapters (For all of my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 205 – Yamata no Orochi The fire that engulfed Thanatos disappeared in an instant. The moment it disappeared, the first thing that I saw was Thanatos being fine behind a magic barrier. That much was expected. There was no way he would be injured by just a tiny flame from Incinerate Anthem. I didn¡¯t even put a lot of strength into my attack. But, his barrier was cracked. A webbing pattern appeared, and it broke the next second, creating the sound of broken glasses. ¡°That¡¯s one,¡± I said seriously. ¡°I don¡¯t want to cause a lot of casualties from the people with the same goal. But, if you want to take Shirone from me, then get ready to die, you motherfucker.¡± ¡°¡­¡± I could feel the glare coming from behind Thanatos¡¯ mask. He was surely furious that I suddenly attacked him out of nowhere when he thought that I had agreed to his plan. ¡°Why did you refuse?¡± ¡°Hah?!¡± I scoffed at him as I raised my chin. ¡°Didn¡¯t I say that I won¡¯t hand my family member to you? Are you an idiot?¡± ¡°Family member? But from the report, she¡¯s a reincarnated devil under Gremory!¡± Roared Thanatos. ¡°How can the East youkai¨C¡° ¡°Stop that. It seems you are outdated, huh? I have taken the Evil Piece from her body since long ago. Also, she¡¯s the little sister of my lover. Is there any more reason that I need to protect her?¡± ¡°Are you serious?¡± Asked Thanatos. ¡°Are you sure you can protect her from Hades-sama?¡± ¡°Oi oi, who do you think you are talking with right now?¡± I let out a tired sigh. This was why people from the supernatural world died easily in front of my old man. They were fucking underestimated us every time. ¡°I am the second Lord of Pandemonium, Nura Riku. If you think I can¡¯t hide a single girl, then my Hyakki Yakkou will not be willing to follow me.¡± ¡°Is that so?¡± Thanatos lowered his hands as his scythe disappeared. ¡°Then please forgive me for my earlier behavior. I understand that you are strong.¡± ¡°It¡¯s good that you understand that.¡± I nodded my head, satisfied with his answer. I couldn¡¯t even feel hostility coming from him after he said those words. ¡°Then¨C¡° ¡°But.¡± I cut off his sentence before he could continue and glared at him. ¡°This and that are different things. I will be expecting a thorough apology in the future.¡± ¡°Understood.¡± Thanatos nodded his head. ¡°Then I will disappear for now. I will pull my troops after a few minutes; please don¡¯t hurt them too much.¡± ¡°I can¡¯t promise. After all, the one that they fought was Hagoromo Gitsune.¡± ¡°¡­Grr.¡± He grunted a little, but ultimately, he jumped back and disappeared into the shadow. I still activated Kyouka Suigetsu until I couldn¡¯t feel his presence around me. He had teleported away, and I was expecting him to pull his troop soon. ¡°Now, let¡¯s look at the battlefield. I hope it¡¯s not too messy.¡± I said as I turned toward the arena. I had gone too far in my fight with Thanatos. Even though I felt that I only went around 50 meters away, it seems that I went more than 500 meters away from the Colosseum. Fortunately, though, the whole city was covered by a barrier. I bet even Hades didn¡¯t want the ordinary people to notice our presence. ¡°How about Odin? Is he okay?¡± I muttered aloud as I kicked the air, approaching the Colosseum at a fast speed. However, as if I jinxed it with my words, I felt two strong presence of beasts from the Colosseum. Big energies also clashed with each other. Some familiar energies were gathering around the new beasts'' presence. They belonged to Issei, Vali, Rossweisse, and Crom Cruach, respectively. Tsuchigumo, well¡­ he was rampaging in the middle of the battlefield with the other youkai. Odin was in the sky, battling Loki. I could see them from this place as thunder clouds appeared above them and lightning struck Loki, who tried his best to best Odin. But all of that was trivial compared to the energy that was building up near Hagoromo Gitsune. There was something that I remembered and hadn¡¯t slain yet. ¡°The fucking Orochi is here!¡± I quickly made my way toward Hagoromo Gitsune. Susanoo also made his way to the building energy at a fast speed; he must¡¯ve realized that Orochi had tried to enter the battlefield. I could just leave it to him, but I was interested in Gram¡¯s power. I hope it was not a sham and could cut a dragon well because my target in the future was something bigger and stronger. When I reached the colosseum, I saw Yamata no Orochi, a dragon with eight heads. He looked like an eastern dragon with tears of blood running down its eyes and its mouth filled with sharp fangs. Big couldn¡¯t even describe him. Compared to Crom Cruach¡¯s dragon form, he was way bigger than that. He was gigantic, and his body covered the whole colosseum, causing the battlefield to shift outside. From a first glance, his body might be around 200 meters. Hagoromo Gitsune and Gasadokuro, who stood in front of its heads, looked tiny compared to its body. I arrived beside Hagoromo Gitsune, looked up at eight heads that glared at us, and asked. ¡°How did it turn out this way?¡± ¡°I don¡¯t know. This big guy suddenly appeared.¡± Answered Hagoromo Gitsune. Susanoo, who moved before me, had just arrived, and he stood beside me. He was holding a sword that was similar to the black teeth of Orochi. So that was the famous sword from Japanese folklore, Ame no Murakumo no Tsurugi, or called Kusanagi Sword, the one that was found inside Orochi¡¯s corpse. He was looking at Orochi while frowning before turning his head at me. ¡°Can you please help me? I am not confident of beating him myself.¡± ¡°No problem.¡± I dismissed Nenekirimaru and called Gram into my hand. With Gram, I had no issue with imbuing Incinerate Anthem into it. ¡°Let¡¯s beheads this big guy and try to find another sword similar in your hand.¡± RaizarP More than 100 Advanced chapters (For all of my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 206 – Vs Yamata no Orochi ¡°Should I help too?¡± Hagoromo Gitsune asked. ¡°No. Just join the other battlefield, leave this big boy to us,¡± I answered Hagoromo Gitsune as I re-activated Kyouka Suigetsu. ¡°Alright.¡± Answered Hagoromo Gitsune. She tapped her leg against Gasadokuro¡¯s head and said. ¡°Let¡¯s go.¡± ¡°Yes~¡± Answered Gasadokuro as he made his way to the other battlefield. He moved fast and destroyed some enemies in his way. I turned toward the big dragon in front of me. The presence of Yamata no Orochi was not complete yet. His revival was not perfect, as we secured Valerie before it could be fully revived. So, he only had around three fourth of its strength, or maybe less. ¡°Let me handle four heads for you. Can you deal with the rest of it?¡± Susanoo asked as the wind began to surround him. As the sky had already darkened because Odin summoned thunder clouds, he didn¡¯t even need to summon them again to create a storm. He only needed to control the winds. ¡°No problem. I can deal with it alone if you don¡¯t mind it. But, I think you want a rematch from hundred years ago, no?¡± I swung Gram lightly as I said that, leaving a purple flame trail. Susanoo looked at me and laughed. ¡°Hahahaha. You have become that strong, huh? Unfortunately, I also want to behead this guy again. So let¡¯s split it in half as there are eight heads to be dealt with.¡± ¡°I don¡¯t mind. I will go first.¡± Leaving those messages, I kicked the hardened air and aimed at the rightmost head of Orochi. It turned its eyes on me and tried to attack me with the other heads at the same time. Two heads headed in my direction as the rest were trying to prepare for breath attacks. Green liquid dropped from their mouth, a sign that they were preparing for poisonous breath. Even with my specs right now, getting poisoned by the poison of Dragon Kings would be fatal for me. I had no poison resistance at all, so all I could do was dodge the breath as much as I could. But, those heads that prepared breath attacks had no chance to attack me. A fierce wind shut their mouths instantly, and they gulped their poison back as there was no place to let it out. ¡°Thanks, Susanoo!¡± I shouted and swung my sword horizontally at the incoming heads. A trail of purple flame erupted from my sword as it cut the eyes of the first head, burning its head whole with Incinerate Anthem. The second head managed to dodge as it felt danger from my attack. It was a smart move from Yamata no Orochi. With this, I could confirm that he had some intelligence left in that big body even though his revival was not completed. ¡°ROAAAAA!!!¡± Eight heads roared at the same time. In an attempt to extinguish the fire that burned the second head, the first head spouted a green liquid over the second head. Somehow it managed to extinguish the fire, and now its second head was covered with green poison liquid. This might be a bit bad for me, but luckily, I had a backup. ¡°Let me handle it. You can handle the other.¡± Susanoo passed me at a fast speed and swung his sword, creating a fierce wind slash that blew away the green liquid. I was a bit worried that it would hit our ally, but he managed to contain the liquid inside a small tornado and move it away from the battleground with perfect control. As expected of the god of Storm, his control over wind was topnotch. ¡°Nice!¡± I praised him and went to the other heads. They were able to open their mouth again as they managed to shake the wind that closed their mouths earlier. For a big guy, Orochi was fast. Six heads opened their mouths and bared their fangs at me. I promised to take four of them, but it didn¡¯t seem possible when six of them were focusing their attention on me. ¡®My bad, Susanoo. It seems I will take six of them.¡¯ Increasing the power of Incinerate Anthem that was infused to Gram, I swung the sword wildly. As a result of my wild swing, a surge of purple flame was sent out, flying toward the six heads of the Yamata no Orochi. But Yamata no Orochi was not a fool. It knew that the flame was dangerous, so the six heads that approached me quickly stopped and made a maneuver to dodge the flame. They scattered in all directions, but that was what I wanted to achieve from this. My Kyouka Suigetsu had activated all this time. My real body had since long arrived at the back of its body, at the place where eight heads branched from each other. Although Orochi was a Dragon King, surely he wouldn¡¯t has the regeneration at the level of Tsuchigumo, right? If he had the same level of regeneration as Tsuchigumo, who could even recover when his head was slashed into two, then it would definitely be a problem that needed my Balance Breaker to solve. But, I was confident that he didn¡¯t have that. I hoped that he didn¡¯t have it. I used Touki to enhance my physical abilities to the limit and turned my Fear into the offensive. Not only that, I used Incinerate Anthem to its maximum power too. ¡°Susanoo! Get away from that at once!¡± I shouted at Susanoo, who became a target of eight heads after I disappeared from its sight. He was flying around, dodging the attack from eigth heads at once, as if he was dancing in the sky. He sometimes attacked by sending wind blades, and he nodded his head immediately and jumped away after he heard my voice. ¡°Do it now!¡± He shouted back. After getting his confirmation, I raised Gram above my head. Orochi¡¯s eight heads immediately turned toward me at the same time and bared their fangs. Not only that, but Orochi¡¯s tail also attacked me after not moving for so long. However, it was too late. ¡°Bye-bye, big baby,¡± I smirked and swung Gram down. With its Dragon Slayer properties, severing Yamato no Orochi¡¯s base head was easy. It severed cleanly, and the Incinerate Anthem burned the severed parts. As expected, Yamato no Orochi¡¯s revival was tempered, and it had regeneration that tried to connect the severed head back to the body, but that was useless. He couldn¡¯t spew the poison liquid too, so it couldn¡¯t extinguish the flame. It was our victory. ¡°It¡¯s easy,¡± I said as I let go of Gram, making it disappear. RaizarP More than 100 Advanced chapters (For all of my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 207 – Another problem? I hope not The battlefield turned around after I killed Yamata no Orochi. Its big body fell to the ground lifelessly. One of the Dragon King died just like that. Even though it only had no more than half of its power, wasn¡¯t it too weak to be a Dragon King like Crom Cruach? I wondered about it for a while. Was Yamata no Orochi too weak, or was Crom Cruach the one that was too strong? I would like to think the first option, but seeing that Crom Cruach was called the strongest Evil Dragon, which had strength almost similar to two Heavenly Dragons, I wouldn¡¯t be surprised that he was too strong for a dragon. The dragon was like the strongest creature in this world. As I had killed Yamata no Orochi in one strike, did that meant that I became someone who could enter the top 10 ranking in this world? The other people from the devils and fallen angels'' side looked at me in disbelief. They were surprised to see my last attack that killed Yamata no Orochi in one strike. They were looking at me as if they were looking at a devil even though the real devils were present on the battlefield. Susanoo was also surprised. He floated toward me and landed on Yamata no Orochi¡¯s body. He tapped his feet against the body a few times before looking at the severed part that was still burning and muttered. ¡°This is a strong flame. Is it the Incinerate Anthem?¡± ¡°Yeah,¡± I answered as Nenekirimaru appeared in my hand again. As expected, this sword fit me better than Gram. ¡°It¡¯s convenient to burn the enemy that can regenerate endlessly.¡± ¡°It¡¯s a holy fire, after all. Truly effective against dark creatures. This is truly a clean kill, though I can¡¯t appreciate it because I want to kill Orochi too, for the second time.¡± ¡°My bad, you take too long. For now, let¡¯s clean up those guys. Can you help them?¡± I pointed at Issei and Rossweisse, who fought Fenfir in the distance. They had a hard time facing Fenrir. Crom Cruach was facing a clone of Midgardsormr in the sky, right beside Odin and Loki, who exchanged Magic Barrage at each other. While Vali was facing two wolves, Skoll and Hati, not far from Issei and Rossweisse. Their fight was the most intense among the others. Issei was visibly injured as his helmet was gone and blood dripped from his head. ¡°I don¡¯t mind. After that, I guess I need to help my sister and accompany her in fighting the other enemies. I feel insecure about leaving her with Shiva.¡± ¡°Sure. I will now help the other to deal with the Grim Reaper too. Hagoromo Gitsune has entered the battlefield, and I bet my old man will arrive any second now.¡± ¡°That¡¯s reassuring. However, there are still a few Evil Dragons left, right?¡± ¡°Yeah. Apophis is still alive. Midgardsormr is also still alive, but that lazy dragon must be sleeping somewhere without care of this world.¡± ¡°The biggest and second-biggest dragon, huh? Their size is even bigger than Yamata no Orochi and Great Red from what I heard.¡± ¡°That¡¯s correct. Anyway, I am counting on you to help them. That Issei is rather useful to help me make a place for Ophis in the future. So please keep him safe.¡± ¡°You owe me one,¡± Susanoo answered as he leaped away in Issei¡¯s direction. I was now left alone and wondered. ¡®Where should I go?¡¯ The battlefield was chaos. Sirzechs killed a few enemies in just one sweep, and there was Azazel, who only looked at the battlefield from above with Michael. Tsuchigumo and the other youkai were still rampaging through the battlefield. The three factions'' army didn¡¯t even dare to get close to them. Kuroka and Shirone also joined the battlefield as they shot Senjutsu aura toward the enemies. There was no sign of Magicians. Were they hiding because they almost perished? I didn¡¯t know, but the enemies were scattered in all directions. The gods from the other factions were not here, too, including Hades. So this meant that I almost killed everyone that wanted to destroy Earth? I sincerely hope so, but there were no Devils in the enemy¡¯s rank, which made me anxious. I jumped to the sky and stopped beside Azazel. ¡°How is the situation?¡± I asked as I observed the situation below. Azazel crossed his arms and smiled. ¡°It¡¯s good. Our army pushed them back. Thanks to your Hyakki Yakkou, this battle will end in less than 30 minutes.¡± ¡°That¡¯s fast.¡± I thought that a battle of this scale would need a day or more to finish but to think that we would only need 30 minutes to end the battle. Should I be happy with the fact that no other gods were interested in joining the battle except for Loki? Or should I be worried in case they were planning something else that was out of my knowledge? Maybe I should be happy for now that finally Khaos Brigade would be destroyed. But I should still be careful and destroy the other remnant, especially those devils who plotted behind our back. I should have a talk with Sirzechs after this. Also, Serafall and Ajuka. Talking about them, I didn¡¯t see them anywhere on the battlefield. ¡°Come to think of it, where are Serafall and Ajuka?¡± I asked Azazel, but Michael was the one who answered me. ¡°They went back to the Underworld. Ajuka suddenly said that he felt something strange from the Underworld and hurried back with Serafall to help him.¡± ¡°Something strange? What could it be?¡± ¡°I don¡¯t know.¡± Michael shook his head. ¡°But surely, that something is important enough that two Satans went to check it.¡± ¡°Is that so? That¡¯s something worrying. Should we go to the Underworld later?¡± ¡°I can¡¯t,¡± Azazel answered swiftly. ¡°I need to make sure the fight is over and hunt the remaining enemies that run away in the middle of the battle.¡± ¡°Unfortunately, I can¡¯t go to the Underworld too. I need to make sure that no Angels fell in this battle.¡± Both were busy with their own army that they couldn¡¯t even go to the underworld. They were the sole leader of their own army, after all, unlike me, who could leave the youkai behind with no problem. They wouldn¡¯t follow anyone, but they could think by themselves what was the best action that they could take without me. So the answer was clear. I sighed as I crossed my arms. ¡°Well, I will be the one who goes to the Underworld then. I will take Diehauser with me.¡± ¡°That¡¯s what I am walking about. Hahahaha!¡± Azazel laughed loudly. I just wanted this to be over as soon as possible, but why did problem always arrived one after the other? Truly troublesome. RaizarP More than 100 Advanced chapters (For all of my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 208 – Nurarihyon Arrived! The battle continued. Youkai pushed back the remaining enemies to the corner to the point they were about to retreat. However, at that time, a big portal appeared in the sky. The allied force stopped pursuing for a second and looked at the portal. ¡°What is that?¡± Asked Azazel. He looked at the portal with a wary gaze as he lowered his hand, preparing to strike whatever came out from it. ¡°That¡¯s worrying. Such a big portal.¡± Muttered Michael. The gods also stop fighting. Susanoo retreated from the battlefield at a fast speed and approached Amaterasu, who sat beside Shiva. ¡°Be careful.¡± Amaterasu nodded her head at Susanoo¡¯s warning. Shiva, who sat leisurely beside them, raised his hand and chuckled. ¡°Don¡¯t worry, it¡¯s not harmful to us, right, Youkai boy?¡± He looked me straight in the eyes. I shrugged my shoulders and answered. ¡°Yeah, don¡¯t worry. The ones who came from that portal are our allies.¡± I looked at the portal with squinted eyes. He was really late, considering that Tsura had come to fetch him a little earlier. But I couldn¡¯t complain. It was good that he could arrive before the battle ended. Also, it seemed like he made a little stop before he came here. ¡°You know who came from the portal?¡± Azazel asked as he turned to me. Michael also looked in my direction with a curious expression. ¡°Well, I am familiar with him. Though I never met the other two who are currently with him.¡± As soon as I said that, the presence that opened the portal appeared from beyond it. The first thing that appeared was a green dragon¡¯s head. The head looked similar to an eastern dragon. And there were four shadows that sat above its head, two women and two men. One of the men looked rather tiny; I estimated he was only about a meter tall. His body was covered in golden fur, similar to a monkey, and he wore stylish glasses while holding a long stick. The other three shadows were familiar; they were my old man, Setsuna, and Tsura. When Tsura saw me, she waved her hand and tugged her mother¡¯s sleeves. Setsuna noticed me and whispered to my old man, that then grinned while crossing his arms. The Dragon, now fully come out from the portal, approached us at a fast speed. The portal closed as soon as the dragon exited it. Azazel and Michael seemed to recognize the dragon as Azazel muttered loudly. ¡°Dragon King Yu-Long? That means?¡± ¡°Yeah¡­ the one on top of its head is Sun Wukong. Also¡­ Nurarihyon?¡± Both of them looked at me, and I nodded my head. ¡°My old man has been traveling with Sun Wukong since a few days ago, destroying a few Khaos Brigade¡¯s bases in the process.¡± ¡°That¡¯s¡­ just like him.¡± Azazel turned away with a wry smile. He looked at the dragon who stopped in front of us. I also looked at them, and my old man raised his hand without even caring that he was on the battlefield and greeted me. ¡°Yo, Riku. How have you been?¡± ¡°Good, thanks to you who run around and destroy some of their bases.¡± I pointed at the remnant army of the Khaos Brigade that was now being chased around by the allied army again. Susanoo was back on the battlefield and assisted Issei again in defeating Fenrir. ¡°Hahahaha, good then.¡± My old man laughed loudly. It was then, the person? Or monkey? Beside him stared at me intensely and asked. ¡°So you are Nurarihyon¡¯s son? Hmm¡­ It seems that you are even stronger than your old man. What do you think, Yu-Long?¡± ¡°Indeed, his energy feels stronger than Nurarihyon. Also¡­ There are two Sacred Gears inside his body? How?¡± Asked Yu-Long with a curious tone. My old man grinned as he stroked his chin. ¡°The answer is obvious, right? He has two Sacred Gears because he¡¯s my son!¡± He declared proudly as if I got another Sacred Gear because of him. ¡°You are still the same as always, huh, Nurarihyon?¡± Chimed Azazel. ¡°Oh, Azazel! Long time no see, my bud. How is your life? Is it good?¡± This time my old man looked at Azazel and spoke in a manner as if they were close friends. ¡°Hahahahaha. Thanks to Riku, I finally achieved the peace that I wanted! I should bring some alcohol to your mansion later.¡± ¡°I will be waiting in my mansion later! Hahahaha.¡± Both of them laughed loudly. Sun Wukong stroked his beard, tapped his staff against Yu-Long''s head, and spoke. ¡°Can I join that drinking event later? For now, how about we clean up some problems in this place so we can drink in peace? Do you care to help that white boy, Yu-Long?¡± ¡°Sure! I will bring a lot later.¡± Answered Azazel. ¡°I am expecting my share too.¡± Yu-Long said. ¡°Also, get off from my head so I can chew those two wolves. They are so annoying with their howls. I can also trample on the Midgardsormr if you want to.¡± ¡°Ah, it¡¯s better if you don¡¯t.¡± I stopped him. ¡°The one who fights the Midgardsormr right now is Crom Cruach.¡± ¡°Hoh? Fine. Then I will only kill those two wolves.¡± ¡°Fufufu, I shall help Kuroka and Shirone-chan with my daughter. Commander, what will you do?¡± Asked Setsura. She covered her mouth with the sleeves of her Kimono and glanced at my old man. ¡°Hmm, I don¡¯t know. Maybe I will slay some of the retreating enemies?¡± Answered my old man. He didn¡¯t know what to do on the battlefield that was almost over. As this was a chance to see him fighting seriously, I proposed an idea. ¡°In that case, why don¡¯t you go to the Underworld with me, old man? It seems there is some problem on that side.¡± ¡°What problem?¡± He asked. ¡°I guess some old satan factions attacked Underworld, seeing Serafall and Ajuka hurriedly back to the Underworld.¡± His grin widened as he stood up. ¡°Then let¡¯s go! What are we waiting for?!¡± ¡°It seems that everyone is ready. Hap!¡± Sun-Wukong jumped and created a foothold beside Michael. ¡°I will stay here. Somebody might need me to heal them later.¡± ¡°Sure. Then, let¡¯s get going, old man.¡± I created a magic circle to teleport to the Underworld, and my old man jumped from Yu-Long¡¯s head and entered it. He looked like he was ready, so I operated the magic circle. ¡°See you later, Azazel. I will also wait for the alcohol that you bring.¡± ¡°Yeah! Ask those devils to bring some too when you are in the Underworld!¡± He answered. ¡°Sure.¡± The magic circle fully engulfed me after I answered him, then my old man and I were teleported to the Underworld. RaizarP More than 100 Advanced chapters (For all of my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 209 – War in the Underworld The location that I chose to teleport was the Gremory territory. After arriving at the Gremory territory, I felt something unusual. ¡°Old man, there is something wrong in the Underworld. There is big energy around that direction.¡± I pointed to my right, and my old man¡¯s gaze followed my finger. ¡°Interesting. What kind of energy that you feel, Riku?¡± ¡°A devil, but it could somehow match Serafall. It¡¯s on Satan¡¯s level but still a little lower than Serafall¡¯s. I guess it¡¯s Ultimate-Class devil? That¡¯s why both of them were coming back to the Underworld. Also¡­¡± ¡°Also?¡± My old man asked with a hint of excitement in his voice. I also grinned and patted Nenekirimaru against my shoulder. ¡°There is a war ongoing in that place.¡± ¡°War, you said?¡± As he said that, a Katana with a handle made of wooden appeared in his hand. It looked similar to Nenekirimaru but with a shorter blade. There was an engraving of an eastern dragon on its blade, and it shined when the sunlight hit it. ¡°Then, what are we waiting for?¡± He grinned widely. ¡°Nothing. Only¡­ there are a few people, or rather, devils, who approached that place from the other directions. I think they will pass right beside this Gremory territory to join the war.¡± ¡°I see, reinforcement, huh. Do you know which force they belong to? Ally or enemy?¡± ¡°I don¡¯t know. That¡¯s why¡­ we wait.¡± ¡°No problem. Take us to the place that they will pass. If they are enemies, then I don¡¯t need to tell you, no?¡± He put his free hand inside his kimono and tapped his blade against his shoulder. He looked fucking cool right now. I could understand why the other youkai were willing to follow him. ¡®Although I am stronger, I am still far from my old man.¡¯ ¡°You don¡¯t need to tell me.¡± I ran toward the location that I estimated would be passed by the reinforcement at full speed, and my old man followed close behind me. Although I didn¡¯t use Touki or any physical enhancement thing, my old man was unexpectedly able to match my speed. I guess he had a stronger body as he was a full youkai? Or did our physical strengths were similar to each other? Considering we were blood-related and all. I didn¡¯t know, but I guess that was why my old man was feared by the others. He was strong. We used Fear to hide our presence, so no civilians who were walking around the Gremory Territory noticed us. We arrived at my estimated location after running for five minutes. It was located outside the territory, on a mountain range or some sort. It was not the mountain range where Issei trained with Dragon King Tannin; it was a different mountain range. I stood at the peak of the highest mountain, looking in the direction where I felt the energies. ¡°How is it?¡± My old man stood beside me, looking in the same direction with his hand above his eyes, creating a shapeshift telescope that didn¡¯t even work. ¡°You will be able to see their figures in the sky in a few minutes. They are flying at a high speed, and we were running in the direction of the war earlier.¡± ¡°So basically, we created more distance between them and us. Hah! Why don¡¯t you take us somewhere nearer?¡± ¡°This is the highest point in the area, the perfect place to ambush them. You can¡¯t fly, right, old man?¡± ¡°Well, I can¡¯t. You¡¯re unexpectedly considerate of your old man, huh? What, are you having a change of heart after becoming the official second leader of our clan?¡± ¡°Nah, no. I only thought that it would be a waste not to witness my old man in the real war, so I give you a chance. I can approach them and massacre them right now if I want to. If they are enemies, that is.¡± ¡°Hahahaha! Excuses!¡± He shouted merrily. ¡°I will show you then. I only have a few techniques, but it should be enough to make you respect me!¡± ¡°Let¡¯s see later, old man. I also have a lot of new techniques that are stronger than Tsuki Giri.¡± I smirked at him. ¡°I am looking forward to that.¡± We were standing still while looking at the sky for a good few minutes. At that time, I saw a little shadow in the distance. ¡°They are here,¡± I muttered as I swung Nenekirimaru to loosen my arm. ¡°Finally.¡± My old man stepped forward as a cloud of black smoke rose from his body. His presence became thinner, blending with the surrounding. He was there, yet he was not there. This was Nurarihyon¡¯s Fear; he was still a bit better than me at controlling his Fear. I also used my Fear to hide my presence, only to the point that no one could feel my energy from the looming shadows that approached. Their numbers increased drastically, almost filling the sky. Maybe they were around three thousand? Or two thousand? Anyway, they were a lot. ¡°Old man, I will talk to their leader first. If they are enemies, you can begin your attack.¡± ¡°Hah?!¡± My old man scoffed; his chin was raised. ¡°Who are you to order me, brat?! I know without you saying anything!¡± ¡°Hahahaha! I thought you already have dementia, old man. Well, good luck.¡± I jumped to the sky while my old man shouted from the ground. ¡°I will put you in your place later, brat!¡± I stopped in the sky, right in front of the devil in the front. He had bright silver hair and wearing a suit. His hair was braided and tied behind. He stopped the troops behind him when he saw me by raising his hand. He stared at me cautiously and asked. ¡°Who are you?¡± A typical question. However, I didn¡¯t need to humor him with my answer. I recognized this silver hair. Only people from Lucifuge had it. So that meant he was the devil that hid behind the scene, the Lucifer fanatic. I raised my sword as a signal, and the next thing that happened was simple. ¡°Aggh!!¡± ¡°Gyaa!!¡± ¡°My arms!!¡± Screams quickly filled the area as some devils fell to their death. Then, my old man¡¯s figure appeared behind the silver haired-man. I created a foothold for him so he could stand, and he had his blade on the man¡¯s neck. ¡°Yo!¡± My old man greeted calmly. ¡°It seems this army is going to war. Why don¡¯t you stop for now and drink with us? It will be fun.¡± RaizarP More than 100 Advanced chapters (For all of my series) Are available on my Patreon!! You can find it Here Most of the money from my Patreon will go to help me write better and Order an Illustration for both of my works. Lastly thank you to all the patrons!! Join my discord!! https://discord.gg/G24qyWdBXs Chapter 210 – A scuffle RaizarP New Series! The title is I Write Sins and Tragedies. I plan to upload the new novel alternatively with Naomi, so I will be able to take my time to write it. The series will be out tonight, maybe if it is already approved again. Also, it is a Gender Bender and Yuri story. The romance part will not be the focus, but there will be Yuri moment in the story. Please look forward to it! Just click the image below to take you to the story! The man with silver hair snickered at my old man¡¯s word. ¡°Drinking? Unfortunately, I have no time to do that, even if the one who invited me is the famous Nurarihyon.¡± He recognized him. That means he recognized me from the start too. There was no way a shred and sly person like him was unaware of our existence; we were thorns in his plan after all. It would be strange if someone working behind the scene didn¡¯t notice us. We made a lot of commotions, and I even killed Rizevim by technically myself. The other leaders were also respecting me, even when I was from the young generation. My strength couldn¡¯t even be compared to the young generation ones. Even I recognized the silver haired-man in front of me. ¡°You are quite rude, aren¡¯t you? My old man specifically asked you for a drink, Euclid Lucifuge.¡± I spoke in a playful tone, but he was not amused by that. After I called his name, he narrowed his eyes slightly. The devils behind him also made a slight move, but my old man noticed that and moved his hand a little, bringing his sword closer to Euclid¡¯s neck. ¡°Oops. Don¡¯t make a sudden movement. What will you do if my hand slips and accidentally cut his neck, huh?¡± ¡°Don¡¯t move.¡± Euclid gave out a clear order. He glanced at my old man, ignoring me, and asked. ¡°So, why are the fabled Nurarihyon and his son coming to the underworld? Isn¡¯t there a war on Earth? The world that you love so much.¡± ¡°Don¡¯t worry about it.¡± I answered him. ¡°After all, I make sure that every dangerous guy in that place is dead before going to the Underworld.¡± ¡°So he said.¡± Added my old man. ¡°Tell me one reason to keep you alive.¡± Euclid raised his hands as if he surrendered. But, his eyes were still clear; there was not even a sign of someone who had given up. Usually, people who were giving up had slight fear in their eyes, but this man¡­ This man''s eyes were still oozing confidence. Was his confidence fueled by his power? Or was it fueled by his intelligence? Whatever it was, he was still not giving up. I glanced at my old man, gesturing for him just to kill Euclid and be done with it. But, for some reason, my old man seemed to be hesitant as well. No, hesitant was not correct; it was like he was frozen like a statue. It was then I noticed something unusual. A shadow wrapped around my old man¡¯s body. The shadow was hidden by the black cloud that came out from my old man¡¯s body and its presence blended well, so I didn¡¯t notice it until it was too late. ¡°Oh shit!¡± I unvoluntarily shouted and dashed toward them. ¡°It is shit, indeed!¡± My old man shouted back. ¡°I didn¡¯t even realize it!¡± My old man''s body was thrown toward me, which made me stop on my track to catch him. ¡°Woah.¡± The shadow that bound my old man¡¯s body disappeared, and I created another foothold beside me for my old man to stand up. ¡°It¡¯s neat, isn¡¯t it?¡± Euclid muttered. The devils behind him snickered and began to let out their demonic energy to intimidate us. ¡°Sacred Gears replica. I got this one from a member of the Hero Faction, which you destroyed. His name is Connla if I am not wrong. His Night Reflection Sacred Gear is useful.¡± Night Reflection, the Sacred Gear that could control shadow as the user wished. That was why I didn¡¯t feel another presence and energy. The shadow itself was part of Euclid¡¯s body, so their presence was similar. No, it was the exact same. My old man should¡¯ve noticed it, though. But I guess he was too careless. ¡°How could you fall to such a trick?¡± I asked my old man. ¡°Yeah, well. Talking about drinking made me imagine what kind of drink Azazel will bring to our mansion later, so I put my guard down a little.¡± ¡°Hah?!¡± I scoffed as I looked at him. ¡°You what?! How can you be so careless, old man!¡± ¡°I can¡¯t help it, okay! Even you imagined what kind of alcohol that raven would bring to our house, right?!¡± ¡°Of course I am!¡± I answered with a loud voice. ¡°Hey¡­¡± Euclid tried to interrupt our little scuffle, but my old man ignored him. He turned to me and pointed at my face. ¡°Then, why are you getting angry because I put my guard down a little, you brat!¡± ¡°You destroyed our easy win chance, you old foggy bastard!¡± We were bickering without even looking at the enemy¡¯s army waiting near us. But, I was not only bickering with my old man. Indeed, I was a bit angry at him for wasting our chance, but it was not like we couldn¡¯t kill Euclid anytime. We were stalling time as well as playing around to make the leader of the enemy, Euclid, lose his cool. ¡°Hey!¡± Euclid shouted, but I ignored it. ¡°Let¡¯s take this to a battle, old man.¡± I swung Nenekirimaru lightly, and it created the sound of cutting wind. Swoosh! My old man licked the blade of his katana like a yakuza as his eyes twitched in annoyance. ¡°Let¡¯s do that, brat. Let me show you that I am still stronger than you.¡± ¡°How dare both of you ignoring me?!¡± Euclid seethed in rage; his voice was lower than usual. Even so, I didn¡¯t care about him. Small fry like him should shut his mouth when I had a problem with my old man. ¡°Shut up!¡± Both of us shouted at him at the same time before glaring at each other and taking a fighting stance. A cloud of black smoke came out of our bodies; we used Kyouka Suigetsu and hid our real presence. His figure was blurry, and so did mine. ¡°Bring it on, brat!¡± He shouted and swung his sword. I blocked it, and the clash created a shockwave that blew some of the devils away. ¡°Hah! Is this it, old man?¡± I mocked him and made his foothold disappear. However, he didn¡¯t fall. Instead, he smirked and put more power in his swing. I was pushed back a little because of a surprise and jumped into the middle of the enemy''s army. They created a distance from me, circling me from 2 meters away. ¡°Do you think I can¡¯t create a foothold in the sky? Hah! That old monkey had taught me about it!¡± Asked my old man. He was really shrewd. I grinned and called Nenekirimaru¡¯s sheath. I put Nenekirimaru back to its sheath and lowered my stance. ¡°I don¡¯t know, old man!¡± I pulled the blade at a fast speed. ¡°Tsuki Giri!¡± A flying slash was sent from my slash, decimating every devil in its way before it reached my old man. However, my old man was already in his stance too. He swung his katana from left to right and muttered. ¡°Tsuki Giri!¡± Two flying slashes clashed, destroying each other. We looked at each other with a grin before kicking the air and meeting in the middle. ¡°It¡¯s enough!¡± Euclid, who we ignored all this time, shouted and attacked us. We pulled our swords away and blocked his attack. We stopped fighting for a second and glared at him. He was not affected by our glare. Instead, he raised his hand and ordered. ¡°Troops! Kill them!¡± Chapter 211 – Scuffle End RaizarP New Series! The title is I Write Sins and Tragedies. I plan to upload the new novel alternatively with Naomi, so I will be able to take my time to write it. The series will be out tonight, maybe if it is already approved again. Also, it is a Gender Bender and Yuri story. The romance part will not be the focus, but there will be Yuri moment in the story. Please look forward to it! Just click the image below to take you to the story! The devils began to attack us from all directions, but we only focused on each other. It was always like this whenever I got into a fight with my old man. Even if the other youkai interrupted us, we never stopped until at least one of us was exhausted. So, even if there were a lot of enemies around us, we only focused on our own duel instead of them. They were not important, and they could be blasted off anytime in our duel. So, we rushed at each other at the same time Euclid gave his order. Of course, we also looked at our surroundings, so we wouldn¡¯t worry about being attacked from behind. We cut the devils that were trying to hinder us. They were too annoying, I should destroy them first. ¡°Haaa!¡± A group of devils attacked me with magic bullets barrage from my left and right side. There were at least 50 bullets shot toward me, and another 50 were shot toward my old man. He was still busy cutting the devils that tried to stop him from reaching me, but he glanced at the magic bullets that were coming at his place, so he should be okay. I should be worried about the magic bullets that were aiming at me, as well as Euclid, who secretly took some part of his troops and was about to flee from us. ¡°Old man! Is this the extent of your strength?!¡± I shouted loudly as I swung my sword, cutting five devils in half, killing them immediately. ¡°Of course not, you brat! Do you think I am this weak, huh?! What about you? Why don¡¯t you use your sacred gear, huh?!¡± My old man shouted back. He swung his sword a few times and killed a dozen of devils that surrounded him. He then lowered his stance and sent a flying slash toward my direction. ¡°Tsuki Giri!¡± The flying slash killed the devils that were flying between us. It was stronger than before, so I killed the devils around me with one big swing of Nenekirimaru before lowering my stance. I didn¡¯t send a flying slash toward it because it would only cancel each other. I knew his intention for shouting before he used Tsuki Giri. Euclid had gathered around 500 devils in a distance and slowly tried to sneak away. This flying slash was indeed directed at me, but Euclid was located right behind me. So, I used Kyouka Suigetsu to make Euclid think that I was a real one. My real body had long since gone after I killed the devil around me, I had circled around the troops from below and stood near Euclid¡¯s location. The flying slash finally hit my real body after a while, and I caught sight of Euclid smiling evilly. ¡°So he can¡¯t dodge that? As expected from Nurarihyon!¡± However, his smile quickly turned into a frown as my fake dissipated into a cloud of black smoke and the flying slash made its way toward him very quickly. ¡°What?!¡± He shouted in surprise, and at the same time, he created a barrier to block the flying slash in front of him. The barrier was surprisingly strong, as it could block the Tsuki Giri. Even though it had been slicing a lot of devils, the force behind Tsuki Giri that my old man sent should¡¯ve been enough to break the barrier of a normal devil. The slash dissipated after a few seconds, and Euclid erased the barrier. ¡°How dare you!¡± He shouted and pointed his hand toward my old man. ¡°Hah?! Why are you getting angry?¡± My old man answered calmly as if he wasn¡¯t afraid of the devils that surrounded him as well as Euclid whose strength was at the level of an Ultimate-Class devil. ¡°This is a war, no? And you are my, our enemy because you are part of the Khaos Brigade.¡± ¡°I am not part of that measly organization!¡± Shouted Euclid. ¡°This is indeed war, but it doesn¡¯t concern a youkai like you! It¡¯s ours, devil¡¯s war! Don¡¯t get involved in this any longer, Nurarihyon!¡± ¡°Gya gya gya, you¡¯re too loud!¡± My old man picked his ear with his finger. He then pulled his finger from his ear and looked at the loot before blowing it away with his breath. ¡°Do you know that we have already signed the peace conference, huh?¡± ¡°Of course, I know! But that doesn¡¯t mean you can join a civil war as it doesn¡¯t concern you!¡± ¡°Oh, it does concern us, though.¡± Answered my old man. ¡°At least, that¡¯s why my son thinks. Right, Riku?¡± ¡°Yeah.¡± I answered as I showed my real self. I was standing behind Euclid with my sword in his neck. The devils that surrounded Euclid were surprised when I showed myself, and so did Euclid. It was his fault that he forgot about me when I used Kyouka Suigetsu. Maybe he thought that I had died from my old man¡¯s attack? Surely he was jesting. He even saw my Fake dissipate into a cloud of black smoke. Or did he put his guard down because of his anger? If that was the case, then my old man¡¯s quip technique had managed to even make the Ultimate-Class devil lose his cool. I should learn more about that. When I appeared, Euclid quickly used the replica sacred gear, Night Reflection, to try to bind me. However, I wouldn¡¯t fall for the same trick. I used Incinerate Anthem and lowered the chance of me being bound by the Night Reflection with Telos Karma. Incinerate Anthem burst out of my body and burned the lower class devils around me in an instant. Even some high-class ones were forced to retreat back because of the holy energy that came out of Incinerate Anthem. Euclid also suffered the burn from the Incinerate Anthem, and he screamed out in pain. ¡°AAAARRRGGHHH!! STOP IT!! What do you want by doing this?! By stopping me?!¡± ¡°I want some peace.¡± I answered. ¡°And in order to do that, I need your cooperation, if you are willing. If you are not willing, then¡­ I guess my sword will have a taste of your blood.¡± I moved Nenekirimaru¡¯s blade closer to his neck, and he quickly screamed. ¡°Aarrggh. A-Alright! Put it off! Put it off, and let¡¯s hear what you said!¡± ¡°Then stop your troops first!¡± ¡°Yes! All of you, stop moving for now! Drop your weapons!¡± The troops followed his order and quietly lowered their weapons. They also pulled their demonic energy away. ¡°There! Are you satisfied?!¡± ¡°Yup.¡± I erased Incinerate Anthem, and Euclid panted and grunted in pain. I grinned without moving my sword away from his neck and said. ¡°Then, I will have you tell me about your ally who attacked the Underworld. Let¡¯s hear it clearly and slowly.¡± Chapter 212 – Nurarihyon vs Devil Troops [1] RaizarP New Series! The title is I Write Sins and Tragedies. I plan to upload the new novel alternatively with Naomi, so I will be able to take my time to write it. The series will be out tonight, maybe if it is already approved again. Also, it is a Gender Bender and Yuri story. The romance part will not be the focus, but there will be Yuri moment in the story. Please look forward to it! Just click the image below to take you to the story! I took Euclid away while leaving my old man with the thousand devil troops. I glanced at him and was about to tell him to destroy them all, but it seemed like I didn¡¯t need to do that as my old man had a big grin on his face. He cracked his fingers as he bit into his sword. His appearance was now like a real yakuza, and he had already used his Kyouka Suigetsu to hide his real self. I landed on the ground while holding Euclid¡¯s neck. He was trying to shake my hand off his neck while shouting. ¡°Let me go! I have told you that I surrendered, right?!¡± ¡°Nope, you are not,¡± I answered lazily as I tightened my grip on his neck. ¡°You only stopped your troops.¡± ¡°Wha?! Isn¡¯t that the same as surrendering! It hurts!¡± He screamed in pain. His neck turned blue from the lack of blood that went to his head, and his breathing became rougher and rougher. One thing that I knew about devils was that they were cunning. Azazel might be smart and sly, but no one could beat the devil¡¯s cunningness in order to reach their goal. They would do whatever it took them to get what they wanted. A simple example would be Issei. He would do anything to create a harem. He was not too motivated and had nothing when he was human, but when he was reincarnated as a devil, he could even take a beating in order to save a girl, which was foolish, in my opinion. ¡®Well, I can¡¯t say something like that. I even put myself into this trouble to make youkai faction become recognized and achieve some peace on Earth.¡¯ I threw Euclid to the ground. He fell on his butt and coughed to gasp for air. ¡°Cough! Cough! Ughh¡­ You are ruthless.¡± He rubbed his neck, which turned red. The red mark was similar to a handprint, which was caused by my grip earlier. ¡°What do you want to know. Just ask and let me go.¡± ¡°That¡¯s really an attractive offer, much more than what I thought.¡± ¡°Hah!¡± Euclid scoffed. ¡°The others are always like you, distrustful toward our race! I know that all of you are afraid of us, of our power!¡± This guy, what was he saying? I didn¡¯t even say that I distrust devils, but he was speaking as if I never trusted a devil. If there was a stand-up competition, I believe this guy would win, considering how funny he was and how he could easily twist his words. Not only that, he even appeared to be angry when he spoke. He needed an Oscar for his performance. ¡°Don¡¯t say anything more. Just answer my question.¡± I created a barrier around us imbued with my Fear to prevent him from running away. He was looking around in panic. My barrier was different from the other, and Fear could only be cut by Fear, so he wouldn¡¯t be able to escape even if he wanted to. ¡°W-what is this barrier?¡± He asked me while stammering. ¡°This?¡± I pointed up at my barrier. ¡°This is a cage to prevent you from escaping.¡± I grinned at him as Incinerate Anthem flared up from my body. I also pointed at his face while saying. ¡°It¡¯s interrogation time.¡± *** Nurarihyon was ecstatic as he stretched his body in the sky. He was surrounded by a troop of devils, which was more than two thousand, according to his estimate. He and his son, Nura Riku, had killed a lot of devils prior to this, so their numbers were not as much as before. Even so, it was still a troop of two thousand devils. For a normal person, even handling three people at once would be difficult. But, Nurarihyon was not a normal person or a normal youkai. He was the first lord of the Nura Clan, which was famous for its strength and was feared by many as well as a unique youkai that got his name known by the leader of a lot of factions. He was also confident that the devils wouldn¡¯t follow their superiors¡¯ orders. There should be another devil who commanded them aside from the leader that was taken by his son. ¡°Now, what are you trying to do?¡± He asked the devils as he gripped the sword that he bit. He had used Kyouka Suigetsu, a technique special for Nurarihyon¡¯s youkai where he shifted the enemy¡¯s awareness, made them think that he was in that place while he actually was not in that place. Nurarihyon was actually standing behind the strongest devil that he felt in the troops. The devil¡¯s energy was around High-Class, and he was surrounded by three devils that looked strong. The devil in front of him muttered something to the one beside him. ¡°Stall for the time. Don¡¯t let him make any move before Lucifuge-sama comes back.¡± ¡°Alright.¡± The subordinate nodded his head and flew toward Nurarihyon¡¯s fake presence. Nurarihyon was watching what happened with a grin as he crossed his arms. Something like this had happened a lot in his prime. Going to war and fooling his enemy was his daily routine when he was young. He was watching a nostalgic scene while chuckling. The devil that left earlier stopped at a distance across from his fake and started talking. ¡°We will do nothing. We have surrendered.¡± ¡°Is that so? So we can just chill and relax, no? Why are you still here then?¡± ¡°We are here to wait for our leader.¡± Answered the devil. Nurarihyon was amused. Not only did the devil dare to lie to him, but his lie was also actually the truth. He knew that they planned to wait for their leader from what the guy said. But he didn¡¯t tell him everything. ¡°Is that so?¡± Nurarihyon¡¯s fake asked as he strap his sword into his obi belt. ¡°Then, I will wait too.¡± He smiled. The devil smiled at the answer, thinking that the second-in-command¡¯s plan worked wonderfully. However, something unexpected happened as Nurarihyon slowly melted into a cloud of black smoke and reappeared behind the second-in-command. ¡°I will wait by thining our your numbers.¡± He swung his sword and decapitated the second-in-command easily. Chapter 213 – Nurarihyon vs. Devil Troops [2] RaizarP New Series! The title is I Write Sins and Tragedies. I plan to upload the new novel alternatively with Naomi, so I will be able to take my time to write it. The series will be out tonight, maybe if it is already approved again. Also, it is a Gender Bender and Yuri story. The romance part will not be the focus, but there will be Yuri moment in the story. Please look forward to it! Just click the image below to take you to the story! In the midst of a chaotic battlefield, a man with strange long hair laughed as he cut the opponents that surrounded him while laughing. His body was covered with a strange black cloud of smoke, and his opponent seemed to not be able to touch him at all. Once, a magic bullet hit his body. His opponent cheered, thinking that he had been done for. However, his body then dissipated and gone, confusing his opponent. The next thing his opponent knew was that he reappeared behind the one who shot the magic bullet and cut him cleanly in half. If one described him, he was agile like an eel and couldn¡¯t be touched like the reflection of the moon. That man¡¯s name was Nurarihyon. ¡°HAHAHAHAHA! The devils this day are too weak! Your ancestor will cry in the realm of death, you know?!¡± He was laughing hard as he cut his opponent. If his son, Riku, saw this spectacle. He would surely hold his head and mutter, ¡®This damned old man.¡¯ But, his son was not there. He was busy interrogating the leader of those devils. So, Nurarihyon could rampage as much as he could. ¡°Stop him! If we can¡¯t stop him, we will die!¡± ¡°Shoot the magic bullets! Don¡¯t stop! Just shot everywhere!¡± ¡°Don¡¯t mind us! Just find his real body!¡± A lot of devils shouted one after another. They didn¡¯t care for each other again, focusing only on hitting Nurarihyon for one to release their stress. A barrage of magic bullets was shot everywhere, hitting even the devils, creating more chaos. They ran around frantically, attacking everywhere with their weapons, even an empty air. They had no way to find Nurarihyon in the middle of the chaos. They were devils who couldn¡¯t use Fear, and they were scared of Nurarihyon¡¯s fame and power. Meanwhile, the one that they were searching for, Nurarihyon, was looking at the chaos from above. He sat in the air while resting his head on his hand. He rested his blade on his lap and was amused by the sight below. ¡°Well, it¡¯s so easy to throw them into chaos. Just a bit of shake-up, and they killed each other in order to find me.¡± He snickered while watching the devils being killed by stray magic bullets. Some devils used fire to burn the air above and even below, but they couldn¡¯t reach Nurarihyon. The stronger devils used rays of demonic energy that they shot at random places and caused a lot of explosions. They fought with each other and forgot their real goal, finding Nurarihyon. ¡°Kukuku, it¡¯s been a long time since I pulled on a prank on an army like this. But, that little brat will underestimate me if I don¡¯t wipe them out before he comes back.¡± He showed himself in the sky, pulling back his technique. He grinned, waved his hand, and shouted. ¡°Hey, what are you doing? I am up here, idiots!¡± The devils below suddenly stopped and looked up. Their numbers had been reduced by more than half, leaving only around 1/4 of the troops alive. When they saw Nurarihyon in the sky waving his hand calmly with a grin on his face, they suddenly flew into mad rages. They looked at him and cursed. ¡°Nurarihyon!!! You son of a bitch!¡± ¡°Come here, you coward!¡± ¡°Fuck you!¡± Some of them raised their middle fingers at him, but Nurarihyon didn¡¯t care about it and instead pulled out his smoke pipe. He put the pipe in his mouth and calmly blew smoke from his mouth. ¡°I heard that a million times already. Why don¡¯t you make some new lines, huh?¡± The enemies turned silent until one of the devils pointed at Nurarihyon. ¡°You fucking youkai with a strange head!¡± At that moment, the battlefield heard a snap sound. They turned their head above and noticed that the pipe that Nurarihyon¡¯s held was held in half. A vein popped up from his temple, and a scary black aura appeared from his back. His hair swayed by the wind, further creating a scary atmosphere around him. ¡°Who said that earlier?¡± His voice turned cold as ice as he gazed down without a smile. The remaining troops were scared. They involuntarily retreated when they saw Nurarihyon. Slowly, he stood up and gripped his sword while throwing away the pipe that had been snapped in half. His blade was covered with the same aura that appeared around his body. ¡°It seems you brat needs to be taught a lesson.¡± He swung his sword, black flying slash flew toward one part of the army, cutting more than a dozen devils in half. He didn¡¯t even prepare anything for his slash, only pure power. ¡°Come here, brats! I will tell you how amazing I am!¡± ¡°K-K-Kill him! Kill him now!¡± One of the devils managed to shake off his fear toward Nurarihyon and shouted, but he was too late, as Nurarihyon had already gone from the sky. Unlike when they could see his fake earlier, he was now entirely gone. They couldn¡¯t even remember why they were here and who killed their allies that now littered the ground like trashes. The brown ground had turned red from their allies¡¯ blood. But, what happened in the next moment answered their question. A single presence suddenly appeared in the middle of the remaining troops. The presence was scary, and they couldn¡¯t move their body. It was Nurarihyon, and he was holding a big red sake cup in his hand, filled to the brim, as his left hand was holding his sword and rested its blade on his shoulder. He took a breath, and it was audible through the battlefield. ¡°Fuu¨C¡° The devils around him gulped, but then they snapped and dashed to him. ¡°Haaa!!¡± ¡°Diee!!¡± ¡°I will take your head!¡± They were shouting a lot of different words, but the next words from Nurarihyon stopped them, literally. ¡°Secret Technique: Meikyo Shisui, ¡®Sakura¡¯¡± He then blew into his cup, and a torrent of blue flame spread from the ripple of sake in his cup, engulfing all enemies around him. Some of the devils who had good intuitions were trying to run, but it was too late. The blue flame chased after them and burned them to ash. The flame was spread according to Nurarihyon¡¯s will, burning his enemies into ash in less than ten seconds. As the ripple died down, the flame also disappeared, leaving ashes falling down from the sky. ¡°That¡¯s why I am the coolest person, brats.¡± Muttered Nurarihyon in the middle of ash rain. Chapter 214 – Interrogation RaizarP New Series! The title is I Write Sins and Tragedies. I plan to upload the new novel alternatively with Naomi, so I will be able to take my time to write it. The series will be out tonight, maybe if it is already approved again. Also, it is a Gender Bender and Yuri story. The romance part will not be the focus, but there will be Yuri moment in the story. Please look forward to it! Just click the image below to take you to the story! There was one thing that I realized after I put Euclid inside my barrier. He was more cunning than I thought. He blurted out any information that I asked without even trying to dodge it. However, he only told me a part of it, not the entirety. For example, when I asked him about his relationship with Rizevim. He answered that he was only his subordinate, nothing more. Even though he actually was his right hand and the one behind the planning of the old satan faction. He couldn¡¯t be more cunning than he was. ¡°¡­ And so, we are going to support the army that attacks the ruin of the facility that researched about the super devil. We have nothing to do more than that.¡± Their goal was the same as Thanatos, finding the remaining data of Super Devil research. If I didn¡¯t know for sure that the data was, in fact, hidden inside Shirone¡¯s hair clip, then I wouldn¡¯t care less about it. However, the research was directly involving both Kuroka and Shirone, the ones that I thought of as my family. So that meant, now or later, Euclid¡¯s group would¡¯ve targeted both Kuroka and Shirone, even when they knew that Kuroka was my lover. ¡°Don¡¯t say anything more. I have heard enough.¡± I erased Incinerate Anthem that surrounded my body and lowered my sword. ¡°Sure. I won¡¯t say anything more.¡± He answered with a relieved smile. He must¡¯ve thought that I would release him because I had done with him. ¡°Yes, you don¡¯t have to say anything.¡± My hand moved slightly, beheading him from behind. All this time, what he had been talking to was my Fake. There was no way I would stand in front of him and interrogate him like an idiot. This was not a world where someone would stay silent when they were interrogated. Even when we talked earlier, Euclid was trying to breach my barrier stealthily by using his replica Sacred Gear and Demonic Energy. He had underestimated me too much, thinking that I wouldn¡¯t realize what he did. My Senjutsu was considered one of the best, and I could even feel an entire city if I concentrated. Detecting a simple energy movement from the one who sat right in front of me was simple; even more, I knew the trick that he used against my old man earlier. ¡°Y¡­ou¡­.¡± He glared at me with bloodshot eyes as his head flew in the sky. ¡°You don¡¯t really have to say anything as you won¡¯t be able to say anything more when you¡¯re dead.¡± I looked at him with cold eyes. If I was na?ve enough to trust him, he would surely go back to make a plan against me. That would be troublesome that all matters that endanger us had already been done, mostly. The last thing that I needed to do was to kill all old satan factions that tried to find the research of the super devil and talk to Great Red to give Ophis some space in the dimensional gap. ¡°Just two more¡­ Two more, and I can leave in peace.¡± Having a fight and getting stronger was fine, but having a normal daily life was also important after all of that. I certainly wanted to have a normal date and such without being burdened by the thought of my enemies attacking me in the middle of it, like Issei. After Euclid¡¯s head fell to the ground, I took precautions and burned it alongside his body with Incinerate Anthem. There was nothing wrong with being careful. His corpse was burning wonderfully, leaving only ash on the ground. I got the information that I needed, and it was time to end all of this. Fortunately, I made the correct decision by going to the Underworld. Maybe if Sirzechs was here, I wouldn¡¯t be needed. But, Sirzechs was now dealing with the enemy on earth, so I should at least act as his replacement. However, because he was on Earth, I could leave like this without any worry. Having a strong ally was reassuring, truly. I erased the barrier around me and jumped away. The energies in the distance were already gone, leaving only one that belonged to my old man. He really wiped them out cleanly, huh? In such a short amount of time too. How did he do it? He couldn¡¯t even use Youjutsu and only a little bit of Senjutsu, as he was not too talented, he said so himself. When I arrived on the previous battlefield, all I saw was the ground being covered in ash. In an instant, I knew what he did; he used Meikyo Shisui Sakura, a technique to create blue flames with Fear. The flame itself was burned from the soul of the dead, a so-called will-o-the-wisp. It was strong to the point I would still use it in case of a large-scale battle even though I had Incinerate Anthem. Meanwhile, my old man was in the sky, looking at his smoke pipe that was somehow snapped in half. His expression was sad as if he had lost something important. Did that pipe was something important to him? He didn¡¯t appear to notice my presence as he sighed and muttered. ¡°Haa¡­ What should I do?¡± His voice was lower than usual. He wasn¡¯t like my usual old man. I approached him and was about to cheer him up, but his next word made me change my mind. ¡°I can¡¯t even smoke when I want to. Damned devils! They don¡¯t know how hard to steal this pipe from the shogun at that time!¡± When I heard that, I flew into rage and kicked him on his side. ¡°Don¡¯t steal the shogun¡¯s smoke pipe, old man!¡± He was surprised and got blown away by my kick. Finally, he noticed my presence and stopped himself mid-air before flying into a rage. ¡°What the fuck did you do, brat!¡± ¡°I should be the one who asks you! Why did you steal the shogun¡¯s smoke pipe?¡± ¡°Hah?! Because I like it, of course!¡± ¡°Tsk! The same as usual, huh?¡± ¡°Hah! You had the gall to say that! Anyway, what do you get?¡± ¡°About that¡­ Their target is actually Shirone. More specifically, Shirone¡¯s hairpin, which contains the research data about the super devil.¡± ¡°Huh?¡± My old man raised his eyebrows before grinning. ¡°That mean, no matter how we rampage in the underworld, we have the reason to do it?¡± ¡°Yeah.¡± I grinned back. ¡°Let¡¯s destroy them. Completely.¡± Chapter 215 – Two Evil Dragons RaizarP New Series! The title is I Write Sins and Tragedies. I plan to upload the new novel alternatively with Naomi, so I will be able to take my time to write it. The series will be out tonight, maybe if it is already approved again. Also, it is a Gender Bender and Yuri story. The romance part will not be the focus, but there will be Yuri moment in the story. Please look forward to it! Just click the image below to take you to the story! We ran to another battlefield that was still ongoing in the distance, where Serafall and Ajuka went to. Without wasting any time, we ran at our full speed. We ran through the plains, mountains, and forest until finally, the battlefield was spread in front of our eyes. In a word, it was chaos. Serafall and Ajuka seemed to be caught in a troublesome situation as I could feel energy belonging to dragons, probably Apophis and another Dragon King, in the sky. The energies clashed against Serafall and Ajuka, seemingly to push each other back. Ajuka should¡¯ve been able to defeat the dragon easily, but I wonder why he didn¡¯t do that? Did he afraid that he would injure his ally? Also, I couldn¡¯t distinguish between allies and enemies. Both were devils, and they wore similar clothes. ¡°Old man, can you distinguish whoever the enemies are?¡± ¡°How can I? They look the same!¡± This would prove to be a problem. Unlike our enemies so far that I could distinguish from their clothes and energies, the enemies this time were similar to the allies. Not only their clothes but their energies too. They were devils, came from the same fucking Underworld, who wear the same fucking clothes. I didn¡¯t know how our allies managed to distinguish the enemies. Maybe they had special clothing or such? I should find out about it before I could help them. Or maybe, I shouldn¡¯t help them and just help Serafall and Ajuka? That was a more viable option. They surely knew who their subordinates were, so I could just fight the dragons instead of rampaging on the battlefield. ¡°Let¡¯s go up to meet Serafall in that case. Are you confident to take on a dragon, old man?¡± My old man narrowed his eyes slightly at the mention of a dragon. Though he was able to destroy an army single-handedly, I knew that he wasn¡¯t confident in his attack power. The army that he destroyed earlier was also composed only of weak devils, nothing too important. They had a low defense, unlike a dragon whose scale was able to deflect blades and weak magic. Not to mention, they could also make a barrier that was stronger than the barrier made by devils. In other words, they were cheats. A bug that should¡¯ve never existed in the first place. Though, some cheat like top-ten in the ranking should be able to handle dragon kings easily, like me. ¡°Who do you think I am, huh? Lend me your blade. I will slay one of that dragons easily. You have another one, right? I heard from Tsura.¡± ¡°Which one do you want? Nenekirimaru?¡± I asked my old man as I raised Nenekirimaru that I held in my hand. ¡°Yeah, that works.¡± He answered as he extended his hand to me. ¡°Give it to me for a while. My blade is too weak to cut the dragon.¡± ¡°Tsk! Fine, take this.¡± I handed over Nenekirimaru to my old man. As Nenekirimaru was a sword that he used in the past, it didn¡¯t reject him, and he took it in delight. ¡°It¡¯s been a long time since I used this baby.¡± He raised Nenekirimaru as his sword disappeared. Next, he patted Nenekirimaru against his shoulder and looked up to the sky, where Serafall and Ajuka were fighting the dragons. ¡°Let¡¯s slay them.¡± We jumped to the sky, and I called out Gram as it appeared in my hand. This sword was the one that could bring out my full power currently, as it could be imbued with Incinerate Anthem. The blade flared, letting out a red glow as I fed it with Senjutsu Energy. Next, a purple flame appeared from my hand before encasing the blade in it. My old man watched the scene with amazement. He let out a whistle as he grinned. ¡°That¡¯s neat.¡± ¡°Right? This sword will kill the dragon easily. More importantly, I still don¡¯t know the dragons that fought with both Satans in the sky. They must¡¯ve been some strong dragons to be able to fight Ajuka for a long time.¡± The sky was filled with clouds, so the dragons were not visible. They fought above the cloud, which was insane. ¡°That¡¯s not important, no? We take one each.¡± ¡°Hah! That¡¯s right.¡± I scoffed and used Touki to enhance my physical body. I created a more solid foothold under my feet and jumped with my full strength. ¡°I will go first, old man!¡± As we¡¯ve used our Fear all this time, the devils who fought in the distance didn¡¯t notice us, and neither did the ones who currently fought above the clouds. I penetrated the cloud and arrived at the above battlefield. When I looked at the situation of the battle, it was honestly more chaotic than the one below. Ice spears and a barrage of magic were shot toward an eastern black dragon with more than a hundred meters in length. That dragon was Apophis, the only reasonable dragon with pride and respect among the Evil Dragons. The one that fought him was unsurprisingly Serafall, although it was clear that she had some trouble fighting him. On the other side, Ajuka was fighting against 15 meters tall western dragon with black scales. Its eyes were silver, seemingly glowing in the sky. It had horns, wings, and thick limbs, a feature that often met in the dragon who walked on land. The dragon exudes an ominous aura, reminding me of Crom Cruach and Tsuchigumo. I recognized the dragon as Grendel, the dragon with the toughest scale. I could now understand why the two Satans had yet to finish their battle. A second later, my old man finally penetrated through the cloud and stopped beside me. He looked around before having a big grin. ¡°Hooh! This is interesting!¡± He exclaimed. ¡°Yeah, it is,¡± I looked at Serafall, who fought Aphopis in the distance. ¡°Can you take care of the eastern one? I will take care of the western one.¡± ¡°Hah! It¡¯s easy.¡± My old man grinned. ¡°Let¡¯s race to make things interesting. Whoever defeats the dragon last will pay the winner¡¯s meal!¡± He hurled to the eastern dragon, Apophis, in the distance, leaving me behind. I didn¡¯t believe what my old man said and jumped toward Grendel while shouting. ¡°Fuck that! You never paid for anything!¡± Chapter 216 – Fear Domain RaizarP New Series! The title is I Write Sins and Tragedies. I plan to upload the new novel alternatively with Naomi, so I will be able to take my time to write it. The series will be out tonight, maybe if it is already approved again. Also, it is a Gender Bender and Yuri story. The romance part will not be the focus, but there will be Yuri moment in the story. Please look forward to it! Just click the image below to take you to the story! This was technically the last battle that I fought before we regained our peace. So, I didn¡¯t need to hold back anymore. I looked at a chance to attack Grendel, which currently breathed fire at Ajuka. He retaliated by bringing up a big barrier. The fire was blocked by the barrier, and Ajuka retaliated more by firing a magic bullet. Although it was a basic spell, his magic bullet''s force and size were way more than the normal devil, considering his immense Demonic Energy. Grendel was hit right on his face, and he grunted because of it. ¡°Hah! It¡¯s not even itchy!¡± He scoffed as his big lips curled up, seemingly laughing at Ajuka. ¡°Is that so? Then how about this?!¡± Three big magic circles appeared in front of Ajuka. I could feel immense demonic energy from the magic circles that suddenly appeared. ¡°Hahaha¡­ Hahahaha. That will do nothing to my mighty body! It¡¯s useless!¡± Grendel roared loudly. He raised his head as flame crackled around his mouth. He was preparing for fire breath again, probably even stronger than before. Due to his body proportions, he was said to be the only dragon that stood on two legs. This could be my chance. My old man had already shown himself and assisted Serafall in fighting Apophis. Ajuka also seemed to notice that, so he stole a glance everywhere, maybe trying to find me. That was why he was preparing such large magic while knowing that he couldn¡¯t defend himself while he was at it. I smirked, thinking that there was nothing wrong with a surprise attack, so I prepared my strongest attack. My Incinerate Anthem flared, engulfing Gram as a whole, and I added Telos Karma¡¯s effect to further enhance the possibility of killing Grendel in a hit. This was what I found when I tried to explore the Balance Breaker. If I did this before going into my Balance Breaker¡¯s state, the attack would be stronger than ever. However, to enter my Balance Breaker¡¯s state, I must not use my Fear. I needed all my Fear to further enhance its power, so I canceled Meikyo Shisui, announcing my presence with a purple flame dancing around my body instead of the usual black cloud of smokes. Ajuka finally noticed me and grinned. Grendel also noticed my presence as well as the sword that I had in hand, Gram, the dragon slayer sword. ¡°Another fly?¡± He asked; his voice was loud and hoarse. ¡°It will be your end if you think that he¡¯s a mere fly. Because¡­ Beelzebub is also a fly, and yet I am a Super Devil.¡± Ajuka answered, boasting about the power of a fly. ¡°You¡¯re true, but¡­ That doesn¡¯t matter to me!¡± The flame in his mouth intensified. He looked like he was ready to breathe it out anytime. But I was also ready. Incinerate Anthem was ready, and I announced loudly. ¡°Balance Breaker, Fear Domain.¡± A black cloud of smoke came out of my body and engulfed the area around us. The sky turned dark, with me being the only beacon with purple flames dancing around my body. This was the result of me combining Telos Karma and Incinerate as well as my Fear. My sub-species Balance Breaker created a world, a domain, so to speak. Instead of being gone in the world of darkness, it made me become the only presence in this domain. So, I felt a bit bad for Ajuka, but even he wouldn¡¯t be able to do anything in this world, as he had no presence. His power, his body, everything was gone. So I walked toward Grendel, who breathed out fire. But it was useless. The fire in his mouth was gone; he couldn¡¯t even use magic in this world; only Fear was allowed. ¡°W-what is this?!¡± Grendel panicked, looking around in confusion. Even Ajuka didn¡¯t know what had happened. He looked at me with a gaze that represented confusion, curiosity, and wariness at the same time. I even erased his Kankara Formula, so it was normal for him to be wary and curious while looking at me. But I wouldn¡¯t bother to explain my power to the other. I would keep this power of mine to be a secret from the others. ¡°It¡¯s useless,¡± I smirked as I walked calmly to Grendel. I focused Incinerate Anthem in Gram, making its blade glow a purple light. ¡°What are you doing?!¡± He questioned as he took a battle stance. He was indeed confident with his body. He wasn¡¯t even afraid after he was trapped inside this domain. Maybe he thought that his scale would still protect him even in this situation? In that case, I could understand where his confidence came from. Even I was confident that I wouldn¡¯t be found if I seriously hid myself with my technique Meikyo Shisui. As he had confidence in his scale, I should show it directly. ¡°Didn¡¯t you hear what I said earlier? It¡¯s my balance breaker.¡± ¡°Balance Breaker? This?¡± Ajuka muttered, looking around the domain with curiosity. ¡°You said this is your Balance Breaker?!¡± Grendel shouted. ¡°You¡­ What are you?!¡± ¡°Hmm, announcing my identity in this situation is a bit awkward, especially because my old man is just outside the domain, but well¡­¡± I gripped Gram tightly as I used Touki to enhance my body and coated Gram on it too. ¡°My name is Nura Riku. The Second Lord of Pandemonium.¡± I swung Gram to the right with all my might, and a purple crescent slash flew out of it, making its way toward Grendel at a fast speed that broke the sound barrier. ¡°It¡¯s nice to meet you. Take this gift of mine.¡± The slash left a flame trail behind, and it reached Grendel in less than two seconds. He had prepared for it and extended his hands to try to block it. ¡°Haa!¡± He shouted, maybe because he wanted to show his strength. But, he didn¡¯t know that Telos Karma was in effect in this domain. ¡°It¡¯s useless,¡± I muttered. Grendel''s body that touched the slash was cut open, and he shouted in pain. ¡°I-It¡¯s impossible!¡± The slash went through his body and beheaded him cleanly, killing him instantly. Ajuka¡¯s eyes widened, and he exclaimed. ¡°That¡¯s amazing.¡± Chapter 217 – Killing Apophis RaizarP New Series! The title is I Write Sins and Tragedies. I plan to upload the new novel alternatively with Naomi, so I will be able to take my time to write it. The series will be out tonight, maybe if it is already approved again. Also, it is a Gender Bender and Yuri story. The romance part will not be the focus, but there will be Yuri moment in the story. Please look forward to it! Just click the image below to take you to the story! After confirming that Grendel had died, I deactivated my Balance Breaker and let out a tired sigh. Ajuka approached me with a smile. ¡°Thank you for your help. I have a lot of strength left, thanks to you.¡± ¡°No problem,¡± I answered him and looked at the other fight in the distance. My old man and Serafall were still fighting against Apophis. They seemed to have a hard time due to Apophis¡¯ sheer figure. But, Apophis¡¯ body was already riddled with wounds as my old man sent a barrage of flying slashes toward its body. Ajuka followed my sight and let out a slight gasp. ¡°As expected. Nurarihyon is also strong. He¡¯s easily injured an Evil Dragon with his simple blade as if he cut through a normal creature.¡± Unknown to Ajuka, though, my old man had used Nenekirimaru, which was effective in cutting any supernatural being. Although the dragon was considered a mythical creature, it was still in a supernatural category. Serafall supported my old man by binding Apophis¡¯ movement by ice. She encased it while Apophis was trying to free itself by breathing fire over the ice. When I saw the battle from the spectator¡¯s view, I just realized how absurd the power of an evil dragon that was even stronger than a Dragon King. A moment later, seemingly tired from being hit repeatedly by my old man, Darkness started to seep out of Apophis¡¯ body. The darkness then became black water that gushed out from its body, melting Serafall¡¯s ice in the process. Serafall looked panicked. She desperately turned the black water into ice, trying to stop it from falling to the ground, where two forces clashed. ¡°That is bad,¡± Ajuka muttered. ¡°We shouldn¡¯t touch that water, or else¡­¡± His words trailed, and I looked at him curiously. ¡°What? Or else, what?¡± I had not remembered Apophis¡¯ ability too much. I just knew that Apophis was one of the top three evil dragons that existed. It was also a dragon that controlled darkness, or so I remembered. ¡°The water will dissolve anything it came into contact with. It¡¯s powerful enough to even breach the defense of God-class being.¡± Ajuka muttered in horror. ¡°That¡¯s rather dangerous,¡± I said as I looked at Apophis. The water still dripped from his body and fell to the ground slowly. Serafall kept freezing the water to keep it from falling to the sky while my old man seemed to be desperate to kill Apophis. While it was true that the wound inflicted by Nenekirimaru couldn¡¯t be healed, Apophis¡¯ body was still big. If Apophis was in human form, maybe my old man could behead it easily. Maybe that was the reason why Apophis kept attacking in his dragon form. ¡°I should help them a little.¡± Although I was a bit tired from using Balance Breaker earlier, I could still use Telos Karma to the max power. I extended my right hand in Apophis¡¯ direction and said. ¡°The probability the water will harm someone will be zero.¡± Ajuka understood what I did and activated his Kankara Formula. He began to change the black water into a regular one. Serafall looked in our direction, smiled, and shouted. ¡°Thanks!¡± A big magic circle began to form behind her back, floating in the sky. The magic circle was colored blue, and a big ice spike made an appearance from it. ¡°Roooaarrr!!¡± Apophis roared and tried to free himself from the ice once again, but it was useless. My old man understood that Serafall wanted to end the battle, so he went to Apophis¡¯ head and landed on it. As he landed, he poked its head with Nenekirimaru while mocking it. ¡°Hey hey, you are a dragon, right? But why are you so weak? So weak!¡± He then raised Nenekirimaru and stabbed Apophis right between its eyes. ¡°Youu!! Nurarihyon!!¡± Apophis, who only roared until now, shouted as it shook its body uncontrollably. The shaking destroyed the ice that encased it, and its scale began to fall one after another. ¡°Hahahaha, so you can talk?! You even sacrifice your scales to get free from the ice!¡± ¡°Don¡¯t you dare run!¡± From his body, darkness started to expand quickly and formed a sphere. ¡°Riku! Let¡¯s enter the battle too! We can¡¯t let him create his barrier!¡± Ajuka shouted at me and sent a barrage of magic toward Apophis in an attempt to stop it from creating a barrier. ¡°On it.¡± I used Touki and coated Gram in Senjutsu before launching myself toward Apophis. I also used Telos Karma to add more probability of Gram killing Apophis and destroyed the barrier in case I was late. In the distance, my old man cut the barrier multiple times before he stopped and looked at Serafall. ¡°Serafall!¡± He shouted and was answered shortly. ¡°Here we go! Ice spike!¡± The massive ice spike was shot at unpreventable speed toward Apophis, who hid behind the dark barrier. The barrier had cracked all over due to my old man¡¯s attack, but it was not enough to break it. That was where I came from. I had arrived in front of the barrier and thrust Gram into it. Swoosh! A glass-breaking sound came from the barrier as soon as Gram made contact with it. Apophis was surprised when I easily destroyed its barrier and turned its head to me. That was a mistake. The ice spike that Serafall sent earlier hit Apophis¡¯ head from the side, drilling into its skull as its blood poured out and froze at the same time. ¡°[email protected]#[email protected]$¡± Apophis made a shrill scream. It was not understandable, and it died almost instantly to Serafall¡¯s attack. ¡°Yay!¡± Serafall exclaimed happily as she threw her hands to the sky. ¡°Hah! So an evil¡¯s dragon strength is just like this?¡± My old man said as he looked at Apophis¡¯ corpse that fell slowly to the ground. ¡°It¡¯s a nice experience.¡± I approached my old man and stood beside him. ¡°Or so you said, but I killed my enemy first. So treat me to a meal later, old man.¡± When I mentioned it, my old man sighed and crossed his arms. ¡°It can¡¯t be helped. How about a bowl of Ramen later?¡± He handed Nenekirimaru back to me. I let go of Gram, and it disappeared before taking Nenekirimaru back and answering. ¡°Sure. Let¡¯s end the battle quick then.¡± Chapter 218 – Cleaning up [1] RaizarP New Series! The title is I Write Sins and Tragedies. I plan to upload the new novel alternatively with Naomi, so I will be able to take my time to write it. The series will be out tonight, maybe if it is already approved again. Also, it is a Gender Bender and Yuri story. The romance part will not be the focus, but there will be Yuri moment in the story. Please look forward to it! Just click the image below to take you to the story! Ajuka and Serafall approached us with a smile. Serafall radiated a happy aura that she couldn¡¯t hide and exclaimed. ¡°Thank you, Ri-kun! I was safe because of you and your father! Truly, thank you!¡± ¡°It¡¯s no problem,¡± I answered with a smile. ¡°We have some feud with them too, after all.¡± ¡°Huh?¡± Serafall asked, confused. She was about to open her mouth again, but my old mand chimed in. ¡°Hahahaha. We just have a slight problem on our way here. There is just an army of ants that I destroyed!¡± ¡°Army?! So they have reinforcement?!¡± Ajuka exclaimed, surprised by what my old man said. ¡°Yup!¡± My old man answered without bothering to hide the fact. Not that there was anything to hide. We literally gave them a favor of destroying the enemy reinforcement¡¯s army, so they should thank us. Specifically, Ajuka didn¡¯t even say thanks for the second time. This guy must¡¯ve thought that saying thanks to me was enough and didn¡¯t bother to say his gratitude to my old man. Not like I needed his gratitude. Our goal was aligned. Their goal was to win and survive this war. And my goal was to exterminate those who knew about Shirone¡¯s hairpin. Of course, Hades was still in the death realm, but he should be fine, I guess. He wouldn¡¯t do anything to us after this; I was confident in that. Maybe wouldn¡¯t do anything was the wrong sentence. He couldn¡¯t do anything that would be correct. He surely got a report from Thanatos about my strength and probably from the Grim Reapers that slipped into the Underworld and spectated the fight too. ¡°More importantly, can you tell us the¡­ difference between the two armies that fight below us?¡± I asked, looking at Ajuka¡¯s eyes. ¡°Hmm¡­ if they attack you, then they are the enemies, no?¡± Serafall answered as she tilted her head. I gawked at her. She was saying something nonsensical. If anyone who attacked me were enemies, then everyone in the field except for them was my enemy. ¡°Hey! Why are you looking at me like that!¡± She shouted as she pointed at me. I mean, all devils would attack any suspicious youkai who suddenly appeared in the middle of the battlefield. They would ask the others about who suddenly appeared and started attacking me to make sure I was not their enemy. The ones on the battlefield were on edge. Each side would suspect me of being on their enemy¡¯s side, as that was the safest but the worst decision. Well, worst decision because the one who planned to interfere, in this case, was me. ¡°Of course, he is. You were saying something nonsensical after all.¡± Ajuka shook his head. ¡°If you said they could attack anyone who attacks them, then everyone below will be their enemies, as they would certainly attack them due to them being¡­ different races from us.¡± He further explained, and Serafall¡¯s eyes widened in understanding. ¡°I¡­ my bad. I should¡¯ve thought about that. I forgot about it due to¡­ the situation. I am sorry.¡± Well, it was understanding. Serafall should¡¯ve been the busiest devil due to her position as a diplomat. All matters regarding the peace conference must be left to her. If she were tired, I wouldn¡¯t blame her for making a mistake. Exhaustion was hard. After coming to this world, exhaustion seemed to be nonexistent, but in my previous world, I had always been exhausted to make money. ¡°Well, so how can I differentiate between the enemy and the ally? Surely you won¡¯t like it if I rampaged without caring down there, no?¡± I chuckled as I strapped Nenekirimaru to my waist. ¡°About that¡­¡± Ajuka seemed to hesitate before he looked down on the battlefield. The could had been long gone after the battle between the Evil Dragon and us, and we could now look at the battlefield without being hindered. ¡° There is only a small difference between our allies and enemies. Our allies have better gear compared to the enemy.¡± ¡°I see¡­¡± I nodded my head before pointing at Ajuka. ¡°And how I can know that! Are you fucking kidding me? Tell me now that you have some identification for your army!¡± This guy must be fucking kidding me right now. How could I know whichever the better gear was? Youkai never used armor or such, and I only held wooden swords, Nenekirimaru, and Gram in my life! ¡°That¡¯s why I hesitated a bit to tell you. Unfortunately, we know at least which gear our allies use. I can tell you a little about it.¡± Said Ajuka. ¡°How? Are they using something like metal armor, and the enemy use no armor at all? Because I only see them wearing clothes, not a freaking armor!¡± Though I said that, I actually had already found the difference between the enemy''s army and the allies. My old man even chuckled quietly behind me while holding his mouth. Trolling Satan was actually a bit fun, especially for a serious guy like Ajuka. I understood Nurarihyon¡¯s feeling of trolling his every enemy in that series now. I should¡¯ve done this more often from the start. Ajuka seemed to notice my old man laughing from behind and narrowed his eyes at me. As he looked at me like that, I shrugged my shoulders and chuckled. ¡°I can¡¯t help it, you know? After all, the two of you are too¡­ stiff for a war.¡± War should be fought with courage. I remembered such a quote from someone great, but I didn¡¯t remember his name. Maybe it was me? But, in this world, war shouldn¡¯t be fought with courage alone. You needed strength and moderate humor to keep your army¡¯s morale high. And individual strength could change the direction of the war immediately. This case was like that. The strongest person below us were only High-class devils at most. So that meant¡­ ¡°This battle will be easy. Don¡¯t be too stiff.¡± I exclaimed as I smiled. Chapter 219 – Cleaning Up [2] RaizarP New Series! The title is I Write Sins and Tragedies. I plan to upload the new novel alternatively with Naomi, so I will be able to take my time to write it. The series will be out tonight, maybe if it is already approved again. Also, it is a Gender Bender and Yuri story. The romance part will not be the focus, but there will be Yuri moment in the story. Please look forward to it! Just click the image below to take you to the story! After I said that, I erased my foothold and fell from the sky, plunging straight toward the middle of the battlefield on the ground. Ajuka and Serafall had surprised expressions when they saw me fall from the sky. Truly a good expression. I loved to see more of that expressions, but I had a job to do. My old man had enough of fighting against an army by himself and defeating Apophis, and now it was my turn to show my power against many. After a bit of rest, I recovered most of my energy. I wouldn¡¯t use my Balance Breaker again. To be exact, I didn¡¯t need to use it again. I would only use Fear and my Youkai ability, such as Youjutsu and maybe Meikyo Shisui ¡®Sakura.¡¯ My old man used that technique to deal with the reinforcement army, so I should at least show my version, which was obviously stronger due to me having the Holy Flame, Incinerate Anthem. The devils below were looking up at me, who fell at a fast speed while brandishing my sword. The allies, as well as enemies, were confused when they saw me. As I had expected earlier, they didn¡¯t know whether I was an ally or enemy. My energy was that of youkai. The devils from the Old Satan Faction should remember the incident concerning Kuroka, while the ones under the new Satans certainly remembered the Nekomata Incident. They must have had the same thought after feeling the energy that I flared around my body. However, soon the enemies and allies realized where I stood for because Ajuka and Serafall followed me from behind. Their speed was faster because they used their wings to increase it. ¡°Hey! What are you trying to do?!¡± Serafall shouted from behind; her voice carried a bit of worry. ¡°What am I doing?¡± I turned my body around and asked her. My lips curled into a big, wide grin from ear to ear, then I said. ¡°I am about to conduct a massacre.¡± ¡°A massacre?!¡± I ignored Serafal and coated my blade with my Fear. Next, I turned around again and sent a flying slash toward the group of enemies in the distance. The flying slash flew at an unprecedented speed, instantly killing the group of enemies. At that time, they finally realized that I was the reinforcement for Satan¡¯s army. ¡°Stop him! He¡¯s dangerous! Kill him now!¡± The enemy¡¯s commander-like devil shouted and pointed at me. ¡°Attack him!¡± ¡°Put him down!!¡± They started to raise their voice and sent a barrage of Magic Bullets toward me. My old man was watching from above, sitting while laughing at me. ¡®Damn it, let me show him who is the youkai¡¯s leader right now.¡¯ I frowned a little and created a barrier with Youjutsu, blocking all the magic bullets aimed at me. The magic bullets met my barrier made from Youjutsu and disappeared. They puffed like a balloon popped by a needle. ¡°Is that it?¡± I taunted as I smirked. ¡°None of you ever think of approaching me? Then let me approach you.¡± I fell faster than before by kicking the condensed air behind me. My kick created a small shockwave that pushed Serafall and Ajuka, who flew right behind me. ¡°Wha?!¡± ¡°Sh-!¡± Serafall and Ajuka let out surprised voices. I didn¡¯t even use Touki and just plunged right into the middle of the enemy¡¯s rank. My landing caused a small earthquake, making some devils stumble. ¡°Hahahaha. Let¡¯s do this, guys!¡± I shouted as I sent a 360-degree flying slash, killing the enemies around me in one sweep. The allied army¡¯s morale was a bit low before, but after seeing my feat, they now raised their voices. ¡°Yeah!! Destroy them!¡± ¡°Destroy those ungrateful bastards!¡± ¡°Glory to new Satans!¡± ¡°Glory to our army!¡± ¡°Long live the savior!¡± ¡°Kya! Go for it, handsome!¡± Some shouts mixed with praise for me. They did know how to please some people; now, I was fired up, literally. Purple flames seeped out from my body into my left hand, creating a purple bowl filled with liquid-like flame. I could move Incinerate Anthem as I pleased, so creating something like a cup-shaped flame was easy. Usually, Meikyo Shisui ¡®Sakura¡¯ needed the best sake of youkai, Spirit Sake, to use. The reason for that was Spirit Sake could burn nicely when combined with Fear. It could work like that because youkai used their energy when they made the Spirit Sake. Enough of that, Incinerate Anthem worked as the replacement. The devils around me felt something different from my fire, and Ajuka, who knew what kind of flame was on my hand, shouted at his army. ¡°Run away! Get away from that guy!¡± ¡°Oh! I forgot to say that. Run guys! You will be burned nice and crisp if you are close to me!¡± The allied army started to run, as well as the enemies, of course. They heard our shout, but that could be easily taken care of. Their running directions were different, so I only needed to do one thing. That was creating a barrier to block the enemy who ran away. They were now trapped inside the barrier while the allied army managed to run away from me. ¡®I think it¡¯s the time.¡¯ ¡°Ougi: Meikyo Shisui, Sakura.¡± I blew a short breath to the flame cup, and the fire howled, eating everyone in the area, excluding me. Their devils¡¯ bodies instantly turned to ash as purple Holy Flame touched them, leaving nothing behind, not even ash. Finally, the flames disappeared, and I stood on the ground while looking at the Serafall and Ajuka, who were looking back at me in disbelief. ¡°See? A massacre.¡± Chapter 220 – Finally, Peace RaizarP New Series! The title is I Write Sins and Tragedies. I plan to upload the new novel alternatively with Naomi, so I will be able to take my time to write it. The series will be out tonight, maybe if it is already approved again. Also, it is a Gender Bender and Yuri story. The romance part will not be the focus, but there will be Yuri moment in the story. Please look forward to it! Just click the image below to take you to the story! After I killed all the enemies, the allied army cheered loudly. ¡°We won!!¡± ¡°Long live Satans!¡± ¡°Long live savior!¡± ¡°Finally! They are gone!¡± The devils hugged each other, and some of them were throwing magic bullets into the sky, creating fireworks. Serafall and Ajuka approached me; their faces had a sign of gratitude and amazement. ¡°You really do kill them instantly,¡± Serafall muttered, looking around the area. ¡°Did you use¡­ Holy flames?¡± ¡°Yeah, I used Incinerate Anthem,¡± I answered her with a nod. The Incinerate Anthem was a holy flame, as they knew. And devils were weak against holy things, no matter what they were, and Holy Flames were the top holy items. The holy energy of Incinerate Anthem was only lower than the True Longinus. With just a touch of the Incinerate Anthem, the devil¡¯s body would combust into nothingness, and not even their ash would remain. ¡°Truly ridiculous,¡± Ajuka stated, looking around the area around us, which was still filled with the purple flame burning here and there because I had yet to erase it. ¡°Even I wouldn¡¯t be able to destroy such a big army in a short time.¡± ¡°Your magic is nothing, eh?¡± My old man suddenly appeared beside me and chuckled at Ajuka¡¯s word, ¡°Even our technique seems to be better than your magic. Only Sirzechs has something, I admit. His destruction can do better than our secret technique.¡± ¡°His destruction is strong. But, in terms of Magic and knowledge, I am confident that I can do a bit better than him.¡± Ajuka said, not wanting to lose against Sirzechs. He had pride as someone on the top, which showed in his confident words. He was what someone expected from a Satan who had been offered Lucifer title before Sirzechs. However, he refused the title due to Sirzechs being better at being a charismatic leader than him. That was why he settled with Beelzebub title rather than Lucifer, even though he could be one because he was also a Super Devil, the same as Sirzechs. Anyway, I didn¡¯t believe him if he said he couldn¡¯t destroy an army of small fries instantly like that. With his Kankara Formula, he could redirect all attacks and destroy his enemies easily. But, his Formula would be useless against my Telos Karma and Fear because he surely didn¡¯t understand how the Fear worked. Not only that, we Youkai were adept at Fear. If he, by chance, redirected the Fear back toward us, we could easily take care of it as Fear was part of us, and there was an easy way to counter it using stronger Fear. ¡°Let¡¯s just leave it at that. Finally, the war and clean-up in the Underworld are over. The rest is Earth. Let me contact someone in that place.¡± I said as I let go of Nenekirimaru. It disappeared into a mote of light, and I crossed my hands inside my Kimono. While I was at it, I contacted Kuroka, who fought on Earth using Telepathy. [Kuroka, how is the situation there?] [Ah! Riku-sama nya! We are almost done here. Hagoromo Gitsune and Tsuchigumo just left to chase after the one who ran away from the battle! Also, Odin and the other had defeated Loki and sealed him nya!] [Is that so? Then everything is fine? Including Shirone?] [Shirone? Yup! She¡¯s fine, but why did you ask about her, Riku-sama?] [Apparently, the enemy¡¯s target this time is the hairclip in her hair. Anyway, tell me if anything happens.] [Nya?! I am glad that they didn¡¯t even come close to Shirone then!] [True. Even so, please do watch out and stay beside Shirone. I am counting on you.] [Sure nya!] I ended the Telepathy after hearing Kuroka¡¯s energetic answer. Serafall and Ajuka went to their subordinates to congratulate them on the victory and deal with the aftermath, such as the salary of those who joined the war. Although battles were common in the Underworld, something like a War that forced the soldiers to join was uncommon. That was why, to keep their loyalty, the leader needed to reward them with a salary or some kind of reward. It was also one of the reasons why youkai always had parties each time they returned to battle. I also didn¡¯t mind having a party if it could make my subordinates loyal to me and maintain their high morale. But, I guess something like a salary was a small thing for devils. They were fucking rich and could build any mansion for reward anytime they wanted to, after all. My old man stood beside me and looked at Ajuka and Serafall, who dealt with their subordinates, with his arms crossed inside his Kimono, much similar to me. ¡°So, we are going home now?¡± He asked. ¡°I am expecting some big battle or something. That¡¯s why I went around the world with that monkey. However, this is honestly a bit disappointing.¡± ¡°Just be glad that we have no big battle, old man,¡± I answered while smirking. A part of me was also expecting a big battle, similar to my fight with Rizevim. But, there was no big battle, as I had dealt with the enemy right before they could launch their full plan. Due to me destroying all their plans and killing their supreme leader, Rizevim, the Khaos Brigade was left with no other plan other than to get the Super Devil research from Shirone¡¯s hairclip. They made a mistake attacking us directly at the Peace Conference. Their plan was good for splitting their force. I commented on them for trying. ¡°It¡¯s time for peace, old man.¡± I looked at the sky, remembering what I had done in the last few days. ¡°That¡¯s true. Well, I could settle down for a while, I guess.¡± He smiled slightly. I noticed a hint of melancholy in his smile. I guess he too wanted peace, huh? Well, anyway. Almost everything is over. I guess I deserve some rest too. Chapter 221 – The Last Party! RaizarP New Series! The title is I Write Sins and Tragedies. I plan to upload the new novel alternatively with Naomi, so I will be able to take my time to write it. The series will be out tonight, maybe if it is already approved again. Also, it is a Gender Bender and Yuri story. The romance part will not be the focus, but there will be Yuri moment in the story. Please look forward to it! Just click the image below to take you to the story! This is the end of the main story. Thank you for supporting me this far. The ending is a bit rushed because of my situation at that time, but I am quite satisfied with this. I will continue writing new series that I just started. Your continuation support is appreciated! Thank you! *** After the matter in Underworld was over, I teleported back to Earth with my old man. We teleported back to the colosseum, where Azazel, Michael, and Sirzechs were dealing with the aftermath of the battle on Earth. The situation was rather chaotic. The devils and Fallen Angels were repairing the damage that had been done to the surrounding area while the Angels tried their best to heal the injured youkai, exorcists, and themselves. Because they couldn¡¯t heal devils and still had some bad relationships with fallen angels, they left them alone to cope among themselves. Fortunately for the devils, though, Sun Wukong healed them with his Senjutsu. All their wounds were gone instantly, and they were ready to fix the colosseum and the area around us. Not to mention, because the scale of the battle had gone too far from the main battlefield, there were some parts of Rome that got destroyed. The devils and Fallen Angels also needed to repair those. The gods had returned to their domain, including Amaterasu and Susano¡¯o. From a distance, Tsura, Kuroka, and Shirone approached me with a smile on their faces. ¡°Riku-sama nya!¡± Kuroka shouted while waving her hand. I looked at them and noticed that Setsura was also with them, walking behind them. When she met my gaze, she bowed her head lowly as she stopped on her track. ¡°Well, well, I will leave you with them, brat. I will go back to our mansion first.¡± My old man patted my shoulder and walked away with a smirk. ¡°Yeah, you do that,¡± I answered, then walked toward the girls. ¡°Yo!¡± I raised my right hand and greeted them as they arrived in front of me. ¡°Riku-sama. It¡¯s nice seeing you well. Is the matter in the underworld already over?¡± Tsura asked with a hint of worry in her voice. ¡°It¡¯s over, Tsura. Thanks for worrying about me.¡± I answered as I reached out to her head, patting her. She seemed to be enjoying it as she closed her head and leaned closer to me. ¡°Ah! It¡¯s unfair nya! Me too!¡± Kuroka took my free hand and put it on her head, snuggled against it. I smiled at her and patted her too. It had been a long time since I did something like this. Every day was filled with fight, training, and strategizing. To be honest, it was a hectic day because I wanted to end the Khaos Brigade as soon as possible, to create a future where I could stay at home most of the time. Being sent to Kuoh Academy was the button that created this situation, making me involved with the three factions. Well, it wouldn¡¯t turn out like this if I didn¡¯t poke my head into it, but¡­ there was no way I could miss something interesting, no? Anyway, all of that was over, and now I could enjoy peace with Kuroka and Tsura. ¡°Umm, Riku-senpai?¡± Shirone called out. I looked at her and asked. ¡°Yeah?¡± ¡°I heard from Kuroka nee-sama that the enemy this time targeted my hair clip, and¡­ you know about that. That¡¯s why you go to the underworld to deal with them, right?¡± I glanced at Kuroka. She was still enjoying my patting, so I stopped. ¡°Huh, nya?!¡± She looked up at me, ¡°Why did you stop, nya?¡± ¡°You told Shirone that the enemy was targeting her hair clip?¡± ¡°Yes, nya! I thought that I should tell her so she can be careful.¡± Well, she was not wrong. I just never expected Kuroka to tell Shirone about that. The usual Shirone, or rather, Shirone from before when she was still in Rias¡¯ peerage, would surely blame herself and decided to surrender to keep the casualty to a minimum. But I was glad that she didn¡¯t do that this time. ¡°I see,¡± I muttered. ¡°Don¡¯t worry about that, Shirone. It¡¯s my job to protect our family.¡± I flashed a grin at her. ¡°Un. Thank you.¡± ¡°You¡¯re welcome.¡± At that time, I pulled my hand from Tsura¡¯s head and crossed my arms. ¡°Well then, where is Tsuchigumo and the other?¡± I asked her. Tsura, being the professional attendant she had, quickly recovered and answered. ¡°They are outside the colosseum, doing the usual. It seems they found a good store and decided to take a few liquors while they were at it.¡± ¡°Hahahaha! Good! Let¡¯s drink to our heart content! The war is over!¡± I laughed loudly and walked outside the colosseum. While I was walking outside, the three leaders from the three factions noticed me and gave me a small nod of gratitude. I dismissed it with a wave of my hand and gestured for them to have a drink with us. However, they unexpectedly refused. Even Azazel refused because they still had to take care of the aftermath. It couldn¡¯t be helped. We youkai had nothing to take care of because this was not our territory, and we didn¡¯t give a fuck about it. Also, the three factions were more proficient in dealing with the aftermath with their Magic, so I guess we were not needed after all. When I arrived outside the colosseum, I was greeted by a loud cheer from the youkai. ¡°Riku-sama is here!!¡± ¡°He¡¯s here guys!¡± ¡°Yooo!! Riku-sama! Let¡¯s drink it all out!¡± ¡°Hahahahaha! Long live Nura Clan! We won the war!¡± ¡°Yo, you have been gone for too long.¡± Tsuchigumo raised a big jar filled with liquor as he looked at me. ¡°Yeah, I just destroyed two big armies with my old man and killed two Evil Dragons. Give me some time, will you?¡± ¡°Fufufu, you said that. But we also destroyed a lot.¡± Hagoromo Gitsune chuckled. She was sitting beside Kyokotsu on top of Gasadokuro¡¯s head. ¡°Well, I don¡¯t know about that.¡± I sat beside Tsuchigumo and Gasadokuro while Tsura and Kuroka sat on my side. Shirone sat beside Kuroka and looked around before taking a cup of Sake from the youkai from our clan. She sipped it little by little, seemingly to have hesitated a bit. However, I thought that her gesture looked cute. She had gotten used to the life of a youkai that she joined us to drink even though she wasn¡¯t too used to it. ¡°Riku-sama! Just start the party, and let¡¯s drink to our heart''s content!¡± Aotabo shouted, and Kurotabo, who sat beside him, nodded his head. ¡°Exactly.¡± He muttered. ¡°It can¡¯t be helped.¡± I grinned. ¡°Here, Riku-sama.¡± Tsura handed me a cup of sake, which I took while nodding my head. I raised the cup in my hand and shouted. ¡°For our victory! Cheers!¡± ¡°Cheers!¡± The youkai shouted after me, and we got the party going. This would be our last party. The last party to celebrate our victory. The next party would be to celebrate our peace and happiness.